This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

https://books.google.com
 M AA IViULLt K' b

H 4N D B 0 O K S

FOB

TUp QTT THY OF QAN^T<P7T

A SANSKRIT GRAMMAR

FOR BEGINNERS,
 HANDBOOKS

FOR

THE STUDY OF SANSKRIT.

EDITED BY

MAX MULLER, M.A.

TAYLORIAN PROFESSOR OP MODERN EUROPEAN LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE,
AND SUH-LIBRARIAN AT THE BODLEIAN LIBRART.
 HANDBOOKS FOR THE STUDY OF SANSKRIT.
Edited bt Max MOller, M.A.

THE FIRST BOOK OF THE HITOPADESA: containing the Sanskrit Text,

with Interlinear Transliteration, Grammatical Analysis, and English Translation.
[Price 7*. Gd.
THE SANSKRIT TEXT OF THE FIRST BOOK. Price 3*. 6d.

THE SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH BOOKS OF THE HITOPADESA :

containing the Sanskrit Text, with Interlinear Translation. Price 7s. Crf.
THE SANSKRIT TEXT OF THE SECOND, THIRD, AND FOURTH BOOKS,
[Price 3*. 6<f.
m
SANSKRIT-ENGLISH DICTIONARY, in Devanagarl and Roman Letters through
out. By Professor Th. Bknfby. Price 21. 12/. 6d.
" This Dictionary It designed, as it may be very serviceable; and Professor
purports, to assist the reading of but a BENFEY'S is amply full enough for nine
very limited selection from the enormous teen In every twenty persons that will
amplitude of Sanskrit literature. Nor are have occasion to use It. To be able to
the needs which it aims to meet those say, as we are, that It exhibits nearly all
which will be felt by an explorer in the the bases of the language will convey
less attractive departments of that litera an impression of its undeniable value.
ture. It will be of little help towards It will be most eagerly welcomed by all
unravelling the tangles of Brahmanlcal who are beginning Sanskrit, particularly
philosophy, rhetoric, grammar, mathe by candidates for the Indian Civil Service ;
matics, or medicine ; and, as to law, It is and there are, doubtless, hundreds of
of avail only as regards some of the rudi liberally educated men besides who will
ments. One, too, who would be aided to be tempted, by its ever-recurring refer
do more than merely taste the Vedas must ences, for linguistic comparison, to Greek,
go elsewhere, to be saved from disap Latin, Gothic, Old Norse, and Anglo-
pointment. We do not Bay this in dis Saxon, to have it within reach, as a con
paragement. A Sanskrit Dictionary, even venient manual of Aryan philology."—
if it does not approach exhauativeness, Pall Mall Gazette.
TV
A SANSKRIT GRAMMAR FOR BEGINNERS.
 A

SANSKRIT GRAMMAR

FOR BEGINNERS,

IN

DEVANAGARt AND ROMAN LETTERS THROUGHOUT,

BY

MAX MULLER.

LONDON:

LONGMANS, GREEN, AND CO.

1866.

--
T. COMBE, M.A., E. PICKARD HALL, AND H. LATHAM, M.A.
PRINTERS TO THE UNIVERSITY
 PREFACE.

J. HE present grammar, which is chiefly intended for beginners, is

believed to contain all the information that a student of Sanskrit
is likely to want during the first two or three years of his reading.
Rules referring to the language of the Vedas have been entirely
excluded, for it is not desirable that the difficulties of that ancient
dialect should be approached by any one who has not fully mastered
the grammar of the ordinary Sanskrit such as it was fixed by Panini
and his successors. All allusions to cognate forms in Greek, Latin,
or Gothic, have likewise been suppressed, because, however inter
esting and useful to the advanced student, they are apt to deprive
the beginner of that clear and firm grasp of the grammatical system
peculiar to the language of ancient India, which alone can form a
solid foundation for the study both of Sanskrit and of Comparative
Philology.
The two principal objects which I have kept in view while com
posing this grammar, have been clearness and correctness. With
regard to clearness, my chief model has been the grammar of Bopp ;
with regard to correctness, the grammar of Colebrooke. If I may
hope, without presumption, to have simplified a few of the intricacies
of Sanskrit grammar which were but partially cleared up by Bopp,
Benfey, Flecchia, and others, I can hardly flatter myself to have
reached, with regard to correctness, the high standard of Colebrooke's
great, though unfinished work. I can only say in self-defence, that it
is far more difficult to be correct on every minute point, if one endea
vours to re-arrange, as I have done, the materials collected by Panini,
and to adapt them to the grammatical system current in Europe,
than if one follows so closely as Colebrooke, the system of native
a 3
 vi PREFACE.

grammarians, and adopts nearly the whole of their technical termi

nology. The grammatical system elaborated by native grammarians
is, in itself, most perfect ; and those who have tested Panini's work,
will readily admit that there is no grammar in any language that
could vie with the wonderful mechanism of . his eight books of
grammatical rules. But unrivalled as that system is, it is not
suited to the wants of English students, least of all to the wants
of beginners. While availing myself therefore of the materials
collected in the grammar of Panini and in later works, such as the
Prakriya-Kaumudi, the Siddhanta-Kaumudi, the Sarasvati Prakriya,
and the Madhaviya-dhatu-vritti, I have abstained, as much as
possible, from introducing any more of the peculiar system and
of the terminology of Indian grammarians* than has already found
admittance into our Sanskrit grammars ; nay, I have frequently
rejected the grammatical observations supplied ready to hand
in their works, in order not to overwhelm the memory of the
student with too many rules and too many exceptions. Whether
I have always been successful in drawing a line between what
is essential in Sanskrit grammar and what is not, I must leave
to the judgment of those who enjoy the good fortune of being
engaged in the practical teaching of a language the students
of which may be counted no longer by tens, but by hundreds t.

* The few alterations that I have made in the usual terminology have been made
solely with a view of facilitating the work of the learner. Thus instead of numbering
the ten classes of verbs, I have called each by its first verb. This relieves the memory
of much unnecessary trouble, as the very name indicates the character of each class ;
and though the names may at first sound somewhat uncouth, they are after all the only
names recognized by native grammarians. Knowing from my experience as an examiner,
how difficult it is to remember the merely numerical distinction between the first, second,
or third preterites, or the first and second futures, I have kept as much as possible to the
terminology with which classical scholars are familiar, calling the tense corresponding to
the Greek Imperfect, Imperfect ; that corresponding to the Perfect, Keduplicated Perfect ;
that corresponding to the Aorist, Aorist; and the mood corresponding to the Optative,
Optative. The names of Periphrastic Perfect and Periphrastic Future tell their own
story; and if I have retained the merely numerical distinction between the First and
Second Aorists, it was because this distinction seemed to be more intelligible to a
classical scholar than the six or seven forms of the so-called multiform Preterite.
t In the University of Leipzig alone, as many as twenty-five pupils attend the
classes of Professor Brockhaus in order to acquire a knowledge of the elements of
Sanskrit, previous to the study of Comparative Philology.
 PREFACE. vii

I only wish it to be understood that where I have left out rules

or exceptions, contained in other grammars, whether native or
European, I have done so after mature consideration, deliberately
preferring the less complete to the more complete, but, at the same
time, more bewildering statement of the anomalies of the Sanskrit
language. Thus, to mention one or two cases, when giving the
rules on the employment of the suffixes vat and mat (§187), I have
left out the rule that bases ending in m, though the m be preceded
by other vowels than a, always take vat instead of mat. I did so
partly because there are very few bases ending in m, partly because,
if a word like kim-vdn should occur, it would be easy to discover
the reason why here too v was preferred to m, viz. in order to avoid
the clashing of two m's. Again, when giving the rules oh the
formation of denominatives (§ 495), I passed over, for very much
the same reason, the prohibition given in Pan. m. 1, 8, 3, viz. that
bases ending in m are not allowed to form denominatives. It is
true, no doubt, that the omission of such rules or exceptions may
be said to involve an actual misrepresentation, and that a pupil
might be misled to form such words as kim-mdn and kim-yati.
But this cannot be avoided in an elementary grammar ; and
the student who is likely to come in contact with such recon
dite forms, will no doubt be sufficiently advanced to be able to
consult for himself the rules of Panini and the explanations of his
commentators.
My own fear is that, in writing an elementary grammar, I have
erred rather in giving too much than in giving too little. I have
therefore in the table of contents marked with an asterisk all
such rules as may be safely left out in a first course of Sanskrit
grammar, and I have in different places informed the reader
whether certain portions might be passed over quickly, or should
be carefully committed to memory. Here and there, as for instance
in § 103, a few extracts are introduced from Panini, simply in
order to give to the student a foretaste of what he may expect
in the elaborate works of native grammarians, while lists of verbs
like those contained in § 332 or $462 are given, as everybody
will see, for the sake of reference only. The somewhat elaborate
treatment of the nominal bases in i and H, from § 220 to § 226,
viii PEEFACE.

became necessary, partly because in no grammar had the different

paradigms of this class been correctly given, partly because it
was impossible to bring out clearly the principle on which the
peculiarities and apparent irregularities of these nouns are based
without entering fully into the systematic arrangement of native
grammarians. Of portions like this I will not say indeed, fiMnnveral
ris naWov Sj /ufiycrerai, but I feel that I may say, ^ ^tt if^ T ftrmfir
^tt: ; and I know that those who will take the trouble to
examine the same mass of evidence which I have weighed and
examined, will be the most lenient in their judgment, if hereafter
they should succeed better than I have done, in unravelling the
intricate argumentations of native scholars *.
But while acknowledging my obligations to the great gram
marians of India, it would be ungrateful were I not to
acknowledge as fully the assistance which I have derived from
the works of European scholars. My first acquaintance with the
elements of Sanskrit was gained from Bopp's grammar. Those
only who know the works of his predecessors, of Colebrooke,
Carey, Wilkins, and Forster, can appreciate the advance made
by Bopp in explaining the difficulties, and in lighting up, if I
may say so, the dark lanes and alleys of the Sanskrit language.
I doubt whether Sanskrit scholarship would have flourished as
it has, if students had been obliged to learn their grammar from
Forster or Colebrooke, and I believe that to Bopp's little grammar
is due a great portion of that success which has attended the study
of Sanskrit literature in Germany. Colebrooke, Carey, Wilkins,
and Forster worked independently of each other. Each derived
his information from native teachers and from native grammars.
Among these four scholars, Wilkins seems to have been the first
to compose a Sanskrit grammar, for he informs us that the first

* To those who have the same faith in the accurate aud never swerving argumen
tations of Sanskrit commentators, it may be a saving of time to be informed that in
the new and very useful edition of the Siddhanta-Kaumudi by Sri Taranatha-tarkava-
chaspati there are two misprints which hopelessly disturb the order of the rules on the
proper declension of nouns in t and 4. On page 136, 1. 7, read tfalf instead of 9ffol^»
this is corrected in the Corrigenda, and the right reading is found in the old edition.
On the same page, 1. 13, insert ^ after f«MT, or join fipn^jfWVItr^.
 PREFACE. ix

printed sheet of his work was destroyed by fire in 1795. The

whole grammar, however, was not published till 1808. In the
mean time Forster had finished his grammar, and had actually
delivered his MS. to the Council of the College of Fort William
in 1804. But it was not published till 1810. The first part of
Colebrooke's grammar was published in 1805, and therefore stands
first in point of time of publication. Unfortunately it was not
finished, because the grammars of Forster and Carey were then
in course of publication, and would, as Colebrooke imagined, supply
the deficient part of his own. Carey's grammar was published in
1806. Among these four publications, which as first attempts at
making the ancient language of India accessible to European
scholars, deserve the highest credit, Colebrooke's grammar is
facile princeps. It is derived at first hand from the best native
grammars, and evinces a familiarity with the most intricate pro
blems of Hindu grammarians such as few scholars have acquired
after him. No one can understand and appreciate the merits of this
grammar who has not previously acquired a knowledge of the gram
matical system of Panini, and it is a great loss to Sanskrit scholar
ship that so valuable a work should have remained unfinished.
I owe most, indeed, to Colebrooke and Bopp, but I have derived
many useful hints from other grammars also. There are some por
tions of Wilson's grammar which show that he consulted native
grammarians, and the fact that he possessed the remaining portion
of Colebrooke's* MS., gives to his list of verbs, with the exception
of the Bhu class, which was published by Colebrooke, a peculiar
interest. Professor Benfey in his large grammar performed a most
useful task in working up independently the materials supplied by
Panini and Bhattojidikshita ; and his smaller grammars too, pub
lished both in German and in English, have rendered good service
to the cause of sound scholarship. There are besides, the grammars
of Boiler in German, of Oppert in French, of Westergaard in Danish,
of Flecchia in Italian, each supplying something that could not be
found elsewhere, and containing suggestions, many of which have
proved useful to the writer of the present grammar.

* See Wilson's Sanscrit and English Dictionary, first edition, preface, p. xlv.
b
X PREFACE.

But while thus rendering full justice to the honest labours of

my predecessors, I am bound to say, at the same time, that with
regard to doubtful or difficult forms, of which there are many in
the grammar of the Sanskrit language, not one of them can be
appealed to as an ultimate authority. Every grammar contains,
as is well known, a number of forms which occur but rarely, if ever,
in the literary language. It is necessary, however, for the sake of
systematic completeness, to give these forms ; and if they are to be
given at all, they must be given on competent authority. Now it
might be supposed that a mere reference to any of the numerous
grammars already published would be sufficient for this purpose,
and that the lists of irregular or unusual forms might safely be
copied from their pages. But this is by no means the case. Even
with regard to regular forms, whoever should trust implicitly in the
correctness of any of the grammars, hitherto published, would never
be certain of having the right form. I do not say this lightly, or
without being able to produce proofs. When I began to revise my
manuscript grammar which I had composed for my own use many
years ago, and when on points on which I felt doubtful, I con
sulted other grammars, I soon discovered either that, with a strange
kind of sequacity, they all repeated the same mistake, or that they
varied widely from each other, without assigning any reason or
authority. I need not say that the grammars which we possess
differ very much in the degree of their trustworthiness ; but with
the exception of the first volume of Colebrooke and of Professor
Benfey's larger Sanskrit grammar, it would be impossible to appeal
to any of my predecessors as an authority on doubtful points.
Forster and Carey, who evidently depend almost entirely on
materials supplied to them by native assistants, give frequently
the most difficult forms with perfect accuracy, while they go wildly
wrong immediately after, without, it would seem, any power of
controlling their authorities. The frequent inaccuracies in the
grammars of Wilkins and Wilson have been pointed out by
others ; and however useful these works may have been for
practical purposes, they were never intended as authorities on
contested points of Sanskrit grammar.
Nothing remained in fact, in order to arrive at any satisfactory
 PREFACE. xi

result, but to collate the whole of my grammar, with regard not

only to the irregular but likewise to the regular forms, with Panini
and other native grammarians, and to supply for each doubtful case,
and for rules that might seem to differ from those of any of my
predecessors, a reference to Panini or to other native authorities.
This I have done, and in so doing I had to re -write nearly the
whole of my grammar ; but though the time and trouble expended
on this work have been considerable, I believe that they have not
been bestowed in vain. I only regret that I did not give these
authoritative references throughout the whole of my work, because,
even where there cannot be any difference of opinion, some of my
readers might thus have been saved the time and trouble of
looking through Panini to find the Sutras that bear on every
form of the Sanskrit language.
By this process which I have adopted, I believe that on many
points a more settled and authoritative character has been imparted
to the grammar of Sanskrit than it possessed before ; but I do by
no means pretend to have arrived on all points at a clear and
definite view of the meaning of Panini and his successors. The
grammatical system of Hindu grammarians is so peculiar, that rules
which we should group together, are scattered about in different
parts of their manuals. We may have the general rule in the last,
and the exceptions in the first book, and even then we are by no
means certain that exceptions to these exceptions may not occur
somewhere else. I shall give but one instance. There is a root
•*trn jdgri, which forms its Aorist by adding ^ isham, $ ib, it.
Here the simplest rule would be that final ^ ri before ^ isham
becomes ^ r (Pan. VI. i, 77). This, however, is prevented by another
rule which requires that final ^ ri should take Guna before ^ isham
(Pan. vii. 3, 84). This would give us ^miuM ajdgar-isham. But
now comes another general rule (Pan. vn. 2, 1) which prescribes
Vriddhi of final vowels before ^ isham, i. e. mroifri ajdgdrisham.
Against this change, however, a new rule is cited (Pan. vn. 3, 85),
and this secures for »nn jdgri a special exception from Vriddhi, and
leaves its base again as innT.jdgar. As soon as the base has been
changed to urn^t jdgar, it falls under a new rule (Pan. vn. 2, 3), and
is forced to take Vriddhi, until this rule is again nullified by Pan. vn.
b 2
xii PREFACE.

2, 4, which does not allow Vriddhi in an Aorist that takes interme

diate ^ i, like ^rsTrnfttf ajdgarisham. There is an exception, however,
to this rule also, for bases with short *r a, beginning and ending
with a consonant, may optionally take Vriddhi (Pan. vn. 2,7). This
option is afterwards restricted, and roots with short tst a, beginning
with a consonant and ending in ^ r, like *(m$jdgar, have no option
left, but are restricted afresh to Vriddhi (Pan. vn. 2, 2). However,
even this is not yet the final result. Our base *n*r*.jdgar is after
all not to take Vriddhi, and hence a new special rule (Pan. vn. 2, 5)
settles the point by granting to ^(mjdgjri a special exception from
Vriddhi, and thereby establishing its Guna. No wonder that these
manifold changes and chances in the formation of the First Aorist of
•3RT\jdgri should have inspired a grammarian, who celebrates them
in the following couplet :

" Guna, Vriddhi, Guna, Vriddhi, prohibition, option, again Vriddhi

and then exception, these, with the change of ri into a semivowel
in the first instance, are the nine results."
Another difficulty consists in the want of critical accuracy in
the editions which we possess of Panini, the Siddhanta-Kaumudi,
the Laghu-Kaumudi, the Sarasvati, and Vopadeva. Far be it from
me to wish to detract from the merits of native editors, like
Dharanidhara, Kasinatha, Taranatha, still less from those of
Professor Boehtlingk, who published his text and notes nearly
thirty years ago, when few of us were able to read a single line of
Panini. But during those thirty years considerable progress has
been made in unravelling the mysteries of the grammatical literature
of India. The commentary of Sayana to the Big-veda has shown us
how practically to apply the rules of Panini ; and the translation
of the Laghu-Kaumudl by the late Dr. Ballantyne has enabled
even beginners to find their way through the labyrinth of native
grammar. The time has come, I believe, for new and critical
editions of Panini and his commentators. A few instances may
suffice to show the insecurity of our ordinary editions. The
commentary to Pan. vn. 2, 42, as well as the Sarasvati II. 25, 1,
gives the Benedictive Atmanepada <u*l*flg varishishta and wfliflg
 PREFACE. xiii

starishishta; yet a reference to Pan. VII. 2, 39 and 40, shows that

these forms are impossible. Again, if Panini (vm. 3, 92) is right
in using wgmfaftf agragdmini with a dental n in the last syllable,
it is clear that he extends the prohibition given in viii. 4, 34,
with regard to Upasargas, to other compounds. It is useless to
inquire whether in doing so he was right or wrong, for it is an article
of faith with every Hindu grammarian that whatever word is used
by Panini in his Sutras, is eo ipso correct. Otherwise, the rules
affecting compounds with Upasargas are by no means identical with
those that affect ordinary compounds ; and though it may be right to
argue a fortiori from Hmfafrf pragdmini to vzpnftft agragdmini, it
would not be right to argue from <rcpm agraydna to mn«T praydna,
this being necessarily vmut praydna. But assuming vjpnfNftl agra
gdmini to be correct, it is quite clear that the compounds yjUifwp
svargakdminau, qqjnfatijt vrishagdminau, gfbwnftl harikdmdni, and
*r*.4i*)<u harikdmena, given in the commentary to vm. 4, 1 3, are all
wrong, though most of them occur not only in the printed editions
of Panini and the Siddhanta-Kaumudi, but may be traced back to
the MSS. of the Prakriya-Kaumudi, the source, though by no means
the model, of the Siddhanta-Kaumudi. I was glad to learn from
my friend Professor Goldstiicker, who is preparing an edition of the
Kasika-Vritti, and whom I consulted on these forms, that the MSS.
of Vamana which he possesses, carefully avoid these faulty examples
to Pan. vm. 4, 13.
After these explanations I need hardly add that I am not so
sanguine as to suppose that I could have escaped scot free where so
many men of superior knowledge and talent have failed to do so.
All I can say is, that I shall be truly thankful to any scholar who
will take the trouble to point out any mistakes into which I may
have fallen ; and I hope that I shall never so far forget the regard
due to truth as to attempt to represent simple corrections, touching
the declension of nouns or the conjugation of verbs, as matters of
opinion, or so far lower the character of true scholarship as to appeal
from the verdict of the few to the opinion of the many.
Hearing from my friend Professor Buhler that he had finished
a Sanskrit Syntax, based on the works of Panini and other native
grammarians, which will soon be published, I gladly omitted that
xiv PREFACE.

portion of my grammar. The rules on the derivation of nouns, by

means of Krit, Unadi, and Taddhita suffixes, do not properly belong
to the sphere of an elementary grammar. If time and health permit,
I hope to publish hereafter, as a separate treatise, the chapter of
the Prakriya-Kaumudi bearing on this subject.
In the list of verbs which I have given as an Appendix,
pp. 245-299, I have chiefly followed the Prakriya-Kaumudi and
the Sarasvatl. These grammars do not conjugate every verb that
occurs in the Dhatupatha, but those only that serve to illustrate
certain grammatical rules. Nor do they adopt, like the Siddhanta-
Kaumudi, the order of the verbs as given in Panini's Dhatupatha,
but they group the verbs of each class according to their voices,
treating together those that take the terminations of the Parasmai-
pada, those that take the terminations of the Atmanepada, and,
lastly, those that admit of both voices. In each of these subdi
visions, again, the single verbs are so arranged as best to illustrate
certain grammatical rules. In making a new selection among
the verbs selected by Ramachandra and Anubhutisvarupacharya,
I have given a preference to those which occur more frequently
in Sanskrit literature, and to those which illustrate some points
of grammar of peculiar interest to the student. In this manner
I hope that the Appendix will serve two purposes : it will not
only help the student, when doubtful as to the exact forms
of certain verbs, but it will likewise serve as a useful practical
exercise to those who, taking each verb in turn, will try to
account for the exact forms of its persons, moods, and tenses by a
reference to the rules of this grammar. In some cases references
have been added to guide the student, in others he has to find by
himself the proper warranty for each particular form.
My kind friends Professor Cowell and Professor Kielhorn have
revised some of the proof-sheets of my grammar, for which I beg to
express to them my sincere thanks.

MAX MULLER.
PARIS,
5th April, 1866.
 TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE FAGS
CHAPTER I.—The Alphabet. §27. Nasalized vowels . . .10
§ i. The Devanagari alphabet . 1 28. Light and heavy vowels . .10
2. Direction of Sanskrit alphabet . 2 29. Acute, grave, and circumflexed
3. How to write the letters . . 2 vowels . . . .10
4. Sounds represented by the De 30. Guna and Vriddhi . . .10
vanagari alphabet. . . 2 31. Guna of *, d . . . .11
5. Number of letters ... 3 32. Combination of vowels at the
6. The letter It . . . .3 end and beginning of words.
7. Jihvamuliya and Upadhm&niya 3 No hiatus . . . .11
8. Signs of nasals and their substi 33. Vowels meeting the same vowels 11
tute 3 34. Vowels a and d, followed by
9. The three nasal semivowels . 4 different vowels . . .11
10. Consonants without correspond 35. Vowels d and d, followed by
ing nasals .... 4 diphthongs . . . .12
11. Anusv&ra before sh, s, h . 4 36. Vowels I, 4, rl, followed by dis
* 12. Names of letters ... 4 similar vowels . . .12
13. Vowel signs, initial, medial, and 37. Vowels e and o, followed by any
final ..... 5 vowel except d . .13
14. Consonants followed by vowels 5 38. Vowels ai and cm, followed by
15. Virama 5 any vowels . . . .13
16. Combination of consonants . 5 39. Treatment of final y and v . 13
17. The sign for r . . .6 40. The hiatus occasioned by Sandhi 14
1 8. The Virama used as a stop-gap . 6 41. Vowels e and 0 before a . .14
1 9. The signs for a pause . . 6 42. Unchangeable or Pragrihya
20. The Avagraha. List of com vowels . . . .14
pound consonants . . 6 * 43. Irregular Sandhi ; prepositions
21. Numerical figures . 7 ending in d or d, followed by
22. Eules of pronunciation . . 8 e or 0 . . . . .15
* 44. Prepositions ending in d or d,
CHAPTER II.—Rules of Sandhi. followed by ri . .15
§23. Object and use of Sandhi . 9 *k 45. The 0 of oshthah and otuh . 16
24. Distinction between External * 46. Irregular compounds . .16
and Internal Sandhi . . 9 * 47. The final o of indeclinable words 16
25. Classification of vowels, long, * 48. Monosyllabic indeclinable words 16
short, protracted . . .10 % 49. Sandhi of the particle d . .16
26. Monophthongs and diphthongs 10 He S°- Particles unaffected by Sandhi . 16
xvi TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE PAG*
*§5i. Protracted vowels unaffected by § 82. Visarga and final sorr. 26
Sandhi .... 16 83. The onlyfinal sibilant inpausd,
52. Table showing the combination Visarga, and its modifications 28
of final with initial vowels . 1 7 84. Visarga before a sonant letter
53. Combination of final and initial changed to r, and exceptions 29
consonants . . . .18 85. Final radical r ■ 30
54. The eleven final consonants . 18 86. Final r before initial r . 31
55. No word ends in two consonants 19 87. Pronouns sah and eshah, syah 31
56. Classification of consonants, ac * 88. Bhoh 31
cording to their place . .19 * 89. Exceptions in compound words 31
57. Classification of consonants, ac * 90. Nouns ending in radical r 33
cording to their quality, i. e. 91. Initial chh and medial chh 34
contact, approach, opening . 20 * 92. Initial 4 changeable to chh 34
58. Surd and sonant consonants . 20 93- Final h, gh, dh, dh, bh, throw
59. Aspirated and unaspirated con ing their aspiration back on
sonants . . . .20 initial g,d,d,b. 34
60. Changes of place, and changes 94- Table showing the combination
of quality . . . .21 offinal with initial consonants 35
61. Changes of place affect Dentals, 95- Nati, or change of n into n,
Anusvara, and Visarga . .21 and s into sh 38
62. Final t before Palatals ch, chh, 96. Change of n into n 38
j,jh,n,t . . . .21 * 97- Tripnoti and kshubhndti 39
63. Final n before j,jh, n, 4 . . 21 Table 39
64. Final t before (, \h, d, dh, n * 98. Change of n into n in a com
(not sh) . . . .21 pound .... 39
65. Final n before d, dh, n, (not ah) 22 * 99- Optional changes of n into n in
66. Changes of quality ; sonant ini the preposition ni 43
tials require sonant finals, and 100. Change of s into sh 43
surd initials surd finals . .22 * IOI. Change of s into sh in the re
67. Final t before I . .23 duplicative syllable 44
68. Final k, t, t, p before nasals . 23 * 102. Change of s into sh after pre
* 69. Final k, (, t, p before maya or positions . 45
mdtra 24 * 103. Extracts from P&nini on cer
* 70. Initial h after final k,t,t,p . 24 tain changes of s into sh 45
71. Final A, n, n after a short vowel 24 * 104. Change of s into sh in com
72. Final A and n before 4, sh, s . 24 pounds .... 47
73. Final n before i or s (not sh) . 25 * 105. Change of dh into dh . 48
74. Final n before the firsts and 106. Rules of Internal Sandhi 48
seconds . . . .25 * 107. Final vowels. No hiatus 49
75. Final n before I . .25 * 108. Final d and d, followed by
* 76. Final t before * .26 vowels .... 49
77. Anusvara and final m .26 * 109. Verbal bases in d . 50
78. M in pausd, and before conso * no. Final i, i, u, 4, ri changed to
nants 26 y, v, r; final i, i, u, 4, ri, ri
* 7 9. Final m before hn, hm, hy, hi, hv 27 changed to iy, uv, ri, ir 50
*k 80. Sam before kri, samskri . .27 * in. Final ri, before consonants,
81. Sam before rdj, samrdj . .27 changed to ir or 4r . 50
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. xvii

PAGE PACK
*§H2. Final e, ai, o, au changed to §138. Anusvara before s, sh, s, h . 58
ay, dy, wo, dv; roots ending * 139. AT after ch or ^'changed into n 58
in diphthongs . . .51 140. Chh changed to chchh . . 58
113. Final consonants, only eleven 51 * 141. Chh before norm changed to i 58
114. Two consonants at the end of * 142. Final y and v dropt before
a word impossible . .51 consonants, except y . .58
115. Sonant and surdinitials require * 143. Final iv, ir, ur lengthened if
sonant and surd finals. . 52 followed by consonants . 58
116. Final aspirates lose their aspi * 144. Final ir and ur lengthened if
ration . . . .52 ending a word . . .58
* 117. Final gh, dh, dh, bh, followed ■* 145. Radical is or ms at the end of
by t, th, lose their aspiration nominal bases lengthened . 58
and change t, th into dh .53 * 146, 147. Doubling of consonants . 59
* 118. Final gh, dh, dh, bh, followed by 148. Explanation of some gramma
dhv, bh, and s, or final, lose tical terms used by native
their aspiration and throw it grammarians . . .59
back on initial g, d, d, b . 53
* 1 1 9. Final ch,j, jh changed to k or g 54 CHAPTER III.—Declension.
120. Final sh changed to t . .54 §149. Gender, number, and case . 62
*k 1 a 1. Final sh before s changed to k 54 150. I. Bases ending in consonants ;
* 122. Final sh before t, th, changes II. bases ending in vowels . 62
them to f, th • • ■ 54 151. I. Bases ending in consonants ;
■* 123. Final sh changed to t before no bases in n, il, y . . 62
other consonants . .54 152. Terminations . . .62
* 124. Final j in certain roots treated 153. I. 1. Unchangeable and I. 2.
like sh . . .54 Changeable bases . . 63
■* 125. Final s, chh, ksh, $"ch treated 154. 1. 1. Unchangeablebases; sugan 63
like sh . . .55 155. Sarvasak . . . .64
* 126. Final s changed to k . . 55 156. Chitralikh . . . .64
* 127. Final h before s treated like gh 55 157. Harit, agnimath, suhrid, budh,
* 128. Final h treated like gh or dh . 55 gup, kakubh . . .65
■* 129. Final h optionally treated like 158. Jala/much . .65
gh or dh . . .56 * 159. Special bases in ch; krunch,
•* 130. Final h of nah treated like dh 56 prdnch, vrtich . . .66
* 131. Final s changed into t in cer * 160. Prdchh . . . .66
tain nominal bases . .56 * 161. Ruj, 4rj .... 66
* 132. Final s before s changed into t •* 162. Bases in j, changeable to d;
in verbal bases; s dropt be samrdj, vibhrdj, devej, viiva-
fore dhi; optionally changed srij, parivrdj, visvardj, bhrijj 66
into t 56 % 163. Irregular nouns in j; khanj,
* 133. Final n or m before sibilants avaydj . , . .67
changed to Anusvara . .57 164. Bases in r; gir, vdr, pur, dvdr,
■* 134. i^unchangedbefore semivowels 57 kir 68
* 135. J/" unchanged before y,r,l . 57 165. Bases in s; A. bases formed by
136. M changed to n . . .57 as, is, us ; sumanas, sujyotis 69
137. The five nasals abbreviated 166. Jaras and jard . . .70
into the Anusvara dot . 57 * 167. Nirja/ras and nirjara . .71
C
xviii TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE PAGE
*§i68. Anehas, purudamsas . 72 *§i94. Optional feminine compounds 87
* 169. Usanas .... 72 * 195. Pathin, ribhukshin, mathin . 88
* 170. Bases in s; B. bases ending in 196. Ahan 88
radical s; pindagras, supis, * 197. Ahan at the end of compounds 89
sutus .... 72 * 198. Ahan at the end of compounds 89
* 171. Pipathis .... 73 199. Svan, yvAian 89
* 172. Asia, mjus; list of bases in s . 74 * 200. Maghavan .... 89
* 173. Dhvas, sras .... 75 * 201. P4slian, aryaman 90
* 1 7 4 . Bases ending in s, sh, chh, ksh, h 75 * 202. Han ..... 90
r. Dis", dris, mris, sprU 75 203. Bases in in, dhanin 90
2. Nas .... 75 204. Participles in vas . 91
3. Vis. .... 75 205. Participles in ivas. 91
4. Dhrish .... 76 206. Bases in iyas, gariyas . 92
5. Dvish .... 76 * 207. Miscellaneous nouns with
6. Prdchh .... 76 changeable bases, pdd 92
7. TofoA .... 76 * 208. Vdh 93
8. Lih, guh .... 76 * 209. Svetavdh .... 93
9. Duh, ushnih . 76 * 210. Anaduh .... 93
10. Z)?Wi, muh, snih, snuh 76 211. Ap 94
1 1 . Nah .... 76 * 212. Plains 94
* 175. Turdsdh .... 77 213. Div, dyu .... 94
* 176. Pwrodds .... 77 * 214. Asan and other Metaplasta . 95
* 177. Ukthasds .... 77 215. II. Bases ending in vowels,
* 178. Praidm .... 77 subdivided. 96
179. I. 2. Nouns with changeable 216. II. 1. Bases ending in any vowel
bases; A. nouns with two except d . 96
bases, adat 78 217. Bases in ai and au 96
180. Prdch 79 218. Bases in 0 . 96
181. B. Nouns with three bases, * 219. Dyo 97
pratyach . . . 79 ,80 % 220. Bases in i and 4 . 97
182. Bases in at and ant; adat 81 1. Monosyllabic bases in t and
* 183. The nasal inthenom. and acc. 4, being both masc. and fem. 97
dual of neuters, and in the A. By themselves; dhi, kri, 14 97
feminine base 81 * 221. B. At the end of compounds . 98
* 184. The nasal in participles of re * 2 2 2 . 2 . Polysyllabic bases in i and 4,
duplicated verbs . 82 being both masc. and fem. . 99
* 185. Brihat, prishat 82 * 223. The five fuller feminine termi
186. Mahat 83 nations .... 102
187. Bases in mat and vat 83 224. 1. Monosyllabic bases in i and
* 188. Bhavat, Your Honour . 84 ■A, being feminine only, dhi,
* 189. Arvat and arvan . 85 bh4 102
* 190. Kiyat 85 225. 2. Polysyllabic bases in i and
191. Bases in an, man, van; rdjan, 4, being feminine only, nodi,
ndman .... 85 vadhd .... 103
192. Brahman, divan . 86 * 226. Compounds ending in mono
* 193. Feminines of bases of nouns in syllabic feminine bases in i
an, van, man 87 and 4, avhhrd . 104
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. xix

PAGE PAGE
#§227. Compounds ending in poly CHAPTER VI.—Pronouns.
syllabic feminine bases in i §261. Personal pronouns . .126
and bahuSreyast . .106 262. Sah, sd, tat . . . ■ 127
228. Strl 107 * 263. Syah, 8yd, tyat . . • 127
* 229. Atistri 107 264. Possessive pronouns . .127
230. Bases iniandw,masc.fem.neut. 108 265. Reflexive pronouns, svayam . 128
* 231. Rati 110 266. Atraan .... 128
232. Sakhi 110 267. Svah, svd, svam . . . 128
233. Pati HI 268. Demonstrative pronouns,es/i«A,
* 234. Akshi, asthi, dadhi, sakthi . Ill eshd, etat . . . .128
235. Bases in ri, masc. fern, neut., 269. Ayam, iyam, idam . . 128
naptri, pitri . . .111 * 270. Enam, endm, mat . .129
■* 236. Kro8h{u .... 112
271. Asau, man, adah . . . 129
* 237. Nri 113 272. Yah, yd, yat ... 130
238. II. 2. Bases ending in a and d, 273. Kah, M, him . . . 130
kdntah, td, tarn . . .113 * 274. Pronouns modified by ak . 130
* 239. Bases in d, masc. and fem., 275. Compound pronouns, tddris&c. 131
visvapd . . . .114 276. Tdvat &c 131
* 240. Hdhd 115 277. Kaschit &c. .... 131
278. Pronominal adjectives, sarva,
CHAPTEB IV.—Adjectives.
vtfva, &c. .... 132
§241. Declension of adjectives . 115 279. Anyah, anyd, anyat . .133
242. Formation of feminine base . 116 280. Ubhau, vhhe, ubhe . . 133
243. Priyah, fem. priyd . .116 281. Ubhayah, yd, yam . .133
* 244. Pdchakah, pdchikd . .116 * 282. PHrva and its optional forms. 133
245. Feminines formed by i . .116 * 283. Prathama and its optional
* 246. Exceptional feminines in t . 116 nominative plural . .133
* 247. Irregular feminines . .116 * 284. Dvitiya and its optional forms 134
It 248. Formation of feminine sub * 285. Adverbial declension . .134
stantives . . . .117
249. Degrees of comparison . . 117 CHAPTER VII.—Conjugation.
250. Tara and tama, how added . 117 §286. Active and passive . .136
251. lyas and ishfha, how added . 117 287. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada 136
252. Exceptional comparatives and * 288. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada
superlatives . . .118 in derivative verbs . .137
289. Passive . . . .137
CHAPTER V.—Numerals. 290. The thirteen tenses and moods 137
§253. Cardinals and declension of 291. Signification of tenses and
cardinals, eka . . .119 moods . . . .138
254. JDvi 123 292. Numbers and persons . .139
255. Tri, tisri, . . . .123
256. Chatur, chatasri . . .123 CHAPTER VIII.—The Ten Classes.
257. Panchan, shash, ashtcm. . 123 §293. Special and general tenses, in
* 258. Construction of cardinals . 123 the ten classes . . .139
259. Ordinals . . . .124 294. Special or modified, general or
260. Numerical adverbs and other unmodified tenses . .140
derivatives . . .125 295. Division of verbal bases. . 140
C 2
XX TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE PAGE
§296. L First division; Bhu, Tud, §327. Strong and weak termina
Div, Chur classes . . 140 tions .... 158, 159
297. II. Second division, and sub 328. Weakening of base . . 159
divisions . . . .141 329. Bases ending in d and diph
298. II a. Su, Tan, Kri classes . 142 thongs, how changed . .160
299. 116. Ad, Hu, Budh classes . 142 330. Bases ending in i, %, ri, u, 4, ft,
how changed . . .160
CHAPTEB IX.—Augment, Reduplica
tion, and Terminations. CHAPTER XI.—Intermediate i.
§300. Augment and reduplication . 144 §331. When it must be omitted,
301. Augment a . . . . 144 when it may be omitted,
302. Reduplication in the perfect, when it must be inserted . 161
and in the Hu verbs . .144 •* 332. List ofverbs in which the inter
303. General rules of reduplication 145 mediate i must be omitted . 162
304. Aspirated initials . . .145 * 333- Verbs in which the interme
305. Guttural initials . . . 145 diate i must be omitted in
306. Double initials . . . 145 certain tenses . . . 165
307. Initial sibilant followed by a 334. Special rules for the redupli
tenuis .... 145 cated perfect . . . 167
308. The vowel of the reduplicative * 335. Special rules for the 2nd pers.
syllable is short . . .145 sing. Par. of the red. perf. . 167
309. Medial e and ai are redupli * 336. Table showing when interme
cated by i, o and au by u . 145 diate i must be omitted . 168
310. Final e, ai, 0 are reduplicated * 337. Optional insertion of i . . 169
by a 145 * 338. Necessary insertion of i. . 171
* 311. Irregular reduplication tby 339. The intermediate i never liable
Samprasdrana . . .146 to Guna .... 172
312. Short initial a 146 340. Insertion of long i . .172
313. Initial a followed by two con * 341. Optional insertion of long i . 172
sonants . . . .146 342. Periphrastic perfect . .172
314. Short initial i and u . .146 * 343. Periphrastic perfect of inten-
315. Initial ri 147 sives and desideratives . 173
316. Special rules of reduplication . 147 Paradigms of the reduplicated
•* 317. Nij, vij, vish . . . 147 perfect . . . .173
* 318. Md, M . . . . 147
* 319. Han, hi,ji, chi . .147 CHAPTER XII.—Strengthening and
320. Terminations . . . 148 Weakening.
321. Terminations of first and se §344. Two classes of terminations,
cond divisions . . . 148 strengthening or weakening
322. Regular conjugation • . 149 a verbal base . . . 176
* 345- Special forms of strengthening
CHAPTER X.—General Tenses. and weakening certain bases 178
§323. General or unmodified tenses . 158
324. Reduplicated perfect . .158 CHAPTER XIII.—Aorist.
325. Verbs which may form the re §346. First and second aorist . .179
duplicated perfect . .158 347. Four forms of the first aorist . 179
326. The periphrastic perfect. . 158 348. Rules for the first form . . 180
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. xxi

PAGE PAGE
*§349. Eules for desideratives, inten- §383. Conditional . . . .193
sives, &c. .... 181 384. Periphrastic future . .194
350. Eules for the second form . 181 385. Benedictive .... 195
351. Terminations beginning with * 386. Bases ending in ay - . 195
sh or sth . . 181 387. Weakening in benedictive Pa-
352. Eoots in d and diphthongs . 181 rasmaipada, strengthening in
* 353- Mi, mi, dt, li . 182 benedictive Atmanepada . 195
* 354. Han .... . 182 388. Intermediate i 196
* 355. Gam .... . 182 * 389. Weakening of base before y . 196
* 356. Yam .... . 182 * 390. Verbs ending in i, u, ri, ri . 196
357. Eules for the third form . 182 * 391. Verbs ending in n. . . 196
* 358. Mi, mi, li . . 182 * 392. Verbs ending in d. . . 197
* 359- Yam, ram, nam . . 182 393. Verbs which take Samprasd-
360. Eules for the fourth form . 182 rana. . . . . 197
* 361. &lish .... . 182 * 394. Other verbs which take Sam-
* 362. Duh, dih, lih, guh . 182 prasdrana. . . .198
Paradigms . . 183 * 395. Sd8 changed to fish . . 198
363. Second aorist . 187 396. Benedictive Atmanepada . 198
364. Eoots ending in d, e, i, ri; dris 187
365. Eoots with penultimate nasal. 187 CHAPTEE XV— Passive.
366. Irregular forms . . . 187 §397. Atmanepada terminations . 198
* 367. Verbs which take the second 398. Special tenses of passive . 198
aorist .... 187 * 399. Causative, denominative, in
* 368. Verbs which take the second tensive bases . . .198
aorist in the Par. only . 188 400. Weakening of base. Paradigm 199
* 369. The Tan verbs . . .188 401. General tenses of passive . 199
370. Eeduplicated second aorist . 189 402. The aorist passive . . . 200
* 371. <§ri, dru, sru, ham; svi, dhe . 189 403. The 3rdpers. sing, aorist passive 200
372. Shortening of bases ending in 404. Aorist of verbs ending in A . 200
ay 189 % 405. Aorist of verbs ending in ay . 200
373. Bases that cannot be shortened 189 406. Aorist of intensive and desi-
374. Compensation between base derative bases . . . 200
and reduplicative syllable . 190 * 407. Irregular forms . . 201
375. Vowelsofreduplicative syllable 190 * 408. Verbs ending in am . .201
* 376. Verbs beginning and ending 409. Paradigm .... 201
with double consonants . 191 410. Future, conditional, and bene
* 377- Verbs with penultimate ri, ri. 191 dictive passive . . . 201
378. Verbs beginning with vowels . 191 411. Their optional forms . .201
* 379. Irregular reduplicated aorist . 191 * 412. Aorist passive of intransitive
Paradigm . . . .191 verbs .... 203
380. When the different forms of * 413. Optional forms . . . 203
^ the aorists are used . .191
CHAPTEE XVI.—Participles, Gerunds,
CHAPTEE XIV.—Future, Conditional, and Infinitive.
Periphrastic Future, and Benedictive. §414. Participle present Parasmai-
§381. Future 192 pada 203
382. Changes of the base . . 192 415. Participle future Parasmaipada 204
XXII TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE
§416. Participle of reduplicated per •*§447. Gerund of causatives 211
fect Parasmaipada . . 204 * 448. Ghu verbs, md, sthd, gd, pd,
* 417. Participle of reduplicated per hd, so take final d 211
fect with i . . . . 205 ■* 449. Verbs ending in nasals 211
418. Participle of reduplicated per * 450. Verbs ending in ri 211
fect Atmanepada . . 205 * 451. Ve,jyd, vye . 211
419. Participle present Atmanepada 205 * 452. Mi, mi, di, li 211
420. Participle future Atmanepada. 206
421. Participle present and future CHAPTEB XVII.—Verbal Adjectives.
passive .... 206
§453. Verbal adjectives, Kritya . 212
422. Past participle passive and 454. Adjectives in tavya . . 212
gerund . . . 206
455. Adjectives in aniya . .213
423. Gerund in tvd . . . 206
456. Adjectives in ya . . . 213
* 424. I. The terminations tah and * 457. Exceptional verbal adjectives
tvd, with intermediate i . 207
in ya and tya . . .214
* 425. Penultimate u with optional *r 458. Verbs changing final ch and j
Guna .... 207
into k and g 214
* 426. Tvd with intermediate i and 459. Infinitive in turn . . . 214
Guna . . .207 460. Verbal adverbs in am . .215
* 427. Tvd with intermediate i and
without Guna . . .207
CHAPTEB XVIII.—Causative Verbs.
* 428. Nasal lost before th,ph; vanch,
lunch .... 207 §461. Causal bases, how formed . 215
* 429. II. The terminations tah and * 462. Guna or Vriddhi . . .215
tvd, without intermediate i . 208 463. Exceptional causative bases, I.
* 430. Final nasal dropt before tah *II 217
and tvd . . . 208 464. Conjugation of causative verbs 219
* 431. Finalwdropt and vowel length 465. Passive of causative verbs . 219
ened; final chh,v,rchh, and rv 208 466. General tenses of the passive . 219
* 432. Boots changing v to 4 . . 208
* 433. Final ai changed to d or i . 208 CHAPTEB XIX.—Desiderative Verbs.
* 434. Do, so, md, sihd,dhd, lid change §467. Desiderative bases, how formed 220
their final into i . . . 208 468. Desiderative bases, how con
* 435- S° and chho take i or d. . 209 jugated .... 220
* 436. Exceptional forms . . 209 469. Desiderative bases, with or
* 437- Verbs which take Samprasd- without intermediate i . 220
rana ..... 209 * 47o. Strengthening of base . .220
•* 438. Verbs which lose penultimate * 471. Exceptional strengthening or
nasal 209 weakening .... 220
439. Causal verbs. . . . 209 * 472- Desiderative bases, treated as
440. Desiderative verbs . . 209 Bhu verbs. . . .222
441. Intensive verbs . . . 209 473- Beduplication of desiderative
442. Participles in nah . . . 209 bases . . . .222*
* 443. Adjectival participles . . 210 * 474- Bases in av and dv . . 222
444. Vat added to participles . 210 * 475- Sru, sru, dru, pru, plu, chyu. 222
445. Gerund in ya . . . 211 476. Internal reduplication . .222
446. Gerund in tya . . . 211 * 477. Exceptional forms . . 223
 TABLE OF CONTENTS. xxiii

PAOE PAGE
CHAPTER XX.—Intensive Verbs. §508. Conjunctions . . . 233
§478. Meaning of intensive or fre 509. Interjections. . . . 233
quentative verbs 223
Verbs which may form inten CHAPTER XXIII.—Compound Words.
479-
sive bases .... 223 §510. Manner of compounding nomi
480. Two kinds of intensive bases. nal bases .... 234
Atmanepada 223 * 5"- Treatment of feminine bases . 234
481. Intensive bases in ya, how 512. Six classes of compounds 234
formed and conjugated 223 I. Tatpurusha, determinative
482. Parasmaipada bases, how form compounds . 235
ed and conjugated 224 I b. KarmadhSraya, apposi-
483- Conjugation of Parasmaipada tional determinative com
bases .... 224 pounds. 235
484. Reduplication ofintensivebases 224 Ic. Dvigu, numeral deter
* 485- Verbs which insert ni . 225 minative compounds 235
* 486. Verbs ending in nasals . 225 II. Dvandva, collective comp. . 235
* 487- Jap, jabh, dah, dams, bhanj, III. Bahuvrihi, possessive com-
pas ..... 225 pounds. 235
* 488. Char, phal .... 225 IV. Avyayibhava,adverbialcom-
* 489. Verbs with penultimate ri 225 pounds. . 235
* 490. Verbs ending in ri 226 513- I. Determinative compounds . 236
* 491. Exceptional intensive bases . 226 * 514- Exceptional determinative
492. Secondary and tertiary bases . 226 compounds 237
* 5i5. Inverted determinative com
CHAPTER XXI.—Denominative Verbs. pounds . . . 237
* 5i6. Determinative compounds end
§493. Character of denominative
ing in verbal bases 237
verbs .... 227
517- 16. Appositional determinative
494) 495- Denominatives in ya, Pa
compounds 238
rasmaipada . . .227
* 518. Inverted determinative com
* 496. Changes of base . . . 227
pounds .... 238
497. Denominatives in ya, Atmane
5i9- I c. Numeral determinative
pada 228
compounds 238
* 498. The Kandvadi verbs . 228
* 520. Modifications ofthe final letters
* 499. Denominatives in sya . . 229
of determinative compounds 239
* 500. Denominatives in kdmya . 229
521. II. Collective compounds, Ita-
501. Conjugation of denominatives 229
retara and Samahara . 241
* 502. Denominatives in aya . . 229
* 522. Precedence of words 241
* 503. Denominatives without affixes 230
* 523- Nouns ending in ri 241
* 524. Names of deities <fec. 241
CHAPTER XXII.—Prepositions and * 525- Modifications ofthe final letters
Particles. of collective compounds in
§504. Prepositions, Upasarga . . 231 the singular 241
505. Prepositions, Gati. . .231 * 526. Idiomatic expressions . 242
506. Prepositions, Karmapravacha- 527- III. Possessive compounds 242
niya ..... 231 * 528. Modifications ofthefinal letters
507. Adverbs .... 232 of possessive compounds . 242
XXIV TABLE OF CONTENTS.

PAGE PAGE
§529. IV. Adverbial compounds 243 Su Class (Svadi, V Class) . . 278
* 530. Exceptional compounds. 244 I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada
* 531. Modifications ofthe final letters Verbs .... 278
of adverbial compounds . 244 II. Parasmaipada Verbs . . 279
III. Atmanepade Verbs . . 280
Tan Class (Tanvadi, VIII Class) . 280
Parasmaipada and Atmanepada
Verbs .... 280
Kri Class (Kryadi, IX Class) . . 282
I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada
Verbs . . . .282
APPENDIX. II. Parasmaipada Verbs . .283
PAGE III. Atmanepada Verbs . .284
List of Vekbs. . . . 245-299 Ad Class (Adadi, II Class) . . 284
Bhu Class (Bhvadi, I Class) . . 246 I. Parasmaipada Verbs . .284
I. Parasmaipada Verbs . 246 II. Atmanepada Verbs . .291
II. Atmanepada Verbs . .265 III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada
III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs . . . .292
Verbs . . . .270 Hu Class (Juhotyadi, III Class) . 294
Tud Class (Tudadi, VI Class) . . 272 I. Parasmaipada Verbs . . 294
L Parasmaipada and Atmanepada II. Atmanepada Verbs . .295
Verbs . . . .272 III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada
II. Parasmaipada Verbs . .273 Verbs . . . .296
III. Atmanepada Verbs . . 274 Eudh Class (Rudhadi, VII Class) . 297
Div Class (Divadi, IV Class) . . 275 I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada
L Parasmaipada Verbs . . 275 Verbs . . . .297
II. Atmanepada Verbs . .277 II. Parasmaipada Verbs . . 298
III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada III. Atmanepada Verbs . .299
Verbs . . . .277 Index of Nouns . . . 300-304
Chur Class (Churadi, X Class) . . 278 Index of Verbs . . . 304-307
Parasmaipada Verbs only . . 278 Addenda et Corrigenda . . 308
 SANSKRIT GRAMMAR.

CHAPTER I.

THE ALPHABET.
$ i. Sanskrit is properly written with the Devanagari alphabet ; but the
Bengali, Telugu, and other modern Indian alphabets are commonly employed
for writing Sanskrit in their respective provinces.
Note—Devandgari means the Ndgari of the gods, or, possibly, of the Brahmans. A more
current style of writing, used by Hindus in all common transactions where Hindi is the lan
guage employed, is called simply Ndgari. Why the alphabet should have been called Ndgari,
is unknown. If derived from nagara, city, it might mean the art of writing as first practised
in cities. (Pan. iv. 2, 128.) No authority has yet been adduced from any ancient author for
the employment of the word Devandgari. In the Lalita-vistara (a life of Buddha, translated
from Sanskrit into Chinese 76 a.d.), where a list of alphabets is given, the Devandgari is
not mentioned, unless it be intended by the Deva alphabet. (See History of Ancient
Sanskrit Literature, p. 518.) Albiruni, in the nth century, speaks of the Nagara alphabet
as current in Malva. (Reinaud, Memoire sur l'Inde, p. 298.)
No inscriptions have been met with in India anterior to the rise of Buddhism. The
earliest authentic specimens of writing are the inscriptions of king Priyadarsi or Asoka, about
250 B.C. These are written in two different alphabets. The alphabet which is found in the
inscription of Kapurdigiri, and which in the main is the same as that of the Arianian coins,
is written from right to left. It is clearly of Semitic origin, and most closely connected with
the Aramaic branch of the old Semitic or Phenician alphabet. The Aramaic letters, how
ever, which we know from Egyptian and Palmyrenian inscriptions, have experienced further
changes since they served as the model for the alphabet of Kapurdigiri, and we must have
recourse to the more primitive types of the ancient Hebrew coins and of the Phenician
inscriptions in order to explain some of the letters of the Kapurdigiri alphabet.
But while the transition of the Semitic types into this ancient Indian alphabet can be
proved with scientific precision, the second Indian alphabet, that which is found in the
inscription of Girnar, and which is the real source of all other Indian alphabets, as well as of
those of Tibet and Burmah, has not as yet been traced back in a satisfactory manner to any
Semitic prototype. (Prinsep's Indian Antiquities by Thomas, vol. 11. p. 42.) To admit,
however, the independent invention of a native Indian alphabet is impossible. Alphabets were
never invented, in the usual sense of that word. They were formed gradually, and purely
phonetic alphabets always point back to earlier, syllabic or ideographic, stages. There are no
B
 2 THE ALPHABET.

such traces of the growth of an alphabet on Indian soil ; and it is to be hoped that new
discoveries may still bring to light the intermediate links by which the alphabet of Girnar,
and through it the modern Devanagari, may be connected with one of the leading Semitic
alphabets.
§ i. Sanskrit is written from left to right.
Note—Samskrita (««^in) means what is rendered fit or perfect. But Sanskrit is not called
so because the Brahmans, or still less, because the first Europeans who became acquainted
with it, considered it the most perfect of all languages. Samskrita meant what is rendered
fit for sacred purposes ; hence purified, sacred. A vessel that is purified, a sacrificial victim
that is properly dressed, a man who has passed through all the initiatory rites or samskdras;
all these are called samskrita. Hence the language which alone was fit for sacred acts, the
ancient idiom of the Vedas, was called Samskrita, or the sacred language. The local spoken
dialects received the general name of prdkrita. This did not mean originally vulgar, but
derived, secondary, second-rate, literally ' what has a source or type,' this source or type
(prakriti) being the Samskrita or sacred language. (See Vararuchi's Prakrita-Prakas'a, ed.
Cowell, p. xvii.)
§ 3. In writing the Devanagari alphabet, the distinctive portion of each
letter is written first, then the perpendicular, and lastly the horizontal line.
Ex. *t, <*, m k; l», H, ^ kh; * , n, tt g - *, tj, n gh ; *, T n, &c.
Beginners will find it useful to trace the letters on transparent paper, till
they know them well, and can write them fluently and correctly.
$ 4. The following are the sounds which are represented in the Devanagari
alphabet :

Hard and Soft and

Hard, aspirated, Soft, aspirated, ShSWtnK. Diphthongs.
(tenues.) (tenues (mediae.) (mediae Nasals. Liquids. Sibilants-
aapirato.) aspiratse.)
1. Gutturals, *k *9 *4<x) f « ^rr d -i -
3. Palatals, *!ch ■^chh Tn \i V * % di
*J
3. Linguals, Zth ltd1 sdh1 VSn Tir ■qsh
zt
4. Dentals, Kt ■nth ^ d Hdh ■^n <5 li feli)
5. Labials, tR ph vtbh »T m ^3
VP

Unmodified Nasal or Anusvara, - m or - m.

Unmodified Sibilant or Visarga, : h.
Students should be cautioned against using the Roman letters instead of
the Devanagari when beginning to learn Sanskrit. The paradigms should

1 In the Veda 7 d and ? dh, if between two vowels, are in certain schools written
35 1 and SS? lh.
2 ? h is not properly a liquid, but a soft breathing.
3 ^ » is sometimes called Dento-labial.
4 The signs for the guttural and labial sibilants have become obsolete, and are replaced
by the two dots J#.
 THE ALPHABET. 3

be impressed on the memory in their real and native form, otherwise their
first impressions will become unsettled and indistinct. After some progress
has been made in mastering the grammar and in reading Sanskrit, the Roman
alphabet may be used safely and with advantage.
§ 5. There are fifty letters in the Devanagari alphabet, thirty-seven
consonants and thirteen vowels, representing every sound of the Sanskrit
language.
§ 6. One letter, the long «| li, is merely a grammatical invention ; it
never occurs in the spoken language.
§ 7. Two sounds, the guttural and labial sibilants, are now without
distinctive representatives in the Devanagan alphabet. They are called
Jihvdmdltya, the tongue-root sibilant, formed near the base of the tongue ;
and Upadhmdniya, i. e. afflandus, the labial sibilant. They are said to have
been represented by the signs X (called Vajrdkriti, having the shape of the
thunderbolt) and SK (called Gajakumbhdkriti, having the shape of an
elephant's two frontal bones). [See Vopadeva's Sanskrit Grammar, 1. 18 ;
History of Ancient Sanskrit Literature, p. 508.] Sometimes the sign X,
called Ardhavisarga, half-Visarga, is used for both. But in common
writing these two signs are now replaced by the two dots, the Dvivindu, :,
(dvi, two, vindu, dot,) properly the sign of the unmodified Visarga.
$ 8. There are five distinct letters for the five nasals, T n, *T n, w n, ?r w,
^ m, as there were originally five distinct signs for the five sibilants. When,
in the middle of words, these nasals are followed by consonants of their own
class, (ft by k, kh, g, gh ; n by ch, chh, j, jh ; n by t, th, d, dh ; n by t, th,
d, dh ; m by p, ph, b, bh}) they are often, for the sake of more expeditious
writing, replaced by the dot, which is properly the sign of the unmodified
nasal or Anusvara. Thus we find
^fchril instead of trf^flT ankitd.
«KVnn instead of vferffl anchitd.
■ijfSTn instead of jffipnn Jcunditd.
Trff^TIT instead of ^f^dl nanditd.
oi flirt I instead of <*frMdl kampitd.
The pronunciation remains unaffected by this style of writing, wflon
must be pronounced as if it were written wfjfilT ankitd, &c.
The same applies to final H m at the end of a sentence. This too,
though frequently written and printed with the dot above the line, is to
be pronounced as m. I, is to be pronounced like ^^aham. (See
Preface to Hitopades'a, in M. M.'s Handbooks for the Study of Sanskrit,
p. viii.)
Note —According to the Kaum&ras final *T m in pausd may be pronounced as Anusvara;
B %
4 THE ALPHABET.

cf. Sarasvati-Prakriya, ed. Bombay, 1829 *, pp. 12 and 13.

<PTOT^ *n I TOl^ »WrogrrygrTd *nrfjT ^.1^1 ^PT ll The Kaumaras are the
followers of Kumara, the reputed author of the Katantra or Kalapa grammar. (See
Colebrooke, Sanskrit Grammar, Preface; and page 315, note.) S'arvavarman is sometimes
quoted by mistake as the author of this grammar, and an unnecessary distinction is made
between the Kaumaras and the followers of the Kalapa grammar.
§ 9. Besides the five nasal letters, expressing the nasal sound as modified
by guttural, palatal, lingual, dental, and labial pronunciation, there are still
three nasalized letters, the ^, 75, ^, or ^, ^, y, I, v, which are used to
represent a final K m, if followed by an initial x^y, 7^1, ~^v, and modified
by the pronunciation of these three semivowels.
Thus instead of H TrrfiT tarn ydti we may write IfSnfil toy ydti ;
instead of K t?W^ tarn labhate we may write ir^ifft tal labhate ;
instead of ^fiT tarn vahati we may write irfcft two vahati.
Or in composition,
BTR samydnam or fl^TR say ydnam;
*Jc53t samlabdham or ffz&i sal labdham;
?N^fw samvahati or «1j^fri sav vahati.
§ 10. The only consonants which have no corresponding nasals are ^ r,
$T 6, ^ sh, s, ^ h. A final »^ m, therefore, before any of these letters at
the beginning of words, can only be represented by the neutral or unmodi
fied nasal, the Anusvara.
K ^ajfiT tarn rakshati. Or in composition, *kHjfri samralcshati.
H Siliftfrf tarn srinoti. ^snrftfir samsrinoti.
iT ^sri tarn shakdram. *iHl^P(f samshthivati.
TT *rtfir tarn sarati. TOTtftl samsarati.
it ^tfir fam harati. W^rfir samharati.
§ 11. In the body of a word the only letters which can be preceded by Anu
svara are 3T^, \sh, *t«, ^ A. Thus ^1: aihsafy, vjfa dhawdmshi, *r$riftl yakdmsi,
fti^: simhah. Before the semivowels \ y, J. r, 7$ I, ^v, the in the body
of a word, is never changed into Anusvara. Thus jihjh gamyate, TO namrah,
^rjj: amlah. As to * m before semivowels in the middle of compounds, see § 9.
§ 1 a. With the exception of JihvdmHUya X x (tongue-root letter), Upadh-
mdniya X (p (to be breathed upon), Anusvdra - m (after-sound), Visarga : J
(emission, see Taitt.-Brahm. 111. p. 23 a), and Bepha r (burring), all letters
* This edition, which has lately been reprinted, contains the text—ascribed either to Vani
herself, i. e. Sarasvati, the goddess of speech (MS. Bodl. 386), or to Anubhuti-svarupa-acharya,
whoever that may be—and a commentary. The commentary printed in the Bombay editions is
called H^lvft, or in MS. Bodl. 382. i. e. «5?1<}lt0. In MS. Bodl. 382. Mahidhara or
Mahldasabhatta is said to have written the Sarasvata in order that his children might read it,
and to please Isa, the Lord. The date given is 1634, the place Benares, (Sfivarajadhani.)
 THE ALPHABET. 5

are named in Sanskrit by adding kdra (making) to their sounds. Thus

\S a is called vHehu.: akdralj, ; ^< ka, kakdrah.
§ 13. The vowels, if initial, are written,
V, 1T> ^> ^» ^> (l)» ^5
o, «*, i, f, ri, ri, li, (If), u, u, e, ai, 0, au;
if they follow a consonant, they are written with the following signs—
— > T» f> t, 4, t, n, (^), ^, ^, , , \ T.
a, «*, i, f, ri, ri, li, (If), u, 4, e, ai, 0, au.
There is one exception. If the vowel ri follows the consonant t r, it
retains its initial form, and the r is written over it. Ex. ftr^fin nirritih,.
In certain words which tolerate an hiatus in the body of the word, the
second vowel is written in its initial form. Ex. iffem goagra, adj. preceded
by cows, instead of iftsjr go'gra or VRTK gavdgra ; iftwtj goasvam, cows and
horses ; tt^jt prailga, yoke ; firm ^taw, sieve.
J 14. Every consonant, if written by itself, is supposed to be followed by
a short a. Thus ^ is not pronounced k, but ka ; n not y, but ya. But k
or any other consonant, if followed by any vowel except a, is pronounced
without the inherent a. Thus
SRT kd, ki, ^ A?, Afi, e£ Ar£, <E kit, (^r AZ2), ^ Am, c£ M, Arc, % kai,
<St Ao, oCT Acra.
The only peculiarity is that short f i is apparently written before the con
sonant after which it is sounded. This arose from the fact that in the
earliest forms of the Indian alphabet the long and short i's were both
written over the consonant, the short i inclining to the left, the long i
inclining to the right. Afterwards these top-marks were, for the sake of
distinctness, drawn across the top-line, so as to become fin and instead
of % and is. (See Prinsep's Indian Antiquities by Thomas, vol. 11. p. 40.)
§15. If a consonant is to be pronounced without any vowel after it, the
consonant is said to be followed by Virdma, i. e. stoppage, which is marked
by v Thus ak must be written ^rer; kar, ik, ^ojf.
§ 16. If a consonant is followed immediately by another consonant, the
two or three or four or five or more consonants are written in one group
(samyoga). Thus atka is written ^n«5; alpa is written ^T3i; kdrtsnya is
written cRTf^t. These groups or compound consonants must be learnt by
practice. It is easy, however, to discover some general laws in their forma
tion. Thus the perpendicular and horizontal lines are generally dropt in
one of the letters: oir + = AAa ; ^ + ^ = 75 nda ; K + ^=rS[iva; ?r + ?f
= mskha; ^ + n = -V( chya ; ^+K = T( pia; ss + K = ^kta; 0^ + ^+^ =
M ktva ; ^+ + Tr = =pr ktya.
6 THE ALPHABET.

§ 17. The ^ r following a consonant is written by a short transverse

stroke at the foot of the letter; as ■^ + ^ = '5 or ^ kra; 7t + *=u gra;
\+ t=3 or ^ tra; ^ + X. = J, dra; \+Z + t=E shtra.
The T r preceding a consonant is written by c placed at the top of the
consonant before which it is to be sounded. Thus ^ + ^ = arka ; ^ +
^+ it = varshma. This sign for t r is placed to the right of any other
marks at the top of the same letter. Ex. ^ns arkam ; ^hjj arkena ;
<arkendd.
k followed by ^ sh is written ksha.
w/ followed by *r n is written fijfia.
^ r followed by t u and 4 is written ^ ru, ^ ru.
^ d followed hy and 31 4 is written J 5 rfrf.
SI £, particularly in combination with other letters, is frequently written
Ex. ~n hi; n id; bra.
$18. The sign of Virdma (stoppage), which if placed at the foot of a
consonant, shows that its inherent short a is stopped, is sometimes, when it
is difficult to write (or to print) two or three consonants in one group, placed
after one of the consonants : thus tt^b instead of yuhkte.
J 19. The proper use of the Virama, however, is at the end of a sentence,
or portion of a sentence, the last word of which ends in a consonant.
At the end of a sentence, or of a half-verse, the sign 1 is used ; at the
end of a verse, or of a longer sentence, the sign 11.
§ 20. The sign s (Avagraha or Arddhdkdra) is used in many editions to
mark the elision of an initial ^ a, after a final *ft 0 or £ e. Ex. *ftsftf so'pi
for *ft ^ifa so api, i. e. ^rfa sas api ; wsftr te 'pi for ^ wftr te apt.

List of Compound Consonants,

k-ka, ^rm k-kha, m k-cha, n k-ta, k-t-ya, p k-t-ra, ^pf k-t-r-ya,
M k-t-va, a k-na, gsj k-n-ya, m k-ma, ^7 k-ya, th or k-ra, pr or *H k-r-ya,
H k-la, k-va, k-v-ya, ^ k-sha, ^jt k-sh-ma, k-sh-ya, w k-sh-va ;—
^1 kh-ya, *j kh-ra ;—ni g-ya, q g-ra, W g-r-ya ;—n gh-na, H gh-n-ya,
W gh-ma, m gh-ya, n gh-ra ;—f n-ka, ^ n-k-ta, |jf n-k-t-ya, n-k-ya,
^ n-k-sha, ^ n-k-sh-va, |j n-kha, ijjr n-kh-ya, ^ n-ga, n-g-ya, if n-gha,
^q1 n-gh-ya, ^ n-gh-ra, |« n-iia, ^ h-ma, sqp n-ya.
^ ch-cha, ^ch-chha, ^ch-chh-ra, g ch-na, ^JT ch-ma, «f cA-ya ;—W chh-ya,
% chh-ra ;—w j-ja, m. j-jha, ^ j-na, j-n-ya, »n j-ma, w j'-ya, ^ j-ra,
*ij-va;— n-cha, n-ch-ma, n-ch-ya, n-chha, ^ n-ja, g n-na,
n-ya.
f ?-<a, Z5f <-ya ;—SZ th-ya, 3 th-ra ;—% d-ga, 353 d-g-ya, ^ rf-^a,
^ d-gh-ra, fms, rf-ya ;—~S{ dh-ya, ? dh-ra ;— n-ta, n-tha,
 THE ALPHABET. 7

H n-da, ^Bf n-d-ya, n-d-ra, Mf n-d-r-ya, X& n-dha, 5SI ra-we, n-ma,
HQ n-ya, n-va.
rS /-£a, TSR t-k-ra, ^ £-/a, ^ t-t-ya, |f t-t-ra, t-t-va, w tf-fAa, ^ f-nfl,
PI t-n-ya, m /-pa, m t-p-ra, w /-ma, w t-m-ya, m t-ya, ^ or ^ t-ra,
«T t-r-ya, |?r <-va, W £-*a, W /-*-na, r^JJ t-s-n-ya, ~m t-s-ya ;—«i th-ya;—
3T d-ga, 5 d-gha, f d-gh-ra, ^ a*-da, d-d-ya, % d-dha, st d-dh-ya, 5 a*-raa,
5 a^a, 5 d-bha, m d-bh-ya, d-ma, d-ya, d-ra, d-r-ya, S a*-i;a,
ST d-v-yu ;—n dh-na, jn dh-n-ya, wi dh-ma, va dh-ya, V dh-ra, VI dh-r-ya,
19 dh-va ;—ft n-ta, n-t-ya, »?T n-t-ra, ^ n-da, n-d-ra, n-dha,
*H n-dh-ra, ^ re-raa, «q n-joa, sq n-p-ra, n-ma, *r ra-ya, ^ «-ra, M-sa.
• Tt p-fa, PI p-t-ya, Tt p-na, «l j3-pa, *q p-ma, tq p-ya, H p-ra, 31 p-Ja,
jj-«a, •RT js-sa, ^ p-s-va ;—V b-gha, i^a, ^ £-da, W b-dha, «f 6-raa,
5 £-6a, iff b-bha, «tq b-bh-ya, iq i-ya, i-ra, £ 6-»a ;—V bh-na, *q bh-ya,
W bh-ra, ^ bh-va;—^ m-na, wf m-pa, fj m-p-ra, ff m-5a, *H m-bha,
*»T m-ma, 7*J m-ya, ^ ni-ra, |r m-Za, jq m-va.
"I *t y-w;—^ Wa, /-pa, /-ma, cR /-ya, W Wa> /-fa;—
jj v-wa, *q v-ya, ^ r-ra, ^ t;-va.
*g i-cAa, ^Hl i-ch-ya, ^ £-«a, 11 i-ya, ^-ra, «q 6-r-ya, £-/a, ij 6-t>a,
m i-v-ya, s-sa ;—? ««-<a, w sh-t-ya, £ sh-t-ra, sh-t-r-ya, ^ sh-t-va,
? sh-tha, w sh-na, «tfR sh-w-ya, «i sh-pa, «5f sh-p-ra, i*l sh-ma, tq sh-ya,
tsr sh-va; — s-Ara, ^3 s-kha, ^ar *-/a, w s-t-ya, ^ g-t-ra, ^ s-t-va,
s-tha, ^ <-na, ^q t-n-ya, W Wfi s-pha, m s-ma, s-m-ya, s-ya,
5T #-ra, ^ s-vffl, w s-«a.
^ A-na, g A-rea, V A-ma, A-ya, f A-ra, 5 A-Za, ^ A-va.

Numerical Figures.
§ it. The numerical figures in Sanskrit are

1234567890
These figures were originally abbreviations of the initial letters of the Sanskrit
numerals. The Arabs, who adopted them from the Hindus, called them
Indian figures ; in Europe, where they were introduced by the Arabs, they
were called Arabic figures.
Thus q stands for £ e of ekah, one.
3 stands for "g dv of ^ dvau, two.
3 stands for t! tr of "W. trayah, three.
i stands for ch of "*mk: chatvdrah, four.
M stands for q p of xfa pancha, five.
The similarity becomes more evident by comparing the letters and numerals
as used in ancient inscriptions. See Woepcke, ' Memoire sur la Propagation
8 THE ALPHABET.

des Chifires Indiens,' in Journal Asiatique, vi serie, tome i; Prinsep's

Indian Antiquities by Thomas, vol. n. p. 70.

Pronunciation.
§ 22. The Sanskrit letters should be pronounced in accordance with the
transcription given page a. The following rules, however, are to be
observed :
1. The vowels should be pronounced like the vowels in Italian. The short a,
however, has rather the sound of the English a in ' America/
a. The aspiration of the consonants should be heard distinctly. Thus kh
is said, by English scholars who learnt Sanskrit in India, to sound,
almost like kh in ' inkhorn f \( th like th in ' pothouse ;' Hi ph like ph
in ' topheavy ;' tt gh like gh in ' loghouse ;' V dh like dh in
' madhouse ;' >T bh like bh in ' Hobhouse.' This, no doubt, is a
somewhat exaggerated description, but it is well in learning Sanskrit
to distinguish from the first the aspirated from the unaspirated letters
by pronouncing the former with an unmistakable emphasis.
3. The guttural T n has the sound of ng in ' king.'
4. The palatal letters ^ ch and *(j have the sound of ch in 'church' and
ofj in ' join.'
5. The lingual letters are said to be pronounced by bringing the lower
surface of the tongue against the roof of the palate. As a matter of
fact the ordinary pronunciation of t, d, n in English is what Hindus
would call lingual, and it is essential to distinguish the Sanskrit dentals
by bringing the tip of the tongue against the very edge of the upper
front-teeth. In transcribing English words the natives naturally
represent the English dentals by their Unguals, not by their own
dentals ; e. g. fstejnjt Direktar, nwN^ Oavarnmant, &c. *
6. The Visarga, Jihvdm4liya and Upadhmdniya are not now articulated
audibly.
7. The dental *r s sounds like s in ' sin,' the lingual ^ sh like sh in ' shun,'
the palatal § like ss in ' session.'
The real Anusvara is sounded as a very slight nasal, like n in French ' bon.'
If the dot is used as a graphic sign in place of the other five nasals it
must, of course, be pronounced like the nasal which it represents t.

* Biihler, Madras Literary Journal, February, 1864. Rajendralal Mitra, ' On the Origin
of the Hindvi Language,' Journal of the Asiatic Society, Bengal, 1864, p. 509.
t According to Sanskrit grammarians the Anusvara is pronounced in the nose only, the
five nasals by their respective organs and the nose. Siddh.-Kaum. to Pan. 1. 1, 9. >itis>
 RULES OP SANDHI. 9

CHAPTER II.
RULES OF SANDHI OR THE COMBINATION OF LETTERS.
$23. In Sanskrit every sentence is considered as one unbroken chain
of syllables. Except where there is a stop, which we should mark by
interpunction, the final letters of each word are made to coalesce with the
initial letters of the following word. This coalescence of final and initial
letters, (of vowels with vowels, of consonants with consonants, and of
consonants with vowels,) is called Sandhi.
As certain letters in Sanskrit are incompatible with each other, i. e.
cannot be pronounced one immediately after the other, they have to be
modified or assimilated in order to facilitate their pronunciation. The rules,,
according to which either one or both letters are thus modified, are called
the rules of Sandhi.
As according to a general rule the words in a sentence must thus be glued
together, the mere absence of Sandhi is in many cases sufficient to mark the
stops which we have to mark in 'English by interpunction. Ex. «TOTfrprn£Tn
^JW ^=H«fi Tf(prc astvagnimdhdtmyam, indrastu devdndm mahattamah, Let
there be the greatness of Agni ; nevertheless Indra is the greatest of the
gods.
Distinction between External and Internal Sandhi.
§ 24. It is essential, in order to avoid confusion, to distinguish between
the rules of Sandhi which determine the changes of final and initial letters
of words (padas), and between those other rules of Sandhi which apply to
the final letters of verbal roots (dhdtu) and nominal bases (prdtipadika) when
followed by certain terminations or suffixes. Though both are based on the
same phonetic principles and are sometimes identical, their application is
different. For shortness' sake it will be best to apply the name of External
Sandhi to the changes which take place at the meeting of final and initial
letters of words, and that of Internal Sandhi to the changes produced by
the meeting of radical and formative elements.
The rules which apply to final and initial letters of words (padas) apply, with
few exceptions, to the final and initial letters of the component parts of com
pounds, and likewise to the final letters of nominal bases (prdtipadika) when fol
lowed by the so-called Pada-terminations (wit bhydm, fir: bhih, wn bhyah, W su),
or by secondary (taddhita) suffixes beginning with any consonants except y.
The changes produced by the contact of incompatible letters in the body
of a word should properly be treated under the heads of declension,
conjugation, and derivation. In many cases it is far easier to remember
the words ready-made from the dictionary, or the grammatical paradigms
c
10 RULES OF EXTERNAL SANDHI.

from the grammar, than to acquire the complicated rules with their
numerous exceptions which are generally detailed in Sanskrit grammars
under the head of Sandhi. It is easier to learn that the participle passive
of ft5^ lih, to lick, is T?Ste\ lidhah, than to remember the rules according to
which ^ + it h + 1 are changed into 7 + tt dh + t, 7 4- vrf + dh, and -g + ^d+dh;
d is dropt and the vowel lengthened : while in ift^l + IT. parivrih + tah,
the vowel, under the same circumstances, remains short ; parivrih + tah =
parivridh + tah, parivrid + dhah =parivrid + dhah =parivridhah. In Greek
and Latin no rules are given with regard to changes of this kind. If they
are to be given at all in Sanskrit grammars, they should, to avoid confusion,
be kept perfectly distinct from the rules affecting the final and initial letters
of words as brought together in one and the same sentence.

Classification of Vowels.
§ 25. Vowels are divided into short (hrasva), long (dirgha), and protracted
(pluta) vowels. Short vowels have one measure (mdtrd), long vowels two,
protracted vowels three. A consonant is said to last half the time of a
short vowel.
1. Short vowels : 5ST a, ^ i, ^ u, ri, «E li.
2. Long vowels : «rr d, \ i, ■gs d, ^ri, ^ e, ai, ^ft 0, au.
3. Protracted vowels are indicated by the figure 33; 3 03, ?n 3 <2 3, ^3 £3,
$3 ^3> 3 e 3> 3 au 3- Sometimes we find 3 \, a$i, instead of
£ 3, e 3; or 3 7, d 3 u, instead of ^ 3, au 3.
§ 26. Vowels are likewise divided into
1. Monophthongs (samdndkshara): ^n, ?rta, ^i, ^i, 7M, "3lrf, ^r*> "%Th
2. Diphthongs (sandhyakshara) : ? e, 5* ai, 0, ^ au.
$ 27. All vowels are liable to be nasalized, or to become anundsika : a, ^rf d.
§ 28, Vowels are again divided into light (laghu) and heavy (guru). This
division is important for metrical purposes.
1 . Light vowels are ^ta, ^i, ^u, ^ti,vsli, if not followed by a double consonant.
2. Heavy vowels are ?e, ^ ai, ^ft 0, ^ au, and any short vowel, if followed
by more than one consonant.
§ 29. Vowels are, lastly, divided according to accent, into acute (udatta),
grave (anudatta), and circumflexed (svarita). The acute vowels are pronounced
with a raised tone, the grave vowels with a low, the circumflexed with an
even tone. Accents are marked in Vedic literature only.
Ouna and Vriddhi.
§ 30. Guna is the strengthening of ^ 1, \ i, 7 it, ~m ti, ^ ri, ^ri, ~^li, by
means of a preceding a, which raises \i and \t to ^ e, ?k and 'Si 4 to ^ft o,
^ ri and ^ri to ^ ar, «E li to al.
 RULES OF EXTERNAL SANDHI. 11

By a repetition of the same process the Vriddhi (increase) vowels are

formed, viz. ^ ai instead ofjte, TOT au instead of TOT o, TOTT^ dr instead of tot^ ar,
and TOTe^ dl instead of TO5£ al.
Vowels are thus divided again into
i. Simple vowels: too, TOT a*, ji, ft, -^u,-%4, ^ri>"%Vh

' a. Guna vowels : (a + i), toto (a + u), wtl ar, totj al.
3. Vriddhi vowels: TOT a" ^di(a+a+i), vidu(a+a+u), TOTtar, TOT?^.
§ 31. to a and tot d do not take Guna, or, as other grammarians say,
remain unchanged after taking Guna. Thus in the first person sing, of the
reduplicated perfect, which requires Guna or Vriddhi, ^tT han forms with
Guna *m^jaghana, or with Vriddhi WTR jaghdna, I have killed.

Combination of Vowels at the end and beginning of words.

$ 32. As a general rule, Sanskrit allows of no hiatus (vivritti) in a
sentence. If a word ends in a vowel, and the next word begins with a
vowel, certain modifications take place in order to remove this hiatus.
$ 33. If any simple vowel, long or short, follows the same simple vowel,
long or short, the two coalesce into their corresponding long vowel. Thus
TOorTOT + TOorTOT = TOTa + a = <l
or ^ + ^ or ^= $ % + £ = t.
T or + 7 or '3i=g< u + u = 4.
^ or or ^=^n +ri = ri.*
Ex. TUT fPfircfil = 9WPrefil uktvd + apagachchhati — uktvdpagachchhati,
having spoken he goes away.
«T^r ^pft = «f<? £$fl nadi + idriii = nadidriki, such a river.
^ = ^TTjsj kartri + ryu = kartriju, doing (neuter) right,
ftfrlj ^fk = f%7f^tw kintu + udeti = kinMdeti, but he rises.
Or in compounds, »nrT + f^n = T^K mahi + isah = mahUah, lord of the earth.
§ 34. If final TO, TOT a are followed by any other vowel (except diphthongs),
the two vowels coalesce into the corresponding Guna-vowel. Thus
TO or TOT + ^or^ = ^fi + l = e (ai).
TOorTOT4-'3'or'3i = TOta + ^= o (au).
TO or tot + ^ or to^ a + ri = ar.
Ex. TR ^5: = Trrj: tava + indrah = tavendrah, thine is Indra.
m T?RT = ^ftliT sd + uktvd = soktvd, she having spoken.

* The letter cE li is left out, because it is of no practical utility. It is treated like ^ ri, only-
substituting 75 / for in Guna and Vriddhi. Thus ^ + TO»prVt li+anubandhah becomes
lanubandhah, i. e. having li as indicatory letter.
12 RULES OF EXTERNAL SANDHI.

* ST ^fg: = sf%: sd + riddhilj. = sarddhih, this wealth.

TPt ci<*l<: = rH«*l<: faua + likdralj, — tavalkdrah, thy letter
Or in compounds, ortht + ^fet = ehiujfe: kdmya + ishtitj. = kdmyeshtik, an
offering for a certain boon.
f^TT + d 14^51: = f^iftM^f: hita + upadekal}. = hitopadesah, good advice.
$ 35. If final TO, TOT a are followed by a diphthong, whether Guna or Vriddhi,
the two vowels coalesce into the corresponding Vriddhi-vowel. Thus
si or tot + ^ d + e = di.
TO or TOT + ^ = * a + di = di.
TO or tot + TOT = TOl d + o = du.
TO or TOT + TO^ = toI d + du = du.
Ex. = rHN tava + eva = tavaiva, of thee only.
ST ^ftj? = Ufais sa + aikshishta = saikshishta, she saw.
il^ TOT1T: = IfAv: tava + oshthafy = tavaushthal;,, thy lip.
ST 4)rfj+Mifl = SHW^nnft sd + autsukyavati = sautsukyavatt, she desirous.
Or in compounds, TXH + Jjvjtj = nfwa + aisvaryam = rdmaih>aryam,
the lordship of Rama.
STiTT + TOtMnj = S*lritM«i sitd + aupamyam = sUaupamyam, similarity with
Sita, the wife of Rama.
$ 36. If a simple vowel (except a) is followed by a dissimilar vowel (simple or
diphthong), the former is changed into its corresponding semivowel. Thus
, a a
or TOT = <J or tu (a = ya.
^ or ^= ^ or tj_ ri = yri,
ua — yu.
a
7 or "3> = 11 or ^
U or ij = ^ or % e, ai = ye, yai.
I TOt or tot = *ft or ^ 0, au — yo, yau.
TO or TOT = * or n & = ri..
c a
35 or ^ = ft or 3 t = ri.
A g
^ or ^ 7 or g> = s; or 15 u = ru.
^ or ?=t or * e, al — re, rai.
I tot or to? = ^ or ^ *-o, au = ro, rau.
* *
f TO or TOT = ^ or a = va.
a t
^ or ^= fk or i = vi.
•3" or ■gi ^ or ^ = 1 or ^ ft 3 s
u ri — vri.
^ or 3* = % or % e, ai = ve, vai.
I TOT or TOT = ^7 or ^ o, au = vo, van.

* Some grammarians consider the Sandhi of a with ri optional, but they require the
shortening of the long d. Ex. W5TT + ^ffo brahmd + rishih — ««f5: brahmarshifr or Tf3
^fnt brahma rishih, Brahma, a Rishi.
 EULES OF EXTERNAL SANDHI. 13

Ex. ^fV ^r^ = ^«ra' dadhi + atra = dadhyatra, milk here.

^ TiT= ^r^TT kartri + uta = kartruta, doing moreover.
»T§ 3[^ = nfiM^ madhu + iva = madhviva, like honey.
•T^ = + aidasya = nadyaidasya, the river of Aida.
In compounds, -T^t + = «T3T*f wae# + artham = nadyartham, for the sake
of a river.
Note—Some native grammarians allow, except in compounds, the omission of this
Sandhi, but they require in that case that a long final vowel be shortened. Ex. H'W ^RJ
chakri atra may be ^^5J?J chakryatra or "Hp* ^l^f chakri atra.
§ 37. If the Guna-vowels *j e and ^fto are followed by any vowel, simple or
diphthong (except a), their last element is changed into the semivowel. Thus
^ (e) +any vowel (except a) = ^r^{ay).
(0) + any vowel (except a) = (av).
Ex. finnK — WIPRK sakhe dgachchha = sakhaydgachchha, Friend, come !
^5 — trafin; sakhe iha = sakhayiha, Friend, here !
jpft ^f? = TW%f? prabho ehi =prabhavehi, Lord, come near !
Wt ^tav= TW^Nv prabho aushadham =prabhavaushadham, Lord,
medicine.
In compounds, iff + ^51: = Jf^i: go + isah = gavUah. There are various
exceptions in compounds where aft go is treated as 7r^ gava. (§ 41.)
^ 38. If the Vriddhi-vowels ^ai and ^ftau are followed by any vowel, simple
or diphthong, their last element is changed into the semivowel. Thus
^ (ai) + any vowel = wpi (dy).
^ft (au) + any vowel = ^rt^(<fo).
Ex. fall ^Hh= PHHTT^J briyai arthah = kriydyarthah.
ftsri} PHTPpi sriyai rite = &riydyrite.
^rfW?f=T3TWftr^ ravau astamite — ravdvastamite, after sunset,
^fir = irrPlft tau iti = tdviti.
In composition, tn + = nau + artham = ndvartham, for the sake of
ships.
§ 39. These two rules, however, are liable to certain modifications :
1. The final r^y and of ^ay, ^aw, which stand according to rule
for * e, vfto, may be dropt before all vowels, except a ; not, however, in
composition. Thus most MSS. and printed editions change
^ OPHK sakhe dgachchha, not into tfgraPTO sakhaydgachchha, but into
WPTO sakha dgachchha.
^ sakhe iha, not into sakhayiha, but into ^n? ^ sakha iha.
prabho ehi, not into JW%f? prabhavehi, but into WT *f%prabha ehi.
Tl>ft ^bni prabho aushadham, not into tw^Nv prabhavaushadham, but into
TM :*n*Nprabha aushadham.
 14 BULES OF EXTERNAL SANDHI.
•
• 2. The final ^ y of dy, which stands for ^ di, may be diopt before all
vowels, and it is usual to drop it in our editions. Thus
f*5PT ^Nb sriyai arthah is more usually written fcpil to§: kriyd arthah instead
of ftsprnHb sriydyarthah-
3. The final ^1? of ^n^dv, for ^ du, may be dropt before all vowels, but is
more usually retained in our editions. Thus
sfrr tau iti is more usually written infVfil tdviti, and not "BT JpX td iti.
Note—Before the particle ^ u the dropping of the final \y and is obligatory.
§ 40. In all these cases the hiatus, occasioned by the dropping of and
^ v, remains, and the rules of Sandhi are not to be applied again.
§ 41. ^ e and 0, before short to a, remain unchanged, and the initial
TO a is elided.
Ex. f^pr TO3 = f^r%s<J slve atra = kive 'tra, in Siva there.
jpft TOJJJ^TO = s^ijfTO prabho anugrihdna—prabho 'nugrihdna,
Lord, please.
In composition this elision is optional.
Ex. ift + ^rssrrt = »ft s'srrc or iftvnvr: go + asvdh = go 'fvdh or go asvdh, cows
and horses.
In some compounds ir gava must or may be substituted for ift go, if a
vowel follows ; JNiaj: gavdkshah, a window, lit. a bull's eye ; gavendrah,
lord of kine, (a name of Krishna) ; iTOTftpj or Tftsfip} gavdjinam or go 'jinam,
a bull's hide.
Unchangeable Vowels (Pragrihya).
$ 43. There are certain terminations the final vowels of which are not
liable to any Sandhi rules. They are called pragrihya vowels by Sanskrit
grammarians. They are,
1. The terminations of the dual in \ i, '3i H, and ? e, whether of nouns or verbs.
Ex. Sift kavi imau, these two poets.
frrct win girt etau, these two hills.
5ffTW sddhil imau, these two merchants.
^f^TOnpr £an</M dnaya, bring the two friends.
Tpk ^ late ete, these two creepers.
ftrifr 5* vidye ime, these two sciences.
SpA' TO>Hct sayete arbhakau, the two children lie down.
TOT3T saydvahe dvdm, we two lie down.
JIT^a TO§ ydchete artham, they two ask for money.
Note—Exceptions occur, as TOt^ maniva, i. e. mtft J% tnani iva, like two jewels ; (fTflfa
dampatioa, i. e. ^Tift 3^ dampati iva, like husband and wife.
2. The terminations of wft ami and TO^amu, the nom. plur. masc. and the
nom. dual of the pronoun TO^TT adas.
 RULES OF EXTERNAL SANDHI. 15

Ex. ?T»rt ^P$n: ami asvdh, these horses.

^PTt ami ishaval}, these arrows.
^m^^pHff amvt arbhakau, these two children. (This follows from rule t.)

Irregular Sandhi.
§ 43. The following are a few cases of irregular Sandhi which require to
be stated. When a preposition ending in or 'srr a is followed by a verb
beginning with ^ e or ^ft 0, the result of the coalescence of the vowels is
?eor?fto, not ir ai or au.
Ex. it + ^TfT = ir»Tff pro + ejate =prejate.
TT + JHOT = T'T'TiT upa + eshate = upeshate.
U + cmriri = itarfll pra + eshayati =preshayati *.
TTT + OTfll = iftsfil' para + ekhati =parekhati.
TiT + fftaftl = JiflNfri upa + oshati = uposhati.
*TTT + 'ST?fir = MO^fri para + ohati =parohati.
This is not the case before the two verbs v^edh, to grow, and \ to go,
if raised by Guna to ^ e.
Ex. TT + = T^VTT upa + edhate = upaidhate.
+ irfir = ^fri ava + eti = avaiti. ;
In verbs derived from nouns, and beginning with ? or WT e or 0, the
elision of the final ^ or 'ST a of the preposition is optional.
§ 44. If a root beginning with ^ ri is preceded by a preposition ending
in a or ^rt a, the two vowels coalesce into 'STTt; dr instead of ^ ar.
Ex. + ^rdfrf = wrrs^fil apa + richchhati = apdrchchhaii.
^ + ^STTfiT = W^T^Tfij ava + rindti = avdrndti.
H + *)j*M = HMrf ^>ra + rijate =prdrjate.
ITT + ^^fiT = TO*rfiT pard + rishati=pardrshati.
In verbs derived from nouns and beginning with ^ ri, this lengthening of
the ^T a of the preposition is optional.
In certain compounds ^pi rinam, debt, and ^pn ri/aA, affected, take Vriddhi
instead of Guna if preceded by W a ; Tt + '^ps = JTTO pra + rinam =prdrnam,
principal debt ; ^pr + = ^ijJI^J fina + rinam — rindrnam, debt contracted
to liquidate another debt; ^ftoir + ^yr. = ^ifarrt: Soka + ritafi = kokdrtah, affected
by sorrow. Likewise '355 iih, the substitute for ^T? vdh, carrying, forms Vriddhi
with a preceding ^ a in a compound. Thus t\»J + viiva + uhah, the
acc. plur. of ftPffTT? visvavdh, is faiy!^: visvauhah,.

* In nouns derived from 11^ presA, the rule is optional. Ex. ITT or lfa>T preshya or
praishya, a messenger. Xmpresha, a gleaner, is derived from II pra and
16 RULES OF EXTERNAL SANDHI.

$ 45. If the initial ^ 0 in ^fte: oshthah, lip, and wtj: otuh, cat, is preceded in
a compound by or a, the two vowels may coalesce into ^ au or ^ft o.
Ex. ^nn; + ^tT. = ^T*r6*t or ^rtrcte: adhara + oshthah = adharaushthah or
adharoshthah, the lower lip.
^3 + ^frj: = t^rflij: or toIj; sthdla + otuh = sthdlautuh or sthdlotuh, a
big cat.
If isbft oshtha and ^ftij ota are preceded by or ^rr a in the middle of a
sentence, they follow the general rule.
Ex. »PT + ^fta: = mama + oshthah = mamaushthak, my lip.
§ 46. As irregular compounds the following are mentioned by native
grammarians :
^fcsvairam,wilfulness, and ^Hr* svairin, self-willed, from ^ + §rsi>a + ira.
VHufllVilfi akshauhini, a complete army, from + gifV'ft aksha + uhint.
TCfc. praudhah, from H + '53': pra + udhah, full-grown,
in^: prauhah, investigation, from Tf + pra + 4hah.
ffa: praishah, a certain prayer, from Tt + VW. pra + eshah. (See § 43.)
fta: praishyah, a messenger.
§ 47. The final ?ft 0 of indeclinable words is not liable to the rules of
Sandhi.
Ex. '?r^ ^ntfir aho apehi, Halloo, go away !
§ 48. Indeclinables consisting of a single vowel, with the exception of
^tT d 49), are not liable to the rules of Sandhi.
Ex. ^ ^5 i indra, Oh Indra ! 7 u umesa, Oh lord of Uma !
!?rr ^ d evam, Is it so indeed?
§ 49. If isrr d (which is written by Indian grammarians ^n&dii) is used
as a preposition before verbs, or before nouns in the sense of ' so far as'
(inclusively or exclusively) or ' a little,' it is liable to the rules of Sandhi.
Ex. 1srr = «rWTTn^ d adhyayandt = ddhyayandt, until the reading
begins.
w\ t?*<5l!i^=^=(i^lMx a ekadesdt = aikadekdt, to a certain place.
^TT WTWtfali = ^rraftPriT d dlochitam = dlochitam, regarded a little.
^TT '3reBi= ^flW d ushnam = oshnam, a little warm.
^Tf = ^f? d ihi = ehi, come here.
If ^rr d is used as an interjection, it is not liable to Sandhi, according to §48.
Ex. wr ^ f«Sc5 TTK d, evam kila tat, Ah,—now I recollect,—it is just so.
§ 50. Certain particles remain unaffected by Sandhi.
Ex. % ^5 he indra, O Indra.
5 51. A protracted vowel remains unaffected by Sandhi.
Ex. %q%WT$lgfg devadattds ehi, Devadatta, come here !
 ^ftau Wai we FINAL.

^n^dri
^r^dau)
vrt^dri
w^ali
?s\wde
'mwtdo
mwdai
<*j$di
m^di
Tsnmdd
tnvdu
('m^dawmd ^avrt
<*%avli
^avri
^avii *tso> w^driw^dri
W^iarau
<m\avo
nqavu
^ave^avai
wttavt
vfoavi
umavd ^r^dau
wisdU
*T*Uo
isxwdai
^Ttde
^n%dl
<w^di
*\*d<u*<T*rdxad<izlx<md*tT$dyli
^mdyau)
<mrctdyo
^dyai
^dyri
^dye
^dy4
wrwdyrt
<V^dyu
xrf(a*dVylidvymaf.tvdmyid ^ayri
^ayri
^ayli
^ayau)
wftayo
vftayai
*&aye
^ayH
^ayu
wftayi
<sftayi
{imaya
wse' ^Iri
<$lri
^fi
^lau
yglu
<jtlo
&*»
m
ftsU
7*1
Via
Id ^rw
tfre
ft;n
Tjra
Xra Ttyd
Tfya
^dvri
<m%dvli
WT^*mdvai
^«
$tdvwrfidvi
uonrrfkdvi
mmdvd
H^^dva
Td%vdavu4 IWITHNITIAL.
^TTa
vswaau)
^^ari
<x^ari
vnsali
**hao
mwaai
n(%ai
*^ai
vt^a4
^au
{st^nad
^ari^-^art
**taau
^waai
'xzae
^Tsali
<zt%ai
<*f$ai
^tRad
mirouWXiad

of
Vowels.
§showing
Initial
53.
with
Final
Cthe
omTable
bination

^yr<
*ffyaw
*ftyo
jy/i
tyai
^^ye
^
gyw
yri

It?

^vrg
epri
^vau
^tvo
frai

ar

■&rli
^fial

ire We
Wat

fjtrau
tiro
\rai Wai

^au
^\o
18 EXTERNAL SANDHI.

Combination of Final and Initial Consonants.

§ 53. Here, as in the case of vowels, the rules which apply to the final
consonants of words following each other in a sentence are equally applicable
to the final consonants of words following each other in a compound. The
final consonants of nominal bases too, before the so-called Parfa-terminations
(wjj bhydm, fir: bhih, an bhyal}, iff su) and before secondary (taddhita) suffixes
beginning with any consonant but *i y, are treated according to the same
rules. But the derivatives formed by means of these and other suffixes
are best learnt from the dictionary in their ready-made state; while
the changes of nominal and verbal bases ending in consonants, before
the terminations of declension and conjugation and other suffixes, are
regulated by different laws, and are best acquired in learning by heart the
principal paradigms of nouns and verbs.
$ 54. In order to simplify the rules concerning the changes of final
consonants, it is important to state at the outset that eleven only out of the
thirty-five consonants can ever stand in Sanskrit at the end of a word ; viz.
k, s^ji, z^t, urn, Ttt, 7[n, i^p, itm, j^l, '.h, -m.
1. There are five classes of consonants, consisting of five letters each;
thus giving twenty-five. In every one of these five classes the aspirates,
if final, are replaced by their corresponding unaspirated letters: ~^t/ch
by k ; ^ gh by *T g ; ^ chh, however, not by ^ ch, but by Z t.
Ex. pMdfrf^ chitralikh, painter ; voc. {VdfM^r chitralik. This reduces
the twenty-five letters to fifteen.
2. In every class the sonant (§ 58) letters, if final, are replaced by their cor
responding surd letters ; n g by ^ k ; <» d by it t, &c. Ex. hrid,
heart; nom. ^fthrit. This reduces the fifteen to ten*.
3. The palatal cA can never be final, but is replaced by the corresponding
guttural ^ k t. Ex. ^T^f vach, speech; voc. ^ro^ vdk. Final *T n does
not occur. This reduces the ten to eight. In a few roots the final
*^ j is replaced by a lingual instead of a guttural.
4. Of the semivowels, y, ^ r, T^l, \ v,) 73 I is the only one that is found at
the end of words. This raises the eight to nine letters.
5. ^ h cannot be final, but is changed into Z^t; sometimes into cR k or Ttt.
6. Of the sibilants, the only one that is found at the end of words is Visarga.
For radical ^ sh cannot be final, but is replaced by 3f t. Thus dvish

* Some grammarians allow the soft or sonant letters as final, but the MSS. and editions
generally change them into the corresponding hard letters.
t The only exceptions are technical terms such as '31^ ach, a vowel ; SMiK ajantah,
ending in a vowel, instead of ^PTcTC agantah.
 EXTERNAL SANDHI. 19

becomes fgz^ dvit. In a few words final ^ sh is changed into »s k or

Visarga.
Radical 31 $ cannot be final, but is replaced by Z t. Thus fVsi viS becomes
f%Z^vit. In some words final is changed into cs£.
Final radical is treated as Visarga.
The Visarga, therefore, raises the nine to ten j and the Anusvara, to eleven
letters, the only ones that can ever stand at the end of real words.
Hence the rules of Sandhi affecting final consonants are really reduced to
eleven heads.
§ 55. It is important to observe that no word in Sanskrit ever ends in
more than one consonant, the only exception being when an ^ r precedes a
final radical tenuis k, z t, yt L tr p. Thus
"3Tftnr^ + tt = ^af^OT^ abibhar + t = abibhar, 3. p. sing. impf. of u bhri, to carry.
^rf*W^+ ^= ^ifw^ abibhar + s = abibhar, 2. p. sing. impf. of H bhri, to carry.
*p"^T + ^=^Tt$ suvalg + s = suval, nom. sing, well jumping.
But urk, strength, nom. sing, of Hrj.
^m(<^Ss avarivart, 3. p. sing. impf. intens. of <pT vrit or epi vridh.
■HH\l amdrt, from JpT mrij. (Pan. viii. 2, 24.)
The nom. sing, of f^oft^ chikirsh is faoft: chikih, because here the r is
not followed by a tenuis.

Classification of Consonants.
J 56. Before we can examine the changes of final and initial consonants,
according to the rules of external Sandhi, we have to explain what is meant
by the place and the quality of consonants.
1. The throat, the palate, the roof of the palate, the teeth, the lips, and the
nose are called the places or organs of the letters. See $ 4.
2. By contact between the tongue and the four places,—throat, palate, roof,
teeth,—the guttural, palatal, lingual, and dental consonants are formed.
Labial consonants are formed by contact between the lips.
3. In forming the nasals of the five classes the veil which separates the
nose from the pharynx is withdrawn *. Hence these letters are called
Anundsika, i. e. co-nasal or nasalized.
4. The real Anusvara is formed in the nose only, and is called Ndsikya, i.e.
nasal.
5. The Visarga is said to be pronounced in the chest {urasya) ; the three or
five sibilants in their respective places.
6. The semivowels, too, are referred to these five places, and three of them,

Lectures on the Science of Language, Second Series, p. 145.

20 EXTERNAL SANDHI.

f Vi «? h T v> 0311 be nasalized, and are then called anundsika. (if ,

^, or ij, ^, y, I, v.) x r cannot be nasalized in Sanskrit.
\ 57. According to their quality {prayatna *, effort) letters are divided into,
I. Letters formed by complete contact {sprishta) of the organs : ^ k, ^ kh,
1 9* * * ; ^ ch, ^ chh, T^./'A, *T n ; Z t, Z th, Z d, v dh, m n ;
IT /A, 5 tf, v rfA, «T n ; Vp,i* ph, 1 b, * AA, u m. These are called
Spuria in Sanskrit, and, if they did not comprehend the nasals, would
correspond to the classical mutes.
3. Letters formed by slight contact (ishat sprishta) : *r y, T r, ?s I, ^ v (not ^ A) .
These are called Antahstha (fem.), i. e. intermediate between Spars'as and
t)shmans, which has been freely translated by semivowel or liquid.
3. Letters formed by slight opening (tshad vivrita) : X ^, 51 ^ * * *»
X ? A. These are called fjshman (flatus) in Sanskrit, which may be
rendered by sibilant or flatus.
4. Vowels are said to be formed by complete opening (vivrita) f.
$ 58. A second division, according to quality, is,
1. Surd letters : k, w kh, ^ ch, chh, Zt,z th, Tt t, V th, n p, i*ph ; X x,
^ sh, *c s, X <f>, and Visarga : A. In their formation the glottis is
open. They are called Aghosha, non-sonant.
%. Sonant letters : Jiff, tf gh, ^ jh, zd,z dh, ^ d, V dA, T £, W 6A, T n, *T w,
JJT m, n, n m ; h, Tf y, \r, <? I, ^ v, the Anusvara - m, and all vowels.
In their formation the glottis is closed. They are called Ghoshavat.
§ 59. Lastly, consonants are divided, according to quality, into,
1. Aspirated (mahdprdna) : kh, ~qgh, ^cAA, T$jh, Zth, z dh, nth, v dh,
tr ph, >T bh; X 31 s, n sh, *r s, X <p ; ^ A; the Visarga : A and
Anusvara - m.
%. Unaspirated (alpaprdna) : all the rest.
It will be seen, therefore, that the change of ^cA into «(i k is a change of
place, and that the change of ^ ch into is a change of quality; while in the
* Sanskrit grammarians call this vn^nv; TITsT dbhyantarah prayatnah, mode of articu
lation preparatory to the utterance of the sound, and distinguish it from =TT?K MMflt vdhyah
prayatnah, mode of articulation at the close of the utterance of the sound, which produces
the qualities of surd, sonant, aspirated, and unaspirated, as explained in § 58, 59.
f Some grammarians differ in their description of the degrees of closing or opening of
the organs. Some ascribe to the semivowels duhsprishta, imperfect contact, or ishadasprishta,
slight non-contact, or (shadvivrita, slight opening ; to the sibilants nemasprishta, half-contact,
i. e. greater opening than is required for the semivowels, or vivrita, complete opening ; while
they require for the vowels either vivrita, complete opening, or asprishta, non-contact. Siddh.-
Kaum. p. 10. Rig-veda-pratis. xm. 3. In the Atharva-veda-pratisakhya 1. 33. we eeght to
read ^%SWff eke 'sprishtam instead of V&i eke sprishtam.
 EXTERNAL SANDHI. 21

transition of *r ch into n g, or of itj into we should have a change both

of place and of quality.
§ 60. The changes which take place by the combination of the eleven
final letters with initial vowels or consonants may be divided therefore into
two classes.
Final letters are changed, 1. with regard to their places or organs, 2. with
regard to their quality.
1. Changes of Place.
$ 61. The only final consonants which are liable to change of place are
the Dentals, the Anusvara, and Visarga. The Dentals, being incompatible
with Palatals and Linguals, become palatal and lingual before these letters.
Anusvara and Visarga adapt themselves as much as possible to the place of
the letter by which they are followed. All other changes of consonants
are merely changes of quality ; these in the case of Dentals, Anusvara, and
Visarga, being superadded to the changes of place.
§ 6%. Final }{t before palatals (^ch, ^cM, T^jh, sr«, 3? 3) is changed
into a palatal.
Ex. inr+ ^ = fra tat + cha = tachcha, and this.
TnT+ "P35rTf% = HfWwfVl tat + chhinatti = tachchhinatti, he cuts this.
cTiT+
X smflfri
t - rtwiifird
t tat + srinoti
' ' = tach&rinoti,
' ' he hears this *.
rnr -f- *imri = d^mil tat-\-jdyate = tajjdyate, this is born. The final
if t is changed into ^ch and then into *{j according to § 66.
In composition, >mr+ inn — »i'l-nirll jagat +jetd =jagajjetd, conqueror of
the world.
The same change would take place before an initial ~§jh ; and before an
initial TT t might become either ^ j or Mm. § 68.
£ 63. Final before vt j, T^jh, *T n, and is changed to palatal *{n.
Ex. irP^+ »mfrl = rl iy *| fit tan -{-jayati = tdfyayati, he conquers them.
Note —Rules on the changes of final before ^ch, ~^chh, and 3^/ will be given
hereafter. See § 73, 74.
$ 64. Final \ t before ^ t, ^ th, 3 d, ^ dh, w n (not ^ sh, Pan. viil 4, 43)
is changed into a lingual.
Ex. rTfT + TTff= rT|*l(i tat + dayate — taddayate. The final is changed
into 7 t and then into ^ d according to § 66.
In composition, TTif + TTWT=; (Tf^oRT tat + tikd = tattikd, a gloss on this.
^WiTn + 7^; = ^H7^C etat + thakkurah = etatthakkurah, the idol of him.
The same change would take place before an initial ~z dh ; and before an
initial JJT n, 7^ t might become either ?rforJU«. $ 68.
* 51 £ according to § 92, is generally changed to ^ chh : rces fulfil tachchhrinoti.
22 EXTERNAL SANDHI.

§ 65. Final H n before xd, ^ dh, v^n (not * sh, Pan. vm. 4, 43) is
changed to to n.
Ex. *T^T«! + TWT: = H^UlilHC mahdn + ddmarah = mahdnddmarah, a great
uproar.
Note—Rules on the changes of 'Hn before Zj and 7?A (not \sh) will be given hereafter
(§ 74). The changes of place with regard to final Anusvara (to) and Visarga (h) will be
explained together with the changes of quality to which these letters are liable.

a. Changes of Qualify.
§ 66. Sonant initials require sonant finals.
Surd initials require surd finals.
As all final letters (except nasals and I) are surd, they remain surd
before surds. They are changed into their corresponding sonant letters
before sonants.
As the nasals have no corresponding surd letters, they remain unchanged
in quality, though followed by surd letters.
Examples : 1 . «(j k before sonants, changed into n g :
«Hjct, 4- *TOfrr=s samyak + uktam —- samyaguktam, Well said !
ft^f + VPlftji = fiPVPrfW dhik + dhanagarvitam = dhigdhanagarvitam, Fie
on the purse-proud man !
In composition, f^?g + n*TC = (<«m: dik + gajah = diggajah, an elephant
supporting the globe at one of the eight points of the compass.
Before Pada-terminations : fir^ + ft: = f^fhr: dik + bhih = digbhih,mstrum. plur.
Before secondary suffixes beginning with consonants, except ^ y : ^T^j +
ft Jlftw vdk + min = vdgmin, eloquent,
a. ^ t before sonants, changed into
trfr3T7 + ^rt = nfisHSM parivrdt + ayam =parivrddayam, he is a mendicant.
xrfin^T + ^ufri = qftwTff^rfll parivrdt + hasati =parivrdd hasati, the mendi
cant laughs ; (also trftars ^ffir parivrdd dhasati. § 70.)
In composition, tfftWT^ + fk& = ^ftaTf^ja' parivrdt + mitram=parivrddmi-
tram, a beggar's friend.
Before Pada-terminations : qftflT^ + ft: = qfonfjp parivrdt + bhih = pari-
vrddbhih.
$.\p before sonants, changed into ^ b :
+ ^TW = !Sf,ra kakup + atra = kakubatra, a region there, (inflectional
base «IT^i>? kakubh.)
^T^+ TTif: = n?: ap + ghatah — abghatah, a water-jar.
+ »Pf: = sserfM: ap +jayah = abjayah, obtaining water.
\T^+ »rin = -nmn: ap + mayah = ammayah, watery. § 69.
+ ft: = CTftws kakup + bhih = kakubbhih, instrum. plur.
 EXTERKAL SANDHI. 23

4. T^t before sonants, changed into ^ d, except before sonant palatals and
Unguals, when (according to § 62) it is changed into and 3 d:
^ftlT + = uft^a' sarit + atra = saridatra, the river there.
spriT + = ipnfcn jagat + isah =jagadisah, lord of the world.
*T?Tr + V^: = H^V^! inahat + dhanuh — mahaddhanuh, a large bow.
*T?r^ + fir: = m£f£: mahat + bhih = mahadbhih, instrum. plur.
7T / before sonant palatals, changed into *{J: see $ 62 :
*fPS — sarit +jalam = sarijjalam, water of the river.
before sonant Unguals, changed into ■?</.- see $ 62:
OTiT + srac = 'fiT|T>TC etat + ddmarah = etadddmarah, the uproar of them.
Note—There are exceptions to this rule, but they are confined to Taddhita derivatives
which are found in dictionaries. Thus final TT t before the possessive suffixes TH mat,
^ vat, for^ vin, vala is not changed. Ex. f^SJif + ^TT = fagffl{ vidyut+vat=
vidyutvat, possessed of lightning. Final ^ s too, which represents Visarga, remains
unchanged before the same Taddhitas. Thus TT3l^ + fr^= n^\?<st^tejas+vin=tejasvin,
instead of J^tf^{tejovin ; see § 84. 3. n^ffl*^ + Tff = a^ftfiPHiT jyotis+mat=jyotishmat,
instead of i*fl fn^ a^jyotirmat. § 84.
§ 6y. "t^t before 7^ I is not changed into ^ d, but into I.
Ex. W7^+ c5W = TTgw tat + labdham = tallabdham, this is taken.
rtrfli — ^sJcili brihat + laldtam = brihallaldtam, a large fore
head.
§ 68. Additional changes take place if the final surds cf k, ^ t, w t, r^p are
followed by nasals, chiefly "H n and H m. The nasals being sonant, they
require the change of ^ Ic, z t, \ t, and ^ p into n\g, ~sd,^d, and \b;
but these final sonants may be further infected by the nasal character of the
initial nasals, and may be written ^A, j», T^n, hot.
Ex. + «TPT: = fi^fPTJ or fi^fPTt dik + ndgah = digndgah or dinndgah,
a world-elephant.
HVfc57 + «T^fiT = *Tgfe|^fK or »TVft5JnTff(T madhulit + nardati = madhu-
lidnardati or madhulinnardati, the bee hums.
»PTtl + HTO = fWro or ipnTTTI jagat -\-ndtha}} =jagadndthah or jagan-
ndthah, lord of the world.
«T^t = ^T^^ or *n\i<(\ ap + nadi = abnadi or amnadi, water-river,
jrra\ + TO:
w = HT"W. o or HT^ra;0 prdk + mukhah =prdgmukhah, orprdnmu-
MaA, facing the east.
HTiT + htt= TOHli or H^wnr bhavat + matam = bhavadmatam or 4Aa-
vanmatam, your opinion.
Note—If a word should begin with a palatal or lingual n n or ^ n) then a final »^ f
would change its place or organ at the same time that it became a nasal. It would become
■ *^ 2 or JIT n. There are, however, no words in common use beginning with T S or ».
24 EXTERNAL SANDHI.

§ 69. Before the suffix irq maya and before >n?r mdtra the change into
the nasal is not optional, but obligatory.
Ex. 4- »r*i = vdk + mayam = vdhmayam, consisting of speech.
T*rf?5^ + TTW = HVf^pwra madhulit + mdtram = madhulinmdtram, merely
a bee.
7TH + jtt^ =s rl«*il<4 tat + mdtram = tanmdtram, element.
Note —Ninety-six is always mu^frt shannavati, never NJUIHfri shadnavati.
§ 70. The initial ^ A, if brought into immediate contact with a final
* k 7 < (* rf), ^ 2 d), p A), is commonly, not necessarily,
changed into the sonant aspirate of the class of the final letter ; tt gh, z dk,
V dh, H bh.
Ex. ftr* + ^fiSTT: = ftl^fwH: or ftl'tlftcH: dhik + hastinah = dhighastinah or
dhigghastinah, Fie on the elephants !
trftcTre + ^tt: = u(\dl i^K: or qftwnpn parivrdt + hatah —parivrddhatah
or parivrdddhatah, the mendicant is killed.
KIT + ^TT = U^lf or Ttwk tat + hutam = tadhutam or taddhutam, this is
sacrificed.
+ ^TTff = ^T5?TW or imnri ap + haranam = abharanam or abbhara-
nam, water-fetching.
§ Ji. Final ^ re, Tff re, and n re, preceded by a short vowel and followed
by any vowel, are doubled.
Ex. VR*^ ^ng: = vmro dhdvan + a&vah — dhdvannaSvah, a running horse.
Hi*l* + ^rer= W^UUST pratyan + dste=pratyanndste, he sits turned
toward the west.
^rrei = CTrarol sugan + dste = suganndste, he sits counting well*.
If T re, iffN re, and re are preceded by a long vowel and followed by any
vowel, no change takes place.
Ex. «m)h + VTgirer kavin dhvayasva, call the poets.
§ 72. Final ^ re and TT^re may be followed by initial S1 \sh, ^ * without
causing any change ; but it is optional to add a g> k after the ^ re and a
^t after the n^n. Thus nSa becomes nksa (or nkchha, § 93);
nsha becomes hksha; hsa becomes ^ffl nksa; 7T?I nha becomes
Tpr^T nt&a (or ns^ nkchha); ire nsha becomes ?j2tt ntsha; *m nsa becomes
Tjfftr ntsa.
Ex. JTT? + ^ = OT^rrt' or Ul^lri (or HTfWfr) prdn + Sete=prdnSete or
pranks'ele (or prdnkchhete).

* Technical terms like ^Tlf^ uriddi, a list of suffixes beginning with un, or (ns>n tinanta,
words ending in tin, are exempt from this rule. See also Wilkins, Sanskrita Grammar, § 30.
 EXTERNAL SANDHI. 25

WIU^ + TTtfif = ^imnfk or wn^Ttftr sugan + sarati = sugansarati or

sugantsarati.
§ 73. The same rule applies to final w n before ^ 6 and *f s, but not
before ^ sh, where it remains unchanged. Before 3^ £ it is first changed
into palatal 5^ n* 63) ; and *3is ni may again be changed to ^31 ncM,
nchchh 72, 93), or *^ iichh. Before ^s, ii» may remain unchanged,
or ns may be changed into trt nts.
Ex. TTT»^+ ^ = TTrnrT tan + shat = tdnshat, those six.
?w+ 3jt|«3t^= (rrs5ji|wT«T or m<nn$WT^ or riiv^ai|(5rH or rnvsni|rfm
tan + idrdHldn = tdMdrdilldn or tdnchidrdHldn or tdfichchhdrddldn
or tdnchhdrduldn, those tigers.
TTT^+?T|^=!rrai^ or HT*W^ tdn + sahate = tdnsahate or tdntsahate,
he bears them.
(f^r) + ^ = f^vw or r^frfj hin {hims) +su — hinsu or hintsu, among
enemies. (The base figs hims, before the *T su of the loc. plur., is
treated as a Pada.) See $ 53, 55.
J 74. Final H n before initial ep k, ^kh, and \p, t§ph, remains unchanged.
Final «^ n before ^ ch, ^ chh, requires the intercession of sr L
Final before ^t, z^th, requires the intercession of \sh. ,
Final t^ra before w t, \ th, requires the intercession of j ». >
Before these inserted sibilants the original w» is changed to Anusvara.
Ex. ^t«T + ^RTT= hasan + chakdra = hasamschakdra, he did it
laughing.
WiT + 5iI>i: = *lW34l'i: dhdvan + chhdgah = dhdvamichhdgah, a run
ning goat.
^c<J«f + frfpr. = ^Tjfffpr: chalan + tittibhah = chalamshtittibhah, a
moving tittibha-bird.
*T?T^ + ZWi = mahdn + thakkurah = mahdmshthakkurah, a great
idol.
TTiPT + = inform patan + taruh =patamstaruh, a falhng tree.
Note —H$\\»{prasdm, quiet, forms the nom. HwypraJdn; but this final «J n is treated
before ch, ^ chh, 7 1, \ th, \t, ~\ th, like a final \m, Ex. USIT^ + f^ftfiT = H T-N »fj Cefj,
i. e. RJJTftpftflT prasdn + chinoti =zprasdnchinoti; not H5JTp5«fnTr praidmichinoti. (P&n.
viii. 3, 7.)
§ 75. Final wra before c^/is changed into 75 /. This <^ lis pronounced
through the nose, and is written with the Anusvara dot over it. It is usual
in this case to write the Anusvara as a half-moon, called Arddha-chandra.
Ex. c5T»t: = H^TBW; mahdn + Idbhah = mahdl Idbhah, large gain.
* To allow to remain unchanged before TFI^s is a misprint which occurred inBenfey's
large grammar, but has long been corrected by that scholar.
E
26 EXTERNAL SANDHI.

$ 76. A final Z t before *f s may remain unchanged, or K t may be inserted.

Ex. VZ + vftjK = rarfar: or TCWfan *^a£ + saritah — shatsaritah or shattsa-
ritah, six rivers.

Anusvdra and Final *r m.

$ 77. n m at the end of words remains unchanged if followed by any
initial vowel.
Ex. fmn + kim + atra — falg kimatra, What is there ?
Before consonants it may, without exception, be changed to Anusvara.
This is the general rule. The exceptions are simply optional, viz.
Before « k, ^ kh, ^ g, \gh, ^ n, the final * m or Anusvara may be
^ changed into T n.
Before ^ ch, ^ chh, *{j, i$jh, n, to ^ n.
Before z t, Zs (h, T d, 7 <#A, Tir n, to n.
Before t, ^ M, ^ c?, 1^ </A, «T w, to «r n.
Before r^p, i*ph, ^ H 4A, ir m, to it m.
Before ^ y, 75 I, ^ i>, to 3f y, ^ I, f v. See § 56. 6.
Hence it follows that final 11 m may be changed into Anusvara before all
consonants, and must be so changed only before 3Tn£, \sh, *r s, ? A, and ^r,
the five consonants which have no corresponding nasal class-letter.
It would be most desirable if scholars would never avail themselves of the
optional change of final Anusvara into ^n, *Tk, VS^n, i^n, « »ra. We should
then be spared a number of compound letters which are troublesome both
in writing and printing ; and we should avoid the ambiguity as to the original
nature of these class-nasals when followed by initial sonant palatals, Unguals,
and dentals. Thus if fli sprfir tarn jayati, he conquers her, is written
irnnrfw tan jayati, it may be taken for flT^ iprfti tan jayati, he conquers
them, which, according to § 63, must be changed into HTWrflT tan jayati.
In the same manner dl^mjfd tan damayati may be either TTT^ H*nrfir tan
damayati, he tames them, or rfTH ^RUfll tarn damayati, he tames her. All
this uncertainty is at once removed if final * m is always changed into
Anusvara, whatever be the initial consonant of the following word.
■ $ 78. at the end of a word in pausd, i. e. at the end of a sentence,
remains unchanged. Some grammarians ((} 8, note) allow its being changed
into Anusvara, and it is written so throughout in this grammar. Ex. ^4
evam, thus, (or v^n evam.)
Ex. far*t+ cjrdfq = 'Nr cR^rft (or faf-rtfa) kim + karoshi = kim karoshi (or
kin karoshi), What doest thou?
= SRf »rf? (or Slejyfis) satrum +jahi = katrumjahi (or katrun
jahi), kill the enemy.
 EXTERNAL SANDHI. 27

+ fTtfir = iltfw (or H<fliRfir) nadim + tarati = nadim tarati (or

nadin tarati), he crosses the river.
Jrjj*i+ tprfii = ^J% Hlfri (or Jjij^Hfri) ffurum + namati — guruih namati
(or gurun namati), he salutes the teacher.
f^+HiW = 'Nr Uic? (or n+*ijirf) kim +phalam = kim phalam (or Aim
phalam), What is the use ?
+ *ffai^ = $rr^ jfNhr^ (or ^ll^wflHiwri) sdstram + mimamsate =
Sdstram mimamsate (or idstram mimamsate), he studies the book.

Before ^ y, *^ I, \ v:
«rft*<x+ *Tffk = *H3T xrrflT (or gpujSnftr) satvaram+ydti = satvaram ydti
(or satvaray ydti), he walks quickly.
firenH + = falTT (or fwr§>^) vidydm + labhate = vidydm la-
Mate (or vidydl labhate), he acquires wisdom.
H^ + ^ = K (or TT^) tarn + veda = tarn veda (or tew wette), I
know him.
Before ^ r, sr s, \ sh, *c s, ? h :
Ttf^fir = oS^a Of^Crf karunam + roditi = karunam roditi, he cries
piteously.
jmraiH+ ^TfT = \mm yfr iayydydm + kete = kayydydm kete, he lies on
the couch.
inTT = Htasj i^T moksham + seveta = moksham seveta, let a man
cultivate spiritual freedom.
*TVTiT + ^?rfir = *Pjt ^rfk madhuram + hasati = madhuram hasati, he
laughs sweetly.
§ 79. Final i^m before ^ h, if ? A be immediately followed by >^m,
^ V> \v> niay be treated as if it were immediately followed by these
letters. See, however, § jy.
Ex. ftw + = f% ^ or farjgri Aim + Anwte = Aim Arawte or Aira Arawte, What
does he hide?
f%H + ?n = 'f% ?r: or f*8{ m kim + hyah = kim hyafr or Aiy hyah, What
about yesterday?
ft^ + Vc9*rfi( = f3> WcPlfif or ftWRWfll Aim + hmalayati = kirn hmalayati
or kimhmalayati, What does he move ?
J 80. If ^ Ari is preceded by the preposition ^ sam, an ^ s is inserted,
and JT m changed to Anusvara.
Ex. + ^7TC = Hh£A: sam + kritah — samskritah, hallowed.
§ 8s. In TOT»T samrdj, nom. samrdt, king, * m is never changed.
E 3
 28 EXTERNAL SANDHI.

Visarga and Final w s and ^ r.

§ 8a. The phonetic changes of final sibilants, which are considered the
most difficult, may be reduced to a few very simple rules. It should only
be borne in mind :
1. That there are really five sibilants, and not three ; that the signs for the
guttural and labial sibilants became obsolete, and were replaced by
the two dots (:) which properly belong to the Visarga only, i. e. to the
unmodified sibilant.
2. That all sibilants and Visarga are surd, and that their proper corresponding
sonant is the ^ r.
§ 83. The only sibilant which can be final in pausd is the Visarga. If
Visarga is followed by a surd letter, it is changed into the sibilant of that
class to which the following surd letter belongs.
It should be observed, however, that the guttural and labial sibilants are
now written by : and that the same sign may also be used instead of any
sibilant, if followed by a sibilant.
Ex. utt: + oRpr: = jrc *sm: (originally TnrX «Km:) tatah + kdmab = tatab kdmab
(originally tatay^kdmab), hence love.
+ ^5: = ^hij: pHrnab + chandrab =p4rnai chandrab, the full
moon.
iTtt: + WTT= Bt^nn taroh + chhdyd = taros chhdyd, the shade of
the tree.
Wfan + dcifa = jfttrrpsfir bhitab + (alati = bhitashtalati, the frightened
man is disturbed.
>rnr: + T^r. = unns; bhagnab + thakkurah = bhagnashthakkurah, the
, broken idol.
■JTOT: + <ftt= -rarcftt nadydb + tiram = nadydstiram, the border of the
river.
•TSTT: + *Trt = «TOT: *Ttt (originally «T3fTX W) nadydb + param = nadydb
param (originally nadydcf>pdram), the opposite shore of a river.
Visarga before sibilants:
TO + f^j: = UHPasiSi: or f^rsp suptah + iihib — suptah kikib or
: suptab, iiiub, the child sleeps.
*rm: + ^te^K = WTOfe^n or «m: Mli^K bhdgab + shodasah = bhdgash
shodakab or bhdgab shodasah, a sixteenth part.
HVJH: + *nh = uvjhwm: or TTSR: Tfn: prathamab + sargab =prathamas-
sargah or prathamab sargah, the first section.
Note 1—If Visarga is followed by an initial ts, it is not necessarily
changed into dental ^ s, but may remain Visarga, as if followed by ^ s.
 EXTERNAL SANDHI. 29

Ex. $13: + wtfr = ^17: mxfa iathah + tsarati = kathah isarati, a wicked
man cheats.
■st: + W^: = W^: kah + tsaruh = kah tsaruh, Which is the handle of
the sword?
Note 2—If, on the contrary, Visarga is followed by a sibilant with a surd
letter, the Visarga is frequently dropt in MSS. (Pan. vih. 3, 36, v.)
Ex. ^t: 4 = iprr: or i^T W devdh 4 stha = devdh stha or devd stha,
you are gods ; (also ^TTOJ devds stha.)
+ HM.(rt = '5ft;: wwirf or fft *«JcfiT AariA 4 sphurati = Aari£ sphurati
or Aari sphurati, Hari appears.
Note 3—If nouns ending in ^ is or 7^ us, like Aavi# or dhanuh,
are followed by words beginning with 0^ k, ^ M, ^j?, t^jsA, and are governed
by these words, ~^sh may be substituted for final Visarga. ^rfqfwr^fTT or sflrftb
fmfrf sarpishpibati or sarpih pibati, he drinks ghee ; but fff¥W *rft}: ftr«r r><^<<*
tishthatu sarpih, piba tvam udakam, let the ghee stand, drink thou water.
§ 84. If final Visarga is followed by a sonant letter, consonant or vowel,
the general rule is that it be changed into x.r. (See, however, § 86.) This rule
admits, however, of the following exceptions :
1. If the Visarga is preceded by ^rt d, and followed by a sonant letter
(vowel or consonant), the Visarga is dropt.
2. If the Visarga is preceded by 'at a, and followed by any vowel except ^1 a,
the Visarga is dropt.
3. If the Visarga is preceded by 'ST a, and followed by a sonant consonant,
the Visarga is dropt, and the a changed to ^ft 0.
4. If the Visarga is preceded by ^ a, and followed by a, the Visarga is
dropt, a changed into 'srt 0, and the initial a elided. The sign of
the elision is s, called Avagraha.
Examples of the general rule :
^ifo: 4 = oRfar?* kavih 4 ayam = kavirayam, this poet.
Tfel 4 33 fit = ^fa^fd ravih 4 udeti = ravir udeti, the sun rises,
ift: 4- 'l«ifrf = nril'-sfff gauh +gachchhati = gaur gachchhati, the ox walks,
f^wp + «ntfir= fauniNfri vishnuh +jayati = vishnur jayati, Vishnu is victo
rious.
^ft: 4 "spr. = *nffrSv: pakoh + bandhah =pakorbandhah, the binding of the
cattle.
9T* ?¥• = «?^Jr* muhub + muhuh = muhurmuhuh, gradually. -
^TO 4 ^ifir = ^PT#Tfir vdyuh 4 vdti = vdyur vdti, the wind blows,
f^j: + gwfif = f^raifHfiT kikuh 4 hasati = kikur hasati, the child laughs,
fa: 4 vpr, = ftr*N: nih + dhanah = nirdhanah, without wealth.
30 EXTERNAL SANDHI.

+ 'ftfir: = JTtfffir. duh + nitih = durnitih, of bad manners,

stftfri: + fa: = -rlfl Ph P*: jyotih + bhih =jyotirbhih, instrum. plur.
Examples of the first exception :
■wsn'. + «r*ft = ^nft ahdh + ami = asvd ami, these horses.
VPTffK + ^?TTO = WTmn t^^t dgatah + rishayah = dgatd rishayah, the poets
have arrived.
^in: + inrrc = ^HT *nTTC hatdh + gajdh = Aafci gajdh, the elephants are killed.
STWHTJ + «ptt: = Win «nn: unnatdh + nagdh = unnatd nagdh,, the high
mountains.
15raT: + *nnr = '5T^T *Tift chhdtrdh ■+ yatante = chhdtrd yatante, the pupils
strive.
*rr: + fa: = *nfa: waA + MiA = mdbhih, instrum. plur. of TT^ ma*, moon.
Examples of the second exception :
^Tirc + 'wnnr: = ^TT VPTIR fcfaA + dgatah = kida dgatah, Whence come ?
?K + w. = «S kah + eshah = £a eshah, Who is he ?
+ ^fat = «S ^fa: AaA + rishih — ka rishih, Who is the poet ?
i&r. + ^snf^ = ^iTfif manah +ddi = mana ddi, beginning with mind.
Examples of the third exception :
$fl*H: + TO == 5nH»ft »hK sobhanah + gandhah = bobhano gandhah, a sweet
scent.
"•JjTT: + T(z: = •Jjnft TO n&tanah + ghatah = nutano ghatah, a new jar.
»ry^j: + vrwm — *V^ft <!)°MU murdhanyah + nakdrah = m4rdhanyo nakdrah,
the lingual re.
fflfuin + ^ta: = ftrtro^ ^TC nirvdnah + dipah = nirvdno dipah, the lamp is
blown out.
%nftlT. + »rm: = ^nrftft »mr: a^/aA + »ia*aA = atffto mdsah, the past month.
^iH + 1<^: = ^nft kritah + yatnah = kriio yatnah, effort is made.
+ TJR: — HHlw manah + ramah = manoramah, (a compound), pleasing
to the mind, delightful.
*mi -f- fa: = manah + bhih = manobhih, instrum. plur.
Examples of the fourth exception :
T{x: + ^pj = ^sii narah + ayam — naro 'yam, this man.
^: + *r»fhr. = %^s^fhr: vedah + adhitah = vedo 'dhitah, the Veda has been
read.
TO + = ^nfts^ ayah + astram = ayo 'stram, an iron-weapon.
§ 85. There are a few words in which the final letter is etymologically t r*.
* It is called OTtlft PPSPTJ rajdto visargah, the Visarga produced from r. It occurs,
preceded by a, in ^pTt punah, again ; VTtf. prdtah, early; WHt antah, within ; T5T: sraA,
heaven ; in the voc. sing, of nouns in ^ ri, ex. farH pi<aA, father, from ij pitri, &c. ; and
in verbal forms such as vuil'l*. ajdyar, 2. 3. sing. impf. of iw^jdgri.
 EXTERNAL SANDHI. 31

This ^ r, as a final, is changed into Visarga, according to § 82, and it

follows all the rules affecting the Visarga except the exceptional rules § 84.
a, 3, 4 ; i. e. if preceded by *r a, and followed by any sonant letter, vowel
or consonant, the ^ r is retained.
' Ex. wti + ^TptT = 3«Rfa punah + api =punarapi, even again.
HTcTC + = prdtah + eva =prdtarevaf very early,
anr: + = «Tirc£ff bhrdtah + dehi = bhrdtar dehi, Brother, give !
§ 86. No ^ r can ever be followed by another ^ r. Hence final Visarga,
whether etymologically 5« or ^ r, if followed by initial ^ r, and therefore
by § 84 changed to ^ r, is dropt, and its preceding vowel lengthened.
Ex. + uWci = ftr^ tT3TW vidhuh + rajate — vidhti rdjate, the moon shines.
Win + = UTflT T^f bhrdtah + raksha — bhrdtd raksha, Brother, protect !
*pT: + ^*ft = TTT T^ift punah + rogi =pund rogi, ill again.
These are the general rules on the Sandhi of final Visarga, *r s and ^ r.
The following rules refer to a few exceptional cases.
§ 87. The two pronouns «: sah and 5^; eshah, this, become *c sa and
^ esha before consonants and vowels, except before short 'ST a and at the
end of a sentence.
Ex. w. + ^ifri = *r ^Tfif sal), -f daddti — sa daddti, he gives.
W. ^5: = *T ^5: sah indrah — sa indrah, this Indra. The two vowels
are not liable to Sandhi.
But w. +,WH^=?ffs>T^iT sah + abhavat = so 'bhavat, he was.
JjTTC w. mritah sah, he is dead.
Sometimes Sandhi takes place, particularly for the sake of the metre.
Thus *r ^ sa esha becomes occasionally ffa saisha, he, this person. *i
sa indrah appears as ^rj: sendrah. (Pan. VI. 1, 134.)
The pronoun ^ syah, he, follows the same rule optionally in poetry. (Pan.
vi. 1, 1330
§ 88. »rh bhoh, an irregular vocative of vrm^bhavat, thou, drops its Visarga
before all vowels and all sonant consonants.
Ex. >rt: + $$TR= *ft f^TR bhoh + Udna = bho isdna, Oh lord !
+ ^rr: = »Tt ^r. bhoh + devdh = bho devdh, Oh gods !
The same applies to the interjections vpfti bhagoh and ^nft: aghoh, really
irregular vocatives of H'Mrf bhagavat, God, and 'snmr aghavat, sinner.
§ 89. Numerous exceptions, which are best learnt from the dictionary,
occur in compound and derivative words. A few of the more important
may here be mentioned.
 EXTEBNAL SANDHI.

I, Nouns in ^SW^as, ^8 is, us, forming the first part of a Compound.

1, Before derivatives of kri, to do (e. g. ^ kara, ssk kdra), before deriva
tives of opr kam, to desire (e.g. iBRtkdnta, kdma), before kamsa,
goblet, w kumbha, jar, pdtra, vessel, ku§d, counter, ^KVSf karni,,
ear, the final Visarga of bases in as is changed to ^ s. (Pan. viii.
3> 46-)
Ex. ^TV. + «H3 = itTOrT: hreyah + karah = kreyaskarah, making happy.
+ ^PC = ahah + karah = ahaskarah, sun.
tnn + = ^nrew: ayah 4 kumbliah = ayaskumbhah, iron-pot.
There are several words of the same kind—which are best learnt from
the dictionary—in which the Visarga is changed into dental sibilant.
(Pan. viii. 3, 47.)
Ex, w*T. + tj^ = ^tvwt<? adhah +padam — adhaspadam,
4 ^rfif: = f^wfic: divah +patih = divaspatih, lord of heaven.
4 *rfrT: = ^TTOTfin vdchah +patih = vdchaspatih, lord of speech.
ht: + «Kt: = wranc: bhdh 4 karah — bhdskarah, sun, &c.
2. Nouns in ^ is and ^ us, such as ^fa: havih, *T«t: dhanuh, &c, before
words beginning with ts k, 7^ kh, p, and is ph, always take ^ sh.
(Pap. viii. 3, 45.)
Ex. *rfq: + ttht = 4tfQu|IH sarpih +pdnam = sarpishpdnam, ghee-drinking,
^rrg: + «SI*i: = qnraiK dyuh + kdmah = dyushkdmah, fond of life.
Note—*"5*3<S» bhrdtushputrah, nephew, is used instead of WTJt ^«T: bhrdtuh putrah, the
son of the brother.

II. Words in as, is, ^t&^us, treated as Prepositions.

1. The words «tr: namah, TO purah, frit: tirah, if compounded prepositionally
with ^ kri, change Visarga into *f 8. (Pan. viii. 3, 40.)
Ex. tpr. + csrc: = «TOWt: namah + kdrah = namaskdrah, adoration ; (but
«W ejn^T namab kritvd, having performed adoration.)
ijt: + = M^rd purah + kritya =puraskritya, having preferred,
fat: + ^rtft = firewrt tirah + kdri = tiraskdri, despising. In frc tirah
the change is considered optional. (Pan. viii. 3, 42.)
2. The words fa: nih, JJ ^rf?: vaAi#, wfo: unp prdduh, ^5: chatuh,
if compounded with words beginning with elf k, M, or is ph, take
^ sA instead of final Visarga. (Pan. vm. 3, 41.)
Ex. ftlt 4 «SPT: = fHMiW wiA + kdmah = nishkdmah, loveless.
fa: + '•Epj: = fawsw: nih 4 phalah = nishphalah, fruitless.
^rrfa: + "^nf = dvih + kritam = dvishkritam, made manifest.
p + ^nt = J!*^rif + kritam — dushkritam, badly done, criminal.
^jp + cfit^o1 = ^ri*+^jj chatuh + konam = chatushkonam, square.
 EXTERNAL SANDHI. 33

III. Nouns in ^[as, ^is, g^us, before certain Taddhita Suffixes.

1. Before the Taddhita suffixes m^mat, -m^vat, fla vin, and vala, the final
^ s appears as ^ * or ^'sh ($ 100).
Ex. Tim + ftr^= rl »| f*si tejah + vin — tejasvin, with splendour,
i^ftfir: + JTJT = nfffir^TJT jyotih + mat =jyotishmat, with light,
rsrc + ^c5= <*)*«M rajah, + vala = rajasvala, a buffalo.
2. Before Taddhita suffixes beginning with tt /, the ^ s, preceded by ^ i or
3" u, is changed into "^sh, after which the at becomes 7 1.
Ex. ^rf#: + ^04j archih + tvam = archishtvam, brightness.
^rg: + irt = ^HfT^ chatuh + tayam = chatushtayam, the aggregate of
four.
3. Before the Taddhita suffixes xit?? pdsa, grgi kalpa, «ir ka, and in compo
sition with the verb Vffsqffr kdmyati, nouns in ^c^as retain their final ^s,
while nouns in J^is and g^ws change it into vsh (§ 100).
Ex. me + tjt^t = TTOrod payah +pdsam =payaspdsam, bad milk.
Vm + «R^i = tnrecoi payah + kalpam =payaskalpam, a little milk.
*T$n + «ir: = T^HSE yasah + kah = ya&askah, glorious.
tt$i: + cdiuifrl = inpwvfll yasah + kdmyati = yasaskdmyati, he is am
bitious.
*rfib + trr$i = ^fqim^i sarpih +pdSam = sarpishpds'am, bad ghee.
*rfiH + cirgi = flfferei sarpih + kalpam = sarpishkalpam, a little ghee.
*r?r: + oir: = V^T«(r: dhanuh + kah = dhanushkah, belonging to the bow.
V«p + <*l«|fri = V^anwrfif dhanuh + kdmyati = dhanushkdmyati, he
desires a bow.
$ 90. Nouns ending in radical ^ r 85) retain the ^ r before the ^ su of
the loc. plur., and in composition before nouns even though beginning with
surds.
Ex. ^TC + *J = vdr + su = vdrshu, in the waters.
fnr.+ ttRt: = Jft^fH: gir+patih=girpatih, lord of speech.
In compounds, however, like Tftxrfin girpatih, the optional use ofVisarga is sanc
tioned (Pan. vm. 2, 70, v.), and we meet with TffcufiT: gthpatih, ^Tfir: dMh-
patih, and vtfir. dhurpatih; ^:nfin svahpatih and witfri: svarpatlh, lord of
heaven ; ^TfjTrfir. ahahpatih and ^Mfdl aharpatih, lord of the day.
^r?^ ahar, the Pada base of ahan, day, is further irregular,
because its final ^ r is treated like ^ * before the Pada-termina-
tions, and in composition before words beginning with ^ r: hence
^r^: + fa: = ^r^fir: ahah + bhih = ahobhih ; ^r?: + *J = ^t*J ahah + su =
ahahsu ; ?r?: + TJ^: = VH^kld'. ahah + rdtrah = ahordtrah, day and night.
(Pan. vm. a, 68, v.)
34 EXTERNAL SANDHI.

§ 91. chh at the beginning of a word, after a final short vowel, and
after the particles *TT d and ht md, is changed to ^ chchh.
Ex. TTW + WTT = «R Vtl fa^a + chhdyd = tara chchhdyd, thy shade.
IT + f^iT^ *n PW^H + chhidat = md chchhidat, let him not cut.
^TT + fT^Tfll = VTnSl^rftl <2 + chhddayati = dchchhddayati, he covers.
After any other long vowels, this change is optional.
«m3*mi or W^^BCPTI badarichhdya or badarichchhdyd, shade of Badaris.
In the body of a word, the change of ^ chh into «l chchh is necessary
both after long and short vowels.
Ex. fsfll ichchhati, he wishes. mlechchhah, a barbarian. (Pan. vi.
I. 73-76.)
$ 92. Initial $r $, not followed by a hard consonant, may be changed
into ^ chh, if the final letter of the preceding word is a hard consonant or
5T n (for «T «)•
Ex. ^TcJi + ^TrT = <H<+3M or ^TcR(Tf vdk + satam = vdksatam or vdkchhatam, a
hundred speeches.
qftdU + = MftdM or MP^dl^ri parivrdt + iete—parivrdt kte
or parivrdt chhete, the beggar lies down.
*T^tT + 3T=li? = T^PR? or m*pti mahat + iakatam = mahach hakatam
or mahach chhakatam, a great car.
VT^5T+ 3T$K = VnvjRR or VT^ryy; dhdvan + iaSah = dhdvan iaiah or
dhdvan chhatoh, a running hare,
^ni + = VH^I^: or ap + sabdah = ap Sabdah or apchhabdah,
the sound of water.
§ 93. If ^ h, t{ffh, ^ dh, v^dh, or w bh stand at the end of a syllable which
begins with n g, ? d, ^ d, or ^ J, and lose their aspiration as final or
otherwise, the initial consonants JT g, 3 \d, or q b are changed into
gh, 7 V dh, w SA.
Ex. 5^ duh, a milker, becomes ^ dhuk.
fa>ay^ visvagudh, all attracting, becomes faVTO vibvaghut.
wise, becomes
 w PS to CO aa CQ10

uuuB uuup uuup uqBUI (pit)

(putyupiut)yupm y-B
yBB v-p
ypp VP V-P V9 Y"?
li M uu iu uV uo S£ H *' YJff yj, V? yo 9Vf'n
aqj,~i$uq$eeov[d
Sp{eq$ujrrangeqiA"q
3aoi
aqx'II"araqi^iV
';i&usuvaiu
ds9ouJ««josih:jpiugisa—«Bomqsr*1SSisj•io:c;^pan's»qu]iad
aqii»waieqi&qTnIIII'qxi
»qjqt\%**piuuojeq;^uSis
sqj,'\jpaenpn«\mi9qjqmojjr"»XI'U>9uSiet^'osiseiraaAPhisinu\$qSortAHaeisn*uaji9syd0opu

91 Ha ypB '* ypp ypp ypu VP1 ypj, VP? ypo n '* 80[U8U 8tf
9j 81USU 88 »* 'Pi •P!
f
IIS ■", ysm H*V yiy •PJ •P!
££ *•
Si a pB •* pp PP pu PI pj, PV p
0
(HV)Hm
(6u)Biu
({uu)uw
(fn)fm
(nu)im
y(BjCoiu"n)ty)BCjotuwmi pyu
yyoqu
pi y otujifufA
£1 si
ti j " •■ a yiysw
ytt tysw V;^8
J78 -p; T>!
•p; •PI yyod
fd
if "PI •P!

li
6t
o£
i£ 2^
rafiati
^
tufi "P
-fP
2P
ftp
mprau 22rau
op
rap «t<jrara ?ra
iq
aq
tiq
jq ((ram)
(qw
yamqtj«firamu)rynqut ivanHv\oRo
wy mojao,o
§
ajqvx
uo3Vf
imfiuj
fo
/Buy
Bmcnoys
■'f6
iSv/m
)jBuUviuoqswuoj CI01II (I yCB
uB
CB
mm yCp
Cp
up«ii yCq
uqnm
Cq y
Sf0f
£
HC ff
yff
«f
«w yfu
Cu
wtt ft
y(U
?u

X
7
4
/If

gzSi Sd yqB
tz, 3US qB yqp
qp yqp
qp qq
yqq IV -p;
V
V?
"P? q
Vjo0
6 SHO yyoyo yyopw yyo? yd<t>
qj,
7<jj
'PI ?!

M
HO yoyouu yopw
• up yz?tu •pj■ptUO
VV (dm)
ydw
(ydm)
q(dm
) w,

uuuB uitup uqMitt a*

8
t

yBp tz d d<t> dy T! •P!

9 HO yBB yBp yBq yBi yBv yBo
uptiu upuu uqurn (pi))ia
((pu)pw
uu)utu
y)pu)y)pmw
zz. fi uuu6 " 1U
UV u0
SO BB Bp Bp Bq Bj, Bv Bo
ypB ypp • ypp ypq ypj, VP? ypo
* mi ■" • VIx V?¥ •P! 1Z Ha
"P!

oz a pB PP pp • pq pj, PV po
t IX HV "PT •p;

vB vp rmu^
o«„ yq
vq zuVJ, VV
Bp
pp pp ,0
?B 61 HX •■ •■ y)gm • yjg •P! •PI
1

•PI •p? S1 X • • ■• *• pm je •P! •P!

(B)H (P)i (P)» • (q)d (w)
m V

Jf-pDU-BVtTr HVVmHY-oxa »xi

tfpOTSj f Kpa«^F'oxa (xfw*)hy
if Jj fit X X d HY
-9X1 X i k AT d W HY
9X1
W

•IIA "IIIA ■IIIA

•II III 'AI •AI •A IA "HA
I 'A
IA •I II "III
 nedinotaormceia—ta.rnel.s preceded
"J,
preceded
change
before
the
in
place
takes
ifinal
that
lNote
sign
The
II.
letter,
is
it
I. by
vowel
In
is
form
the
long
sign
eletter
be
III.
that
short
b,
IX
A,
it
col.
id.
to
laimo,
:deadn.s
1617 •a■
jj
us '*(*»)
**0P)
**T
W

«
t Wl7
..

15 V a■• s5 *5
I ..

14 3 • a■• V id. id.

.. .. I ..

13 • ■• • • *The
dused
the
IV.
isign
and
real
IX
optional
from
col.
in
to
iAsnsameutasaseisvcnaeg.rsua.iasrhy
.. * id. id.
CInitial
Table
Final
of
oshowing
with
the
mnbsionatnitosn.
ia ■• •
*——✓>

ii • %
% ..

10 H a • Xf)
>(i) $

9 •a a• «• •■ id. id.
.. 3^

•■ id. ^ftT
id.
8
7 .. ..
1*9
..
.. ..

6 ■a 3T
t .. I ..

5 • V it
w. .. ..
■• a• •» •a *• **(*rw(i). . ^ id. id.
4 .. .. :
-m
: ^n^i^iT^n ^ft
id. id.
s
INF^m
^
ATT&C.USi. ..
TT zs atp.. A^T.. TT..
AT1..

..
I23 • •( id. id.
.. «*
K1)
and
W.
^V.
exc.
PINAL. IV.
*l V.
cT IX
a:
^
and. IX
b.
^t: (not
^)
*K

ill.
\ VI.
^ ^ VIII.
VII. ^
I.
* H.
^
 *iur
32
33
35 51
34 ..
(W«
sss id.*stt^ id.
^fff
id.
*T
W
f

^
>m
*m.. ^ ^
1
*
^
^

551.. l3rt$
A

3i 1 •« f
f .. * .. 4 f
30 I
.. .. * * WTT
<HT{5
29 n .. * .. *
..
28 1 "1 •
.. ..
26
27 • ■•t
•■1 **i
((wr)
>'^(n)
'«(*«)
*n
\r
(w)
'us
(«r)
(ws)
f(»t)
>nr)
%ra)
(m)
*h

2S
24 • •a ^ft«r
id.
1
- id.
'sit^

Hi
? i:h

■• •■ ■• tj
: ^TT^T ^ftiT
id. id.
2233 ..

"FiR.. wi..
5?..
21 "I •■ •■ •
\ at

•■
19
20 •at* * ■sn^ ^ft^
id. id.

.. V..
• id.J
id.
18 IT .. .. .. .. ..

and
WTt
^Ttexc.
-
FINAL. \ aIX
:nda.
^
\ if 1 m (not^)
b.
IX

VII. VIII.
II. III. IV. VI.
I. V.
38 CHANGE OF ^ n INTO TH^n.

NATI, or Change of Dental «^ n and into Lingual TOT^n and Tf sh.

§ 95. In addition to the rules which require the modification of certain
letters at the beginning and end of words, there are some other rules to be
remembered which regulate the transition of dental » n and ^ * into lingual
T!T n and \sh in the body of words. Beginners should try to impress on
their memory these rules as far as they concern the change of the dental
nasal and sibilant into the lingual nasal and sibilant in simple words : with
regard to compound nouns and verbs, the rules are very complicated and
capricious, and can only be learnt by long practice.

Change of ^ n into in n.
§ 96. The dental tt n, followed by a vowel, or by ^ n, it m, Tf y, and \v,
is, in the middle of a word, changed into the lingual nr n if it is preceded by
the Unguals ^ ri, ^ ri, ^ r, or ^ sh. The influence of these letters on a
following 'st n is not stopt by any vowel, by any guttural fa k, T? kh,
T g, T gh, Th, J_h, - m), or by any labial (up, xaph, ^ b, H bh, * m, v),
or by i{y, intervening between the linguals and the t^ra.
Ex. «j + »ri = ipnT nri + ndm — nrindm, gen. plur. of '•J nri, man.
?in§: karnah, ear.
dushanam, abuse.
^rrj vrimhanam, nourishing, (? h is guttural and preceded by Anusvara.)
iHoi<U arkena, by the sun, k is guttural.)
ir^rfiT grihndti, he takes, h is guttural.)
f^w: kshipnuh, throwing, (tj p is labial.)
irwnT premnd, by love, (»i m is labial.)
lltrfiK brahmanyah, h is guttural, »? m is labial, and w n followed
by T^y.)
ftrrot nishannah, (wn is followed by n, which is itself afterwards
changed to tit n.)
SHBfiMd akshanvat, (tit n is followed by ^ v.)
UTOI prdyena, generally, (i^y does not prevent the change.)
But SH'sM archana, worship, ch is palatal.)
^n!R»T arnavena, by the ocean, (tit n is lingual.)
^T«T darkanam, a system of philosophy, (si s is palatal.)
^JVtT ardhena, by half, (v rfA is dental.)
^§fir kurvanti, they do, (^ w is followed by t.)
KJRnt rdmdn, the Ramas, («T n is final.)
Note—TJTTIT: rugndh, like «j«Mj: vriknah (Pan. vi. 1, 16), should be written with n.
The is no protection for the T n. Thus fl^ni has to be especially mentioned as
an exception for not changing its «T n into TJT^n in compounds, such as ^KlT'it iardgnih.
(Pan. Gana kshubhnddi.)
 CHANGE OP ^» INTO Jffn. 39

§ 97. The «J n of tj nu, the sign of the Su conjugation, and the ^ ra of

*TT nd, the sign of the Kri conjugation, are not changed into m n in the two
verbs jp^ trip and tst>t kshubh (Pan. vm. 4, 39). Hence
ipTfiT tripnoti, he pleases *. wwrffT kshubhndti, he shakes.
But *nnTflT hinoti, he hears, ■gnrrrfir pushndti, he nourishes.
TgHTO kshubhdna, imper. shake.

Table showing the Changes of «T n into v^n.

^ ri, in spite of intervening change if there follow

Vowels, Vowels, or
^ Gutturals 7^ n
(including ^ h and Anusvara),
t r, Labials into
(including ^ v),
\sh, and it y,

$ 98. The changes here explained of ^ n in the middle of simple words,

(whether it belongs to a suffix or a termination,) are the most important to
remember. But re is likewise liable to be changed into n when it
occurs in the second part of a compound the first part of which contains
one of the letters ri, ri, ~t r, or \sh, and particularly after certain
prepositions. Here, however, the rules are much more uncertain, and we
must depend on the dictionary rather than on the grammar for the right
employment of the dental or lingual nasals. The following rules are the
most important :
1. The change of ^ n into m n does not take place unless the two members
of the compound are combined so as to express a single conception.
Hence ^Ttff bdrdhri, a leathern thong, + its nasa, nose, gives qilflVim:
bdrdhrinasa, if it is the name of a certain animal ; according to Wilson,
of a goat with long ears ; according to others, of a rhinoceros, or a bird.
(Unadi-Sutras, ed. Aufrecht, s. v. Pan. viii. 4, 3.) But ^ifo charman,
leather, + iflftnci ndsikd, nose, gives -MH HI !"«<*: charmandsikah, if it means
having a leathern nose. An important exception is 3§HI<H sarvandman,
a technical term for pronouns, (*rf sarva being the first in their list,)
which Panini himself employs with the dental «T n only. (Pan. 1. 1, 27.)
Other proper names not following the general rule, are fcpPPK trinayanah,
three-eyed, name of Siva; i.v«i<H: raghunandanah, name of Rama;
yArij: svarbhdnuh, name of Rahu, &c.

* In the Veda we find 'ffwf^ tripnuhi, Rv. 11. 16, 6; ip*0?: tripnavah, Rv. m. 42, 2.
40 CHANGE OF INTO Jjn.

Words to be remembered :
^Uprft: agranih, first, principal, from agra, front, and tft ni, to lead.
?n'TOft: grdmanih, head borough, from qTH gr&ma, multitude, and tft ni,
to lead.
cjdli: vritraghnah, Indra, killer of Vritra ; but ^jd£4U vritrahanam, acc. of
f3^T vritrahan. (Pan. vm. 4, 13; 22.)
Pl(i.H<0 or (Jlfuu^l girinadi or girinadi, mountain-stream.
VX($! pardhnam, afternoon, from HTjpard, over, and ^r^^ahan, day; but
sarvdhnah, the whole day, from sarva, all, and ^l^T aAara,
day; and the same whenever the first word ends in a. (Pan. vin. 4, 7.)
There are minute distinctions, according to which, for instance, Kj"knM
kshirapdnam if it means the drinking of milk, or a vessel for drinking
milk, oRr: VfRMMt kamsah ksMrapdnah, may be pronounced with dental
or lingual n («T n or *rr «); but if it is the name of a tribe who live on milk,
it must be pronounced HfkMUU: ksMrapdnah, milk-drinking. (Pan. vm.
4, 9 and 10.) In the same manner ^hl^jj darbhavdhanarn, a hay-
cart, is spelt with lingual ^n; while in ordinary compounds, such as
$£4nN indravdhanam, a vehicle belonging to Indra, the dental n
remains unchanged. (Pan. vm. 4, 8.)
2. In a compound consisting of more than two words the «T ra of any one
word can only be affected by the word immediately preceding. Hence
m»HIM<U mdsha-vdpena, by sowing beans ; but Hm**HliM mdsha-kumbha-
vdpena, by sowing from a bean-jar. (Pan. vin. 4, 38.)
3. In a compound the change of «T^n into Ttr n does not take place if the first
word ends in *T g.
Ex. ^ojf + = ^prtR rik + ayanam = rigayanam.
Some grammarians restrict this to proper names. (Pan. vm. 4, 3, 5.)
Or if it ends in * sh, and the next is formed by a primary suffix with n.
Ex. ftr: + irpi = ftrarpf nih +pdnam = nishpdnam.
+ m<H = iixjtqicH yajuh +pdvanam = yajushpdvanam. (Pan. vm.
4, 35 )
4. In compounds the «T n of nouns ending in «T n, and the <Tv« of case-termina
tions, if followed by a vowel, are always liable to change.
dlffq l tV vrihivdpin, rice-sowing, may form the genitive ^H^rfwi vri-
hivdpinah ; but also sflfigmfiw: vrihivdpinah.
tflfigmmfiu or WUVtHmfH vrihivdpdni or vrihivdpdni, nom. plur. neut.
sftfg'lN*!! or jftfigqpN vrihivdpena or vrihivdpena, instrum. sing.
Likewise feminines such as jftt\*rfinft or 3)fij=ufM«fi vrihivdpini or vrihivdpini.
(Kas'.-Vritti vin. 4, 11.)
 CHANGE OF i n INTO 1)1. 41

Note—The of secondary suffixes, attached to the end of compounds, is, under the
general conditions, always changed to Vt^n. Thus kharapah (i.e. donkey-keeper)
becomes <s<mM«u: kharapdyanaji, the descendant of Kharapa. HlrtH*ljfl4!K mdtribhoginah,
fit to be possessed by a mother, from »rrff mdtri, mother, and wt*Tt bhogah, enjoyment, with
the adjectival suffix (na (samdsdnta), is always spelt with TFT n. (See also § 98. 6.) Again,
while <i<1*i('i>Jl yargabhagini, the sister of Garga, always retains its dental «^ n, being an
ordinary compound, Jphrfnot gargabhaginl would have the Ungual Ht^n, if it was derived
from gargabhagah, the share of Garga, with the adjectival suffix in, fem. inl,
enjoying the share of Garga. Words which after they have been compounded take a new
suffix are treated in fact like single words (samdnapada), and therefore follow the general
rule of § 96. (Pan. viii. 4, 3. Kas'.-Vritti vm. 4, 11, v.)
5. If the second part of the compound is monosyllabic, then the change of
a final ~tjn followed by a terminational vowel, or of a terminational »r»,
is obligatory. (Pan. vm. 4, 12.)
Ex. ^ft^^vritrahan, Vritra-killer ; gen. 7d£<u: vritrahanah.
TJTTC surdpah, drinking sura ; nom. plur. neut. uumftu surdpdni.
TSjfari: kshirapah, drinking milk; instrum. sing. «j"kM«j kshirapena.
6. If the second part of a compound contains a guttural, the change is obliga
tory, even though the second part be not monosyllabic. (Pan. vm. 4, 13.)
Ex. ^finmt harikdmah, loving Hari ; instrum. sing, ^ft.*l*}t!l harikdmena.
sropforital Sushkagomayena, instrum. sing, of srspftrpi sushkagomaya ;
(^jtsj hushka, dry, iftni gomaya, dung.)
7. Likewise after prepositions which contain an ^ r, the m of primary
affixes, such as una, ^fftr ani, wflf aniya, W in, «T na (if preceded
by a vowel), and jtr mdna, is changed to vs n, but under certain restric
tions. (Pan. vm. 4, 29.)
Ex. VRWS pruvapanam ; WRTTO pramdnam ; mmHlitj prdpyamdnam.
While in these cases the change is pronounced obligatory, it is said to be
optional after causative verbs (Pan. Tin, 4, 30), and after verbs begin
ning and ending in consonants with any vowel but ^sr a (Pan. vm.
4, 31); hence OTPNj and °i praydpanam and praydpanam; iretmv or 0 i
prakopanam or prakopanam. Again, after verbs beginning in a vowel
(not a) and strengthening their bases by nasalization, the change
is necessary ; it is forbidden in other verbs, not beginning with vowels,
though they require nasalization : hence n + ^pf = jpto pra + inganam =
prenganam ; but Tt + WfA = W<*M«T pra + kampanam = prakampanam.
Lastly, there are several roots which defy all these rules, viz. hi bhd, ixbhd,
\pd, i&fkam, VJ^gam, iQTTipydy, ^f^vep : hence WT«T prabhdnam &c,
never iwrar prabhdnam ; JHUH pravepanam, never 144 iUU pravepanam*
8. After prepositions containing an ^ r, such, as ^nr^antar, nir, ntjpard,
Q
42 CHANGE OF INTO V^n.

vfit pari, and it pra, and after dur, the change- of ?f re into Wx re takes
place :
1. In most roots beginning with H re. (Pan. vxu. 4, 14.)
H + HMfrf = mratil pra + namati =pranamati, he bows.
TO + '«J^Ph = TOQT^fil jaara + nudati =pardnudati, he pushes away.
^fTC + ^Prfir = thriNrfil antah + nayati = antarnayati, he leads in.
R + Trra«B: = WPT«K pra + ndyakalj, =prandyakah, a leader.
The roots which are liable to this change of their initial «T re are entered in
the Dhatupatha, the list of roots of native grammarians, as beginning
with ?!T re. Thus we should find the root «T>T nam entered as nam,
simply in order thus to indicate its liability to change.
2. In a few roots this change is optional if they are followed by Krit affixes,
viz. (Pan. vm. 4, 33.)
ftjf% nis, to kiss ; RfioftnN or wfnfarf'ai pranimsitavyam or pranimsitavyam.
fitTB^ niksh, to kiss ; nfiUttjiy or nftf^lQ pranikshanam or pranikshanam.
f%f^ nid, to blame ; ufin^T or irftT^T pranindanam or pranindanam.
3. In a few roots the initial «T re resists all change, and these roots are entered
in the Dhatupatha as beginning with re, viz. (Pan. vi. 1, 65, v.)
nrit, to dance. «TT7 ndt, to fall down, (Chur.) *
nand, to rejoice. HT^ ndth, to ask.
?rf nard, to howl. tTP^ nddh, to beg.
nakk, to destroy. nri, to lead.
Ex. ijfwrH parinartanam ; vfiui^ parinandanam.
4. The root «TSI nas, to destroy, changes re into ^ n only when its $r i is
not changed to ^sh. ji + ~^dt = Tm^nt pra + nasyate —pranak/ate; but
H+ = JPT¥: pra + nashtah —pranashtah, destroyed. (Pan. vm. 4, 36.)
5. In the root an, to breathe, the re is changed to mt n if the ^ r is not
separated from the w re by more than one letter. Thus H + wfjffTI =
Hlfiufn jsra + arai# =prdniti, he breathes ; but lift + ^rftrfil = ^§ftffir
j)ari + aniti =paryaniti. The reduplicated aorist forms XTl fiyi!) \prdninat ;
the desiderative with TO jsara is TOfrrftrefit pardninishati. (Pan. vm.
4, 19, 21.)
6. In the root han, to kill, the n is changed except where ^ h has to
be changed to t{ gh. (Pan. viil 4, 33.) Thus n + ^arff = H^Wff jpra +
hanyate prahanyate, he is struck down ; ssri^lri antarhanyate
(Pan. vm. 4, 34) ; but it + rifff = ffifil j^a + ghnanti —praghnanti, they
kill. Also JT«nn<T prahananam, killing.

* It is not *T? nat, to dance, but 1^ nat of the Chur class, and hence written with a
long d. Siddh.-Kaum. 11. p. 41, note.
 CHANGE OF ^ S INTO \sh.

The change is optional again where «T » is followed by ^ »i or ^ v. (Pan.

vm. 4, 23.) Thus u^f«H or TTffim prahanmi or prahanmi; jr^: or
U^tpi: prahanvab or prahanvafy.
7. The of tj rra of the Su and of »rr of the Kri conjugation is changed
to n^n in the verbs Ai, to send, and »ft ?n2, to destroy. (Pan. vm. 4, 15.)
Ex. Rfflffir prahinvanti ; H*jl<lTPk pramtnanti.
8. The of the termination Wtftl ant in the imperative is changeable. (Pan.
vm. 4, 1 6.) Thus H 4- nmfH = W»WTftl pra + bhavdni =prabhavdni.
9. The ^ n of the preposition fa rai, if preceded by JJ jsra, Tjft i?an, &c,
is changed into mtn before the verbs (Pan. vin. 4, 17) to speak,
^ nad, to be happy, VRpat, to fall, VRpad, to go, the verbs called T| ghu,
UTT* wift", to measure, HT me, to change, so, to destroy, ^tT han, to
kill, TTf yd", to go, vd, to blow, ■jt «ra, to flee, ^rr psd, to eat, ^tt vap,
to weave, ^ vah, to bear, sam, to be tranquil (div), fac/W, to collect,
dih, to anoint.
The same change takes place even when the augment intervenes.
(Pan. vm. 4, 17, v.)
TnPPT^TT pranyagadat ; v&FPQpranyanadat.
§ 99. In all other verbs except those which follow 11? gad, the change of
fa ni after n j9ra, Trft pari, &c, is optional.
Tlfatr^fa or nfiUM^frt pranipachati or pranipachati.
Except again in verbs beginning with efi ka or ^ Ma, or ending in ^ sh
(Pan. vm. 4, 18), in which the «T re of fa ni remains unchanged.
W Th <*Cl fri pranikaroti; Ji(V|isn^rd pranikhddati ; vWm'ife pranipinashti.

Change of^s into \sh.

J 100. A dental ^ s (chiefly of suffixes and terminations), if preceded
by any vowel except ^r, ^rt a, or by «^ k, ^ r, <^ I, is always changed
into the lingual ^ sh, provided it be followed by a vowel, or by iT t, th,
tT n, m, i{y, or ^ v; likewise by certain Taddhita suffixes, <s ka, kalpa,
TTT$T pdsa, &c.

* Where it seemed likely to be useful, the Sanskrit roots have been given with their
diacritical letters (anubandhas), but only in their Devanagari form. Panini in enumerating
the roots which change fa ni after TTpra, JTfil prati, Sec., into ftj ni, mentions TT md, but this,
according to the commentaries, includes two roots, the root TT^ md(n), which forms (*l«fln
mimite, he measures, and the root me{n), which forms TUTT mayate, he changes. Where
in this grammar the transcribed form of a root differs from its Devanagari original, the
additional letters may always be looked upon as diacritical marks employed by native
grammarians. Sometimes the class to which certain verbs belong has been indicated by
•adding the first verb of that class in brackets. Thus hm {div) means sdmyati, or sam
conjugated like div, and not sdmayate. - . ■-
G 2
44 CHANGE OF ^* INTO \sh.

If Anusvara* or Visarga or ^sh intervenes between the vowel and the ^s,
the change into ?ssh takes place nevertheless.
Ex. nfvR^sarpis, inflectional base; *rPf: sarpih, nom. sing. neut. clarified
butter; instrum. «(T)m sarpishd; nom. plur. wiffa sarpimshi (here
the Anusvara intervenes); loc. plur. *rfx}:i| sarpihshu (here the
Visarga intervenes), or xftfuj sarpishshu (here the ^sh intervenes).
^TBT vdkshu, loc. plur. of ^T*C vdch, speech.
*H$r* + *J = 9^TV sarvasak + su — sarvasakshu, omnipotent.
Nwftw^ ( «J[) + *T = fMcffrfHi chitralikh (k) + su = chitralikshu, painter.
J#| ffirshu, loc. plur. of firr. gir, speech.
4HH + *T = *H<-y kamal + su = kamalshu, naming the goddess Lakshmi.
ifr^rfir dhrokshyati, fut. of druh, to hate ; (here ? h is changed to
^ k, and the aspiration thrown on the initial ^ d.)
Tfr^rtTT pokshyati, fut. of xr* push, to nourish ; (here ^ sh is changed
into ojf k.)
^rp|: + 05: = ^rFq^ii: sarpih + kah = sarpishkah; adj. formed by «R Ara,
having clarified butter.
flftj: + ffc = ^rfqrc sarpih + tarah = sarpishtarah ; (here the tt t of
»rc: taraA is changed into zt, as in $ 89, III. a.) If the penultimate
vowel be long, no change takes place; ifhtTTT gistard. (Pan. vnr.
3» ml)
^rfqt + *rff = ^frNriT sarpih + mat = sarpishmat, having clarified butter.

Table showing the Changes of ^ s irafo ^sh.

Any Vowel except x«r, 'srr b\, change if there follow

(in spite of Vowels, or
\» IT t, ^ th,
intervening Anusvara or Visarga or sibilant,)
and ^kk, ^.r, into m.
if immediately preceding, tr sh

§ 101. The same rule produces the change of ^* into \sh in roots
beginning with ^ s, if reduplicated, provided the vowel of the reduplicated
syllable is not % ^rt a : Ex. svap, to sleep ; Redupl. Perf. *J^T«J sushvapa,

* The Anusvara must not represent a radical nasal; hence 1V^pumsu, not XRpumshu,
loc. plur. of 'VpHpums, man; Pada base pum. (Pan. vm. 3, 58.) The Sarasvati prescribes
Vftlpunkshu. The must not be a radical ^s,- hence ?jfl^ supisau, because the ^ s
belongs to the root fir^ pis. (Pan. vm. 3, 59.) Yet 1 T^i h'. dsishah, from root ^rn^«&.
The rules do not apply to final ^s; hence ^(HW^ agnis tatra. (Pan. vm. 3, 55.)
 CHANGE OF INTO ^ sh. 45

I have slept. ftni sidh, Des. ffcftwfa sishitsati. This rule is liable to
exceptions.
§ ioa. Again, many roots beginning with ^ s change it into ^ sh after
prepositions requiring such a change, viz. ^rfir ati, over, anu, after,
<sift api, upon, ^rfW abhi, towards, fVr wi, in, fVfr. nir, out, Ttft pari, round,
"jrfir jsrotfi, towards, ft vi, away : Ex. ^rfa + wrfk = «faslfrf aJAi + s£aw<i =
abhishtauti, he praises. The same change takes place even after the augment
has been added, in which case the w * is really preceded by an TO a :
Ex. wxdrfl^abhyashtaut, he praised. Some verbs, after these prepositions,
keep the ^ sh in the reduplicated perfect : Ex. ftre sich, to sprinkle ;
TOfirfffaft abhishinchati, he sprinkles ; TOfaftpr^ abhishishecha, he has
sprinkled. In the intensive ftre sich does not follow this rule ; hence
TOfiroftraffi abhisesichyate (Pan. viii. 3, 112); but in the desiderative ^ s is
changed, TOftfaftBTfir abhishishikshati. Many other cases must be learnt
from the dictionary or from Panini.
§ 103. In order to give an idea of the minuteness of the rules as collected by
native grammarians, and of the complicated manner in which these rules are
laid down, the following extracts from Panini have been subjoined, though
they by no means exhaust the subject according to the views of native
grammarians. It need hardly be added that beginners should not attempt
to burden their memory with these rules, though a glance at them may be
useful by giving them an idea of the intricacies of Sanskrit grammar.
Native grammarians enumerate all monosyllabic verbs beginning with
^ s, and followed by a vowel or by a dental consonant, (likewise fttr^ smi,
fe^ svid, svad, svanj, svap,) as if beginning with ^ sh. Thus
they write ftv shidh, yt shthd, ftr shmi. (Pan. vi. 1, 64.)
This is not done with TTi^srip, TO^sry, ^jtstsM, 'wststri, i&styai, ifasek,
^ sri, in order to show that their initial ^ * is not liable to be changed
into ^ sh under any circumstances.
They then give the general rule that this initial ^ sh is to be changed
into ^s, in all these verbs, except fg^shthiv and ^bsr shvashk, (and according
to some in w shtyai, Sar.,) unless where ~% sh is enjoined a second time.
Now ^ sh for ^ s in these verbs is enjoined a second time :
1. When a preposition, or what else precedes it, requires such permutation,
according to general rules, ft + wlfri = ftCTfir vi + stauti = vishtauti.
ift^ sev forms ftpft sisheva in the reduplicated perfect.
3. In desideratives, when the reduplicative syllable contains 3[ or 3", i or u.
ftn^ sidh, Des. fttftwft sishitsati.
But if the ^ * of the desiderative element must itself be changed to ^ sh,
46 CHANGE OF INTO ^ sh.

the initial ^ s remains unchanged, fara sidh, fttirfinrfir sisedhishati.

(Pan. viii. 3, 61.)
Except in ijt stu, and in derivative verbs in ^nr aya, where is changed to
*l sh. w stu, Des. unfit tushtushati. fa» si^A, Caus. ifrPlfa sedha-
yotfi, Des. fwHiffa^frf sishedhayishati; but *l«Kfrf susushati. (vm. 3, 61.)
Except again, in certain causatives, in KUT aya (viii. 3, 62), where ^ s is
not changed into ~zsh. faj^ svid, ftr^ftrefin sisvedayishati. swarf,
firen^ftncftl sisvddayishati. ^ «aA, f« W I ^ fn M fri sisdhayishati.
3. In certain verbs, after prepositions which require such a change, even
when they are separated from the verb by the augment, viz. *J su (su),
V^sd (tud), ifrso (div), m stu (ad), "m^stubh (bhu); or even if separated
by reduplication, in the verbs sthd, inrf senaya, f^cv^sidh, fw^sich,
5ff»r^ sanj, svanj, Jj^ sad, stambh, ^n^svan, it^sev, (the last only
after rift pari, fa ni, fa vi: vm. 3, 65.)
After prepositions : ^rfk^tETtfiT abhishwioti. ^rfir^fir abhishuvati. ^ftrnrfir
abhishyati. vfciifif parishtauti. TrftsWSf parishtobhate. ufauuMfft
abhishthdsyati. 'srfartoprfa abhishenayati. Trfttfclfa parishedhati.
^rfafa^fir abhishinchati. vfopftfa parishajati. nfilN'sr^ parishvajate
(viii. 3, 65). ftftfMfil' nishtdati, but nftaftyfa pratisidati (vm. 3, 66).
VHrMBtrrfTT abhishtabhndti (viii. 3, 67 and 114). Also ^r^wj avashtabhya
(viii. 3, 68, in certain senses). fa and ^HMiuOl and avashvanati
(viii. 3, 69, in the sense of eating). Tjfrrn^ parishevate.
After prepositions and augment : ^rwrtRifriT abhyashunot. xfim^ parya-
shuvat. ^twtot^ abhyashyat. vfawn paryashtaut. ^(t^tPJit abhyaskto-
bhata. wnm^ abhyashthdt. 'WTOPri^ abhyashenayat. xr*piViT
paryashedhat. ^csqffai^abhyashinchat. vfaftft paryashajata. 'SStvquHrf
abhyashvajata. ^writ^ abhyashidat. ^TSIT/yTi^ abhyashtabhndt.
ST^tifiT vyashvanat and ^T^nT avdshvanat. nA^rf paryashevata.
After prepositions and reduplication (viii. 3, 64) : vSfariBi abhitashthau.
^sfwrf^nrftrafiT abhishishenayishati. 'sftrfaTJvfirqfTr abhishishedhayishati.
"srfafafaETfa abhishishikshati. ^rfafarorfa abhishishanhshati and
fi( k «j rf abhyashishanfcshat. M(Vfluf 8f) parishishvankshate. fafaiTHjft
nishishatsati (vm. 3,11 8). ^rfarreH abhitashtambha. vrtftTOtiO avashash-
vdna. Tjftfaifa parishisheva, (the last only after Tift ^an, fa wi, fa vi,)
4. Only after the prepositions xrft ^ari, fa rai, fa fi, the following words
(viii. 3, 70): the part, fan: sita/i, the subst. *pk sayah, fom siv, 7TS| saA;
^ (if with initial ^ *, 73 s#ri) and similar verbs ; sfw.
The words mentioned in 4. and 19*^0%' may optionally retain ^ s, if the
augment intervenes, (vm. 3, 71.)
 CHANGE OF ^S INTO ^sh. 47

5. After the prepositions ^pj anu, fa »i, xrft pari, ^ifa aMi, fa ni, syand
may take ^ sh, except when applied to living beings, (vm. 3, 72.)
6. After the prep, fa vi, skand may take ^ sh, though not in the past
participle in ft ta (vm. 3, 73), but after the prep, trft; pari, throughout,
even in the past participle (vm. 3, 74). qfa««P or qfa^RTC parish-
kannah or pariskannah.
7. After the prep. far nir, fa ni, fa vi, the verbs wir. sphur and sphul
may take w sh. (vm. 3, 76.)
8. After the prep, fa vi, ^iw skambh must always take \sh. (vm. 3, 77.)
9. The verb ^re^ as, after dropping its initial vowel, takes » sh after preposi
tions which cause such a change, and after TR^prddur, if the \sh is
followed by Tjy or a vowel (vm. 3, 87). ^rf*tHVi{abhishydt.
prdduhshydt. jnp^fa prdduhshanti.
to. The verb srajo, when changed to ^5 sup, takes ^ sA, after W su,
fa fa^ nir, Qdur (vm. 3, 88). *rtpn sushuptah. <|:tpr: duhshuptah.
Exceptional cases, where ^ * is used, and not n^sh:
11. The verb ftr^r sich, followed by the intensive affix (vm. 3, 113). ^rfa-
irftrarff abhisesichyate.
12. The verb fav sidh, signifying to go (vm. 3, 113). vf^vfil parisedhati.
13. The verb sah, if changed to *fte sodh (vm. 3, 115). vfttxt^pari-
sodhum.
14. The verbs *jt»? stambh, ftra siv, ^ saA, in the reduplicated aorist
(vm. 3, 116). v5*fl M £W paryasishahat.
15. The verb ^ su, followed by the affixes of the 1st future, the condi
tional, or the desiderative (vm. 3, 117). vfarftafa abhisoshyati.
^rftnj^: abhisusuh.
16. The verbs ^ sad, svanj, in the reduplicated perfect (vm. 3, 118).
■»i«lwmH<j abhishasdda. ?rf*rTO^ abhishasvaje.
17. The verb sad, optionally, if preceded by the augment (vm. 3, 119).
■arq^H^or ^*fl^rfN nyashidat or nyasidat.

§ 104. There are many compounds in which the initial ^ s of the second
word is changed to ^ sh, if the first word ends in a vowel (except a).
Ex. *jfafirc yudhishthira, from Jjfa yudhi, in battle, and fajit sihira, firm ;
sushthu, well ; dushthu, ill ; *JTO: sushamah, beautiful, faro: vishamah,
difficult, from 5Ero: samah, even ; fafg»T trishtubh, a metre ; ^fHMlHt oyni-
shomau, Agni and Soma ; HlrjM*^ mdtrishvasri, mother's sister ; faijMU pitri-
shvasri, father's sister ; ixtv: goshthah, cow-stable ; thPmsIh: agnishtomah, a
sacrifice ; ajftfasta: jyotishtomah, a sacrifice, (here the final of ffftfi&^jyotis
is dropt.) In HJJW turdsdh, a name of Indra, and similar compounds,
48 RULES OF INTERNAL SANDHI.

^ * is changed to ^ sh whenever ^ h becomes <^ t; nom. JGJttZ turdshdt;

acc. TJTTCn^ turdsdham. (P&n. vm. 3, 56.)

Change of Dental V dh into Lingual ^ dh.

§ 105. The vdh of the second pers. plur. Atm. is changed to ^dh in the
reduplicated perfect, the aorist, and in tftt* shidhvam of the benedictive,
provided the V dh, or the shi of tftuj shidhvam, follows immediately an
inflective root ending in any vowel but W, *n a. (Pan. vm. 3, 78.)
Ex. ^ kri; Perf. chakridhve.
Ts^chyu; Aor. ^raftj achyodhvam.
^ />Zw ; Bened. jrWty ploshidhvam.
But ftpj fcship; Aor. *ft(*t4 akshibdhvam.
VRyaj; Bened. TTEjfM yakshidhvam.
If the same terminations are preceded by the intermediate ^ i, and the ^ i be
preceded by ny, x. r, /, \v, ^ A, the change is optional.
Ex. <g ; Perf. ^Tjfaufr luluvidhve or ojpjf^ luluvidhve.
/w; Aor. V&fot alavidhvam or vsfi^ alavidhvam.
^ /m; Bened. df=)irti4 lavishidhvam or diVifl j lavishidhvam.
But ^ 6w<tt ; Aor. ^rsflfvui abodhidhvam.

Rules of Internal Sandhi.

§ 106. The phonetic rules contained in the preceding paragraphs 32—94)
apply, as has been stated, to the final and initial letters of words (padas),
when brought into immediate contact with each other in a sentence, to the
final and initial letters of words formed into compounds, and to the final
letters of nominal bases before the Pada-terminations, and before certain
secondary or Taddhita suffixes, beginning with any consonant except ^ y.
There is another class of phonetic rules applicable to the final letters of
nominal (prdlipadika) and verbal bases (dhdtu) before the other terminations
of declension and conjugation, before primary or Krit suffixes, and before
secondary or Taddhita suffixes, beginning with a vowel or ^ y. Some of
these rules are general, and deserve to be remembered. But in many cases
they either agree with the rules of External Sandhi, or are themselves liable
to such numerous exceptions, that it is far easier to learn the words or
grammatical forms themselves, as we do in Greek and Latin, than to try to
master the rules according to which they are formed or supposed to be
formed.
The following are a few of the phonetic rules of what may be called
Internal Sandhi. The student will find it useful to glance at them, without
 RULES OF INTERNAL SANDHI.. 49

endeavouring, however, to impress them on his memory. After he has

learnt that fg^ dvish, to hate, forms %ft(T dveshmi, I hate, irfer dvekshi, thou
hatest, gfir dveshti, he hates, -Utt advet, he hated, dviddhi, Hate ! fgz dvit,
a hater, ffcm dvishab, of a hater, fgZQ dvitsu, among haters,—he will refer
back with advantage to the rules, more or less general, which regulate the
change of final ^ sh into ^ k, I /, ? rf, &c. ; but he will never learn his
declensions and conjugations properly, if, instead of acquiring first the
paradigms as they are, he endeavours to construct each form by itself,
according to the phonetic rules laid down in the following paragraphs.

i. Final Vowels.
§ 107. No hiatus is tolerated in the middle of Sanskrit words. Words
such as jtttt praiiga, fore-yoke, frnra titan, sieve, are isolated exceptions.
The hiatus in compounds, such as MUirfl pura-itd, going in front, JTTTftK
nama-uktih, saying of praise, which is produced by the elision of a final
^ s before certain vowels, has been treated of under the head of External
Sandhi. (§ 84. ?.)
§ 108. Final 'ST a and ^rt d coalesce with following vowels according to
the general rules of Sandhi.
iT^ + ^fir tuda + ami = (J<lft tuddmi, I beat.
+ ^ tuda + i — ij^ tude, I beat, Atm.
+ ^ ddna + i = ^R ddne, in the gift.
+ ^ ddna + i = ddne, the two gifts.
If we admit the same set of terminations after bases ending in consonants
and in short 'ST a, it becomes necessary to lay down some rules requiring
final a to be dropt before certain vowels. Thus if ^PT am is put down
as the general termination of the acc. sing., as in vdch-am, it is necessary
to enjoin the omission of final >ar a of f^R Mva before the ^ am of the acc.
sing., in order to arrive at f$r4 §ivam. In the same manner, if am is put
down as the termination of the I. p. sing. impf. Par., and if e as that of
the t. p. sing. pres. Atm., we can form regularly ^ri^ advesh-am and
f\£M dvishe; but we have to lay down a new rule, according to which the
final a of Tt% tuda is dropt, in order to arrive at the correct forms
^nr^ atud(a)-am and ffi tud(a)e. By following the system adopted in this
grammar of giving two sets of terminations, and thus enabling the student
to arrive at the actual forms of declension and conjugation by a merely
mechanical combination of base and termination, it is possible to dispense
with a number of these phonetic rules.
Again, in the declension of bases ending in radical SST d, certain phonetic
rules had to be laid down, according to which the final vrr d had to be
H
50 KULES OF INTERNAL SANDHI.

elided before certain terminations beginning with vowels. Thus the dative
3jfaKrr + Tj kankhadhma + e was said to form y^nk hankhadhme, (to the
shell-blower,) by dropping the final d, and not Sankhadhmai.
Here, too, the same result is obtained by admitting two bases for this as
for many other nouns, and assigning the weak base, in which the d
is dropt, to all the so-called Bha cases, the cases which Bopp calls
the weakest cases (Pan. VI. 4, 140). Each of these systems has its
advantages and defects, and the most practical plan is, no doubt, to learn
the paradigms by heart without asking any questions as to the manner in
which the base and the terminations were originally combined or glued
together.
$ 109. With regard to verbal bases ending in long 'JIT d, many special
rules have to be observed, according to which final ^rt d is either elided, or
changed to ^ i or to u e. These rules will be given in the chapter on
Conjugation. Thus
tpTT + ^rfir pund + anti = tpffir punanti, they cleanse.
$«TT+ 1: pund + mah = ijfflu: punimah, we cleanse.
+ fi? dd + hi = dehi, Give !
6 no. Final ^ i, \ i, 7 u, 3i u, ^ ri, if followed by vowels or diphthongs,
are generally changed to ^ y, v, T. r.
Ex. *rfir + ^ = TT^ mati + ai = matyai, to the mind.
ftrfh + "3ft = fiP^J jigi + ufr =jigyuh, they have conquered.
*rrg + ^ffc = HT^: bhdnu + oh = bhdnvol}, of the two splendours.
fVir[ + = fqWT pitri + d =pitrd, by the father.
fVft + Tfir = fiwftl bibhi + ati — bibhyati, they fear.
In some cases ^ i and ^ i are changed to <pr iy ; ^ u and 4 to 7^ uv ;
^ ri to ft ri; ^£ ri to ir and, after labials, to 7^ ur.
Ex. ^ + ^fii = ftt^Tif vi + anti = viyanti, they go.
>ft + ^= faftr + i = iAiyi, in fear.
£ = *J^t% sushu + e = sushuve, I have brought forth.
>|fa + i = &Auvt, on earth.
i£+ ^rfff = ftrtfir + fltfi = girati, he swallows.
+ ^ = Tjft papri + i=papuri, liberal.
+ ^ifff = '^fn «/m + ora^i = yuvanti, they join.
+ = yMyw + m# = yuyuvufy, they have joined.
When either the one or the other takes place must be learnt from
paradigms and from special rules given under the heads of Declension
and Conjugation.
$ III. Final %ri, if followed by terminational consonants, is changed to
^ ir; and after labials to ^iT. Ur.
 RULES OF INTERNAL SANDHI. 51

J£ gri, to shout ; Passive iftfnfr gir-yate ; Part, ifhl!: girnah.

^pri, to fill; Passive vxft ptir-yate ; Part, ^r: purnah.
§ 112. ? e, % ai, Tift o, ^ft au, before vowels and diphthongs, are generally-
changed into ^p^ ay, ^rp^ dy, *r av, ^rr^ dv.
\ + ^Tff = de + ate = dayate, he protects.
I + £ = rnfr rai + e = r<iye, to wealth.
xn + ^ = Jpr go + e=gave, to the cow.
•H + = ffTT. nau + ah = ndvah, the ships.
Roots terminated by a radical diphthong (except ifr vye in redupl. perf.,
Pan. vi. i, 46) change it into d before any affix except those of the
so-called special tenses. (Pan. vr. 1, 45.)
^ + (Tf = ^TifT de + td = ddtd, he will protect.
^ + *fhl = ^ufll de + stya = ddsiya, May I protect !
H + (TT= irnn mlai + td — mldtd, he will wither.
3fV + KJ~ ^rnrr 6o + td = idtd, he will pare.
But in the Present + ^rfir = Mmfa glai + ati = gldyati, he is weary. .

2. Final Consonants.
§ 113. The rules according to which the consonants which can occur at
the end of a word are restricted to w k, ^n, ^t, w n, ttt, r^p, n m,
: h, - m, must likewise be observed where the last letter of a nominal or
verbal base becomes final, i. e. where it is not followed by any derivative
letter or syllable.
Thus the nominal base *rtl yudh, battle, would in the vocative singular be
ipi yudh. Here, however, the v dh must be changed into ^ d, because no
aspirate is tolerated as a final ($ 54. 1); and ^ d is changed into Tt t, because
no word can end in a soft consonant (§ 54. 2). vdch, speech, in the voc.
sing, would change its ^ ch into «jj k, because palatals can never be final
($ 54- 3)-
In ^nftof adhok, the aspiration of the final is thrown back on the initial ^ d
{§ 1 18). The final | A or ^ gh, after losing its aspiration, becomes »T g,
which is further changed to '5 k.
§ 114. Nominal or verbal bases ending in consonants and followed by
terminations consisting of a single consonant, drop the termination altogether,
two consonants not being tolerated at the end of a word ($ 55), The final
consonants of the base are then treated like other final consonants.
^T\+^=^rns vdch+s = vdk, speech; nom. sing.
nHl + ^=jrr^ prdnch +s=prdn, eastern; nom. sing. masc. Here jrhs
prdnk, which remains after the dropping of ^ s, is, according to the
h 2
 52 INTEBKAL SANDHI.

same rule, reduced again to m^prdn, the final nasal remaining guttural,
as it would have been guttural if the final ^ k had remained,
i + ^= suvalg + s = suval, well jumping. Here, after the dropping
of ^s, there would remain suvalk; but as no word can end in
two consonants, this is reduced to ^fc$ suval. Before the Pada-
terminations *pren suvalg assumes its Pada form suval 53);
hence instrum. plur. *pf«j>T: suvalbhih.
W^+^= wip^aAare + s = ahan, thou killedst; 2. p. sing. impf. Par.
^^+(T = *I#T advesh + 1 = adve(, he hated; 3. p. sing. impf. Par.
+ TT = ^tvta adoh + 1 = adhok, he milked ; 3. p. sing. impf. Par.
Exceptions will be seen under the heads of Declension and Conjugation.
§ 115. With regard to the changes of the final consonants of nominal
and verbal bases, before terminations, the general rule is,
1. Terminations beginning with sonant letters, require a sonant letter at the
end of the nominal or verbal base.
a. Terminations beginning with surd letters, require a surd letter at the end
of the nominal or verbal base.
3. In this general rule the terminations beginning with vowels, semivowels,
or nasals are excluded, i. e. they produce no change in the final con
sonant of the base.
!• T^+fl^^rfrv vach + dhi =zvagdhi, Speak! a. p. sing. imp. Par.
^+ «I = prich + dhve =prigdhve, you mix ; a. p. plur. pres. Atm.
a. ^[ + ftl=^rfw ad + si = atsi, 2. p. sing. pres. thou eatest.
^ + fir = ad + ti = atti, 3. p. sing. pres. he eats.
3. *T^rT+ ^ = *T^f?r marut + * = maruti, loc. sing, in the wind.
^ + fa = gfoj vach + mi = vachmi, I speak.
?rsr + tjk = JJ«rii grath + yate = grathyate, it is arranged.
Exceptions such as fir^ + ~H\ = firo: bhid + nah = bhinnah, divided, vm + ?K =
HHR bhafij + nah = bhagnah, broken, must be learnt by practice rather than
by rule. )
§ 116. Aspirates, if followed by terminations beginning with any letter
(except vowels and semivowels and nasals), lose their aspiration. 54. 1.)
Ex. >ri>nr + fiT = Jn»Tf% mamath + ti = mdmatti, 3. p. sing. pres. Par. of the
intensive Httn mamath, he shakes much. '
%^+«) = %^ rundh + dhve = runddhve, a. p. plur. pres. Atm. of
rudh, you impede.
c3W + = labh + sye = lapsye, I shall take.
But tjv + ^=tjtV yudh + i = yudhi, loc. sing, in battle.
 INTERNAL SANDHI. 53

<W + TfX = <«|Wt: lubh + yah = lubhyah, to be desired.

W*T + •nfil — ^JVrfir kshubh + ndti = kshubhndti, he agitates.
It is a general rule that two aspirates can never meet in ordinary Sanskrit.
§ 117. If final \gh, «r dh, V dh, vf^bh are followed by \ t or \th, they
are changed to the corresponding soft letters, n g, st d, ^ d, ^ b, but the W t
and ^ th are likewise softened, and the ^ d receives the aspiration. See also
§ 128.
Ex. ^TJV + fir = {t'tyfjj runadh + ti = runaddhi, he obstructs.
<5»T + 1C. = cJW labh + tab. = labdhah, taken.
%^ + ir. = %^f: rundh i- thah = runddhah (also spelt %v: rundhah), you
two obstruct.
%V+ (n = %5: rundh + tah = runddhah, they two obstruct.
^t"?T^+ if='^Tir abdndh + tam — abdnddham, 2. p. dual aor. 1. Par.
you two bound. \
^Nv + ^Tn = ^T^Tt: abandh + thdh = abanddhdh, 2. p. sing. aor. 1. Atm.
thou boundest.
In iSHuj abdnddham, 2. p. dual aor. 1. Par., the aspiration of final »rfA is
not thrown back upon the initial w b, because it is supposed to be absorbed
by the if tarn of the termination, changed into V dham. The same applies to
^T#ST: abanddhdh, though here the termination "sn: thdh was aspirated in itself.
§ 118. If \gh, ? dh, y^dh, w bh, «r h, at the end of a syllable, lose their
aspiration either as final or as being followed by u^dhv, *{bh, ^s, they throw
their aspiration back upon the initial letters, provided these letters be no
other than ^g, td, ^ d, l b. See §93.
Ex. Inflective base "g^ budh, to know ; nom. sing. WW bhut, knowing.
Instrum. plur. >jfs: bhudbhih.
Loc. plur. >pg bhutsu.
Second pers. plur. aor. Atm. ^r>J^ abhuddhmm.
Second pers. sing. pres. Intens. ^t^v + ftr = sflHlfrtt bobodh + si =
bobhotsi.
Desiderative of ^ dabh, ftrofiT dhipsati, he wishes to hurt.
First pers. sing. fut. of + = HRrrfH bandh + sydmi — bhantsydmi,
I shall bind.
^ dah, to burn ; dhak, nom. sing, a burner.
<*5£ duh, to milk ; ^njrts adhugdhvam, 2. p. plur. impf. Atm. : but 2. p.
sing. imp. Par. jfrv dugdhi.
Note— dadh, the reduplicated base of VT dhd, ^VtfH dadhdmi, I place, throws the lost
aspiration of the final V dh back on the initial ^ d, not only before S^dhv, ^s, but likewise
before Ttt and ^th, where we might have expected the application of § 117. <^ + (TC = VWJ
 INTERNAL SANDHI.

dadh+tah = dhattah; = VTO dadh+thah=dhatthah j ^+ $ = VW dadk+ se=

dhatse ; ^ + l4 = dadh + dhvam = dhaddhvam.
§119. If *f ch, nj, i^jh are final, or followed by a termination beginning
with any letter, except vowels, semivowels, or nasals, they are changed to
?6 k or rr a.
\ \»
Ex. Nominal base ^^vdch; voc. gra vdk, speech.
Verbal base ^l^vach ; 3. p. sing. pres. + fir = ^f^« vach + ti = vakti.
V^+fa = ^foyunj + dhi = yunffdhi, 2. p. sing. imp. Join!
But loc. sing. ^r^ + ^ = ^Tfa vach + i = vdchi.
^T^+ *T = ^RT vach + ya = vdchya, to be spoken.
«TO + m = T**T: vach + mah = vachmah, we speak.
^^ + ^: = ^r^: vach +vah=vachvah, we two speak. (See also $ 134.)
J 120. ^sh at the end of nominal and verbal bases, if it becomes the
final of a word, is changed into ^ t.
Ex. Nominal base dvish ; nom. sing, fsr^ dvit, a hater.
Verbal base f%\ dvish ; 3. p. sing. impf. Par. ^ig^ advet, he hated.
$ 121. Before verbal terminations beginning with w », it is treated like cjr k.
Ex. ftf = %f«J dvesh + si = dvekshi, thou hatest ; aor. vfk^l^ advikshat,
he hated.
*fa?lf?r pokshyati (push + syati), he will nourish.
$ 122. Before or it remains unchanged itself, but changes l{t and
^ fA into ^ f and ^ th.
Ex. + it: = flrft dvish + tah = dvishtah, they (two) hate.
This rule admits of a more general application, namely, that every dental
T( t, "\th, ^d, ^dh,J^n, and ^s, is changed into the corresponding lingual,
if preceded by z t, ^ th, \ d,^ dh, w n, and ^ sh.
Ex. fgtc + fv = fsrf5 dvid + dhi = dviddhi, hate thou.
1? + Trfff = ^ilUlfrt mrid + ndti = mridndti.
^ + 7T = % id + te = itte, he praises.
§ 123. Before other consonantal terminations ^sA is treated like ^
Ex. fk\+*4 = fgTf dvish + dhvam = dviddhvam, 2. p. plur. impf. Atm.
Hate ye !
fg^ +*} = Tg^J dvish + su = dvitsu, loc. plur. among haters.
Exceptions to this rule, such as dhrish, nom. VSR rfAriA, and to other rules
will be seen under the heads of Declension and Conjugation.
$ 124. In the roots vrr^ bhrdj, to shine, >TO mjy, to wipe, "qs^yaj, to sacri
fice, tT»^ rdj, to shine, srij, to let forth, and bhraj, to roast (a^t
 INTERNAL SANDHI.

bhrasja, Pan. vin. 3, 36), the final is replaced by \sh, which, in the case
enumerated above, is liable to the same changes as an original ~^sh. Thus
+ •«! = »pr mrij + tha = mrishtha, you wipe.
tr»I + *J = VfZQ raj + su = rdtsu, &c.
J 135. Most verbal and nominal bases ending in 31 i, ^ chh, ^Jcsh, ^hch
(some in $ 124) are treated exactly like those ending in simple \ sh.
Ex. Nominal base fal^vis; nom. vit, a man of the third caste.
Fut. + 'mifa = cJ*mfH vei + sydmi = vekshydmi, I shall enter.
Fut. periphr. %^+KT = %¥T ve& + td = veshtd, I shall enter.
firsj + *4 = ftr^ vii + dhvam = viddhvam, enter you.
Loc. plur. fasr + *j = vii + su = vitsu, among men.
Nominal base TTT^ prdchh „• nom. htj prat, an asker.
Verbal base U"^ prachh; TTS -h ^qTf»T = TT^rrfiT prachh -V sydmi—pra-
kshydmi, I shall ask.
ira+ rTT = TIFT prachh + td =prashtd, I shall ask.
+ U = Hl^+J prdchh + sm —prdtsu, among askers.
Nominal base TT^ fafoh ; rTBJ + *J = fTT^ /afoA + «m = /a£sw, among
carpenters.
Nominal base raksh; ifft^ + *j = Tfftnj goraksh+su = goratsu,
among cowherds.
Verbal base chaksh ; + ifr = chaksh + ee = chakshe, thou seest.
^TiT + (k = chaksh + dhve = chaddhve, you see.
vraich, to cut ; nom. sing. "37 vrat.
ST\+ mifa = TOTtfa vrahch + sydmi = vrakshydmi, I shall cut.
^sj + KT = ^TTT vraich + td = vrashtd, he will cut
J 136. The sr^ of f^rfis, to show, T^clris", to see, W3^mrii, to stroke,
^Slsprii, to touch, if final, or followed by Pada-terminations, is changed
into cir k.
Ex. Nominal base fl»W nom. sing, rfiA; instrum. plur. f^fhr.
digbhih; loc. plur. dikshu.
Tpt^dris; nom. sing. rfnA; instrum. plur. "^fr?: drigbhih.
In the root ?tsi nas, the change of » i into of * or ^ < is optional (Pan. Till.
3, 63). For further particulars see Declension and Conjugation.
$ 137. ? h at the end of verbal bases, if followed by a termination
beginning with ^ s, is treated like \gh, i. e. like a guttural with an inherent
aspiration, which aspiration may be thrown forward on the initial letter.
Ex. pfr? + CTlfq = rtVtmPH leh + sydmi = lekshydmi, I shall lick.
+ CTrft = v^nfir doh + sydmi = dhokshydmi, I shall milk.
§ 128. In all other cases, whether at the end of a word or followed by
56 INTERNAL SANDHI.

terminations, ? h is treated either (i) like ft gh in most words beginning

•with ^d (Pan. viii. 2, 32), and in -?fgn^ ushnih; or (2) like ^ dh in all other
words.
Ex. (1) |^ duh; nom. >ps dhuk; instrum. plur. vfar: dhugbhih; loc. plur.
dhukshu ; part pass, jm: dugdhah.
^ + in = d|riA + tah = dridhah, fast, is an exception.
Ex. (a) f&^lih; nom. f&zli{; instrum. plur. ftsfHj: lidbhih; loc. plur. fp$7*J
$,tew (71^ faA, <4I4+J m/*w).
f^nr + m = t^te: ZiA + tah = lidhah.
+ 7T: = ruh + tah — rudhah.
In tits', lidhah and ^g? rMhah, "S + lfdh + t are changed (§117) to T «* + 3 dh ;
then the first ^ d is dropt and the vowel lengthened. The only vowel which
is not lengthened is ^ ri; e.g. ^ + W = 4- K = = ^3 »nA + <fl =
+ ta = vrid-dha = vridha.
§ 1 29. The final ^ of certain roots ('JT? druh, jnwA, smmA, fia^ sniA)
is treated either as tj gh or ^ dh. From oVmA, to hate, we have in com
pounds the nom. sing. jpB dhruk and yft dhrut (Pan. vm. %, 33) ; past
participle "jpvt drugdhah or '5?': drMhah.
§ 130. The final ^ h of waA, to bind, is treated as V dh.
Ex. TTR? updnah, slipper ; nom. sing. dMMrt updnat ; instrum. plur.
TTRfkt upanadbhih.
Past part. pass, + Kt = nah + tah = naddhah, bound.
As to anaduh, ox, &c, see Declension.
§ 131. Nominal bases ending in radical ^s, change it to K t, if final, and
before the Pada-terminations. (Pan. viii. 2, 72.)
1^ dhvas, to fall ; nom. sing. «nrs dhvat, nom. plur. «TH: dhvasah, instrum.
plur. dhvadbhih.
§ 132. Verbal bases ending in ^s, change it to it t, before terminations
of the general tenses beginning with ^ s. (Pan. vn. 4, 49.)
vas, to dwell ; fut. + Wlfk = TOTfft fa* + sydmi = vatsydmi.
Before other terminations beginning with ^ s, final ^ » remains unchanged.
^ + ir = vas + se = vasse, thou dwellest.
TC^ + f% = ^rfta + si = sassi, thou sleepest.
fH^ + if = ftfaiT nirhs + se = nimsse, thou kissest.
TPi^ + ftj = wftq pepes + si =pepeshshi, thou hurtest. ($ 100.)
In certain verbs final ^ s is dropt before fv dhi of the imp.
5m^+ fv = ^rrfil &i* + dhi = sddhL (Pan. vi. 4, 35.)
^T3in^+ fv = TOffv chakds + rfAt = chakddhi.
 INTERNAL SANDHI. 57

In the same verbs final ^ s, if immediately followed by the termination of

the second person, ^ may be changed to \ t or remain ^ *.
^TSTT^ + ^= ^T$rn^ or ^rsp: asds + s — akdt or aMh.
Before the tt / of the third person, it always becomes H t.
^T5rra[ + IT = K a&ds + t = akdt. (Pan. vjii. a, 73, 74.)
§ J33- ^ n and ^ »» at the end of a nominal or verbal base, before sibilants
(but not before the ^ w of the loc. plur.), are changed to Anusvara
Ex. P»fv ! « fir jighdmsati, he wishes to kill, from Tp^han.
"SfRidt krarhsyate, he will step, from m' kram.
§ 134. remains unchanged before semivowels.
Ex. hanyalj,, to be killed, from ^ han.
•jr^^ tanvan, extending, from inr tan.
ira«T prenvanam*, propelling, from jT^inv.
§ J35- \m remains unchanged before the semivowels \y, X.r, I.
Ex. <+[«i: kdm-yah, to be loved, from ^« kam.
rTW tdmram, copper, from H*^ tarn and suffix t ra.
^rp': amlah, sour, from ^om and suffix 75 la.
§ 136. »T m at the end of a nominal or verbal base, if no suffix follows,
or if followed by a Pada-termination, or by personal terminations beginning
with hot or ^ v, is changed into ^ ra. (Pan. viii. 2, 65.)
Ex. fl^JTH praidn, nom. sing., and jr$Tf»T:i?raiaraMi/j, instrum. plur., TT?IT^
praidnsu, loc. plur., from ir$nw^ra&M», quieting. (Pan. viii. 2, 64.)
VPD aganma, we went, and ^rir^ aganva, we two went, from +1

But nom. plur. U^rw: praSdmalji.

§ 137. With regard to nasals, the general rule is that in the body of a
word the firsts, the seconds, the thirds, and the fourths of each class can
only be preceded by their own fifths, though in writing the dot may be
used as a general substitute. (§ 8.)
Ex. 'OT^TIiW or WT^hn dsankate or d&amkate, he fears.
'srtfcSljfir or 'Wlfcfrrfil dlingati or dlimgati, he embraces,
srarrfir or taoftl vanchayati or vamchayati, he cheats.
Jr=M!<SW or dr=MW utkanthate or utkamthate, he longs.
Jrsrf or jftr gantum or gamtum, to go.
or ipfji kampate or kampate, he trembles.
In compounds, such as *TJT4-eir3i: sam + kalpah, it is optional to change

* If the before \v were treated as Anusvara, the second would have to be

changed into a lingual (§ 96). Pan. viii. 4, 2, v.
1
58 INTEENAL SANDHI.

final J^m, standing at the end of a Pada, into the fifth or into real Anusvara ;
iNrei: or 3TJfQK samkalpah or sahkalpah. (See $ 77.)
$ 138. In the body of a word, Anusvara is the only nasal that can stand
before the sibilants si s, ^sh, ^ s, and ^ h.
Ex. damSanam, biting. yajumshi, the prayers.
■?*TC hamsah, goose. t^ff ramhate, he goes.

§ T39- following immediately after ^ch or nj is changed to 5?n.

Ex. *ngT ydchnd, prayer. TTsft rdjni, queen. *nr jajne, he was born.
$ 140. '5 chh in the middle of a word between vowels or diphthongs
must be changed to «s chchh. (See $ 91.)
Ex. ricM, to go ; ^gftl richchhati, he goes,
jfaa: mlechchhah, a barbarian.
§ 141. ^ chh before a suffix beginning with ff n or x_m is changed to 51 £.
Ex. jrg -f 7j = •jrg' prachh + na =prasna, question.
MIHrii + fir = muf^H pdprachh + mi=pdprasmi, I ask frequently.
Before ^« this change is optional.
$ 142. Roots ending in ^ y and ^ v throw off" their final letters before
terminations beginning with consonants, except i{y.
Ex. ^+ w: = Vlt', puy + tah —putah, decaying.
+ «n = turv + nah — turnah, killed.
§ 143. Roots ending in ^ v and * r, if preceded by ^ i or <r u, lengthen
their ^ i and u, if n^v or ^ r is followed immediately by a terminational
consonant. (Pan. vnr. 2, 77.)
Ex. div, to play, ^T«qPrf divyati, he plays. Bened. ^1=ma dtv-ydsam.
jj^ gur, to exert, gurnah.
"S^jri (i. e. ftr^^'ir), to grow old, iffafit jtryati.
ft^ .gw, voice ; instrum. plur. 7fif$r: girbhift, loc. plur. ift^ girshu.
There are exceptions. (Pan. vin. 2, 79.)
^tt_ Awr, to sound. Bened. **ini kurydsam.
On a similar principle T m is lengthened in ^+ ^tr: = turv + dvah =
Mrvdvah. (Pan. vnx. 2, 78.)
$ 144. Nominal and verbal bases ending in ir and ur lengthen 5 i
and 7 u, when t r becomes final after the loss of another final consonant.
(Pan. vin. 2, 76.)
Ex. fjT^ + ^=ifixor jft: gir + s = gir or #2$, nom. sing, voice.
§ 145. Nominal bases ending in is or ^ us (the ^ is or ^ us being
radical) lengthen ^ i and w when final, and before terminations beginning
with W bh or ^ s. Likewise sajus.
 INTERNAL SANDHI. 59

Loc. plur. *jfi^ + *J = 'g'ff:^ supis + su = supihshu ; nom. sing. masc.

and neut. supih.
Nom. sing. masc. + ^= stn|: sajus + s = sajuh ; nom. sing. neut.
*nj: sajuh.
Doubling of Consonants.
According to some grammarians any consonant except T r and ^ h,
followed by another consonant and preceded by a vowel, may be doubled;
likewise any consonant preceded by ^ r or ^ h, these letters being themselves
preceded by a vowel. As no practical object is obtained by this practice, it
is best, with Sakalya, to discontinue it throughout.
In our editions doubling takes place most frequently where any consonant,
except the sibilants and ^ h, is preceded by ^ r or ^ h, these being again
preceded by a vowel. Thus
arka, sun, is frequently written arkka.
sra^ brahman may be written fflPPT brahmman.
| 146. If an aspirated consonant has to be doubled, the first loses its
aspiration. Thus ^\hr or ^fvi vardhana or varddhana, increase.
$ 147. A sibilant after ^ r must not be doubled, unless it is followed by
a consonant. Thus it is always, srttT: varshdh, rainy season ; sai^fr: ddarsah,
mirror. But we may write either ^ffr or darsyate or darteyate, it is
shown.
Explanation of some Grammatical Terms used by Native Grammarians.
§ 148. Some of the technical terms used by native grammarians have proved
so useful that they have found ready admittance into our own grammatical
terminology. Guna and Vriddhi are terms adopted by comparative gramma
rians in the absence of any classical words to mark the exact changes of
vowels comprehended under these words by Panini and others. Most
Sanskrit grammars have besides sanctioned the use of such terms as
Parasmaipada, Atmanepada, Tatpurusha, Bahuvrild, Karmadhdraya, Krit,
Taddhita, Unddi, and many more. Nothing can be more perfect than the
grammatical terminology of Panini; but as it was contrived for his own
peculiar system of grammar, it is difficult to adopt part of it without at the
same time adopting the whole of his system. A few remarks, however, on
some of Paninr's grammatical terms may be useful.
» All words without exception, or according to some grammarians with
very few exceptions, are derived from roots or dhdtus. These roots
have been collected in what are called Dhdtupdthas, root-recitals, the most
important of which is ascribed by tradition to Panini *.
* Siddhanta-Kaumudi, ed. Taranatha, vol. 11. p. 1.
I %
60 GRAMMATICAL TEEMS.

From these dhdtus or roots are derived by means of pratyayas or suffixes,

not only all kinds of verbs, but all substantives and adjectives, and according
to some, even all pronouns and particles. Thus from the root »TJT man, to
think, we have not only man-u-te, he thinks, but likewise »HT^ man-as,
mind, ht»W mdnas-a, mental, &c. Words thus formed, but without as yet
any case-terminations attached to them, are called Prdtipadika, nominal
bases. Thus from the root v^jan, to beget, we have the prdtipadika or
nominal base iftjan-a, man, and this by the addition of the sign of the
nom. sing, becomes *f*r. jan-a-h, a man.
Suffixes for the formation of nouns are of two kinds :
J . Those by which nouns are derived direct from roots ; Primary Suffixes.
a. Those by which nouns are derived from other nouns ; Secondary Suffixes.
The former are called Krit, the latter Taddhita. Thus »PT jana, man, is
derived from the root jan by the Krit suffix a; but *T*ftr janina,
appropriate for man, is derived from nftjana by the Taddhita suffix ina.
The name prdtipadika would apply both to *rfi jana and »pfhr janina, as
nominal bases, ready to receive the terminations of declension.
The Krit suffixes are subdivided into three classes :
1. Krit, properly so called, i.e. suffixes by which nouns can be regularly
formed from roots with certain more or less definite meanings. Thus
by means of the suffix ^r«j athu, Sanskrit grammarians form
gxrg vepathu, trembling, from ^tf vep, to tremble.
Svayathu, swelling, from fsj svi, to swell.
Ufc|vg kshavathu, sneezing, from kshu, to sneeze.
davathu, vexation, from <| du, to vex, to burn.
2. Kritya, certain suffixes, such as T^H tavya, ^nffal aniya, n ya, vft&l elima,
which may be treated as declinable verbal terminations. Thus from
^ kar, to do, is formed ^irNl kartavya, <*4^*[/l -M karaniya, kdrya,
what is to be done, faciendum.
3. Unddi, suffixes used in the formation of nouns which to native gramma
rians seemed more or less irregular, either in form or meaning. Thus
from ^ vas, to dwell, both vastu, a thing, and ^tct vdstu, a house.
The Taddhita suffixes are no further subdivided, but the feminine suffixes
(stripratyaya) are sometimes treated as a separate class.
A root, followed by a suffix (pratyaya), whether Krit or Taddhita, is
raised to the dignity of a base (prdtipadika), and finally becomes a real
word (padd) when it is finished by receiving a case-termination (vibhakti).
Every base, with regard to the suffix which is attached to it, is called
Ahga, body. For technical purposes, however, new distinctions have been
 GRAMMATICAL TERMS. 61

introduced by Sanskrit grammarians, according to which, in certain declen

sions, a base is only called Aiiga before the terminations of the nom. and
acc. sing., nom. and acc. dual, and nom. plur. of masc. and fem. nouns;
besides the nom. and acc. plur. of neuters. The vocative generally follows
the nominative. These Anga cases together are called the Sarvandmasthdna.
Bopp calls them the Strong Cases.
Before terminations beginning with consonants (likewise before Taddhitas
beginning with any consonant except ^ y) the base is called Pada, the
same term which, as we saw before, was used to signify a noun, with a case-
termination attached to it. The rules of Sandhi before these terminations
are the same as at the end of words.
Before the remaining terminations which begin with vowels (likewise
before Taddhitas beginning with vowels and ^y) the base is called Bha.
Bopp calls the Pada and Bha cases together the Weak Cases * and when it
is necessary to distinguish, he calls the Pada the Middle and the Bha the
Weakest Cases.
Nouns, whether substantives, adjectives, or pronouns, are declined through
three numbers with seven or, if we include the vocative, eight cases. A case-
termination is called sro sup or f^rf^i vibhakti, lit. division.
Verbs are conjugated through the active and passive voices, and some
through a middle voice also, in ten moods and tenses, with three persons and
three numbers. A personal termination is called fir^ tin or fttHfai vibhakti.
A declined noun as well as a conjugated verb, ending in a vibhakti, is
called Pada.
Particles are comprehended under the name of Nipdta, literally what falls
into a sentence, what takes its place before or after other words.
All particles are indeclinable (avyaya).
Particles are,
I. Those beginning with ^ cha, and, i. e. a list of words consisting of
conjunctions, adverbs, interjections, collected by native grammarians.
3. Those beginning with u pra, before, i. e. a list of prepositions collected
in the same manner by native grammarians.
When the prepositions beginning with w pra govern a substantive, they
are called Karmapravachaniya. When they are joined to a root, they are
called Upasarga or Gati. The name of Gati is also given to a class of
adverbs which enter into close combination with verbs. Ex. ■gnj 'Art in
shtlifiKJ urtkritya, assenting ; khdt in WTf^OT khatkritya, having made
khdt, i. e. the sound produced by clearing the throat.
02 DECLENSION.

CHAPTER III.
DECLENSION.
$ 149. Sanskrit nouns have three genders, Masculine, Feminine, and
Neuter; three numbers, Singular, Dual, and Plural; and eight cases,
Nominative, Accusative, Instrumental, Dative, Ablative, Genitive, Locative,
and Vocative.
Note —There are a few nouns which are indeclinable in Sanskrit: svar, heaven;
ayds, fire; *mn^samvat, year, (of Vikramaditya's era); soayam, self; sdmi,
half; ^.bhur, atmosphere; ^jf^ sudi, light fortnight ; "3(f% badi, dark fortnight, &c.
Some nouns are pluralia tantum, used in the plural only ; ^TTT: ddrdh, plur. masc. wife ;
viinJ dpah, plur. fem. water; ^§T? varshdh, plur. fem. the rainy season, i.e. the rains;
ftranrrc sikatdh, plur. fem. sand.
§ 150. Sanskrit nouns may be divided into two classes :
1. Those that have bases ending in consonants.
2. Those that have bases ending in vowels.

1. Bases ending in Consonants.

$ 151. Nominal bases may end in all consonants except 3> n, *T n, ^y.
The final letters of the inflective bases of nouns, being either final or brought
in contact with the initial letters of the terminations, are subject to some
of the phonetic rules explained above.
$ 152. Bases ending in consonants receive the following terminations :

Terminations for Masculines and Feminines.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
Nom. ^ s (which is always dropt)
j^f: ah
Acc. am
Instr. a ~| bhih
fin bhi
Dat. e
IwK bhyah
Abl. ?r: ah,
Gen. ^r: ah. ] . dm
T . fvK oh,
Loc. \i J g su
Voc. like Nom., except bases in 11 n and ^ au "sr: ah
Neuters have no termination in the Nom., Acc, and Voc. singular (Pada
cases).
They take \i m the Nom., Acc, and Voc. dual (Bha cases).
They take ^ i in the Nom., Acc, and Voc. plural, and insert a nasal
before the final consonant of the inflective base (Anga cases). This nasal is
 DECLENSION. 63

determined by the consonant which follows it ; hence T n before gutturals,

n before palatals, sbt n before linguals, «t n before dentals, »T m before
labials, Anusvara before sibilants and ^ h. Neuters ending in a nasal
or a semivowel do not insert the nasal in the plural. (See Sarasv. i. 8, 5 ;
Colebrooke, p. 83.)
§ 153. Bases ending in consonants are divided again into two classes :
1. Unchangeable bases.
2. Changeable bases.
Nouns of the first class have the same base before all terminations, this base
being liable to such changes only as are required by the rules of Sandhi.
Nouns of the second class have two or three bases, according as they are
followed by certain terminations.
Thus from xna^^pratyach, Nom. Dual TRam pratyanch-au ; base tm^pra-
tyanch. (Anga.)
Instrum. Plur. TTiTfrr. pratyag-bhih ; base vfio^spratyach. (Pada.)
Gen. Dual inrNt: pratich-oh ; base viffcspratich. (Bha.)

1. Unchangeable Bases.
Paradigm of a regular Noun with unchangeable Base.
§ 154. Bases ending in w^n and <^ I are not liable to any phonetic changes
before the terminations, except that in the Nom. Sing, the ^ s of the termi
nation is dropt (see §§ 114; 55); and that in the Loc. Plur. alt may be
inserted after the final ttt^m.
Base *prcr sugan, a ready reckoner, masc. fem. neut. (from *J su, well, and
root w^gan, to count.)
Singular. Dual. Plural.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC.
N.
j*PW* sugan-au |-*J'l«Ut sugan-ah
A. ♦J'Ull sugan-am
I. *JiTOT sugan-d ♦J'lflW sugan-bhih
D. «J'I«5) sugan-e SJTlWr sugan-bhydm
^ sugan-bhyah
Ab."
i^pnii: sugan-ah
G. J ^nrni sugan-dm
l *J*TOfc sugan-oh
L. ^pTftl sugan-i +J'Hl+J sugan-su*
Ijrrflft sugan-au sugan-ah

Neuter.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
N. A.V. ^JUS[sugan ^jiratt sugan-i «J'l(*u sugan-i

* Or 'f'TT^ sugant-su, § 72.

64 DECLENSION.

§ 155. Bases ending in gutturals, ^ k, ^kh, it g, \gh.

These bases require no special rules.
Base *l%5loir sarvasak, omnipotent, masc. fem. neut. (from *rf sarva, all,
and root $p|r Sak, to be able.)

Singular, Dual, Plural.

masc. FEM. masc. veil. MASC. FEM.
N.V. sarvadak l^f^pn
sarvaAakau ^ 9$^nS sarvadakah
A. sarvasakam J
I. ^rt^nST sarvasakd ~) sarvadagbhih
D. W^nK sarvas'ake > H 5 ?l ' **TT sarvasagbhydm 1 ,
f ttq^l'Tt sarvasagbhyah
^ ' 1 Tf%3PR sarvaiakah
}g . OT$Pti sarvaSakdm
VCWTtWT. sarvasakoh .
L. H'<4 ^ifoir sarvas'aki
Neuter,
SINGULAR. dual.
N. A.V. *(^l«ft sarvas'ak tTq$N9 sarvasaki sarvaSaiiki
All regular nouns ending in «jr 1^ it ^r, ^ ^A, ?T ^ ! rf, ?
^ ^ ^A, ^ d, V o?A, it is ph, q b, w SA, may be declined after the model
of vt^PF sarvasak.
§ 156. Base ending in Wtkh. fadfatsichitralikh, painter, (from chitra,
picture, and root t?nf likh, to paint.)

Singular. Dual. Plural,

MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. masc. FEM.
N. V. f^rt>^F chitralik t
chitralikhau J fa^tWG? chitralikhah
A. ftrWTcW chitralikham
chitralikhd fadftifhft chitraligbhih
D. f^iNfriW chitralikhe P«iy PrfJiTf chitraligbhdm
£-*<A?<fi'*V. chitraligbhyah
Ab. "1 J
G J P«M (Via: chitralikhah
fa^fe^t chatralikhdm
■hitralikhoh
L. Ngfaftl c*ftrafifc« j r^dfrtBi chitralikshu *

Neuter.
SINGULAR. DCAL.
N. A.V. f^dfrfofc cAifraftjfcf fcflPeMfl chitralikht f^fcJfw chitralihkhi

Note—In the paradigms of regular nouns with unchangeable consonantal bases it will
be sufficient to remember the Nom. Sing., Nom. Plur., Instr. Plur., Loc Plur., and Nom.

* On the change of 'fj su after «S k, see § 100.

t Iflc instead of ^T/tA, see 113; 54. I.
 DECLENSION. 65

Plur. Neut. The Aoc. Instr. Dat. Abl. Gen. Loc. Sing., Nom. Acc. Voc. Gen. Loc. Dual,
Acc. Gen. Plur., follow the Nom. Plur. The Instr. Dat. Abl. Dual, Dat. Abl. Plur., follow
the Instr. Plur. The Vocative is the same as the Nominative.
§ 1 57. Regular nouns to be declined like 5R#5t«^ sarvahak.
BASE. NOM. S. NOM.PL.M.F. IN8IB. PL. LOC. PL. NOM.PL.NEUT.
^nn^forit, green
m. f. n. harit haritah haridbhih haritsu harinti
^lO rynHagnimath, fire-kind *UM«4<^ Wr|HVR OlMHIS:
m. f. n. agnimat* agnimathah agnimadbhihf agnimatsu% agnimanthi
suhrid, friendly If?
m. f. n. suhrit suhridah suhridbhih suhritsu suhrindi
budh, knowing T« irV
m. f. n. bhut || budhah bhudbhih bhutsu bundhi
*£\gup, guardian TS ijf<T
Tl
m.f.n. gup gupah gubbhih gupsu gumpi
<(rjH^kakubh, region fl «in|TtWK
f. Icahup kakubhah kakubbhih kakupsu •kakumbhi

§ 158. Bases ending in palatals, ^ch, 'SJ chh, Hj, ~^jh.

Bases ending in « ch change ^ ch into k, or it g, except when followed
by a termination beginning with a vowel.
Base iVe^^jalamuch, masc. cloud (water-dropping).
Singular. Dual. Plural.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.
N.V. McJH^S^'aZaroui
1 jJc^yfi jalamuchau ^ HfJ^^lt jalamuchah
A. »f d^H jalamucham
1. 1cMI1 jalamuchd »irt|j('»T: jalamugbhih
D. 1<SW^ jalamuche t\ «jj I ixftjalamugbhydm
j- 5iTc%^* *Tt jalamugbhyah
Ab
j- ild^t jalamuchah
G. M cjy 1 1 jalamuchdm
STeiH fal jalamuchi i »|t4W'*fll jalaninehoh 1 c**JW jalamukshu
L.
Neuter,
SINGULAR. dual. PLURAL.
N. A. V. »ifog<* jalamuk •I'd^+ft jalamuchi 1 jalamuHchi
Decline like »TF5TO jalamuch,—^V\vdch, fem. speech ; fracA, fem.
skin ; ^ ruch, fem. light ; ^ sruch, fem. ladle.

* *I f* final changed into if f. See §§ 113; 54. 1. Final ^ s dropt, § 55.

f See § 66. % See § 54. 1. II See § 118.
66 DECLENSION.

§ 159. Special bases in ^x eh.

BASE. NOM.SING. INSTB. PLCB. LOC.PLUR. NOM.PLUB.
krunch*, moving crookedly,
a curlew kruh kruhbhih krunkshu krunchah
VT^prditch, if it means worship- TTT^J Hl^fat HT3J HTO
ping prdn prdnbhih prdhkshu prdnchah (Acc. the same)
^^vrischf, cutting ^5 T"*
vrit% vridbhih vritsu vrischah

J 160. Bases ending in 5^ chh change ^ chh into ^ t when final, and
before consonants. (See § 125.)
BASE. NOM.SING. NOM. PL. INSTB. PL. LOC. PL. NOM.PL.NEUT.
HT?Tpr<fcAA||,anasker TTCZprdt HTWlprdchhah VJZpT. prddbhih n\6^prdtsu vHfS.prdHchhi

§161. Bases ending in "St j, if regular, follow the example of nouns in

>9 ch, except that they preserve *( j before vowels.
BASE. NOM.SING. NOM. PL. INSTB. PL. LOC. PL. NOM.PL.NEUT.
^fSTriy, disease ^Trufc ?}5T: rujah ^fiw. rugbhih rukshu ^tftTrun/t
^fi^ 4rj%, strength Ark ^ish urjah urgbhiti urkshu »f»i umrji

Other regular nouns in nj,—ttftifitvanij, m. merchant ; f>T^»^ bhishaj, m.

physician ; ^frTO ritvij, m. priest ; sraj, f. garland ; ^>«^ asrij, n. blood.
(On the optional forms of asrij, see further on.) ins majj, Nom.
Sing. JTop mak, diving.

$ 1 6a. Bases ending in changeable to 7 d.

Some bases ending in change ^j into ^ t or 7 d when final, and
before terminations beginning with consonants.

* Derived from the root krunch. The Nom. Sing, would have been ^B«F + ^ krunk
^ s and k are dropt, see § 114.
t Derived from the root vraSch, (in the Dhatupatha, -eT\ «*^), to cut. According
to Sanskrit grammarians, the penultimate or Sl^i is dropt, and ^ch before consonants
or if final changed into Z f. (See § 114.)
J The form <|7 vrit (not TSZ^ vrat) is confirmed by Siddhanta-Kaumudi (1863), 1. p. 182.
|| Some authorities admit VX^T. prds'ah, in the Nom. Plur., and the same base Uya^prds
in all other cases beginning with a vowel.
H On the two final consonants, see § 55. The Nom. Plur. Neut. would be "M^umrji or
^lffs| Hrji in compounds; bahumrji or icHS bahtirji (Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 194)-
 DECLENSION. 67

Base TOT»^ samraj, masc. sovereign.

Singular. Dual. Plural,
HASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. masc. FEM.
N.V. MHli samrdt
i-TOrnTT samrdjau j. TOTTi samrdjah
A. imisamrdjam
I. ^TTSIT samrdjd ^^TTfir; samrddbhih
D. TOTHT samrdje V*/k*Hi*n samrddbhydm
V4l'3'«Tt samrddbhyah
Ab. 1
?WnK samrdjah
G. J
(•TOTSfti samrdjoh TOTOg samnftsu or samrdttsu*
The words which follow this declension are mostly nouns derived, without
any suffix, from the roots «ts^ Mrty' (JST^, not «T^), to shine ; wry,
to clean; *rs^ yq; (except ^[fjTO ritvy), to sacrifice; tt^ra/, to shine, to
rule ; sri/, to dismiss, to create, «ra/', wreath, and ^ra»T sm)', blood,
are not derived from srij); «^ 6Arq#, to roast (a^ft). Also Trfon^
parivrdj, a mendicant.
NOM. SING. NOM. PLUR. INSTR. PLUR. LOC. PLUR.
faaTi^ vibhrdj, resplen
dent vibhrdjah vibhrddbhih vibhrdtsu
^Nt, devej J, worshipper ^1
of the gods deoet devejah devedbhih devetsu
f=J *U ^ visvasrij, creator
of the universe visvasrit visvasrijah visvasridbhih, visvasritsu
1 ftfl I ^parivrdj, a men TrfTjrrfftr:
dicant parivrdt parivrdjah jparivrddbhih, parivrdtsu
falTO*^ visvardj ||, an firarrsn
universal monarch visvardjah visvdrddbhih visvdrdtsu
ap^Af-iy, roasting 9?
bhrit bhrijjah bhridbhih bhritsu

§ 163. Irregular bases in sr/.

NOM. SING. NOM. PLUR. INSTR. PLUR.
I. iJlaff; IT, lame TH»TiA<m ^Nk khaiijah T^faT: khanbhih TsT^khansu

* Cf. § 76.
t From another root, fear* vibhrdk, fttTftHl vibhrdgbhih &c. may be formed. (Siddh.-
Kaum. 1. p. 165.)
J From <fe»a, god, and yo;', to sacrifice, contracted into y.
|| The lengthening of the a in ftpST in'sca takes place whenever is changed into
a lingual. (Pan. VI. 3, 128.)
If See Siddh.-Kaum. ed. Taranatha, vol. I. p. 165.
$8 DECLENSION.

a. avayaj, name of a Vedic priest, has two bases. The Nom. Sing,
is 'w^rr: avaydft, and all the cases beginning with consonants (Pada
cases) are formed from the same base, WtTTC avayas. The Voc. Sing.,
too, is irregular, being, against the rule of these bases, identical with
the Nom. Sing. Some grammarians, however, allow ^ he avayah.
Base avayas and >HqqiH avayaj.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.
N. vihui: avaydh
- vtq*)mi avayaja avaydjah
A. avaydjam
I. avaydjd 1 tfrfn: avayobhih
D. f avaydje ^T^Tft«rr avayobhydm 1
f^T^lTHi: avayobhyah
Ab J
G. ^faMmi avaydjdm
L. fl"(«lir>i avaydji j-^TTTTWh avaydjoh ■»H=m?fJ avayahsu
V. ^TTm: avaydh or avayah like Nom. like Nom.
§ 164. Bases ending in t: r.
Bases ending in ^ r are regular, only ^ i and u, preceding the * r, are
lengthened, if the Tr is final or followed by a consonant 144). In the
Loc. Plur. the final ^ r remains unchanged though followed by V^th. (§ 90.)
Base fir^ ffir, fem. voice.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.
N.V. ntlglh
girau
A. fnx giram
I. ftRT gird jftfifc girbhih
D. fWt gire Ift*§T girbhydm
jifMi: girbhyah
Ab.
j-f>TC girah
6.
L. ftrft giroh

Base ^rr_ vdr, neut. water.

Neuter,
SINGULAR. dual.
N.A.V. ~^V. vdh «rrft.c(fri
I. "mtjvdrd <^ vdrbhydm vdrbhih, Sec.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PLUR. INSTR. PLUR. LOC. PLUR.
"^pur, f. town TO piih 'gC purah vffil pdrbhih "^purshu
cfoar, f. door lit <foa# ITT; dvdrah STfSfc dvdrbhih £rt dvdrshu
fiF7! iir, m. f. 11. scattering ?lfh Jcfh ftti Mrah clftf*h kirbhih ^St^Mrshu*

* Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 135.
 DECLENSION. 69

§ 165. Bases in ^ s.
(A.) Bases formed by the suffixes as, ^ is, us.
Bases ending in ^ s change the ^ s according to the general euphonic
rules explained above. Thus
as, if final, becomes w. aft. 83.)
^rc^ as followed by terminations beginning with vowels remains unchanged.
^ and is and us followed by terminations beginning with vowels are
changed to ^ and ^n ish and ush. (See $ 100.)
as before H bh becomes ^ft 0 (§ 84. 3) ; ^ is and ^ us before H bh
become ir and ^ ur. (§ 82.)
^re^ as before *j su becomes as or ah ; ^ is and ^ us before *j su
become ish or ^: ih, ^t^ush or uh.
Besides these general rules, the following special rules should be observed :
1. Nouns formed by the suffix ^re^ as lengthen their a in the Nom. Sing.
masc. and fem., but not in the Vocative. Thus Nom. Sing. m. f.
*j»Hi: sumandh, well-minded (evfievys) ; Voc. sumanah.
2. Nouns formed by the suffixes ^ or 3^ is or us do not lengthen their
vowel in the Nom. Sing. masc. and fem. Hence Nom. Sing. m. f.
*J53ftfin sujyotih, having good light, from lj su, good, and jiflfrt: jyotih,
n. light ; ^ra; suchakshuh, having good eyes, from *| su, good, and
^r: chakshuh, n. eye. (Pan. v. 4, 133, com.)
3. Neuter nouns in as, ^ is, "3^ us, lengthen their vowel and nasalize
it in the Nom. Acc. Voc. Plur. From jt?T: manah, *jifir« mandmsi ; from
a^ftfinjyotih, iiftTftfajyotirhshi ; from ^rer: chakshuh, chaksh4mshi.
Base 4}tH'^ sumanas, well-minded, masc. fem. neut. (from *J su and
manas, neut. mind.)
Singular. Dual. Plural.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. masc. FEM.
N. sumandh
1 sumanasau ^■IJH«W sumanasah
A. *J*H*t sumanasam
I. sumanasd *JH«flfirt sumanobhih
D. sumanase sumanobhydm
|-*JM«il^J sumanobhyah
Ab.
Ltj«i«1*it sumanasah
G. QHt\H\ sumanasdm
l^fnfta sumanasoh
L. ^JTrftr sumanasi CTHfl^ sumanahsu
V. *J**1* sumanah 1 sumanasau
Neuter,
SINGULAR. dual.
N. A.V. «J*l«lt sumanah ^*t«1«l sumanasi +j»llTftT sumandmsi
The rest like the masc. and fem.
70 DECLENSION,

Base *Ji*flfrf^ sujyotis, well-lighted, masc. fem. neut. (from *J su and

WtffT^jyoiis, neut. light.)

Singular. Dual. Plubal.

MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.
N.V. ffilffflK sujyotih .^■rlHrrtm sujyotishah
sujyotishau
A. ^jlftfiN svjyotisham
I. ?JrlflTrim sujyotishd BaftftrWt sujyotirbhih
D. TJ3«ftfint sujyotishe ^ilftfiwr sujyotirbhydm
sujyotirbhyah
Ab.
|.^Tinf«l^t sujyotishah
G. SSqtflni sujyotishdm
.^xlfirrt^: sujyotishoh
L. guftfrrf^ sujyotishx

Neuter.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
N.A.V. faftfr. sujyotih «jTqlffl«0 sujyotisM *j3*f)rflfv sujyotimshi
The rest like the masc. and fem.

DecUne after the model of IJTTO sumanas and *j3?ftffl^ sujyotis the
following bases :
vedhas, Nom. sing. %vn vedhdh, m. wise. chandramas, N. s.
M jm: chandramdh, m. moon. IPYirer prachetas, N. s. W^rfi: prachetdfr, m.,
Nom. prop, of a lawgiver. H^**^ divaukas, N. s. f<;<Ji«RT: divaukah, m.
a deity. fagTTO vihdyas, N. s. PrfTfR vihdydh,, m. bird, stftK^ apsaras, N. s.
fnrrj: apsar&h, f. a nymph. H^fcTCT mahaujas, N. s. *r^»nt maliaujdb,
m. f. n. very mighty, xpj^payas, N. s. tto payaJ}, n. milk, ^ure^ ayas,
N. s. ^m: aya#, n. iron, yaias, N. s. ir$rc yahah,, n. praise, ^fa^ havis,
N. s. ^rfa: havih, n. oblation. vsjPt^ archis, N. s. ^ff§: archib, n. splendour.
*rpp^ ayw«, N. s. ^nj: ayw#, n. life, age. vapus, N. s. ^tt: vapufy,
n. body*. •

J 1 66. »m ,/anf, old age, may be declined throughout regularly as a

feminine. (See further on, Bases ending in Vowels, Feminines in w a.)
There is, however, another base ^tJ^jaras, equally feminine t, and equally
regular, except that it is defective in all cases the terminations of which
begin with consonants.

* Any of these neuter nouns may assume masc. and fem. terminations at the end of a
compound; le^fi? nashtahavih, Nom. sing. masc. one whose oblation is destroyed.
t Boehtlingk (Declination im Sanskrit, p. 125) gave *[Z^jaras, rightly as feminine; in
the dictionary, though oxytone, it is by mistake put down as neuter.
 DECLENSION. 71

Base "SfXfjard. Base irc^jaraj.

Singular. Singular.
N. "Smjard* deest ; term. ^ s
A. *(rijardm »Tt*t jaras-am
I. fRmjarayd *Kmjaras-d
D. jardyai jaras-e
Ab. IFCnm jardyai. *(tm jaras-ab
G. mniR jardydh »TCB: jaras-ab
L. »rorni jardydm »Ttffc jaras-i
V. -^tjare deest

Dual. Dual.
N. A.V. ^tjare
I. D. Ab. iTTTwrf jardbhydm deest ; term. wfT bhydm
G. L. jarayob ^lM\\ jaras-ob

Plural. Plural.
N. V. ifQ'.jardb iITH: jaras-ab
A. »TO: ,/ar<2/s HXW. jaras-ab
I. »TClfH: jardbhib deest; term. fir: bhih
D. Ab. »RJWi: jardbhyab deest ; term. «i: bhyab
G. SFCrait jar^radro '*{iM\ jaras-dm
L. »RI*J jardsu deest ; term. *J su

§ 167. In compositions, besides the regular forms from *mjard, viz.

nirjarab, fn»Rl nirjard, ftr^t nirjaram, (ageless,) grammarians allow the base
in ^ $ to be used before all terminations beginning with vowels f.

Singular. Singular.
MASC. MASC. FEM.
N. f«i»i <,t nirjarahX deest
A. fir^T nirjaram or fH^TW nirjarasam
nirjarena or ftt^M*! nirjarasd ((niKittn nirjarasina, masc.)

* The declension of »ITT jard, as a regular fern, in iffT d, is given here by anticipation
for the sake of comparison with the defective *Tt5^j'aras.
t By a pedantic adherence to the Sutras of Panini some monstrous forms (included in
brackets) have been deduced by certain native grammarians, but deservedly reprobated by
others. (Siddh.-Kaum. 1. pp. 103, 141.)
J The declension of fif^Tt nirjarah, as a regular masc. in a, is given by anticipation
for the sake of comparison with the defective ?n »i majorat.
72 DECLENSION.

D. fasfTHf nirjardya or ntrjarase

Ab. f^fiJJl^nirjardt or fa#HTC nirjarasah (fa 3 I ^nirjarasdt, masc.)
G. faWH nirjarasya or fa^t*rc nirjarasah (fasfaTCS nirjarasasya, masc.)
L. fH»U nirjare or faA<fa
V. fasjT nirjara deest

Dual. Dual.
nirjarau or far(T^ nirjarasau
I.D.Ab. fasfaP*IT nirjardbhydm deest
G. L. f«i*K4U nirjarayoh or fa^T^ftj nirjarasoh

Plural. Plural.
N.V. fastTTt nirjardh or fa*lT3It nirjarasah
A. faSki *l nirjardn or faHTHt nirjarasah
I. faffc nir/araiA deest (fa*Tt.%i nirjarasaih, masc.)
D. Ab. fasfo'i; nirjarebhyah deest
G. fasRTOT nirjardndm or faWTHT nirjarasdm
L. fa»TCg nirjareshu deest

Fem. fasfTT nirjard, like <*ini itfn/rf. Neut. Sing, deest (fasN^j nirjarasam) ; Dual
Neut. fasjT nirjaram, like :9ST»T Mntam faihsft nirjarasij Plur. fasfalfa nirjardmsi.

$ 1 68. ^fa^ anehas, m. time, >}^'<$ltl purudamsas, m. name of Indra,

form the Nom. Sing. *iH^l anehd, JTC^n purudam&d, without final Visarga.
The other cases are regular, like ^prfl^swfnaMa*, m. Voc. ^ anehafy.
§ 169. g^r^ usanas, m. proper name, forms the Nom. Sing. '5^rjTr«s««a
and the Voc. Sing. <j$M<1 uianan or jf$H: uSanah or T^PT w3<ma. (Sar. 1.
9» 73-)
§ 170. (B.) Bases ending in radical ^ s.
1. From fa? pinda, a lump, and Jj^gras, to swallow, a compound is formed,
faTZr^^iw/fl^rras, a lump-eater.
From fa^ pis, to walk, and *j su, well, a compound is formed, *jfa^ supis,
well-walking.
From tus, to sound, and TJ su, well, a compound is formed, *JTJ^ sutus,
well-sounding.
3. In forming the Nom. Sing. m. f. (and neuter), the rules laid down before
with regard to nouns in which as, ^ is, ^ us, belong to a suffix,
are simply inverted. Nouns in ^ is and us lengthen the vowel,
nouns in as leave it short.
Ex. Nom. Sing. m. f. n. fasTTI piridagral}, ^fh supil}, gir: sut&fy.
 DECLENSION. 73
3. In the Nom. Acc. Voc. Plur. of neuters, nouns in ^ as, ^ is, ^ us,
nasalize their vowels, but do not lengthen them.
Ex. Nom. Acc. Voc. Plur. neut. fqgqftt pindagramsi, *jf»rftc supimsi,
*J jjftl sutumsi.
4. Nouns in 3^ is and 7^ us lengthen their vowels before all terminations
beginning with consonants.
Ex. Instr. Plur. grftfSfc supirbhih, §irf»l: suturbhil}, *rarg sut4hshu.
5. The radical ^ s of nouns ending in ^ is and 7^ us, though followed by
vowels, is not liable to be changed into r^sh. (See § 100, note.)
Base ffeip^pintfagras, eating a mouthful, masc. fem. neut.
SlNGULAH. Dual. Plural.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.
N.V. Pssti; pindagrah
J Cssy*? pindagrasau \ PilUW pindagrasah
A. fusim pindagrasam
I. r«4 sn *t 1 pindagrasd PTOfttHt pindagrobhih
r>5si<l«Tr pindagrobhydm
Ab. I ^fqiiil"!? pindagrobhyah
G. J f<iii|^i pindagrasam,
L. fn Si4 f« pindagrasi \ r*»5U«i\; pindagrasoh
pindagrahsu
Neuter,
SINGULAR. dual. PLUBAL.
N. A.V. PmJ4(; pindagrah fMsytfl pindagrasi fqdijfa pindagramsi

Base well-sounding, masc. fem. neut.

Singular. Dual, Plural.
masc. fem. masc. fem. MASC. FEM.
N.V. gijtsufta
J«j(i«<; sutusah
A. *J(JH sutusam
I. *J|1«I safusd ^ijfiil: suturbhih
D. satoe suturbhydm
j-^ij^l suMrbhyah
Ab. 1
G. J *J3«I sutusam
L. s«<ast '■ sutusoh
^P|j3 sutu"hshu or «JiJ^J suttishshu*
Neuter,
SINGULAR. dual.
N.A.V. *JlKsu<«7l sutumsi

§ 171. Nouns derived from desiderative verbs change into ^sA when
necessary.

* Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 187. § 83.

L
74 DECLENSION.

Base frnrfc^ pipathis, wishing to read, masc. fem. neut.

Singular. Dual. Plural.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.
N. ftnrfh pipathih
. Ts m Hi 4t pipathishau j- ftnfinS pipathishoh
A. fimfaM pipathisham
I. fiprfiPTI pipathishd flprttW! pipathirbhih
D. fat (V^ pipathishe
|^ ftprft**!t pipathirbhyah
Ab. I--
UmiUm pipathishoh
G. J ftprft^T pipathisham
L. WWftfll pipathishi pipathishoh fnnSJ pipathihshu
Neuter.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
N. A. V. PMM<fl: pipathih frprfirfa pipathishi (see § 172)

$ 17a. The nouns «nfifl^ asis, fem. blessing, and sq/tts, masc. a
companion, are dechned like ftrirfT^iwpa?^*, except in the Nom. and Acc.
Plur., if they should be used as neuters at the end of compounds.

List of different Bases in ^ s.

Base. Nom. Sing. Nom. Pl. Instr. Pl. Loc. Pl.
masc. fem. neut. masc. fem. neut.
*J*H^ sumanas, kind, *pRT: *J«H«: +JHWiPn ^nftfir: ^R^J
m. f. n. sumandh 1 sumanah sumanasah sumandmsi sumanobhih sumanassu 2
tjTHiffl^ sujyotis, well- id.
lighted, m. f. n. sujyotih sujyotishah sujyotimshi sujyotirbhih sujyotishshu3
Pms yt^/nndoyras, lump- id. «Hfftt
eating, m. f. n. pindagrah pindagrasah pindagramsi pindagrobhih pindagrassu*
kgi^ cAafofo, splendid, id.
m. f. n. chakdh chakdsah chakdthsi ehakdbhih
dos6, arm, m. (n.) id.
<fo/i doshah domshi dorbhih doshshu7
^f^supis, well-going, id.8 *pftf>t:
m. f. n. supih supimsi supirbhih supishshuw

1 The Vocative is *JT«Tt sumanah. In the other paradigms it is the same as the
Nominative.
2 Or ^JTT^J sumanahsu. 3 Or tJiiflfrK'R sujyotihshu.
4 OrfilT?j:*J pindagrahsu. b Or IWltQchakdhsu
6 rfas may be declined regularly throughout as a masculine. But it is likewise
declined as a neuter. On its irregular or optional forms, see § 214.
7 Or ^fc*J dohshu. 8 Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 197.
9 ^ s not changed into ^sft; see § 100, note. 10 Or ^fh^ supihshu.
 DECLENSION. 75

*jg^sufMS, well-sounding, w id. 33« f#5

m. f. n. sutuh sutusah sutiuiisi suturbhih sutushshu*
fwfitv^pipathis, desirous id.2
of reading, m. f. n. pipathih pipathishdh pipathishi pipathirbhih pipathishshu?
C^<*i«schik(rs, desirous of 1 -M OH 1 «i; * » -ft
id.
acting, m. f. n. chikih chikirshah cMMrshi* ehikirbhih chikirshu
dsis, blessing, f. ^Xtfl'.dsih id.
(Voc. id.) dsishah dsimshi dsirbhih dsishshu5
♦•g*^ sajus, companion, fT^: sajuh id.
m. (Voc. id.) sajushah sajumshi sajdrbhih
suhims, one who id.
strikes well, m. f. n. suhin suhimsah suhimsi suhinbhih suhinsu7
§173- *Z\dhvas (from dhvams, to fall) and sr<zs (from srams,
to fall) and SAras (from bhrams, to fall), when used at the end of
compounds, change their ^ « into TT in the Nom. and Voc. Sing., and before
terminations beginning with consonants. § 131 ought to be restricted to
these bases and to participial bases in ^ vas, § 2,04.
N.V. <4<jjiS3rr parnadhvat N.A.V. TCtt^ HI parnadhvasau N. A. i44jli4U! parnadhvasah
A.THUtgRTparnadhvasam l.Ab.Tl.VjSssr&nparnadhvadbhydm I. '<I^S^fkt/>ar»a«?A»0(i6AiA
I. M*u«lti 1 parnadhvasd G.L.V^ttePSi' parnadhvasoh L.tHJ&TTg parnadhvatsu
§ 174. Bases ending in ^ cM, W ^ h.
Bases ending in these consonants retain them unchanged before all
terminations beginning with vowels. Before all other terminations and
when final, their final consonants are treated either like ^ t or hike cF k.
1. Bases derived from fijrsT diS, to show, T|5T driS, to see, «p? mriS, to stroke,
^51 spris, to touch, change 3^ s into «^ k.
BASE. NOM. SINS. NOM. PLUR. NOM.PLUB.NEUT. INSTR. PLUS. LOC. PLUR.
f^3I dU, f. country fipfi dik f?^3j: dis«$ f^f^f f^f»V: digbhih f<^5T diisfat
2. Bases derived from »T5t was, to destroy, change SJx$ into Z t or op k.
BASE. NOM. SINO. N.PL. N.PL.NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.
*fl H HJwanad, m.f.n. »flMHior°«ToS 0?T3T: °K% °T^fir. or °»TfHT: °«T^§or°«T^J
life destroying jivanat or -raaA; -nasah -namsi -nadbhih or -nagbhih -natsu or -nakshu
3. All other bases in 31^ ^ change their final into 7 t.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOMJL.NEUT. INSTR. PL. LOC. PL.
fasictf, m. f. n. one who enters f&vit f^T.visah f$f$f vimsi vidbhih fq«g cifsa

1 Or ^iT:^ sutuhshu. 2 Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 197. 3 Or filMilfg pipathihshu.

4 Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 194. 5 Or ffTljftt^ dsthshu. 6 Or 'SH^ sajuhshu.
7 See § 73.
76 DECLENSION.

4. Bases derived from >pr dhrish, to dare, change ^ sh into * k.

BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM.PL.NEUT. INSTB. PL. LOC. PL.
^y^dadhrish, m.f.n.bold ^ ^Tt: ?[vfti 3^fHr. ^VSJ
dadhrik dadhrishah dadhrimshi dadhrigbhih dadhrikshu
5. All other bases derived from verbs with final ^sh change ~^sh into Z t.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM.PL.NEUT. 1NSTB.PL. LOC.PL.
Ps ttdvish, m.f.n. hating f&Zdvit fgmdvishah fgfadvimshi f&sf*C dvidbhih fgZ^dvitsu
6. Bases ending in ^ chh change ^ chh into ^ t.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM.PL.NEUT. INSTB.. PL. LOC.PL.
VX^prdchh, m.f.n. asking TttZ^prdt nw^prdchhah VU'&.prdmchhi msfcprddbhih H\c*±prdtsu
Some grammarians allow jrr$rc prdsah in the Nom. Plur. and other cases
beginning with vowels.
7. Bases ending in ksh change ksh into ^ f.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM.PL.NEUT. INSTB. PL. LOC.PL.
n mtaksh, m.f.n. paring KZtat* iTBP takshah "ftfeftamkshi TTZfa'. tadbhih KZQtatsu
8. Most bases ending in ^ h change ^ h into z t.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM.PL.NEUT. INSTB. PL. LOC. PL.
lih, m.f.n. licking fp$7 lit ftj^: lihah PriP^ lirhhi Prts(«TJ lidbhih Pco^«j
m.f.n. covering ^jrAttf JT^JyuAaA Jjf^uMAi 'J^*** ghudbhih TT&Qghutm
On the change of initial ^ $r into ^ ^A, see $ 93.
9. Bases derived from roots ending in ^ h, and beginning with ^ d, change
^ h into ^ k. Likewise J fu!l^ ushnih, a metre.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. NOM.PL.NEUT. INSTB. PL. LOC. PL.
g^ditA, m.f.n. milking V^jdAiti <J^t duhah ^fedumhi vfnr. dhugbhih >JW dhukshu
jo. Bases derived from the roots "J^ druh, to hate, »r? muh, to confound,
fa^ snih, to love, ^ snuh, to spue, may change the final ? h into 7 t
or cjr k.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM.PL. N.PLJJEUT. INSTB. PL. LOC. PL.
^ draft, m.f.n. «7or^ ^f? pfir. or Iffr*: or 1$«J
hating dhrut ot dhruk druhah drrnhhi dhrudbhih or dhrugbhih dhrutsu or dhrukshu
11. Bases derived from raoA, to bind, change ^ A into tt t.
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PL. INSTB. PL. LOC. PL.
3M\*\^updnah,t. a shoe wi*\nupdnat am«i?t updnahah 1 >4 r«i Is '.updnadbhih awuigupdnatsu

* If differently derived (TE^iafcsA may form its Nom. Sing. flT^ /at. 'i"KB^oraisA, cow
herd, which regularly forms its Nom. Sing. poraf, may, according to a different derivation,
form gorak. (See Colebrooke, p. 90, note.) So fiHT* pipak,Nom. Dual fi| MlSjl pipaksh.au,
desirous of maturing ; ft^^; vivak, Nom. Dual Pq^Bjl vivakshau, desirous of saying ;
P(^y+ didhak, Nom. Dual P^tHsft didhakshav, desirous of burning.
 DECLENSION. 77

Decline ftTOTCT vipdS, f. the Beyah river in the Punjab. ik\ vish, f. ordure.
rush, f. anger. ftlOT viprush, f. drop of water. fafasT viviksh, wishing to
enter. snih, loving, ifa^ goduh, cow-milker. *njf?5^ madhulih, bee.
tvish, f. splendour. ^r?fi5T^6«AM^is^, m. f. n. very splendid, x^n^ratna-
mush, a stealer of gems. idrik, m. f. n. such. •'frf^ kidriS, m. f. n.
Which? •"fo'JS^ marmasprU, giving pain.
§ I75- TCTCrr? turdsdh, m. name of Indra, changes into ^sh whenever
^ h is changed into 3 d or ^ t.
Nom. Sing. fl'Cimg turdshdt. Nom. Dual jcrar^ turdsdhau. Instr. Plur.
iJUMTdfa: turdshddbhih.
§ 176. vxfexs^purodds', m. an offering, or a priest, is irregular. The Nom.
Sing, is qforc puroddh, and all the cases beginning with consonants (Pada
cases) are formed from a base vfi^purodas. The Voc. Singular, too, is
irregular, being identical with the Nom. Sing. 152), though some gramma
rians allow ir gCts: he purodah.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. JjClsi; puroddh yCldl^fi puroddsau Tr^tTT$tt purodddah
A. mO s i^T purodMam WttTTjfl puroddJau QTtST^R puroddsah
I. gOdl^lT puroddsd 1JClft«ri purodobhydm JjCtilfat purodobhih
D. sClsi^i puroddse TJ^Tt**lf purodobhydm JjCl^'^n purodobhyah
Ab. JjOil^K puroddsah JjCli^mi purodobhydm ^ClsV**K purodobhyah
G. puroddsah 3Oi I ^ftt puroddsoft yClil^li puroddsdm
L. *Jttel% puroddsi JjClil?ftt puroddsoh ^V3t*J puroda/isu
V. JjOii: or °"Sl puroddh or -dah ^Ctsi^ft puroddsau JjClSI^U puroddsah
§ 177. Another word, y<*vj$n; ukthasdh, a reciter of hymns, is declined
like ij^teTsr^wrorfal.
Nom. 4ctvj3u: ukthasdh. Acc. Sing. T^fTSfFre ukthasdsam. Instr. Plur.
tf+H^jIfa: ukthasobhih. Voc. Sing. 5TT?Tn or J+M^K ukthasdh or ukthcdah.
§ 178. Bases in H m.
Bases ending in * »i retain H m before all terminations beginning with
vowels. Before all other terminations and when final, the * m is changed
into ^ re.
Base jr$nK prakdm, mild.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.
Nom. Voc. ■JTSTPTp-a/ffo W5Tfn prasdmau HSllHt prasdmah
Acc. m^i 1*1 prasdmam H3ll*ll praidmau U\[W. prasdmah
Instr. JTSTPTT pratdrnd ITSITWlf prasdnbhydm JT?lTpW prasdnbhih
Loc. foprasami JTSTPft: pratdmoh H!*I1**J prasdnsu
78 DECLENSION.

3. NOOTS WITH CHANGEABLE BASES.

A. Nouns with two Bases.
§ 179. Many nouns in Sanskrit have more than one base, or rather they
modify their base according to rule before certain terminations.
Nouns with two bases, have one base for the
Nom. Voc. and Acc. Sing.
Nom. Voc. and Acc. Dual of masc. nouns * ;
Nom. Voc. (not Acc.) PluralJ
Nom. Voc. and Acc. Plural of neuter nouns ;
and a second base for all other cases.
The former base will be called the Anga base. Bopp calls it the strong
base, and the terminations the weak terminations.
The second base will be called the Pada and Bha base. Bopp calls it
the weak base, and the terminations the strong terminations.
The general rule is that the simple base, which appears in the Pada and
Bha cases, is strengthened in the Anga cases. Thus the Pada and Bha
base Tfv* prdch becomes in the Anga cases m^prdnch. The Pada base of
the present participle adat, eating, becomes ssf^ir adant in the Anga
cases. This gives us the following system of terminations for words with
two bases :
Singular. Dual. Plural,
masc. masc. masc.
Nom. Voc. ^ s (which is always dropt) ^ au ^TC ah
Acc. ^ am au *K ah
Instr. a wji bhydm 6t: bhih
Dat. *e Wff bhydm HK bhyah
Abl. ^r: ah wff bhydm WK bhyah
Gen. «K ah wt: oh ^ri dm
Loc. ^ft: oh 3 su
Neuter.
SINGULAR. DUAL.
Nom. Acc.

$ 180. Certain words derived from ^i^anch, to move, have two, others
three bases.
«tw prdch, forward, eastern, has two bases, xfa^prdnch for its Anga,
prdch for its Pada and Bha base, and is declined accordingly.
* Most nouns with changeable bases form their feminines in ^ f. A few, however, such
as <\w\^ daman, are said to be feminine without taking the ^ (, and some of them occur as
feminine at the end of compounds.
t Anga base, or, according to Bopp, strong base with weak terminations.
 DECLENSION. 79

Singular. Dual. Plural.

MASC. MASC. MASC.
N. V. Kf^prdn * TU^T pranchau
A. prdSchau HT^I prdchah
I. JTTOT prdchd HlP'HJ prdgbhih
D. V&prdche hi'*mi prdgbhydm
| IITn*i: prdgbhyah
Ab. 1
prdchah
G. J m -si prdchdm
L. HltTOpnicM VTEfprdkshu
Neuter,
SINGULAR. dual.
N.A.V. Jn^^rrf* it I VI prdchi HlPq prdnchi
I. H I I prdchd same as masc.
The feminine of htto prdch is J>mcA£, declined like fern, in ^
Decline TO^T^owicA, downward, south. Strong base TO^T^awincA.

B. Nouns with three Bases.

Nouns with three bases have their ^4«gra or strong base in the same cases
as the nouns with two bases. In the other cases, however, they have one
base, the Pada base, before all terminations beginning with consonants ; and
another base, the Bha base, before all terminations beginning with vowels.
In these nouns with three cases, Bopp calls Anga base the strong base ;
the Pada base the middle base ;
the Bha base the weakest base.
This gives us the following system of terminations for words with three
bases :
Singular. Dual. Plural.

Nom. Voc. ^ s (always dropt) tot au to: ah

Acc. to am TOT au to: ah

Instr. TOT d «n bhydm fir: bhih

Dat. vcr bhydm wr: bhyah
Abl. wri bhydm WR bhyah
Gen. TOT*, oh
Loc. tot: oh

VX^prdn stands for Ttt^prdAJc ; this for Ttt^prdiich + T^s.

80 DECLENSION.

Neuter.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
Nom. Acc.

Terminations included in two lines require Anga or strong base.

Terminations included in one line require Pada or middle base.
Terminations not included in lines require Bha or weakest base.
181. Words derived from anch, to move, with three bases.
V7(\pratyach, behind, has for its Anga or strongest base vm\pratyanch;
for its Bha or weakest srffo pratich. The Pada or middle base is wrsj prci
tyach. Hence TTW^ pratyah, Nom. Sing. masc. ; ■mttfRpratyak, Nom. Sing,
neut.; mrNt pratichi, Nom. Sing. fem.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
MASC. MASC. MASC.
N.V. HN^pratyan mv-^Ti pratyaRchau pratyaHchah
A. WWpratyancham Mim1"?! pratyaHchau Hfll-q; pratichah

I. JTiffaT praticM BTI^WTr pratyagbhydm ffl>P"fc pratyagbhih

D. JTifr^ pratiche WP^TT pratyagbhydm THF*?, pratyagbhyah
Ab. 14 ri"l *1 J pratichah u «' *h i pratyagbhydm HWTi pratyagbhyah
G. UrflMJ pratichah Ut\\-4\'.pratichoh Hffl"Ml pratichdm
L. unlf-q pratichi JTift^h pratichoh OTTV pratyakshu
.Neuter.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
N.A. lli*J«fc pratyah Uffrfa pratichi H«P<| pratyanchi

Fem.
singular.
N. Hrflffl pratichi

The following words, derived from ancA, to move, have three bases :
ATiga or strong base. Pada or middle base. Bha or weak base.
irw^^ra^yamcA, behind JTW^pratyach ITirfal pratich
«h}--3 samyanch, right samyach samich
^^wyancA, low nyach
sadhryanch, accompanying *ryr^ sadhryach *nft^ sadhrtch
SI anvanch, following WT^^ anvach
fsps^ vishvanch, all-pervading f%r^ vishvach
^■^wdarecA, upward udach
fil^ tiryanch, tortuous fir^ tiryach fiK^ tira&ch
 DECLENSION. 81

Bases in ^ at and ant.

i. Participles Present.
§ 182. Participles of the present have two bases, the Pada and Bha base
in in^ at, the Anga base in ant.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

N.V. ^^^adan •«t^nt adantau V^IR adantah

A. xt^n adantam V$ln adantau ■w^nt adatah
I. xt^m oda<<? ■w^fs: adadbhih
D. ^7 arfaie «<;«l adadbhydm
Ik^W adadbhyah
Ab. "I
SH^rlT adatdm
^•Hpft! adatoh •e«;r*f adatsu

Neuter.
SINGULAR. DUAL.
N.A. ^Watfa* VKjfii adanti

Fem.
singular.
N. S^rft adatf, &c, like »ac#.

$183. There is a very difficult rule according to which certain participles

keep the t^re in the Nom. and Acc. Duai of neuters, and before the
of the feminine. This rule can only be fully understood by those who are
acquainted with the ten classes of conjugations. It is this,
I. Participles of verbs following the Bhu, Div, and Chur classes
preserve the ^ra.
II. Participles of verbs following the Tud class may or may not preserve
the The same applies to all participles of the future in ^ni^syat,
and to the participles of verbs of the Ad class in ^rr a.
III. Participles of all other verbs must reject the ^n.

I. bhavat. Nom. and Acc. Dual Neut. >Hift bhavanti.

^tariT divyat. jft^hfl divyanti.
"■"Vmi^ chorayat. MttVifl chorayanti.
II. 3^ farfatf. TT^ift tudantt or -g^ift facfatf.
*riVHTjj bhavishyat (fut.). MfTOTrft bhavishyanti or ufamifl bhavishyati.
u*sydt. Trbft ytfratf or *rnft yatf.
82 DECLENSION.

III. ^Jtadat. Nom. and Acc. Dual Neut. ^ift adati.

[juhvat. ^i[\juhvati.
*T^nr sunvat. sunvati.
%VrT rundhat. %V?ft rundhatt.
cP^TT tanvat. Kr^tft tanvati.
■^HSK krinat. ''^fhsiuft krinati.

The feminine base is throughout identical in form with the Nom. Dual
Neut. Hence bhavantt, being, fern.; Tfjffi tudantt or TT^Tft tudati,
striking, fem. ; ^ril arfa^, eating, fem. The feminine base is declined
regularly as a base in ^ t
§ 184. Another rule, which ought not to be mixed up with the preceding
rule, prohibits the strengthening of the Anga base throughout in the
participles present of reduplicated verbs, except in the Nom. Acc. Voc.
Plur. Neut., where the insertion of ^ n is optional. With this exception,
these participles are therefore really declined like nouns in TT t with
unchangeable bases.
Base Sf^iT dadat, giving, from dd, to give, <j««[fa daddmi, I give.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
MASC.
N.V. ^Ifdadat ^xtdadat
j- dadatau j. <^ til dadati j-^JH efadafaA j-^fit dadati*
A. tffidadatam dadat
I. dadatd ] f^VKi dadadbhih
D. <^TT dadate rj f. jyi dadadbhydm
j^t;wt dadadbhyah
Ab.
cf^K! dadatah
G. <^ctl dadatdm
L. dadati t dadatoh dadatsu
The same rule applies to the participles w^,/afoAa£, eating ; mvpfjdgrat,
waking; ^ftrji^ daridrat, being poor ; ^nrffMsaf, commanding; '^srarTcAaM-
satf, shining. But WVKjagat, neut. the world, forms Nom. Plur. »PTfrT jaganti,
only.
$ 185. - brihat, great, ^ff^mAa?, m. a deer, n. a drop of water, are
declined like participles of verbs of the Ad class.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
MASC. MASC. MASC.
N.V. <^nbrihan brihantau ^^fl? brihantah
A. TfjXbrihantam •^brihantau |

* Or <^fn dadanti.
 DECLENSION. 83

Neuter.
SINGULAR. DUAL.
N. A. ien brihat ^ffl brihatt •g ^Pit brihanti

Fem.
singular.
N. ^5s'ifl brihatt

§ 1 86. »r^JMaAfitf, great, likewise originally a participle of the Ad class,

forms its Anga or strong base in ^rn^ dnt.
Singular, Dual, Plural.
masc. masc. MASC.
N. H^i^mdhdn T^TUT mahantau *<^int mahdntah
A. Tpirt mahdntam ♦1 P I ft I mahantau H^ri; mahatah
I. *i^ni mdhatd Hlrfk: mahadbhih
D. i^n mahate •i^Wi mahadbhydm
j-H^jHI mahadbhyah
Ab. "I
♦i^nt mahatah
G. j H^rll mahatdm
L. tt^fri mahati Jienk mahatoh H$rH mahatsu
V. JJ^TmaAan
Neuter.
SINGULAR. DUAL.
N. A.V. JT^fffioAai *T?ift mahati J^lfii mahdnti
The rest like the masculine.
Fem.
singular.
N. *^rfl mahati

Bases ending in the Suffixes UK mat arari ^ vat, forming their Anga Bases
in *nr mant a«<£ ^ vant.
§ 187. The possessive suffixes HIT jraarf and ^jr va^ form their Anga or
strong base in qj^rnant and ^' vant. They lengthen their vowel in the
Nom. Sing. Masc. These suffixes are of very frequent occurrence.
^rfr^Tir agnimat, having fire.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
MASC. MASC. MASC.
N. P' I agnimdn *ji 0 nT agnimantau •wT'i'int agnimantah
A. ^P»i«in agnimantam ^frqHin agnimantau [ <5TfhpTrT: agnimatah
V. ^riTTTJT^ agniman
M 2
84 DECLENSION.

Neuter.
SINGULAR. DUAL.
N.V. Vtft'Wi^agnimat ^pHHrfl agnimati wfl HH Til agnimanti
Fem.
singular.
N. ^fWHrft agnimati
m^vat is used i. after bases in ^ a and WT a.
Ex. ^jTj^jt jndnavat, having knowledge, fmrm^vidydvat, having know
ledge.
But shPhh^ agnimat, having fire. hanumat, having jaws,
a. After bases ending in nasals, semivowels, or sibilants, if preceded by a
or ^rr d.
Ex. Mt)«rf payasvat, having milk, j^h^ udanvat, having water.
But ytfl frt H if jyotishmat, having light. Jfttl^ girvat, having a voice.
3. After bases ending in any other consonants, by whatever vowel they may
be preceded.
Ex. vidyutvat, having lightning.
There are exceptions to these rules. (Pan. vm. 2, 9-16.)
$ 188. vr^iT bhavat, Your Honour, which is frequently used in place of the
pronoun of the second person, is declined like a noun derived by ^ vat.
Native grammarians derive it from UT bhd., with the suffix ^TT vat, and keep
it distinct from H^iT bhavat, being, the participle present of t^bkd, to be.
VW\bhavat, Your Honour.
Singular, Dual. Plural.
masc. MASC. MASC.
N. Tttft^bhavdn bhavantau MHii'* bhavantah
A. Umt bhavantam H^ft bhavantau H^itt bhavatah
V. UTTX bhavan or Htt bhoh
Neuter.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
N.A.V. **nt bhavat >T3ift bhavatt ♦TTfir bhavanti
Fem.
singular.
N. *T^»ft bhavat i
>T^fT bhavat, being, part, present.
Singular. Dual, Plural.
masc. masc. MASC.
N. *T^»f bhavan M^tu bhavantau HTJTC bhavantah
A. *TTiT bhavantam bhavantau *TTiTJ bhavatah
V. bhavan
 DECLENSION. 85

Neuter,
SINGULAR. dual.
N.A.V. VRi^bhavat JT^Tift bhavanti H^Td bhavanti
Fem.
singular.
N. *fTfft bhavanti
§ 189. ^i^arvat, masc. horse, is declined regularly like nouns in^ff vat,
except in the Nom. Sing., where it has w#T arvd. ^uarvan in VR^y^anarvan,
without a foe, is a totally different word, and declined like a noun in SPT an;
Nom. Sing. v«M^t anarvd; Nom. Dual VPTfraft anarvdnau; Acc. Sing. ^H^lili
anarvdnam ; Instr. Sing. *SF&im anarvand ; Instr. Plur. STfrffH: anarvabhih.
The feminine of ^rf^ arvat is wSlfl arvati.
§ 190. fsnmt kit/at, How much? ^tfi^iyat, so much, are declined like bases
in in^ mat. Their feminines are tanfi kiyati, ^rrfr iya/e.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
MASC. MASC. MASC.
N. r<*<ll«^%a» r*4ffi kiyantau ftmR kiyantah
A. f«imn kiyantam foPTift kiyantau r<*<4(i; kiyatah
I. fcfc^ril %ai<i ftPHW kiyadbhydm ftntftR kiyadbhih
V. ft(T«^*iya»
Neuter.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
N.A.V. nPfiT Wya< r<**ifll kiyanti

Bases in sn^ an (sn^ an, JHT man, ^.T van).

J 191. Words in snr <m, have three bases: their Anga or strong base is
STPT are; their Bha or weakest base «T»; and their Pada or middle base sr a.
Mark besides,
1. That the Nom. Sing. masc. has a, not «TR dn(s).
2. That the Nom. Sing. neut. has ^ a, not sn^are.
3. That the Voc. Sing. neut. may be either identical with the Nominative,
or take tT^re.
4. That words ending in qy^man and ^tt van keep »T«T mare and ^tj van as
their Bha bases, without dropping the ST a, when there is a consonant
immediately before the »T»r man and van. This is to avoid the
concurrence of three consonants, such as xcf^parvn from parvan,
or dtmn from VTPPT dtman. This rule applies only to words
ending in in^ man and van, not to words ending in simple

-
86 DECLENSION.

^HT an. Thus iTBr^ takshan forms Tdgn takshnd; »j(Nt m&rdhan,
*T»}T milrdhnd, &c.
5. That in all other words the loss of the tH a is optional in the Loc. Sing.,
and in the Nom. Acc. Voc. Dual of neuters. The feminine, however,
drops the wa; thus irjft rdjnt.

TTtt^rdjan, m. king. Anga, tnTT^ rajdn ; Pada, ^jsr raja; Bha, XSSrajfi.

Masculine.
■ SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. XXWfrdjd rdjdnau minTt rdjdnah

A. tT5TR' rdjdnam rdjdnau VRl rdjnah
V. TX^\jdjan
I. TTsTr rdjitd tTWlT rdjabhydm rTirfiK rdjabhih
D. rdjHe IXSTwri rdjabhydm TT»W rdjabhyah
Ab. TT^TC rdjHah tTiTWlT rdjabhydm TT3T**i: rdjabhyah
G. TT?Tt r4/i!aA TTsft: rdjHoh rdjndm
L. On) r$fti or rdjani rdj&oh rdjasu

«nT«T wamare, n. name. Anga,?rtJrr!JwamaM; Pada, »TPTwama; Bha, TTn^reareire.

Neuter,
SINGULAR. dual.

N. A. 'HTH una 111 1 P«i ndmdni

V. «TPT nama or «iin«^n<foiare

I. «TTOT ndmnd •TWn ndmabhydm »1l*lf*Tt ndmabhih
D. «TT% ndmne «1l*t*Hl ndmabhydm •TPWt ndmabhyah
Ab. STTO ndmnah •TWA ndmabhydm ^TTT^K ndmabhyah
G. Tret ndmnah ni«k ndmnah ndmndm
L. «nftfnaroni or «n*rf«Tnamani «1I«U ndmnoh ■ITTO ndmasu

§ 192. Nouns in which the suffixes H^mare and sr^wm are preceded by
a consonant, such as JWT brahman, m. n. the creator, Trsg^ yajvan, m.
sacrificer, irf^^aram, n. joint, form their Bha base in mare and Tp^ f«w.
"S5PT brahman, m. creator. Anga, 3TVR brahman; Pada, -g?r brahma;
Bha, W8PT brahman.
 DECLENSION. 87

Masculine.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
N. ^WT brahmd MSIKut brahmdnau 1TWNR brahmdnah
A. ««HU brahmdnam riWIJjft brahmdnau ««*Ut brahmanah,
V. sm*\brahman
I. aw*!)l brahmand sRWT brahmabhydm awfWt brahmabhih
D. ««<U brahmane a?T«IT brahmabhydm WiMt brahmabhyah
Ab. brahmanah brahmabhydm brahmabhyah
G. «w<ut brahmanah «««lftt brahmanoh sTWWT brahmandm
L. ««f«u brahmani et«|4uU brahmanoh st«l*J brahmasu
Neuter,
SINGULAR. dual. PLURAL.
N. A. 'a^T brahma RIOTf) brahmani WWftli brahmdni
V. «TO brahma or XWT brahman
Decline 15f>T yajvan, sacrificer; vmnr dtman, self; sudharman,
virtuous.
Mfd^t^pratidivan, one who sports, from ftf^ ^falfif a*ii> divyati, lengthens
the to a*2, whenever the ^ v is immediately followed by 7^ re. Nom.
Sing. uCritym pratidivd; Nom. Plur. nPiif^M: pratidivdnah, ; Acc. Plur.
Wpff<^: pratidivnah (§ 143).
§ 193. Words in ^PT aw, like tT»P^ rdjan, king, form their feminine in ^
dropping the ^1 a before the f? re; TIsft ra/re2, queen.
Words in ^ vara, like dhwan, fisherman, form their feminine in
^ «ar£; xftatf dhivari, wife of a fisherman. See, however, P&n. iv. 1, 7, v.
Words in iPiraad, if feminine, are declined like masculines, ^w^aamcre,
fern, rope; Nom. Sing. ^TTt ddmcL, Acc. j»wh ddmdnam; but there is an
optional base ^WJ aama, Acc. Sing, ^pri ddmdm. (Pan. iv. 1, 11 j 13.)
§ 194. Nouns in ^T^are, JR mare, ^tt ware, at the end of adjectival com
pounds, may either use their masculine forms as feminines, or form feminines
in d. Those in ^n^ an, if in the Bha base they can drop the ^1 a before the
^re, may also take \ t (Pan. iv. 1, 28). Thus, Nom. Sing. masc. and fem.
3j^ttT sucharmd, having good leather, Nom. Dual Sjvhtn sucharmdnau ;
suparvd, *jq<H3T suparvdnau: or, Nom. Sing. fem. ^'^HT sucharmd, Nom.
Dual *piif wcharme, Plur. *prer. sucharmdh; ?prfT suparvd, ^n^suparve, tjrrfr:
suparvdk. Of ^STJ^-^ bahurdjan, having many kings, the feminine may be,
1. ?gCT»U bahurdjd, Dual W§TT3rR) bahurdjdnau.
3. ^|tT»(T bahurdjd, Dual bahurdje.
3. bahurdjni, Dual aTTT^t bahurdjnyau.
Pg^ltfl dviddmni (Pan. iv. 1, 37), having two ropes, is an exception.
88 DECLENSION.

Adjectives in sp^ van, which form their fem. in ^ vari, dhivan, a

fisherman, ^fhtf dhivart, rfa^pman, xfartf pivari, fat, may do the same at
the end of compounds, or take vd. qgvNO bahudhwart or '«i?v1^l
c?Awa, Nom. Dual "^ipr^ bahudhive, having many fishermen. (Siddh.-
Kaum. i. p. 209.)
£ 195. vfam pathin, m. path, has
for its Anga base v^^panthdn (like nura ro/aw);
for its Bha base vr^path;
for its Pada base vfapathi.
It is irregular in the Nom. and Voc. Sing., where it is VW. panthdh.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N.V. VW. panthdh VFH^i panthdnau N. s»ni; panthdnah
A. null panthdnam •ivini panthdnau A. VW. pathah
I. WRpathd ^Tftiwrf pathibhydm I. VlFvjfir: pathibhih

^jf8f«^ ribhukshin, m. a name of Indra, and Hftr^ mathin, m. a churning-

stick, are declined in the same manner. The three bases are,
WHHJM ribhukshdn] .
7* " 7. rAngaj
H«j|t^ manthan J
^»TT^ ribhuksh \ ^
math J '

*rftf ma^t J
The Nom. and Voc. Sing, are ^p^TC ribhukshdh and jfan: manthdh.
ilftr*^ pathin, ^Hfef^ ribhukshin, and *rftr«^ mathin form their feminines
ir«ft pathi, ^>T^ ribhukshi, Jf«ft mathi.
§196. A word of very frequent occurrence is s<r?q ahan, n. day, which
takes aAa« as its Pada base. Otherwise it is declined like TRtF{ndman.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
P. N.A.V. ahah Bh. N. A. V. ahni* An. N. A.V. 'H^TfHaWni
Bh. I. ^rjJTafok* P. I.D.Ab. W^fWlT ahobhydm P. I. ^t^K ahobhih
Bh. D. ^Tg ahne Bh. G. L. ^Hjft: ahnoh P. D. Ab. 'ST?t«r. ahobhyah
Bh. Ab. G. ^Tg: ahnah Bh. G. SS^T aftnrfm
Bh. L. ^ifjf aAni t P. L. fl^w ahassu J

The Visarga in the Nominative Singular is treated like an original \ r {§ 85).

Hence 'snrr^: ahar-ahah, day by day. In composition, too, the same rule

* Or ahani. t Or VH^fW ahani. t Or ^T?t*J ahalisu.

 DECLENSION. 89

applies ; NH^Ikj: aharganah, a month (Pan. vm. a, 69) : though not always,
VftaTCR ahordtrak, day and night. (See § 90.)
§ 19 7. At the end of a compound, too, «T?^ ahan is irregular. Thus
<{)«iis«^ dirghdhan, having long days, is declined :
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. J$$T%\: dfrghdhdh* N.AV.ffi&tiftdirghdhdnau N.V. ^NhlTO: dtrghdhdnah
V. ^KH?: dirghdhah A. ^^IJF dirghdhndh
A. ^KjTfnj dirghdhdnam I. ^faffa". dirghdhobhih,&c.
Feminine, ^ihgt dirghdhni (Pan. vm. 4, 7).
§ 1 98. In derivative compounds with numerals, and with fa vi and stfya,
^rg «Awa is substituted for ahan : but in the Loc. Sing, both forms are
admitted ; e. g. arjr: dvyahnah, produced in two days ; Loc. Sing. 35 dvyahne
or srfjc dvyahni or SRrfif dvyahani. (Pan. vi. 3, 110.)
£ 199. '^pt &>aw, m. dog, yuvan, m. young, take km, yiln
as their Bha bases. For the rest, they are declined regularly, like
brahman, m.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. ^\hd N.A.V. TSrn^ Jvdnau N. HINt A«fe<$
A. mm hdnam A. ^J»TJ iunaA
V. Tuscan I. ^fffiK 6va.bh.ih
The feminine of k>an is snft £wne; of ywoan, ^fin yuvatih;
according to some grammarians, ^tft yrfwl
§ 200. WJ^^maghavan, the Mighty, a name of Indra, takes H^t^maghon
as its Bha base.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. *TT^T maghavd N.A.V. ITWH maghavdnau N. HtMMl maghavdnah
A. H*HM maghavdnam A. »t*iW maghonah
V. JHRr^mapiAaflaji I. *<M<=lf»T: maghavabhih t
The same word may likewise be declined like a masculine with the suffix
^ vat or HIT mat ; (see «pr|HHN agnimat.)
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. mmV^maghavdn N.A.V. T*PT^ maghavantau N. maghavantah
A. TOTiT maghavantam A. *lMHni maghavatah
V. T^r^majrAaiiflB I. *WI%J maghavadbhih
The feminine is accordingly either maghoni or lOTlA maghavati.

* Pan. vm. 2,69, 1; Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 194 ; but Colebrooke, p. 83, has ^1 3 151 dirghdhd
as Nom. Sing.
t Colebrooke, Sanskrit Grammar, p. 81.
N
90 DECLENSION.

§ 201. tgRpdskan and ^rijHt^ aryaman, two names of Vedic deities, do

not lengthen their vowel except in the Nom. Sing, and the Nom. Acc. Voc.
Plur. neut. ; (in this they follow the bases in ^ in ; § 203.) For the rest,
they are declined like nouns in an ; (see Tj»P^ rdjan.)
BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PI. ACC. PL. INSTR. PL. NOM.PL.NEUT.
SJ'MMJH Tjpr ^w. fan: ^rfa fjifia
pushan, pusha, pushn pusha ptishanah pushnah pushabhih ptishdni
^nm^, ufam, wtm w%nm vwm: ^rimfir. ^riNnfiu
aryaman, aryamana, aryamn aryamd aryamanah aryamnah aryamabhih aryamdni
Loc. Sing, tjftnt ptishni or ^rftff pushani; or, according to some, ^fa p4shi.
(Sir. 1. 9, 31.)
§ 202. The root ^1 han, to kill, if used as a noun, follows the same rule ;
only that when the vowel between ^ h and ^ n is dropt, ^ h becomes \gh.
BASE. NOM . SINS. NOM. PL. ACC. PL. INSTR. PL. NOM.PL.NEUT.
"^[han, ? ha, Jf^ghn |IT hd hanah VX ghnah ^fat habhih T$ft{hdni

brahmahan, ha, ghn brahmahd brahmahanah bruhmaghnah brahmahabhih brahmahdni

Loc. Sing, inrffe brahmaghni or riCl^ftu brahmahanu

Bases in in.
$ 303. Words in i« are almost regular ; it is to be observed that
1. They drop the at the end of the Pada base.
2. They form the Nom. Sing. masc. in \ the Nom. Acc. Sing. neut. in
^ t; and the Nom. Acc. Plur. neut. in ^ftf ini.
Masculine.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
N. VTt dhani VfipTT dhaninau \fr|i; dhaninah
A. Vfl«i dhanfiiam Vftfft dhaninau VfjT^TI dhaninah
I. VftpTT dhanind Vfrr*lT dhanibhydm Vfrfir: dhanibhih
D. VftfT dhanine VftT^lT dhanibhydm VftTHK dhanibhyah
Ab. vf«i«i; dhaninah Vftf^n dhanibhydm Vfcr*K dhanibhyah
G. Vfii; dhaninah Vfcprfc dhahinoJi VftfTT dhanindm
L. Vftrftr dhanini Vftnftt dhaninoh Vfirg dhanishu
V. Vftf^ dhanin VfrpiT dhaninau VftrT: dhaninafr
Neuter.
SINGULAR. dual. PLURAL.
N.A. Vtfadhani Vf«l»ll dhanini Vllfa dhanini
V. vftT cttani or Vf«i«^ ihanin
Fem.
SINGULAR.
N. vTin) dhanini
 declension: 91

Decline HVTfoff medhdvin, wise ; ifyifec^yatosvin, glorious; nfrt{*^vdgmin,

loquacious ; <*|(V^ kdrin, doing.
Note—These nouns in in, (etymologically a shortened form of ^t«^ an,) follow
the analogy of nouns in an (like CWf rdjan, •tlt^ ndman) in the Nom. Sing,
masc. and neut., and in the Voc. Sing, and in the Nom. Acc. Plur. neut. They might be
ranged, in fact, with the nouns having unchangeable bases; for the lengthening of the
vowel in the Nom. and Acc. Plur. neut. is but a compensation for the absence of the nasal
which is inserted in these cases in all bases except those ending in nasals and semivowels.

Participles in vas.
§ 304. Participles of the reduplicated perfect in ^ vas have three bases ;
vdms as the Anga, 7^ ush as the Bha, and ^ vas as the Pada base.
They change the ^ s of ^ vas into t, if the s is final, or if it is followed
by terminations beginning with >^ bh and ^ s. (See 173, 131.)
Anga, ^TSTT^ rurudvdms ; Pada, rurudvas; Bha, ■^^rurudush.

Masculine.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. «5<>Si i^rurudvan rurudvdmsau ^^TTF; rurudvdmsah

A. ^£1*1 rurudvdmsam ^^^T^T rurudvamsau N: rurudushah
V. *S<i£*ijurudvan
I. ^T^RT rurudushd <5<;d«ill rurudvadbhydm Ij^fk! rurudvadbhih
D. rurudushe «!^SWi rurudvadbhydm W*. rurudvadbhyah
Ab. rurudushah t>tvS«i rurudvadbhydm 4^IVK rurudvadbhyah
G. T^JT. rurudushah ^^<jhU rurudushoh t\«»c m rurudushdm
L. *}<5?f^ rurudushi <5*»J«ll; rurudushoh rurudvatsu

Neuter.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.

N. ^«jSi^ rurudvat iv^ll rurudushi | tv<>"3iPv rurudvdmsi

Fem.
singular.
N. ^"^^.ll rurudushi

§ 205. Participles in ^ raw which insert an ^ i between the reduplicated

root and the termination, drop the ^ i whenever the termination ^ was is
changed into T^wsA. Thus
TrftsjTR tasthivdn, from s/M, to stand, forms the fem. rf^Ml tasthusM.
^f^Tt^^ecAimre, from n^^acA, to cook, forms the fem. i^tft jPecAzwA?.
n a
92 DECLENSION.

A very common word following this declension is fajPT vidvdn, wise, (for
fsrfasTR vividvdri) ; fem. P^h) vidushi.
If the root ends in ^ i or ^ i, this radical vowel is never dropt before ~^ush,
the contracted form of ^ vas. Hence from Tft ni, fiRfaPJ ninivdn ; Instr.
ftpj^T ninyushd ; fem. Ch^mI ninyushi.
Decline the following participles :
FADA BASE. NOM. SING. NOM. PLUR. ACC. FLUB. INSTtt. PLUR.

Atsruvas susruvdn hisruvdmsah Sidruvushah s'usruvadbhih

pechivas pechivdn pechivdmsah pechushah pechivadbhih

jagmivas jagmivdn jagmivdmsah jagmushah jagmivadbhih

s
jaganvas jaganvdn jaganvdmsah jagmushah jaganvadbhih
'*ffiMta:
jaghnivas jaghnivdn jaghnivdmsah jaghnushuh jaghnivadbhih

jaghanvas jaghanvdn jaghanvdmsah jaghnushah jaghanvadbhih

Bases in ^jt^ lyas.
$ 306. Bases in fyos (termination of the comparative) form their
Ahga base in tydms.
Pada and Bha base J|0 M*^ gariyas, heavier ; Ahga base irfhri^ gariydms.
Masculine.
DUAL.
gariydmsau 'lO^I^TC gariydmsah
A. 'l0«4l«t gariydmsam *lO*l*ii gariyasah

I. TTCfareT gariyasd '|0<<1*IT gariyobhydm 'iOmIPu gartyobhih, &c.

Neuter,
SINGULAR. dual.
N. TCfat gariyah 'lOmTtl gariydmsi
Fem.
singular.
N. irtfwt fl'oHyosi

Miscellaneous Nouns with changeable Consonantal Bases.

§ 207. Words ending in xri^arf, foot, retain ir^^arf as Ahga and Pada
base, but shorten it to ^ ,pa<Z as Bha base.
* changed into according to § 136.
 DECLENSION. 93

Singular. Dual. Plural.

N.V. *JTT^ supdd ^VT^t supddau supddah (Ahga)
A. ynjsupddam fTTT^ supddau |~^T^faA (Bha)
I. ^irfg: supddbhih (Pada)
The feminine is either *}»n^ swparf or supadi (Pan. iv. i, 8) ; but a
metre consisting of two feet is called fip^l dvipadd.
§ 208. Words ending in ^T^ waA, carrying, retain v<2A as Anga and
Pada base, but shorten it to ^ uh as Bha base. The fem. is gfjft uhi.
Final ^ h is interchangeable with ^ dh, j^d, ^ t. (See §$128; 174, 8.)
The 4 of -35^ uh forms Vriddhi with a preceding us (| 46). Thus
f«CM<ll^ viSvavdh, upholder of the universe.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N.V. fami^ vUoavdt fttRT^i vihavdhau f=) 4 1 £t visvavdhah

I. PTORT^ftr: vihavddbhih
§ 209. ijhPITf Svetavah is further irregular, forming its Pada base in
vas, and retaining it in the Nom. and Voc. Sing.; e. g. Nom. Voc.
lUfMi: svetavah ; Acc. T&iT^T? kvetavdham ; Instr. TsnfhjT Svetauhd ; Instr. Plur.
■ssrfl^tfa: Svetavobhih, &c. ; Loc. Plur. ,i5fir^:?J Svetavahsu.
Some grammarians allow $irer^ svetavah, instead of ^di^ Svetauh, in all
the Bha cases (Sar. 1. 9, 14), and likewise ^j(m svetavah in Voc. Sing.
§ 210. A more important compound with vdh is ^RJI anaduh, an ox,
(i. e. a cart-drawer.) It has three bases :
1. The Anga base WTJT^ anadvdh.
2. The Pada base ■*i«f$e' anadud.
3. The Bha base anaduh.
It is irregular besides in the Nom. and Voc. Sing.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. ^r\^\<\anadvdn N. A. V. WTJI^ anadvdhau N. W«TfT?J anadvdhah
V. «)«is«^ anadvan I. D. Ab. wiswi anadudbhydm A. ■wHi^t anaduhah
A. ■stisi^ anadvdham G. L. -stns^lj anaduhoh I. vmsfe; anadudbhih
I. vinj^l anaduhd L. wijrtj anadutsu
If used as a neuter, at the end of a compound, it forms
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. A. V. 'Wise anadud •wise) anaduhi ■seisifc anadvdmhi

The rest like the masculine.

The feminine is ^rfTT^t anaduhi or ^H'jjl^l anadvdht (Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 228).
94 DECLENSION.

§ 211. T$n{ap, water, is invariably plural, and makes its a long in the
Ariga base, and substitutes it / for ^p before an affix beginning with *^ bh.
Plural.
Norn, ^rrq: dpah
Acc. %m dpah
Instr. ^fg". adbhih
Loc. ^pw apsu
In composition ^r^ ap is said to form svdp, Nom. Sing. masc. and
fem., having good water ; Acc. ^pj svdpam ; Instr. ^tjt svapd, &c. Nom.
Plur. ^Pi: svdpafr; Acc. svapah; Instr. ^fjft svadbhih, &c. The
neuter forms the Nom. Sing. svap; Nom. Plur. ^ftr svampi or «if<4
svdmpi, according to different interpretations of Panini. (Colebrooke, p. 101,
note.) The Sarasvati (i. 9, 62) gives 53TP1 mpnf«l svdmpi taddgdni, tanks
with good water.
§ 212. 'fapums, man, has three bases:
1. The Ahga base VKt^pumdms.
2. The Pada base im pum.
3. The Bha base ^^pums.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. <4*i r«i pumdn N.A.V. |JHi<fi pumdmsau N. >j«ii*it pumdmsah
V. jjit^puman I. D.Ab. pumbhydm A. VR'.pumsah
A. M«ii« pumdmsam pumsoh I. *jfWt pumbhih
I. 'JBTjpuJBia
The Loc. Plur. is Jgzspunsu, not g*j^w?7WM 136). The Sarasvati gives ljTj
punkshu (1. 9, 70).
In composition it is declined in the same manner if used in the masc. or
fem. gender. As a neuter it is, Nom. Sing, ^t^supum, Nom. Dual JPjtf
supumsi, Nom. Plur. *PJ*rfftt supumdmsi.
§ 313. div or ^ dyw, f. sky, is declined as follows :
Base div, IJ dyu.
Singular, Dual. Plural.
n.v. srh dyauh N. A. V. divau N. f^X divah
A. divam I. D. Ab. ^wrf dyubhydm A. divah
I. f^qi died G. L. f^ft rficoA I. Hfn: dyubhih
D. fi^ dive D. Ab. dyubhyah
Ab. G. fipft divah G. f^T difldm
L. f^f^ rfici L. ^9 dyushu
Another base ?ft cft/o is declined as a base ending in a vowel, and follows
the paradigm of ift go, §219. (See Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 138.)
 DECLENSION. 95

Compounds like sudiv, having a good sky, are declined in the masc.
and fem. like fif^ div. Hence *Jin: sudyaufy, ^fi^ sudivam, &c.
In the neuter they form Nom. Acc. Voc. Sing. ^ sudyu, having a good
sky ; Dual ffiift sudivi ; Plur. T^fa sudivi.
$214. A number of words in Sanskrit are what Greek grammarians
would call Metaplasia, i. e. they exist under two forms, each following a
different declension, but one being deficient in Nom. Sing. Dual and Plural,
and in the Acc. Sing, and Dual. (Pan. vi. I, 63.) Thus
1. «^ asan, n. blood, is defective ; asrij, n. is declined throughout.
2. ^rt*P^ asan, n. face, SHU-H dsya, n.
3. ~31(^udan, n. water, - ■Jj^ss udaka, n.
4. ^ dat, m. tooth, - <*rf danta, m.
5. <^M^ doshan, (m.) n. arm, — cfos, m. n.
6. nas, f. nose, - <nftm ndsikd, f.
7. fin^raii, f. night, — ftfjn wiia, f.
8. TR pad, m. foot, — trr^jaarfa, m.
9. ip^prit, f. army*, — tTjffij pritand, f.
10. *TT^ mams, n. meatt, — HT*t mdmsa, n.
11. vcR^mds, m. month J, — ATO mdsa, m.
12. Tlepr yakan, n. liver ||, — *T$ir yakrit, n.
13. Tgp^yilsfian, m. pea-soup, — ^ yusha, m.
14. iakan, n. ordure, — ^PJiTT bakrit, n.
15. ^ snu, n. ridge, — *TPJ saraw, n.
16. 5^ hrid, n. (m.) - <|^x hridaya, n.
Hence in
No. 1. N. V. A. Sing, is *t«j«^ asrik only ; A. Plur. ^raftf asn'»S/'i or -*1*H Ph as<£nt.
N. V. A. Dual is '<H£»fl asriji only ; but I. Sing. vi«hi asri/<£ or asnd
N.V.Plur. is -w^r»i asriHji only; I. Du.-H U ' *nasrigbhydm or ^WnHasabhydm.
No. 4. N. A. V. Sing, is ^W.^^dantah, am, a, only; A. Plur. i;ni»i^£an<<Jra or ^TTt datah.
N.V.A.Dual is <£ftt dantau only; but I. Sing. rpftT dantena or <ffTT dafrf.
N. V. Plur. is <f?TTt dantdh only ; I. Dual <pTTHlT<ZaBia5Ayam or ^Wtdadbhydm.
No.11. N.A.V. Sing, is Tra:,°*r,°*fmdsah,am,a, only; A. Plur. *ll*n«^mas<f» or TRTJ mdsah.
N.V.A.Dual is mdsau only ; but I. Sing. mdsena or HTWT mrfstf.
N. V. Plur. is TPHT; mdsdh only ; I.DualHTWITmifciMt/^m cxIWnmdbliydm.
N0.13. N.A.V. Sing.isTO,°^,°^tyiishah, am, a, only^ A. Plur. ^HN yushdn or fBlK ydshnah.
N.A.V. Dual is yiishau only; but I. Sing. 'JJUST yushena or <yt>n yushnd.
N. V. Plur. is ^WT: yushdh only ; I.Du.*£lT«lfyushdbhydmor°W*n -shabhydm.
L. Sing, "^tyusheor°trfcr-sAorai or°ft[!I -sAnj.
* Siddb.-Kaum. 1. p. 131. t Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 141.
I The Sarasvati gives all cases of mi(mds (1. 6, 35). || Pan. vi. 1, 63.
96 DECLENSION.

Grammarians differ on the exact meaning of Panini's rule; and forms

such as ^ftrrft doshani, Nom. Dual Neut., would seem to show that in the
Nom. Acc. Voc. Dual the base doshan may be used. (See Siddh.-
Kaum. i. pp. 107, 131, 141, 144.) By some the rule is restricted to the Veda.

a. Bases ending in Vowels.

§ 215. Bases ending in vowels may be subdivided into two classes :
1. Bases ending in any vowels, except w a and w d.
2. Bases ending in a and ^rr d.

1. Bases ending in any Vowels, except a and ^TT a.

§ 216. Instead of attempting to learn, either according to the system
followed by native grammarians, or according to the more correct views
of comparative philologists, how the terminations appended to consonantal
bases are changed when appended to bases ending in vowels, it will be far
easier to learn by heart the paradigms such as they are, without entering
at all into the question whether there was originally but one set of termi
nations for all nouns, or whether, from the beginning, different terminations
were used after bases ending in consonants and after bases ending in
vowels.
Bases in ij ai and ^st au.
$ 317. These bases are, with few exceptions, declined like bases ending
in consonants. The principal rules to be observed are that before consonants
^ ai becomes wr a, while ^ au remains unchanged ; and that before vowels
both ^ ai and >ot au become vtUf dy and dv.
Base'r rai, XX\rdy, m. wealth. ^ nau, tu^ndv, f. ship.

Singular. •Dual. Plural.

N.V. TKrd-h ^nau-#
llll ndv-au I TTV. rdy-ah «TT^t ndv-ah
A. TXHrdy-am fft^ndv-am
I. TTHIrdy-d *{T%lndv-d Tjfal rd-bhih «ftf>i: nau-bhih
D. TFfrdy-e «TRn<fo-e TT**IT rd-bhydm <ftwTT nau-bhydm
■ TW.rd-bhyah "^V.nau-bhyah
Ab.1
G. J • ^ 7TTT rdy-dm 1W ndv-dm
oft «TI^tt ndv-oh tT§ rd-su nau-shu
L. Xjf^rdy-i HTf% ndv-i

Decline glauJ;,, m. the moon.

Bases in trt o.
§218. The only noun of importance is ift go, a bull or cow. It is slightly
irregular in Nom. Acc. Abl. and Gen. Sing, and in the Acc. Plur.
 DECLENSION. 97

Singular. Dual. Plural.

N.V. gau-h »TRt gdv-ah
| *TT^ gdv-au
A. *TT gd-m TO gd-h
I. 'Nl gav-d iftfin go-bhih
D. TT gav-e *ft*tT go-bhydm
|.*ft*T: go-bhyah
Ab.
6. *T^T gav-dm
L. gav-t gav-oh go-shu
}
If bases in ^ ai, ^ft o, ^ a?/ are to be declined as neuters at the end of
compounds, they shorten ^ ai to ^ i, and o and ^ «!t to 7 m, and are
then declined like neuters in s i and T m. The masculine forms, however,
are equally allowed (if the base is masculine) in all cases except the Nom.
Acc. Voc. Sing. Dual and Plural. Hence Instr. Sing. neut. Ttfxm surind or
*J<J*H surdyd; but only tjrjm sunund.
§ 219. fft rfyo, fem. heaven, is declined like ift go. It coincides in the Nom.
and Voc. Sing, with div, sky, but differs from it in all other cases.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N.V. iftt dyauh HT^J dydvah
dydva
A. HT dydm * WTJ dydh *
I. JF%\ dyavd SftfWj dyobhih
D. dyave \ SfalT dyobhydm
llftwR dyobhyah
Ab.
G. dyavdm
L. dyavoh dyoshu
dyavi
Being used at the end of a compound fft rfyo forms its neuter base as ^ dyu;
e.g. TRipradyu, eminently celestial, Dual USpft pradyuni, Plur. TOfa/wcMfy^rai
(Siddh.-Kaum. 1. pp. 144, 145) ; while from div the neuter adjective was,
as we saw, TO sudyu, having a good sky, Dual *jf^tft sudivi, Plur. *j<(lfa sztdivi
(Colebr. pp. 67, 73). iflg pradyu, as a neuter, cannot take the optional
masculine cases (Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 145).
Note—There are no real nouns ending in ^ e, though grammarians imagine such words
as ^1 eh, the sun, udyadeh, the rising sun ; Nom. Dual w$ h{ udyadayau, Nom. Plur.
9tB^1K udyadayah.
Bases in $ i and -3 4.
1. Monosyllabic Bases in and •gi u, being both Masculine and Feminine.

(A.) By themselves.
$ aao. Monosyllabic bases, derived from verbs without any suffix, like
tft dhi, thinking, flfl fcrf, buying, M, cutting, take the same terminations

* Kasika vi. 1, 93.

0
98 DECLENSION.

as consonantal bases. They remain unchanged before terminations beginning

with consonants, but change final $ i and 4 into iy and uv, before
vowels. (Pan. vi. 4, 82, 83.) Their Vocative is the same as their Nomi
native.

(B.) At the end of compounds.

§ 2ai. These monosyllabic bases rarely occur except at the end of com
pounds. Here they may either change ^ i and 'a 4 into iy and uv,
or into ^ y and ^ v. They change it
1. Into ^ iy and uv :
a. If the first member of the compound forms the predicate of the second,
• and the second maintains its nominal character. Thus «RH*ft:
paramanih., the best leader, Acc. Sing, irorftrt paramaniyam. Here
•ft: nth, is treated as a noun, and seems to have lost its verbal
character, sr^ft: siiddhadhih., a pure thinker, a man of pure thought,
Acc. Sing, sr^firq suddhadhiyam ; ^>rh kudhih,, a man of bad thought,
Acc. Sing, ^firi kudhiyam. (Sar.)
b. \i\i and '3i u are preceded by two radical initial consonants. ^c4*1:
jalakrify, a buyer of water, makes Acc. Sing. MrtfVhij jalakriyam.
*psrh susrih., well faring, Acc. Sing, gf^pi susriyam. (Siddh.-Kaum.
1. p. 119.) This is a merely phonetic change, intended to facilitate
pronunciation. (Pan. vi. 4, 82.)
2. Into ^ y and ^ v, under all other circumstances, i. e. wherever the
monosyllabic bases retain their verbal character. ?jiH*ul: grdmanih,
leader of a village, Acc. Sing, ummb grdmanyam ; here grama is
not the predicate of Tft nil},, but is governed by ?ft: nth,, which retains
so far its verbal character, iprfc pradhih,, thinking in a high degree,
Acc. Sing, iraj pradhyam ; here JT pra is a preposition belonging to
xft dhi, which retains its verbal nature. T^t: unnih, leading out, Acc.
Sing. unnyam; here ^ ud is a preposition belonging to tft nt.
Though ^ t is preceded by two consonants, one only belongs to the
root. STgvfc Suddhddhth (if a Tatpurusha compound), thinking pure
things, would form the Acc. Sing. "Sggvb hiddhadhyam, and thus
be distinguished from 3J3>ft: suddhadhih, (as a Karmadharaya com
pound), a pure thinker, or as a Bahuvrihi compound, a man possessed
of pure thoughts (Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 119), which both have 3J^ftni
Suddhadhiyam for their accusative. The general idea which suggested
the distinction between bases changing their final ^ t and '3i 4 either
into ^tt iy and ~^uv, or into T^y and ^v, seems to have been that the
 DECLENSION. 99

former were treated as real monosyllabic nouns that might be used by

themselves (\rh dhih, a thinker), or in such compounds as a noun
admits of (*pfh sudhih*, a good thinker; sppft: kuddhadhth, a pure
thinker or pure thoughted) ; while the latter always retained somewhat
of their verbal character, and could therefore not be used by themselves,
but only at the end of compounds, preceded either by a preposition
(tprh pradhih, providens) or by a noun which was governed by them. The
nouns in which ^ i and gi 4 stand after two radical consonants form an
exception to this general rule, which exception admits, however, of a
phonetic explanation, so that the only real exception would be in the
case of certain compounds ending in bh4. This H bhu becomes
i^bhuv before vowels, whether it be verbal or nominal. (Pan. vi. 4, 85.)
Ex. svayambMh, self-existing, Acc. Sing. ^}>T^ svayambhuvam.
(Sar. 1. 6, 61. Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 119.) Not, however, in ^§T*|t varshd-
bhtih, frog, Acc. Sing. varshdbhvam (Pan. vi. 4, 84), and in some
other compounds, such as «St?r: karabhuh or <VTOg: karabhuh, nail, wtfjjl
punarbh4h, re-born, drinbhdh, thunderbolt. (Pan. vi. 4, 84, v.)

2. Polysyllabic Bases in \ 1 and '3i u.

J 232. Polysyllabic bases in ^ i and ■gi 4 being both masculine and
feminine, such as ipft: papih, protector, the sun, *pft: yayih, road, and ^jtt:
nrit4h, dancer, are declined like the verbal compounds TT*fh pradhih and
^Kjtg: vrikshaldh, except
1 . they form the Acc. Sing, in ^ im and 4m ;
2. they form the Acc. Plur. in ^ in and 4n.
Remember also, that those in ^ i form the Loc. Sing, in ^ i, not in fil yi.
4lriU»ft: vdtapramih, antelope, may be declined like vrftl papih; but if
derived by f^q kvip, it may entirely follow the verbal vtffc pradhih (Siddh.-
Kaum. 1. p. 116). The same applies to nouns like Tpffc sutih, wishing for a
son ; sukhih, wishing for pleasure. They follow the verbal mih pradhih
throughout, but they have their Gen. and Abl. Sing, in 7: uh ; sutyuh
(Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 120). If the final long ^ i is preceded by two con
sonants, it is changed before vowels into ^ iy. Ex. si Mil: ktshkih, srffcjpft
hishkiyau, &c.

* *pfh sudhih is never to be treated as a verbal compound, but always forms Acc. Sing.
sudhiyam, &c., as if it were a Karmadharaya compound. (Pan. vi. 4, 85.)
100 DECLENSION.

■9*
11
pa S ° ^ss
•S-si 8- | I & |(S
»i <~i
03 ~i ft, »i
~1 a.
a, ^
"1 a.

S El

13*1
S'E

bo .
Kg a .9• M<
- t
■3 §
1 5 I | 1 1 I
«i k. a, a, 5,

'I III %

§4%

§3

a*

si

S3
 DECLENSION. 101

L
111
o° S,a
="'3
a |*
If I
©
6h

oos
pi
■o a ;

I81

c3

.sa
11
§§
102 DECLENSION.

§ 223. All these compounds may be used without any change, whether
they refer to nouns in the masculine or in the feminine gender. If the head-
borough or the sweeper should be of the female sex, the Dat. Sing, would
still be grdmanye striyai, *4<4H f^J*l khalapve striyai (Kas'ika 1.
4, 3). Sometimes, however, if the meaning of a compound is such that it
may by itself be applied to a woman as well as to a man, e. g. irtft: pradhih,
thinking, some grammarians allow such compounds to be declined in the
feminine, like TjEjrh lakshmih, except in the Acc. Sing, and Plur., where
they take ^ am and *f: ah; irui pradhyarn, jrun pradhyah, not JPTT pradhim
or jrtfh pradhih (Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 136). A similar argument is applied to
iiprAt punarbMh, if it means a woman married a second time. It may
then form its Vocative "gpr^ he punarbhu (Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 138), and
take the five fuller feminine terminations 224).
Masc. and Fem. Fem. only,
SINGULAR. singular.
N. JT*fh pradhih wvrh pradhih
A. TPA pradhyarn *ruj pradhyarn
I. Trarf pradhyd TTmT pradhyd
T>. jriii pradhye or V(vk pradhyai
Ab. HUK pradhyah or jrun: pradhyah
G. JTW pradhyah or nun: pradhyah
L. vfvt pradhyi or Trurr pradhydm
V. iprh pradhih or yfijpradhi
DUAL.
N. A. V. miff pradhyau \ pradhyau
I. D. Ab. jrtfhmi pradhibhydm Trtrfari pradhibhydm
G. L. jruft: pradhyoh iruff: pradhyoh
PLURAL. PLURAL.
N. inm: pradhyah TPflt pradhyah
A. UHIt pradhyah jjut: pradhyah
I. jrtftfW: pradhibhih jrtrtfW: pradhibhih
D. Ab. jrtftwi: pradhibhyah jrtftwi: pradhibhyah
G. Jiwrr pradhydm or TPrfai pradhindm
L. irtrfrj pradhishu jprfrj pradhishu

1. Monosyllabic Bases in\ \ and u, ieira^r Feminine only.

§ 224. Bases like >ft intellect, happiness, fft /<r£, shame,
»ft fear, and >^ SArw, brow, may be declined throughout exactly like
the monosyllabic bases in ^ ? and ■gi w, such as <JE Id, a cutter. Their only
peculiarity consists in their admitting a number of optional forms in the
Dat. Abl. Gen. and Loc. Sing, and Gen. Plur. These may be called the five
fuller feminine terminations in 5* ai, ^n: dh, dh, ~m dm, and »rr nam.
 DECLENSION. 103

Monosyllabic, Optional fuller Monosyllabic, Optional fuller

fern. only. forms. fern. only. forms.
thought. earth.
Singular. Singular.
N. \fc dhih
A. ftp} dhiyam bhuvam
I. fv*tT dhiyd
D. tv*l dhiye ftl^ dhiyai »J% fthuvai
Ab. ftPK dhiyah fw: dhiydh w^: bhuvah *J^T: bhuvdh
G. ftni: dhiyah ftrm: bhuvah bhuvdh
L. tVfa c?Aiyi tVTf dhiyam Maui >J5T bhuvam
V.
Dual. Dual.
N.A.V. fire, >J^ bhuvau
I. D. Ab. vfari dhibhydm >T«rf bMbhydm
G. L. finfr: dhiyoh H^t: bhuvoh
Plural. Plural.
N. ftpi: dhiyafy bhuvah
A. ftni: dhiyah *r^: bhlivah
I. vtth: >|ftr: bMbhih
D. Ab. #r. dhibhyah jjwr bhubhyah
G. fVnri dhiyam vft^T dhindm >T^T bhuvam bhdndm
L. >fhj dAfeAw «n bkdshu

2. Polysyllabic Bases in\i and •gi u, 6ei«#r Feminine only.

§ 22$. (1) These bases always take the full feminine terminations.
(2) They change their final ^ 2 and "3i m into ^ y and * t> before terminations
beginning with vowels.
(3) They take it ?k and ^ s as the terminations of the Acc. Sing, and Plural.
(4) They shorten their final ^ i and 4 in the Vocative Singular.
(5) Remember that most nouns in ^ i have no ^ s in the Nom. Sing., while
those in '3i 4 have it.
Note — Some nouns in \i take in the Nom. Sing. : *t^h av(h, not desiring (applied
to women); «B»tfj lakshmih, goddess of prosperity; jrQt tarih, boat; TTSft: tantrih, lute.
Versus memorialis : SSI =fl rt rt 0 rt fcfl *fl gfafl *U I^^ 1 4 H t *tHi«ii*i=i ^T^RT f« rtl si «l
<*<{M* II (Sar. p. 18 a.)
Base ?r^t wad? and *ft^nady. Base tp^vadM and tft^vadhv.
Singular. Singular.
FEM. FEM.
N. Tfcft nadi N. ^v: vadh4-h
A. fT^t' nadi-m A. ^vt^vadhu-m
I. 'TOT nady-d I. giqr vadhv-a
104 DECLENSION.

D. nady-ai D. ^ vadhv-ai
Ab. vfsrrc nady-dh Ab. ^«n: vadhv-dh
G. TOT! nady-dh G. ^it: vadhv-dh
L. »raf nady-dm L. ^aif vadhv-dm
V. vadhu
Dual. Dual.
N. A. V. tTsft nady-au N. A. V. vadhv-au
I. D. Ab. '^h^lt nadi-bhydm I. D. Ab. ^r^g^li vadM-bhydm
G. L. nady-oh G. L. ^s^h vadhv-oh
Plural. Plural.
N. V. t^r: nady-ah N. V. ^ur. vadhv-ah
A. «Tcft: nadi-h A. ^v: vadhu-h
I. ^HW: nadi-bhih I. ^vfir: vadhi-bhih
D. «T^t«i: nadi-bhyah D. vadM-bhyah
Ab. tj^wi: nadi-bhyah Ab. gijwi: vadM-bhyah
G. «l^«TT nadi-ndm G. ^vsri vadhd-ndm
L. nadi-shu L. ^wi vadhu-shu

Compounds ending in Monosyllabic Feminine Bases in\i and u.

$ 226. Compounds the last member of which is a monosyllabic feminine
base in ^ 2 or gi «?, are declined alike in the masculine and feminine. Thus
Tjvfc sudhih, masc. and fem. * if it means a good mind, or having a good mind,
is declined exactly like >fh rfA^. ^j: subhruh, masc. and fem. having a
good brow, is declined exactly like >j: bhruh t, without excluding the fuller

* The following rule is taken from the Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 136. If *ffc dhih, intellect,
stands at the end of the Karmadharaya compound like wft\ pradhih, eminent intellect, or if it
is used as a Bahuvrihi compound in the feminine, such as Tftftt pradhih, possessed of eminent
intellect, it is in hoth cases declined like rtKjtTt lakshmih. It would thus become identical
with Uvffc pradhih, thinking eminently, when it takes exceptionally the feminine terminations
(§ 223). The Acc. Sing, and Plur., however, take ^ am and V. ah. The difference, therefore,
would be the substitution of ^ y for iy before vowels, the obligation of using the fuller
fem. terminations only, and the Vocative in ^ X, for these are the only points of difference
between the declension of cJHfflj lakshmih and \ft'. dhih, fem. The SiddMnta-Kaumudt,
while giving these rules for TT*fh pradhih, agrees with the rules given above with regard
to *jvft: sudhih, &c.
t The Voc. Sing. subhru is used by Bhatti, in a passage where Rama in great grief
exclaims, faff: SJlftl ^ *J}| ha pitah kvdsi he subhru, Oh father, where art thou, Oh
thou fine-browed (wife) ! Some grammarians admit this Vocative as correct ; others call it
a mistake of Bhatti; others, again, while admitting that it is a mistake, consider that
Bhatti made Rama intentionally commit it as a token of his distracted mind. (Siddh.-
Kaum. 1. p. 137.)
 . DECLENSION. 105

terminations (i? ai, dh, dm, ?n nam)* for the masculine, or the simple
terminations e, ^r: ah, *n ah, 3* i, ^rf «»») for the feminine. The same applies
to the compound sudhih, when used as a substantive, good intellect.
If the same compounds are used as neuters, they shorten the final \ t or
"31 of their base, and are declined like ^rft vdri and ijj* mridu, with this
difference, however, that in the Inst. Dat. Abl. Gen. Loc. Sing. Dual and
Plural they may optionally take the masculine forms.

Masc. and Fern. Optional fuller forms. Optional forms for neuters, except
Npm. Acc. Voc.
good-thoughted.
Singular. Singular. Singular.
N. SudMh
A. *jftni sudhiyam
I. 'jftrTT sudhiyd or ^jftRT sudhind
D. Tjftnfr sudhiye *jftrt> sudhiyai or SjftR sudhine
Ab. gfirq: sudhiyah ^fifTr: sudhiyah or BfitfR sudhinah
G. *jfvn: sudhiyah ^jftpn: sudhiyah or *jf>R: sudhinah
L. ?jfvfn sudhiyi ^ftnri sudhiyam or ^fvftr sudhini
gftr swrfAi or swtfAe
Dual. Dual. Dual.
N. A. V. *jftpft sudhiyau ^jftprfr sudhini
I. D. Ab. ?pf)viiT sudhibhydm or *jfvr*ri sudhibhydm
G. L. ^jftpft: sudhiyoh or tjfVpffc sudhinoh
Plural. Plural. Plural.
N.V. gftnr. sudhiyah *jvtfir sudhini
A. *jfint: sudhiyah *piH«T sudhini
I. ^rMW: sudhibhih or *jfvfrt: sudhibhih
D. *pft«rc sudhibhyah or *jfv«i: sudhibhyah
Ab. pftwn sudhtbhyah or ^Rpq: sudhibhyah
G. *jftpri sudhiyam or ^\fhri sudhindm
L. *jtfht sudhishu or *jfip| sudhishu

* I can find no authority by which these fuller terminations are excluded. In °l§ *il
bahufreyasi, the feminine >9(«(«fl freyasi retains its feminine character (naditva) throughout
(Siddh.-Kaum. i. p. 116); and the same is distinctly maintained for the compound Wfll
pradhih, possessed of distinguished intellect, if used as a masculine (Siddh.-Kaum. I. p. 119).

P
106 DECLENSION.

Masc. and Fern. Optional fuller forms. Optional forms for neuters, except
Nom. Acc. Voc.
with beautiful brows.
Singular. Singular. Singular.
N. *J>|: subhrAh subhru
A. ^4 subhruvam subhru
I. *J^T subhruvd or *£HDT subhrurtd
D. subhruve subhruvai or *J^*!T subhrune
Ab. iggzt: subhruvah g^T: subhruvah or ^Hff: subhrunah
G. ;§^'t subhruvafy *J^H subhruvah or *J^0: subhrunah
L. *JHfa subhruvi *j^ri subhruvdm or ^|frr subhruni
V. *pjt subhrdh •ffisubhruor°>ai-bhro
Dual. Dual. Dual.
.N. A. V. $^ff subhruvau ?J^!ft subhruni
I. D. Ab. ^qi subhrdbhydm or *J^**TT subhrubhydm
G. L. *J^fc subhruvoh or *J^tsft: subhrunoh
Plural. Plural. Plural.
N. V. subhruvah subhrdni
A. subhruvah gaftj subhrtini
I. *pjf*Tt subhrvtbhih or *£|f>T: subhrubhih
D. 1^<R subhrubhyah or subhrubhyah
Ab. gawr. subhrtibhyah or subhrubhyah
G. *JOTT subhruvam or ^JOTIT subhrdndm
L. g»|Tg subhrushu or subhrushu

Compounds ending in Polysyllabic Feminine Bases in \ 1 ararf 'Si u.

$ 227. Feminine nouns like raac# and ^cAawiw may form the last
portion of compounds which are used in the masculine gender. Thus
re^hrcft bahusreyast, a man who has many auspicious qualities (Siddh.-
Kaum. 1. pp. 116, 117), and ^rfirsp^aficAamiZ, one who is better than an army
(Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 123), are declined in the masculine and feminine:
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. bahusreyast* «!§<*NHli bahusreyasyau «Tg£i^W bahusreyasyah
A. Vg^^T bahus'reyasim HQlimM\ bahusreyasyau n^HlCl'y bahusreyasi*
I. WgSlMWI bahusreyasyd * s! £| MUl^lf bahusreyasibhydm «( g <*) M *fl fat bahutreyasibhih
D. ^T3r£ftH?i bahufreyasyai TF^hllftwiT bahusreyasibhydm '•itWmffc'K bahusreyasibhyah
Ab. «l5|^t<4**l K bahusreyasyah «li!<*il)*fl*m bahusreyasibhydm «ls|'*i<l*fl*n bahuheyasibhyah
G. «fR>si«4**ut bahusreyasyah "T^PTJjtftt bahusreyasyoh ^?>si*i*t)«ii bahusreyasindm
L. «lP^i'M**li bahusreyasydm 4t!<sN4<fl: bahufreyasyoh bahufreyasishu
V. qs'sisTt) bahusreyast *\qhh*h\ bahusreyasyau bahusreyasyah
* From WBJi'U lakshmih, the Nom. Sing, would be TSTfifiTHJit: atilakshmih.
 DECLENSION. 107

Singular. Dual. Plural.

N. •fiWiJ atichamuh n^Kii atichamvau ^PiMM! atichamvah
A. ^fir^^atichamdm iSrflT'SKll atichamvau ^iPiMH^ atichamHn
I. Apri'tHI atichamvd ^rfir^HWTT atichamubhydm WfiWlfi*! atichamdbhih
D. ffipn atichamvai ^rfir^H^lT atichamObhydm ^rfir^^*lt atichamUhhyah
Ab. frfinDIR atichamvdh ^Tfir^'^tT atichamubhydm HfiPWWfJ atichamubhyah
G. ■flWTC atichamvdh Wfir*pp^h atichamvdh "fil^Un atichamundm
L. wfiPl*^! atichamvdm wflp<*?te atichamvoh "SrfiHPJg atichamdshu
V. ^rfirWJ atichamu atichamvau SHPtMHt atichamvah*
Nouns like $*TFfl kumdri, a man who behaves like a girl, are declined
like «fg£ii|*fl bahusreyasi, except in the Acc. Sing, and Plur.; where they
form 4 HIV kumaryam and ^rin^: kumdryah.. (Siddh—Kaum. i. pp. 118, 119.)
$ 228. stfr?, woman, is declined like •r^t warf2, only that the accumula
tion of three consonants is avoided by the regular insertion of an ^ i, e. g.
f^gpn striyd, and not stryd. Remember also two optional forms in the
Acc. Sing, and Plur.
Base ^ and f$3^ sfriy.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. ^s(rf N.A.V. N. fffiPK striyah
A. ^jjfls<rfm or f^gpjsfriyam I.D.Ab. ^^WIT sfr^Aytft A. ^grh strih or ffaf'. striyah
I. (<p(Ml siriya G. L. ^PnS striyah I. ^jjjtf*T: stribhih
D. f^cPT striyai D.Ab. ^pTfalt stribhyah
Ab. G. f^pPlT: striydh G. ^3farrs<rfya'm(Pfln.i.4,5)
L. f^li striydm L. Hsfty strtshu
V. ffo s<n (Pdn. 1. 4, 4)
J 229. When ^ «M forms the last portion of a compound, and has to be
treated as a masculine, feminine, and neuter, the following forms occur :
Singular.
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
N. Wfirf^gp atistrih ^rfjlf^gP atistrih Vf?T^| afis<re"
J Vfirf^j atistrim or f Vfftrf^j atistrim or
[ "Hfirf^pi atistriyam [^rffrf^4 atistriyam
I. Wfirf^pST atistrind Vrfirf^pn atistriyd «flrf^Rn atistrind
f ^rfirfif3^ atistriyai or' (" Wfrf^pTQ atistrine or
D. ^fr%c} atistraye \ '■UPri^M atistraye
\"?rfil^ atistraye
(" wfil%PIR atistriydh or t ^ nr^pm atistrinah or
Ab. G. Wfij^flt atistreh
\ »yfri^: atistreh \ flfil^i atistreh
[ »!) Pri HI atistriyam or C ^41 Pri Htci fill atistrini or
■wtfn^i atistrau
[wPrttetl atistrau l^fH^ifi atistrau
Wfir^ atistre
* The neuter is said to be N.A.V. Sing. %r£$4<fl bahusreyasi, N. A.V. Dual «)£<4N*fl.fl
bahuSreyasini, N.A.V. Plur. ^Swtffa bahus'reyasini, Dat. Sing. ^|^ln^> or °^^>
bahusreyasyai, -sye, or -sine, &c.
P <l
108 DECLENSION.

MASC.
N.A.V. ^rTrif^pf 41 atistriyau
I.D.Ab. Vfrif^HlT atistribhydm
G.L. 'Srfir%piTk atistriyoh
Dual,
fem.
vffrfigTVt atistriyau WfTrfi^fflft atistrini
wfirf^pPTf atistribhydm ^rfirf^gPTT atistribhydm
wM^Tftt atistriyoh ■*! Pri *lFli atistrinoh

Plural,
MASC. fem.
N.V. ^Tfw^TT: atistrayah wfil^SfK atistrayah <wftr^affflg atistrini
^ J fa^l ^ atistrin or f Wfin^(h atistrih or
{^jflr%lK atistriyah 1 ^rfir%pi; atistriyah
'afrtf^pff'T. atistribhih ^rfirf^fir. atistribhih
D.Ab. 'STfirf^WK atistribhyah ^rfirf^WIt atistribhyah WftrflE^lt atistribhyah
G. ^frUsflJlli atistrindm Vfil$ftai atistrindm Vfll^M atistrindm
atistrishu •*< Tn (^p| atistrishu Wfirfip^ atistrishu
In the masculine final $ is shortened to ^ «, and the compound declined
like cfffo &ai>i$, except in the Nom. Acc. Voc. and Gen. Loc. Dual. In the
Acc. Sing, and Plur. optional forms are admitted. (Siddh.-Kaum. i. p. 134.)
The feminine may be the same as the masculine, except in the Instr.
Sing, and Acc. Plur., but it may likewise be declined like ^pjt in the
Dat. Abl. Gen. Loc. Sing.
The neuter has the usual optional forms.

Bases in ^ i arad 7 u, Masculine, Feminine, Neuter.

§ 230. There are masculine, feminine, and neuter bases in ^ i and 'gr w.
They are of frequent occurrence and should be carefully committed to
memory.
Adjectives in ^ i are declined like substantives, only that the masculine
may optionally be substituted for the neuter in all cases except the Nom.
and Acc. Sing. ; Nom. Acc. and Voc. Dual and" Plur. Ex. hichih, masc.
bright ; 3if%: Suchih, fem. ; 3jf% Suchi, neut.
The same applies to adjectives in ^ u, except that they may form their
feminine either without any change, or by adding ^ i. Thus 75^; laghuk,
light, is in the fem. either laghuh, to be declined as a feminine, or f5^t
laghvi, to be declined like nadi.
If the final ~w u is preceded by more than one consonant, the fem. does
not take ^ t. Thus vxspdndu, pale; fem. TTT|: pdndul}.
Some adjectives in ?u lengthen their vowel in the fem., and are then
declined like gv: vadMI},. Thus xjjj: pahguh,, lame; fem. xfn: pangli^.
Likewise kuruh, a Kuru ; fem. kurHJ], : some compounds ending in
Uruh, thigh, such as ^T*fft$: vdmorufy, with handsome thighs, fem.
vdmoTul}..
 DECLENSION. 109

Bases in ^ i. Bases in 7 u.
Singular,
FEM. neut. masc.
Base S3 15 15.
[*a»i, poet mati, thought »ar!, water mridu, soft mridu, soft mridu, soft

N. 15: If; 15
[ kavi-h rdri mridu-fc mriaa
*rfir it- is
A.
[ kavi-m mait-m vdri mridu-m mridu-m
J <*r<«1T 157* 15**
I.
[ kavi-nd maty-a vdri-nd mridu-nd mridv-d mridu-nd
Mn^matay-eor 1^ ^^mridav-e or 15«T mridu-ne or
D.
L kavay-e maty-ai vdri-ne mrtrfac-e mridv-ai >T^ mridav-e
mate-h or JTi^J mrido-h or TJ«Tt mridu-nah or
Ab.G.
|_ kave-h mtr,maty-dh vdri-nah mrido-h ^TgTt mridv-dh JJ^J mrido-h
*i lit matau or mridau or ^■jfsT mridu-ni or
L. if
[ kavau TiHT maty-dm paVi-ni mridau *iS I mridv-dm fl^T mridau
TFftcart or *T<T mridu or
V.
ykave mate ^TT care * mrido mrido mrido *
DUAL.
mft 15. ^
N.A.V.
\_kavi mati vdri-ni mridil mridu mridu-ni

I.D.Ab. 15*"
\kavi-bhydm mati-bhydm vdri-bhydm mridu-bhydm mridu-bhydm mridu-bhydm
iprh *ffi^'.mridu-nohor
G.L.
[ kavy-oh maty-oh vdri-noh mridv-oh mridv-oh «JS*1; mridv-oh
Plural.
1** 15&1
N.V.
[ kavay-ah matay-ah vdri-ni mridav-ah rondap-aA wiriau-ni
*nrh «ii CI fin
A.
[ kavi-n vdri-ni mridu-n rort<M-A mriatt-ni
*?firf>T: 15^
I.
[ kavi-bhih mati-bhih vdri-bhih mridu-bhih mridu-bhih mridu-bhih

D.Ab.
L kavi-bhyah mati-bhyah vdri-bhyah mridu-bhyah mridu-bhyah mridu-bhyah
<iCliui II*
6.
L kavi-ndm mati-ndm vdri-ndm mridd-ndm mridu-ndm mridu-ndm
*m 151 153t
L.
I kavi-shu mati-shu vdri-shu mridu-shu mridu-shu

* The Guna in the Voc. Sing, of neuters in ^i, ?«,^ ri, is approved by Madhyandini
Vyaghrapad, as may be seen from the following verse : ^T^ITT riJM^rf^lssM TITtT ITTT

f The lines of separation placed in the transcribed paradigms are not intended to divide
the real terminations from the real base, but only to facilitate the learning by heart of these
110 DECLENSION.

$ 231. «Rfir kati, how many, ijfir yati, as many (relat.), and Tffir tati, so
many, are used in the Plural only, and take no terminations in the Nom.
and Acc. Plural. For the rest, they are declined like ^fa kavi, and without
distinction of gender.
Nom. Voc. ■asfir kati
Acc. ^ifir kati
Instr. ^ftrfW: katibhih
Dat. «RfirwK katibhyah
Abl. "sirfTTWi: katibhyah
Gen. cfciOrii katindm
Loc. =fifiPT katishu
§ 233. srfsgr sfl^i, friend, has two bases :
TOfr^«a£My for the Anga, i. e. the strong base.
*tfa sakhi for the Pada and Bha base.
It is irregular in some of its cases.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. TO3T sakhd sakhdyau HUTT! sakhdyah
A. tusi'M sakhdyam *\<&\h\ sakhdyau TOsffa sakh(n
I. *t-**M f sakhyd sakhibhydm Ttftrfir; sakhibhih
D. ¥^ sakhye ^rftPTT sakhibhydm ^rftWt sakhibhyah
Ab. sakhyuh ?rfe«n sakhibhydm *rfer**li sakhibhyah
G. sakhyuh tns*Tlt sakhyoh mfrifl sakMndm
L. tu«Hl sakhyau VWfti sakhyoh wHw^ sakhishu
V. TOST saMe like Nom. like Nom.
The feminine TO?ft «aAM is regular, like wad?.
At the end of compounds, we find *rfa sakhi, masc. declined as follows :
Base tprfa susakhi, a good friend, masc.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. nmi susakhd susakhdyau OTKPH susakhdyah *
A. susakhdyam susakhdyau Qmd\*{susakh(n
I. g«r«1l susakhind TOjftWT susakhibhydm WwStwR susakhibhih
D. *pTCR susakhaye TOrfilfWn susakhibhydm ^HffasW. susakhibhyah
Ab. susakheh ffirftP*n susakhibhydm TOjfcP*lt susakhibhyah
G. *J*ii<i susakheh W&Fftl susakhyoh *J«<«fl*il susakhindm
L. susakhau WfSWftl susakhyoh
V. susakhe yHWl4l susakhdyau nnmS susakhdyah
At the end of a neuter compound tffa'saM/ is declined like ^Tftuari (J 230).
nouns. Masculine nouns in short ^ a are *rP| bhdnu, sun, TTg roJyu, wind, vishnu, nom.
prop. ITJJ/rffa, as masc, is the name of a tree ; as neuter, the name of its fruit (Sir. I. 8, 1 7).
Feminine nouns in short T a are dhenuh, cow, T!5gt rajjuh, rope, TTTJt <tm«A, body.
* Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. ua.
 DECLENSION. Ill

§ 333- ^rfw paii, lord, is irregular:

Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. Vfa'.patih N. A. V. inft^arf N. TlPn patayah
A. iffipat101 I. D. Ab. lfir«lT patibhydm A. Tlirfc^art»
I. Vmipatyd G. L. 1?ffc patyoh I. ^ifirfir; patibhih
D. *Hir^afye D. Ab. tjfiw patibhyah
Ab. G. TfgtpafyuA G. Un H I pattn&m
L. ^Nl patyau L. hThh patishu
V. XTff^ate V. TiPK patayah
trfif ^>a£i at the end of compounds, e. g. »|JrfiT bhupati, lord of the earth,
TPTPTfir prajdpati, lord of creatures, is regular, like £ai>i. The feminine
of Trfir ^?a£i is T^rt patnt, wife, i. e. legitimate wife, she who takes part in the
sacrifices of her husband. (Pan. iv. i, 33.)
§ 334. The neuter bases ^ftf akshi, eye, wftn astfAi, bone, ^fil dadhi,
curds, «f<+H sakthi, thigh, are declined regularly like ^rft vdri ; but in the
Bha cases they substitute the bases akshn, asthn, ^ dadhn, ««F*f
sakthn. In these cases they are declined, in fact, like neuters in *r»^ an,
such as ^TR»T ndman. (See note to § 203.)
Anga and Pada base ^rfisf akshi, Bha base akshn.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
A. akshi N.A.V. Wfaptft akthitft N. A. V. TOflftj aisMni
I. ^TS*!TT atsAna' I. D. Ab. ^rffepTT akshibhydm I. ^rfoffa: akshibhih
D. "STCOT aisAne G. L. ^dfc akshnoh D.Ab. ^if^WK akshibhyah
Ab. G. TR! akshnah G. ^BIT akshndm .
L. « fisju oisAni and ^ BJ ft) akshani L. «f«jg akshishu
V. aisAe (or ^ftS? afoAi)

.Bases in ri, Masculine, Feminine, Neuter.

§ 235. These bases are declined after two models :
Singular.
I. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Base •PJ naptri, grandson *3TW svasri, sister VT^ dhdtri, providence
N. ■JTfn naptd
VTiT dMfri
A. naptdr-am svasdr-am VR dA(2fr»
I. «T^I naptr-d «3tJl svasr-d Vr^TSJT dhdtri-nd
D. Tq[ naptr-e s»asr-e VTH% dhdtri-ne
Ab. G. iTJt naptuh isgt svasuh VT^in: dhdtri-nah
L. "THft naptar-i svasar-i VT^fiff dhdtri-ni
V. «nn naptah(r) VT^ rfWfri or VTH! dhdtah{r)
112 DECLENSION.

Plural.
N. 'HUH,! naptdr-ah svasdr-ah YnrftO dhdtri-ni
A. lit^ naptri-n IST^X svasri-h VTijftO' dhdtri-ni
I. HmPh; naptri-bhifi, svasfi-bhih VT^fW: dhdtri-bhih
D. ippt! naptri-bhyafr svasri-bhyafr VTyi! dhdtri-bhyafc
Ab. naptri-bhyafc ^Wq; svasri-bhyah VTjTWK dhdtri-bhyah
G. HJjUII naptrt-ndm « tuu'i srawi-ndm VTinUT dhdtri-ndm
L. 1«g nop<ri-«Au VTifJ dhdtri-shu
Dual.
N.A.V. HHKI naptdr-au *<J*llCl svasdr-au Vni<ut dhdtri-ni
\ D. Ab. TyiT naptri-bhydm »S«*m svasri-bhydm VT^wrf dhdtri-bhydm
g.l. *njk naptr-ofc tjltlh svasr-oh VTfflflfc dhdtri-noh
2. The second model differs from the first in the Acc. Sing., Nom. Acc.
Voc. Dual, and Nom. Plur., by not lengthening the ^sr o before the ^r.
Base fir^ ^t/ri, »ffi| mdtri.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM. MASC. FEM.
N. ftHTpiVd *Tnr[ mafd 1 firjr^ HlitO farlTtpitar-aA HTTIt: mdtar-ah
A. Psn Kpitar-am n I inmater-am jpitar-au mdtar-au faffipitft-n •NflJ mdtri-h
I. fu^ I pi<r-<f mdtr-d frr^fi?: pitri-bhih mtfiftrndtri-bhiA
D. ft^piVr-e TRT mdtr-e .ftlHWIT HT5TWJT
Ab. ft*: piteA m^t m«Y«A J P^Ti-bhydm mdtri-bhydm \pitrUhhyah J mdtri-bhyah
g. faiT:pi<uA mg: ma«uA "[ fq^t: »n^: ftrinnTiM<r»-?i«m Hii^ima<rf-ndm
L. fmifi, pitar-i «i in (V. mdtar-i J pitr-oh mdtr-oh f*Iip£ pitrishu «iing mdtri-shu
V. ftir:/)j7oA(r) >mr: mdtah{r) like Nom. like Nom. like Nom. like Nom.
After the first model are declined most nomina actoris derived from verbs
by the suffix ff^ri: ^TiT <fc^H> giver ; kartri, doer; tvashtri, carpenter;
Aofri, sacrificer ; bhartri, husband.
After the second model are declined masculines, such as BUT bhrdtri,
brother ; IfPfflJ jdmdtri, son-in-law ; ^ rfevri, husband's brother ;
savyeshthri, a charioteer: and feminines, such as ^f^TT duhitri, daughter;
nanandri, husband's sister ; ydtri, husband's brother's wife. Most
terms of relationship in ri (except svasri, sister, and naptri,
grandson) do not lengthen their ^ ar.
Note—If words in ^ ri are used as adjectives, the masculine forms may be used for the
neuter also, except in the Nom. and Acc. Sing, and Nom. Acc. Voc. Dual and Plural. The
feminine is formed by \ij V[ kartri, fem. «Rgff kartri, like nadi.
£ 236. ■gftj kroshtu, a jackal, is irregular; but most of its irregularities
may be explained by admitting two bases, "nftj kroshtu (like Rj| mridu) and
iffy kroshfri (like tpj naptri).
 DECLENSION. 113

Singular. Dual. Plural.

n. "aftrn kroshtd N. A.V. wteTCT kroshtdrau N. TSteTC kroshtdrah
A. litltt kroshtdram A. wlg^itrosAfun
Jfn r|I kroshtund
I.D. Ab. TlfrgwiT kroshtubhydm I. TlftjlH: kroshtubhih
Wffl kroshtrd
f jjfirf kroshtave
D.Ab. 3Kt]p*lJ kroshtubhyah
{"Stfe kroshtre
(" TShffc kroshtoji Tlfrffc kroshtvoh
Ab.G. G.L. G. fllig'li kroshtdndm
\"aftjt kroshtufr { mftl kroshtroh
f "Sh^ jfcrosifau
L. *>§g kroshtushu
\"St8ft /trosAfari
kroshto
The base kroshtri is the only one admissible as Anga, i. e. in the
strong cases, excepting the Vocative. (5 ifa: he kroshtah is, I believe,
wrongly admitted by Wilson.)
The base kroshtu is the only one admissible as Pada, i. e. before
terminations beginning with consonants.
The other cases may be formed from both bases, but the Acc. Plur. is
jjftg^ kroshMn only. (Pan. vn. 1, 95—97.)
Those who admit 'afap^ kroshtrin as Acc. Plur. likewise admit "aft? kroshtum
as Acc. Sing. (Sar. 1. 6, 70.)
The feminine is ^ftjft kroshtri, declined like t^t nadi.
§ 237. ?»H> man, a word of frequent occurrence, though, for convenience
sake, often replaced by «TT. nara, is declined regularly like fv^pitri, except
in the Gen. Plural, where it may be either crjjri nrindm or nrindm.
(Pan. vi. 4, 6.)
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. «TT nd narau «TC narah
A. «TT naram TtT narau T^^nrin
I. nrd «|WIT nribhydm nribhih
D. *T nre «|**n nribhydm •TWi; nribhyah
Ab. »jt nu# •JWJT nribhydm *p*0 nribhyah
G. «j: nuA »ro$ •JUT nrindm or *j«ui nrindm
nart ^ffc nroA «J^| nrisin
V. «Tt naA narau •TtJ naraA
The feminine is trrfl war?.

a. Bases ending in a <m«? w a.

§ 238. This class is the most numerous and most important in Sanskrit,
like the corresponding classes of nouns and adjectives in us, a, um, in Latin,
Q
 114 DECLENSION.

and a, tj, ov in Greek. The case-terminations are peculiar, and it is best to

learn oRTin kdntah, wirfl kdntd, 'Jsnf kdntam by heart in the same manner as
we learn bonus, bona, bonum, without asking any questions as to the origin
of the case-terminations, or their relation to the terminations appended to
bases ending in consonants.
Singular.
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Base ^Tff kdnta «STTTT ioWa" •STiT kdnta
N. ^TrTC kdntah •(fin H/ifa1 kdntam
A. <* !rf kdntam ^tTUT kdntam •STTT kdntam
I. *inn kdntena cSTTTTf kdntayd qiinn kdntena
D. *hmi kdntdya •Shn^ kdntdyai «MdlH kdntdya
Ab. oSTTTTTr: kdntdydh WHTK^kdntdt
G. •hi nt« kdntasya ^iTrrnn: kdntdydh *\A*M kdntasya
L. ^inT iaWe •KTirnrr kdntdydm •STiT famfe
V. "SBTiT AaWa •STil *an<e * Wil iania
Dual.
N. A. V. ^hft taWau ofitiT ian /e «KTtT Ardnte
I. D. Ab. 'WtirP'lT kdntdbhydm <W H WT kdntdbhydm •STTTTTf kdntdbhydm
G. L. VnPffc kdntayoh WlPn! kdntayoh Wtnti kdntayoh
Plural.
n.v. sshrr. Wn<<K VRlftl kdntdni
A. <*irfW ftaWan ?ShnfiT AroWdni
I. TSRTTh kdntaih •Writ fat kdntdbhih •Srlh kdntaih
D. Ab. '^it^Wt: kdntebhyah VTVWt kdntdbhyah WCfo*: kdntebhyah
G. *TiTRT kdntdndm cfciriM*) 'kdntdndm WITrI kdntdndm
L. Ww^ iaWesAu <**M1'*{ kdntdsu •KTif^ kdnteshu
Note — Certain adjectives in ^It aA, WTa, ^am, which follow the ancient pronominal
declension, will be explained in the chapter on Pronouns (§ 278).

Bases in tSTT a, Masculine and Feminine.

§ 339. These bases are derived immediately from verbs ending in ^rt «,
such as trr _pa, wrt dhmd. They are declined in the same way in the
masculine and feminine gender. In the neuter the final a is shortened,
and the word declined like ^ihf kdntam.
Aiiga and Pada base ftPBTl vUvapd, Bha base fatff^ vi&vap, all-preserving.

* Bases in ^Tf a", meaning mother, form their Vocative in W a ; e. g. akka,

amia, 1?n^ aWa / But 'HTTYI ambddd, ^TTTpJT ambdld, and ^f«i«tiT ambikd form the regular
Vocatives nils ambdde, ambdle, ^rf^T ambike. \
 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 115

Masculinb and Femininb.

SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
N.V. fa^Pn: vihapd-h vtsvapau P=l vJMIt visvapd-h
A. Hi »d 4 1 visvapd-m ftpJW vidvapau frnfV, viivap-ah
I. fl WJ Ml visvap-d fc| vjmojl vihapd-bhydm fcsnrrfir; vihapd-buh
D. ttnptfUn vihapd-bhydm r^"JM W. visvapd-bhyah
Ab. fanm; vtivap-ah, fqiymtm visvapd-bhydm f^»Jl||«j: vihapd-bhyah
G. faTSPtJ visvap-ah Ppfife vidvap-oh ftnm visvap-dm
L. f^fa visvap-i ftPWi! vihap-oh ftr«ERI5 visvapd-su
Neuter.
N. famM visvapam Pqnis vUvape fqv&nfa visvapdni, &c.
Decline +TlHm: somapdh, Soma drinker ; gir^wrr. sankhadhmdh, shell-blower ;
V«T<i: dhanaddh, wealth giver.
J 340. Masculines in WT a, not being derived by a Krit suffix from
verbal roots, are declined as follows :
Base ^r^r MM.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. V. «TT?T: A^AaA ITT^TJ MaA
A. AaAaa ^TffT hdhdn*
I. ?T?TWIT hdhdbhydm •^rPr. hdhdbhih
D. i$l^l*IT hdhdbhydm ?T?T«K hdhdbhyah
Ab. ^TfTWlT hdhdbhydm ^T^T«T: hdhdbhyah
6. ^i^lt hdhauh
L. «rnrfc hdhauh

CHAPTER IV.
DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES.
$ 241. As every noun in Sanskrit may, at the end of a compound, form the
final portion of an adjective, all the essential rules for the declension of such
compound adjectives had to be given in the preceding chapter. Thus in the
declension of neuter nouns in *3n^ a«, like ilt^ manas, mind, the declension of
sumanas, as an adjective masc. fern, and neut., was exhibited at the same
time 165). In the declension of nouns ending in consonants, and admitting
of no distinction between masculine and feminine terminations, (this applies to
all nouns with unchangeable bases,) the special forms of the neuter in Nom.
Acc. Voc. Sing. Dual and Plur. had to be exhibited. See § 1 58, *frf*^jalamuk,
Vlpjij'tfl jalamuchi, HrtHiM jalamuhchi. In the declension of nouns with

* The Sar. 1.6, 38, gives the optional form ?T?TC hdhdh in the masculine. At the end of
a feminine compound the same form is sanctioned in the Rupavali, p. 9 b.
116 DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES.

changeable bases, the more important feminine and neuter forms were
separately mentioned ; and in the declension of nouns ending in vowels, all
necessary rules with regard to the same subject were fully stated.
§ 242. The chief difficulty which remains with regard to the declension
of adjectives is the exact formation of the feminine base, and the rules on
this subject are often so complicated that they have to be learnt by practice
rather than by rule. The feminine bases, however, once given, there can be no
doubt as to their declension, as they follow exactly the declension of the cor
responding feminine nouns. A few observations on this point must suffice.
$ 243. Adjectives * in ^1 a form their feminines in ^rr d. Ex. ftpi priya,
dear, masc. ftPTC priyah, fem. ftpn priya, neut. fire priyam, to be declined
like ■3BTiT kdnta 238).
§ 244. Certain adjectives derived by ^Tcjr aka form their feminines in
^5RI ikd. Ex. pdchaka, cooking, masc. imv pdchakah,, fem. trrfaoRT
pdchikd, neut. nr^jr pdchakam. Likewise masc. Tlf^c sarvakah, fem. *rff^T
sarvikd, every ; <*K4*. kdrakah, doing, *rftj*T kdrikd ; ^gTOR ihatyakah,
present here, ^ftflfcRT ihatyikd. But ftpPEl kshipakd, fem. one who sends ;
«S^ort kanyakd, fem. maiden ; chatakd, fem. sparrow ; rilMil tdrakd, fem.
star. Sometimes both forms occur; tnpn ajakd and vftpvi ajikd, a she-goat.
§ 245. Bases in ^ ri and in tT n take ^ i as the sign of the feminine : oF^
kartri, doer, cR^F kartri 235) ; ^fiPT dandin, a mendicant, tjfdffl dandini
(§ 203). Likewise most bases ending in consonants, if they admit of a separate
feminine base : TR^prdch, Trp«ftprdchi 181); ^sp^wm, dog, ^pftiuni 199);
>T^iT bhavat, vtmft bhavatt 188). Some adjectives in van form their
feminine base in vari: ifa^pivan, fat, rftepOlpivari 193).
$ 246. Many adjectives in V a form their feminine base in ^ i (§ 225), instead
of d: AViHH: trinamayah, made of grass, rainfl trinamayi; devah, god,
divine, devi; rr^n: tarunah or Hcpr: talunah, a youth, ii^tft taruni;
cJ«r: kumdrah, a boy, grHlO kumdrt ; jffri: gopah, cowherd, iftift ^op2, his
wife, but Wfal ^opa, a female shepherd ; w: nartakah, actor, nartaki;
jpt: mrigah, a deer, jpft mrigi, a doe ; TT=st: stikarah, boar, ^»FT?t sukari;
^H=HTC: kumbhakdrah, a potter, TOrorf kumbhakdri. It will be observed,
however, that many of these words are substantives rather than adjectives.
Thus jiwt: matsyah, fish, forms JTrfft ms/«i (*l ya being expunged before ^ i) ;
HeTnr: manushyafi, man, T«J^ manushi.
§ 247. Certain adjectives in in expressive of colour, form their feminine
either in ttt td or in 'jft «2 .- ^k: byetah, white, fyeM, ^tft syera? ; etah,
variegated, etd or ^ft ttfirm rohitah, red, dftfifl roAiM or Ttftjuft rohini,
but TShn Svetah, white, %jrr ^rftnn asitfd, white; irfc5inpalitd, grey-haired.
m^i^T gunavachana, the name for adjective, occurs in Pan. v. 3, 58.
 DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES. 117

§ 248. The formation of feminine substantives must be learnt from the

dictionary. Thus
^HTt ajah, goat, forms ^TjTT ajd. ^Hfft aivah, horse, forms ^nST asvd.
^Tc5t bdlah, boy, forms ^r?5T bald.
/„ . , a tVA , r. if^r?!
•>* Mdrd,
,A , . a, woman
.„ of
„ the
^. Sudra caste.
317: marah,, Sudra, forms ,
^ [st^ the wife of a Sudra.
Hlrirf: mdtulah, maternal uncle, forms *nj|c# mdtuli or HlHpJMl mdtuldni, an
uncle's wife.
■WT^pI: dchdryah, teacher, forms iHlMlSul dchdrydni*, wife of the teacher;
but dchdryd, a female teacher,
irfii: patih, lord, forms patni, wife, &c.
Degrees of Comparison.
§ 249. The Comparative is formed by TTC tara, or iyas (§ 206) ; the
Superlative by Ti*T fcwraa, or ishtha. These terminations iTC tara and tama
are not restricted in Sanskrit to adjectives. Substantives such as i| nri, man,
form «J?r*T: nritamah, a thorough man ; strt, woman,, ^g^TTO stritard^,
more of a woman. Even after case-terminations or personal terminations,
rTC tara and tama may be used. Thus from £jtl%fi pHrvdhne, in the
forenoon, ^l^iiX p4rvdhnetare, earlier in the forenoon (P&n. vi. 3, 17).
From mfri pachati, he cooks, TT^finrtT pachatitardm, he cooks better (Pan. v.
3, 57), mfdrtHI pachatitamdm, he cooks best (Pan. v. 3, 56).
§ 250. tara and in? tama, if added to changeable bases, require the
Pada base. Thus from TTP^ prdch (§ 180), TCRSKprdktara ; from ^(^dhanin
203), i]fatR.dhanitara ; from V^IT dhanavat (§ 187), t|fH'<K dhanavattara;
from fqg^ vidvas ($ 204), ftriTP) vidvattama; from T&r^ pratyach (§ 181),
Tnoffit pratyaktara. There are, however, a few exceptions, such as ^CTfqPTC
dasyuhantamah, from dasyuhan, demon-killer ; *jnftr*«TT: supathintarah,
from yqf«i)^ supathin, with good roads.
§ 251. fyas and ishtha are never added to the secondary suffixes
^ fri, *nr ?wa£, ^tt vat, ~%&vala, f^f vin, j^in. If adjectives ending in these
suffixes require iyah, and ^ff ishtha, the suffixes are dropt, and the ^jj: iyah
and ^? ishtha added to the last consonant of the original base. 4<<HI^ bala-
vdn, strong, bal-tyas, ^forr bal-ishtha. ^frv dogdhri, milking,
duh-iyas, <*%ff duh-ishtha. felP^H sragvin, garlanded, tsMl<J^ sraj-tyas, more
profusely garlanded. H?AH\^matimdn, wise, HTftv^mat-iyas, HflTff mat-ishtha.
* On the dental «^», see Gana Kshubhnadi in the Kas'.-Vritti.
t Feminines in ^ t, derived from masculines, must shorten the ^ i before tFC tara and
KH tama; "HTSTCft brdhmanl forms BTWuffJITt brdhmanitard. Other feminines in ^ i or 'ai iZ
may or may not shorten their vowels ; Jxft strt forms tfllmj stritard or f^ppTCI stritard.
Also *ta«i1fl<j sreyasttard or ^qfttfftT sreyasitard; f^^0^^ vidusMtard or f^ftiTO
vidushitard (Pan. vi. 3, 43—45).
118 DECLENSION OP ADJECTIVES.

$ 253. Other adjectives, too, lose their derivative elements before ^tj^ iyas
and %w ishtha, or are otherwise irregular by substituting new bases for the
Comparative and Superlative. VTW. pdpah, bad ; qpfhnr pdp-iyas, worse ;
Trrfirff pdp-ishtha, worst.

SECOND BASE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE.

1. vifno* antika, near if!; 8 nedishtha
2. alpa, small 'cSflfl^ tangos «ftf»ui kanishtha
or WBft^ alptyas ^rf^Tff alpishtha
3. T^Turu, wide var lO^^variyas ^fi,B varishtha
4- «>» straight nti\\*t*{rij(yas U fii 8 rijishtha
Vedic «.»fl'M*^ rajtyas ifiiV rajishtha*
5. fyt krite, lean m^[\M*^kras(yas flrffyl krastshtha
6. ft^n kshipra, quick ■JST^ faAep BjTwB kshepishtha
ksheptyas
7. kshudra, mean ^ft^ kshod >sftR«H kshodishtha
«i("l({l Mt^ kshodiyas
8. yuru, heavy Ttaar '\<\m{gariyas j|(Vb garishtha
9. T^H tripra, satisfied ^1 /rap asl*!*^ trapiyas Efftn trapishtha
10. ^Nf dirgha, long ■JT^araffA fNN^ drdghiyas "Jlftrff drdghishtha
11. dlZra, far ^\dav ^=ffa^ daviyas ^flB davishtha
12. 7g5 dridha, firm ■J? dradA J<i\m(dradh{yas jfert dradhishtha
13. MPOjVJ parivridha, exalted Mp^tis^artpradA Urcd^M^part'cradAfyas MfVafs nparivradhishtha
14. tr^pn/Au, broad H*i\'**{prath(yas uftlff prathishtha
15. mi*Mprafeya,praiseworthy W s"ra XtB sreshtha
or^ya Wfjyeshtha
16. fiFlpriya, dear Vpra ihj^/weyas TtW preshtha
17. bahu, many >U>hu fftTB bhuyishtha
18. 'SJW bahula, frequent SamA =J^1m*^ bamhiyas «JfSs» bamhishtha
19. >J$I 6Ama, excessive «5^6Araf bhrasiyas af^Tf bhrasishtha
20. 1<j mridu, soft ^ET^ mrad tj<{l«l*^ mradiyas ^^8 mradishtha
21. yi«^yKcan, young VHlm^ymtyas Vfel! yavishtha
or V^fcm- kaniyas «*r«i8 kanishtha
22. vddha, firm KTVsddh «il«fl«t«^ sddhtyas sddhishtha-t
23. vriddha, old' ^f^arsA ^h^varshiyas sTptfa varshishtha
or *Qjya WmWjydya* ^Tl jyeshtha
24. «j <; 1 vrinddraka, beautiful ^ urinrf ^h&{ vrindiyas ^f^ff vrindishtha
25. ftsTC sthita, firm ?T s<Aa «^ stheyas WB stheshtha
26. stMla, strong W^sfAac *>H<(\H*{sthav(yas *^r*)B sthavishtha
27. sphira, thick "FS spAa «-MiM«^ spheyas ^faf spheshtha
28. jT*? hrasva, short -M*^ hrasiyas ^fitTB hrasishtha

* Pan. vr. 4, 162: t Pan. v. 3. 63-

 NUMERALS. 119

CHAPTER V.
NUMERALS.
Cardinals.
^sm, ^r, ekah, ekd, ekam, one. (Base im eka,)
^ ^Tj "5, dvau, dve, dve, two. (Base "g dva; in comp. fjg dvi.)
3 WT.> fw?:, ^ftr, trayah, tisrah, trini, three. (Base % tri.)
8 "*lr=fT<:, VKB', 'SrTTft, chatvdrah, chatasrah, chatvdri, four.
^TKT; chatur.)
M i& pancha, m. f. n. five. (Base ^i^PT jaancAare.)
i, *Aa/, m. f. n. six. (Base shash.)
7 * sapfa, m. f. n. seven. (Base fnn^ saptan.)
8 t ashtau, m. f. n. eight. (Base vn ashtan.)
9 «i wara, m. f. n. nine. (Base navan.)
10 so <fa£a, m. f. n. ten. (Base ?[$r^da£a».)
11 V\ *?■*!<?( ekdda&a, eleven. (Base as in ^r^rfa&w*.)
12 1^ dvddaSa. 34 38 Mrf(^j^lHN chatustrim&at.
13 <J3 trayodasa. 35 V^^^panchatrimsaL
14 <(8 "^5^1 chaturdas'a. 36 JJtj Mifysirts shattrimsat.
15 ^H^T panchada&a. 37 $9 TOrf^pT saptatrimsaL
16 ^ shodaSa. 38 wrf^Ti^ ashtdtrimkat.
1 7 19 VW^I saptadam. 39 3<i S^f^nr navatrimkat.
18 St WT^I ashtddasa. 40 80 *Ctfiftsnr chatvdrimkat, fem.
19 navadasa or 41 $S »f*^HlR5liis ekachatvdrimkaL
gRff^rfin ilnavimhatih. 42 8^ grI -4 I fit51 ^dvdchatvdrimsat or
20 30 f<j$|fri: vimSatih, fem. %^WTft^nr dvichatvdrimkat.
21 ^ CWfifcpffc ekavimSatih. 43 83 jnrewrft^nr trayakchatvdrimsat
32 ^ irf^rfin dvdvimiatih. or fa +1 H I ^ trichatvdrimkaL
23 *3 WftW^fln trayovimhatih. 44 88 ^SPTTft^nr chatukchatvdrimkat.
24 ^8 "Tjf^rffft chaturvim&atih. 45 8M <i-«4 -<M I ri.51 t\panchachatvdrimsaL
25 M^r^lfrr: panchavimiatih. 46 8^ ^T^nft^nT shatchatvdrimkat.
26 ^ Mf^rfrf*. shadvim&atih. 47 85 UHMriliTsi^ saptachatvdrimkat.
27 OTffiQffc saptavimSatih. 48 8b 1M8 1 I PC^l 1^ ashtdchatvdrimkat or
28 ^fc a I P=*5I Tri: ashtdvimSatih. ^ g-M^ 1 ^{juishtachaivdrimkat.
29 «nftj(fiR navavimiatih. 49 8«. sWTOlft^nr navachatvdrimkat.
30 30 fw^nr trims'at, fem. 50 Mo xf^r^f^^awcMsa^, fem.
3 1 31 CT^fap ekatrimktt. 51 Ml ^B«HrnfP^ ekapanchdkat.
32 3* glfctyiT dvdtrimkat. 52 IPfar^nr dvdpanchdkat or
33 33 d^f^f^lrf trayastrimiat. %tHt3PT dvipanchdkaL
120 NUMERALS.

53 W^'^ISliT trayahpanchdkat or 76 stf TOnrfii: shatsaptatih.

PdiHltyiT tripanchdkat. 77 *)H«nP(i: saptasaptatib.
54 MS ^jpii^U'SP^ chatuhpanchdkat. 78 *fc vmmfti ashtdsaptatih or
55 MM M-*< M-^ 1 51 A^panchapanchdkat. vnmflli ashtasaptatil}.
56 M$( ^Nt^IiT shatpanchdkat. 79 <mnif)R navasaptatih.
57 M$ arnrTr^TT saptapanchdkat. 80 to *r$tffir: oifrȣ.
58 Mb wnNTSTr^ ashtdpanchdkat or 81 M CTRfffflK ekdkitifi.
^TF«Hrr5nT ashtapahchdkat. 8a SRftfir: dvyakitih.
59 Ml HMM^I^Ii^ navapanchdkat. 83 t$ ^nsftfin tryakitib.
60 %o trftn shashtih, fem. 84 fcd nTOftfln chaturakUih.
61 4,<\ croft: ekashashtih. 85 bM I $fl Pri : panchdkitil}.
6 a i^WV^Sl dvdshashtih or 86 fct( MitylPit: shadakitih.
ftptfc dvishashtih,. 87 w gUT^ffirt saptdkitify.
63 ^3 ^tr:ttft: trayafyshashtih or 88 fcfc Vtl^ftfin ashtdkitih.
fd^fa: trishashtil}. 89 fc«. ^n^ftfin navdkitib.
64 ^iTwiPk: chatusfishashtiff. 90 <io sprfirc navatih.
65 ^M M-«mTl!: panchashashtih 91 Q.S CTWfftR ekanavatih.
66 i^fC^fw'. shatshashtil}. 9a VPPlfiK dvdnavatify or
67 ^9 M»mP«: saptashashtify. Ps^Pri: dvinavatih.
68 t(b ^ETCfK ashtdshashtih or 93 «3 wfonflR trayonavatib or
'Str^fa: ashtashashtih. P^H^Prf: trinavatih (not ^m).
69 ^I^T^f?: navashashtih. 94 e.8 fW«Nfii: chatwnavatify.
70 so «nfri: saptatih, fem. 95 1M M-m=(Pri: panchanavatih.
71 U=Rr5rfirc ekasaptatih. 96 <s.fy TOTfin shannavatib-
7a £T«xfiU dvdsaptatih, or 97 WH^mPrt: saptanavatify.
fkwrfin dvisaptatify. 98 «.t fIFPTTfin ashtdnavatil}. or
73 $3 aTTCHJrfir: traya^saptatih or WPrfin ashtanavatih.
fjgtmffc trisaptatil}. 99 «i<l H^MNPri: navanavatify or
74 $8 ^jrcrrfir: chatuhsaptatih. Unakatam.
75 SM ^^nriTT: panchasaptatify.
100 <>oo ^nr katam, neut. and masc. (Siddh.-Kaum. n. p. 635.)
101 w ^tfVrar $nr ekddhikam katam, hundred exceeded by one ; or as a com
pound, CTTfiPBtni ekddhika-katam, or TW^ni ekakatam, as before,
ioa 10^ srfv«fr ^PT dvyadhikam katam or Pg^iii dvikatam. (Pan. vi. 3, 49.)
103 sqftr4 ^Tff tryadhikam katam or Pd$lii trikatam.
104 S08 "^iTtfVi«p ^nf chaturadhikam satam or TiT.^nr chatuhkatam.
105 «»om *Nrfv4 ^Tif panchddhikam hatam or panchakatam.
106 <\o% ^rfv^i ^TiT shadadhikam katam or qTOIli shatkatam.
107 lo* Wtfv«F ^ saptddhikam satam or HTT^Tfl saptakatam.
108 lot WTftNr ashtddhikam satam or w^ni ashtakatam. (Pan. vi. 3, 49.)
 NUMERALS. 121

109 <to<i «iiir«raT ^nr navddhikam Satam or iPT^rf navaSatam.

110 <Wo ^nftr* daSddhikam satam or ^T^nr daSaSatam.
in W ^T^TTftrtr ^nr ekddaSddhikam Satam or ekddaSaSatam &c.
or <i<*l<^r $rff ekddaSam Satam, i. e. a hundred having eleven (in
excess). Pan. v. 2, 45.
112 m ST^rrfv^r ^Tff dvddaSddhikam Satam or ST^i ^Tff dvddaSam Satam.
113 S1| Wft^nfinfr ^tK trayodaSddhikam Satam or 5TiT trayodaSam Satam.
1 14 «W8 ^Hf^rrf>T«j ^Tff chaturdaSddhikam Satam or ^gf^i W chaturdaSam Satam.
115 I'M 'i^fSFnrfinfc' ^panchadaSddhikam Satam or qV^i ^jjipanchadaSam Satam.
116 ^te^rtfiTO 3TTT shodaSddhikam Satam or ^33} shodaSam Satam.
117 W ^rr^nftnfr ^rtf saptadaSddhikam Satam or ^TR^^T W saptadaSam Satam.
118 <fifc ^rer^irfvsfr ^Tff ashtddaSddhikam Satam or sstai^'l ^PT ashtddaSam Satam.
119 Wi •T^T^nfirar $nr navadaSddhikam Satam or W navadaSam Satam.
120 <i^o f^nTfira1 $RT vimSatyadhikam Satam or f^i $nf viinSam Satam*.
121 ggfihgwfiflfc $IW ekavimSatyadhikam Satam or gqiftfoi ^IIT ekavimSam
Satam*, &c.)
130 <^o f^i^finfr ^nr trimSadadhikam Satam or f^T ^rrf trimSam Satam*.
140 <tfo MrilR^ftpir chatvdriihSadadhikam Satam or swiPt^i ^RT chatvd-
rimSam Satam*.
150 mo V'm^iV'* ^rffpanchdSadadhikam Satam or "farycyRpanchdSam Satam*
or ^rr§5Tff sdrdhaSatam, 100 + ^ (hundred).
160 <j4,o Mwfvi* ^IfT shashtyadhikam Satam or ^fB$lci shashtiSatam.
170 q$o TTfrFrnr^ ^rtf saptatyadhikam Satam or tnrftr^Tff saptatiSatam.
180 Sbo W^ftwfW ^Irf aSUyadhikam Satam or v^fffiflQli aSitiSatam.
190 sco 'fm^fvofr ^nf navatyadhikam Satam or ^firjTH navatiSatam.
300 ^00 §■ ^ <foe iafe or fe^HT dviSatam or fa$|cfl dviSati.
300 300 cflftu ^TrTTfir frfffi Satdni or fp)5(ri triSatam.
400 goo ^Hlf< tyrflfa chatvdri Satdni or Hff'.^nr chatuhSatam.
500 Moo ifc ^nnf^l pancha Satdni or q'-<4$|ri panchaSatam.
600 ^00 ^7 ^nnf«T «Aa£ Satdni or ^T^nr shatSatam.
700 *oo *rjr 3MlfH sapta Satdni or «H?lri saptasatam.
800 too ^r? ^irilfri asAta Satdni or w$nr ashtaSatam.
900 <ioo tT^ ^nrrftr wava Satdni or •H^lri navaSatam.
1000 sooo $nnftl ^asa Satdni or ^T^Ttft daSaSati, fem., or *t?# sahasram,
neut. and masc. t
2000 ^000 |r *r^r <foe sahasre.
* Pan. v. 2, 46. The same rules apply to *T^H sahasram, 1000, so that 101 1 might he
rendered by <J<*I<^'| *n?# ekddasam sahasram, 1041 by <i*'MlPi$i V?B ekachatvdrims'am
sahasram, &c.
t Siddh.-Kaum. II. p. 635.
R
 122 NUMERALS.

3000 3000 ^tftff gggrflg trini sahasrdni.

10,000 <io,ooo 'wgif ayutam, neut. and masc. *
100,000 soo,ooo s^laksham, neut. or fem. *, or finnf niyutam, neut. and masat
One million, u^TT prayutam, neut. or masc. *
Ten millions, tftft koti, fem.
A hundred millions, arbuda, masc. and neut.
A thousand millions, mahdrbuda, masc. and neut., or TO padma, neut.,
i. e. lotus.
Ten thousand millions, kharva, neut., i. e. minute.
A hundred thousand millions, f*f*H nikharva, neut.
A billion, W^TTO mahdpadma, neut.
Ten billions, $anku, masc, i. e. an ant-hill.
A hundred billions, ^fa Sankha, masc. neut., i. e. a conch-shell, or
samudra, masc, i. e. sea.
A thousand billions, »l^rp*f mahdsankha, or *m aniya, ultimate.
Ten thousand billions, ?T^T hdhd, masc., or mq madhya, middle.
A hundred thousand billions, mahdhdhd, or rmfipardrdho, i. e. half more.
One million billions, dhuna, neut.
Ten million billions, *^l>pT mahddhuna.
A hundred million billions, wjrf?# akshauhini, fem., i. e. a host.
A thousand million billions, ilfnfNfe^l mahdkshauhini.
In the same manner as ^fVrar adhika, exceeding, gur &na, diminished, may
be used to form numerical compounds. tf^tf ^nf panchonam Satam or
14 '♦fl H 51 ii panchonakatam, 100 —5, i. e. 95. If one is to be deducted, -w^Hna,
without eka, suffices. aPlfifjlffo Unavimkatih or ^^Tf^rfin ekonavimtotifr,
30 — 1, i. e. 19. Another way of expressing nineteen and similar numbers
is by prefixing ekdnna, i. e. by one not ; rovflffrffo ekdnnavimiatih,
by one not twenty, i. e. 19. (Pan. vi. 3, 76.)
^ 253. Declension of Cardinals.
Singular. eka> one' Plueal.
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEDT.
N. ^B: ekah ekd vHt ekam 5% e*e *&CT. ekdh *f*lfH efcfoi
A. ^cfreiaro ^«RT efa&n etam ^SBF^ekdn K<*\i ekdh *<*\?fekdni
I. 5*»T ekena 4d <**! I efozyri J%!T e/tena ^If! e*a# 4t<wifi?: ekdbhih ?jlc e*a»A
D. ekasmai ekasyai V^f^ ekasmai TFfaUkebhyahV&Wlekdbhyah'ZkiXf'.ekebhyafi
Ab. ^SWTa[eitasm<2/ ekasydh ^fmUfekasmdt ^K*r. ekebhyah WW! ekdbhyah F^W ekebhyah
G. ^SWeiasya ekasydh WW e*asya 'P^TeiesMm *t<*l«U ei&rfm ^^WI ekeskdm
L. ^BftFnTeiasBim ttQTt ekasydm ^sfw^efcasmin 5?^eA:esAu «t«w*l efofeu ?^tte*esAtt
V. ^ eita e*e W eta ?T3> efce TO efott ^nf% e*<£ni
* Siddh.-Kaum. 11. p. 635. t Amara-Kosha 111. 6, 3, 24.
 NUMERALS. 123

§ 254. fir dvi, two, base s dva, like sajt kdnta (§ 238)
Dual.
IfASC. FEM. NKUT.
N.A.V. -Hdvau ^ dve 3 ape
I.D.Ab. ?TTWlt dvdbhydm STTWTT dvdbhydm ■gTWTT dvdbhydm.
G. L. dvayoh WVti dvayoh grftt dvayoh
§ *55* ftf three, fem. fim fi»ri.
N. V. ^TO trayah finer: tisrah gftnU <rfni
A. ^«^<rfn first tisrah* gTflH <rfni
I. fijfW: tribhih firefir: tisribhih fijfWt tribhih
D. Ab. fifW tribhyah tisribhyah fij*K tribhyah
G. IPTWl traydndm fn««ui tisrindm f <3H\ll\\ traydndm
L. fiT*| 'ns*u fiTO^ tisrishu fil^ trishu
J 256. chatur, four, fem. ^ttw chatasri.
N. V. 1HU-t chatvdrah Mdtft chatasrah ^HlfV chatvdri
A. ^ rtO chaturah <Tlr9S chatasrah* *mrnC chatvdri
I. 1cfP&t cAafur&MA ^inrfk:
t chatasribhih *njf*H chaturbhih
D. Ab. chaturbhyah VtiWf. chatasribhyah chaturbhyah
G. ,^5^T chaturndm WmrHTl chatasrindm f Viriol chaturndm
L. ehaturshu *4inra chatasrishu ^TiP| ehaturshu
§ 2$J. Tj^TT panchan, five. ^*AasA, six. w^asA/ara, eight.
N.A. V. ''fa^ancAa ^?«AaJ ^TBT ashtau or asAta
I. Tfafir. TTfJr: shadbhih NHBlfat ashtdbhih or «i«(«Tt ashtabhih
D.Ab. Tfr'WtpancAaiAyaA SWI! shadbhyah ^TfTWi: ashtdbhyah or ^T?Hi: ashtabhyah
G. «« 1 «i 1panchdndmJ ^5TT j SHKH'i ashtdndm J
L. <ra^pa8cA<i» sAats ■sHBI*} ashtdsu or 'OB*} ashtasu
Cardinals with bases ending in ^ ra, such as TOnr saptan, tt^T navan,
daSan, <J<*l^$(«f ekddasan, &c., follow the declension of panchan.
fif^rfif: vimSatih is declined like a feminine in 3[ i ; those in 7^ f like feminines
in Trtf; ^rff Satam like a neut. or masc. in ^1 a.
J 258. The construction of the cardinals from 1 to 19 requires a few
remarks. JjoS e£a is naturally used in the singular only, except when it
means some ; ^fir e£e vadanti, some people say. fix rfvi is always used as
a dual, all the rest from 3 to 19 as plurals. Ex. fi^firt *pfph tribhih purushaih,
with three men ; Jd<*l<^l M4«'m<^ ekddaia purushdn, eleven men, acc. The

* Not fim: <jsr$, not ^TNT: chatasrih.

t Not fir^BTT tisrindm, not •MntuuT chatasrindm (Pan vi. 3, 4), though these forms occur
in Epic poetry. J Pan. vn. i, 55.
a 2
124 NUMERALS.

cardinals after four do not distinguish the gender; U<*l<^l «TITh ekadaSa
ndrib, eleven women, acc.
While the numerals from i to 19 are treated as adjectives, agreeing with
their substantives in gender, if possible, and in number and case, f^rfin
vims'atify and the rest may be treated both as adjectives and as substantives.
Hence f^fa! $T3JJlri vimkatih iatrundm, twenty enemies, or ft^lfir: ^idii
vimiatih. katravah ; f^l^N: shashtih SiSavah, sixty boys ; ^ni Urilfa Satam
phaldni, a hundred fruits ; ftftgnn trimSatd vriddhaih, by thirty elders ;
^TiT <l*fl*Tl batam ddsindm or ^rff ^TO: sat am ddsyah, a hundred slaves ;
^nr# falTO sahasram pitarah, a thousand ancestors.
Exceptionally these cardinals may take the plural number : "i^l^lfsJ^h
panchdsadbhir hayail}, with fifty horses.

$ 259. Ordinals.
WW., °TT, °A, prathamah, d, am,
'srfijR:, °TT, °»T, agrimah, d, am, ■ the first.
^rrf^*i:, ddimah, d, am,
°TT, "'i, dvitiyah, d, am, the second.
infhR, °*IT, tritiyafi, d, am, the third.
^jf^:> o^flf chaturthah, i, am, '
irfNn, °7n, "'i, turiyafy, d, am, <■ the fourth,
■glfc, °ih, turyah, d, am,
VRH'., °*ft, °»T, panchamah, i, am, the fifth.
TO, shashthah, 1, am, the sixth,
inn?:, °»T, saptamab, i, am, the seventh.
^tbt:, °>r, ashtamal}, i, am, the eighth.
tTTO, °"ft, °*T, navamah, i, am, the ninth.
^Plt, °»ft, 0»T, dasamal}, t, am, the tenth.
°3T> ekadasah, i, am, the eleventh.
*H<3U, °3T» navadasah, i, am,
5Mf«l3li» °^ft> °5T> tinavimkdh, i, am, > the nineteenth.
anrf^rflnw;, °»r^, 4naviMatitamah, i, am,
f%:, °^ft, °3T, wmsa#, am (Pan. v. 2, 56), 1
... - . . , . . „ r the twentieth.
Hariri riH:, °ift, °it, vimsatitamah, 1, am, J
m, triMak i, am, 1 ^
Tft^nPR, °HT, trimsattamal}, 1, am, J
HHlPt^i;, chatvdrimkah, i, am, "1 fortieth
TOrfftjUPrc, °*ft, °H, chatvdrimiattamah, i, am, J
iHt^t:, °5T3 panchdsah, i, am, 1 the'fiftjeth
M-qi^HH:, °*ft, 0,T, panchdsattamah,, i, am, J
 NUMERALS. • 125

mPvhi: shashtitamah, the sixtieth *.

ekashashtitamah, 1
' \ the sixty-first.
<j<*Ma: ekashashtah, J
totfdriH: saptatitamah, the seventieth.
mnrfkmR ekasaptatitamah,]>■ the , seventy-first.
.
CVnnn ekasaptatah, J
flsflfrfriH: aMtitamah, the eightieth.
^KT^ftfkim: ekdkititamah, \ ^ ^.
CTltflTC ekdsitah, J
•HCririW, °»T, navatitamah, i, am, the ninetieth.
CTW^finPR ekanavatitamah,
' 1 the ninety-first.
CTTOK ekanavatah,
\\AAH:, °A, katatamah, {, am, the hundredth. (Pan. v. 2, 57.)
CTjnnPR ekakatatamah, the hundred and first.
W^ydH: sahasratamah, the thousandth.

§ 2,60. Numerical Adverbs and other Derivatives.

?r^T sakrit, once. JT=S*rr ekadhd, in one way.
%; twice. flfVT dvidhd or ihTf dvedhd, in two ways,
ftj: thrice. f^VT tridhd or sprf tredhd, in three ways.
^tt: chatuh, four times. ^<pft chaturdhd, in four ways.
XT^i^:j9«nc^aZTi£0a/i, five times. *HvT pahchadhd, in five ways.
^7^3: shatkritvah, six times, &c. ^teT shoclhd, in six ways, &c.

H<M5V. ekasah, one-fold.

%5H dvisah, two-fold.
f^T. tri&ah, three-fold, &c. (Pan. v. 4, 43.)

^4 dvayam or fsTPi dvitayam, a pair. (Pan. v. a, 42.)

cHi trayam or f^irt tritayam or ^tft fray?, a triad.
"«(ija4 chatushtayam, a tetrad,
^faini panchatayam, a pentad, &c.
These are also used as adjectives, in the sense of five-fold &c, and may
then form their plural as "NnRK panchataydh or tHcPT panchataye (§ 283).
Vtt^panchat, a pentad, da§at, a decad (Pan. v. 1, 60), are generally
used as feminine; but both words occur likewise as masculine in the
commentary to Pan. v. 1, 59, and in the Kas'ika-Vritti.

* The ordinals from sixty admit of one form only, that is TPIJ tamah ; but if preceded
by another numeral, both forms are allowed (Pan. v. 2, 58). ^TiT 4atam forms its ordinal as
^nilPR safatama^ only (Pan. v. 2, 57).
126 PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

CHAPTER VI.

PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

$ 261. Personal Pronouns.

Base (in composition) mad and Base (in composition) tvad and
iHW^ asmad. yushmad.

Singular.
N. TOsT aham, I /ram, thou
A. «ri mdm, *TT ma, me ??T tvdm, foa, thee
I. »PTT mayo", by me j^TT tvayd, by thee
D. in? mahyam, M me, to me fT«i tubhyam, it te, to thee
Ab. JTff maJ, from me Wt^ tvat, from thee
G. TO mama, h me, of me TP? faua, w te, of thee
L. Jrfti mayi, in me wftr tvayi, in thee

DtJAL.
N. wsri dvdm, we two tt^t yuvdm, you two
A. wrn awam, «ft n<ra, us two ir^T yuvdm, ^ raw, you two
I. ^TfTwn dvdbhydm, by us two ^T*Tf yuvdbhydm, by you two
D. TOT»li dvdbhydm, tft «aw, to us two ir^T*JT yuvdbhydm, vdm, to you two
Ab. ^irnwrr dvdbhydm, from us two ^TWlT yuvdbhydm, from you two
G. ^rrnffc dvayoh, raaw, of us two jprifc yuvayoh, »am, of you two
L. SHimfU dvayoh, «n rcaw, in us two gTOfe yuvayoh,. in you two

PSUBAL.
N. vayam, we ^5 yilyam, you
A. WWI^ asmdn, «Tt wa$, us ^TTt^ yushmdm, t>aA, you
I. ,5n=RTfir: asmdbhih, by us irarfa yushmdbhih, by you
D. asmabhyam, ^: na#, to us- •cp»W yushmabhyam, vaA, to you
Ab. WFTH asmat, from us ^'Tff yushmai, from you
G. *njRT4r asmdkam, «n «a#, of us TCTOi yushmdkam, «r: i;a#, of you
L. WCTffl asmdsu, in us y*U*J yushmdsu, in you
The substitutes in the even cases, m ma, »T me, ^ nau, tf: ra«#, |»rf tvd,
Tt te, ^TT i>am, 'm vah, are never used at the beginning of a sentence, nor can
they be followed by such particles as ^ cha, and, vd, or, ^ eva, indeed,
^ ha, ^5 aha.
 PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 127

§ 262. Base (in composition) ^ tad, he, she, it.

Singular. Plural,
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. fem. NEUT.
N. TTC sdh TTT sd ^ fe kt: ma (Tlf«T fan*
A. TT tarn ITT fctm TrrfH tdni
I. JTH tena (TTT faya1 1>«T fena %t taih iTTf*n tdbhih
D. tasmai tasyai WW tasmai tebhyah TTWti tdbhyah tebhyah
Ab. TWrn^ tasmdt TfWtl tasydh nwii^ tasmdt (TWi: tebhyah TTW. tdbhyah JCHf. tebhyah
G. TRS tasya n*H\\ tasydh iTOT tasya teshdm JlXWi tdsdm TPT( teshdm
L. KfiSR^fawnin n*m tasydrn nfw^tasmin Tt^teshu
Dual.
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
N. A. ^ <au ^ *e
I. D. Ab. TTPTT tdbhydm TfTKTf tdbhydm lIWT tdbhydm
G. L. iPTh JayoA iPfc tayoA inftt iayoA
J 263. Base (in composition) fyatf.
Singular. Plural,
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. fem. NEUT.
N. ^TC syah FT sya* WiTfyaf Wfye wr:/y<# WrfW <ydnt
A. W fyaro WT <ya»i Wt^ <yat <yan ?rrc <yaA
I. fyena WTT *yay<2 TTT /yena fyaiA Wrfir; tydbhih ?h /yaiA
D. T'njfr tyasmai tyasyai tyasmai ^W.tyebhyah ~m*T.tydbhyah Sfrwi: tyebhyah
Ab. WWTiTfyasmaV Ntm-tyasyd/t TJ&tfftyasmdt TfatUyebhyah TJW.tydbhyah Tfat". tyebhyah
G. rlTCl iyosya dWK /yasya# T&Qtyasya TtUtyeshdm iumi tydsdm Ttvj tyeshdm
L. tsfw^yosmtn WPTI tyasydm N?*n'[tyasmin tyeshu <yas» UPl tyeshu
Dual.
masc. fem. neut.
N.A. W fyatt ^ tye ^ <ye
I. D. Ab. WTwri tydbhydm WT*IT tydbhydm WT«IT tydbhydm
G. L. ?pifc tyayoh is*Tl; tyayoh tyayoh
Possessive Pronouns.
§ 364. From the bases of the three personal pronouns, possessive adjectives
are formed by means of ftf ?ya.
Jl^fa:, °*tT, madiyah, yd, yam, mine.
°*Tf, tvadiyah, yd, yam, thine,
ffljhli, °*i> tadtyah, yd, yam, his, her, its.
swefoCj-0^ asmadiyah, yd, yam, our.
J*n(hK, yushmadiyah, yd, yam, your.
fl("1n:, °^rr, °4, tadtyah, yd, yam, their.
Other derivative possessive pronouns are hw^: * mdmakah, mine; »TT^3F;
tdvakah, thine ; VTOTC dsmdkah, our ; yaushmdkah, your. Likewise
* P&n. iv. 3, 3; iv. 1, 30; vii. 3, 44.
128 PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

»JTT5fi«T: mdrnakinah,, mine ; Ttr^tT: tdvakinah, thine ; VTOPffrn dsmdkinafr,

our j 4tmi«fl<u: yaushmdkinafy, your.
Reflexive Pronouns.
§ 265. ^ri svayam, self, is indeclinable. ^ni <Jfl<<r^ svayam vritavdn, I
chose it myself, thou chosest it thyself, he chose it himself; «(iHit1 svayam
vritavati, she chose it herself; ^4 TjPTWt svayam vritavantah, we, you, they
chose it by our, your, themselves.
§ 266. *$TtH*{dtman, self, is declined like mP[brahman 192). Ex. WTTWPPTH
W«Tr dtmdnam dtmand pasya, see thyself by thyself, gnosce te ipsum; >HIi+h"1
dtmano doshamjndtvd, having known his own fault. It is used in the
singular even when referring to two or three persons : fJTW»fi <$IH|J|H| fiTK
dtmano dekamdgamya mritdh., having returned to their country, they died.
$ 267. ^T, svalj,, svd, svam, is. a reflexive adjective, corresponding
to Latin suus, sua, suum. ^ ^3 svam putram drishtvd, having seen his
own son. On the declension of ^ sva, see £ 278.
Demonstrative Pronouns.
§ 268. Base (in composition) *ni^ etad, this (very near).
• • Singular. Plural.

N. eshah WVl eshd Vtt[ etat IHiete Tncr. etdA VKTf^ etdni
A. Tff etam VHX etdm TOTtf etat 5TTT«T eia» TTfTT: eiftt <f niUi e/ani
I. <iiH etena *dn*ll etayd v.n*\ etena efaiA ^ITlfWj etdbhih IRtl etaih
D. <jn«^ etasmai *ifl*S etasyai «in«*i etasmai TnW.etebhyah VKl^'.etdbhyah ^iW.etebhyaA
Ab.VirWffiletasmdt llHWV.etasydh ^KWn^etasmdt TtfteKetebhyah VXW.etdbhyah VlW.etebhya/i
G. VJ(& etasya HAmi'.etasydh HH^etasya ^Jt*n eteshdm «ffil«i etdsdm UKl eteshdm
L. VXf&ffetasmin VKmietasydm mrfW^eiasmin 5^ efesAu *nTRJ efd'su «;ng eiesAit
Dual.
masc. fem. neut.
N.A. ^Tnrfaa ^ftefe VJt ete
I.D. Ab. CTT«lt etdbhydm ^KTWIT etdbhydm ^TTT«lt etdbhydm
G. L. THPft: efayoA TiHft: eiayoA , ITiPft: eteyo/i
§ 269. Base (in composition) ^ idam, this (indefinitely).
Singular. Plural.
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM.
N. W*I ayam ^ iyam ^ idam ime ^TK imdh
A. imam 5Tf imam ^ idam 5*\\*\imdn ^HXlimdh ^TrffTimant
I. VPT anena n*tm anayd ^I%«T anena TjfHJ e&AiA ^nfal dbhih ^fW: eSAiA
D. asmai asyai ^SFER asmoi ebhyah ^fT*H: dbhyah IJWi: eftAyaA
Ab. ^Wfi^asma'i ■wwitasyaA ^reRTJT asmai IJWUe&AyaA 'BW, dbhyah W.eiAyaA
G. asya vitmt asydh asya *TST esAam SN|*H asam
L. ^iffcH c^asmin fT9fl asydm ofw^asmin 5T§ esAu ^TTCJ aVit *TI| eshu
 PBONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 129

Dual.
MASC. FEM. NECT.
N.A.V. I imau ^ ime me
I.D.Ab. WTT dbhydm WTT dbhydm NITWIT i
G.L. WWh anayoh VPn? anayoh anayoh
§ 270. *nr^ etaflf and ^ irfam, when repeated in a second sentence with
reference to a preceding ijTf^ etad and ^ idam, vary in the following cases,
by substituting ena.
Singular. Plural.
FEM. FEM.
A. T*T enam T*TT enam ?T«Tt^e»a< A. en<2» ^«TT: endh <J«1lf*l esifrii
I. tni enena «t»iMl enaya enena
Dual.
MASC. FEM. NEDT.
A. Hi
G. L. 1J*pffc enayoh *;H*Tkl enayoh enayoh
Ex. ^T^»T *HHi<<UH*flri* "S^TSwrppi araeraa vydkaranam adhttam, enam
chhando 'dhydpaya, the grammar has been studied by this person,
teach him prosody.
»jh4V. ilfaa' ciif5 <M*fi: iprn ^ anayoh pavitram kulam, enayoh prabhii-
tam svam, the family of these two persons is decent, and their
wealth vast.
$ 271. Base (in composition) ados, that (mediate).
Singular.
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
N. asau fflEn asau
A. amum
I. ^PJTT amund ^jJTT amuyd >M*i9 «i i amund
D. 'W'j'+i amushmai ^W^T amushmai
Ab. ^PT^Tn^ amushmdt TTHUJl! amushydh ^HJJ^TTTf amushmdt
G. wj«h amttshya WHUIV. amushydh «*i <M amushya
L. ^CTfaT*^ amushmin ■i{Hm\ amushydm Vnfat^ amushmin
Plural.
MASC. FEM. NEUT.
N. WTT amf VSWfa amuni
A. ^tTH amttra 'SWftT amuni
I. SH*fl f*Tt amibhih ■S^fWt amubhih ■^•flf*Tt amibhih
D.Ab. WTTHi: amibhyah ^JWK amubhyah ^T>ft«lJ amibhyah
G. 4IH"lm amishdm •wmhT amushdm
L. ^t*fN9 amishu ■st»m amushu
Dual,
masc. fem. neut.
N.A.V. ^Kamit I.D.Ab. ^TWfflT amtibhydm G.L. ^W*ft: amuyoh
130 PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

Relative Pronoun.
§ 272. Base (in composition) ^ yad, who or which.
Singular, Plural.
fem. FEM. NEtTT.
N. H'.yah TT yd iTffya* Vye ttt: y<£A *nT«i yani
A. ^ yam TT y&m 17f ya< IT^yan *rn ytfA •HlPw yarn
I. yena TPTTyayo' T«T yena *h yaih Ttfir: ydbhih yatA
D. *T5& yasmai 1^ yasyai yasmai 5fWlt yebhyah TTP*rc ydbhyah ^WtJ yebhyah
Ab. mmA^yasmdt H*<{\.yasydh Mmi^yasmdt yebhyah ydbhyah yebhyah
G. yasya m*hu yasydh Vffiyasya TH1 yeshdm ydsdm xpn yeshdm
L. *lfwi yasmin <4*mi yasydm ifffffHyasmin yesAtt ifrr yesAu

Dual.
MASC. FEM.
N. A. V. TT yau lye If ye
I. D. Ab. TTWTT ydbhydm *TT*TT ydbhydm «4I*hi ydbhydm
G. L. *nftt yayoA fftt yayoA TV$\l yayoh

Interrogative Pronouns.
§ 273. Base (in composition) fts £im, Who or which ?
Singular. Plural.
MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
N. «S: AaA IX kd f% Aim Ae «Sn Ad% ^ilftr Aani
A. Aawi «ST Mm fijf Aim ^fiT^Aan «5Tt MA '^tTttl Aawi
I. WT Arena Wttkayd <*»1 Aeraa ^f: AaiA «RTfa: kdbhih AaiA
D. ^Rjl hasmai kasyai hasmai %VH: kebhyah cST«K kdbhyah kebhyah
Ab. «M+(IH\ kasmdt "agW.kasydh ^RTTf^iasnwfi ^Hlt AeiAyaA WKAaMyaA iirwi: AeAAyaA
G. 'ZRQkasya <**»{'. kasydh ~sg^C(kasya keshdm «5TAT kdsdm W^l keshdm
L. olifiiH'^Aasmin mtSlkasydm tttVi t\kasmin W^keshu «Knj kdsu ^PJAesAu

Dual.
FEM.
N. A. «CTAau ijfAe $T Ae
I. D. Ab. kdbhydm WIT kdbhydm WTT kdbhydm
G. L. cSTtt AayoA c5*lT: AayoA «S*ITJ AayoA

$ 274. Pronouns admit the interposition of ^rss ak before their last vowel
or syllable, to denote contempt or dubious relation (Pan. v. 3, 71). H1«hl
tvayakd, By thee ! instead of iq^n tvayd. g^apfr: yuvakayoh, Of you two !
40f«Hfic asmakdbhih, With us ! ^nroj ayakam. asakau, &c. (See
Siddh.-Kaum. 1. p. 706.)
 PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 131

Compound Pronouns.
J 275. By adding ^ dris, drisa, or driksha, to certain pro
nominal bases, the following compound pronouns have been formed :
iTT^ tddriS, tddrika, rtldMJ tddriksha, such like.
Tirr^S^ etddrik, UTTT^r etddrisa, CTTTTq etddriksha, this like.
<4i $41 yddris, VTffl yddrika, TfT^ yddriksha, what like.
Wrti, tdriSa, idriksha, this like,
^ft^ <d£$I kidrisa, ^l^j kidriksha, What like ?
These are declined in three genders, forming the feminine in ^ «. ri!£<*
tddrik, m. n.; WT^ft tddrikl, f. ; or TfTCTH, tddrisafy, i, am. Similarly
formed are TT^T mddrisa, WT^T tvddrisa, like me, like thee, &c.
^ 276. By adding cttt »a£ and tt^ yotf to certain pronominal bases, the
following compound pronouns, implying quantity, have been formed :
HT^TT tdvat, so much, ~)
WifTmi etdvat, so much, > declined like nouns in vat 187).
*4Ni^ ydvat, as much, J
TJTiT iwa/, so much, "I . „ .
How much ?} ^^ ^
Note — On the declension of ^iflT &a<i, How many ? TTfiT tati, so many, and vfilyati, as
many, see § 231.
§ 277. By adding fqw c^i/, chana, or ^rfg api, to the interrogative
pronoun fag kim, it is changed into an indefinite pronoun.
csftaii kaSchit, W[f*l\ kdchit, fisf^n^ kimchit, some one ; also cRf%7T kachchit,
anything.
kaschana, kdchana, f^W!\ kimchana, some one.
sjrtsftj Ao '/w, oRrftj Mpi, ftflnftl kimapi, some one.
In the same manner indefinite adverbs are formed: oj^x £aef<2, When?
ef^Tfa'iT kaddchit, 44 H 4 kaddchana, once ; '3 Ava, Where ? »r "Siirfa kvdpi,
not anywhere.
Sometimes the relative pronoun is prefixed to the interrogative, to render
it indefinite: *K c(: yaA kah, whosoever; xt^n; cj^q; yasya kasya, whosesoever.
Likewise T. kaschit, whosoever, or *K opg yaA kascha, or *rc «ircj«T
yaA kaSchana.
The relative pronoun, if doubled, assumes an indefinite or rather distributive
meaning : tr , *rf in, TO^, yo yaA, yd, yad yad, whosoever. Occasionally
the relative and demonstrative pronouns are combined for the same purpose :
yattad, whatsoever.

s 2
132 PKONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

Pronominal Adjectives.
§ 278. Under the name of Sarvandman, which has been freely translated
by Pronoun, but which really means a class of words beginning with sarva,
native grammarians have included, besides the real pronouns mentioned
before, the following words which share in common with the real pronouns
certain peculiarities of declension. They may be called Pronominal Adjectives,
and it is to be remembered that they are affected by these peculiarities of
declension only if they are used in certain senses.
1. sarva, all; 2. f^a vi&va, all; 3. w ubha, two; 4. TWI ubhaya,
both ; 5. ^r»T anya, other ; 6. WHJKt anyatara, either ; 7, ^TTC itara, other ;
8. & tva, other (some add 35 tvad, other) ; 9. words formed by the suffixes
TTT^ tara and tama, such as 9. eSJTt katara, Which of two? 10. eSTTH katama,
Which of many? 10. *nr soma, all ; 11. ftw sima, whole ; 12. nema, half;
13. eka, one; 14. rgi purva, east or prior; 15. tjt para, subsequent;
16. avara, west or posterior; 17. ^ianu dakshina, south or right;
18. T^Tt uttara, north or subsequent; 19. ^ttr: apara, other or inferior;
20. ^r*rc adhara, west or inferior; 21. ^ roet, own; 22. to: antara, outer,
(except tHiW 1; antard piih, suburb,) or lower (scil. garment).
If TR sama means equal or even, it is not a pronominal adjective ; nor ^ftpi
dakshina, if it means clever ; nor ^ sva, if it means kinsman or wealth ; nor
TO! antara, if it means interval, &c. ; nor any of the seven from ijf pdrva to
^HT avara, unless they imply a relation in time or space. Hence ^ft(7tn TPmi
dakshina gdthakdh, clever minstrels ; <rwrj: ^T$: uttardh kuravah, the northern
Kurus, (a proper name); U*firrc Wl'.prabMtdh svdh, great treasures (Kas'. 1. 1,35);
yimMiir TOft grdmayor antare vasati, he lives between the two villages.
Masculine.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
N. sarvah UTT sarvau sarce
A. ^T=T sarvam _as sarvau
TT^T sarvdn
I. Sl^fJD sarvena sarvdbhydm sarvaih
D. tiw sarvasmai OTIT sarvdbhydm ^sfw?: sarvebhyah
Ab. 'H 4 W 1 sarvasmdt TrtTWIT sarvdbhydm "^>>V. sarvebhyaJi
G. sarvasya *»5*Tl; sarvayoh «im sarveshdm
L. «i (\n »T sarvasmin sarvayoh
V. ^ sarea ?tWf sarvau sarre
Feminine.
SINGULAR. dual. PLURAL.
N. *T#T sarva *fif sarce
A. sarvdm *T§Tl sarvdJi
I. tl^lT sarvayd ^Twri' sarvdbhydm «5lf»T: sarvdbhih
D. sarvasyai sHfTWTf sarvdbhydm WtW, sarvdbhyah
 PKONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 133

Ab. *t5t«it sarvasydh ^T$T*TT sarvdbhydm H^IWK sarvdbhyah

G. WWTTC sarvasydh ^n^nt sarvayoh «<4lWl sarvdsam
L. sarvasydm tl<?lfU sarvayoh «5l*J sarvdsu
Neuter,
SINGULAR. DUAL.
dual. PLURAL.
N.A.V. 'JlWiaruam T^fsarce
?r¥ sarve wfrfrl saroani
The rest like the masculine.
§ 279. ^PT araya, Ararat anyatara, itara, ^fiT* katara, "ttH katama,
take # in the Nom. Acc. Voc. Sing, of the neuter :
Nom. Sing, ^rai: anyah, masc. ; ^PTT anyA, fem. ; <8<Hi^ anyat, neut.
$ 280. wiAa is used in the Dual only :
Masc. N. A. V. ubhau, I. D. Ab. T>n*rr ubhdbhydm, G. L. 'wft: ubhayoh ;
W wiAe, N. A.V. fem. and neut.
§ 281. ubhayah, °xn -yd, °4 -yam, is never used in the Dual, but only
in the Sing, and Plur. Haradatta admits the Dual.
Masculine.
singular. PLURAL.
N. ubhayah ubhaye
A. ubhayam
I.
7*TT«T ttbhayena <TVph ubhayaih
D.
3*i<)«*J ubhayasmai, &c. ■^H^Wt; ubhayebhyah, &c.
§ 282. The nine words from purva to TO antara (14 to 22), though
used in their pronominal senses, may take in the Nom. Plur. ? e or w: ah.;
in the Abl. Sing, wnj; smdt or ^ at; in the Loc. Sing, far* smin or ^ i.
Singular. Dual. Plural.
N. purvah tj¥ purve or purvdh
A. ^ puream V^fJ purvau Ipl I i^purvdn
I. "j^"*!) purvena TT^TW purvdbhydm purvaih
D. prfrvasmai TJ^TWr purvdbhydm V^mt purvebhydh
Ab. <J§W I A^purvasmdt or f^tXtl^purvdt ndpim purvdbhydm J^s^' purvebhyah
■q^fai purveshdm
G. m5**I pHrvasya M^<ft; purvayoh
L. 1^5 fi*J i\jmrvasmin or purve purvayoh purveshu
§ 283. The following words may likewise take *n a# or ^ e in the Nom.
Plur. masc. (Pan. 1. I, 33.)
jt«!Jt: prathamah, first, uvih) prathamau, jrsjir prathame or IPOTR prathamah ;
fem. TVfHT prathamd.
charamah, last, «u.4| charamau, charame or ^TTft charamdh.
%1PR dvitayah, two-fold, fem. fgrfifl dvitayt, and similar words in Tnt faya ;
ftfJTO tritayah, three-fold ; faffr) tritaye or f^nnTR tritaydh.
3"*n dvayah, two-fold, fem. 'gift oVay«, and similar words in ya ; JPK trayah.
134 PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.

w^i: alpah, few, tSTBT alpe or alpdb.

?r§: ardhah, half, ^nf ardhe or w*h: ardhdfi.
"<*fiOW katipayah, some, ^ifiniTj katipaye or 4fri<4<4i: katipayah.
^ri: nemah, half, wewie or ifarc nemdh.
In all other cases these words are regular, like oBTTTt kdntah.
§ 284. foftiR dvittyah and other words in (fHl are declined like
^TiT kdnta, but in the Dat. Abl. and Loc. Sing, they may follow *nt sarva.
Masculine.
singular. dual. plural.
N. fkfll*C dvittyah dvitiyau ffTfttfT: dvittyah
A. f%Trtxi rftn'tfyam fignrfrrl dvitiyau fgTrhfX^dvittydn
I. Tsnl*l«1 dvittyena ffl-M(»*l*| dvitiyabhydm fg&%'. dvitiyaih
D. fs Hhnt dvittydya or fg ifl'M*^ dvittyasmai ff rflA|I»-M1 dvittydbhydm fSlft^W dvittyebhyah
Ab. fatal ndvitiydt OTfgAiHWTHdvittyasmdt fk »fl Wi dvitiyabhydm fgtft&V. dvittyebhyah
G. ftf ifl <4W dvittyasya ?4 rll i|*Tlt dvittyayoh ifl^MI dvittydndm
L. %Tftl dvitiye or fs ffl M (Vm ^ dvitiyasmin Ps Wl-M*Tlt dvittyayoh fg ifl <4 § dvittyeshu
At the end of Bahuvrihi compounds the Sarvanaman's are treated like
ordinary words : Dat. Sing, fflifimim priyobhaydya, to him to whom both are
dear (Pan. 1. 1, 29). The same at the end of compounds such as Jrrcnjf:
mdsapurvah, a month earlier; Dat. Jmnjfpi mdsapurvdya (Pan. 1. 1, 30).
Likewise in Dvandvas ; iJ^HRUUi pArvdpardndm, of former and later persons
(Pan. 1. 1, 31), though in the Nom. Plur. these Dvandvas may take 5 e;
u5l<U pdrvdpare or M<hmj: pdrvdpardh. Only in compounds expressive of
points of the compass, such as uttara-purva, north-east, the last
element may throughout take the pronominal terminations (Pan. 1. 1, 28).
Adverbial Declension.
§ 285. In addition to the regular case-terminations by which the declension
of nouns is effected, the Sanskrit language possesses other suffixes which
differ from the ordinary terminations chiefly by being restricted in their
use to certain words, and particularly to pronominal bases. The ordinary
case-terminations, too, are frequently used in an adverbial sense. Thus
Acc. f^t chiram, a long time.
Instr. fciXiif chirena, in a long time.
Dat. P«4t.m chirdya, for a long time.
Abl. f«TOir chirdt, long ago.
Gen. faroi chirasya, a long time.
Loc. fat chire, long.
Other adverbial terminations are,
• I. If. tab, with an ablative meaning, becoming generally local.
2. ^ tra, with a locative meaning.
3. ^1 dd, with a temporal meaning; also raised to ^r«r¥ ddnim.
 PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 135

4. rTTiT tat, with a locative meaning.

5. *rr thci, with a meaning of modality ; likewise ^ than and *l tha.
6. WTff satf, expressive of effect.
7. ^JT d and ■otf^ aAi, local.
8. fif rhi, temporal and causal.
9. TTT. tar, local.
10. ?r ha, local.
See also the terminations for forming numeral adverbs 260).
1. in tah, with an ablative meaning.
me. tatah, thence, ^rt: yatah, whence, jjt: itah, hence ; (cf. ^fir Mi, thus,
^ iva, as.) vnr. atah, hence, ifw: kutah, Whence? ^IHW: amutah, thence.
WS: mattah, from me. ^s^rs: asmattafy, from us. bhavattah, from
your Honour, i^nr, ptirvatah, before (in a general local or temporal sense).
Tt^Tt: sarvatah, always. ^Hlpr. agratah, before, like ^ agre. ^rf»T7r: abhitah,
around, near, w^nr: ubhayatah, on both sides, "qftfr: paritah, all round.
JJIHri: grdmatah, from the village. ajndnatah, from ignorance.
2. 3 fra, locative; originally tra, as in TT^raTT pwrushatrd, amongst men.
TO tafra, there. v& yatra, where, ^ kutra, Where ? ^ afrvz, here,
^rfl^ amutra, there, in the next world. ^oit?r ekatra, at one place,
together. ^1 satrd, with, and satram, with (see ^ safoas).
3. c[T da, temporal.
TT^T tada1, then, and A$}<il taddnim. H^T yadd, when. kadd, When ?
^rar^T anyadd, another time. *#^T sarvadd, always, at all times.
ekadd, at one time, Tf^T «aaa, always. 3^T idd, in the Veda,
later ^mT iddnim, now.
4. TTTT^ £a/, local.
Trr^iriT^ra^aV, in front.
Frequently after a base in ^ « :
^SaTtT purastdt, before, ^WTOT^ adharastdt, below. ifiJGmrparastdt, after
wards, ^rtrern^ adhastdt, below. arqftSTJ^ uparishtdt, above.
5. *n Ma, modal.
»njT tathd, thus. Tr«n yathd, as. *Hhn sarvathd, in every way. wrsn
ubhayathd, in both ways, ^rarsrr anyathd, in another way. sh^iRvji
anyatarathd, in one of two ways, itarathd, in the other way.
^*IT vrithd, vainly (?) . Or ^ /Aaw, in «R<$ katham, How ? ittham, thus.
Or "bt Ma, in ^ni a^a, thus.
6. iRTi^saV, effective.
THFErnr rdjasdt, (j^sfts>jhT r4/«o 'dhinam, dependent on the king.) WCTCTIT
bhasmasdt, reduced to ashes. vfrnfflT agnisdt, reduced to fire.
136 CONJUGATION.

7. ^tT a and ^t[f% dhi, local.

<^ 0*f*U l H$ dakshindhi, in the South, or 5{fBjiDl dakshind. THTrf^ uttardhi, in
the North, or 5HT1 uttard. w^T antard (or °t -ram, or °T -re, or
-rena), between. v^jpurd, in the East, in front, formerly, (or ip;: puralj.
and vXM^purastdt, before.) xp&l paschd, behind, (or v^gXf^pa^chdt.)
Adverbs such as »pn mudhd, in vain, mrishd, falsely, are instrumental
cases of obsolete nouns ending in consonants.
8. ft rhi, temporal and causal.
^Tlff etarhi, at this time, (Wilson.) ^iff karhi, At what time ? *rff yarhi,
wherefore, wft tarhi, therefore, at that time, (Wilson.)
9. ti^ tar, local.
vnt^prdtar, early, in the morning. Urjri^. sanutar, in concealment.
10. f ha, locative.
^ kuha, Where ? ^5 iha, here. saha, with.

CHAPTER VII.

CONJUGATION.
§ 2,86. Sanskrit verbs are conjugated in the Active and the Passive.
Ex. ^fatfk bodhati, he knows; budhyate, he is known.
§ 287. The Active has two forms :
1. The Parasmai-pada, i.e. transitive, (from TOJT parasmai, Dat. Sing, of
VS. para, another, i.e. a verb the action of which refers to another.)
Ex. «^TfTT daddti, he gives.
3. The Atmane-pada, i. e. intransitive, (from 41 atmane, Dat. Sing, of
*JllrM t^ dtman, self, i. e. a verb the action of which refers to the agent.)
Ex. >Sit<^ ddatte, he takes.
Note—The distinction between the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada is fixed by usage
rather than by rule. Certain verbs in Sanskrit are used in the Parasmaipada only, others
in the Atmanepada only ; others in both voices. Those which are used in the Parasmaipada
only, are verbs the action of which was originally conceived as transitive ; e. g. *jflT frfiT
bhumim manthati, he shakes the earth ; tsi^fn mdmsam khddati, he eats meat ; ?rppTTrfiT
grdmam atati, he goes to or approaches the village. Those which are used in the Atmanepada
only, were originally verbs expressive of states rather than of actions ; e. g. *TViT edhate, he
grows ; tM<;n spandate, he trembles ; 'ffa^' modate, he rejoices ; sHfr iete, he lies down.
In the language of the best authors, however, many verbs which we should consider
intransitive, are conjugated in the Parasmaipada, while others which govern an accusative,
 CONJUGATION. 137

are always conjugated in the Atmanepada. ^rfff hasati, he laughs, is always Parasmaipadin,
whether used as transitive or neuter (Colebr. p. 297) : it is so even when reciprocity of action
is indicated, in which case verbs in Sanskrit mostly take the Atmanepada; e'. g. «qfli5«fii
vyatihasanti, they laugh at each other (Pan. 1. 3, 15, 1). But smayate, he smiles, is
restricted by grammarians to the Atmanepada ; and verbs like HTTfl trdyate, he protects,
are Atmanepadin (i. e. used in the Atmanepada), though they govern an accusative ; e. g.
fUTO HT trdyasva mam, Protect me ! These correspond to the Latin deponents.
Verbs which are used both in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada, take the one or the
other form according as the action of the verb is conceived to be either transitive or reflective ;
e. g. I^firpachati, he cooks ; H^n paehate, he cooks for himself ; •mifn yajati, he sacrifices ;
■Ml 11 yajate, he sacrifices for himself. The same applies to Causals (Pan. 1. 3, 74).
These distinctions, however, rest in many cases, in Sanskrit as well as in Greek, on
peculiar conceptions which it is difficult to analyse or to realize ; and in Sanskrit as well as
in Greek, the right use of the active and middle voices is best learnt by practice. Thus
•ftnf, to lead, is used as Parasmaipada in such expressions as ^fe (qtiMTn gandam vinayati*,
he carries off a swelling ; but as Atmanepada, in 'Sfa fe*Plfl krodham vinayate, he turns
away or dismisses wrath ; a subtle distinction which it is possible to appreciate when stated,
but difficult to bring under any general rules.
Again, in Sanskrit as well as in Greek, some verbs are middle in certain tenses only, but
active or middle in others; e. g. Atm. ^tbl vardhate, he grows, never vardhati; butAor.
^T^Vff avridhat, Par., or ^rf§? avardhishta, Atm. he grew. (Pan. 1. 3, 91.)
Others take the Parasmaipada or Atmanepada according as they are compounded with
certain prepositions; e.g. fulfil visati, he enters; but fifq^in ni-visate, he enters in.
(Pan. 1. 3, 17.)

§ 288. Causal verbs are conjugated both in the Parasmaipada and Atmane
pada. Desideratives generally follow the Pada of the simple root (Pan. 1. 3, 62) .
Denominatives ending in ^TR dya have both forms (Pan. 1. 3, 90). The
intensives have two forms : one in n ya, which is always Atmanepada ; the
other without n ya, which is always Parasmaipada.
§ 289. The passive takes the terminations of the Atmanepada, and prefixes
*T ya to them in the four special or modified tenses. In the other tenses the
forms of the passive are, with a few exceptions, the same as those of the
Atmanepada.
§ 290. There are in Sanskrit thirteen different forms, corresponding to the
tenses and moods of Greek and Latin.

I. Formed from the Special or Modified Base.

Parasmaipada. Atmanepada.
1. The Present (Lat) bhavdmi bhave
2. The Imperfect (Lan) i&F% abhavam abhave
3. The Optative (Lin) bhaveyam vr^if bhaveya
4. The Imperative (Lot) M=(lfa bhavdni bhavai
* Cf. Siddhanta-Kaumudi, ed. Taranatha, vol. 11. p. 256. Colebrooke, Grammar, p. 337.
 138 CONJUGATION.

II. Formed from the General or Unmodified Base.

Parasmaipada. Atmanepada.
5. The Reduplicated Perfect (Lit) *p£T babhdva Twl babhuve
6. The Periphrastic Perfect (Lit) ^TTfW>TOchoraydm babhdva jftuii » choraydmchakre
7. The First Aorist (Lun) ^TTtftm abodhisham wrftrfa abhavishi
8. The Second Aorist (Lun) "WW** abMvam ^rftj^r asiche
9. The Future (Lrit) trftrtrft bhavishydmi «f^r bhavishye
10. The Conditional (Lrin) wrf^ abhavishyam ^wfa'oi abhavishye
1 1 . The Periphrastic Future (Lut) >TftnnftH bhavitdsmi bhavitdhe
12. The Benedictive (As'irlin) vvjit bhilydsam qfofa bhavishiya
13. The Subjunctive (Let) occurs in the Veda only.

Signification of the Tenses and Moods.

$ 291. 1. a. The Present and Imperfect require no explanation. The
Imperfect takes the Augment (^ 299).
3. The principal senses of the Optative are,
a. Command; e.g. ri i|W ^T^K tvam grdmam gachchheh, thou mayest go, Le.
go thou to the village.
b. Wish ; e. g. wnftngnftl bhavdn ihdsita, Let your honour sit here !
c. Inquiring; e.g. ^T>ffafhl ri^mfWq vedam adhiyiya, uta tarkam
adhiyiya, Snail I study the Veda or shall I study logic ?
d. Supposition (sambhdvana) ; e.g. STWBWTH bhaved asau
vedapdrago brdhmanatvdt, he probably is a student of the Veda, because
he is a Brahman.
e. Condition ; e. g. ifefrw *nraVsr fV^^Jjfmi: irsrr: dandaS chen na bhavel
loke vinasyeyur imdh prajdh, if there were not punishment in the world,
the people would perish. *K tjj^ VT!nm| yah pathet sa dpnuydt, he
who studies, will obtain. W^t^H firifr»Wg1t%BTq»n<TC yad yad rocheta
viprebhyas tat tad dadydd amatsarah, whatever pleases the Brahmans
let one give that to them not niggardly.
f. It is used in relative dependent sentences ; e.g. ttw ^WT T ^npfr yach
cha tvam evam kuryd na Sraddadhe, I believed not that thou couldst
act thus, nnrssrc ^tcqt fifoarre^j yat tddris'dh krishnam ninderann
akcharyam, that such persons should revile Krishna, is wonderful.
4. The Imperative requires no explanation, as far as the second person is
concerned ; «. g. ^ tuda, Strike ! The first and third persons are used
in many cases in place of the Optative ; e. g. ^uAlfn »T^T»jliT ichchhdmi
bhavdn bhunktdm, I wish your honour may eat.
5. The Reduplicated Perfect denotes something absolutely past.
 SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES AND THE TEN CLASSES OF VERBS. 139

<5. Certain verbs which are not allowed to form the reduplicated perfect,
form their perfect periphrastically, i. e. by means of an auxiliary verb.
•7. 8. The First and Second Aorists refer generally to time past, and are the
common historical tenses in narration. They take the Augment 299).
9. The Future, also called the Indefinite future ; e. g. ^r^lf^Tfir vrai TOPT.
devas ched varshishyati dhdnyam vapsydmah, if it rain, we shall sow
rice. UTOftani ^IHtfri1 yavaj-jwam annam ddsyati, as long as life
lasts, he will give food. Under certain circumstances this Future
may be used optionally with the Periphrastic Future ; e. g. c&^T Htm
kadd bhofctd or wla^ri bhokshyate, When will he eat T
10. The Conditional is used, instead of the Optative, if things are spoken of
that might have, but have not happened (Pan. in. 3, 139) ; e. g.
♦J^Pa'M^M^mTl^l ^jfaajHMfam^SMtfmMS c^e<^ abhavishyat tadd subhiksham
abhavishyat, if there had been abundant rain, there would have been
plenty. The Conditional takes the Augment 299).
11. The Periphrastic or Definite Future; e.g. ^nfturi T. inmnfti ayodhydm
§vah praydtdsi, thou wilt to-morrow proceed to Ayodhya.
12. The Benedictive is used for expressing not only a blessing, but also a
wish in general ; e. g. <jfl*H<->j*ITiTv srimdn bhuydt, May he be happy !
f%t atfNffiT chiram jtvydt, May he live long !
13. The Subjunctive occurs in the Veda only.
§ 292. The Sanskrit verb has in each tense and mood three numbers,
Singular, Dual, and Plural, with three persons in each.

CHAPTER VIII.

SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES AND THE TEN CLASSES OP VERBS.

$ 293. Sanskrit grammarians have divided all verbs into ten classes,
according to certain modifications which their roots undergo before the
terminations of the Present, the Imperfect, the Optative, and Imperative.
This division is very useful, and will be retained with some slight alterations.
One and the same root may belong to different classes. Thus «T3^ bhrdky
vjTST^ bhlds, bhram, "gW kram, klam, tras, trut, lash belong
to the Bhu and Div classes ; >IT$r^ bhrdkate or ui$i|ri bhrdsyate, &c. (Pan. in.
1, 70). Again, ^ sku, w*^stambh, T^stumbh, Tgsi^skambh, ^n^skumbh belong
to the Su and Kri classes ; ^tfMrf skunoti or ^TtfiT skundti (Pan. in. 1, 82).
T 2
140 SPECIAL AND GENEKAL TENSES AND THE TEN CLASSES OF VERBS.

§ 294. The four tenses and moods which require this modification of the
root will be called the Special or Modified Tenses; the rest the General or
Unmodified Tenses. Thus the root fa chi is changed in the Present,
Imperfect, Optative, and Imperative into fa«j chi-nu. Hence P^h: chi-nu-mah,
we search ; <ofasn achi-nu-ma, we searched. But the Past Participle fan:
chitah, searched, or the Reduplicated Perfect fa^Jt chichy-uh, they have
searched, without the ^ raw. We call fa chi, the root, fa«j chinu, the base
of the special tenses.
$ 295. Verbal bases are first divided into two divisions :
I. Bases which in the modified tenses end in ^ a.
II. Bases which in the modified tenses end in any letter but a.
This second division is subdivided into,
II a. Bases which insert cj nu, 7 u, or ift nt, between the root and the
terminations.
II b. Bases which take the terminations without any intermediate element.

I. First Division.
§ 296. The first division comprises four classes :
1. The Bhu class (the first with native grammarians, and called by them
*qrft bhvddi, because the first verb in their lists is v^bhri, to be).
a. ^ a is added to the last letter of the root.
b. The vowel of the root takes Guna, where possible (i. e. long or short i, u, ri,
if final ; short i, u, ri, li, if followed by one consonant).
■^V budh, to know ; jfafij bodh-a-ti, he knows, vbhu, to be ; vr^ffr bhav-a-ti,
he is.
Note—The accent in verbs of the Bhu class was originally (as we know from the ancient
Vedic language) on the radical vowel ; hence Guna of that vowel.
Many derivative verbs, — such as causatives, HT^rfiT bhdvayati, he causes to be;
desideratives, "^>JJ(ffl bubhushati, he wishes to be, from ^bM; intensives in the Atmane-
pada, "ifoan bebhidyate, he cuts much; and denominatives, rtir^fliMPn lohitdyati, he grows
red,—follow this class.
2. The Tud class (the sixth with native grammarians, and called by them
g<(|(< tudadi, because the first root in their lists is tud, to strike).
a. a is added to the last letter of the root.
b. Before this a, final ^ i and ^ i are changed to ^ iy.
7 u and 4 to uv.
^ ri to ft^ riy.
"%rt to ^ir (§ 110).
Tj^ tud, to strike ; Tgsfit tud-a-ti.
ft ri, to go ; ftqfiff riy-a-ti.
7Wt, to praise ; *j^fw nuv-a-ti.
 SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES AND THE TEN CDASSES OF VEKBS. 141

H mri, to die ; fynri mriy-a-te.

kri, to scatter ; fmtftt kir-a-ti.
Note —The accent in verbs of the Tud class was originally on the intermediate TO a;
hence never Guna of the radical vowel.
3. The Div class (the fourth with native grammarians, and called by them
f^rf^ divddi, because the first root in their lists is div, to play).
a. 7f ya is added to the last letter of the root.
tT^ nah, to bind ; H<$fP(< nah-ya-ti.
"^w budh, to awake ; ^p*Tff budh-ya-te.
Note—The accent in verbs of the Div class is now on the radical vowel ; but there are
traces to show that some verbs of this class had the accent originally on *f ya.
4. The Chur class (the tenth with native grammarians, and called by them
yufy churddi, because the first root in their lists is chur, to steal).
a. to*T aya is added to the last letter of the root.
b. If the root ends in a simple consonant, preceded by TO a, TO a is
lengthened to TOT a.
dal, to cut ; ^irf^fri ddl-aya-ti, (many exceptions.)
c. If the root ends in a simple consonant, preceded by ^ i, T u, ^ ri, <5 li,
these vowels take Guna, while ^ ri becomes ir.
t\r^ Mish, to embrace ; droftl Slesh-aya-ti.
TO^ chur, to steal ; "«fl<*(tTT chor-aya-ti.
W$ mrish, to endure ; JnTTTT marsh-aya-te.
«£rT^ krit, to praise ; VrTfafH Mrt-aya-ti.
d. Final ^ i, \ i, 7 u, ^5 H, ri, and ^ riy take Vriddhi.
fstjri, to grow old; si | *| n fir jrdy-aya-ti.
jft mi, to walk ; iJTTTfll mdy-aya-ti.
V dhri, to hold ; VTCTflr dhdr-aya-ti.
f^pri} to fill; ntJTfir par-aya-ti.
, Note—Many, if not all roots arranged under this class by native grammarians, are
secondary roots, and identical in form with causatives, denominatives, &c. This class differs
from other classes, inasmuch as verbs belonging to it, keep their modificatory syllable TOTI aya
throughout, in the unmodified as well as in the modified tenses, except in the Benedictive
Par. The accent was on the first TO a of TOT dya.

II. Second Division.

J 297.' The second division comprises all verbs which do not, in the
special tenses, end in to a before the terminations.
It is a distinguishing feature of this second division that, before
certain terminations, all verbs belonging to it require strengthening of their
radical vowel, or if they take »j nu, T u, rfr ni, strengthening of the vowels
142 SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES AND THE TEN CLASSES OF VERBS.

of these syllables. This strengthening generally takes place by means of

Guna, but «ft ni is raised to nd in the Kri, and ^ n to na in the Rudh
class.
We shall call the terminations which require strengthening of the
inflective base, the weak terminations, and the base before them, the
strong base ; and vice versa, the terminations which do not require
strengthening of the base, the strong terminations, and the base before
them, the weak base.
Originally the accent fell on the strong terminations, and on the strong
base, thus establishing throughout an equilibrium between base and ter
mination.
II a. Bases which take «J nu, t w, «ft ni.
§ 298. This first subdivision comprises three classes :
1. The Su class (the fifth class with native grammarians, and called by
them yiGj svddi, because the first root in their lists is su) .
a. "g nu is added to the last letter of the root, before strong terminations,
■jft no before weak terminations.
Ex. *J su, to squeeze out; su-nu-majf,, 1st pers. plur. Pres.
tjtftfa su-nd-mi, 1st pers. sing. Pres.
2. The Tan class (the eighth class with native grammarians, and called by
them cHlGj tanddi, because the first root in their lists is ir^tan).
a. T « is added to the last letter of the root, before strong terminations,
^ft 0 before weak terminations.
Ex. iPf tan, to stretch; H»j*T: tan-u-mah, 1st pers. plur. Pres.
fH^fa tan-d-mi, 1st pers. sing. Pres.
Note—All verbs belonging to this class end in except one, ^ kri, efct)fij karomi, I do.
3. The Kri class (the ninth with native grammarians, and called by them
sfijlfy kryddi, because the first root in their lists is jft kri).
a.T(\ni is added to the last letter of the root, before strong terminations,
•TT nd before weak terminations,
»T na before strong terminations beginning with vowels.
Ex. fSt kri, to buy; "^hirNr: kri-ni-mdh, 1st pers. plur. Pres.
■gft^Tfa kri-mS-mi, 1st pers. sing. Pres.
"jfitajfif kri-n-dnti, 3rd pers. plur. Pres.
II b. Bases to which the terminations are joined immediately.
£ 299. The second division comprises three classes :
1. The Ad class (the second class with native grammarians, and called by
them ^iH* adddi, because the first root in their lists is ^ ad, to eat).
a. The terminations are added immediately to the last letter of the base ;
 SPECIAL AND GENERAL TENSES AND THE TEN CLASSES OF VERBS. 143

and in the contact of vowels with vowels, vowels with consonants,

consonants with vowels, and consonants with consonants, the phonetic
rules explained above {§§ 107—145) must be carefully observed.
b. The strong base before the weak terminations takes Guna, where
possible (§ 296, 1, 6).
Ex. fe^ Uh, to lick ; few: tih-mdk, we lick.
wftl leh-mi, I lick.
TTffef lekshi, thou lickest 137).
"pffe lidha, you lick 138).
SHrtd alet, thou lickedst 138).
The intensive verbs, conjugated in the Parasmaipada, follow this class,
a. The Hu class (the third class with native grammarians, and called by
them *j£li<<il<j juhotyddi, because the first root in their lists is ^ hu%
^lfh% juhoti).
a. The terminations are added as in the Ad class.
b. The strong base before the weak terminations takes Guna, where possible.
c. The root takes reduplication. (Rules of Reduplication, j 303.)
Ex. ? hu, to sacrifice ; »pf*T: ju->hu-mdh, we sacrifice.
«J^fa ju-hd-mi, I sacrifice. (Pan. vi. 1, 192.)
3. The Rudh class (the seventh class with native grammarians, and called
by them ^vrf^ rudhddi, because the first root in their lists is rudh,
^irf^r runaddhi, to obstruct).
a. The terminations are added as in the Ad class.
b. Between the radical vowel and the final consonant 7^ n is inserted,
which in the strong base before weak terminations is raised to 7f na.
Ex- ^ yuj, to join ; 4pm yu-n-j-mdh, we join.
TprftiT yu-nd-j-mi, I join.

First Division.
Bhu. class, with native grammarians, Bhvadi, I class.
Tud class, — — Tudadi, VI class.
Div class, — — Divadi, IV class.
Chur class, — — Churadi, X class.

Second Division.
Su class, with native grammarians, Svadi, V class.
Tan class, — — Tanadi, VIII class.
Kri class, — — Kryadi, IX class.
Ad class, — — Adadi, II class.
Hu class, — — Juhotyadi, III class,
Rudh class, — Rudhadi, VII class.
144 AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

CHAPTER IX.

AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

§ 300. Before we can leave the subject which occupies us at present, viz.
the preparation of the root previous to its assuming the terminations, we
have to consider two processes, the Augment and the Reduplication,
modifications of the root with which we are familiar in Greek, and which in
Sanskrit as well as in Greek form the distinguishing features of certain
tenses (Imperfect, Aorist, Conditional, and Perfect) in every verb.
$ 301. Roots beginning with consonants take short ^1 a as their initial
augment. This ^1 a has the accent. Thus from ^ budh, Present qlVlfa
bodhdmi ; Imperfect 'enrtv dbodham.
Roots beginning with vowels always take Vriddhi, the irregular
result of the combination of the augment with the initial vowels. (Pan. vi.
1, 90.)
a with a, or d, = "BTT d.
*B a with ^ i, ^ i, ^ e, or ^ ai, — 7* ai.
a with ■g- u, 4, ^sft 0, or ^ au, = au.
?T a with ^ ri, or ^ ri, = dr.
From arch, ^ntfir archati, he praises, ?rr#i^ drchat, he praised.
From iksh, ikshate, he sees, iNpT aikshata, he saw.
From und, d hP»t unatti, he wets, ^PT<^ aunat, he wetted.
From ^ ri, ^afil richchhati, he goes ^rraTiT drchchhat, he went.
In the more ancient Sanskrit, as in the more ancient Greek, the augment
is frequently absent. In the later Sanskrit, too, it has to be dropt after the
negative particle »rr md (Pan. vi. 4, 74). HT «*T,ffi^ md bhavdn kdrshit.
Let not your Honour do this! or m W "sg^n^md sma karot, May he not do it!

Reduplication.
§ 30a. Reduplication takes place in Sanskrit not only in the reduplicated
perfect, but likewise in all verbs of the Hu class. Most of the rules of
reduplication are the same in forming the base of the perfect of all verbs,
and in forming the special base of the verbs of the Hu class. These will be
stated first ; afterwards those that are peculiar either to the reduplication
of the perfect or to that of the verbs of the Hu class.
The reduplication in intensive and desiderative verbs and in one form
of the aorist will have to be treated separately.
 AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS. 145

General Rules of Reduplication.

$ 303. The first syllable of a root (i. e. that portion of it which ends
with a vowel) is repeated.
budh — ^^bubudh. vf^bhu" is exceptional in forming ^t^babM. (Pan.
vii. 4. 73-)
§ 304. Aspirated letters are represented in reduplication by their cor
responding unaspirated letters.
fa^ bhid, to cut, = fafi*^ bibhid.
v dM, to shake, = ?V dudM.
§ 305. Gutturals are represented in reduplication by their corresponding
palatals ; ^ h by mj, (Pan. vn. 4, 62.)
oST hut, to sever, = Uhi chukut.
khan, to dig, = chakhan.
7T*T gam, to go, = »PT*T jayam.
^ Aas, to laugh, = *f%^jahas.
§ 306. If a root begins with more than one consonant, the first only is
reduplicated.
"3j3i^ krus, to shout, = chukrus.
ffep^ kship, to throw, = f^ftjt^ chikship.
§ 307. If a root begins with a sibilant followed by a tenuis or aspirated
tenuis, the tenuis only is reduplicated.
stu, to praise, = tushfu ($ 103, 1).
stan, to sound, rfW^ tastan.
^oiyt spardh, to strive, = rj^n^paspardh.
to stand, = iTWT tasthd.
^TT Schyut, to drop, = "raffl chuschyut.
But smri, to pine, = sasmri.
§ 308. If the radical vowel, whether final or medial, is long, it is
shortened in the reduplicative syllable.
ilTZffdh, to enter, = *F\T^jagah.
■aft kri, to buy, = ftraft chikrt.
fl? sud, to strike, = *p7| sushiid.
§ 309. If the radical (not final) vowel is ^ e or ai, it becomes ^ i ; if it.
is ^ft 0 or ^ au, it becomes 7 u.
ifr^ sew, to worship, = ftPT^ sishev.
dhauk, to approach, = dudhauk.
$ 310. Roots with final ^ e, ^ ai, ^ft 0, are treated like roots ending in
^TT d, taking ^1 a in the reduplicative syllable.
V dhe, to feed, = 31ft dadhau.
*r gai, to sing, = ^^tjagau.
^ft so, to sharpen, = 5T$TT Sasa?i.
v
146 AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

§ 311. The following roots are slightly irregular on account of the

semivowels which they contain, and which are liable to be changed into
vowels. (This change is called Samprasdrana.) Pan. vi. i, 17.
Root. 1 st Pers. Sing. Redupl. Perf. Weak Form*. Weakest Formf-
7T5T yaj — iydja, to sacrifice, (for <w«f yaydja.) ****
VF{ vach = uvdcha, to speak. (t^ mcA.)
vad — ^x^ uvdda, to say. ud.)
vap = 'sjsrw uvdpa, to sow. {■3\up.)
^3T vas = m^l tivdsa, to wish. (73T MS.)
^ vas = TTPH uvdsa, to dwell. ^ MS. ("3^ US.)
srg vah — uvdha, to carry.
^it vay | = }<M uvdya, to weave. orgr^Mt; II. (»«•)
^T^ vyach = r<HJH vivydcha, to surround.
ar<^ vyadh — f%*«mi vivyddha, to strike. f^f^vividh. (f^vidh.)
*ir*rvwa£A = f%«iriT vivyathe (Pan. vn. 4,68). f^T^ vivyath. favfvyath.)
^■tj swap = 4jt*iw sushvdpa, to sleep. ?rin^ sushup. {^\sup.)
fig wi = 5T$TR kusdva, to swell If.
^ vye = farm vivydya, to cover. 0* »*.)
sip jyd = f**C5q\ jijyau, to grow old. ftpft/yf. WW
^ Ave = >J^ra juhdva, to call (Pan. vi. 1, 33).
vix^pydy = f^pipye, to grow fat (Pan. vi. 1, 29). frrift (tft
grah = *mr% jagrdha, to take.
§ 31a. Roots beginning with short a, and ending in a single consonant,
contract a + a into ^rt d.
^fil arf, to eat, = ^rr^ dd.
§ 313. Roots beginning with short a, and ending with more than one
consonant, prefix ^n»^ dn.
^T"t arcA = ^rr«H^ anarch. (Also ^rsiv «s (Su), anas'e) Pan. vir. 4, 73.
§ 314. Roots beginning with ^ i or 7m (not prosodially long), contract ^ + ^
i + i and 7 + + into ^ i and 4 ; but if the radical \ i or tii take
Guna or Vriddhi, T^y and are inserted between the reduplicative syllable
and the base. (Pan. vi. 4, 78.)

* The weak forms appear in all persons of the reduplicated perfect where neither Vriddhi
nor Guna is required.
t The weakest forms of these verbs do not belong to the reduplicated perfect, but have
been added as useful hereafter for the formation of the past participle, the benedictive, the
passive, &c.
t "Z^vay is a substitute for =T»e,inthe reduplicated perfect (Pan. 11. 4, 41). If that sub
stitution does not take place, then ^ ve forms vavau, "^X vavvh (Pan. vi. 1, 40).
|| Pan. vi. 1, 38, 39. IT Or fifPfW sihdya (Pan. vi. 1, 30).
 AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS. 147

^ ish = f^r: ish-atuh, they two have gone.

= ^5fa iy-esh-a (Guna), I have gone.
■3^ ukh = 3WTTt Okh-atuh, they two have withered.
= 3T^to uv-okh-a (Guna), I have withered.
§ 3 r5- The root ^ ri forms the base of the reduplicated perfect as ^rrt dr.
Other roots beginning with ri prefix ^m^ an. (Pan. vn. 4, 71.)
rij, to obtain, =^rPp^ dn-rij.
As to roots which cannot be reduplicated or are otherwise irregular, see the
rules given for the formation of the Reduplicated and Periphrastic Perfect.
Special Rules of Reduplication.
§ 316. So far the process of reduplication would be the same, whether
applied to the bases of the Reduplicated Perfect or to those of the Hu class.
But there are some points on which these two classes of reduplicated bases
differ ; viz.
1. In the Reduplicated Perfect, radical ^ ri, whether final or medial,
are represented in reduplication by a.
a. In the bases of the Hu class, final ri and ^ ri (they do not occur as
medial) are represented in reduplication by ^ i.
Reduplicated Perfect. Hu Class. Present, &c.
J? bhri, to bear, = wrt babhdra. >J bhfi = ftwffT bibharti.
^ sri, to go, = TTtrrc sasdra. ^ sri = ftrtrfft sisarti.
5 hri, to take, = *[%u.jahdra. <| hri — ^^fft jiharti.
The root ^ ri, to go, forms ^irfS iy-arti; ^pri, to fill, ftrafff piparti.
§ 317. The three verbs fVrs^ wy, f&[vij, and f^^vish of the Hu class take
Guna in the reduplicated syllable. (Pan. vn. 4, 75.)
fif*^ nij, to wash, q*rf%> nenekti, irfalfi nenikte ; fas^ vij, to separate, ^ffts
vevekti ; vish, to pervade, %^ftr veveshti.
J 318. The two verbs mmd, to measure, and hd, to go, of the Hu class
take ^ i in the reduplicative syllable. (Pan. vn. 4, 76.)
»n fH*flrf mimite; ?T M, fs^tjf jihite.
§ 319. Certain roots change their initial consonant if they are reduplicated.
^Aom, to kill, ^frrx^jaghdna. Likewise in the desiderative fworrffijighdmsati,
and the intensive ■zpfafc jahghanyate. (Pan. vn. 3, 55.)
fir hi, to send (Su), ftprrn jiffhdya. Likewise in the desiderative ftrrrhtfiT
jighishati, and the intensive ^trfant jeghiyate. (Pan. vn. 3, 56.)
fsfji, to conquer, fvfrjxqjigdya. Likewise in the desiderative f»i 1 fl M fri jigtshati ;
but not in the intensive, which is always $t*ft*nijejiyate. (Pan. vn. 3, 57.)
fa chi, to gather, has optionally ff^rPT chichdya or P«i<*ni chikdya. The same
option applies to the desiderative, but in the intensive we have ^Hfarw
chechiyate only. (Pan. vn. 3, 58.)
u2
 148 AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS.

Terminations.
§ 320. After having explained how the verbal roots are modified in ten
different ways before they receive the terminations of the four special tenses,
the Present, Imperfect, Optative, and Imperative, we give a table of the
terminations for the special or modified tenses and moods.
$ 331. The terminations for the modified tenses, though on the whole the
same for all verbs, are subject to certain variations, according as the verbal bases
take a (First Division), or tj nu, T u, fft ni (Second Division, A.), or nothing
(Second Division, B.) between themselves and the terminations. Instead of
giving the table of terminations according to the system of native gramma
rians, or according to that of comparative philologists, and explaining the
. real or fanciful changes which they are supposed to have undergone in the
different classes of verbs, it will be more useful to give them in that form
in which they may mechanically be attached to each verbal base. The
beginner should commit to memory the actual paradigms rather than the
different sets of terminations. Instead of taking 'srr^T dthe as the termination
of the and pers. dual Atm., and learning that the ^it d of ^rrif dthe is changed
to ^ i after bases in "sr a (Pan. vn. 2, 81), it is simpler to take 3^ ithe as
the termination in the First Division ; but still simpler to commit to memory
such forms as ^ftir bodhethe, f^FTPI dvishdthe, ftmvj mimdthe, without asking
at first any questions as to how they came to be what they are.

First Division.
Bh4, Tud, Div, and Chur Classes.
Parasmaipada. Atmanepada.
Present. Imperf. Optative. Imperat. Present. Imperfect. Optative. Imperative.
1. 'Wfa ami JTIiyam ^rfrTani ^i ^i iya ^e
2. ft? si :# ^: ih — * il se Vi: thdh ithdfc ^ sva
3. "fif /* ITi ^if ij tu* Tt te W ta JJfita HT tdm
i.^C.avah ^C%ava ^ iva ^Tofaca ^n^avahe TSiltV avahi ^f^ivahi avahai
3,H\ thah "ft tarn IJXitam it tarn ^ ithe ithdm j^m 1 "qi iydthdm, J^Hl ithdm
3. tT.tah 7TT tdm ^iTT itdm 7TT tdm Jit ite ^irf itdm iydtdm Jjfi itdm
1. '!&H',amah'^ftamaJi*iima ^Wama v^amahe ■*m?^amahi s*t?^imahi vii^ amahai
2. tha K ta ita cf ta J*t dhve S«i dhvam JU( idhvam dhvam
nti %*jliyuh •Jnfn nte •ST nta JTj^iran ♦?Tf ntdm

* In the second and third persons TTTK tdt may be used as termination after all verbs, if
the sense is benedictive.
 AUGMENT, REDUPLICATION, AND TERMINATIONS. 149

Second Division.
Su, Tan, Kri, Ad, Hu, and Rudh Classes
Parasmaipada Atmanepada.
Present. Imperfect. Optative. Imperative. Present. Imperfect. Optative. Imperative.
i Z i
fir* ydm f^fiya . at

2. VX.ydh ft hi* ^ se TO thdh pn: ithdh ^ sva

fflti V ~*K\ydt rite rl ta KT tdm

1. vah WT^dva I vahe vahi $^fig foaAt vilely dvahai

2. HI tkah it tarn VJfi ydtam Tt tarn
3. Tit tah HT turn VWydtdm KT tdm ^STffffte ^rnria^ni ^SXKltydtdm "KITST dtdm
1. M\ mah' 1 ma VX*{ ydma maAe ff? mahi fmaAi vtm^amaAa
2. ^ £fta ft TTW y<fta TT <a rfAre tStdhvam idheam t4 dhvam
3. ^fkanft't WTan J y«A ^Sff <mf« ||
The terminations enclosed in squares are the weak, i. e. unaccented
terminations which require strengthening of the base.
§ 32a. By means of these terminations the student is able to form the
Present, Imperfect, Optative, and Imperative in the Parasmaipada and
Atmanepada of all regular verbs in Sanskrit ; and any one who has clearly
understood how the verbal bases are prepared in ten different ways for
receiving their terminations, and who will attach to these verbal bases the
terminations as given above, according to the rules of Sandhi, will have no
difficulty in writing out for himself the paradigms of any Sanskrit verb in
four of the most important tenses and moods, both in the Parasmaipada and
Atmanepada. Some verbs, however, are irregular in the formation of their
base ; these must be learnt from the Dhatupatha.

* The Su and Tan classes take no termination, except when T u is preceded by a conjunct
consonant.
t Hu class and WTOT abhyasta, i. e. reduplicated bases, take ^rfir ati.
% Hu class, reduplicated bases, and vid, to know, take Tt uh, before which, verbs
ending in a vowel, require Guna. Tt uh is used optionally after verbs in 'WT o, and after
■fV^tfowft, to hate. (Pan. ill. 4, 109—112.)
|| Hu class and reduplicated bases take ^TjJ atu.
 150

8
<53 J
IS
1— ^
if
1&t
-<S.

<

a
< m
CD «
«3 ft
if

ft
e

=0

4
p
OS
i

oo
M e3 £| |?|
151
152
 153

■2 Se
5
IP9

P •<5S

CD
3 a «s»
■< i—i
If J J
«

a s
K9

m
I
os
s
1= ft t
4 1
ti »i ill! £l rl

^1 Kl £ I ssl n *5 ri »j pi

X
154

■fcl
b
a
I If fife 1 1 I lit t

4)

J*8
Ml 1

I -Ci B
i
X

<
Q
<
Pn Pi ill Ml
H 0)
<X>
<
Eh £.1 E! «"fl f£l

BS3
B

11 tit lit! if filial

"a
s
tit I If

s B
in B S3
« •s -S
B 5> c 8 lr-9«
> E£ fir,! If I *! m ri « n

Tea
o •5 B |U9r.
 155

•8

•5

*4

•• g —
"Ski
tCLTt
'i

w
r1

a A
« S5
9
A *1
H*O
O si / 8 rt- t4
S e3 6 IE 5 1i *
X 2
156
 157

ri *i n £1
158 GENERAL OB UNMODIFIED TENSES.

CHAPTER X.
GENERAL OE UNMODIFIED TENSES.
§ 323. In the tenses which remain, the Reduplicated Perfect, the Peri
phrastic Perfect, the First and Second Aorist, the Future, the Conditional,
the Periphrastic Future, and Benedictive, the distinction of the ten classes
vanishes. All verbs are treated alike, to whatever class they belong in the
modified tenses ; and the distinguishing features, the inserted ^ nu, 7 w, «ft ni,
&c, are removed again from the roots to which they had been attached in
the Present, the Imperfect, the Optative, and Imperative. Only the verbs
of the Chur class preserve their aya throughout, except in the Aorist
and Benedictive.
Reduplicated Perfect.
§ 324. The root in its primitive state is reduplicated. The rules of
reduplication have been given above. 303—319.)
§ 325. The Reduplicated Perfect can be formed of all verbs, except
1. Monosyllabic roots which begin with any vowel prosodially long but
"5 a or ^tt a: such as ^ id, to praise; W^edh, to grow; fy^indh, to light;
"Z^und, to wet. ^^richchh and urnu are excepted.
2. Polysyllabic roots, such as "M<*T^ chakds, to be bright.
3. Verbs of the Chur class and derivative verbs, such as Causatives,
Desideratives, Intensives, Denominatives.
§ 326. Verbs which cannot form the Perfect by reduplication, form the
Periphrastic Perfect by means of composition. 340.)
So do likewise day, to pity, &c, ay, to go, ^rt^ as, to sit down
(Pan. in. 1, 37), oRi^ kds, to cough (Pan. in. 1, 35) ; also TRR^kati, to shine
(Sar.); optionally T^ush, to burn, (^ftai oshdm), f^vid, to know, (fa^T viddm),
*R*[jdgri, to wake, (»TT»rcT jdgardm, Pan. in. 1, 38) ; and, after taking redupli
cation, vft bht (frpnri bibhaydm), 5ft hri (f^fvUjihraydm), >j bhri (ftwTT bibhardm),
and g hu ("J^T juhavdm, Pan. in. 1, 39).
The verb Urnu, to cover, although polysyllabic, allows only of *^HN
urnundva as its Perfect.
^flgr richchh, to fail, although ending in two consonants, forms only
OT>T3$ dnarchchha.
Terminations of the Reduplicated Perfect.
Singular.
a *e

jyt itha fjk ishe

^ a He
 GENERAL OR UNMODIFIED TENSES. 159

Dual.
i. ^ iva ivahe
a. ^rg: athuh
3- ^nr: atuh
Plural.
i. ima imahe
a. a %tit idhve or ^ idAwe
3- 3". tt£ ire
These terminations are here given, without any regard to the systems of
native or comparative grammarians, in that form in which they may be
mechanically added to the reduplicated roots. The rules on the omission of
the initial ^ i of certain terminations will be given below.
$ 337. The accent falls on the terminations in the Parasmaipada and
Atmanepada, except in the three persons singular Parasmaipada. In these
the accent falls on the root, which therefore is strengthened according to the
following rules :
1. Vowels capable of Guna, take Guna throughout the singular, if followed
by a consonant.
fa^ bhid, f%»r^ bibhed-a, f%*rf^i bibhed-itha, bibhed-a.
TO budh, ^sftV bubodh-a, ^rtftrq bubodh-itha, ^TtV bubodh-a.
But *f\\jfo, a long medial vowel not being liable to Guna, forms ftpfN
jijiv-a, f if) fa vj jijiv-itha, ftpfta jijiv-a.
2. Final vowels take Vriddhi or Guna in the first, Guna in the second,
Vriddhi only in the third person singular.
<ft ni, fiprni nindy-a or fVRTj ninay-a, frRftre ninay-itha, fHHIM nindy-a.
3. a if followed by a single consonant, takes Vriddhi or Guna in the first,
Guna in the second, Vriddhi only in the third person singular.
U«T han, *fWRjaffhdtina or Wttjaghan-a, *wfamjaghan-itha, 'Wtp^jaghdn-a.
Note—If the second person singular Parasmaipada is formed by 1 tha, the accent falls on
the root ; if with itha, the accent may fall on any.syllable, but generally it is on the
termination. In this case the radical , vowel may, in certain verbs, be without Guna,
ftp^w}', f%^5f viveja, but ftrf^ftfl vivijitha. (Pan. 1. 2, a; 3.)
§ 328. As there is a tendency to strengthen the base in the three persons
singular Parasmaipada, so there is a tendency to weaken the base, under
certain circumstances, before the other terminations of the Perfect, Parasmai
and Atmanepada. Here the following rules must be observed:
1. Roots like Vj^pat, i. e. roots in which 'sr a is preceded and followed by a
single consonant, and which in their reduplicated syllable repeat the
initial consonant without any change (this excludes roots beginning
with aspirates and with gutturals; roots beginning with ^ v, and
160 GENERAL OR UNMODIFIED TENSES.

§as* and ^ dad are likewise excepted), contract such forms as

Tprjr papat into Tftr pet, before the accented terminations, (including
itha, Pan. vi. 4, 120, 131.)
Unpack, xnioTO papahtha, but vfcdt pechitha, vfam pechima, v^l pechuh.
rP^ tan, rtfaxf tenitha, rffHH tenima, tenuh.
2. Roots mentioned in 31 1 take their weak form.
vah, T^T? uvdha, *f^H uhima.
cp^ uacA, •^TT uvdcha, Hchuh.
Note—The roets T£H ^ />&aZ, H^&Aa/, <^-*rap, TST%srath (Pan. VI. 4, 122). and
*T>J rarfA, in the sense 'of killing' (123), from their Reduplicated Perfect like Vftjiat. The roots
Stiff, V^bhram, and ^^<ras (124), may do so optionally; and likewise Iffl^phan, XXS^rdj,
aT»T bhrdj, HTS^Mras, *5{bhlas, W^syam, ^[^svan.
3. The roots Tt^gam, ^han, Hajari, ^r^khan, rp^ ghas drop their radical
vowel. (Pan. vi. 4, 98.)
Jrq[ gam, *piqri jagmatul}.
han, vfRWijaghnatuh.
Mare, Hi chakhnatuh.
tr^ ghas, mflR jakshatuh.
4. Roots. ending in consonants preceded by a nasal (Pan. 1. a, 5), such as
month, 5^ srams, &c, do not drop their nasal in the weakening
forms. Ex. 3rd pers. dual : >hNtt: mamanthatuh ; Tr&ii sasramse.
5. The verbs ^sr^^ranth, granth, i^dambh, and svanj, however, may be
weakened, and form srethatuh, ^yjwi grethatuh^ %*tTtl debhatuh, TOTt)
sasvaje (loss of nasal and e, cf. Pan. 1. 2, 6, v.). But according to some
grammarians the forms ^Ttftnp Sa&ranthatuh &c. are more correct.
§ 329. Roots .ending in d, and many roots ending in diphthongs, drop
their final vowel before all terminations beginning with a vowel (Pan. vi. 4, 64).
In the general tenses, verbs ending in diphthongs are treated like verbs
ending in ^rt d.
The same roots take au for the termination of the first and third
persons singular Parasmai.
da, ^ dad-au, dad-iva, dad-athuh, ?[f^r dad-ire.
% mlai, ttjtt maml-au, nf*M maml-iva, nmml-athuh, »T%T maml-ire.
Except ^ vye, 3T hve, etc.; see §311.
§ 330. Roots ending in ^ i, ^ 2, ^ n, if preceded by one consonant, change
their vowels, before terminations beginning with vowels, into jt y, ^ r.

* f^TTrfirfir ^tif^ (T ^rf^ ^r?I rl J I ri iT-M Prl I Prasada, p. 13 a. In a later passage

the Prasada (p. 17 b) decides for both, ^T^sas and fJH^sas.
 THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i. 161

If preceded by more than one consonant, they change their vowels into
^ iy, ^ ar *.
Roots ending in 7 u, ~m u, change these vowels always into uv.
Most roots ending in ^ ri, change the vowel to ^ ar (Pan. vn. 4, 1 1).
1 9fi, •PTCj: jagaratuh t.
5ft ni, f#rf««l<f niny-iva, we two have led.
fzt Sri, f^iftrfVr? sihriy-iva, we two have gone.
^ kri, ^JK^: chakr-athuh, you two have done.
W stri, WWR$ tastar-athuh, you two have spread.
3 Vu> l£f^r yuyuv-athuh, you two have joined.
stu. jm vj: tushtuv-athuh, you two have praised.
^ #rz, *nsr^j: chakar-athuh, you two have scattered.

CHAPTER XI.
THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i.
§ 331. Before we can proceed to form the paradigms of the Reduplicated
Perfect by means of joining the terminations with the root, it is necessary
to consider the intermediate ^ i, which in the Reduplicated Perfect and in
the other unmodified tenses has to be inserted between the verbal base and
the terminations, originally beginning with consonants. The rules which
require, allow, or prohibit the insertion of this form one of the most
difficult chapters of Sanskrit grammar, and it is the object of the following
paragraphs to simplify these rules as much as possible.
The general tendency, and so far the general rule, is that the terminations
of the unmodified or general tenses, originally beginning with consonants,
insert the vowel ^ i between base and termination ; and from an historical
point of view it would no doubt be more correct to speak of the rules which
require the addition of an intermediate ^ i than (as has been done in $ 326)
to represent the ^ i as an integral part of the terminations, and to give the
rules which require its omission. But as the intermediate ^ i has prevailed
in the vast majority of verbs, it will be easier, for practical purposes, to
state the exceptions, i. «. the cases in which the ^ i is not employed, instead
of defining the cases in which it must or may be inserted.

* ^ ri forms the perf. ^TTC dra, 3rd pers. dual ^SlXjrt aratuh. richchh forms
viirfoa dnarchchha, 3rd pers. dual WHJwKJ dnarchchhahth. (Pan. vn. 4, 11.)
t In 3|srf, <|<W, and ~^pri a further shortening may take place; ST^ITJJ iaiaratuh
being shortened to ?TWI! safratuh, &c. (Pan. vn. 4, 12.)
Y
162 THE INTERMEDIATE \ i.

One termination only, that of the 3rd pers. plur. Perf. Atm., ^cire, keeps the
intermediate ^ i under all circumstances. In the Veda, however, this ^ i, too,
has not yet become fixed, and is occasionally omitted; e.g. duduh-re.
Let it be remembered then, that there are three points to be considered:
1. When is it necessary to omit the ^ i?
2. When is it optional to insert or to omit the ^ i ?
3. When is it necessary to insert the \ i?
For the purposes of reading Sanskrit, all that a student is obliged to know
is, When it is necessary to omit the ^ i ? Even for writing Sanskrit this
knowledge would be sufficient, for in all cases except those in which the
omission is necessary, the ^ i may safely be inserted, although, according
to views of native grammarians, it may be equally right to omit it. A
student therefore, and particularly a beginner, is safe if he only knows the
cases in which ^ i is necessarily omitted, nor will anything but extensive
reading enable him to know the verbs in which the insertion is either
optional or necessary. Native grammarians have indeed laid down a number
of rules, but both before and after Panini the language of India has
changed, and even native grammarians are obliged to admit that on the
optional insertion of ^ i authorities differ ; that is to say, that the literary
language of India differed so much in different parts of that enormous
country, and at different periods of its long history, that no rules, however
minute, would suffice to register all its freaks and fancies.
Taking as the starting-point the general axiom (Pan. vn. 2, 35) that
every termination beginning originally with a consonant (except ^ y) takes
the ^ i, which we represent as a portion of the termination, we proceed to
state the exceptions, i. e. the cases in which the ^ i must on no account be
inserted, or, as we should say, must be cut off from the beginning of the
termination.
$ 332. The following verbs, which have been carefully collected by native
grammarians (Pan. vn. 2, 10), are not allowed to take the intermediate 3[ i in
the so-called general or unmodified tenses, before terminations or affixes begin
ning originally with a consonant (except r^y) . (Note—The reduplicated perfect
and its participle in ^ vas are not affected by these rules ; see § 334.)
1. All monosyllabic roots ending in ^rt d.
2. All monosyllabic roots ending in ^ i, except f<x Sri, to attend (21, 31) * ;
ftg Svi, to grow (23, 41). (Note —for smi, to laugh, must take ^ i in
the Desiderative. Pan. vu. 2, 74.)
3. All monosyllabic roots ending in ^ t, except "ft di, to fly (22, 72; 26, 26.
anuddtta), and 3ft St, to rest (24, 22).
* These figures refer to theDhltup&thainWestergaard's Radices Linguae Sanscrite, 1841.
 THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i. 163

4. All monosyllabic roots ending in 7 u, except ^ yu, to mix (24, 23 ; not

31, 9) ; *f ru, to sound (34, 34); «J »«, to praise (24, 26; 28, 104?) ;
^ kshu, to sound (24, 27) ; SjOT kshnu, to sharpen (24, 28). M snu, to
flow (24,29), takes in Parasmaipada (Pan. vn. 2, 36). (Note—
stu, to praise, and *J sw, to pour, take ^ i in the I. Aorist Parasmaipada.
Pan. vir. 3, 72.)
5. All monosyllabic roots ending in ^ri, except ^ vri, to choose (31, 38).
Important exception: in the Fut. and Cond. in ^ sya, all verbs in
^ ri take ^ i (Pan. VII. 2, 70).
^ svri, to sound, may take ^ i (Pan. vn. 2, 44). >J Mn, t° carry, may
take ^ i in the Desider. (Pan. Vit. 2, 49). ^ri, to regard, ^ dhri, to
hold, and ri, to go, take ^ i in the Desider. (Pan. vn. 2, 74, 75)*
In the Benedictive and I. Aorist verbs ending in ^ ri and beginning with
a conjunct consonant may take ^ i (Pan. vn. 2, 43).
6. All monosyllabic roots ending in ^ e, $ ai, 0.
Therefore, with few exceptions, as mentioned above, all monosyllabic roots
ending in VQwels, except the vowels 4 and ~%rl, must not take 5 i.
7. Of roots ending in ^ k, ^r«P Sak, to be able (26, 78; 27, 15).
8. Of roots ending in \ch, fj^pach, to cook (23, 27); ^ vach, to speak
(24, 55) ; ig^much, to loose (28, 136) ; fq^sich, to sprinkle (28, 140) ;
fc^ rich, to leave (29, 4) ; vich, to separate (29, 5).
9. Of roots ending in chh, jf^ prachh, to ask (28, 120). It must take
3[ i in the Desider. (Pan. vn. 2, 75).
10. Of roots ending in wj, svanj, to embrace (23, 7) ; tyaj, to leave
(23, 17) ; sanj, to adhere (23, 18) ; *T5^bhaj, to worship (23, 29) ;
t»T ranj, to colour (23, 30 ; 26, 58) ; tts^ yaj, to sacrifice (23, 33) ;
fVr^rei/, to clean (25, 11); fz&^vij, to separate (25, 12; not 28, 9, or
29, 23) ; [Kas'. mryi~\ ; to meditate (26, 68), to join
(29, 7); *rsj srij, to let off (26, 69; 29, 121) ; «^ bhrajj, to bake
(28, 4, except Desider.) ; majj, to dip (28, 122) ; ruj, to
break (28, 123) ; >pT bhuj, to bend (28^ 124), to protect (29, 17);
»T5T bhanj, to break (29, 16).
11. Of roots ending in ^ d, ^ had, to evacuate (23, 8) ; skand, to step
(23, 10) ; ^ ad, to eat (24, 1) ; pad, to go (26, 60) ; khid,
to be distressed (26, 61; 28, 142; 29, 12); f^vid, to be (26, 62);
fi^ svid, to sweat (26, 79) ; 5^ tud, to strike (28, 1) ; ^ nud, to
push (28, 2; 28, 132); ^ sad, to droop (28, 133); ^ Sad, to perish
(28, 134); f^vid, to find (28, 138? 29, 13; not 24, 56); fa^ bhid,
to cut (29, 2) ; ftc^ chhid, to divide (29, 3) ; sj^r kshud, to pound
(29, 6).
164 THE INTEBMEDIATE ^ i.

12. Of roots ending in ^ dh, budh, to know (26, 63) ; ip^yudh, to fight
(36, 64) ; -^rudh, with spj am, to love (26, 65), to keep off (29, 6) ;
TT^ rddh, to grow (26, 71 ; 27, 16) ; «r*T vyadh, to strike (26, 72) ;
1£V £rwdA, to be angry (26, 80) ; «pr kshudh, to be hungry (26, 81),
except Part. ^vjfkshudhita and Ger. BfftraT kshudhitvd (Pan. vn. 2, 52) ;
sni^ sw^A, to clean (26, 82); fa>^*i<tt, to succeed (26, 83); snvsatfA,
to achieve (27, 16) ; ^rvbandh, to bind (31, 37).
13. Of roots ending in f^n, ^ han, to kill (24, 2), except the Fut. and Cond.
(Pan. vir. 2, 70) ; likewise its substitute ^ badh ; »T«T man, to think
(26, 67}.
14. Of roots ending in i^p, frwtip, to pour (10, 1?) ; *Ttf srip, to go (23, 14) ;
TUT tap, to heat (23, 16; 26, 50); ^p^^ap, to swear (23,-31; 26, 59);
7«J vap, to sow (23, 34) ; svap, to sleep (24, 60) ; 'STPT dp, to reach
(27, 14); ft^ kship, to throw (28, 5); %?, to cut (28, 137);
ffPT lip, to anoint (28, 139) ; ^ chhup, to touch (28, 125). (Note—
jp^ trip and drip, which are generally included, may take ^ i,
according to Pan. vn. 2, 45.)
15. Of roots ending in >^ bh, t?t rabh, to desire (23, 5) ; <5>^ labh, to take
(23, 6); xp^yabh, coire (23, 11).
16. Of roots ending in «T m, T*{ ram, to play (20; 23) ; T*f warn, to incline
(23, 12) ; TfH yam, to cease (23, 15). But these three take \ i in Aor.
Par. (Pan. vn. 2, 73). v^gam, to go (23, 13), but it takes ^ i before
of Fut., Cond., and Desider. Par. (Pan. vu. 2, 58). Also "gm /cram,
to step (13, 31), in Atm. (Pan. vu. 2, 36).
1 7. Of roots ending in sr s, sj3T kms", to shout (20, 26) ; to see
(23, 19); to bite (23, 20); fc53i fts, to be small (26, 70;
28, 127) ; f^Sf dis, to show (28, 3) ; ^31 rui, to hurt (28, 126); fir^rii,
to hurt (28, 127); 5^31 spris, to touch (28, 128) ; fgs^rii, to enter
(28, 130) ; vs^mriS, to rub (28, 131).
18. Of roots ending in \sh, e^^krish, to draw (23, 21 ; 28, 6) ; fi^ tvish,
to shine (23, 32) ; fg^ dvish, to hate (24, 3) ; fas vish, to pervade
(25, 13), to separate (31, 54; not 17, 47); ^ push, to nourish
(26, 73 ; not 1 7, 50) ; 5T^ 6ush, to dry (26, 74) ; Tp^ tush, to please
(26, 75) ; dush, to spoil (26, 76) ; fisr^ slish, to embrace (26, 77) ;
fy^sish, to distinguish (29, 14); fq^pish, to pound (29, 15).
19. Of roots ending in ^ s, ^ vas, to dwell (23, 36), except Part. tOm:
ushitah and Ger. 9ft(ffl ushitvd (Pan. vn. 2, 52) ; $rAas, to eat
(17, 65, as substitute for ^ ad).
20. Of roots ending in ^ h, ^ ruh, to grow (20, 29) ; dah, to burn
(23, 22) ; fir^ mih, to sprinkle (23, 23) ; ^ vah, to carry (23, 35) ;
 THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i. 165

duh, to milk (24, 4; not 17, 87); ftf? dih, to smear (24, 5);
f<5^ lih, to lick (24, 6) ; ^ reaA, to bind (26, 57).
§ 333- Other roots there are, which must not take 5 i in certain only of
the general tenses.
A. In the future (formed by wi ta), the future and conditional (formed by
sya), the desiderative, and the participle in it ta (Pan. vn. 2, 15; 44),
the verb Tgr^klip must not take ^ i, if used in the Parasmaipada. (Pap.
vu. 2, 60.)
•|P^ klip, to shape, Fut. ^ran kalptd, Fut. JFFWfir kalpsyttti, Cond. ^rar^r^
akalpsyat; Desid. f-ciettrHr chiklipsati; Part. igw. kliptab.
B. In the future and conditional (formed by sya), the desiderative base,
and the participle in it ta, the following four verbs must not take ^ i,
if used in the Parasmaipada. (Pan. vn. 2, 59.)
^ vrit, to exist, Fut. m&fit vartsyati, Cond. ^r^fiT avartsyat ; Desid.
f^wfiT vivritsati; Part, nit: vrittah. (Pan. vn. 2, 15; 56.)
ytf vridh, to grow, Fut. sjftfffrf vartsyati, Cond. ^RioH^ avartsyat ; Desid.
ftrsjwfir vivritsati; Part, ^f: vriddhab.
syand, to drop, Fut. ^rsrfif syantsyati, Cond. ^t^STTT asyantsyat ;
Desid. ftt^fi^rfrT sisyantsati ; Part, ^r^: syannah.
W^&ridh, to hurt, Fut. ^fiBffir Vartsyati, Cond. ^n^it asartsyat ; Desid.
fjfisrwfir siSritsati ; Part. Sriddhab.
C. In the desiderative bases, and in the participle in it ta, monosyllabic
roots ending in T u, 'a H, ~% ri, ~%ri, and grah, to take, and jt^ guh,
to hide, do not take ^ i. (Pan. vn. 2, 12.)
* bhti, to be, ^rqfjr bubhdshati ; Part, hit: bhittah,.
^raA, fsr^^fiT jighrikshati; Part. 'T^hr: grihitab (long 2 by special
rule, cf. Pan. vn. 2, 37).
JJ^ £tmA, yg^fit jughukshati; Part, JT«n gAdhab (cf. Pan. vn. 2, 44).
(Verbs ending in ~%ri, and ^ »ri are liable to exceptions. See § 337.
Pan. vn. 2, 38-41.)
D. Participial formations.
1. Roots which may be without the ^ i in any one of the general tenses,
must be without it in the participle in it ta.
(Remark that the participle in it ta is most opposed, as the reduplicated
perfect is most disposed to the admission of ^ i.)
Monosyllabic roots ending in 7 u, 4, ri, ^ ri, do not take ^ i before
the participle in IT ta, nor before other terminations which tend to
weaken a verbal base. (Pan. vn. 2, 11.)
3 yu, to join, ipr: yu-tah, ^(T^TH yu-tavdn, yu-tvd. (Pan. vn. 2, 11.)
166 THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i.

14, to cut, 7gr. M-nah, <£TWT^ 14-navdn, ^farr Id-tva. (Except ^ pu,
$335. 11.6.)
^ vri, to cover, ^n: vri-tah, '^ri^R vri-tavdn, vri-tvd.
JTT^ ^aA, to enter, may form (Pan. vn. a, 44) the future as iirfcffl gdh-i-td
or JTRT gddhd ; hence its participle gddhah only.
to protect, may form (Pan. vn. a, 44) the future iftftmT gop-i-td or
ifrHT gop-id; hence its participle Tpn guptah only,
a. Roots which by native grammarians are marked with technical d or
^ 1 do not take ^ i in the participle in K ta. (Pan. vu. a, 14, 16.) *
5firf, to sweat (marked as faffcq^i nishvidd) ; fenT svinnafy.
p5»T laj, to be ashamed (marked as wfcrttf olaji) ; <4Hi lagnah.
List of Participles in K ta or na which for special reasons and in special
senses do not take ^ i.
ftl to go ; fenr: lri/a#, fztm kritvd. (Pan. vn. a, 1 1.) See § 33a, a.
fa to swell ; sj«T: &2na$. (Pan. vn. a, 14.) See § 33a, a.
^PT kshubh, to shake; spc kshubdhah, if it means the churning-stick. (Pan.
vn. a, 18.) See § 33a, 15.
^(waii, to sound; ^(TJC svdntah, if it means the mind.
dhvan, to sound ; StjTir. dhvdntah, if it means darkness.
55^ too/, to be near ; 3"Tt lagnah, if it means attached.
mlechchh, to speak indistinctly ; %K mlishtah, if it means indistinct,
f^tw virebh, to sound ; faftw: viribdhah, if it refers to a note.
HiT!T phan, to prepare ; Hife phdntah, if it means without an effort,
qnr vdh, to labour ; ~^rz: vddhah, if it means excessive.
v^tftruA, to be confident; vg: dhrishtah, if it means bold. (Pan. vn. a, 19.)
ft $1*1 flisos, to praise ; f<4$|fei: viSastah, if it means arrogant.
rfriA, to grow ; dridhah, if it means strong. (Pan. vn. 2, ao.)
tjft^^arimA, to grow; rjxx^: parivridhah, if it means lord. (Pan. vn. a, 31.)
?ir^ Aa*A, to try ; oire: kashtah, if it means difficult or impervious. (Pan. vn.
a, 33.)
^ ghush, to manifest; Tp: ghushtah, if it does not mean proclaimed.
(Pan. vn. 3, 33.)
^ ard, with the prepos. sam, fVf rai, f% «i, arnnah ; wrist: samarnnah,
plagued. (Pan. vn. 3, 34.)
ar<?, with the prepos. ^rfa aMi ; wrt: abhyarnnah, if it means near.
(Pan. vn. 3, 35.)
cp^ prif (as causative), vrittah, if it means read.
* fa<^ mid, to be soft, though having a technical d, may, in certain senses, form its
participle as *ff^TTt meditah or fa^t minnaJt (Pan. vli. 2, 17). The same applies to all verbs
marked by technical d.
 THE INTERMEDIATE 167

Intermediate \ i in the Reduplicated Perfect.

§ 334. The preceding rules, prohibiting in a number of roots the ^ i for all
or most general tenses, do not affect the reduplicated perfect. Most of the
verbs just enumerated which must omit in all other general tenses, do not
omit it in the perfect. So general, in fact, has the use of the ^ i become
in the perfect, that eight roots only are absolutely prohibited from taking it.
These are (Pan. vii, a, 13),
1. e£ kri, to do, (unless it is changed to skri), 1st pers. dual MiJ^f chakri-va ;
but ttagRfo samchaskariva ; and pers. sing. ^rarft*I samchaskaritha.
2.9mto go, sasri-va.
3. w bhri, to bear, ^»pr babhri-va.
4. ^ vri ("ws^vrin and ^ vrin*), to choose, Par. vavri-va\, vavar-tha;
Atm. vavH-vahe, vavri-she.
5. ^ stu, to praise, TT^ tushtu-va. iisfa tushto-tha.
6. 'J dru, to run, ^jj^ dudru-va. dudro-tha.
7. i£ sru, to flow, susru-va. susro-tha.
8. ^ £/k, to hear, srsr^ ^rw-va. srsfftf hisro-tha.
§ 335. In the second person singular of the reduplicated perfect Par. the
before tha must necessarily be left out,
1. In the eight roots, enumerated before. (The form ^§ vavar-tha, however,
being restricted to the Veda, mftvi vavaritha is considered the right
form.)
2. In roots ending in vowels, which are necessarily without in the future
(iTT td), Pan. vii. 3, 61. See § 33a, where these roots are given.
*n yd, to go ; Fut. *rnn ydtd; inn yayd-tha.
f% chi, to gather; Fut. chetd; Pmmh chiche-tha.
3. In roots ending in consonants and having an a for their radical vowel,
which are necessarily without ^ i in the future (m td), Pan. vii. 2, 63.
See § 332, where these roots are given.
VF^pach, to cook; Fut. xrfji^a^a; trinf^r papak-tha.
But ^rafff krishati, he drags; Fut. ^iih karshtd; ^roRf^i chakarsh-i-tha.
(Bharadvaja requires the omission of ^ i after roots with ^[ ri only, which
are necessarily without ^ i in the future (Pan. vn. a, 63), except root ri
itself, j Hence he allows tjp«<¥( pechitha, besides q«^+v| papaktha ; ^nftrq
iyajitha, besides ^inr iyashtha.)

* ^*{vrin, (27, 8) ^TtET varane, Su. ^un'ri, (34, 8) -«ii=k.<i) dvarane, Chur. y^cWn,
(31' 38) fHw sambhaktau, Kri.
t The form qqf*.^ vavariva, which Westergaard mentions, may be derived from another
root ^ ari, the rule of Panini being restricted by the commentator to ^rrin and vrin.
168 THE INTERMEDIATE ^ i.

4. All other verbs^ ending in consonants with any other radical vowel but
a, require ^ i, and so do all verbs with which ^ i is either optional
or indispensable in the future (WT td).
Exceptions :
1. In *T5^ srij and "^sr dris, the omission is optional.
^ srij, ^r^rff sasrashtha, or traftpi sasrijitha.
2. The verbs ^rf% atti, ^jff arti, ^nrfir vyayati must take 3^ i.
^ ad, ^TTf^T dd-i-tha, (exception to No. 3.)
fi, "fllftn dr-i-tha, (exception to No. 2.)
^ vye, f^rarftr^ vivyay-i-tha, (exception to No. 3.)

Tables showing the cases in which the intermediate \i must be omitted between
the Unmodified Moot and the Terminations of the so-called General
Tenses, originally beginning with a Consonant, except ^ y.
§ 336. In these tables K ta stands for the Past Participle ; son stands
for the Desiderative ; 5gj sya for the Future and Conditional ; HT td for the
Periphrastic Future ; ftr^r sich for the First Aorist; lin for the Benedictive.

I. For all General Tenses, except the Reduplicated Perfect,

Omit \ i,
1 . Before ft Ja, san, ^ sya, KT td, ftra sich, for lin :
In the verbs enumerated $ 333.
2. Before w ta, n^san, ^tr sya, «rr td:
In jm&lip, if Parasmaipada. ^ 333, A.
3. Before it ta, m{ san, sya :
In gir vrit, wridA, ^q^ syand, 3IV sVia'A, if Parasmaipada. $ 333, B.
4. Before K ta, ^ saw .-
In monosyllabic verbs ending in "3« u, ri, jj^r grah, and ^ guh.
§ 333> C.
5. Before w to :
a. All verbs which bynative grammarians are marked with ^nd, ^i, or ^4*.
b. The verb Sri and others enumerated in a general list, $ 333, D.
II. For the Reduplicated Perfect,
Omit ^ i,
1. Before all terminations, except ^ ire? »
In eight verbs, mentioned $ 334.
2. Before ^ tha, 2nd pers. sing. :
All verbs of $ 332 ending in vowels.
All verbs of $ 332 ending in consonants with ?T a as radical vowel.
* The technical ^fi u shows that in the other general tenses the ^ i is optional. § 335, 1.
 THE INTERMEDIATE \i. 169

Optional Insertion of \ i.
§ 337* For practical purposes, as was stated before, it is sufficient to
know .when it would be wrong to use the intermediate ^ i; for in all other
cases, whatever the views of different grammarians, or the usage of different
writers, it is safe to insert the ^ i.
As native grammarians, however, have been at much pains to collect
the cases in which ^ i must or may be inserted, a short abstract of their
rules may here follow, which the early student may safely pass by.

^ i may or may not be inserted :

I. Before any drdhadhdtuka (i. e. an affix of the general tenses not requiring
the modified verbal base) beginning with consonants, except ^ y :
1. In the verbs ^svri; Per. Fut. gftBT svar-i-td, or svartd, &c.
(Pan. vii. 2, 44.) (Except future in ^ sya, qftlfil svarishyati only.
Pan. vii. 2, 70.)
?^ sti (as Ad and Div, not as Tud), Ttfkm sav-i-td, or Titan sotd, &c.
v^dM (not as Tud), vfWl dhav-i-td, or xhwt dhotd, &c. (Except aorist
Parasmaipada, which must take ^ i. Pan. vii. 2, 72.)
2. In all verbs having a technical 3i H. (Pan. vii. 2, 44.) UTS gdh, Per.
Fut. Jiif^riT gdh-i-td, or Jim gddhd. (See $ 333, D. 1.)
But anj (though marked ^*r^ anjd) must take 3[ * in the I. aorist.
(Pan. vii. 2, 71.) «sir»T«j: dnjishuh.
3. In the eight verbs beginning with ttw radh. (Pan. vii. 2, 45.)
(26, 84) ttt radh, to perish, rfxim radh-i-td, or tST raddhd.
(26, 85) tf3T nas, to vanish, ^rf^Iin nak-i-td, or ifer namshtd.
(26, 86) ^ trip, to delight, nfihn tarp-i-td, or tt&T tarptd, or ^ht traptd.
(26, 87) ^ rfrip, to be proud, ^fihn darp-i-td, or ^ih darptd, or ■5m draptd.
(26, 88) "5? rfrwA, to hate, jftf^iTT droh-i-td, or "^VT drogdhd, or ■^feT drodhd.
(26, 89) »jir jmwA, to be bewildered, JrrfjrflrmoA-i-fti, or ^mnmogdhd, or tfcsimodhd.
(26. 90) ^ji srawA, to vomit, %Dr^ril snoh-i-td, or WPVT snogdhd, or ifhjl snodhd.
(26. 91) swiA, to love, ^f^Trr sneh-i-td, or wvr snegdhd, or sneclhd.
According to some this option extends to the reduplicated perfect: but
this is properly denied by others.
4. In the verb kush (Chur class), preceded by f^/iir; but here ^ i is
necessary in the participle with IT ta. (Pan. vii. 2, 46; 47.)

^ i may or may not be inserted :

II. Before certain drdhadhdtukas only :
1. Before drdhadhdtukas beginning with J^t:
In the verbs ^ ish (Tud only), 5fT| sah, lubh, ^ rush, ft^ rish.
(Pan. vii. 2, 48.)
170 THE INTERMEDIATE

2. Before drdhadhdtukas beginning with ^ s, but not in the aorist :

In the verbs ^nr krit, to cut ; ^ chrit, to kill ; ^ chhrid, to play ;
trid, to strike ; nrit, to dance. (Pan. vii. a, 57.)
3. Before the termination of the desiderative base san) :
In the verb ^ rri, and all verbs ending in ~%ri. (Pan. vii. 2, 41.)
In the verbs ending in ^ iv, and in ridh, «^ bhrasj, ^>T dambh,
for sVi, ^ ^ yw, grit urnu, »| £Ari (Bhu class), ^T^jnap, *PT saw ;
also iP^ fara, Vfit pat, ^ft^I daridrd. (Pan. vii. 3, 49.)
4. Before the terminations of the benedictive (ft?^ tin) and I. aorist
(ftn^ sicA) in the Atmanepada :
In the verb ^vri, and all verbs ending in ri (Pan. vii. 2, 42). The
^ ri is changed into ^ ir or gr^ J&\
In verbs ending in ^ n and beginning with a conjunct consonant.
(Pan. vn. 2, 43-)
5. Before the gerundial termination f»a :
In verbs having a technical 7 u. (Pan. vn. 2, 56.)
saw {^pr &amu), $|fHHI Samitvd or $|MI kdntvd.
6. Before the gerundial termination iva* and the participle in ft /a :
In the verb fprai^ Wi*". (Pap. vix. 2, 50.)
f&tyril klisitvd or ffifT klishtvd, f^rf^nR klisitalj. or fgre: klishtab.
In the verb (Pan. vn. 2, 51.)
TrfaraT pavitvd or xr^T putvd, vfalC. pavitah or tnr: p'dtah. It must
take ^ i in the desiderative (Pan. vn. 2, 74).
7. Before the participial terminations tt ta or if wa*:
In the verbs ^ rfam, to tame, ^hn ddntdlj. or ^finr: damitah. (Pan. vn.
2, 27.)
5P^ Ja»w, to quiet, ^riiH hdntab. or ^ifaw: samitah.
^.pllr, to fill, ijjih purnah or qfui: pdritah.
3^ aas, to perish, ^r: dastajj, or ^rftfiTt ddsitah.
W^spaS, to touch, TO spashtafr or WT%1K spdSitah.
chhad, to cover, chhannah or STft^R chhdditab.
^^jnap, to inform, ^w.jnaptah or SffiriTC jnapitah.
^ mA, to hurt, rushtah or ^ftir: rustdtafy. (Pan. vn. 2, 28.)
?!*^ am, to go, ^TTTn a»ifa# or irftnrc amitalj..
jaR. tvar, to hasten, Hrnah, or Hft.ii: tvaritah.
*hr^ san-ghush, to shout, ?Nin sanghushtab or w^farf: sahghushitah.
(See $ 333, D. 2.)
'flU-M (toan, to sound, Wiyiri: dsvdntah or ^IwfHrt: dsvanital}. (See
$ 333. D- »•)
* See also § 333, D. 2, note.
 THE INTERMEDIATE ^ L 171

5^ hrish, to rejoice, 5?: hrishtah or JRIS hrishitah, if applied to

horripilation. (Pan. vu. a, 39.)
^nrftr apa-chi, to honour, WTrfVlH apachitah or WTWlftnTC apachdyitah* .
8. Before the participle of the reduplicated perfect in ^ vow :
In the verbs ir^ yam, to go, »iO*f*)l ^jagmivdn or STir^^/offarawara t-
han, to kill, 'A ftl q \i\Jaghnivan or »| *M I i\Jaghanvdn.
R^ uirf, to know, f=l fa 1 ^ vividivdn or r=ff^"jS R vividvdn.
RS^ vis", to enter, RRf^RR^ vivUivdn or rr^str^ vivi&vdn.
"^3^ am, to see, (j^fijNIH dadrisivdn or <j£«ai«^ dadrihidn.

Necessary Insertion of \ i.
$ 338. ^ i must be inserted in all verbs in which, as stated before, it is
neither prohibited, nor only optionally allowed (Pan. vu. 3, 35). Besides
these, the following special cases may be mentioned:
1. Before ^ vas, participle of reduplicated perfect :
In the verbs ending in d (Pan. vu. a, 67). rn pd, v^X\papivdn.
In the verbs reduced to a single syllable in the reduplicated perfect
(Pan. vu. a, 67). ^rai as", to eat, ^HlfSMIv^ dHvdn.
In the verb tr^ ghas, to eat, 'Sifynif^jakshivdn.
Other verbs reject it.
3. Before sya of the future and conditional:
In all verbs ending in ^ ri, and in ^ han (Pan. vu. a, 70). In JPT gam,
if used in the Parasmaipada (Pan. vu. a, 58).
3. Before the terminations of the I. aorist (ftrax«icA):
In the verbs siu, ?| su, v^dhil in the Parasmaipada (Pan. vu. a, 7a).
Thus from ^stu, to praise, First Aorist (First Form) , SMWiOm* astdvisham ;
but in the Atmanepada, vS«1Pm astoshi.
4. Before the terminations of the desiderative (*R^ san) :
In the verbs SB krt, i^gri, ^ dri, v dAri, and v&prachh (Pan. vu. 3, 75);
and in ir^ yam, if used in the Parasmaipada (Pan. vu. 3, 58).
In the verbs fR smi, ^p4, ^ ri, ^c^anj, and ^rs^as". (Pan. vu. 3, 74.)
5. Before the gerundial faa and the participial termination tt ta. (Pan.
vu. 3, 53-54-)
In the verbs was, to dwell ; kshudh, to hunger ; anch, to
worship; T^lubh, to confound (Dh. P. 38, 33).
6. Before only :
In ^JTh to grow old; ^s^was'cA, to cut. (Pan. vu. 3, 55.)
7. Before ^ Ma, 3nd pers. sing, reduplicated perfect :
In w ad, to eat ; ^ ri, to go ; ^ vye, to cover, ^ifym dditha, against
$ 335> 3 5 <nft*l dritha, § 335, 3, note ; foqftpi vivyayitha.
* Pan. vu. 2, 30. t P&n. vu. 2, 68.
Z 3
172 THE INTERMEDIATE \i.

§ 339- The vowel 35 i thus inserted is never liable to Guna or

Vriddhi.
Insertion of the long ^ i.
§ 340. Long ^ 1 may be substituted for the short when subjoined to a
verb ending in ^ ri, also to ^ vri, except in the reduplicated perfect, the
aorist Parasmaipada, and the benedictive. (Pan. vn. 2, 38-40.)
i£ tri; Per. Fut.. TT^m taritd or frfon taritd, &c; but Perf. 2nd pers. sing,
itfbl teritha; I. Aor. Par. 3rd pers. plur. ^rinft*n atdrishuh; Bened.
3rd pers. sing, (rftflls tarishishta*.
^ vri; Per. Fut. «rfhn varitd or ffiun varitd; but Perf. ^rfiw vavaritha;
Aor. Par. ^Rrftgt avdrishuh; Bened. sfttfhj varishishta.
§ 341. In the desiderative and in the aorist Atm. and benedictive Atm.
these verbs may or may not have ^ i (Pan. vn. 2, 41—42), which, if used, is
liable in the aorist Atm. to be changed to ^ i.
J^tri; Des. frfrffimriT titarishati; frfrfflnfir titarishati; finfttfiT titirshati ; Aor.
Atm. Wtufta atarishta, *nnfhl atarishta, and JTlfti atirshta; Bened.
rtfliflg tarishishta, TrWftr tirshishta.
"^vri; Des. (VqflVil vivarishate; vivarishate; "^^kvuviirshate; Aor.
Atm. «rerft? avarishta, ^<<08 avarishta, and "sr^r avrita; Bened. clfmls
varishishta, ^ctB vrishishta.
The verb ^raA, too, takes the long ^ i, except in the reduplicated
perfect, the desiderative^ and certain tenses of the passive. (Pan. vn. 2, 37-)
JX^grah; Per. Fut. ?TChn grahitd; Inf. ?r?^ grahitum; but Perf. ipjf^H

Periphrastic Perfect.
§ 342. Verbs which, according to $ 325, cannot form a reduplicated perfect,
form their perfect by affixing ^t{dm (an accusative termination of a feminine
abstract noun in d) to the verbal base, and adding to this the reduplicated
perfect of eg kri, to do, ^ bM, to be, or as, to be.
^ und, to wet, 1<*K, ^»J^, "aiTT, unddm chakdra, babMva, dsa.
^S^chakds, to shine, TOPHI M <*!*., ^J5, ssTTf, chakdsdm chakdra, babMva, dsa.
>ffrni bodhaya, to make known, «ftvri 'VJT, TOTO, bodhaydm chakdra,
babMva, dsa.
After verbs which are used in the Atmanepada, the auxiliary verb ^ kri
is conjugated as Atmanepada, but as and v^bM in the Parasmaipada.
Hence from ^ewr edhate, he grows,
^VT MtR edh-dm chakre; but =r»j^ babMva and ^TO a«a.
In the passive all three auxiliary verbs follow the Atmanepada.
* The forms given in the Calcutta edition of Panini VII. 2, 42, iO«fl« vartsMshfa,
wO'fiK starlshishta, are wrong. (See Pan. vn. 2, 39.)
 PARADIGMS OP REDUPLICATED PERFECT. 173

5 343. Intensive bases which can take Guna, take it before dm;
desiderative bases never admit of Guna. (§ 339.)
■^t^ioJM, frequentative base of w bhd, ^ftrai nut bobhav-dm chakdra.
But ■yftftr^ bubodhish, desiderative base of ^ budh, 34ft flmi ^ofcK &c.
bubodhishdm chakdra &c

Paradigms of the Reduplicated Perfect.

1. Verbal bases in d, requiring intermediate ^ i.
VT dhd, to place.
Parasmaipada. Atmanbpada.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL. SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
I. Sfift dadhau •rftnr
dadhiva dadhima dadhe dadhivahe dadhimahe
f '^VtH dadhdtha or
3."
ItfWUdadhitha* dadhathuh dadha dadhishe dadhdthe dadhidhve
3- dadhau
dadhatuh dadhuh dadhe dadhdte dadhire
2. Verbal bases in 5^ t and ^f, preceded by one consonant, and requiring intermediate ^ i.
•ft n(, to lead.
f r«i«tlM nindyaot ftrf«m
L f*i«i<4 ninaya ninyiva ninyima «tnye ninyivahe ninyimahe
f r«i^<i ninetha or f«PT*j: ftrf^^or°|(§io5)
L f^PTfiTOiinayifia* ninyathuh ninya ninyishe ninydthe ninyidhve or -$i»e
3. r«iniM nindya
ninyatuh ninyuh ninye ninyire
3. Verbal bases in ^ ri, preceded by one consonant, and requiring intermediate ^ i.
^ dAri, to hold.
J^VRrfarfMra or
dadhriva dadhrima dadhre dadhrivahe dadhrimahe
dadhartha* ^ftr^ ^VT^ cfftW or °|
dadhrathuh dadhra dadhrishe dadhrdthe dadhridhve or -dhve
3. ^VTC dadhdra
dadhratuh dadhruh dadhre dadhrdte dadhrire
4. Verbal bases in ^ ri, preceded by one consonant, not admitting intermediate ^ i.
iri, to do.
■»i<*l<. chakdra or
chakriva chakrima chakre chakrivahe chakrimahe
2. chakartha
c.hakra chakrishe chakrdthe chakridhve
3. 1+K chakdra
chakratuh chakruh chakre chakrdte chakrire
* § 335. 2> and § 335, 3, note f-
 174 PARADIGMS OF REDUPLICATED PERFECT.

5. Verbal bases in ^ i or ^ (, preceded by two consonants, and requiring intermediate ^ i.

"rft kri, to buy.
J P-tiam chikrdya or
' [ f^aiM chikraya chikriyiva chikriyima chikriye chikriyivahe chikriyimahe
f f-MWN chikretha or
2" [f^aifim chikrayitha chikriyathuh chikriya chikriyishe chikriydthe chikriyidhve or -dhve
3. P«ih«Im chikrdya f*riwr$: f^ftsg: f%fgra tefftnfk
chikriyatuh ehikriyuh chikriye chikriydte chikriyire
6. Verbal bases in "3u or "35 m, preceded by one or two consonants, and requiring intermediate ^i.
~$yu, to join.
J •J'n^ yuydva or $3^^
'I yuyava yuyuviva yuyuvima yuyuve yuyuvivahe yuyuvimahe
2. Vqnpi yuyavitha*
yuyuvathuh yuyuva yuyuvishe yuyuvdthe yuyuvidhve or -dAce
3. ^Miq yuydva
yuyuvatuh yuyuvuh yuyuve yuyuvdte yuyuvire
7. Verbal bases in 7 «, preceded by one or two consonants, and not admitting the intermediate ^i.
^iT stu, to praise.
J iJBN tushtdva or
' I 38<4 tushtava tushtuva tushtuve tushtumahe
2. '(Jtfl'H tushtotha t 3ft
tushtuvathuh tushtuva tushtushe tushtuvdthe tushtudhve
3. ri8N tushtdva
tushtuvatuh, tushtuvuh tushtuve tushtuvdte tushtuvire
8. Verbal bases in ^ ri, preceded by too consonants, and requiring intermediate ^ i,
sfri, to spread.
f tastdra or
' L rTCTT tastara tastariva tastarima tastare tastarivahe tastarimahe
2. n« 4 tastartha irenc^: rim Treifo^ or °f
tastarathuh tastara tastarishe tastardthe tastaridhve or -etoe
3. mil tastdra •rear irwrrk
tastaratuh tastaruh tastare tastardte tastarire
9. Verbal bases in ^J,r*> requiring intermediate ^ »'.
W, to scatter.
ie»l< chakdra or
■•{:
L^^R chakara chakariva chakare chakarivahe chakarimahe
2. ^3Sft*r chakaritha 'Eraft^ TTO^ *nsft£ or °|
chakarathuh chakara chakarishe chakardthe chakaridhve or -dhve
3. "<««»l*. chakdra
chakaratuh chakaruh chakare chakardte chakarire
* If 3 y» is taken from Dhatupatha 31, 9, it may form ««Tl"«l yuyotha. (See § 335, 2, and
Westergaard, Radices, p. 46, note.)
t Bharadvaja might allow glfta tushtavitha even against Pan. vn. 2, 13.
 PARADIGMS OF REDUPLICATED PERFECT. 175

io. Verbal bases in consonants, requiring intermediate ^ i

tud, to strike.
AA\f{ tutoda {Hjf^
tutudiva tutudima tutude iwtudivahe tutudimahe
giftfovt tutoditha f^T'
tutudathuh tutoda tutudishe tntuddthe tutudidhve
ijn\<; tutoda ^nj^3»
tutudatuh, tutuduh tutude tutuddte tutudire

ii. Verbal bases in consonants, having f e, and requiring intermediate ^ i.

tan, to stretch.

j_ nnH tatana tenwa tenima tene tenimahe

2. flfixi tenitha 7R
tenathuh tena tendfAe tenidhve
3. ririlH tatdna wg: rt H ri TTRT
tenatuh tenuh tene tendte ienire

ases in consonants, having Samprasdrana, and requiring "5^ i.

*T3^ya/, to sacrifice.
J ^[TR iy4/'a or
fjima ijivahe ijimahe
J ^Tff iyashtha or
ijathuh Cfa (jishe (jdthe tjidkte
3. ^TPT iya)'a $m &
tjatuh tjuh tjdte

13. Verbal bases in consonants, requiring contraction, and intermediate ^ i.

F'T Aon, to kill.
J »TTRjaghdna or *rftpf MThH STH MflHt* *?1\h\
' [!T$ifjaghana jaghniva jaghnima jaghne jaghnivahe jaghnimahe
fnfrfjaghanthaoT »nr*j: 1* »Tftr^ «rffc«i
' 1 WfjftVQjaghanitha jaghnathuh jaghna jaghnishe jaghndthe jaghnidhve
3. »(VM jaghdna IHfjt ^Hp
jaghnatuh jaghnuh jaghne jaghndte jaghnire

14. Verbal base *T6Atf (irregular).

1. •%Xj*babhuva T»jf%H WMf<H^ ^^Tmh^
babhuviva babhuvima babhuve babhuvivahe babhummahe
2. V^^babhuvitha "^JT^: ^»ff^ *P£n^ «T»jfTU»or0^
babhuvathuh babh&va babhuvishe babhuvdthe babhuvidhveor-dhve
3. V^tbabhuva *r*nn^ *>jf&
babhuvatuh babhuvuh babhuve babhucdte babhuvire
176 STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF THE VERBAL BASES

CHAPTER XII.
STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OP THE VERBAL BASES
IN THE SIX REMAINING GENERAL TENSES.
$ 344. It may be useful, without entering into minute details, to dis
tinguish between two sets of general tenses, moods, and verbal derivatives,
which differ from each other by tt tendency either to strengthen or to weaken
their base. The strengthening takes place chiefly by Guna, but, under
special circumstances, likewise by Vriddhi, by lengthening of the vowel,
or by nasalization. The weakening takes place by shortening, by changing
ri to ^ ir, by Samprasarana, or by dropping of a nasal. There are many
roots, however, which either cannot be strengthened or cannot be weakened,
and which therefore are liable to change in one only of these sets. Some
resist both strengthening and weakening, as, for instance, all derivative bases,
causatives, desideratives, and intensives (in the Atm.), which generally have
been strengthened, as far as their bases will allow, previously to their taking
the conjugational terminations.
The first set comprises : The second set comprises :
1. The Future, 1. The Participle in it ta (unless it takes
a. The Conditional. intermediate ^ i),
3. The Periphrastic Future. a. The Gerund in I^T tvd (unless it takes
4. The Benedictive Atmanepada. intermediate ^ i).
(Except bases ending in conson. 3. The Passive.
or ^ ri, and not taking interm.
^t. Pan. I. 2, II; 12. VII. 2,42.) 4. The Benedictive Parasmaipada.
5. The First Aorist, I. II. 5. The First Aorist, IV.
(Except First Aor. II. Atm. of 6. The Second Aorist.
verbs ending in conson., ^ ri, or
(Except verbs in ^ r»» &c)
Note—Among derivative verbs, causatives strengthen theirbase,intensives do not strengthen
it, and desideratives admit of both, according to general rules to be stated hereafter.
I. Root. Base Future. Conditional. Per. Fut Ben. Atm. First Aor. L II.
strengthened. (Except bases ending in
cons, not takingintern.
^T>rfa?Atm.
bM bho bhavishyati abhavishyat bhavitd bhavishishta abhavishta
(Wftfte)
tud tod totsyati atotsyat tottd (tutsishta) atautstt

dev devishyati adevishyat devitd devishishta adevit

chur choray chorayishyati achorayishyat chorayitd chorayish(shfa

•irftuT
kar karishyati akarishyat karitd karishishta akdrit
 IN THE SIX REMAINING GENERAL TENSES. 177

I
ra M soshyati asoshyat sotd soshishta atdvtt
rTftnirfrl ■•il ri fn
tan tern tanishyati atanishyat tanitd tanishishta a/anft or afanft
V\
kri kre kreshyati akreshyat kretd kreshtshta akraishit
*\
dvish dvesh dvekshyati advekshyat dveshtd (dviksMshta)
t it ftWl
ku ho hoshyati ahoshyat hotd hoshishta ahaushit
*x ttwrfir
rudh rodh rotsyati arotsyat roddhd (ru<s&Afa) arautsSt
f Caus. oSR^
kdray kdrayishyati akdrayishyat kdrayitd kdrayishishta
f
chikirsh chikirshishyati achikirshishyat chikirshitd chikirshisMshta achik(rsMt
T int.^ttfh^ ^fru^ w^frftrrn fruftftrm 'qaflftiM'lg warH^is
jtr* chekrty chekriyishyate achekriyishyata chekriyitd chekriyishUhta achekriyishta
II. Root. Base Part, "iffa, Ger.WTtoa, Passive. Ben. Par. "Second Aor. First Aor. IV.
not strengthened, without^*. without 5 and II. Atm.

bhutah bUtvd bhuyate bUy&t abhut

3?
fed tuttvd tudyate tudydt atutta
*t
Wr WrnaA Kr<»a kiryate kirydt aUrshta
^TJT.dyutah Qri 1 dydtvd ^Huff divyate1 4\<*\lfljl(vydt
Vp'.pushtah igppushtvd V^Cifpushyate w*i\tipus}iydt wvnriapushat
(■■ftfor.) (^§7rT)
{choray) (cAorcVaA) (chorayitvd) (choryate) (chorydt) achuchurat
1 1 frfT
sutah suyate suydt
•nn KfTT4 ttrin
tan Jan & <a tatah tanyate atata
nft
kritah kritvd kriyate kriydt
1* fire: fg%\ fg"<*rrt
dvish dvish dvishtah dvishtvd dvishyate dvishydt advikshat
I I jr. Jr*T
hu hutah hutvd huyate huydt
1 Or ^ 2 § 143. 3 See rules on the formation of the passive base.
4 Or rifHril tanitvd. 8 Or JTPT& tdyate.
178 STRENGTHENING AND WEAKENING OF THE VERBAL BASES

rudh rudh ruddhah ruddhvd rudhyate rudhydt arudhat aruddha

^ Caus. «»l*,'M <M<jTHr4l
kri kdray kdritah kdrayitvd kdryate kdrydt achikarat
f Des.f^*^ fVcflffrr. Mflffai r^chi^ r-^cfl^iri
kri chikirsh chiktrshitah chikirshitvd chikirshyate chikirshydt
int.^w^ <iaiin<ii: Mrtlfrwi
kri chekriy chekriyitah chekriyitvd
§ 345. Certain roots which strengthen their base in a peculiar manner, by
Vriddhi, like ijs^ wry, by lengthening, like JTS ^wA, by transposition, like
*ry, by changing ^ i into ^TT a, hke f»r mi, by nasalization, like «ni wa^,
drop all these marks of strengthening, in the weak forms.
I. Root. Base Future. Conditional. Per. Fut. Ben. Atm. First Aorist.
strengthened.

mrij mdrkshyati amdrkshyat mdrshtd mdrjishishta amdrkshit

or MlOrjHjrrr HlHrlrll
mdrjishyati amdrjishyat mdrjitd (mrikshhhta) amdrjft

ffuh ghokshyati aghokshyat godhd (ghukshishta)

or "jf^TfiT
guhishyati aguhishyat guhitd guhishishta aguhit
cm
*TV sraj srakshyati asrakshyat srashtd asrdksMt
ft m* Trefh?
mi md mdsyati amdsyat mdtd mdstshta amdsit
M>
Mi nami nahkshyati anahkshyat namshtd

srams srams sramsishyate asramsishyata sramsitd sramsishishta asraThsishta

*i *l
bandh bandh bhantsyati abhantsyat banddhd abhdntsit
II. Root. Base Part. ft <o, Ger. rftT fix?, Passive. Ben. Par. Sec.Aor. FirstAor.IV.
not strengthened, without ^t. without ^i. and II. Atm.
^ T"l f: ^7
mry mry mrishtah mrishtvd mrijyate mrijydt
^ ^ ^ w »J^ft
yuh guh gudhah gudhvd guhyate guhydt aghukshat

1 Pan. vii. 2, 114. 2 Pan. vi. 4, 89. 3 Pan. vi. 1, 58.

4 Pan. vi. 1, 50. 6 Pan. vn. 1, 60. 6 Pan. vi. 4, 24.
7 But with ^ i, ♦niVim mdrjitvd, not iHnni marjitvd.
8 As to the long ^> jZ, see § 128.
 IN THE SIX REMAINING GENERAL TENSES. 179

«r»>' grij srishtah srishtvd srijyate srijydt

ft ft ftnn ftrWT
mt mt mitah mitvd miyate meydt
TO
nai nai nashtah nashtvd nas'yate nasydt anasat

srams sras srastah srastvd srasyate srasydt asrasat

bandh badh baddhah baddhvd badhyate badhydt

Note—The verbs beginning with Atrf (Dhatupatha 28, 73—108) do not strengthen
their base ; £m£, to be bent, Fut. ^fijuifd kutishyati, Per. Fut. ^ fifH I fcttftftfc Fust Aor.
*3ra;^ft^atafr (Pan. I. 2, 1). fts^ry, to fear, never takes Guna before intermediate ^t;
Per. Fut. ftftmT »i/'i£a (Pan. 1. 2, 2). «rn«, to cover, may do so optionally; 3tl5fftin
Urnuvitd or Wffftnn urnavitd (Pan. I. 2, 3).

CHAPTER XIII.
AORIST-
§ 346. We can distinguish in Sanskrit, as in Greek, between two kinds of
Aorists, one formed by means of a sibilant inserted between root and termi
nation,—this we call the First,—another, formed by adding the terminations
to the base, this we call the Second Aorists
Both Aorists take the Augment, and, with some modifications, the
terminations of the Imperfect.
§ 347. The First Aorist is formed in four different ways*
* Or »Tfr namshtvd.
t Roots which thus may drop their nasal, are written in the Dhatupatha with their nasal,
?h^or W^srams .- while others which retain their nasal throughout, are written without the
nasal, but with an indicatory f^nad, &c. (Pan. vi. 4, 24; vn, 1, 58). Twoverbsthus
marked by ^ i, c?fH lag and =SpT kap, may, however, drop their nasal, the general rule not
withstanding, if used in certain meanings, fciwfirff vilagitam, burnt ; fa if vikapitam,
deformed (Pan. vi. 4, 24, v.). vrih, ^f?S vrimhati, drops its nasal before terminations
beginning with a vowel, but not before the intermediate ^ i ; Tfif varhayati, but "jfism
vrimhitd. X^ranj, to tinge, may drop its nasal, even in the causative (i. e. before a vowel),
if it means to sport ; <.*mfrt rajayati (Pan. vi. 4, 24, v.). The same root, like some others,
drops its nasal before sdrvadhdtuka affixes; TTfiT rajati, &c. (Pan. vi. 4, 26). ■vt'^ancA, if
it means to worship, must retain its nasal (Pan. vi. 4, 30) and take the intermediate 3( t (Pan.
vir. 2, 53) : -*(P«(rt; anchitah, worshipped ; otherwise aktah, or ■wPmit anchitafr, bent.
sramsitvd.
a a 2
180 AOBIST.

Terminations of the First Aorist.

i- First Form.
Parasmaipada. Atmanepada.
^ isham ishva J^f ishma jf*t ishi ^Vffig ishvaki ishmahi
%(h* JWishtam ishta jpr.ishthdh 3^TTT ishdthdm or 7^ idhvam or idhvam
^ »< * ^FT isAfcra ^g: j'sAmA ^ isAta ^Ulrii ishdtdm ^TiT ishata
In this first set of terminations the intermediate ^ i stands as part of the
terminations, because all the verbs that take this form are verbs liable to
take the intermediate ^ i. The first and second forms of the First Aorist
differ, in fact, by this only, that the former is peculiar to verbs which take,
the latter to verbs which reject intermediate ^ i. (See § 332, 4, note.)

2. Second Form.
Parasmaipada.* Atmanepada.
Jfsam ^ sva W sma ftf si T"?f"? svahi *fi smahi
jfcsih ^Rstam or W tarn Wsta or Kta TmV.sthdhoilir.thdh WHlsdthdm iifdhvamorTgdhvam
M\t[sit ^istdmoitntdm "{j: suh ^[staorltta Win sdtdm Wil sata
3. Third Form.
There are some verbs which add s to the end of the root before
taking the terminations of the Aorist, and which after this *"f s, employ the
usual terminations with ^ i, viz. isham, &c. They are conjugated in the
Parasmaipada only.
Parasmaipada.
ftr? s-i-sham fn(*% s-ishva ftTO s-isli7na
"(ft: s-(h (originally for flUWl'. s-i-shih) f*H# s-ishtam ftr? s-ishta
iftT^s-tt (originally for f«*fli^s-i-sAft) ftt'ET s-ishtdm ftf^: s-ishuh
4. Fourth Form.
Lastly, there are some few verbs, ending in 31 sh, h, preceded
by ^ i, Tti,^ ri, which take the following terminations, without an inter
mediate ^ i (ksa).
Parasmaipada. Atmanepada.
^ sam JfTZsdva WTsama ftf si H 1 4 fysdvahi or"=r%raAt wwfis sdmahi
W.sah Wtsatam Wfsata Wr.sathdhoi^nUhdh "WIT sdthdm JRStsadhvamoi*4 dhvam
Tft^sat HHJsatdm "B^T san UK sata or "if ta ■flTiri sdtdm santa

Special Rules for the First Form of the First Aorist.

§ 348. For final vowel, Vriddhi in Parasmaipadat. Id, to cut, ^coifa*
aldvisham (Pan. vn. 2, 1).
* For %4ffc isMh and '^tr'f ishit.
t Except fa svi, to swell, "?PSpfft"( asvayit; jdgri, to wake, tsuii'iOiv, qjdgarit
(Pan. vii. 2, 5). "SWl urnu, to cover, may or may not take Vriddhi; vi!«!jVI auriiuvU, or
^ttkT$n\aurndvti, or ^tWi^Hi^aurnavit (Pan. VII. 2, 6).
 AORIST. 181

For final vowel, Guna in Atmanepada. 14, Wdfcfr alavishi.

For medial or initial vowel, Guna (if possible) both in Par. and Atm.
•TO budh, to know ; Par. *r*tfv4 abodhisham ; Atm. ^Ntfvfa abodhishi.
The vowel sir a, followed by a single final consonant, may or may not take
Vriddhi in Par. if the verb begins with a consonant*. «fm kan, to sound, ^rarT-
frrq akdnisham or WRftire akanisham (Pan. vn. 2, 7) ; Atm. ^ssftjfa akanishi.
§ 349. No Guna takes place in desiderative bases. *v budh ; Desid.
^rfv^ bubodhish ; Aor. ^r^tfvf«r$ abubodhishisham.
Intensives in T^y, if preceded by a consonant, must, certain denominatives
in ^ y may, drop their final ^ y. If the intensive ^ y is preceded by a
vowel, \y \& left between the final vowel and the intermediate \ i. fij^bhid,
to cut; Int. base ^rfir^ bebhidy; Aor. Atm. ^r^faf^fa abebhidishi. ^bhu,
to be ; Int. base ?t>T»I bobMy ; Aor. Atm. ^twfilfa abobMyishi. Denom.
base <iH^namasy, to worship; Aor. ^HHPbUM anamasy-isham or VTOftra
anamas-isham.

Special Rules for the Second Form of the First Aorist.

§ 35°- Vriddhi in Parasmaipada. fs^ kship, ^rtj^t akshaipsam; %
,srfre aSaisham (Pan. vn. 2, 1); v& pach, wrrafhr apdkshit (Pan. vn. 2, 3).
Guna in Atmanepada, if the verb ends in ^, ^ 1, 7, ^1 u (not in ri,
Pan. 1. 2, 12); otherwise no change of vowel. % H, W^fa aSeshi; but
f^pr kship, wftsffar akshipsi; if kri, ^ifa akrishi. Final becomes ^ £r.
$ 351. Terminations beginning with w^st or ^usth drop their if the
base ends in a short vowel or in a consonant, except nasals. Ex. 2. p. dual
tHHJH akshaip-tam, 3. p. dual 'srisffri akshaip-tdm, 2. p. plur. t-WKJH akshaip-la, of
ftrqfoAip; 2. p. sing. Atm. W^«n: akrithdh, 3. p. sing. 'Sf^TT akrita, of ^ Ari, Atm.
But from TTft manyate, V*fafl amamsta.
§ 352. The roots «Ma, to stand, ?[T to give, VT rfA<2> to place, ^ de, to
pity, tfr dhe, to feed, ^ rfo, to cut, change their final vowels into ^ i before the
terminations of the Atmanepada (Pan. 1. 2, 17). sthd, dmftfUd updsthi-ta;
TUtftmnri updsthi-shdtdm. In the Parasmaipada they take the second aorist.

(j 368.)
* Roots ending in al or ^ ar always take Vi-iddhi in the Parasmaipada; Wt^jval,
to burn, WtiftTfqjvdUt (Pan. VII. 2, 2). Likewise "^Zvad, to speak, and ~3*{vrqj, to go
(Pan. vii. 2,3). Roots ending in^ h, JTm, ^y, the roots TSprMrsAan, to hurt, ^S?{&as, to breathe,
and verbs of the Chur class, roots with technical JJ e, do not take Vriddhi (Pan. vn. 2, 5).
Jfegrah, to take, WWQ&agrahtt; fCF^syam, to sound, Wwil ny asyamit; ^Bp^vyay, to
throw, ^Jpfrff avyayit : ^ff kshan, to hurt, -«f*S!<ulr^ akshamt ; svas, to breathe,
■fliytflf^aipasft.; A^itnay, to minish, ^flftrTaunayft; 77T ra#, to suspect, ^TOfriTara^if.
(fNt rffiiAf, to shine, cepf, to desire, and daridrd, to be poor, drop their final
vowels, according to the rules on intermediate qfVji daridrd, (Vfcl 1^ adaridrtt.
182 AOltlST.

§ 353* The roots »ft mi (mindti), to destroy, fa mi (minoti), to throw, and

?ft di, to destroy, change their final vowels into d in the Atmanepada ; and
eft to stick, does so optionally, c^t U, WcSnltY aldsit (§ 358) or <AmTiIn

$ 354. Aaw, to kill, drops its nasal in the Atmanepada (Pan. 1. 2, 14) ;
^r^?T ahata, W^mri ahasdtdm.
§ 355- ^awJ, to go, drops its nasal in the Atmanepada optionally
(Pan. 1. a, 13); ^Trii ayata or ^nrer agamsta. The same rule applies to the
benedictive Atmanepada; Jltfls gasishta or *nfhr gaihsishta.
§ 35°^ 'I yffWl drops its nasal, necessarily or optionally, according to its
various meanings; g^ni udayata, he divulged (Pan. 1. 3, 15); TTPIH updyata,
he espoused, or updyamsta (Pan. 1. 3, 16).

Special Rules for the Third Form of the First Aorist.

§ 357- Most verbs taking this form of the Aorist end in d, or in
diphthongs which take ^rr d as their substitute. This ^rr d remains
unchanged. In the Atmanepada these verbs take the Second Form.
§ 358. The verbs mi, to throw, jft mi, to destroy, and li, to stick,
if taking this form, change likewise their final vowels into d. Ex. wnftni
amdsisham, I threw, and I destroyed; WcTlftN aldsisham (or ^TOT alaisham).
§ 359- Three roots ending in *m take this form; v^yam, to hold, TR ram,
to rejoice, tT»^ nam, to bend, Aor.-^nrftra ayaihsisham, &c. (Pan. vn. a, 73).

Special Rules for the Fourth Form of the First Aorist.

§ 360. The roots which take this form must end in ^ s (except ^31 dris,
to see, Pan. in. 1, 47),. ^ sh, ^ s, ^ h, preceded by any vowel but <sr, ^TT a.
They must be verbs which reject the intermediate ^ i; § 333, 17—30;
(Pan. nr. 1, 45.) Their radical vowel remains unchanged.
§ 361. The root f^i^slish takes this form only if it means to embrace
(Pan. in. 1, 46) ; ^Pyaji^ aMikshat. Other verbs, such as xg^push and
sush, are specially excepted. (§ 366.)
§ 363. The roots J? duh, to milk, dih, to anoint, fc5? lih, to lick,
ip? guh, to hide (Pan. vn. 3, 73), may take in the Atmanepada
^TTC thdh instead of *r«n: sathdh. ^f? vahi instead of sdvahi.
ft ta — sa/a. &r dhvam — *js4 sadhvam.
They thus approach to the Second Form of the first aorist in most, yet not
in all persons.
Ex. ^ duh; 3. p. sing. Atm. ^iTfTOT: adugdhdh or ^rtrBTtn: adhukshathdh.
3. p. sing. Atm. ^f<pv adugdha or 'srwpspT adhukshata.
1. p. dual Atm. ^resrftr aduhvahi or 'srvajNfij adhukshdvahi.
3. p. plur. Atm. ^sryiir adhugdhvam or ^r*TE^ adhukshadhvam.
 AOEIST. 183

First Aorist.
First Form,
with intermediate ^ t.
a. Verbs ending in a vowel ; M, to cut
Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, Guna in Atmanepada.
Parasmaipada.
aldv-isham iHpJlfaM aldv-ishva ■«) cO I Tq "n aldv-ishma
2. lsiwiql; aldv-ih vlcilfas aldv-ithtam Wei l fa 8 aldvi-shta
3. ^(&V<{\l{aldv-<t >M c> I f=l aT aldv-ishtdm sHcolfag: aUvi-shuh
Atmanepada.
1. ^raftrft alav-ishi P=i «i alav-ishvahi ^Tc?f^rf? alav-ishmahi
alav-ishthdh ^raf^Tflt alav-ishithdm 'STcSfelef alav-idhvam or °^ -dhvam
3. ^HcifaH alav-ishta ^rifamrii alav-iskdtdm 'sirtfain alav-ishata
b. Verbs ending in consonants ; to know
Guna in Parasmaipada and Atmanepada.
Parasmaipada.
1. ^illfVra abodh-isham V «Tl Pm »q abodh-ishva ^SWtfV'W abodh-ishma
2. ^T^frfh abodh-ih o«^r«T? abodh-ishtam ^TTtfin? abodh-ishta
3. TH«fl*l1(f abodh-U wftfviKi abodh-ishtdm ^nrtftnr; abodh-ishuh
Atmanepada.
1. TM«ftryfM abodh-ishi ■'H^tfVrE^f^ abodh-ishvahi ^TWVftTT^ abodh-ishmahi
2. ^*TlfM8rt abodh-ishthdh ^^VRl^T«rt abodh-ishithdm WTfftj&J abodh-idhvam
3. ^Ntfir? abodh-ishta ^TTfftmUT abodh-ishdtdm frrHv^TI abodh-ishata

Second Form,
without intermediate ? t.
a. Verbs ending in consonants ; ftf^ foAip, to throw
Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, no change in Atmanepada.
Parasmaipada.
akshaip-sam akshaip-sva akshaip-sma
akshaip-sih akshaip-tam (§351) akshaip-ta
3. THBjtfl t^akshaip-sit '.liim akshaip-tdm ^TBJ'JJJ akshaip-suh
Atmanepada.
1 . ^rftsrfaf akship-si vi Pb$ (5 akship-svahi vTftSj^nf akship-smahi
2. ^rfajtsn: akship-thdh vTfgfmiVji akship-sdthdm ^rffefStJ akshib-dhvam
3. VT^H akship-ta ^afisjmidi akship-sdtdm ■mPBjmrf akship-sata

b. Verbs ending in vowels ^ ^, 3i u) ; %t frf, to lead.

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, Guna in Atmanepada.
Parasmaipada.
1. anaisham vt^ "=< anaishva anaishma
2. 9T?Nfh anaisM/t anawifom '91%? anaishta
3. ^rWtfh^anawAft ^rfhri anaishtdm anaishuh
184 AORIST.

Atmanepada.
1. ^nrfa ane-shi ■st r| (5 aneshvahi aneshmahi
2. ^finn: ane-shthdh fl^MIHr aneshdth&m vi anedhvam
3. '«t«18 ane-shta «i«lHini aneshdtdm miMrt aneshata
c. Verbs ending in ri; ^ Ari, to do.
Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, no change in Atmanepada
Parasmaipada
1 . ^<*|M akdrsham v(«tii^ akdrshva akdrshmu
2. 'ScfftfT: akdrshift Wl akarshtam ^oKlf akdrshta
3. ^HcfcmTff akdrsMt akdrshtdm ^PKrit akdrshuh
Atmanepada.
1. Sstopfn afcrisAi eji <*1 He akrishvahi 0^ akrishmaU
2. ^<JVJ|: akrithdh ^I^TTf akrishdthdm akridhvam
3. -wojirt airi<a ^S^i^TiTT akrishdtdm VfajmH akrishata

Verbs ending in ?rr a; rf<2, to give.

Atmanepada only ; IT a changed into ^ i.
Atmanepada.
1. vtf^rH arfisAi vif^wit? adishvahi k\T<^*\?^ adishmahi
2. ^rfij^TTJ adithdh ■wf^llNl adishdthdm ihP^^ adidhvam
3. v»(^n arfiVa vaf^MI'di adishdtdm «fi^ffl adishata

e. Verbs ending in ^ |*f; sM? to stretch.

Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, with intermediate ^ «.
In Atmanepada the insertion of ^ t is optional. (See § 337, II. 4. Pan. vn. 2, 42.)
If ^ t is inserted, then Guna (§ 348) and optionally lengthening of ^ t. (§ 341.)
If ^ t is not inserted, then ^rf changed to ^ fr. (§ 350.)
Parasmaipada.
Vmntci astdrisham, &c, like Firs/ Form.
Fir** jPorm, Atmanepada. Second Form,
with ^ i. SINGULAR. without ^ i.
1. Wgrftft or Wttfa 'astarishi or astarhhi VStrflOf asttrshi
2. WW R.a It or SSNHOhi: astarishthdh or astarishthdh •HHWlIlt astirshthdh
3. SHWfUJ or WSTTTf astarishta or astarishta VTCftf astirshta

1 . ^TCTft^ttJ or WWtfalfil astarishvahi or astarishvahi ^reffa^f? astirshvahi

2. fWffftWfl or iMWOmvii astarishdthdm or astarishdthdm WlWVii astirshdthdm
3. iHW fCHIril or ■flwOllrii astarishdtdm or astarishdtdm WsflSliTl astirshdtdm

1. ^rerft^Tfi? or iHWOtHf% astarishmahi or astarishmahi W5ft1*tf% asMrshmahi

2. ^T5rft;s4°^ or ^renftl4 °^ astaridhvam -dhvam or astaridhvam -dhvam vwlc; astirdhvam
3. ^WfilMH or iltwCIUrf astarishata or astartshata wWl^rt astirshata
 AORIST. 185

f. Verbs with penultimate ri; *pr^ srij, to let off.

Peculiar Vriddhi in Parasmaipada, no change in Atmanepada.
1 . HHHf asrdksham
2. vitJlttf)'. asrdkshth
3. ^nST^r^ asrdksMt
1. -<J'<jr>5 asrikshi
2. WMK t asris,
3. -w«g asrishta
Parasmaipada.
asrdkshva ^OTBJT asrdkshma
^THTP asrdshtam wtilK asrdshta
S-MfcHBI asrdshtam VQTVS asrdkshuh
Atmanepada.
vt«e«<fV asrikshvahi framing asrikshmahi
^raEJTTT asrikshdthdm ^HWsTS'
t \4 asriddhvam
• ••
iH'«8Jlrii asrikshdtdm ■w««jn asrikshata

g- Verbs ending in ^ A; ^ rfaA, to burn.

Parasmaipada.
1. WTT^ adhdksham ^rtrng' adhdkshva vntlBJl adhdkshma
2. ^MIHjl: adhdkshih HH^W addgdham addgdha
3. ^TOT^h^ adhdksMt 4)«|N*n' addgdham 'SW^ adhdkshuh

Atmanepada.
1 . ^tvftj adhakshi fW!nc adhakshvahi ^ifVsfifis adhakshmahi
2. W<JJ*n; adagdhdh ^rvHSrrTf adhakshdthdm ^WliT adhagdhvam
3. adagdha ^JViSJIrH adhakshdtdm ^TVSpr adhakshata

1. Vmftri aydsisham
2. ^PTHftt aydsih
3. ^ninfti^ aytfsif
1 . '^nTftrW anamsisham
2. ^J«TJjtt anamsih
3. VTjftir anamsit
First Aorist.
7%ird Form.
Parasmaipada only.
*TT yd, to go.
mnftim aydsishva ^PTTfttT aydsishma
mfrn aydsishtam ^TTtftnT aydsishta
WnftrSI aydsishtam VTiraVS aydsishuh
■ijR nam, to bend.
,!niftrf^' anamsishva ^tfftnT anamsishma
^TTftr? anamsishtam V?rreV anamsishta
^T«Tftr8T anamsishtam ipfftry anamsishuh

1 . ^ffi^TSf adiksham
2. ^rfifEj: adikshah
3. ^rfifBTJ^ adikshat
First Aorist.
Fourth Form.
fi^diS, to show.
Parasmaipada.
^r^lSjR adikshdva ^rf^TfR adikshdma
^r^BJK adikshatam vtf^ojn adikshata
■flfi}«Jrfi adikshatam wf^TSp^ adikshan
B b
186 AORIST.

Atmanepada.
1. 'Srf^ftj adikshi istf^Bjl^n? adikshdvahi Wt\^THffe adikshdmahi
2. ^rf^m adikshathdh ^ff^BfniT adikshdthdm Wfi^>|ti adikshadhvam
3. Vnp^D adikshata Wfip^nri adikshdtdm ■flf^lSjif adikshanta

jj? ^mA, to hide.

Parasmaipada.
1. TO aghuksham ^T««|l<1 aghukshdva w aghukshdma
2. -wmbj; aghukshah ■w^Bjn aghukshatam ^T^TSpT aghukshata
3. vi^«(i^ aghukshat v» ij kj n 1 aghukshatam wmyh*{ aghukshan
Atmanbpada.
1 . ^PjfEf aghukshi ^^KJiqf^ aghukshdvahi or ^Pp^f? aguhvahi ,ST^fPTf% aghukshdmahi
2. ^l^yiV.aghukshathdhoi'W^rt'.agudhdh -*l«JHJimi aghukshdthdm WVBI^or^T^1
3. V^fD aghukshata or 'WMfi agHdha ^I^HJIrii aghukshdtdm W*JHjil aghukshanta
It may also follow the First Form, VPTfr^ agilhisham and ^T'jfifft aguhishi,
($ 337, 1- !•)
ft?? ZiA, to smear.
Parasmaipada.
1. ■flPcJVSj aliksham ^TfoTSfR alikshdva flPc*«JIH alikshdma
2. ■eiTwo!: alikshah iNfrtHJii alikshatam ^rPrtBjfl alikshata
3. 'SrfoTSfff alikshat wPrtBjni alikshatdm <4)Pc*B|«T alikshan
Atmanepada.
1. -eiPrtP«| alikshi *l PrflSj N P^ alikshdvahi or »!( Pc4d^ P^ alihvahi PrtH 1*1 H| alikshdmaki
2. wfa^in: alikshathd/t or ^7^37: a&MaA 4) Pri Bj I UN alikshdthdm ^lf?5^t4 or •« rt1 <P
3. iSrfarajtT alikshata or istfole otftiAa 44 f<4 H| I ri 1 alikshdtdm wftS^TI alikshanta
5? dwA, to milk.
Parasmaipada.
adhuksham, &c.
Atmanepada.
1 . ^PjfiST adhukshi WVBfRf? adhukshdvahi or V73|f\| aduhvahi »3 ^ 8j IH fi| adhukshdmahi
2. WW^V.adhukshatMJioT^(ZTli1'.adugdhdh *H MBj I t|i adhukshdthdm W^Sflfl or l43
3. 'JPJEfiT adhukshata or tt"! adugdha **JHj|rfi adhukshdtdm 'flM^rt adhukshanta
<&A, to anoint.
Parasmaipada.
^rftrfSJ adhiksham, &c.
Atmanepada.
1 . wfijfaf adhikshi "sfvssrref? or -aP^ng4 :3Tfv^TTft{ adhikshdmahi
2. wftrsprn or ^rf^rvn5 ^rfviBjlUII adhikshdthdm ^rfVT^l^ or 'Sfipt*6
3. ^PtlKjd or SH(<^9 7 ^tfVHJlrfi adhikshdtdm wftltsjri adhikshanta
1 aghukshadhvam or aghudhvam. 2 alikshadhvam or aUdhvam.
3 adhukshadhvam or adhugdhvam. 4 adhikshdvahi or adihvahi.
5 adhikshathdh or adigdhdh. 6 adhikshadhvam or adhigdhvam.
7 adhikshata or adigdha.
 AOKIST. 187

Second Aorist.
First Form.
§ 3^3> Verbs adopting this form take the augment, and attach the
terminations (First Division) of the imperfect to a verbal base ending
in ?r a, like those of the Tud form.

ftr^ sich, to sprinkle. Pres. ftfarrfir sinchdmi; Impf. "erfi!^ asincham.

Parasmaipada.
1. *rftm asicham ^iftrsTR asichdva WfflWI asiehdma
2. ^rftra: asichah Vftr^n asichatam vOhMiI aaic/loto
3. ^fiT^il asichat Wftmrri asichatdm WfifWT (tsichan
Atmanepada.
1. ^Tftw asiche 'Srftr^T^f? asichdvahi Vft^mf^ asichdmahi
2. 'witi-qin; asic ^tftnftri asichethdm vAntl iisichadhvam
asichata Vftnili asichetdm WftPtD asichanta
df Ave, to call. Pres. jnrrfa hvaydmi; Impf. ^r^ahvayam; General base |r Aw.
Parasmaipada.
1. 'Wo^ aAcam VSgTO ahvdva
2. ahvah vt^n ahvatam VJgH ahvata
3. -Wd? aA»a< ■«<*: ttt ahvatdm ^TJ^«I ahvan
Atmanepada.
1 . W3| aApe ^R?T7f^ ahvdvahi m^Clfy ahvdmahi
2. W3|^rn ahvathdh ahvethdm V3g8| ahvadhvam
-\ •
3. vijsn ahvata vi^ni ahvetdm VwfK ahvanta
§ 364. Roots ending in ^rr a, ^ e, ^ i, drop these vowels, and substitute
a base ending in a: 3?" Ave substitutes 35 Ava, Aor. ^Tjtf ahvam; fig
substitutes sv«, Aor. ^Pff asvam. Roots ending in ^ ri, and the root
7*3^ rfrii, to see, take Guna (Pan. vn. 4, 16), and then form a base ending
in short *r a : H sri, to go, ^rerjr^ asarat ; rfris, to see, ^<J$Tfl adarsat.
§365. Roots with penultimate nasal, drop it: ^i^sAararf, to step, ^nai^ a*kadam.
§ 366. Irregular forms are, avocham, I spoke, from vacA (according
to Bopp a contracted reduplicated aorist, § 370, for ^r^? avavacham); ^HTR
apaptam, I flew, from pat (possibly a contracted reduplicated aorist for
mptii apapatam) ; anesam, I perished (possibly for V<H^ ananasam) ;
^rf^r^ aHsham, I ordered, from W*; dstham, I threw, from <z«.
$367. Roots which take this form are,
a*, to throw (^rrw dstham*), g^vacA, to speak avocham), khyd,
to speak ('3T^T akhyam), if the agent is implied. (Pan. in. 1, 52.)
fexi Zip, to paint, fa^«icA, to sprinkle, j^r Ave, to call (irregularly ^Tof ahvam),
* ^TPPT dstham stands irregularly for (foam. (Pan. vn. 4, 17.)
B b 2
188 AORIST.

in Par., and optionally in Atm. (Pan. in. i, 53, 54). Par. ^rfon^ alipat,
Atm. ^rfoTiT alipata or frf<3fl alipta.
' The verbs classed as trert^ pushddi, beginning with ^ push (Dh. P. 7,6,
73-I36)> ^rfTf^ dyutddi, beginning with ^jf dyut (Dh. P. 18), and those
marked by a technical «s li, in the Parasmaipada. (Pan. in. 1, 55.)
The verbs ^ sri, to go, sds, to order, and ^ ri, to go (^nt dram), in
Par. and Atm. (Pan. in. 1, 56.)
Optionally, verbs technically marked by ^ ir, but in the Parasmaipada only
(Pan. in. 1, 57). ^if«^ abhidat or ^rtfli^ abhaitsit.
Optionally, i^jrt, to fail, *ch^ stambh, to stiffen (^reOfiT astabhat or ^r^Wftf
astambhit), ^ mruch, to go (^P|^iT amruchat or 'SsnyfaTiT amrochit),
mluch, to go, g^^rrwcA, to steal, r^^gluch, to steal, f&i^glunch, to go
(^pJ^ agluchat or ^i^-iflif aglunchit), fv& svi, to grow (irregularly
iH>u^ asvat), but in the Parasmaipada only. (Pan. in. 1, 58.)
§ 368. There are a few verbs, ending in ^TT a, U e, ^ft 0, which take this
form of the second aorist in the Parasmaipada; also vjbhu, to be. They
retain throughout the long final vowel, except before the ^r: uh of the 3rd
pers. plur., before which the final ^rt d is rejected. In the Atmanepada
these verbs in d take the Second Form of the first aorist, and change
^TT d to ^ i.
dd, to give. Pres. <^lfa daddmi ; Impf. WT^i adaddm.
Parasmaipada.
1. arfam arfaoa *3T^TT arfama
2. arfaA -4)^1(1 addtam w^lrt adate
3. iS^TrT afl!<ft VH^Irll addtam ^Tj: atM
H Mw, to be. Pres. wmft bhavdmi; Impf. ^Pf^ abhavam.
Parasmaipada.
1 . ^nT^ abhuvam * abhuva abhuma
2. *WtCs aM«K ^WiT
Cv abhutam ^fjf
Cv abhuta
3. ^TTT afiMf obhutdm W^T^abhuvan
Verbs which take this form are,
HT to go ; to give ; vx rf^a, to place ; tjt jua, to drink ; sthd,
to stand ; ^ de, to guard; do, to cut; vtbM, to be. (Pan. n. 4, 77.)
Optionally, UT^Ara, to smell; ^ dhe, to drink; 3jtso, to sharpen ; ^ chho,
to cut ; 5tft so, to destroy. (Pan. n. 4, 78.)
§ 369. The nine roots of the Tan class ending in ^ n or nr n may form
the 2nd and 3rd pers. sing. Atm. in thdh and it ta, before which the final
nasal is rejected. TPT^ tan, to stretch ; Aor. "HTrfrTS atanishta or WWTT atata ;
UTlftfTC atanishthdh or vnnrn atathdh (Pan. n. 4, 79). These forms might
* Irregular in the 1st pers. sing., dual, and plur., and in the 3rd pers. plur.
 AOEIST. 189

be considered as irregular Atmanepada forms of the second aorist, or of

the first aorist II, with loss of initial ^
Second Aobist.
Second or Reduplicated Form.
§ 370. A few primitive verbs, and the very numerous class of the Chur
roots, the denominatives and causatives in ay, reduplicate their
base in the second aorist, taking the augment as before, and the usual
terminations of the imperfect.
§ 371. The primitive verbs which take this form are,
fTO sri, to go, 'J dru, to run, j£ sru, to flow, "sgt^kam, to love (Pan. 111. 1, 48),
if expressing the agent ; trfitffspnt asibriyat.
Optionally, ftj hi, to grow, v dhe, to suck (Pan. in. 1, 49), if expressing
the agent ; TO^VTT adadhat, j 364, (or ^nm^ adhdt or TOvratiT adhdsit).
Their reduplicative syllable, as far as consonants are concerned, is formed
like that of the reduplicated perfect.
*x P*l V riN asisriyat, he went. ^vgwnadudruvat, he ran. asusruvat,
he flowed. WTOTff achakamut, he loved. TO^*nr adadhat, he sucked.
^fsrfaPTK asisviyat, he grew ; also Sec. Aor. asvat and First Aor.
^TSPftiT asvayit (Pan. in. 1, 49). ^ hve, to call, forms its Aor. Caus.
*"B^ ri\ ajUhavat (Pan. vi. 1, 32).
$ 372. The verbs in w*{ay drop ay, and (with certain exceptions*)
reduce their Guna and Vriddhi vowels to the simple base vowels : ^rt d to ^ar a;
S e to ^ i; *sft 0 to 7 u; ^rr_, TOTC Sr, to ^ ri; ^ ir to ~% ri.
Thus Hl^qfir mddayati would become JT^ mad, (Aor. ism"lH<j amimadam.)
Jr^rfir bhedayati — — ftr^ bhid, (Aor. isnflfa^ abibhidam.)
jft^jfw modayati — — ^ mud, (Aor. amumudam.)
^373. In the exceptional roots, which do not admit this shortening process,
TOT d, \ i, n. e, v: ai, ~m u, TOt 0, to^ au are represented in the reduplicative syllable by
^a,~$i,\i, \i, ?i, 7wt.
* These exceptional verbs are (Pan. vn. 4, 2),
Certain denominatives : From *TT5$T maid, a garland, is formed the denominative TTWrftf
mdlayati, Red. Aor. -^HHH 1 06 1^ amamdlat ; ^TR^sas, Caus. $| l*m?Hsdsayati, he punishes,
Red. Aor. TO$lifii*tn asasdsat.
Those with technical ^ ri: WT^ftarfA, to hurt; Caus. iin^fn bddhayati; Aor. TO^TVTf
ababddhat.
^X^bhrdj, to shine, ^T^bhds, to shine, HT^ SAasA, to speak, cft^tftp, to lighten, »ftfy'fo, to
live, >ftf^ to meet, ift^pid, to vex, shorten their vowel optionally. Ex. >3T*[bhrdj;
■»JI «|y M ababhrdjat or ^ff^SWJ^abibhrajat (§ 374).
t veshtay, to surround, ^TT^ cheshtay, to move, take either ^ » or TO a in the
reduplicative syllable ; 'S M^BiT avaveshtal or vi fa HvKaviveshtat. «1 n <\dyotay, to Ughten,
takes ^ i; «i f^a Wi^ adidyutat.
190 AORIST.

Hlrflfrf mdlayati, WWTH amamdlam. z\<tmfA tikayati, trfrtfMr atitikam.

c4l4*lfif lokayati, ^tpjwI* alulokam.
§ 374. In the vast majority of roots, however, the shortening takes place, thus
leaving bases with short a, ^ i, 7 w, ^ ri. Here the tendency is to make the
reduplicated base, with the augment, either u-uoruu-, Hence all roots in
which the shortened vowel is not long by position, lengthen the vowel of the
reduplicative syllable (amu'mudat). Those in which the vowel is long by
position, leave the vowel of the reduplicative syllable short (ararakshat) .
Where, as in roots beginning with double consonants, the vowel of the
reduplicative syllable is necessarily long by position, it is not changed into the
long vowel (achuchyutat, not acMchyutat). In roots beginning and ending in
two consonants, this metrical rhythm is necessarily broken (achaskandat).
§ 375. In the roots which do not resist the shortening process,
a, ^ i, 7 u, ^ ri are represented in the reduplicative syllable by
Waor^i, ^i, ?k, ^i; and all lengthened, where necessary.

Second Aorist.
Second or Reduplicated Form.
I. w — w .
xf^pach, to cook, trrenfitr pdchayati ; wftiWit^apipachat *.
fi?^ bhid, to cut, ij^tifrf bhedayati ; ^r^WW^ abibhidat.
IT^ mud, to rejoice, jft^rfft modayati ; ^Wg^K amdmudat.
Y»T vrit, to exist, qfafll vartayati ; wt^nr avivritat.
in^mrij, to cleanse, HN^fa mdrjayati; fl*fl*JH^ amimrijat.
cRK krit, to praise, afttaffr Mrtayati ; ^Nfajifff achikritat f.
The lengthening becomes superfluous before roots beginning with two con
sonants, because the two consonants make the short vowel heavy (guru).
UT3^ tyaj, to leave, rtM^fri tydjayati ; ^rfwWiTrT atityajat.
>JT»^ bhrdj, to shine, OTPlfil bhrdjayati ; ^rfonn^ abibhrajat.
ftfq kship, to throw, Hjimfri kshepayati ; ^tfafo^trff achikshipat.
^JTT chyut, to fall, -oflrUffri chyotayati ; *M»yriHN achuchyutat.
^ svri, to sound, wunfd svdrayati; ^ffaycff asisvarat.
* ganay and <*<H^ kathay take ^ t or ?I a optionally ; ^Ml'Nns qjiganat or
w \ ajaganat.
t The following verbs take ^ a instead of ^ i or ^ t in the reduplicative syllable of the
aorist in the causative :
*R smri, ^ dri, l^tvar, V^prath, W% mrad, ^ET stri, ^KW(spas.
V* smri; Caus. WI^Td smdrayati ; Aor. ■eitujm.n asasmarat.
The same verbs which, as will be shown hereafter, reduplicate av, (the Guna of T, ^ u,)
in the desiderative by 7 u, take 7 u instead of ^ t in the reduplicated aorist :
•jnu; Caus. H I 4 M fri ndvayati; Des. VJ«Tt^f*l tfrt nundvayishati; Aor. of Caus. 'wyt'' anunaram.
 AORIST. 191

raksh, to protect, T^prfir rakshayati ; lKUN^ ararakihat *.

fifET bhiksh, to beg, fifflpjfti bhikshayati ; wfrffW^ffi abibhikshat.
§ 376. If the root begins and ends with double consonants, this rhythmical
law is broken.
TP^ prachh, to ask, mfli prachchhayati ; vnnil apaprachchhat.
skand, to step, f*^t|fri skandayati ; ^TMT^iT achaskandat.
§ 377. Roots with radical ^ ri, followed by a consonant, may optionally
take the \j — v-/ or — forms.
Y«fv vn*» to be, qfHffit vartayati ; -fltflciurt^ avwritat or «H<Hriir avavartat.
(Pan. vii. 4, 7.)
mfmrij, to cleanse, sTr^^Pff mdrjayati ; «m1l J| namimrijat or (PtHtvhl amamdrjat.
■nkfti, to praise, •sitfarftt kirtayaii ; ^r^pnx^acMkritat or ^rfas(itffT^ac^i£?rta/.
^ 378. Roots beginning with a vowel have the same internal reduplication,
which will be described hereafter in the desiderative bases.
Thus wsn a£ forms the Caus. tst^P^ dSay. This after throwing off iro ay,
and shortening the vowel, becomes ^rer^ai; this reduplicated, ^rfifrs^aS-is;
and lastly, with augment and termination, fllfsisi di-U-am.
In the same manner, wrPW drchicham, ^nfeni aubjijam, &c.
J 379. Are slightly irregular:
tit pd, to drink, which forms its causal aorist as »a nl m ffN apipyat (instead of
fliflifHif apipayat).
Vn sthd, to stand, which forms its causal aorist as v^fnTaiTT atishthipat
(instead of ^FtftHK atishthapat).
UT ffhrd, to smell, which forms its causal aorist as ^fflfnq rf^ ajighripat or
wfsnPTi^ ajighrapat.
Reduplicated Aorist.
Parasmaipada.
1 . vTt^rWf asisrayam ■at f^iZPITW asisraydva ^rfsPSPTR asisraydma
2. *<r^i'siTi: asisrayah vi T^i %i <4 n asisrayatam vifiti'stMn aSisrayata
3. '^rfifrWnT asUrayat ^TfSltHlril asisrayatdm ^rf^PSTT«^ asifoayan
Atmanepada.
1 . Tsf^i'siil aiisraye ^rf^ra'JTwf? asiiraydvahi ^rfijPSPTTTfi? asisraydmahi
2. WtjTtPnn: asisrayathdh W^TWTVI asisrayethdm vTf5l^nTt4 asisrayadhvam
asisrayata vTf^rainTT asisrayetdm 'Slf^rWnT asisrayanta
§ 380. In the preceding 66 occasional rules have been given as to the
particular forms of the aorist which certain verbs or classes of verbs adopt.
As in Greek, so in Sanskrit, too, practice only can effectually teach which
forms do actually occur of each verb; and the rules of grammarians,
* Radical W a is reduplicated by W a if the root ends in a double consonant.
192 AORIST.

however minute and complicated, are not unfrequently contradicted by the

usage of Sanskrit authors.
However, the general rule is that verbs follow the first aorist, unless this
is specially prohibited, and that they take the first form of the first aorist,
unless they are barred by general rules from the employment of the interme
diate ^ i. Verbs, thus barred, take the second form of the first aorist.
The number of verbs which take the third form of the first aorist is very
limited, three roots ending in ^ m, and roots ending in ^TT a.
The fourth form of the first aorist is likewise of very limited use; see § 360.
As to the second aorist, the roots which must or may follow it are
indicated in $ 367, and so are the roots which take the reduplicated form of
the second aorist in $ 371.
Roots which follow the second aorist optionally, or in the Parasmaipada
only, are allowed to be conjugated in the first aorist, subject to the general
rules.

CHAPTER XIV.
FUTURE, CONDITIONAL, PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE, AND BENEDICTIVE.
Future.
381. Terminations.
Parasmaipada.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
i . ^arrfJT ishydmi 4<*IR: ishydvah $HWJ ishydmah
2. $w<r«t ishyasi JfK ishyathah ishyatha
3. ^fn ishyati ^<mii; ishyatah ^"ifff ishyanti
Atmanepada.
1. ishye ^HTTC? ishydvahe ^HTW% ishydmah
2. ^n«< ishyase S^iM ishyethe fv&k ishyadhve
3. ^Hnf ishyate ^«(fl ishyete ^««4ri ishyante
The cases in which the \i of ^nrtfJT ishydmi &c. must be or may be omitted
have been stated in chapter XI, 331 seq. For the cases in which ^ i is
changed to ^ i, see § 340. On the change of *t sha and *t sa, see $ 100 seq.
On the strengthening of the radical vowel, see chapter XII, §§ 344 seq.
§ 382. The changes which the base undergoes before the terminations of
the strengthening tenses, the two futures, the conditional, and the benedictive
Atm. are regulated by one general principle, that of giving weight to the base,
though their application varies according to the peculiarities of certain verbs.
See illustrations in § 344 {bhavishydmi) and § 345 (mdrkshydmi). These
 FUTURE. 193

peculiarities must be learnt by practice, but a few general rules may here be
repeated :
i. Final ^ e, ij ai, ^ft o are changed to w a; ^ gai, to sing, J| 1441 ft
gdsydmi, &c.
3. Final ^ i and $ i, 7 u, '31 4, ^ ri and ^[ /•?, take Guna ; fif/i, to conquer,
A*ufajeshydmi; vbh4, bhavishydmi; Ari, <*(X«wIh karishydmi;
^dri, to tear, cjftWTfa darishydmi or ^lujrft darishydmi. There are the
usual exceptions, ku, to sound, okfaufrfa kuvishydmi. 345, note.)
3. Penultimate ^ i, 7 u, ^ ri, prosodially short, take Guna ; ^ n becomes
^ ir ; 6we?A, <ff|fy«uifa bodhishydmi ; f»T^ ^wfir bhetsyati.
iw^A, to know,
with intermediate ^ i.
Parasmaipada.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
i. ^firarfftT bodhishydmi ■"TtftTBrra: bodhishydvah ■^tftj^nTJ bodhishydmah
2. ^ftrorftr bodhishyasi WtfifW(V. bodhishyathah T^ftnTT bodhishyatha
3. "^f*l«lfii bodhishyati *fi(V|<HH: bodhishyatah ■^tf>T*ifir bodhishyanti
Atmanepada.
1 . "Tifv*! bodhishye •flPMBlN^ bodhishydvahe «Tl Tm «M 1*1^ bodhishydmahe
2. <lTir»mii bodhishyase sftfvuivl bodhishyethe 4tfcl|Ut bodhishyadhve
3. tftfirnrir bodhishyate ^ftfVranr bodhishyete ^ftr^ bodhishyante
* i, to go,
without intermediate ^ t.
Parasmaipada.
1 . Wlfit eshydmi ««m<*: eshydvah UTWt eshydmah
2. 4! «l|ftt eshyasi eshyathah <s<( eshyatha
3. ^Hrfil eshyati «j«mit eshyalah *i«J Til eshyanti
Atmankpada.
1. esAye tilH^ eshydvahe U'm'M^ eshydmahe
2. «t«H« eshyase eshyethe Vywk eshyadhve
3. *;<Hn eshyate V.*itl eshyete *i«fri eshyante
Conditional.
§ 383. The future is changed into the conditional by the same process
by which a present of the Tud class is changed into an imperfect.
w to know,
with intermediate ^ i.
Parasmaipada.
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLURAL.
I. WtflfVeM abodhishyam ^T^ftrarra abodhishydva ^♦nrMmiH abodhishydma
2. ^r^ftrHft abodhishyah W^tftrarfT abodhishyatam SN«nrM«MH abodhishyata
3. >H*flf*IHi^ abodhishyat xi<i\[\vini abodhishyatam ^aflflWr^ abodhishyan
c c
 194 PERIPHRASTIC FUTURE.

Atmanepada.
1. Wi"1(*i«m abodhishye WWtftwrf^ abodhishydvahi <*fl f*l «M W fij abodhishydmahi
2. YWffltvrm: abodhishyathdh W^fif^CA abodhishyethdm ^I^VftrHJ*4 abodhishyadhvam
3. '«i«i\r«i<Mn abodhishyata •^H*TlftIU4rii abodhishyetdm NN^Ktluirt abodhishyanta

1. JTOI aishyam
2. ^Hi: aishyak
3. <J«Hi^ats%af
1. aisAye
2. $H(V|i: aishyathdh
3. «t«mi aishyata
without intermediate ^ i
Parashaipada.
tfUlH aishydva ^BITH aishydma
*;«in aishyatam, ^ycfft aishyata
aishyatdm ^tpp^ aishyan
Atmanepada.
^tqi^f^ aishydvahi ^Uprf? aishydmahi
^HJVJT aishyethdm \> tt|i*I aishyadhvam
^u)rl I aishyetdm ^ttjri aishyanta

Periphrastic Future.
§ 384. The terminations are,
Parasmaipada.
1. STTlfisR iVifoni itdsvah itdsmah
2. $nif<M i<a«t i«eqt itdsthah \n\**4 itdstha
3. ^(TT itrf fHlO ii<2ra« ^TTTT^ t'^raA
Atmanepada.
1. $ni^ iidAe $rti*3? itdsvahe ^niw^ itdsmahe
2. ^KT^ i«<foe ^TTTTR itdsdthe ^BTSSI i^rfAwe
3. ^fTT iia iiiirau ^TTTTt ifaraA
These terminations are clearly compounded of ht /<2 (base k fri), the common
suffix for forming nomina agentis, and the auxiliary verb ?r^as, to be. There
is, however, with regard to TTT no distinction of number and gender in the
1st and 2nd persons, and no distinction of gender in the 3rd person.
On the retention or omission of intermediate ^ i or ^ 2, see $ 331 seq.
On the strengthening of the radical vowel, see $ 382.
^ fiwrfA, to know,
with intermediate ^ i.
1 Parasmaipada.
SINGULAR. dual. plural.
1. Wtftnnffel bodhitdsmi VtftnTOR bodhitdsvah WtftlTTOK bodhitdsmah
2. ^fVrllftl bodhitdsi ^fVnrr^n bodhitdsthah wtvfmPH bodhitdstha
3. vtnnn bodMtd «TlPm ri ICl bodhitdrau ^tfVnfTO bodhitdrah
Atmanepada.
1. <ftftlin^ bodhitdhe ^PfflTOI? bodhitdsvahe <ift[VlriW^ bodhitdsmahe
^tfVHTOT^ bodhitdsdthe ■^tfVTTT^ bodhitddhve
2. WtftfHT$l bodhitdse
3. WtfifiTt bodhitd «ft(MrtlO bodhitdrau ^ftftmrc bodhitdrah
 BENEDICTIVE. 195

without intennediate ^ i.
Parasmaipada.
1. CTTft*T etdsmi K(U*n'. etdsvah 4JHIW eldsmah
2. «nif«i etdsi 5TTH*K etdsthah *J«fI -yj etdstha
3. 5TTT e<a «tniCl etrfrau 4JHIU e<ara#
Atmanepada.
1. e<tfAe (119^ etdsvahe CTTCfl^ etdsmahe
J. <!rilil e&fce CWTln^ etdsdthe ^WT^ eiddhve
3. CTT e<d I!dl0 etrfrau filKJ eiaraA

J 385. The so-called benedictive is formed in close analogy to the

optative. It differs from the optative by not admitting the full modified verbal
base, and, secondly, by the insertion of an ^ s before the personal termina
tions. In the Parasmaipada this stands between the VI yd of the optative
and the actual signs of the persons, being lost, however, in the and and
3rd pers. sing. Thus, instead of
Opt. *TT, *TK, TTTff, TR, TTff, WT, TR, TffiT,
ydm, ydh, ydt, ydva, ydtam, ydtdm, y&ma, ydta, yuh, we have
Ben. *rcw, *n:, unr, *rre, Trer, *rreri> iw, ircr, *n*jt-
ydsam, ydh, ydt, ydsva, ydstam, ydstdm, ydsma, ydsta, ydsuh.
These two sets of terminations stand to each other in the same relation as the
terminations of the imperfect and those of the first aorist II. VXW. ydsah and
Trrcnr ydsat are contracted to VV. ydh, and vmjfdt, like the and and 3rd pers. sing,
of the first aorist I : ishih to %i. ih, %^tnishit to it, or like the tffc sih and
tffrr sit of the first aorist II, which really stand for ^ + ^« + s, and ^ + TTs + 1.
In the Atmanepada the ^ s stands before the terminations of the optative,
e. g. wfa stya instead of iya. Besides this, the personal terminations originally
beginning with Tf^t or ^ th take an additional ^ s. (Remark, that the ^ s
before these terminations is liable to be dropt after a short vowel in the first
aorist, § 351.) Thus, instead of
Opt. pt, t^f?, fvm, ^mri, %*f?, frj^,
iya, ithdh, ita, ivahi, (ydthdm, iydtdm, imahi, (dhvam, iran, we have
Ben. WtV, Jrfter., Wte, tffaff, ^ftHTWt» *fNnrii, tftaff, tffc*,
siya, shhthdh, sishta, sivahi, siydsthdm, siydstdm, simahi, sidhvam, siran.
§ 386. Verbal bases ending in ay (Chur, Caus. Denom. &c.) drop
ay before the terminations of the benedictive Par. : *frp^ choray,
Ben. chorydsam; but in Atm. ^fttfirefa chorayishiya. Denominative
bases in ^ y drop ^ y in the Ben. Par. : ^3^T putriy, Ben. (jdlMuj putri-
ydsam ; but in Atm. orfftpfa putriyishiya.
§ 387. The benedictive Parasmaipada belongs to the weakening, the
196 BENEDICTIVE.

benedictive Atmanepada to the strengthening forms 344). Hence from

ftr^ chit, Par. fcrWTO chitydsam, Atm. ^firefal chetisMya.
§ 388. The benedictive Parasmaipada never takes intermediate ^ i. The
benedictive Atmanepada generally takes intermediate ^ i. Exceptions are
provided for by the rules §§ 33 1 seq.
Weakening of the Base before Terminations beginning with t^j.
§ 389. Some of the rules regulating the weakening of the base, which is
required in the benedictive Parasmaipada, may here be stated together with the
rules that apply to the weakening of the base in the passive and intensive.
§ 390. While, generally speaking, the terminations of the benedictive,
passive, and intensive exercise a weakening influence on the verbal base,
there is one important, though only apparent, exception to this rule with
regard to verbs ending in ^ i, f u, ^5 ri- Final ^ i and 3- u, before the
5 y of the terminations of benedictive, passive, and intensive, are lengthened
(Pan. vii. 4, 35), but not strengthened by Guna.
fechi, to gather; Ben. ^ftmtfcMydt; P&ss.nftirjicMyate; Int.^ftlriiichechiyate.
Final ^ ri is changed to ft: ri. (Pan. vn. 4, 28.)
^ kri, to do ; Ben. fgiiffiT kriydt ; Pass, ftprn kriyate. (The Intensive has
^rgffarsr chekriyate, Pan. vn. 4, 27.)
In roots, however, beginning with conjunct consonants, final *q ri is actually
strengthened by Guna, and appears as ^rcar. (Pan. vn. 4, 29.)
?R smri, to remember; Ben. smarydt; Pass. smaryate; Int.
'•HW^rf sdsmaryate.
Also in ^ ri, to go ; Ben. ^r§TTT arydt ; Pass, ^rift aryate; Int. ^TtHra ardryate.
Final ^ ri is changed to ^ ir, and, after labials, to gi^ Ar.
^ strt, to stretch ; Ben. wllili^ stirydt ; Pass. wl^H stiryate ; Int. TOrNiW
testiryate.
^ pri, to fill ; Ben. Vj^nnpurydt ; Pass. pHryate ; Int. Mlqljr) popuryate.
Exceptions : Jfft Si is changed to ^fij§ay.
yftSi, to lie down; (Ben. ^fz^sayyat does not occur, because the verb is Atmane-
padin); Pass. ^r«lff sayyate ; Int. ^rrjrant bdbayyate. (Pan. vn. 4, 22.)
^ i, after prepositions, does not lengthen the final ^ i in the benedictive.
\i, to go; Ben. ^Jf^iydt; but Ttfiprri^ samiydt. (Pan. vn. 4, 24.)
^ 4h, to understand, after prepositions, is shortened to 3ir uh. (Pan. vn. 4, 23.)
Ben. "^rn^uhydt ; Pass. Myate.
Ben. ^fflWiT samuhydt; Pass. W^rn1 samuhyate.
§ 391. The following roots may or may not drop their final tl n, and
then lengthen the preceding vowel. (Pan. vi. 4, 43.)
spr jan, to beget ; Ben. vfrqn^jdydt or *fzm{janydt ; Pass. m^Jtjdyate or
srarff jarayate; Int. STTSfrJTff jdjdyate or «T*prff janjanyate.
 BENEDICTIVE. 197

UTC! san, to obtain ; Ben. TOiT sdydt or w^CVK^sanydt ; Pass. TO sdyate or

^•ilrt sanyate ; Int. «mmrf sdsdyate or TOPTiT samsanyate.
WTMaw, to dig; Ben. ^rprrjf khdydt or ^nmi^khanydt ; Pass. WTTn khdyate
or ^ar^ khanyate; Int. ^1W>n) chdkhdyate or ^«^ri chahkhanyate.
In the passive only, tare, to stretch ; Ben. (Pirn^/anya/ ; Pass. HN^ tdyate
or (Tarff tanyate; Int. fflPtn) tantanyate.
§ 392. According to a general rule, roots ending in ^ ai and 0 change
their final diphthong in the general tenses into d : «t dhyai, vtnnt dhyd-
yate. Roots ending in ^rf d retain it : Vft pa, MHjii pdyate, he is protected.
But the following roots change their final vowel into ^ i in the passive
and intensive ; into ^ e in the benedictive Par. ; and keep it unchanged
before gerundial if ya. (Pan. vi. 4, 66, 67, 69.)
The six verbs called ghu*, and the following verbs:
Passive. Intensive. Benedictive f. Gerund.
dd, to give tfirk diyate ^hrff dediyate deydt ir^TO praddya
M\md, to measure »fhrff miyate qiftnif memiyate vcvftt^meydt KHTt pramdya
Vtnsthd, to stand vftififstMyate Tt&ifitteshthtyate ^mrnstheydt VHHWiprasthdya
^gai, to sing iffrfc gtyate %*ffarffjegiyate vtHTi^geydt wwipragdya
itfpd, to drink xf\j^piyate wftrnt pepiyate vnn^peydt ipmprapdya
^1 hd, to leave ^farff Myate ^ffrjUTfjehiyate ^mtf^heydt irfTT prahdya
so, to finish if\t(^ siyate iWhlTT seshiyate ^mn^seydt wmnprasdya
§ 393- The following verbs take Samprasdrana in the benedictive (Pan. m.
4, 104), passive, participle, and gerund. (Pan. vi. 1, 15.)
^l^vach, to speak; ^TTsvapf ||, to sleep; ^s^vas" (Pan. vi. 1, 20), to wish;
and the ^jftH? yajddi, i. e. those following yaj.
Ben. T^TTiT uchydt; Pass. g^TK uchyate ; Part, g'n: uktafy; Gev.^wuktvd.
The *WT(^ are, (33, 33—41) Tpf yty, to sacrifice; ^^vap, to sow; ^ vah, to
carry ; ^ «as, to dwell ; % ve, to weave ; ^ vye ||, to cover ; ^ hve ||,
to call; vad, to speak; ftj to grow.
* This term comprises the six roots <TH!^, <fN T3£> ?VTW, and >J7, all varieties of
the radicals dd and VT rfAa; hut not and %<^, i. e. (^nTT ddti, he cuts, and ^prf?T ddyati,
he cleans (Pan. 1. 1, 20). Hence diyate, it is given ; but ^TTil ddyate, it is cleaned.
t In other roots, ending in ^Tf d or diphthongs, and beginning with more than one con
sonant, the change into 1J e in the benedictive Par. is optional (Pan. vi. 4, 68). 0 glai, to
wither ; jj^ffi^ gleydt or JJTTTr^ ylayat. ?«rT khyd, to call ; JPTPITI^ khydydt or ^sprrj^ khyeydt.
X *SI^ scop, to send to sleep, takes Samprasdrana in the reduplicated aorist (Pan. vi.
1, 18). ■■UW^Ht^asushupat.
|| TiP^ svap, to sleep, syam, to sound, and ^ vye, take Samprasdrana in the
intensive also (Pan. vi. 1, 19); ^ftjj'Mn soshupyate, *jf*i*-qi) sesimyate, q^Mn veviyate.
?Q svi takes Samprasdrana optionally in the intensive (Pan. vi. 1, 30); ^ftsj^fiT sosuyate
or fhsfhnf sesviyate. ^ Atie forms Int. »Tl|«in johuyate (Pan. vi. 1, 33). In the intensive
TP^cfofy forms M<*)*in chekiyate (Pan. vi. 1, al)j W^pyify, im1l|rt/>epfyafe(Pan.vi.i, 29).
198 PASSIVE.

§ 394. The following verbs take Samprasdrana in the benedictive, passive,

participle, gerund, and intensive. (Pan. vi. I, 16.)
grah, to take ; 5*n jyd, to fail ; ajy vyadh, to pierce ; wr* vyach, to
surround ; ~sc^ vraSch, to cut ; ir^ prachh, to ask ; bhrajj, to fry.
%w graft; Ben. *J?rn^ grihydt ; Pass, ir^nfr grihyate ; Part. iprta: grihitah;
Ger. grihttvd; Int. "wdPp&ft jarigrihyate.
§ 395- to rule, substitutes f$r^ in the benedictive, passive,
participle, gerund, intensive, also in the second aorist. (Pan. vi. 4, 34.)
Ben. f$r*rn^ hishydt; Pass, fti'srir tishyate; Part, f^rt: tishtah; Ger. f^TfT
bishtvd; Aor. wf$N^ aHshat.
§ 396. With regard to the benedictive Atm. see the general rules as to
the strengthening of the base, $ 344. Remember, that if the benedictive
Atm. does not take intermediate ^ i, penultimate ^ i, T u, ^ ri are left
unchanged, whereas in other strengthening tenses they take Guna ($ 344).
Final ^ ri, too, remains unchanged, and ^ ri becomes ir, or, after labials,
^ ur. ftf^ kship, to throw, ftj**(fal Jcshipsiya; t^pri, to fill, vffin purshiya.
Benedictive.
Parasmaipada.
1. niti budhydsam budhydsva JUIW budhydsma
2. budhydh "^Mltd budhydstam ^Wrer budhydsta
3. yil?^ 6udAy<fr ^"UrreTT budhydstdm <JU||^: budhydsuh
Atmanepada. »
1. ^MWN bodhishiya Iffftrffarf? bodhisMvahi sftftrdfarf^ bodhisMmaki
2. ^ftrfhnt bodhishishthdh ^tfirtfNTOli bodhishtydsthdm Wtftral^ bodhisUdhvam
3. ^fipfhf bodhishishta «nrim1lTi^rr bodhisMydstdm '•fllVMlOT bodhisMran

CHAPTER XV.
PASSIVE.
§ 397. The passive takes the terminations of the Atmanepada.
Special Tenses of the Passive.
§ 398. The present, imperfect, optative, and imperative of the passive are
formed by adding n to the root. This is added in the same manner
as it is in the Div verbs, so that the Atmanepada of Div verbs is in all
respects (except in the accent) identical with the passive.
Atm. TTijnfr ndhyate, he binds ; Pass. nahydte, he is bound.
$ 399. Bases in ay (Chur, Caus. Denom. &c.) drop "snr ay before
if ya of the passive.
bodhay, to make one know ; 5rHn^ bodh-yate, he is made to know,
^"fa^ choray, to steal ; ^Hirr chor-yate, he is stolen.
 PASSIVE. 199

Intensive bases ending in ^ y retain their ^ y, to which the V ya of the

passive is added without any intermediate vowel.
rtltj^ loMy, to cut much ; gfrgant hUyyate, he is cut much.
Intensive bases ending in r^y, preceded by a consonant, drop their ^y.
bebhidy, to sever ; ^firenr bebhidyate, it is severed,
^hrt didhi, to shine, ^ft to yearn, ^ftjr daridra, to be poor, drop their
final vowel, as usual.
didhi, tfrunfr didhyate, it is lightened, i. e. it lightens.
§ 400. As to the weakening of the base, see the rules given for the
benedictive, §§ 389 seq.
Passive.
SINGULAR.
I. 3.
Pres. bhuye WTO bhuyase bhuyate
Impf. ^W?fr abhuye tpnpTR abhuyathdli abhuyata
Opt. H^TT bhuyeya V||r bhuyethdh »nnr bhuyeta
Imp. ^ bhuyai >TTO bhuyasva >nrfrt bhuyatdm
DUAL.
Pres. *jJTW^ bhuydvahe »j^r bhuyethe bhuyete
Impf. i <{ (5 abhuydvahi ^HMHn\ abMyethdm 'SWfrTT abhuyetdm
Opt. *{**'=( (V bhuyevahi >T^HTTf bhuyeydthdm *£w\a\ bkuyeydtdm
Imp. i^Miq? bhuydvahai *J*<Vl bhuyethdm *^HT bhuyetdm
PLURAL.
Pres. bhuydmahe »JW bhuyadhve bhuyante
Impf. ^r>nrRf^a6A4tya»«aAi abhuyadhvam ^PJifar abhuyanta
Opt. *^Tf? bhuyemahi bhuyedhvam V^UJ{^bhuyeran
Imp. bhuydmahai *T^T5ST bhuyadhvam H^tlT bhuyantdm
General Tenses of the Passive.
§401. In the general tenses of the passive, *T ya is dropt, so that, with
certain exception's to be mentioned hereafter, there is no distinction between
the general tenses of the passive and those of the Atmanepada. The ifya of
the passive is treated, in fact, like one of the conjugational class-marks
(wi&arajMw), which are retained in the special tenses only, and it differs
thereby from the derivative syllables of causative, desiderative, and intensive
verbs, which, with certain exceptions, remain throughout both in the special
and in the general tenses.
Reduplicated Perfect.
The reduplicated perfect is the same as in the Atmanepada.
Periphrastic Perfect.
The periphrastic perfect is the same as in the Atmanepada, but the
auxiliary verbs ^t^as and vf^bhu must be conjugated in the Atmanepada,
as well as 3p kri. 34a.)
200 PASSIVE.

Aorist.
§ 402. Verbs may be conjugated in the three forms of the first aorist
which admit of Atmanepada, and without differing from the paradigms given
above, except in the third person singular.
The second aorist Atmanepada is not to be used in a purely passive sense *.
$ 403. In the third person singular a peculiar form has been fixed in the
passive, ending in ^ i, and requiring Vriddhi of final, and Guna of medial
vowels (but a is lengthened), followed by one consonant.
Thus, instead of trsfc* ulavishta, w find ^nsyrfa aldv-i.
I First Form.
*)<Tir«r? abodhishta, — wftfv abodh-i.
^rfepr akshipta, — ^riffa akshep-i.
wire aneshta, — iHrirft andy-i.
akrita, — fWTft akdr-i.
thP^iI adita, — ^Tfir addy-i. [ Second Form.
vrcftf astfrshta, — SH fell ft. astdr-i.
^nr? asrishta, — WBf$ asarj-i.
iST^ni adagdha, — Wcjlf^ addh-i.
iHfijBjH adikshata, — vH^ fjjl adeS-i.
ffm aghukshata, — ^Pjjfe agxih-i.
«frt«|d alikshata, — n&Og aleh-i. I Fourth Form.
'STtrapT adhukshata, — iH<{lfij adoh-i.
«|\|Kjri adhikshata, — adeh-i.
§ 404. Verbs ending in WT a or diphthongs, take f^y before the passive ^ i.
da, ^rftt addyi, instead of vwf^rt adita.
§ 405. Verbs ending in ^Pl ay (Chur, Caus. Denom. &c.) drop ^sn^ay before
the passive ^ i, though in the general tenses, after the dropping of the passive
x(ya, the original ^n^ay may reappear, i.e. the Atm. may be used as passive,
^tv^ bodhay, ^rsftfti abodhi ; vfU^ choray, ^frft achori ; TX*F{ rdjay,
iSNjlH ardji.
In the other persons these verbs may either drop ay or retain it, being
conjugated in either case after the first form of the first aorist.
)TT^ bhdvay; Wlfcft abhdvishi, wnfarR abhdvishthdh, ^wrfo abhdvi; or
^wrqfirfa abhdvayishi, wmftan abhdvayishthdh, ^«rfo abhdvi.
§ 406. Intensive bases in ^ y add the passive ^ i, without Guna.
Int. bobhUy, abobhtiyi.
Intensive bases ending in T^y, preceded by a consonant, drop ^y, and refuse Guna.
Int. bebhidy ; Aor. ^r%firf^ abebhidi.
Desiderative bases, likewise, refuse Guna.
Des. ^pftfirs bubodhish ; Aor. ^i*jxtfvfa abubodhishi.
* This would follow if kartari extends to Pan. ill. I, 54, 56.
 PASSIVE. 201

§ 407. The following are a few irregular formations of the 3rd pers. sing,
aorist passive :
X^rabh, to desire, forms wifa arambhi. (Pan. vn. i, 63.) See § 345, t.
^ radh, to kill, — mfv arandhi. (Pan. vn. 1, 61.)
"sp^jabh, to yawn, — ^rsrfiT ajambhi. (Pan. vn. 1, 61.)
bhanj, to break, — ^T*rf»T abhanji or ^wifiT abhdji. (Pan. vi. 4, 33.)
W^labh, to take, — ^ftr alambhi or ^rarfn aldbhi. (Pan. vn. 1, 69.)
With prepositions ZaSA always forms ^n£f>T alambhi.
iF^jan, to beget, — ^rsrfVf a/a«i. (Pan. vn. 3, 35.)
badh, to strike, — ^T^fv abadhi. (Pan. vn. 3, 35.)
§ 408. Roots ending in ^i»t am, which admit of intermediate ^ i, do not
lengthen their radical vowel. (Pan. vn. 3, 34.)
sam, ^T^rfa a§ami ; to tarn, Vffftl atami ; but ^ yaw, wrrft? ayami.
Panini excepts dcham, to rinse, which forms ^rr^rfH dchdmi. Others add
cR*T Aawi, to warn, q»r nam (Pan. vn. 3, 34, v.).
§ 409. JThus the paradigms given in the Atmanepada may be used in the
passive of the aorist, with the exception of the 3rd pers. sing. (See p. 183.)
<« rt [% fa alavishi ^Tc5f%^f? alavishvahi vi to Pi *♦! alavishmahi
Wrtf^lBIl alavishthdh SHcifcmVH alavishdthdm Wctfkt4 or °^ alavidhmm or -dhvam
atoi mm alavishdtdm ■«!«<} fmlT alavishata

The Two Futures, the Conditional, and the Benedictive Passive.

$ 410. These formations are identically the same in the passive as in the
Atmanepada. Hence
Fut. ^Hv'Hf bodhishye, I shall be known.
Cond. VWtftpq abodhishye, I should be known.
Periphr. Fut. sflfaai^ bodhitdhe, I shall be known.
Bened. ^ftrcfa bodhishiya, May I be known !

Secondary Form of the Aorist, the Two Futures, the Conditional, and
Benedictive of Verbs ending in Vowels.
§ 411. All verbs ending in vowels, in ^ ay, and likewise ^ han, to
strike, "fTOj dris, to see, ?r? grah, to take, may form a secondary base (really
denominative), being identical with the peculiar third person singular of the
aorist passive, described before. Thus from eg lu we have ^THTfa aldvi, and
from this, by treating the final ^ i as the intermediate ^ i, we form,
Sing. 1. pers. ^HrtlfafK aldvi-shi, by the side of ^rafafa alavi-shi.
2. WWrftlSTt aldvi-shthdh, — — 'SMfaai: aldvi-shthdh.
3. "flcJlfa aldvi, — — ^TfSTfo aldvi.
d d
202 PASSIVE.

Dual i. pers. WWTftwfl? aldviskvahi, by the side of tmftvftfe alavi-shvahi.

2. m rt l Pel m vn aldvi-shdthdm, — — -flrifamni alavi-shdthdm.
3. WWlflnillri aldvi-shdtdm, — — ^tTTfarniT aldvi-shdtdm.
Plur. 1. pers. TOlflpilfl; aldvi-shmahi, by the side of ^raf^rf? aldvi-shmahi.
2. TB&rfavkaldvi-dhvamor^-dhvam — ^&favk al&vi-dhvam or
3. Vftlftal aldvi-shata, — — WTSftmi alavi-shata.
Fut. cJlfcju} lavi-shye, by the side of cSTm«I lavi-shye.
Cond. Vcgrfipi) aldvi-shye, — — Orff^uj aldvi-shye.
Per. Fut. arftnn^ Idvi-tdhe, — — tgfinrr^ lavi-tdhe.
Ben. eTffWfa Idvi-shiya, — — TsfWfal Idvi-shiya.
From fa chi, to gather, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass. tSMiHh achdyi; hence
Aor. ^rerftrfa achdyishi, besides <swf«f acheshi, &c.
Fut. Tffirat chdyishye, — cheskye.
, Cond. v^nftPR achdyishye, — acheshye.
Per. Fut. Tlfinn% chdyitdhe, — ^tTI? chetdhe.
Ben. ^Tftraffa chdyishiya, — ^^ht cheshiya.
From TTf ghrd, to smell, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass, ^nrrftt aghrdyi ; hence
Aor. JTHTftlft aghrdyishi, besides ^nrrftr aghrdsi.
Fut. llifuiii ghrdyishye, — W^ft ghrdsye.
Cond. WBlftr^ aghrdyishye, — *yuiu| aghrdsye.
Per. Fut. wftnrt^ ghrdyitdhe, — Ulril^ ghrdtdhe.
Ben. Trrftrefa ghrdyishiya, — imfta ghrdsiya.
From £| dhvri, to hurt, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass, ^tunft adhvdri; hence
Aor. vtqrftft adhvdrishi, besides ^rs^fw adhvrishi or mElftfa adhv&rishi.
Fut. tfltfi^ dhvdrishye, — ssrftw dhvdrishye.
Per. Fut. tOTlT»rr| dhvdritdhe, — dhvartdhe.
Ben. ttTrfttffa dhvdrishtya, — v^fadfivrishiya or taficftndhvarishiya*.
From in^ han, to kill, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass. ^hiiPh aghdni; hence
Aor. 'snrrftrfa aghdnishi, besides («l fvifH avadhishi) . Pan.vi.4,6at.
Fut. vifrittj ghdnishye, — ^fcrai hanishye.
Per. Fut. uifwriQ ghdnitdhe, — firnr hantdhe.
Ben. Tnf«T«rta ghdnishiya, — (Tfvtffa vadhishiya).
From epi dris, to see, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass. 03 f$? adarhi ; hence
Aor. ^f^ifa adarsishi, besides ^T^fEJ adrikshi.
Fut. ^f^xir darsishye, — 'JSJI drakshye.
Per. Fut. ^f^?ri^ darMtdhe, — £81?! drashtdhe.
Ben. ?[f^hT dar§ishiya, — <*^q drikshiya.

* See § 332, 5.
t Siddh.-Kaum. vol. 11, p. 270, seems to allow W^ftl ahasi.
 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. 203

From qfeffrah, to take, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass, ^yif^ agrdhi; hence
Aor. fflyifijfa agrdhishi, besides ^y^lfM agrahtshi.
Fut. irrf?'^ grdhishye, — ?T^^ grahishye.
Per. Fut. ?rriVrn^ grdhitdhe, — ST^ffT^ grahttdhe.
Ben. Jrrf^tfn grdhishiya, — ST^Wfa grahUhtya.
From ramay, to delight, Caus. of 7?T ram, 3rd pers. sing. Aor. Pass.
iHliH arami or 'srrif'T ardmi; hence
Aor. -iRfafa aramishi or -eujfHfq ardmishi, besides WTTTftrfa aramayishi.
§ 412. Certain verbs of an intransitive meaning take the passive \ i in the
3rd pers. sing. Aor. Thus ^"rtraft utpadyate (3rd pers. sing, present of the
Atmanepada of a Div verb), he arises, becomes d<}Mlfi{ udapddi, he arose,
he sprang up ; but it is regular in the other persons, T^TOrnri udapatsdtdm,
they two arose, &c. (Pan. 111. 1, 60.)
$ 413. Other verbs of an intransitive character take the same form
optionally (Pan. in. 1, 61):
^ta dip (^farff dipyate, he burns, Div, Atm.), ^iftT adtpi or ^IPus adtpishta.
>PT jan (»rrTff jayate, he is born, he is, Div, Atm. ; it cannot be formed
from ^cttjan (Hu, Par.), to beget), ^MfV| ajani or WSrftTI ajanishta.
budh {~^Vf( budhyate, he is conscious, Div, Atm.), ^TTtfv abodhi or
abuddha.
^.pdr (^rrfir pdrayati, he fills, Chur.), ^ft. ap4ri or wgft:8 apilrishfa.
KTi{ toy (imrk tdyate, he spreads, Bhu, Atm. ; really Div form of Tan),
vnnft atdyi or Wirrftrg atdyishta.
~m\pydy (vnrnt pydyate, he grows), *rorrfn apydyi or Wmftn apydyishta.

CHAPTER XVI.
PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE.
$ 414. The participle of the present Parasmaipada retains the Vikaranas
of the ten classes. It is most easily formed by taking the 3rd pers. plur. of
the present, and dropping the final ^ i. This gives us the Anga base, from
which the Pada and Bha base can be easily deduced according to general
rules ($182). Thus
Nom. S. Acc. Wff Instr. >r^TTT &c.
bhavanti bhavant bhavan bhavantam bhavatd
g^ni &c.
tudanti tudant tudan tudantam tudatd
^'Hfll &e.
divyanti divyant divyan divyantam divyatd
Dd 2
204 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE.

iAT^ Nom.S.nkq^ Acc. ^tfjiT Instr. 'TttTiTT &c.

chorayanti chorayant chorayan chorayantam chorayata
3=*n 5fpWT &c.
sunvanti sunvant sunvantam sunvatd
A 'A A rf«MI &c.
tanvanti tanvant tanvan tanvantam tanvata
■affair rifann &c.
Mnanti krinant krinan krirj.antam kriiiatd
■fl^fll &c.
«^
adanti adant adan adantam adatd
(§ 184)
juhvati juhvat juhvat juhvatam juhvatd
%*J ^ %VHT &c.
rundhanti rundhant rundhan rundhantam rundhatd
■ztwm (§ 184)
bobhuvat bobhuvat bobhuvatam bobhuvatd
J 41 5. The participle of the future is formed on the same principle.
^faujfir vrftp^ Nom.S.Hf^nr^ Acc.HfVofif Instr. vrfwin
bhavishyanti bhavishyant bhavishyan bhavishyantam bhavishyatd
§ 416. The participle of the reduplicated perfect may best be formed by
taking the 3rd pers. plur. of that tense. This corresponds with the Bha
base of the participle, only that the ^ s, as it is always followed by a vowel,
is changed to ^ sh. Having the Bha base, it is easy to form the Anga and
Fada bases, according to § 204. In forming the Anga and Pada bases, it
must be remembered,
1. That roots ending in a vowel, restore that vowel, which, before T. ufr,
had been naturally changed into a semivowel.
2. That, according to the rules on intermediate ^ i, all verbs which, without
counting the T, ul}, are monosyllabic in the 3rd pers. plur., insert ^ i.
(See Necessary ^ i, § 338, 1 ; Optional \ i, § 337, 8.)
3rd P. Plur. Instr. Sing. Nom. Sing. Acc. Sing. Instr. Plur.

babhuvuh babhuvushd babMLvdn babhuvdmsam babhuvadbhih

ninyuh ninyushd ninivdn nintvdrnsam ninivadbhih

tutuduh tutudushd tutudvdn tutudvdmsam tutudvadbhxh

r<f<^l^(§i43)
didivuh didivushd didivdn didivdrhsam didivadbhih
"JK^iHifaqla:
choraydmdsuh choraydmdsushd choraydmdsivdn choraydmdsivdmsam choraydmdsivadbhif.
 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. 205

3rd P. Plur. Instr. Sing. Nom. Sing. Acc. Sing. Instr. Plur.
13T- TO" IT"*
sushuvuh sushuvushd sushuvdn sushuvdmsam sushuvadbhih
*V
tenuh tenushd tenivdn tenivdmsam tenivadbhih
Wag:
chikriyuh chikriyushd chikrivdn chikrivdmsam chikrtvadbhih

dduh ddushd ddivdn ddivdmsam ddivadbhih

juhuvuh juhuvushd juhuvdn juhuvdmsam juhuoadbhih

rurudhuh rurudhushd rurudhvdn rurudhvdmsam rurudhvadbhih

§ 417. In five verbs, where the insertion of ^ i before ^ ras is optional
337> 8), we get the following forms :
3rd P. Plur. Instr. Sing. Nom. Sing. Acc. Sing. Instr. Plur.
7PT IT7*}: H'»JMr wf^RT^T or *T'WH* »lf'*Hi?T *rf*T^fkc
#am jagmuh jagmushd jagmivdn or jaganvdn jagmivdrhsam jagmivadbhih

Aan jaghnuh jaghnushd jaghnivdn or jaghanvdn jaghnivdihsam jaghnivadbhih

ftr^ fVf%?: fVftnpn fafagi^or firftrflpn^ ftrftrghj ftrfinrtn
etd vividuh vividushd vividvdn or vividivdn vividvdmsam vividvadbhifi

pis vivisuh vivisushd vivisvdn or vivisivdn vwiivdmsam vivisvadbhih

dris dadrisuh dadrisushd dadrisvdn or dadrisivdn dadrisvdmsam dadrisvadbhih

§ 418. The participle of the reduplicated perfect Atmanepada is formed
by dropping ^ ire, the termination of the 3rd pers. plur. Attn., and
substituting ^rH
^vjf^T babMvire—"VJ^TJT: babhUvdnalj.
^fgit chakrire — HCMR chakrdnah
dadire—^THt dadanah.
§ 419. The participle present Atmanepada has two terminations,—JTTiT
wiarea for verbs of the First Division (J 295), ^TPT awa for verbs of the Second
Division.
In the First Division we may again take the 3rd pers. plur. present Atm.,
drop the termination ^ nte, and replace it by JTPT: mdnah.
In the Second Division we may likewise take the 3rd pers. plur. present
Atm., drop the termination ^rff ate, and replace it by WTt dnab.
* The same optional forms run through all the Pada and Bha
 206 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE.

First Division. Second Division.

»T^TT bhava-nte—hihh: bhava-mdnab
j^ft tuda-nte— J^TTTJ tuda-mdnab
$<4d divya-nte—^NtHFT! divya-mdnah
*ft*.*i*r choraya-nte—^ftrwrm: choraya-mdnab
Caus. >fre*iw bhdvaya-nte—wh<jhh: bhdvaya-mdnah
Des. ^^tbubhilsha-nte—~^*gR\w.bubhilsha-mdnah
Int. bobMya-nte—wtHUHM: bobMya-mdnah
^f^Jt sunv-ate—H»WTTJ sunv-dnab
cP^ff tanv-ate— iPsrR: tanv-dnab
■jjhtnr krin-ate— al'iUM*. krin-dnab
i«^rt ad-ate—VH<"M: ad-dnab
ij^ttjuhv-ate—*^m: juhv-dnab
^jitrundh-ate—%>n»n rundh-dnah

§ 420. The participle of the future Atmanepada is formed by adding

»TPT: mdnah in the same manner.
ufauft bhavishya-nte —Hftrapmn bhavishya-mdnab
H^n neshya-nte— Hmumi: neshya-mdnab
ifiitjirt totsya-nte — ifli**jHM*. totsya-mdnab
tjfuujrf edhishya-nte—cfiraHTO edhishya-mdnab

§ 421. The participles of the present and future passive are formed by
adding jtr: mdnab in the same manner.
>jqTT bhllya-nte— bMya-mdnab
Vixnf budhya-nte—*rupn«T: budhya-mdnab bhdvishya-nte—bhdvishya-mdnah
Qr4i sHya-nte—WJJMIW: stdya-mdnab
fttm kriya-nte—f^WTO: kriya-mdnab ndyishya-nte—ndyishya-mdnab
Hi^irf bhdvya-nte—wi«JHH: bhdvya-mdnab Or like the Part. Fut. Atm.

The Past Participle Passive in jr. tah and the Gerund in tva.
§ 422. The past participle passive is formed by adding cK tab or ^: nab
to the root, kri, tpc. kritab, done, masc. ; ^frTT kritd, fem. ; "^Tt kritam,
neut. Zm, ig«Tt Mnab, cut.
This termination n /a is, as we saw, most opposed to the insertion of
intermediate ^ i, so much so that verbs which may form any one general
tense with or without ^ i, always form their past participle without it. The
number of verbs which must insert before it ta is very small. ($332,0.)
Besides being averse to the insertion of intermediate ^ i, the participial
termination Tt ta is one of those which have a tendency to weaken verbal
bases. (See £ 344.)
§ 423. The gerund of simple verbs is formed by adding rWT tvd to the
root. ^ kri, ^STT kritvd, having done. \pd, pHtvd or (rftriTT pavitvd,
having purified.
The rules as to the insertion of the intermediate ^ i before ST tvd have
been given before. With regard to the strengthening or weakening of the
 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. 207

base, the general rule is that jsn tvd without intermediate ^ i weakens, with
intermediate ^ i strengthens the root. In giving a few more special rules
on this point, it will be convenient to take the terminations tt ta and jTt tvd
together, as they agree to a great extent, though not altogether.

I. ir. tah and i^t tva, with intermediate \ i.

§ 424. If it: tah takes intermediate ^ i, it may in certain verbs produce
Guna. In this case the Guna before i^T tvd is regular.
3TT H3 to lie down, $ftnR bayitah (Pan. 1. 2, 19) ; ;tOK3T sayitvd.
f^T svid, to sweat, ^f^r: sveditah or fs"^: svinnah ; ^rf^T sveditvd.
fa^ mid, to be soft, Hf^ir: meditah ; Hf^WT meditvd.
ft^ kshvid, to drip, tyRjrt: kshveditalj, ; Qtf^iVl kshveditvd.
dhrish, to dare, vfiliT: dharshitah ; vftr^T dharshitvd.
Wmrish, to bear, ^fSri: marshitah (patient), (Pan. 1. 2, 20) ; nflr^T marshitvd.
\pu, to purify, Trfain pavitah (Pan. 1. 2, 22) ; ijftr3T jsatfitaa.
$ 425. Verbs with . penultimate ^ « may or may not take Guna before
rf /a with intermediate ^ i, if they are used impersonally.
*JT^ oyw£, to shine, a Of if dyutitam or ^ftfiTK dyotitam, it has been shining.
(Pan. 1. 2, 21.)
$ 426. If RTT f»o" takes intermediate ^ i, it requires, as a general rule,
Guna (Pan. 1. 2, 18), or at all events does not produce any weakening of the
base. =|w vrit, to exist, qfffffl vartitvd. sraihs, to fall, crTtlril srainsitva
(Pan. 1. 2, 23). ^^^» to purify, xrfai^T pavitvd (Pan. 1. 2, 22).
Verbs, however, beginning with consonants, and ending in any single con
sonant except ^yor^o, preceded by ^, ^ 1 or 'Si u, take Guna optionally
(Pan. 1. 2, 26) : ipr oywif, to shine, arid HI dyotitvd or a id HI dyutitvd. The
same option applies to ^ /risA, to thirst ; mrish, to bear ; AriS, to
attenuate (Pan. 1. 2, 25) ; Tjfai^T trishitvd or nft^T tarshitvd.
§ 427. Though taking intermediate ^ i, too1 does not produce Guna,
but, if possible, weakens the base, in rud, to cry, ^f^WT ruditvd (Pay. 1.
2, 8) ; ftr^ vid, to know, f^f^T viditvd ; ^ ?rawsA, to steal, gfawi mushitvd ,-
yfegrah, to take, i^U^X grihitvd ; i^Smrid, to delight, Hfr^T mriditvd (Pan. 1.
a) 7)> ^ mrirf, to rub, Hfyrfl mriditvd; TVJgudh, to draw, JjfMuli gudhitvd;
f*B5{ to hurt, faifsrWT kliSitvd ; ^ uad, to speak, yf^FTl uditvd ; ^
to dwell, ■gf^T ushitvd.
§ 428. Roots ending in ^ th or is ph, preceded by a nasal, may or may
not drop the nasal before tvd (Pan. 1. 2, 23) ; sjnji^T granthitvd or JjftTF^r
grathitvd, having twisted. The same applies to the roots &t vaiich, to cheat,
and ?p» lunch, to pluck (Pan. 1. 2, 24) ; ^f^T vahchitvd or qpuiril vachitvd.
208 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE:

II. cTC tah and r^r tva, without intermediate \ i.

\ 429. Roots ending in nasals lengthen their vowel before m tah and tTf tv&
(Pan. vi. 4, 15). ^ sam, to rest, ^rhn kdntah, grfafl kantva.
W{ &ram, to step, may or may not lengthen its vowel before tva
(Pan. vi. 4, 18). tp{ kram, j^rir. krdntah, ■grf^T krdntvd or ,g59T krantvd;
also ftftrdi kramitvd.
§ 430. The following roots, ending in nasals, drop them before TK tfaA and
^a*. (Pan. vi. 4, 37.)
^ yom, to check, v^r. yatah, yatvd* ; Vfram, to sport, TjH ratah,
TSJratvd; rftf nam, to bend, tTW: natah, natvd ; ^ han, to kill,
^iH hatah, ^rWT Aa/va ; ip^ gam, to go, tr: gatah, itst gatvd ; »T5^ maw,
to think, Hit: matah, matvd; «nr va«, to ask ; it^/aw, to stretch, tttT:
tata/i, faffa ; and the other verbs of the Tan class, ending in n.
Note —Of the same verbs those ending in drop the nasal before the gerundial f ya
and insert Kj; n*tm pramatya (Pan. vi. 4, 38) : those ending in ^ m may or may not drop
the nasal before the gerundial *T ya; TPIW pragatya or VJTf*l pragamya.
$ 431. The following verbs drop final ^w, and lengthen the vowel.
jT5^ jan, to bear, »nen jdtah, STTWT jdtvd ; *R saw, to obtain, ^mn sdtah,
HTrTI sa/m ; ?sT«^ Maw, to dig, ^TiTC khdtah, Wli^J khdtvd.
1. Roots ending in ^ cM, or "^v, substitute and 3iw. (Pan. vi. 4, 19.)
Vftprachh, to ask, vp; prishtah ($ 125), tnjT prishtvd ; f^f^div, to play,
dyunah, ^r^j dyutvd.
2. Roots ending in "^rcAA, or #rr, drop both their final consonants. (Pan.vi.4,21.)
murchh, to faint, Jrif: mdrtah; "f^turv, to strike, crag: turnah.
§ 432. The following verbs change their ^ i> with the preceding or
following vowel into 'Si u. (Pan. vi. 4, 20.)
ij^ jvar, to ail, j&rnah, »jj#r jurtvd ; taar, to hasten, Tn§: tHrnah,
Tgkl Mrtvd; f&^sriv, to dry, ^th srdtah, ^^nsrHtvd; ^s^av, to protect,
■3iJT: rf£a/t, "3551 3toa ; mav, to bind, JjtT: mutah, i|r«n mutva,
§ 433. Roots ending in £ ai substitute ^rr d; v} dhyai, to meditate,
«mr: dhydtah, vxfift\ dhydtvd : or ^ 2 ; ^ gai, to sing, ifan gitah, jftor gitvd.
Final ^ e and a, too, are changed to ^ i ; m pd, to drink, xftin pitah,
iffo^T jj&w ; ^ a%e, to suck, >ftir: dhitah, \ftf^T dhitvd.
§ 434. The following roots change their final vowel into ^ i.
rfo, to cut, f^in dilah, fifRT ditvd (Pan. vn. 4, 40); TTt so, to finish,
ftnn sitah, ftrFTT sitvd; HT to measure, finr. mitah, fa^T mitvd ;
Wl sthd, to stand, fanr. sthitah, fcqffl sthitvd ; VT a*Aa, to place, f\nrc
Aifa#, ffr^T (Pan. vn. 4, 42); ?T Aa, to leave (tTto Mnah), f^(\
hitvd (Pan. vn. 4, 43).
* See verbs without intermediate ^ i. (§ 332, 13, and 16.)
 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. 209

§ 435- ^ to sharpen, and "sft chho, to cut, substitute ^ i, or take the

regular TOT d.
iff so, f$nc. Utah or ^rnr. sdtah, fgi'Rl sitvd or ^TTRT sataa (Pan. VII. 4, 41).
$ 436. Exceptional forms :
dd, to give, forms dattah*, dattvd (Pan. vii. 4, 46).
ffW\sphdy, to grow, forms ^RfTir: sphitah (Pan. vi. 1, 22).
^ styai, to call (with H^ra), forms TTCTTiT: prastitah (Pan. VI. 1, 23) and
Ttwfal prastimah (Pan. viii. 2, 54).
^ syai, to curdle, forms ^itrr: stnah, and "5#TTT: s^o#, cold ; but *$<4H:
samsydnah, rolled up (Pan. vi. 1, 24, 25).
*«n*T pydy, to grow, forms xfhr: ptnah ; but itr: pydnah after certain
prepositions (Pan. vi. 1, 28).
$ 437. The verbs which take Samprasarana before it: tah and i^t tvd have
been mentioned in § 393, as undergoing the same change in the benedictive
and passive. vach, to speak, ^s: uktah, uktvd, &c.
$ 438. Roots which can lose their nasal (6 345 f) lose it before k: tah and
tvd. bNt^ srams, to tear, s^r: srastah, yMI srastvd.
But skand, to stride, forms its gerund ^3T skantvd, and syand,
to flow, ^q'tfi syantvd (Pan. vi. 4, 31), although their «^» is otherwise liable
to be lost. Part. skannah, t&gc. syannah.
«T3i «a£, to perish, and roots ending in j^y, otherwise liable to nasalization,
retain the nasal optionally before r^TT tvd (Pan. vi. 4, 32). ^TfT naihshtvd or
TOT nashtvd (but only to: nashtah) ; ranktvd or T^RT raktvd (but only
HR raktah); Kr^majj, to dive, ifaT jwantoa or JTfiT OTaWra' (Pan. vn. 1, 60).
§ 439. Causal verbs form the participle after rejecting to*1 aya; cRK^frf
kdrayati, Srtftjn kdritah, but gnrftn^T kdrayitvd.
§ 440. Desiderative verbs form the participle and gerund regularly ;
p«i cfcl M Trf chikirshati, fqcffrffin chikirshitah, f^riflr^T chikirshitvd.
§ 441. Intensive verbs Atm. of roots ending in vowels form the participle
and gerund regularly; M Sffant chekriyate, ^rftni: chekriyitah, ^r^ftlt^T
chekrtyitvd. After roots ending in consonants the intensive Ts y is dropt ;
■srfasnr bebhidyate, ^f»rf^w: bebhiditah, ^rfnf(jr<(l bebhiditvd.
Intensive verbs Par. form the participle and gerund regularly; ^ffcfw
charkarti, wfjfclTC charkritah, ^f%3N charkritvd.

nah instead of it: tah in Me Pas/ Participle.

§ 442. Certain verbs take «r: na# instead of in in the past participle
passive, provided they do not take the intermediate ^ i.
* After prepositions ending in vowels, ^ da may be dropt, and the final ^ i and T u of a
preposition lengthened. W^TC pradattah, VPS', prattdhj *J$is: sudattah, WT. suttah.
E e
210 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE.

1. Twenty-one verbs of the Kri class, beginning with t£ 14, to cut, ^r«T:
lunah, (Dhatupatha 31, 13; Pan. viii. 2, 44). The most important are,
Wti: dhdnah, shaken ; iffa: jinah, decayed. Some of them come under
the next rule.
2. Twelve verbs of the Div class, beginning with \s4 (Dhatupatha 26, 23—35;
Pan. viii. 2, 45). The most important are, dunah,, pained ; ^fa:
dinah., wasted; ThjH'. prtnah, loved.
3. Verbs ending in ^ ri, which is changed into ir or ^ 4r. stri,
"*ff\W. stirnah, spread ; *ffasr: sirnah, injured ; tto: purnah, filled (also
^S: pHrtalj,, Pan. vm. 2, 57) ; ^Wijr: dirndl}, torn ; sftifr: jirnah, decayed.
4. Verbs ending in ^ d; f>T^ bhid, fW?: bhinnah, broken ; chhid, f%&:
chhinnah, cut. But mad, WS'. mattah, intoxicated. In ^ nud, to
push, ft^ vid, to find, and und, to wet, the substitution is optional
(Pan. viii. 2, 56) ; »pr: nunnah or ~^f(: nuttah.
5. Verbs which native grammarians have marked in the Dhatupatha with
an indicatory ^ft 0 ; srs^ bhuj (>pft bhujo, Dhatupatha 28, 124), to bend,
>J"T: bhugnalj,.
6. Verbs beginning with a double consonant, one of them being a semivowel,
and ending in ^rr d, or ^ e, 5r ai, ^rt 0, changeable to ^rt d; ' ff glai,
»JTfT: glanah, faded. Except wr dhyai, to meditate, >fta: dhitah; ^TT
khyd, to proclaim, ^TTff: khydtah,. In § trai, to protect, UT #Ar<2, to
smell, the substitution is optional; trdnah or ^TiT: trdtah, (Pan.
viii. 2, 56).
7. Miscellaneous participles in tt: nah : T^fai: kshinah, from ftf feAi, to
waste, dy4nah,, from to play, (not to gamble, where it is
^7r: dyUttah) ; fjnr: lagnah, from <?T Za^, to be in contact with (Pan.
vii. 2, 18); also from c5»T to be ashamed; Jjjhr: ^rea& and ^TR:
Sydnah, coagulated, but yftir. Mtafy, cold.
$ 443. Native grammarians enumerate certain words as participles which,
though by their meaning they may take the place of participles, are by
their formation to be classed as adjectives or substantives rather than as
participles. Thus thS pakvah, ripe ; ^rrair: sushkah, dry ; T^TO: kshdmah,
weak ; kri&afy, thin ; Jrefta: prastimah, crowded ; "W^: phullafi, expanded ;
T^fa: kshival}, drunk, &c.
$ 444. By adding the possessive suffix vat ($ 187) to the participles
in s ta and tf na, a new participle of very common occurrence is formed,
being in fact a participle perfect active. Thus opr. kritah, done, becomes
fireTf^ kritavdn, one who has done, but generally used as a definite verb,
«f? ^iRT'^ -ta katam kritavdn, he has made the mat ; or in the feminine tft
 PARTICIPLES, GERUNDS, AND INFINITIVE. •211

<jmn1 sd kritavati, and in the neuter TTtipmIt tat kritavat. They are regularly
declined throughout like adjectives in ^tt vat.

Gerund in n ya.
§ 445. Compound verbs, but not verbs preceded by the negative particle
^ a, take n ya instead of i«n tvd. Thus, instead of >jjgT bhutvd, we find
Ttwt sambMya ; but frfrrffl ajitvd, not having conquered.
§ 446. Verbs ending in a short vowel take w tya instead of n ya. ftl ji,
to conquer, ftrafT jitvd, having conquered; but fafViT vijitya. >J bhri, to
carry, bhritvd ; but iopq sambhritya, having collected. Except ftf kshi,
which forms H«fUl prakshiya, having destroyed (Pan. vi. 4, 59).
§ 447. Causative bases with short penultimate vowel, keep the causative
suffix ^ ay before 11 ya (Pan. vi. 4, 56) : irmrfir gamayati, gamayya,
having caused to go. Otherwise the causative suffix is, as usual, dropt:
dKHfrf tdrayati, Jnrri} pratdrya, having caused to advance. irnnrfiT prdpayati
forms HT*n prdpya and irppzr prdpayya, having caused to reach (Pan. vi. 4, 57).
§ 448. The verbs called ^ ghu (§ 392*), HT md, to measure, sthd, to
stand, irr gd, to sing or to go, tjt pd, to drink or to protect, ?t hd, to leave,
so, to finish, take d, not ^ i (Pan. vi. 4, 69). ^ do, to cut, <H<JIU
avaddya ; sthd, prasthdya. But HT j><2, to drink, may form jprrn
prapdya or iprta prapiya (Sar.) .
$ 449. Verbs ending in j^wi, which do not admit of intermediate ^ i, may or
may not drop their Mm. Ex. Tf^nam, to bow, ymizf pranamya or Tpninpranatya;
it* jram, to go, wlTRf dgamya or wrpnn dgatya. Other verbs ending in
nasals, not admitting of intermediate ^ i, or belonging to the Tan class,
always drop their final nasal. Ex. han, tt^w prahatya ; tan, DM
pratatyaf. ^r^khan and ?[<tsjan form ^vq khanya or khdya, irsfjanya
or s^jdya.
§ 450. Verbs ending in ^ ri change it to ^ ir, and, after labials, into
■5R^ ur. Ex. taffl*) vittrya, having crossed ; samp&rya, having filled.
§ 451. Certain verbs are irregular in not taking Samprasdrana. Thus
% ve, to weave, forms pravdya ; ~^[jyd, to fail, STOTPI upajydya ; «T «ye,
to cover, H=jjth pravydya, but after xrfic jaari optionally tjfcajin parivydya or
Mfl^fiq pariviya (Pan. vr. 1, 41—44).
$ 452. Some verbs change final ^ i and $ £ into ^srt «• Thus »ft mi,
ifonfil mindti, he destroys, and ft? mi, (H-ftPrt minoti, he throws, form ftprnt
nimdya ; to destroy, Tq^TT upaddya ; <yt to melt, optionally ftTOPI
»iZ%a or fqTTta t>i%a (Pan. vi. 1, 50-51).
t Versus memorialis of these verbs : ^ftr§ft«1*ft ^fiRVJ^rgT JlfailfH: I fTSpj^

e e 2
 212 VERBAL ADJECTIVES.

CHAPTER XVII.
VERBAL ADJECTIVES.
Verbal Adjectives in Kaj: tavyah, ^nft«i: aniyah, or in yah.
$ 453. These verbal adjectives (called Kritya) correspond in meaning to the
Latin participles in ndus, conveying the idea that the action expressed by the
verbs ought to be done or will be done. cRff^a: kartavyah, oiPtuft^i: karaniyafy,
<GT*r: kdryah1, faciendus. Ex. M*hwn Wt*K dharmas tvayd kartavyah, right
is to be done by thee.
§ 454. In order to form the adjective in Kmc tavyah,, take the periphrastic
future, and instead of ht td put tpjt: tavyah.
Thus dd, to give ^TfTT ddtd <^Trfa?t ddtavyah ^pftlt ddniyah ^Tt deyah
H gai, to sing JITUT paYa HTiTai: gdtavyah linflTt: gdniyah VRi geyah
TUji, to conquer nn'M'.jetavyah *t«<*fl«4tjayaniyah sfTJ ./eyaA
>T bhu, to be nfclrfl bhavitd WfViTSj: bhavitavyah M«) bhavaniyah K^lJorHran2
3£ kri, to do kartd kartavyah *<UfN: karaniyah oSI§: kdryah
T^/rtf, to grow old *irwior»l0in3 »tr<rt«4:or»(Orl«j:4 an3Dtr[:./'ararafya£ xfFl'.jdryah
fiS^ kshvid, to
sweat kshveditd kshveditavyah kshvedantyah kshvedyah
"WVbudh, to know «Tl Pv| ri I bodhitd «fl f*l H«J:bodhitavyah <f\Mi$H\bodhaniyah ^\W.bodhyah
t^^krish, to draw or 171 6 «r: or •giFSi: 6 ^frrfhr. karshaniyah ^TO krishyah
W^kuch7,to squeeze ^facTT kuehitd «P«lrt*l|: kuchitavyah 'W^rfh?: kuchaniyah <**<4'. kuchyah
firemiA, to sprinkle TOT media *i«s medhavyah ■H^HT *II mehaniyah H?TC mehyah
*PT $ram, to go 'iri°<4t gantavyah 'l*Hli: gamaniyah gamyah
"^31 oris, to see "5?T drashtd J8<»IJ drashtavyah <i$\'i\'K darsaniyah ^^m; drisyah
^31 dami, to bite ^FT damshtd ^k°m; damshtavyah ^\\ damtaniyah ^V.damsyah
Caus.HT^AAaVay, to
cause to be bhdvayitd bhdvayitavyah bhdvaniyah bhdvyah
Des. ^fTl bubhush, to
wish to be bubhushitd bubhdshitavyah bubhushaniyah bubhushyah
Int.1TTH^Iio6AMy
bobhuyitd bobhuyitavyah bobhuyaniyah bobhuyyah
Int. '^tH 006M
bobhavitd bobhavitavyah bobhavaniyah bobhavyah
Int. %f»TS^ fteiAidy ^firfVfTT
bebhiditd bebhiditavyah bebhidaniyah bebhidyah
1 Another suffix for forming verbal adjectives is TTftJT; elimah, which is, however, of
rare occurrence ; pack, to cook, lint pachelimd mdshdh, beans fit to cook ;
fW^"fc5i; bhidelimah, fragile. (Pan. III. I, 96, v.)
2 bhavyah or bhdvyah. 3 jaritd or jaritd. 4 jaritavyah or jaritavyah.
5 harshid or krashtd. 6 karshtavyah or krashtavyah. 7 Never takes Guna (§345, note).
 VERBAL ADJECTIVES. 213

§ 455. In order to form the adjective in ^rfffa: aniyah, it is generally

sufficient to take the root as it appears before Tt*r. tavyah, omitting, however,
intermediate 35 i, and putting W«fNc aniyah instead. Guna-vowels before
aniyalj, have, of course, the semivowel for their final element, and
there can be no occasion for the intermediate 5 i. The ^PT ay of the
causative and the t^y after consonants of intensives and other derivative
verbs are, as usual, rejected, ^pi budh, Ttyqfft bodhayati, ^tvrffhr. bodhani-
yah ; f»r^ bhid, ^fcvil bebhidyate, %ft<»»flii: bebhidaniyah.
§ 456. In order to form the adjective in tj: yaA, it is generally sufficient
to take the adjective in wtftm aniyah and to cut off ^T»ft am. Thus
bhav-ani-yah becomes vmr. bhavyah ; innftw. chet-ani-yah, ^nr: chetyah ;
^TTJfti: vay-ani-yah, *t*H veyah; ftafhc bodh-ani-yah, ^Hti: bodhyah. A few
more special rules, however, have here to be mentioned :
1. Final ^ e, 5? ai, ^ft 0, become ^ e. i»T a"a, to give, ^ttc deyah ;
^ gai, to sing, iff: geyah. (Pan. in. 1, 98; VI. 4, 65.)
2. Final ^ i and ^ i take Guna, as before ^Tfffal aniya; f*iji, inr.jeyah, to
be conquered, different from jayyah, conquerable; fe; kshi, to
destroy, -gpi: ksheyah, different from kshayyah, destructible (Pan.
vi. 1, 81). Final 7 u and "31 it, under the same circumstances, are
changed to ^ra av, or, after avasya, when a high degree of
necessity is expressed, to ^rr^ dv ; VFHX bhavyah or s^wistl avaSya-
bhdvyah ; fkjpg siP«Hl HT*4 viprena suchind bhdvyam, a Brahman must
be pure. Final "3i if it appears as f^uv before aniya, appears
as '3i 4 before n ya ; ^gd, to sound, ir^ftii guvaniya, ini giiya.
3. Final ^ ri and ^ r2 before tc. yah, but not before '»n«fl^: aniyah, take
Vriddhi instead of Guna. ^r§: kdryah; Trrifc pdryah. (Pan. in. 1,
120, 124.)
4. Penultimate ^ ri, which takes Guna before ^TTta: aniyah, does not take
Guna before Tf. yah, with few exceptions ; ~^UK vridhyah, "^n: drisyah
(Pan. in. 1, 110). But Arip, to do, forms =K^ii: kalpyah ; ^ vrish,
to sprinkle, ^tcj: vrishyah or varshyah (Pan. in. 1., 120). Penultimate
^ ri becomes ^T, ir ; c|tt krit, eirtw: kirtyah.
5. Penultimate and ^ w take Guna before V. yah, as before ^nrfa: aniyah;
wo", ^sr: vedyah ; sre sm«A, ^flm: Soshyah.
6. Penultimate a, prosodially short, before *K yah, but not before w»rl*r.
aniyah, is lengthened, unless the final consonant is a labial (Pan. in.
1, 98; 124); has, to laugh, ^ro: hdsyah; ^ vah, ^t?j: vdhyah.
But sap, to curse, ^HUt sapyah ; pjH Za6A, ^«r: labhyah. The a
remains likewise short in ^PC. sakyah, from sak, to be able ; in
214 VERBAL ADJECTIVES.

*r?r: sahyah, from sah, to bear (Pan. m. i, 99), and some other verbs*.
khan forms ^hr: kheyah (Pan. m. 1, 111), which, however, may be
derived from # thai, to dig ; f»T han, ^m: vadhyah or ^nw: ghdtyah.
§ 457. The following are a few derivatives in v. yah, formed against the
general rules.
TPIffup, to protect, may form iron gupyah; jjtj guh, to hide, ij?n guhyah;
xg^jush, to cherish, srar: jushyah ; ^ grah, to take, JJ?n grihyah, after
nfir ^rotfi and ^iftr apt ; ^ aae?, to speak, tjt: udyah, in composition
(Pan. in. 1, 106; 114. mftwi <+WT brahmodyd kathd, a story told by a
Brahman) ; >T to be, »ni bhuya, in composition (Pan. ill. I, 107.
sTSPrtf VK', brahmabMyam gatah, arrived at Brahmahood) ; 311^ sds, to
rule, fijr*TC sishyah, pupil.
We find 7^ < inserted before n: ya#, in analogy to the gerunds in ti ya, in
the following verbs :
^ i, to go, ^m: ityah ; ^ s<w, to praise, stutyah ; vri, to choose,
^W: vrityah; rfri, to regard, ^Tff: drityah ; vf bhri, to bear, >TW:
bhrityah ; e£ Ari, to do, ^wt krityah. But many of these forms are only
used in certain senses, and must not be considered as supplanting the
regular verbal adjectives. Thus Jj^rc guhyah and nt?K gohyah both
occur ; W^K duhyah and dohyah, &c.
$ 458. Verbs ending in ^ ch or i^j change their final consonant into
?K k or 11 g if the following n ya {nyat) requires the lengthening of the vowel.
pach, pdkyam ; }p^bhuj, to enjoy, jifrq bhogyam, but vftjit bhojyam,
what is to be eaten (Pan. vu. 3, 69).
There are, however, several exceptions. Verbs beginning with a guttural
do not admit the substitution of gutturals. Likewise the following verbs :
iT5^ yaj, tjt^ ydch, ruch, Xf^pravach, rich, ?T5^ tyaj, ^^puj, aj,
■g»T vraj, vanch (to go). Thus Trraj ydjyam, ttr} yachyam, tfai rochyam,
144144 pravdchyam, 'srar archyam, TOTitf tydjyam, ttrt ptijyam (Prakriya-
Kaumudi, p. 55 b).
Infinitive in tj turn.
$ 459. The infinitive is formed by adding 'j turn. The base has the same
form as before the wr td of the periphrastic future, or before the iT«K tavyah
of the verbal adjective, 'gv budh, "^tfiiff bodhitum. (See § 454.) Ex. ^rajr
TfJ 3*1 Iff krishnam drashtum vrajati, he goes to see Krishna ; «STf5:
bhoktum kdlah, it is time to eat.
* Panini (m. 1, 100) mentions only *U£#ad, li^mad, ^^ehar, W^yam, if used without
preposition. The Sarasvati (ill. 7, 7) includes among the S'akadi verbs, 3T3£ ^**> sah,
Tp^gad, W^mad, ^CcAar, xpTyam, iT3i tak, ^TC^s'as, ^t^chat, TiTyaJ, TfiTpai, »PT./an,
?»T han, C^vadh), sal, ~^sruch.
 CAUSATIVE VERBS. 215

Verbal Adverb.
§ 460. By means of the suffix am, which, as a general rule, is added to
that form which the verb assumes before the passive ^ i (3rd pers. sing. aor.
pass., §403), a verbal adverb is formed. From vp^bhuj, to eat, «1»T bhojam;
from pa, to drink, Trrj} pdyam. Ex. ^t?j »rt»r W»rftT agre bhojam vrajati,
having first eaten, he goes. This verbal adverb is most frequently used
twice over. Ex. >fRr >rt3T ^»ffir bhojam bhojam vrajati, having eaten and
eaten, he goes (Pan. m. 4, 22). It is likewise used at the end of compounds;
^vhstt dvaidhamkdram, having divided ; ^fhoRTt uchchail.ika.ram, loudly.

CHAPTER XVIII.
CAUSATIVE VERBS.
$ 461. Simple roots are changed into causal bases by Guna or Vriddhi
of their radical vowel, and by the addition of a final ^ i. The root is then
treated as following the Bhu class, so that appears in the special tenses as
^rq aya. Thus vt^bhu" becomes bhdvi and *fraifir bhdvayati, he causes to
be; «pj budh becomes W^fv bodhi and ^ftrqfiT bodhayati, he causes to know.
$ 462. The rules according to which the vowel takes either Guna or
Vriddhi are as follows :
1. Final ^ i and ^ i, 7 u and "ai 4, ri and ^ ri take Vriddhi.
Thus smi, to laugh, WPPrfff smdyayati, he makes laugh.
*f\ ni, to lead, ^TTTTfir ndyayati, he causes to lead.
3T plu, to swim, srrarffr pldvayati, he makes swim.
H bM, to be, HraTfff bhdvayati, he causes to be.
^ kri, to make, oRKilfif kdrayati, he causes to make.
^ kri, to scatter, oRTfrfK kdrayati, he causes to scatter.
2. Medial \i,^ u,~% ri, 05 li, followed by a single consonant, take Guna ;
ri becomes ^ ir.
Thus vid, to know, ^^rfir vedayati, he makes know.
budh, to know, "=flVlfH bodhayati, he makes know.
^iiT krit, to cut, cBrhrfir kartayati, he causes to cut.
<s^ klip, to be able, oB^nrfir kalpayati, he renders fit.
3. Medial a followed by a single consonant is lengthened, but there are
many exceptions.
^ sad, to sit, tn^rffl sddayati, he sets.
xn^pat, to fall, TiTtnrfjr pdtayati, he fells.
Exceptions :
I. Most verbs ending in ^nr am do not lengthen their vowel :
gam, to go, iwifii gamayati, he makes go.
TB\ kram, to stride, wnjfir kramayati, he causes to stride.
216 CAUSATIVE VERBS.

Verbs in ^th am which do lengthen the vowel are,

oR»T kam, to desire, eumiri kdmayate, he desires ; Caus. eMHTjfrT kdmayati, he
makes desire.
am, to move, ^mfrT amati, he moves ; Caus. ^iiM^frt dmayati, he makes move.
^JT cham, to eat, ^fir chamati, he eats ; Caus. ^TH*lfrf chdmayati, he
makes eat.
$am, if it means to see, SHWjfrT sdmyati, he sees ; Caus. ^rrairfrT kdma
yati, he shows ; but SlH^frf samayati, he quiets.
yum, unless it means to eat, *rarfff yachchhati ; Caus. TfR^frf ydmayati,
he extends ; but VRqfa yamayati, he feeds.
nam, to bend, necessarily lengthens its vowel after a preposition;
P<Himtfir vindmayati, he bends. In the simple verb the lengthening
. is optional.
gir vam, to vomit, necessarily shortens its vowel after a preposition ;
<J^*^frT udvamayati, he makes vomit. In the single verb the
lengthening is optional.
II. A class of verbs collected by native grammarians, and beginning with
tr ghat (Dh. P. 19, 1), do not lengthen their vowel. The same verbs
may optionally retain their short vowel in the 3rd pers. sing, aorist of
the causative passive 405). The following list contains the more
important among these verbs :
Causative.
Koot. 3rd Pers. Sing. Pres. Par. 3rd Pers. S!ing. Aor. Passive.
1. VZ^ghat, to strive TTZtflf ghatayati tNMHj or ^Mlfe agh&ti
2. "SfT^vyath, to fear ^RfTT vyathayati ^Sajftl or■ ^ranftr avyathi
3. VF^prath, to be famous TTSPrfil prathayati Wjrftl or ■si m 1 Pvi aprathi
4. mrad, to rub T3^?frT mradayati '■ayf^ or ■snaiT^ amradi
5. W^krap, to pity TfRHfH krapayati Waiftl or ■^Tfq aitrapt
6. tvar, to hurry HTTfir tvarayati ^Tr^ft; or ^Tfta^ri
7. rJZjvar, to burn with fever *n<M?<\ jvarayati ^njfic or vi-qift. a/cart
8. nat, to dance «14*lfiT natayati W^rfe or ■>mif<J anaft
9. "VN srath, to kill ^WTfrT srathayati 'srerfaoi• itll fa asrafAi
10. van, to act * M^lsfrT pravanayati Hllfrfor HT^Tf«T prdcani
11. iff^ jval, to shine * H4SI rt Tn prajvalayati UTsffe or UN 1 r<4pr<i/t»aZt
12. t*T smri, to regret **t<H fn smarayati ^TWft or ^TSRlftl asmari
13. "Zdri, to respect, (not to tear) ^TIHfrT darayati or
14. WT srd, to boil wmfa srapayati ^rsrfxi or «( >Si 1 fa a/rapi
15. ITT jfid, to slay, to please, to STUTfif jnapayati ^TsTftl 01• ^sTlfl a/nr5pt
sharpen (?), to perceive

* With a preposition, and optionally without a preposition.

 CAUSATIVE VERBS. 217

• I 6. chal, to tremble ^55*TfiT chalayati ^fllflS or ^r^tfc? achali

•17. *T<j[ mad, to rejoice, &c. H^fri madayati TOfij or ^WTf^ amatfc
■ 18. l^t^rfAcaji, to sound, to ring fcWUfrf dhvanayati ^resfa or ^TS«fTftT adhvani
19. <^ <ZaZ, to cut ^WrfiT dalayati (optional) ^frt or 'Jt^lfe adali
20. TOrai, to cover qrt*tfn valayati (optional) •wqfrt or ^WTftS avali
21. shhal, to drop Wc5*rfiff skhalayati (optional) 'STCjafrSor vnsufw askhali
22. ^TT trap, to be ashamed M"*J Th trapayati ^I^ftt or -aid I fa atrapi
23. I| *sAai, to wane *t| M M Trf" kshapayati ^TBjfa or ^T^Tft akshapi
• 24. jp^/ara (Div), nasci ^imPii janayati uuifi ajani *
• 25- *^ir^ (Div), to grow old arR^frf jarayati -H »l ft. or -w »t 1 (V a/ori
26. T3^rai?;(Bhu),tohunt,todye >C»l*4 Tn orX^frajayatiorranja- ^cifa or aranji
27. JJT ^Zaf or 0 ^Zai, to fade Jlll-qPd or UTOlfiT glapayati ^TJJftf or ^IJJTnT o^fZap*
28. snd f, to wash ^ MM fit or *HM*lfir snapayati 'Sfwfn or vnsiPci asnapi
29. para f, to cherish ^«iTTflT or ^TTTfiT vanayati viqfn or mqifii avani
30. TOT^aan, to approach TPPlftTor'NiHU^fri (?) phanayati wmftll or ^PSlftl aphani
Note —Some of these verbs are to be considered as mit, i. e. as having a short vowel in
the causative, if employed in the sense given above ; while if they occur again in other
sections of the Dhatupatha and with different meanings, they may be conjugated likewise as
ordinary verbs.
$ 463. Some verbs form their causative base anomalously :
I. Nearly all verbs ending in a, and most ending in ^ at, ^ft 0, change
able to insert i^jp before the causal termination. (Pan. vn. 3, 36.)
Thus dd, to give, <}<jifct daddti, he gives ; ^miTd ddpayati, he causes
- to give.
^ de, to pity, SPTfT dayate, he pities ; ^nnrfir ddpayati, he causes pity.
do, to cut, ^rfiT ddti or srfir dyati, he cuts ; <jimjfir ddpayati, he
causes cutting.
1| dai, to purify, ^prfff ddyati, he purines ; ^PPtfir ddpayati, he causes
■ , to purify.
II. Other irregular causatives are given in the following list. Their irregu
larity consists chiefly in taking p with Guna or Vriddhi of the radical
vowel; sometimes in lengthening the vowel instead of raising it to Guna;
and frequently in substituting a new base.
1. \i, to go, in ^snfrfr adhite, he reads; Caus. ^mrnnrffr adhydpayati, he
teaches}. (Pan. vi. 1, 48.)
2. ^ri,togo,^^itrichchhati; Caus. ^f^Tffjtarpayati, he places. (Pan. vn. 3,36.)
* Pan. vii. 3, 35.
t Optionally as simple verbs; with prepositions, 27 and 28 do not shorten the vowel
. in the causative ; 29 does shorten it.
+ TTfiT + \prati + *, to approach, forms its causal regular when it means to make a person
understand, UTTPPrfir pratydyayati. Otherwise the causative of %i is formed from gam.
F f
218 CAUSATIVE VERBS.

3. knuy, to sound, "ffixfnkndndli; Caus.^M^fifknopayat^he causes to sound.

4. T§t kri, to buy, wllfllPrt krindti ; Caus. TfTTOfn krdpayati, he causes to buy.
5. T3TT^ kshtndy, to tremble, ^imff kshmdyate ; Caus. uti|U4|fri kshmdpayati,
he causes to tremble. (Pan. vu. 3, 36.)
6. fa cAi, to collect, f^tfrfw chinoti; Caus. ^tw'iT chdpayati, or regularly
"^TtPTTTf chdyayati, he causes to collect. (Pan. vi. 1, 54.)
7. X5T chho, to cut, ^pfir chhijati ; Caus. tjm^fiT chhdyayati, he causes to cut.
8. ifJ^jdffri, to be awake, »nnffrjdgarti ; Caus. wI <*4 fajdgarayati, he rouses.
9. ftfji, to conquer, "snfujayati; Caus. nx^ftfjdpayati, he causes to conquer.
10. <fi_£l daridrd, to be poor, ^fcjTfir daridrdti; Caus. ^fr^rfir daridrayati,
he makes poor.
11. ^b&didhi, to shine, ^hftw didhite; Caus. ^hnrfir didhaijati, he causes to shine.
12. 5T*f dwsA, to sin, ^Tfif dushyati ; Caus. £M*<Trf dushayati, he causes to sin ;
also <flm)f(T doshayati, he demoralizes. (Pan. vi. 4, 91.)
13. \dhu, to shake, wftfir dhUnoti; Caus. vhuCiT dMnayati, he causes to shake.
14. tit pd, to drink, ftr^tV pibati ; Caus. trRPlfir pdyayati, he causes to drink;
also t| pai, itHlPrf pdyati, to be dry.
15. Trr^>a, to protect, TnfrTjsaft"; Caus. trrfSTrfir pdlayati, he protects.
16. t£\ prl, to love, ifhrrTfir prindti ; Caus. sfarqfii prinayati, he delights.
1 7. bhrajj, to roast, HtsHtt bhrijjati ; Caus. HumPd bhrajjayati, he makes
roast, or raNfin bharjjayati, from ij^ Mry.
18. >ft flAf, to fear, ftprfTf bibheti; Caus. Hnprff bhdpayate or Wimiri bhishayate,
he frightens ; also regularly >rrHRf(T bhdyayati. (Pan. vi. 1, 56.)
19. fir mi, to throw, t»T«Ttfir minoti, and >fi mf, to destroy, ftRTftT mindti, form
their Caus. like m md.
20. tTr?, to flow, or to go, xtvnt riyate ; Caus. \xpifjt repayati, he makes flow.
21. ^ ruh, to grow, ^^frf rohati ; Caus. Tt^rfir rohayati, TtVKfit ropayati,
he causes to grow. (Pan. vu. 3, 43.)
22. F5T H, to adhere, fc3tTrfir /irea/i and TfrfkUyate; Caus. c^brrfir linayati, eSTCqflr
Idpayati, and WPTfil Idyayati ; and, if the root takes the form 75T /a, also
c5raTfWa/a«/atfi(Pan.vii.3,39). The meaning varies; see Pan. vi. 1,48; 51.
23. «TT va, to blow, trrfrf va^i ,- Caus. ^rsnrfir vdjayati, if it means he shakes.
24. eft to obtain, %fir veti ; Caus. *fnPTfil vdpayati or TTTTfill vdyayati, if it
means to make conceive. (Pan. vi. 1, 55.)
25. % ve, to weave, TTftl vayati ; Caus. ^TTTTK vdyayati, he causes to weave.
26. <f*ft vevi, to conceive, iWfil vevite ; Caus. ^cmPrt vevayati.
27. wye, to cover, arjrfn vyayati ; Caus. arpPltw vydyayati, he causes to cover.
28. jft v#, to choose, f^TTTfkwiiM^i; Caus. ^tvflfovlepayati, he causes to choose.
29. 5^ Sad, to fall, sfltlfl sfyafe ; Caus. ^rnmtff Sdtayati, he fells ; but not, if
it means to move. (Pan. vu. 3, 42.)
 CAUSATIVE VERBS. 219

30. 5ft so, to sharpen, ^rfir syati ; Caus. ^rpprftr Myayati, he causes to sharpen.
31. fin^sidh, to succeed, ftrwrfir sidhyati; Caus. wnnrfir sddhayati, he performs ;
but ihprfir sedhayati, he performs sacred acts.
32. so, to destroy, ^trfir sya/i ; Caus. HTTTfil sdyayati, he causes to destroy.
33. Bjir. sphur, to sparkle, rgitfir spkurati ; Caus W+K^frf sphdrayati and
TtfitTTrfir sphorayati, he makes sparkle.
34. ?qiPI sphdy, to grow, Mhllri spMyate; Caus. ^fiN^fri sphdvayati, he causes
to grow.
35. fa smi, to smile, smayate ; Caus. fwmurt smdpayate, he astonishes ;
also miiRfrf smayayati, he causes a smile by something. (Pan. vi. 1, 57.)
36. |ft Are, to be ashamed, fjQfif jihreti ; Caus. ^rtprfir hrepayati, he makes
ashamed. (Pan. VII. 3, 36.)
37. % Ave, to call, 4^fri hvayati ; Caus. ^ppiftl hvdyayati, he causes to call.
38. han, to kill, irfir hanti ; Caus. Tmnrfir ghdtayati, he causes to kill.
$ 464. As causative verbs are conjugated exactly like verbs of the Chur
class, there is no necessity for giving here a complete paradigm. Like Chur
verbs they retain ay throughout, except in the reduplicated aorist and
the benedictive Parasmaipada ; and they form the perfect periphrastically.
The only difficulty in causative verbs is the formation of their bases, and the
formation of the aorist. Thus kri, as causative, forms Pres. Par. and Atm.
^srCTfir, °w, kdrayati, -te ; Impf. ^<+lM(rf, °7T, akdrayat, -ta ; Opt. <*K4)i(, °tt,
kdrayet, -ta; Imp. ITCTJ, kdrayatu, -tdm; Red. Perf. <*kjim<*k, 0,^i,
kdraydnchakdra, -chakre ($342); A or. ^r^tror, °TT, achikarat, -ta; Fut.
4Kfamfrt, kdrayishyati, -te ; Cond. O+KfamH, °W, akdrayishyat, -ta ;
Per. Fut. oStcftriTT kdrayitd ; Ben. vsiihrT kdrydt ; cKrcfTTte kdrayishishta.
$ 465. If a causative verb has to be used in the passive, ^rj ay is dropt (§ 399),
but the root remains the same as it would have been with ^p^ay. Hence Pres.
ofci^ri kdryate, he is made to do ; Ou|r) ropyate, from ^jir ruh, he is made to
grow. The imperfect, optative, and imperative are formed regularly. The
perfect is periphrastic with the auxiliary verbs in the Atmanepada.
$ 466. In the general tenses, however, where the n ya of the passive
disappears (§ 401), the causative ^ ay may or may not reappear, and we
thus get two forms throughout (see Colebrooke, p. 198, note):
Fut. MHfru) bhdvayishye or »nfa^ bhdvishye.
Cond. winfTO abhdvayishye or ^mifaii abhdvishye.
Per. Fut. XHftliHf! bhdvayitdhe or *nfain^ bhdvitdhe.
Ben. MHftjtOjJ bhdvayishiya or mfirafa bhdvishtya.
First Aor. I. 1. p. ^whC^Tm abhdvayishi or ^wrfafa abhdvishi.
2. p. WT^ftren abhdvayishthdh or lUlflm; abhdvishthdh.
3. p. ^WTfe abhdvi.
ff2
220 DESIDERATIVE VERBS.

CHAPTER XIX.
DESIDERATIVE VERBS.
§ 467. Desiderative bases are formed by reduplication, the peculiarities
of which will have to be treated separately, and by adding ^ s to the root.
Thus from »^6M, to be, bubhdsh, to wish to be.
$ 468. These new bases are conjugated like Tud roots. ^sr>J«lfa bubM-
shdmi, y^rffc bubhushasi, ^J^fir bubhtishati, ^>J?T^: bubhushdvah, &c.
$ 469. The roots which take the intermediate ^ i have been given before
(§§ 331, 340), as well as those which take intermediate ^ i. Thus from f^vid,
to know, ftfkf^vividish, to wish to know; from TT tri, to cross, finrft^t titarish
or fdrtO^ titarish, to wish to cross.
§ 470. As a general rule, though liable to exceptions, it may be stated
that bases ending in one consonant may be strengthened by Guna, if they
take the intermediate ^ i. Thus ^ budh forms nWPtfil bubodhishati ;
vridft, fa^fShrfir vivardhishati ; div, {^faNO didevishati : also ^ kri,
f%«RftsfiT chikarishati ; ^ dri, f^ftsfff didarishati. But ftr^ bhid, Des.
fafWurfil bibhitsati (Pan. 1. 2, 10) ; JJ^ guh, sj»j8|fiT jughukshati (Pan. vu.
a, 1 a). In fact, no Guna without intermediate ^ i.
$471. But there are important exceptions. In many cases the base of
the desiderative is neither strengthened nor weakened ; ^ rud, ^jf^rfil
rurudishati. Other bases may be strengthened optionally ; ^x^dyut, f^^Pri mTJ
didyutishate or njalfifMci didyotishate. Certain bases which do not take
intermediate ^ i are actually weakened ; svap, ^Mflfri sushupsati.
1. Verbs which do not take Guna, though they have intermediate ^ i.
^ rud, to cry, ^gfi[*fi| rurudishati ; vid, to know, frftrf^fTT vividishati;
mush, to steal, flgfofil mumushishati. (Pan. 1. 2, 8.)
2. Verbs which may or may not take Guna, though they have intermediate ^ i.
Verbs beginning with consonants, and ending in any single consonant,
except ^ y or \v, and having \i or 7 u for their vowel. (Pan. 1. 2, 26.)
; ^ dyut, ft^finfil didyutishati or f^ftfirefir didyotishati.
But rfiv, f^f^qfiT didevishati or, without ^ i, Jfjjrfft dudyHshati (Pan.
vu. 2, 49) ; rrii, f^^frtKH vivartishate or fripvfil vivritsati.
3. Verbs ending in ^ i or 7 w, not taking intermediate ^ i, lengthen their
vowel ; final H and ^ T$ become ^ ir, and, after labials, ur.
(Pan. vi. 4, 16.)
f*fji, to conquer, Hmfl Ufa jigishati ; ijj yw, to mix, *P£rfTT yuy4shati.
^ £ri, to do, fa#3fk chikirshati; Tttfi, to cross, finfttfir titirshati.
^ to die, ^jfifir mumHrshati ; ^pri, to fill, *Pnifw pup&rshati.
 DES1DEKATIVE VERBS. 221

If, however, they take intermediate ^ i, they likewise take Guna.

f?R smi, to smile, f+wfrmfk sismayishati ; ^ pu, to purify, fVrqftwil pipa-
vishate ; it gri, to swallow, ftinftirfTT jigarishati ; T| dri, to respect,
f^ficurr didarishate.
4. JT»^ gam, to go, as a substitute for ^ i, to go, and han, to kill, lengthen
their vowel before the of the desiderative. (Pan. vi. 4, 16.)
V^gam, ^ffvfiprhrff adhijigdmsate, he wishes to read ; but 11 (h m frt jigami-
shati, he wishes to go.
^Aara, foil'm pff jighdmsati, he wishes to kill.
5. iTfT /a«, to stretch, lengthens its vowel optionally. (Pan. v. 4, 17.)
TOT /an, frfriiuPif titdmsati or tVitafir titamsati ; but also fdrf Pn^frf titanishati.
(Pan. vii. 2, 49, v.)
6. *r»^ saw, to obtain, drops its n and lengthens the vowel before the ^ s
of the desiderative. (Pan. vi. 4, 42.)
*P^sara, ftnrraflT sishdsati; but ftrafirrfil sisanishati.
7. ^rraA, to take, ■ svap, to sleep, and vp^prachh, to ask, shorten their
bases by Samprasdrana. (Pan. 1. 2, 8.)
ij^grah, ft| ^ BJ frf jighrikshati. ^x^svap, iffimffi sushupsati.
VR^prachh, ftpjfcOTft piprichchhishati.
8. The following verbs shorten their vowel to ^ i before the ^ s of the
desiderative, insert rf / (Pan. vii. 4, 54), and reject the reduplication.
>ft jwZ (»ffaTTfir mindti, to destroy, and finftfiT minoti, to throw), Des. farHfri
mitsati.
HT wa (*ufif mdti, to measure, fn*fld mimite, to measure, «nnr mayate, to
change), Des. ftwfir mitsati, firRTff mitsate.
da (^rfir daddti, to give, ?[Tfir dd/i, to cut, ?rfiT dyati, to cut, ^JTff dayate,
to pity), Des. ■fifwrfir ditsati, f^rUrl ditsate.
VT dAd (^vrrfii dadhdti, to place, yrfir dhayati, to drink), Des. tvwfif dhitsati.
9. Other desideratives formed without reduplication :
^ raM, to begin (*>*w rabhate), Des. fWri ripsate.
75»T &zSA, to take (c9>17 labhate), Des. frfHlri lipsate.
to be able (Sfrafrfir saknoti, sakyati), Des. tytSjfri hikshati.
pat, to fall (xrirfir ^a/a/i), Des. ftrwftr pitsati.
r^pad, to go (trfrff padyate), Des. firRnT pitsate.
^TV^dp, to obtain (wrjftfH dpnoti), Des. §,mfri ipsati.
•qy^jnap, to command (sTq^rflT iraapaya/£), Des. sffarfir jnipsati.
•^v ndA, to grow (^pfttiT ridhnoti), Des. ^rHtt trtsati.
^v^dambh, to deceive (^ftfiT dabhnoti), Des. >fNtK dhipsati or fVn^rfir dhipsati.
ir^much, to free (g^fft munchati), Des. HlPjfl mokshate or gjBfW mumukshate,
he wishes for spiritual freedom.
222 DESIDERATIVE VERBS.

TP* radh, to finish (Tjurfir rddhyati), Des. ufrfcrUfri prati-ritsati, in the

sense of injuring, otherwise ftxrwfir rirdtsati, also fi.fi.rtl Pri riritsati.
§ 472. Certain verbs which are commonly considered to belong to the
Bhu class are really desiderative bases.
fcRT kit, fafitrHffr chikitsate, he cures.
^P^ffup, *pjfni jugupsate, he despises.
fiTi^ tij, frtfrfKj^ titikshate, he bears.
»n«^ man, H*lHi«H mtmdmsate, he investigates.
iaa'A, 4jlHr+)H bibhatsate, he loathes.
e?cm, ^faff diddmsate, he straightens.
5TP^ s«w, JpfrglTOn sisdihsate, he sharpens.
Reduplication in Desideratives.
§ 473. Besides the general rules of reduplication given in ^302—319*,
the following special rules with regard to the vowel of the reduplicative
syllable are to be observed in forming the desiderative base :
Radical 'ST a and ^rr d are represented by ^ i in the reduplicative syllable
(Pan. vii. 4, 79).
tt^ pach, rMiiajPif pipakshati ; sthd, PrfKiMfff tishthdsati.
§ 474. ^r^ cm; and ?rr^ aw, standing as Guna or Vriddhi of radical T« or
4, are represented by ^ i in the reduplicative syllable, provided they be
preceded by J^p, Viph, W b, H bh, *lm, T^y, ^ r, c5 l,\v, J^j (Pan. vn.4, 80).
\pu, ftniMPiJufTr pipdvayishati, (Red. Aor. onlu^'if apipavat.) See $375.
^bh4, Rreraftprfir bibhdvayishati, (Red. Aor. ^rcftTTiT abibhavat.)
^ t/w, fmiPciMPri yiyavishati, and Caus. Desid. fiPTPtftrafll yiydvayishati.
"%ju, ftnnfftnifll jijdvayishati, (Red. Aor. SHHT^Urt^ ajijavat.)
But »J raw, rjfTreflrqfji nundvayishati, (Red. Aor. ^tr^TT anilnavat.) See $375 1.
$ 475. Roots ^ srw, to flow, irw, to hear, aVw, to run, jj ^?rw, to
approach, 3T to swim, cA?/w, to fall, may under similar circumstances
optionally take j i or T m in the reduplicative syllable,
g sru, f+( y I •=! PilMfrf sisrdvayishati or ^BTPtftnftl susrdvayishati ; but the simple
desiderative *Jt(vPtT susrHshati only.
^•TT^wapa?/, the Caus. of ^xiwctp, forms ^MmfntPrf sushvdpayishati.
j) 476. Roots beginning with a vowel have a peculiar kind of internal
reduplication, to which allusion was made in § 378. Thus (Pan. vi. 1, 2)
W3I a3 forms ^rf^rsi + ^fir asis + ishati.
^TT a£ forms ^rfc^ + ^fil a/i? + ishati.
^rs^ flAsA forms <siP<ith + achiksh + ishati.
uchchh forms jCmaS 4- jwfjt uchichchh + ishati.
* Exceptional reduplication occurs in P«i«»1mP(1 chikishati, besides fa^ifafiT chichishati,
from fa chi (Pan. VII. 3, 58) ; in PHuImPh jighishati from ff At (Pan. VII. 3, 56), &c.
 INTENSIVE VEEBS. 223

§ 477. If the root ends in a double consonant, the first letter of which
is n, ? d, or t; r, then the second letter is reduplicated.
w^arch, ^r^fvuffrf archich-ishati.
7^ und, ^f^f^fir undid-ishati.
T^T ubj, Tf^rftrsfff ubjij-ishati.
In irshy the last consonant is reduplicated.
irshy, ffxqfir^fir irshyiy-ishati.
In the verbs beginning with "irgqfTf kandiiyati ($498) the final ^It/ is reduplicated.
kanduy, tirgfcfiratil kandHyiy-ishati.

CHAPTER XX.
INTENSIVE VERBS.
$ 478. Intensive, or, as they are sometimes called, frequentative bases
are meant to convey an intenseness or frequent repetition of the action
expressed by the simple verb. Simple verbs, expressive of motion, some
times receive the idea of tortuous motion, if used as intensives. Some
intensive bases convey the idea of reproach or disgrace, &c.
$ 479. Only bases beginning with a consonant, and consisting of one
syllable, are liable to be turned into intensive bases. Verbs of the Chur
class cannot be changed into intensive verbs. There are, however, some
exceptions. Thus ^(Z at, to go, though beginning with a vowel, forms
VRfRSpi afdtyate, he wanders about ; ^rsi^ a§, to eat, ^$H9*)ri aSdsyate ; ^ ri,
to go, ^rnrw ardryate and ^rtfn ararti (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. 11. p. 216);
to cover, ■gBfff^Tff 4rnonuyate (Pan. 111. 1, 22).
$ 480. There are two ways of forming intensive verbs :
I. By a peculiar reduplication and adding if ya at the end.
a. By the same peculiar reduplication without any modification in the final
portion of the base. The latter occurs very seldom.
Bases formed in the former way admit of Atmanepada only.
Ex. M bM, wtvnrff bobMyate.
Bases formed in the latter way admit of Parasmaipada only, though, according
to some grammarians, the Atmanepada also may be formed.
Ex. wCv bM, ^ta^lfir bobhavtti or ^t>rtfff bobhoti.
The Atmanepada would be ^TWTT bobMte.
$ 481. When 7j ya is added, the effect on the base is generally the same
as in the passive and benedictive Par. 389). Thus final vowels are
lengthened: far chi, to gather, ^r^fafff chechiyate ; ^ Sru, to hear, ^fl^rf
bosrtiyate. ssn d is changed to ^ i: vt dhd, to place, ^vfanr dedhiyate.
becomes ir, or, after labials, ^ ur : T^tri, to cross, ridl^rf tetiryate; H^prt,
224 INTENSIVE VEKBS.

to fill, Tfllijrt popdryate. Final ^ ri, however, when following a simple

consonant, is changed to ri, not to ft ri : kri, to do, ^ sUm rt chekriyate.
When following a double consonant it is changed to ^rr_ ar : w smri, to
remember, +mn5rf sdsmaryate. These intensive bases are conjugated like
bases of the Div class in the Atmanepada. It should be observed, however,
that in the general tenses roots ending in vowels retain t^y before the
intermediate ^ i, while roots ending in consonants throw oft7 the *i ya of
the special tenses altogether. Thus from ?t>|5 bobh&ya, ^ftrfTnn bobh)l-y-itd ;
from ^fira bebhidya, ^rfuf^dl bebhiditd.
§ 482. When Hya is not added, the intensive bases are treated like bases ofthe
Hu class. The rules of reduplication are the same. Observe, however, that verbs
with final or penultimate ^ ri have peculiar forms of their own (fifi 489, 490),
and verbs in ^ ri start from a base in «rr. ar, and therefore have ^rra in the redu
plicative syllable. IT tri, rrr. tar, HTlrfH tdtarmi ; 3rd pers. plur. BTfirtfil tdtirati.
§ 483. According to the rules of the Hu class, the weak terminations require
Guna (§ 297). Hence from bobudh, "»ft«flfuT bobodhmi; but ^tot: 4o-
budhmah. From bobhu, ^ftfk bobhomi, ^h^rftf bobhavdni; but ^»|»t:
bobhumah. Remark, however, that in 1. 2. 3. p. sing. Pres., 2. 3. p. sing.
Impf., 3. p. sing. Imp. ^ i may be optionally inserted :
^Htftfl bobodhmi ovsft^ftfiibobudhtmi; ^tXtfk bobhomi or qW<l1ft bobhavimi.
And remark further, that before this intermediate ^ 1, and likewise before
weak terminations beginning with a vowel, intensive bases ending in con
sonants do not take Guna (Pan. vn. 3, 87). HenCe ^favftfa bobudhimi,
4HviftT bobudhdni, mffati abobudham. From fa^ vid,
Present. Imperfect. Imperative.
%^ftr or %f%rftf*r ^%f^ %fa^rfcr
vevedmi or vevidtmi avevidam veviddni
%%ffcr or % r=r»fl 0< ,?r^?r or ^%ftr^: 'kfkfs
vevetsi or vevidishi avevet or avevidih veviddhi
if^f% or gf^fw «^ or ^%f^fft^ or 3 fa$3
vevetti or veviditi avevet or avevidit vevettu or veviditu
^fag: vevidvah, &c. fay avevidva ^f^'R veviddva

Rules of Reduplication for Intensives.

§ 484. The simplest way to form the peculiar reduplication of intensives, is
to take the base used in the general tenses, to change it into a passive base
by adding n ya, then to reduplicate, according to the general rules of redupli
cation, and lastly, to raise, where possible, the vowel of the reduplicative
syllable by Guna (Pan. vn. 4, 82), and ^1 a to d (Pan. vn. 4, 83).
• fa chi, to gather, chiya, ^^rfaff chechiyate ; ^Hrfft checheti.
•jjst^ Arws, to abuse, IJ^T kruhja, sftjg^HH chokruSyate ; ^aftfe chokroshti.
 INTENSIVE VERBS. 225

WTcir trauk, to approach, traukya, ifeftwil totraukyate; ift^ftB totraukti.

T9f reA, to suspect, rekya, Ti+irf rerekyate; rerekti.
3f fo-i, to do, -gfta Ar%«, Q qri chekriyate ; ^%ffl charkarti.
^ Arf, to scatter, ^ftq Kn/a, ^cflvii chekiryate ; *TT*fS chdkarti. 48a.)
^re, to fill, purya, Tfhnre popHryate ; xrrqfjf pdparti.
9| smri, to remember, ^RTf smarya, jnwqii sdsmaryate ; sre&fff sarsmarti*.
da, to give, ^fal <%a, ^hiK dediyate; ^Tfir ddddti.
^ Ave, to call, |rjj Mya, »ftf^ johuyate ; *ftjfrfir johoti.
§ 485. The roots vanch, srams, dhvams, «^ bhrams, kas,
tin pat, pad, skand, place w? between the reduplicative syllable and
the root. (Pap. vn. 4, 84.)
vanch, to go round, cHl4«M7t vachyate ; ^rftT^ffir vanivanchtti.
srams, to tear, TlTftyWrf sa w2 srasyate ; *Hlti«)fiT sanisramsiti.
KT^ dhvams, to fall, ^•Oujtttt) da ra2 dhvasyate ; ?[vfti«hfh% danidhvamsiti.
«^ bhrams, to fall, w«fi*rprfr 6a «2 bhrasyate; whi*ftffl banibhramsiti.
^ &a«, to go, H'fl+Wif cAa /u kasyate ; "«l «fl <* *il Pk chanikasiti.
Vlt pat, to fly, ^rflnflri ni patyate; Mtflqrfl fri panipatiti.
xj^ pad, to go, mlMfiiri «t padyate ; iHlM^Kri panipaditi.
skand, to step, "Vqftanrit cAa w2 skadyate ; Fri chaniskanditi.
$ 486. Roots ending in a nasal, preceded by a, repeat the nasal in the
reduplicative syllable (Pan. vn. 4, 85). The repeated nasal is treated like
*T m, and the vowel, being long by position, is not lengthened.
Jjf^gam, to go, wnTW jahgamyate ; sprfiftT jangamiti.
bhram, to roam, ^anrff bambhramyate ; "#a*ftf?T bambhramiti.
^f han, to kill, sprarff jahghanyate ; shpftfir jahghaniti.
$487. The roots in jap, to recite, n^jabh, to yawn, ^ fl*aA, to burn,
<»3^aa»i3, to bite, H»r^ bhanj, to break, ij$r^as, to bind, insert a nasal in the
reduplicative syllable. (Pan. vn. 4, 86.)
*mjap, apTTff jahjapyate ; ffanftflT janjapiti.
(/ms, ^^*TfT damdabyate ; ^^^ftFir damdaktti.
$ 488. The roots ^ cAar and tjt<^ jsAaZ form their intensives as,
^^xft chanchuryate and ^^tfir chanchuriti or '^fff chanchHrti.
V^^pamphulyateand^^^pamphulUiorv^f^tpamphulti. (Pan.vm.4,87.)
§ 489. Roots with penultimate ^ n insert ^ re in their reduplicative
syllable. (Pan. vn. 4, 90.)
^OyrH^ wa ri vrityate ; gt^iftfiT i>a ri vrititi.
In the Par. these roots allow of six formations. (Pan. vn. 4, 91.)
^'^t ril Pri' va r vrittti.
• ft varvarti.
* This form follows from Pan. vn. 4, 92, and is supported by the Madhaviya-dhatuvritti.
Other grammarians give ^TI^Rf?? sdsmarti.
G g
£26 INTENSIVE VERBS.

^fc^tTTfTT va ri vritUi. <ffaf$ varivarti.

^^TftftT vo r£ vritUi. ^cfafff varivarti.
§ 490. The same applies to roots ending in ri, if used in the Parasmai-
pada. (Pan. vn. 4, 92.)
»' ^Ofa cha r kariti. ^Irfff charkarti.
*rfT3rfrfir c/ta ri Aarfti. MfbsfS charikarti.
"*CJ0<*Orri' c/ta ri Aari/i. '^tfaifff charikarti.
J 491. A few frequentative bases are peculiar in the formation of their base*.
^H{wap, to sleep, ^fhjurff soshupyate; but *rraftr sdsvapti. (Pan. vi. 1, 19.)
^PT syam, to sound, i)f««jri sesimyate ; but ?N4fiT samsyanti.
«T vye, to cover, ^far^ veviyate ; but ^r^xTn vdvydti ; or (§ 483) grSrfir twyefi.
^1 was, to desire, TTOpni vdvasyate ; ^hPb vdvashti. (Pan. vi. 1, 20.)
cAdy, to regard, chekiyate ; ^rfir cheketi. (Pan. vi. 1, 2T.)
xc(T\pydy, to grow, itafaft pepiyate ; MimiCrf pdpydti. (Pan. vi. 1, 29.)
fa&iV to swell, Sfffcr^sos%a/e or ^irftarffse^ ijri$rfiT&&;e/i. (Pan. vi. 1,30.)
ir^ Aaw, to kill, icrftrni jeghniyate ; jNfiT janghanti. (Pan. vn. 4, 30, v.)
TTf ^/ird, to smell, %rifar^ jeghriyate ; «rnrrfir jdghrdti. (Pan. vn. 4, 31.)
tut rfAmd, to blow, ?*Mrfaft dedhmiyate ; SfTunfir dddhmdti. (Pan. vn. 4, 31.)
i^gri, to swallow, ^firow ,/egriiyate ; siwfff jdgarti. (Pan. vm. 2, 20.)
fjfl si, to lie down, $n$|SH sdsayyate; SeSeti. (Pan. vn. 4, 22.)
$ 492. From derivative verbs new derivatives may be formed, most of
which, however, are rather the creation of grammarians, than the property
of the spoken language. Thus from Wimjfri bhdvayati, the causal of vbkd,
he causes to be, a new desiderative is derived, ftNTCftret? bibfidvayishati, he
wishes to cause existence. So from the intensive *ft*furf bobhuyate, he
exists really, is formed ^jftrefiT bobhuyishati, he wishes to exist really;
* The formation and conjugation of the Intensive in the Parasmaipada, or the so-called
Charkarita, have given rise to a great deal of discussion among native grammarians.
According to their theory Xf^ yah, the sign of the Intensive Atmanepada, has to be sup
pressed by Ink. By this suppression the changes produced in the verbal base by *T^ya»
would cease (Pan. 1. 1, 63), except certain changes which are considered as Anangakarya,
changes not affecting the base, such as reduplication. Changes of the root that are to take
place not only in the Intens. Atm., but also in the Intens. Par., are distinctly mentioned by
Panini, vn. 4, 82—92. About other changes, not directly extended to the Intens. Par.,
grammarians differ. Thus the Prakriya-Kaumudi forms *i\«uf»i soshopti, because Pan. vi.
1, 19, prescribes TIT^OIW soshupyate; other authorities form only «l«jf fx sdsvapti or
sdsvaptti. Colebrooke allows ^enPn cheketi (p. 332), because Pan. vi. 1, 21, prescribes ^oftliT
chekiyate, and the commentary argues in favour of ^%f?f cheketi. But Colebrooke (p. 321)
declines to form *lfinT sesinte, because it is in the Atm. only that Pan. vi. 1, 19, allows
flftmin sesimyate. Whether the Perfect should be periphrastic or reduplicated is likewise
a moot point among grammarians; some forming ^TH^T^RTT- bobhavdrlchakdra, others
^t*T^ bobhuva, others TfTHTO bobhdva.
 DENOMINATIVE VERBS. 227

then a new causative may be formed, ^taftpntfif bobhuyishayati, he causes a

wish to exist really ; and again a new desiderative, '^ftpiftprffl' bobhuyisha-
yishati, he wishes to excite the desire of real existence.

CHAPTER XXL
DENOMINATIVE VERBS.
§ 493. There are many verbs in Sanskrit which are clearly derived from
nominal bases *, and which generally have the meaning of behaving like, or
treating some one like, or wishing for or doing whatever is expressed by the
noun. Thus from Tf^T syena, hawk, we have ^HNri syendyate, he behaves
like a hawk ; from vm putra, son, trgftarfir putriyati, he treats some one like
a son, or he wishes for a son. Some denominatives are formed without any
derivative syllable. Thus from tfSSi krishna, nnflr krishnati, he behaves like
Krishna ; from firff pitri, father, ftrnTfir pitarati, he behaves like a father.
These denominative verbs, however, cannot be formed at pleasure; and many
even of those which would be sanctioned by the rules of native grammarians,
are of rare occurrence in the national literature of India. These verbs should
therefore be looked for in the dictionary rather than in a grammar. A few
rules, however, on their formation and general meaning, may here be given.
Denominatives in n ya, Parasmaipada.
§ 494. By adding n ya to the base of a noun, denominatives are formed
expressing a wish. From »ft go, cow, J^fff gavyati, he wishes for cows.
These verbs might be called nominal desideratives, and they never govern a
new accusative.
^ 495. By adding the same Hya, denominatives are formed expressing one's
looking upon or treating something like the subject expressed by the noun.
Thus from 1*3putra, son, Tpftarfir f^Pffputriyati Sishyam, he treats the pupil like
a son. By a similar process Mmi^Ptl prdsddiyati, from ftmr^prdsada, palace,
means to behave as if one were in a palace ; HTCTRffafK ^3E[T fWw: prdsddiyati
kutydm bhikshuh, the beggar lives in his hut as if it were a palace.
^ 496. Before this ti ya,
1. Final ^ a and 'STT d are changed to \ i; *prt sutd, daughter, *prfarfir
sutiyati, he wishes for a daughter t.
* They are called in Sanskrit f<3^| lidhu, from f<jn lihga, it is said, a crude sound, and
>| dhu, for VTjJ dhdtu, root. (Carey, Grammar, p. 543.)
+ Minute distinctions are made between vt $| r\\ <\ Pn asaniyati, he wishes to eat at the proper
time, and 41 $M I*\ Pd asandyati, he is ravenously hungry; between <j<; <*| «< Pn udaMyati, he wishes
for water, and d^^fri udanyati, he starves and craves for water ; between V 1 1 m Pn dhandyati, he
is greedy for wealth, and vWtaPn dhaniyati, he aska for some money. (Pan. vn. 4, 34.}
Gg2
228 DENOMINATIVE VERBS.

2. ^ i and 7 u are lengthened ; -qfnpati, master, Hifl^frf patiyati, he treats

like a master ; ufa kavi, poet, H^Nfil kaviyati, he wishes to be a poet.
3. ri becomes ri, 0 becomes ^ av, *m au becomes 'CTT^ dv ;
firff pitri, father, faefhrfir pitrtyati, he treats like a father; ^nau, ship,
•Uajfri ndvyati, he wishes for a ship.
4. Final ^ re is dropt, and other final consonants remain unchanged ;
tnr^ rdjan, king, nifafil rdjiyati, he treats like a king ; payas,
milk, V'HWfrf payasyati, he wishes for milk ; TT*l vdch, speech, ii^fil
vdchyati (Pan. 1. 4, 15) ; namas, worship, •IHtufrf namasyati, he
worships (Pan. hi. i, 19).
Denominatives in n ya, Atmanepada. A
§ 497. A second class of denominatives, formed by adding V ya, has
the meaning of behaving like, or becoming like, or actually doing what is
expressed by the noun. They differ from the preceding class by generally
following the Atmanepada*, and by a difference in the modification of the
final letters of the nominal base. Thus
I. Final ^1 a is lengthened; ^ifa hyena, hawk, jSftraft 6yendyate,he behaves
like a hawk ; babda, sound, $r^jqH kabddyate, he makes a sound,
he sounds ; >pi bhrisa, much, vprPHf bhrisdyate, he becomes much ;
cm? kashta, mischief, OTPl) kashtdyate, he plots ; iWn romantha,
ruminating, Ohvjujh romanthdyate, he ruminates. The final $ i of
feminine bases is generally dropt, and the masculine base taken
instead ; ^rtt kumdri, girl, gfflTCPrft kumdrdyate, he behaves like a
girl. (Pan. vi. 3, 36-41.)
2 and 3. Final ^ i and ^ u, ^ ri, 0, ^ au are treated as in $ 496 ;
Suchi, pure, spfhp) kuchiyate, he becomes pure.
4. Final ^ re is dropt, and the preceding vowel is lengthened ; TT*P^ rdjan,
king, <MmJ( rdjdyate, he behaves like a king; T^PT ushman, heat,
9WTli ushmdyate, it sends out heat.
Some nominal bases in ^ s and 1^ t may, others must (Pan. in. 1, 11) be
treated like nominal bases in a. Hence from ftlTO vidvas, wise, farein
vidvasyate or ftrSPT^ vidvdyate, he behaves like a wise man ; from VR^payas,
milk, ipftirn payasyate or miwd paydyate, it becomes milk ; from sh"*K^
apsaras, vraRpn) apsardyate, she behaves like an Apsaras ; from brihat,
great, "^PTiT brihdyate, he becomes great. (Pan. 111. 1, 12.)
£ 498. Some verbs are classed together by native grammarians as

* Those that may take both Parasmaipada and Atmanepada are said to be formed by
Icyash, the rest by kyah. Thus from cjlfigif lohita, red, pilfi^rfmfd or 0 if lohitdyati
or -te, he becomes red. (Pan. ill. 1, 13.)
 DENOMINATIVE VERBS. 229

Kandv&di's, i. e. beginning with Kandu. They take n ya, both in

Parasmaipada and Atmanepada, and keep it through the general tenses
under the restrictions applying to other denominatives in n ya 501)-
Nouns ending in ^> a drop it before ff ya. Thus from wtt^ agada, free
from illness, WTOfil agadyati, he is free from illness ; from sukha,
pleasure, *j^rfii sukhyati, he gives pleasure ; from kandu, scratching,
*S^frf or °ji kanduyati or -te, he scratches.

Denominatives in ^ sya.
§ 499. Certain denominative verbs, which express a wish, take sya
instead of q ya. Thus from t^t: kshira, milk, ajUmfiT kshirasyati, the child
longs for milk ; from lavana, salt, c4<4 411444 ft lavanasyati, he desires salt.
Likewise YOTCTfil asvasyati, the mare longs for the horse ; ^TOTfif vrishasyati,
the cow longs for the bull (Pan. vn. 1, 52). Some authorities admit sya and
^Tt-R asya, in the sense of extreme desire, after all nominal bases. Thus from
HV madhu, honey, JTirwfiT madhusyati or Jiurctjfff madhvasyati, he longs for
honey.
Denominatives in <*im kamya.
§ 500. It is usual to form desiderative verbs by compounding a nominal
base with gsmr kamya, a denominative from mp{ kdma, love. Thus nvn|f)l
putrakdmyati, he has the wish for a son ; Fut. ^?psrft*nn putrakdmyitd.
Here the Jtj, it is said, is not liable to be dropt. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. 11.
p. 222.)
§ 501. The denominatives in *t ya are conjugated like verbs of the Bhu
class in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada. Pres. Mdlmfo putrlydmi, Impf.
^Meftfi aputriyam, Imp. uyl^iftl putrtydni, Opt. ijgftTrt putriyeyam. Pres.
^tMlii Syendye, Impf. ^nj^^rnt akyenaye, Imp. ^wt^ kyendyai, Opt. ^^rraT
hyendyeya. In the general tenses the base is v^fti^putriy or ^MHI*^ kyenay ;
but when the denominative ^ y is preceded by a consonant, ^ y may or
may not be dropt in the general tenses (Pan. vi. 4, 50). Hence, Per. Perf.
g^hnrna putriydmdsa (§325, 3), Aor. tnpfiftri aputriyisham, Fut. qdlf^mifH
putriyishydmi, Per. Fut. g?ftfirifl putriyitd, Ben. Jfrhrra putriydsam.
From $*HH4ri Syendyate, Per. Perf. 9 tin N mm kyenaydmdsa, Aor. ^TRTfqfa
aSyendyishi, Fut. ^»nftTO Syendyishye, &c.
From T&fav samidh, fuel, ^rPrurfk samidhyati, he wishes for fuel ; Per. Fut.
TrftrftflTTT samidhyitd or ufaftnrt samidhitd, &c. (Pan. vi. 4, 50).

Denominatives in ^nr aya.

§ 502. Some denominative verbs are formed by adding ^nj aya to certain
nominal bases. They generally express the act implied by the nominal
base. They may be looked upon as verbs of the Chur class. They are
230 DENOMINATIVE VEKBS.

conjugated in the Parasmaipada arid Atmanepada, some in the Atmanepada

only. They retain ^n^ ay in the general tenses under the limitations that
apply to verbs of the Chur class and causatives (viz. benedictive Par., redu
plicated aorist, &c), and their radical vowels are modified according to
the rules applying to the verbs of the Chur class 296, 4).
Thus from xrr$r pdsa, fetter, fon^prfil vipdsayati, he unties ; from qfafvarman,
armour, ^NihrfrT samvarmayati, he arms, (the final v^ra being dropt);
from irz munda, shaven, HdnfrT mundayati, he shaves ; from babda,
sound, simnfrf sabdayati, he makes a sound (Dhatupatha 33, 40) ; from
fira misra, mixed, fa'smfff misrayati, he mixes (Pan. 111. 1, 31 ; 25).
Some of these verbs are always Atmanepada. Thus from ijsi puchchha, tail,
3?QVn) utpuchchhayate, he lifts up the tail (Pan. 111. 1, 20).
If aya is to be added to nouns formed by the secondary affixes JfiT mat,
^jr^vat, fir^T mira, fir^flira, these affixes must be dropt. From ^fr^^srag-
vin, having garlands, fcMnfrf srajayati.
If aya is added to feminine bases, they are generally replaced by the
corresponding masculine base. From ^hrt syeni (§ 247), white, jpfo*fft
syetayati, he makes her white (Pan. vi. 3, 36).
Certain adjectives which change their base before ishtha of the super
lative, do the same before ^nr aya. mridu, soft, M^frf mradayati,
he softens ; ?rc dura, far, ^Trfir davayati, he removes.
Some nominal bases take WPPI dpaya. Thus from jnn satya, true, HWTTTfir
satydpayati, he speaks truly ; from ^r*t artha, sense, 'wvjimjfir arthdpayati,
he explains.

Denominatives without any Affix.

§ 503. According to some authorities every nominal base may be turned
into a denominative verb by adding the ordinary verbal terminations of the
First Division, and treating the base like a verbal base of the Bhu class.
*T a is added to the base, except where it exists already as the final of the
nominal base ; other final and medial vowels take Guna, where possible, as
in the Bhu class.
Thus from krishna, ^Tinfir krishnati, he behaves like Krishna; from
»ir5n maid, garland, Hlrflfrt mdldti, it is like a garland, Impf. "snrrPSTiT
amdldt, Aor. CTTCmftir amdldsit ; from ^sfa kavi, poet, OTirffr kavayati,
he behaves like a poet ; from fa vi, bird, «mfH vayati, he flies like a
bird ; from f^jf pitri, father, ftnitfiT pitarati, he is like a father ; from
<M«^ rdjan, king, tlflnfiT rdjdnati, he is like a king (Pan. vi. 4, 15).
 PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES. 231

CHAPTER XXII.
PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES.
J 504. The following prepositions may be joined with verbs, and are then
called Upasarga in Sanskrit (Pan. 1. 4, 59).
*sifi( ati, beyond, ^ifa adhi, over ; (sometimes fa dhi.) w% anu, after.
apa, off. ^rfa apt, upon ; (sometimes fa pi.) ^rfa a£Ai, towards.
ava, down ; (sometimes ^ t>a.) <2, near to. ud, up. upa,
next, below, p duh, ill. fa wi, into, downwards, fa: rai/i, without.
xjtT para, back, away, tjft; jsari, around, u pra, before. Trfir prati,
back, fa ri, apart. sam, together. *J su, well.
§ 5°5' Certain adverbs, called Gati in Sanskrit, a term applicable also to
the Upasargas (Pan. 1. 4, 60), may be prefixed, like prepositions, to certain
verbs, particularly to vtbhu", to be, ^ as, to be, ^1 kri, to do, and ift^gam, to go.
,3T35 achchha ; e. g. ^ratlW achchhagatya, having approached ($ 445) ; ^rartsr
achchhodya, having addressed. ' adah ; e. g. adahkritya,
having done it thus, antar ; e. g. fhrfcfl antaritya, having passed
between. ^n? alam ; e. g. JSt^W alankritya, having ornamented,
^rer astam; e. g. ^TCPim astangatya, having gone to rest, having
set. SHI fa: citify ; e. g. wrfafo dvirbhtiya, having appeared, far: tirah ;
e. g. firct>nT tirobhuya, having disappeared. vx\ purafy ; e. g. MM^W
puraskritya, having placed before ($ 89, II. 1). unf: prdduly, e. g. wrafoi
prddurbMya, having become manifest. TSl^sat and ^(m^asat, when
expressing regard or contempt ; e. g. ^rav^m asatkritya, having dis
regarded. *rnfnr s&ksh&t ; e. g. ^UBjitSfW sdkshdtkritya, having made
known. Words like srgft sukli, in sruft^m Suklikritya, having made white.
(Here the final a of srgj sukla is changed to ^ t. Sometimes, but rarely,
final ^1 a or ^tx d is changed to d. Final ^ i and T u are lengthened ;
^ ri is changed to ^ ri ; final an and "sre^ as are changed to ^ i ;
e. g. <i ifiojiiiT rdjikritya, having made king.) Words like "gift 4H, in
anS^m urikritya, having assented. Words like ^nr khdt, imitative of
sound ; e. g. ^Ti^w khdtkritya, having made khdt, the sound produced
in clearing one's throat.
§ 506. Several of the prepositions mentioned in § 503 are also used with
nouns, and are then said to govern certain cases. They are then called Kar-
mapravachaniya, and they frequently follow the noun which is governed by
them (Pan. 1. 4, 83).
The accusative is governed by ^tfif ati, beyond ; ^tfa abhi, towards ; *rfr:
pari, around; yfnprati, against; anu, after; ^tj upa. upon. Ex. »ftfa-
^rfir H«UC govindam ati ne&varah, Is'vara is not beyond Govinda; Ifffl
232 PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES.

£'<41£c4 haram prati haldhalam, venom was for Hara; farnmssr^nt vishnu-
manvarchyate, he is worshipped after Vishnu ; *r*j *|TT: anu harim surah,
the gods are less than Hari.
The ablative is governed by jrfif prati, vfcpari, ^PT apa, "OT d. Ex.
Hd^ii bhakteh praty amritam, immortality in return for faith; writ: d
mrityoh, until death ; ^rq %irff«ft apa trigartebhyo vrishio devah, it
has rained away from Trigarta, or Tjft ftpflfctt pari trigartebhyah, round
Trigarta, without touching Trigarta.
The locative is governed by grj upa and ^rfil adhi. Ex. ^nr ftft^i <*l!imu upa
nishke kdrshdpanam, a Karshapana is more than a Nishka ; ^rfv siCK*:
adhi panchdleshu brahmadattah, Brahmadatta governs over the Pafichalas.
§ 507. There are many other adverbs in Sanskrit, some of which may
here be mentioned.
1. The accusative of adjectives in the neuter may be used as an adverb.
Thus from mandah, slow, w$ mandam mandam, slowly, slowly ;
Zfftrr kighram, quickly ; jp dhruvam, truly.
2. Certain compounds, ending like accusatives of neuters, are used adver
bially, such as qqnpfit yathdsakti, according to one's power. For
these see the rules on composition.
3. Adverbs of place:
^Trr, antar, within, with loc. and gen. ; between, with acc. ^TO antard,
between, with acc. fhfan antarena, between, with acc; without, with
acc. ^rrtTTT drat, far off, with abl. qfi?: vahili, outside, with abl. THPTt
samayd, near, with acc. ftftWI nikashd, near, with acc. ^qft upari,
above, over, with acc. and gen. g%t uchchaih, high, or loud.
nichaih, low. ^r*n adhah, below, with gen. and abl. avah, below,
with gen. fax: tirah, across, with acc. or loc. iha, here. TjTT purd,
before. *nr«? samaksham, Tn^n^sdkshdt, in the presence. WXtfrntsakds'dt,
from, ijt: purah, before, with gen. ^Tf amd, ?r^i sachd, *rra sdkam,
wnsamd, *TTV sdrdham, together, with instr. wfaiTC abhitah, on all sides,
with acc. ■gr»TJnT: ubhayatah, on both sides, with acc. WRiTTW samantdt,
from all sides, gt ddram, far, with acc, abl., and gen. wfd* antikam,
near, with acc, abl., and gen. fV^ ridhak, uy* prithak, apart.
4. Adverbs of time :
VTJ!T. prdtar, early. ?rni sdyam, at eve. f^T divd, by day. ahndya,
by day. ^fat doshd, by night. «ns naktam, by night. TST ushd, early.
^JT^ yugapad, at the same time, ^rer adya, to-day. hyah, yesterday,
^rsjt ptirvedyuh, yesterday, ig: Svah, to-morrow. TU,afa paredyavi,
to-morrow. iQtqsjyok, long, fat chiram, f^X?H chirena, f^rn chirdya,
f^TTi^ chirdt, fctSI chirasya, long. *PU «and, *HIHN sand/, *rffi^ sanat,
 PREPOSITIONS AND PARTICLES. 233

perpetually, ^it aram, quickly. 5p^: sanaik, slowly. TOt sadyah, at

once, thrfr samprati, now. ipr^ punar, muhuh, >J^: bMyah,
vdram, again. sakrit, once, tjcr /mra, formerly. ptirvam,
before. "gR^ urdhvam, after. 4114 sapadi, immediately. Trsjni pas'chat,
after, with abl. irriT./a/M, once upon a time, ever. ««rf| adhund, now.
^<5iiT iddmm, now. *t^t saaa, TfnriT santatam, wfif^j anisam, always,
a/aw, enough, with dat. or instr.
5. Adverbs of circumstance :
TOT mrishd, ftron mithyd, falsely. »TTP* mandk, ^tt foAa£, a little. ^Gt¥
Mshnim, quietly. vrithd, mudhd, in vain, ^rrftr «dmi, half.
iHcKHIrf akasmdt, unexpectedly. T^TTST updmsu, in a whisper. fir«i:
mithah, together. UTO prdyah, frequently, almost, ^nrta aifoa, exceed
ingly, grpr kdmam, ~^tk josham, gladly, avaSyam, certainly.
ftic5 Ma, indeed. khalu, certainly. fatn vind, without, with ace,
instr., or abl. rite, without, with acc. or abl. 7TTTT nana, variously.
?r| sushthu, well. dushthu, badly. f^WT dishtyd, luckily. HvflT
prabhriti, et cetera, and the rest, with abl. ^tViT kuvit, really?
4ftlir kachchit, really ? ctro katham, how ? ^fir itfi, ittham, thus,
^iwz, as; ^ftft^ Aarir iva, like Hari. ^waf, enclitic; ^ftSTCT harivat,
like Hari.
Conjunctions and other Particles.
§ 508. atha, ^nft a£Ao, now then, ^fir iti, thus, ^rf^ yadi, when^
Tfrftl yadyapi, although, ipnfil tathdpi, yet. cAe/, if. «T wa, «tt wo,
not. ^ c^a, and, always enclitic, like gwe. fsr^ kimcha, and. in or
TT W md sma, not, prohibitively. vd, or. m— vd, either—or. ^HRT
athavd, or. ir^ era, even, very ; (n jr? sa eva, the same.) evam, thus,
^tf nunam, doubtlessly. *rrew ydvat—^HT^iT fawaf, as much as. *r*n yathd—
Tnn tathd, as—so. yena—ir^ tena, tt^ yad—KZ tad, and other correlatives,
because—therefore. IPTTtf tathdhi, thus, for. (j fw, Tjt param, fwg
kintu, but. cA#, chana, subjoined to the interrogative pronoun
f^r kirn, any, some ; as cRftjii kaSchit, some one ; qnfat| kathanchana, any
how. t?r Ai, for, because. Tit «<a, <Jril£l utdho, or. tTW warna, namely.
TTg»T pratyuta, on the contrary. nu, perhaps. 773 wanw, Is it not?
figfiT svit, r<*r«r^ khhsvit, perhaps. ?rfa opt, also, even, ^sfa ^ ap£ cAa,
again, tjjf ndnam, certainly.
iw<er/'ec/iora$.
§ 509. ^ Ae, >ir bho, vocative particles. "SHI aye, jn> Aaye, Ah ! fVrs^ dhik,
\ re, ^rt are, Fie !
234 COMPOUND WORDS.

CHAPTER XXIII.
COMPOUND WORDS.
$ 510. The power of forming two or more words into one, which belongs
to all Aryan languages, has been so largely developed in Sanskrit that a few
of the more general rules of composition claim a place even in an elementary
grammar.
As a general rule, all words which form a compound drop their
inflectional terminations, except the last. They appear in that form which
is called their base, and when they have more than one, in their Pada base
($ 180). Hence deva-ddsah, a servant of god ; l.MV*;M: rdjapurushab,
a king's man ; HRNpR pratyagmukhah, facing west.
$511. Sometimes the sign of the feminine gender in the prior elements
of a compound may be retained. This is chiefly the case when the feminine
is treated as an appellative, and would lose its distinctive meaning by losing
the feminine suffix : V3rniftarin kalydntmdtd, the mother of a beautiful
daughter (Pan. vi. 3, 34) ; oSTfrrph kathibhdryah, having a Kathi for one's
wife (Pan. vi. 3, 41). If the feminine forms a mere predicate, it generally
loses its feminine suffix ; ^fto^THrlh sobhanabhdryab,, having a beautiful wife
(Pan. vi. 3, 34 ; 42).
The phonetic rules to be observed are those of external Sandhi with
certain modifications, as explained in 65 24 seq. *
$ 512. Compound words might have been divided into substantival,
adjectival, and adverbial. Thus words like H'r^TO tatpurushal)., his man,
«flc*lrHrf ntlotpalam, blue lotus, PgJiq dvigavam, two oxen, ^(hwh agni-
dhumau, fire and smoke^ might have been classed as substantival; «r^d1f^:
bahuvrihil}, possessing much rice, as an adjectival ; and <T<rr$rfe yathdsakti,
according to one's strength, as an adverbial compound.
Native grammarians, however, have adopted a different principle of divi
sion, classing all compounds under six different heads, under the names of
Tatpurusha, Karmadhdraya, Dvigu, Dvandva, Bahuvrihi, and Avyayibhdva.

* Occasionally bases ending in a long vowel shorten it, and bases ending in a short
vowel lengthen it in the middle of a compound ; <a^m udaka, water, TH? pdda, foot, <J^T
hridaya, heart, frequently substitute the bases "^^Judan (i. e. ^ uda), if^pad, and 5^ hrid.
hridrogah, heart-disease, or (Jf^TCti: hridayarogah. (Pan. vi. 3, 51—60.)
The particle ^ ku, which is intended to express contempt, as nmn kubrdhmanah,
a bad Brahman, substitutes ^ kad in a determinative compound before words beginning
_with consonants : <*>jg: kadushtrah, a bad camel. The same takes place before T^l ratha,
^ vada, and trim: <*£n; kadrathah, a bad carriage; «B7i<u kattrinam, a bad kind of
grass. The same particle is changed to =ST kd before Vfa^pathin and W% aksha: <*IHVj:
kdpathah, and optionally before purusha. (Pan. vi. 3, 101—107.)
 COMPOUND WORDS. 235

I. Tatpurusha is a compound in which the last word is determined by the

preceding words, for instance, ffra^R tat-purushah, his man, or UMyVK
rdja-purushah, king's man.
As a general term the Tatpurusha compound comprehends the two
subdivisions of Karmadhdraya (I b) and Dvigu (I c). The Karmadha-
raya is in fact a Tatpurusha compound, in which the last word is
determined by a preceding adjective, e.g. ^rtpftrToS mlotpalam, blue lotus.
The component words, if dissolved, would stand in the same case,
whereas in other Tatpurushas the preceding word is governed by the
last, the man of the king, or fire-wood, i. e. wood for fire.
The Dvigu again may be called a subdivision of the Karmadharaya,
being a compound in which the first word is not an adjective in general,
but always a numeral : fjpre dvigavam, two oxen, or %n: dviguh, bought
for two oxen.
These three classes of compounds may be comprehended under the
general name of Determinative Compounds, while the Karmadharaya (I b)
may be distinguished as oppositional determinatives, the Dvigu (I c) as
numeral determinatives.
II. The next class, called Dvandva, consists of compounds in which two words
are simply joined together, the compound taking either the terminations
of the dual or plural, according to the number of compounded nouns,
or the terminations of the singular, being treated as a collective term :
wfripjirt agni-dh&mau, fire and smoke ; $|$|eh$mc4l$IT: s'asa-kusa-palds'dh.,
nom. plur. masc. three kinds of plants, or $l?l*$mt«JI$i sasa-kusa-paldsam,
nom. sing. neut. They will be called Collective Compounds.
III. The next class, called Bahuvrihi by native grammarians, comprises com
pounds which are used as adjectives. The notion expressed by the last
word, and which maybe variously determined, forms the predicate of some
other subject. They may be called Possessive Compounds. Thus WTlflfip
bahu-vrihih, possessed of much rice, scil. i^rc de&ah, country ; COTVrifc
rdpavad-bhdryah, possessing a handsome wife, scil. TTSTT raja, king.
Determinative compounds may be turned into possessive compounds,
sometimes without any change, except that of accent, sometimes by
slight changes in the last word. ,
The gender of possessive compounds, like that of adjectives, conforms
to the gender of the substantives to which they belong.
IV. The last class, called Avyayibhdva, is formed by joining an indeclinable
particle with another word. The resulting compound, in which the
indeclinable particle always forms the first element, is again indeclinable,
and generally ends, like adverbs, in the ordinary terminations of the
hh 3
236 COMPOUND WORDS.

nom. or acc. neut. : ^rfvf^ adhi-stri, for woman, as in

adhistri grihakdrydni, household duties are for women. They may
be called Adverbial Compounds.

I. Determinative Compounds.
§ 513. This class (Tatpurusha) comprehends compounds in which generally
the last word governs the preceding one. The last word may be a substantive
or a participle or an adjective, if capable of governing a noun.
1. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Accusative :
unfurl: krishna-sritah, m. f. n. gone to Krishna, dependent on Krishna,
instead of ^atf fsiin krishnam sritah. jr:<«lliflH: duhkha-atitah, m. f. n.
having overcome pain, instead of pwHdlff: dufykham atitah.
varsha-bhogyaJ}, m. f. n. to be enjoyed a year long. STIHHIh: grdma-
prdptah, m. f. n. having reached the village, instead of ?rw UTR: grdmam
prdptah : it is more usual, however, to say Wh/jih: prdptagrdmah
(Pan. 11. 1, 4). Similarly are formed determinatives by means of
adverbs or prepositions, such as adrift (Pi atigiri, past the hill, used as
an adverb, or as an adjective, vfirfrfc atigirify, ultramontane ;
abhimukham, facing, &c.
fl. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Instrumental:
ifPVTvh dhdnya-arthah, m. wealth (arthah) (acquired) by grain (dhdnyena).
Sankuld-khandah, m. a piece (khandah) (cut) by nippers (ianku-
Idbhih). ^fifffann ddtra-chchhinnah, m. f. n. cut (chhinnah) by a knife
(ddtrena). ^ftjftTfi'. hari-trdtah, m. f. n. protected {trdtah) by Hari. <*c|i^:
deva-dattah,, given {dattah) by the gods (devaih), or as a proper name with
the supposed auspicious sense, may the gods give him (Dieu-donne) .
Pm AHHX pitri-samah, m. f. n. like the father, i. e. pitrd samah. hwPhRt^:
nakha-nirbhinnah, m.f.n. cut asunder (nirbhinnah) by the nails (nakhaih).
Ppgttrppr; vi6va-updsyafr, m. f. n. to be worshipped by all. QPTfffl:
svayam-kritah, m. f. n. done by oneself.
3. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Dative :
^M^H> yUpa-ddru, n. wood (ddru) for a sacrificial stake {ydpdya). »ftf?ir: go-
hitah, m.f.n. good (hitah) for cows (gobhyah). fgifiit: dvija-arthah, m.f.n.
object (artha), i. e. intended for Brahmans. Determinative compounds,
when treated as possessive, take the terminations of the masc, fem., and
neut. ; e. g. fyirr^T I^PR dvijdrthd yavdgdh, fem. gruel for Brahmans.
4. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Ablative :
^h>fi: chora-bhayah, m. fear (bhayah) arising from thieves (chorebhyah).
^pfqfinn svarga-patitah, m. f. n. fallen from heaven. iHnyin: apa-grdmafi,
m. f. n. gone from the village.
 COMPOUND WORDS. 237

5. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Genitive :

lft^^(:iat-purushah,m. his man, instead of tasya, of him, purushafi, the man*.
tHT^^*. rdja-purushah, m. the king's man, instead oirdjnah,, of the king,
purushah, the man. t,W*HN: rdja-sakhah, m. the king's friend. In these
compounds sakhi, friend, is changed to sakha/i. ^ToRTC kumbha-kdrafr, a
maker (kdralj) of pots (kumbhdndm). ift$li go-satam, a hundred of cows.
6. Compounds in which the first noun would be in the Locative :
^rs^^rs: aksha-saundah, m. f. n. devoted to dice. dCl*U uro-jah, m. f. n.
produced on the breast.
§ 514. Certain Tatpurusha compounds retain the case-terminations in the
governed noun.
Vgtn^lR sahasd-kritah, done suddenly (Pan. vi. 3, 3). iSltMHms: dtmand-
shashthafy, the sixth with oneself (Pan. VI. 3, 6). ^vyill<*UU: akshnd-
kdnah, blind in the eye. parasmai-padam, a word for the sake
of another, i. e. the transitive form of verbs (Pan. vi. 3, 7, 8) . ^^rwai
krichchhrdl-labdham, obtained with difficulty, ^j:^: svasufr-putrah,
sister's son (Pan. vi. 3, 23). f^wfin divas-patih, lord of heaven.
^T^Tfir: vdchas-patih, lord of speech. ^<4HiftPT: devdndm-priyah, beloved
of the gods, a goat, an ignorant person. Jnnjferi: gehe-panditah, learned
at home, i. e. where no one can contradict him. ilNrc: khecharalj,,
moving in the air. flrftnTC sarasi-jah, born in a pond, water-lily.
^f^^3^ hridi-spris, touching the heart, ^fvfirc yudhishthirah, firm in
battle, a proper name (Pan. vi. 3, 9).
§ 515. To this class a number of compounds are referred in which the
governing element is supposed to take the first place. Ex. ijf«FPT: purva-
kdyafy, the fore-part of the body, i. e. the fore-body ; *nhn^: purva-rdtrah,
the first part of the night, i. e. the fore-night ; ^ST^Wt rdjadantah, the king
of teeth, lit. the king-teeth, i. e. the fore-teeth. (Pan. 11. 3, 1 .)
$ 516. If the second part of a determinative compound is a verbal base,
no change takes place in bases ending in consonants or long vowels, except
that diphthongs, as usual, are changed to ^rc d. Hence srafl1^ jalamuch,
water-dropping, i. e. a cloud ; ^ftJTTT soma-pd, Soma- drinking, nom. sing,
^frpn: somapdfy ($ 839).
Bases ending in short vowels generally take a final tt t : fwftfiT viSvajit,
all-conquering, from f*tji, to conquer. Other suffixes used for the same
purpose are a, ^ in, &c.
* Most words ending in ^ tri or =li ka are not allowed to form compounds of this kind.
Hence =ti4*q cRffT katasya kartd, maker of a mat, not <*4<*ni katakartd : purdm
bhettd, breaker of towns. There are, however, many exceptions, such as q=iM*i3C deva-
pujakah, worshipper of the gods, &c.
238 COMPOUND WORDS.

I b. Appositional Determinative Compounds.

§ 517. These compounds (Karmadharaya) form a subdivision of the deter
minative compounds (Tatpurusha). In them the first portion stands as the
predicate of the second portion, such as in black-beetle, sky-blue, &c.
The following are some instances of appositional compounds :
TftrflrMri nila-utpalam, neut. the blue lotus. (JTHTRI parama-dtmd, masc. the
supreme spirit. $|l<*mrii-.i: sdka-pdrthivah, masc. a Saka-king, explained
as a king such as the Sakas would like, not as the king of the Sakas.
«5*Jdt sarva-rdtrah, masc. the whole night, from sarva, whole, and
rdtrih, night. Rdtrih, fern., is changed to rdtra; cf. *Hhra: piirva-rdtrah,
masc. the fore-night ; nurcT^: madhya-rdtrah, masc. midnight ; ip!»rcra:
punya-rdtrah, masc. a holy night. fgUcf dvi-rdtram, neut. a space of
two nights, is a numeral compound (Dvigu). HgKMt mahd-rdjah, masc.
a great king. In these compounds »T£tf mahat, great, always becomes
»TfT mahd (Pari. vi. 3, 46), and XJ5PT rdjan, king, n»n rajah; as ilUKM:
parama-rdjah, a supreme king : but *J*J»M su-rdjd, a good king, f<4lMI
kimrdjd, a bad king (Pan. v. 4, 69, 70). flmc priya-sakhah, masc.
a dear friend. *rf% sakhi is changed to sakhah. TTrjflTf: parama-ahah,
masc. the highest day. In these compounds ^r?«T ahan, day, becomes
aha; cf. STPrTfJ uttamdhah, the last day. Sometimes ^TJJ ahna is
substituted for ahan; ^1^,: p&rvdhnah, the fore-noon.
ku-purushah, masc. a bad man, or ^rnv kdpurushah. irr^ri}: pra-
dchdryah, masc. a hereditary teacher, i. e. one who has been a teacher
(dchdrya) before or formerly {pro). a-brdhmanah, masc. a non-
Brahman, i.e. not a Brahman, vnfrtn an-asvah, masc. a non-horse, i.e. not
a horse. TORTO ghana-sydmah, m. f. n. cloud-black, from ghana, cloud,
and sydma, black. ^mM^T?: ishat-pingalah,, m. f. n. a little brown,
from ishat, a little, and pingala, brown. tnftarR sdmi-kritah, m. f. n.
half-done, from sdmi, half, and krita, done.
$ 518. In some appositional compounds, the qualifying word is placed
last. firiPuTJ vipragaurah, a white Brahman ; TT»rr*PT: rdjddhamah, the
lowest king ; Nrcirthf: bharata-sreshthah, the best Bharata ; mppqro purusha-
vydghrah, a tiger-like man, a great man ; jft4<{K*: govrinddrakah, a prime
cow.
I c. Numeral Determinative Compounds.
§ 519. Determinative compounds, the first portion of w hich is a numeral,
are called Dvigu. The numeral is always the predicate of the noun which
follows. They are generally neuters, or feminines, and are meant to express
aggregates, but they may also form adjectives, thus becoming possessive
compounds, with or without secondary suffixes.
 COMPOUND WORDS. 239

If an aggregate compound is formed, final w a is changed to ^ i, fem., or in

some cases to ^ am, neut. Final w^are and ^rr d are changed to f^t or am.
V^Vft pancha-gavam, neut. an aggregate of five cows, from panchan, five,
and go, cow. 7ft go (in an aggregate compound) is changed to tr gava
(Pan. ii. i, 23), and in nau to ijre ndva. pancha-guh, as an
adjective, worth five cows (Pan. v. 4, 92). fs^n: dvinauh, bought for
two ships. SfHt? dvy-ahgulam, neut. what has the measure of two
fingers, from dvi, two, and angulih, finger ; final i being changed to a.
3T?: dvy-ahah, masc. a space of two days ; ahan changed to ahah (Pan. 11.
1, 23). bourns: pancha-kapdlah, m. f. n. an offering (puroddsah)
made in a dish with five compartments,, from panchan, five, and
kapdlam, neut. (Pan. 11. 1, 51, 52; iv. 1, 88). frfcil*!' tri-loki, fem.
the three worlds : here the Dvigu compound takes the fem. termination
to express an aggregate (Pan. iv. 1, 21). fk»T^T tri-bhuvanam, neut.
the three worlds : here the Dvigu compound takes the neut. termination.
<5l+HRt dasa-kumdri, fem. an assemblage of ten youths. ^Tr^'i chaiur-
yugam, neut. the four ages.
§ 520. The following rules apply to the changes of the final syllables in
determinative compounds. Very few of them are general as requiring a change
without any regard to the preceding words in the compound. The general
rules are given first, afterwards the more special, while rules for the formation
of one single compound are left out, such compounds being within the
sphere of a dictionary rather than of a grammar.
1. rich, verse, tpr. pur, town, ap, water, dhur, charge, iffalH pathin,
path, add final a (Pan. v. 4, 74) ; ^riHr. ardharchah, a half-verse.
This is optional with tfaf^pathin after the negative *r a ; «TVi apatham
or ^r«Hrn apanthdh.
2. XXW^rdjan, king, ^nnr ahan, day, sfe sakhi, friend, become TTJT raja, ^
aha, sakha ; JTfTtnr: mahdrdjah. (Pan. v. 4, 91.)
3. uras, if it means chief, becomes tc*t urasa ; "snuktf a&vorasam, an
excellent horse (Pan. v. 4, 93). Likewise after vftt prati, if the locative
is expressed; WWTSi pratyurasam, on the chest (Pan. v. 4, 82).
4. ^i^a#«Ai,eye,becomes^n5ra&sAa,if itceasesto mean eye. Vftr^:gavdk$hah,a
window; bufarSTOTf^ brdhmandkshi, the eye of a Brahman. (Pan.v.4,76.)
5. anas, cart, '^R'^aSman, stone, ^nj^ayas, iron, KtQ^saras, lake, take final
a if the compound expresses a kind or forms a name, eBTWPW kdldya-
sam, black-iron ; but *t^n sadayah, a piece of good iron. (Pan. v. 4, 94.)
6. ^brahman becomes brahma, if preceded by the name of a country;
3timrc surdshtrabrahmah, a Brahman of Surashtra (Pan. v. 4, 104).
After ^ ku and q^jmahd that substitution is optional (Pan. v. 4, 105).
240 COMPOUND WORDS.

7. IT^takshan takes final a after rjm grama and kauta; V[^W'9rama~

takshah, village carpenter. (Pan. v. 4, 95.)
8. Svan, dog, takes final ^1 a after ^rfir atfi, and after certain words, not
the names of animals, with which it is compared ; ^rnst^r: dkarshasvah,
a dog of a die, a bad throw (?). (Pan. v. 4, 97.)
9. ^JSP^ adhvan becomes adAva after prepositions ; inw prddhvah.
(Pan. v. 4, 85.)
jo. m*ir^sdman, hymn, and cfmr^loman, hair, become *rtT s<2ma and tyJ»T loma
after TrfiT prati, ^rfj aww, and ^ra at>a; SH^rtlM: anulomafy, regular ; ^PJoSfa
anulomam, adv. with the hair or grain, i. e. regularly. (Pan. v. 4, 75.)
11. (TH^ tamas becomes TPm tamasa after ava, H sam, and andha;
^iviniTt andhatamasam, blind darkness. (Pan. v. 4, 79.)
12. ra^as becomes T«r*r rahasa after ^r»J aww, ^ ava, and TTO tapta ;
anurahasah, solitary. (Pan. v. 4, 81.)
13. ^Hr^ varchas becomes g'shr varchasa after w brahma and «rt% Aos/i ;
brahmavarchasam, the power of a Brahman. (Pan. v. 4, 78.)
14. iftgo becomes $wa, except at the end of an adjectival Dvigu. <H'l4
panchagavam, five cows ; but Vr^l paiichagub, bought for five cows.
(Pan. v. 4, 92.)
15. tTT nau, ship, becomes «rra «<foa, if it forms a numerical aggregate ; M-<HN*
panchandvam, five ships : not when it forms a numerical adjective ;
■«H«n: panchanauh, worth five ships. (Pan. v. 4, 99.)
16. .ft nau, ship, after ^rQ ardha, becomes tTR nai>a; ^nhTr# ardhandvam, half
a ship. (Pan. v. 4, 100.)
17. OTCt khdri, a measure of grain, becomes ^TT khdra as an aggregate;
fgTsTK dvikhdram.
1 8. khdri, a measure of corn, becomes khdra after ardha ;
^h^TT ardhakhdram. (Pan. v. 4, 101.)
1 9. THjlfrt anjali, a handful, after fV dvi or fa tfri, may, as an aggregate, take final
^ra; ST»Tp5 dvyanjalam or aprfe dvyanjali, two handfuls. (Pan.v.4, 102.)
20. ^r»rfpj ahguli, finger, after numerals and indeclinables, becomes siya; angula ;
3Pp5 dvyahgulam, a length of two fingers. (Pan. v. 4, 86.)
21. vf sakthi, thigh, becomes *nF*I saktha after 3^TM«ara, mriga, and
ijf pHrva ; ij5u+<i purvasaktham. (Pan. v. 4, 98.)
22. TrfaraW, night, after *rt sarva, after partitive words, after ?ferfiT sahkhydta,
v,VQpunya, likewise after numerals and indeclinables, becomes Tffirdlra;
*Hfcr^: sarvardtrah, the whole night; Tjfrfi?: pilrvardtrah, the fore-night;
ftjtra dvirdtram, two nights. (Pan. v. 4, 87.)
23- snr^aAara, day, under the same circumstances, becomes ^jjj ahna;
sarvdhnafy, the whole day : but not after a numeral when it expresses an
 COMPOUND WORDS.

aggregate ; ST?: dvyahah, two days. Except also tppni punydham, a

good day, and ^rt^ ekdham, n. and m. a single day. (Pan. v. 4, 88-90.)

II. Collective Compounds.

§ 52T. Collective compounds (Dvandva) are divided into two classes. The
first class (called jiitiR.itaretara) comprises compounds in which two or more
words, that would naturally be connected by and, are united, the last taking
the terminations either of the dual or the plural, according to the number
of words forming the compound. The second class (called flUTfTC samdhdra)
comprises the same kind of compounds but formed into neuter nouns in the
singular. gtgpft hasty-aSvau, an elephant and a horse, is an instance of the
former, hastyasvam, the elephants and horses (in an army), an instance
of the latter class. Likewise ^ja^ianT sukla-krishnau, white and black; nTPtf
gavd&vam, a cow and a horse.
If instead of a horse and an elephant, ^WETT hastya§vau, the intention
is to express horses and elephants, the compound takes the terminations of
the plural, fWBT: hastyasvdh.
§522. Some rules are given as to which words should stand first in a
Dvandva compound. Words with fewer syllables should stand first : f$|cMi3i<?t
&iva-ke$avau, S"iva and Kes'ava; not ^N^M kesavesau. Words beginning
with a vowel and ending in ^St a should stand first : f^l^Sin isa-krishnau,
Isa and Krishna. Words ending in (gen. ^: eh) and 7 u (gen. ^ft: oh)
should stand first : ^ftjro hari-harau, Hari and Hara ; also Hhprt^T bhoktri-
bhogyau, the enjoyer and the enjoyed. Lastly, words of greater importance
should have precedence : deva-daityau, the god and the demon ;
mraraff?nn brdhmana-kshatriyau, a Brahman and a Kshatriya; HlrilfMriO
mdtd-pitarau, mother and father, but in earlier Sanskrit ftlrRlHlrRI pitard-
mdtard, father and mother. (Pan. vi. 3, 33.)
§ 523. Words ending in ri, expressive of relationship or sacred titles,
forming the first member of a compound, and being followed by another
word ending in ri, or by ij^ putra, son, change their ^ ri into ^rr d
(Pan. vi. 3, 25). tfTit mdtri + fq<t pitri form HlrilfifriU mdtdpitarau, father and
mother ; fifir pitri + v& putra form ftnrpj^ pitdputrau ; hotri + xft^potri
form jftTrnfTfrr^ hotdpotdrau, the Hotri and Potri priests.
§ 524. When the names of certain deities are compounded, the first
sometimes lengthens its final vowel (Pan. vi. 3, 26). Thus ftrcm^oft mitrd-
varunau, Mitra and Varuna ; wsffaffoft agnishomau, Agni and Soma. Similar
irregularities appear in words like srraPlftran dydvd-prithivyau, heaven and
earth; JMIHH* ushdsd-naktam, dawn and night (Pan. vi. 3, 29—31).
§ 525. If the compound takes the termination of the singular, then final
1 i
242 COMPOUND WORDS.

*r ch, iff chh, S^j, T^jh, ^ d, ^ sh, and ^ h take an additional a. ^T^vdch
tvach form *TWW^ vdktvacham, speech and skin (Pan. v. 4, 106).
W?»T ahan, day (see §§ 90, 196), and trfa rdtri, night, form the compound
*r$ki^: ahordtrab, a day and night, a vv^dyfiepov .(P&n- v. 4, 87).
§ 526. HTtTU bhrdtarau may be used in the sense of brother and sister ;
putrau in the sense of son and daughter ; ftTTO pitarau in the sense of
father and mother ; to6 svasurau in the sense of father and mother-in-law.
Man and wife may be expressed by HTHPflfl jdyd-pati, iprift jampati, or
jfnift dampati.
III. Possessive Compounds.
§ 527. Possessive compounds (Bahuvrihi) are always predicates referring
to some subject or other. A determinative may be used as a possessive
compound by a mere change of termination or accent. Thus ^TlcJlrUti nila-
utpalam, a blue lotus, is a determinative compound (Tatpurusha, subdivision
Karmadharaya) ; but in tfrc<rtwc5 TO nilotpalam sarafy, a blue lotus lake,
nilotpalam is an adjective and as such a predicative or possessive com
pound ; (see Pan. 11. 2, 24, com.) In the same manner ^nra: anasvah,
not-a-horse, is a determinative, 'SPP'sft W. anahvo rathah, a cart without a
horse, a horseless cart, a possessive compound.
Examples: HlHl^*t arm: prdpta-udako grdmah, a water-reached village, a
village reached by water. 8gT<ft*«!ffi«T ddha-ratho 'nadvdn, a bull by
whom a cart {rathah) is drawn {44ha). j'q^an^ upahrita-pasu
rudrah, Rudra to whom cattle (pahih) is offered (upahrita). MlriN^
fft: pita-ambaro harifr, Hari possessing yellow garments. pra-
parnah, leafless, i. e. a tree from which the leaves are fallen off.
'Sij^: a-putrah, sonless. fa^n: chitra-guh, possessed of a brindled cow.
CTOrrib rtipavad-bhdryah, possessed of a beautiful wife. %f*H dvi-
m&rdhab, two-headed : here mdrdha stands for murdhan. f%TP; dvi-pdd,
two-legged : here pad stands for pdda. su-hrid, having a good
heart, a friend. Hft^irf»TTj: bhakshita-bhikshah, one who has eaten his
alms. »flrtlTs|{«j<(u: nila-ujjvala-vapuh, having a blue resplendent body.
§ 528. Bahuvrihi compounds frequently take suffixes. The following rules
apply to the changes of the final syllables in possessive compounds :
1. vfan sakthi, thigh, and 1sf^akshi, eye, if they mean really thigh and eye,
take final a; «FHrilBj: kamaldkshah, lotus-eyed. (Pan. v. 4, 113.)
2. Wjfc5 anguli, finger, substitutes final ^ a if it refers to wood ; gi'Jj75 ^H?
dvyangulam ddru, a piece of wood with two prongs *. (Pan. v. 4, 1 14.)
3. ijv^T mdrdhan, head, substitutes final a after fg dvi and f<f tri ; %»J*h
dvimilrdhah, having two heads. (Pan. v. 4, 1 15.)
* gqftgtrffiPPPi Vl^l^r^xropB?, Prakriya-Kaumudi.
 COMPOUND WORDS. 243'

4. loman, hair, substitutes final a after "^rn: antar and ^f?: ;

fl'dWTR: antarlomah, having the hairy part inside. (Pan. v. 4, 117.)
5. «nftr«ST ndsikd, nose, becomes tTH nasa, if it stands at the end of a name;
jfttfu: gonasah., cow-nosed, i. e. a snake ; but not after ^WF5 sthMa ;
CTSCTlftre sthtlla-ndsikah, large-nosed, i. e. a hog. The same change
takes place after prepositions; ^tt: unnasah, with a prominent nose*.
6. After a, <*: or *j su, ^fe Aa/i, furrow, and flOn sakthi, thigh, may-
substitute final w a; VfTR ahalah or V^ffc ahalih. (Pan. v. 4, 131.)
7. After the same particles, irsrr prajd, progeny, and ihn medhd, mind, are
treated like nouns ending in ^t^as; ^f*nt durmedhdh. (Pan. v. 4, 122.)
8. w dharma, law, preceded by one word, is treated like a noun ending in
■WT an ; VWIVWI kalydnadharmd. (Pan. v. 4, 124.)
9. t^^amMa,jaw, after certain wordSjbecomessTH^/amSAara; TpfaTJiyamJAd.
10. ?ff^ya»M, knee, after Tljara and *j sam, becomes ^jnu; v^.prajnul). (Pan. v.
4, 129). This is optional after gist drdhva (Pan. v. 4, 130).
j 1. ^Wf^wdfow, udder, becomes ■gw«T udhan ; ^Ttlft kundodhni. (Pan. v. 4^ 131.)
1 2. V^dhanus, bow, becomes V3P^ dhanvan ; vapj&n pushpadhanvd, having a
bow of flowers (Pan. v. 4, 132). In names this is optional.
13. Km jdyd, wife, becomes mf^jdni; ntnnfc subhajdnih. (Pan. v. 4, 134.)
14 »TV gandha, smell, substitutes nfv gandhi after certain words; *jnfv: sugan-
dhih. (Pap. v. 4, 135-137.)
15. v^pdda, foot, becomes iTT^ j»dfl* after certain words ; «j III "415 vydghrapddf.
16. ^irdanta, tooth, becomes ^ll dat after many words ; fg^y^dvidan, having two
teeth, (sign of a certain age) ; fem. f^ift dvidati. (Pan. v. 4, 141—145.)
17. kakuda, hump, becomes kakud after certain words and in certain
senses; Yirm^ ajdtakakud,ayo\mg bull before his humps have grown J.
18. 7TJ^ uras and other words belonging to the same class add final M ka ;
i$i\iMhl vyddhoraskah, broad-chested. (Pan. v. 4, 151.)
19. Words in ^ in add final eR ka in the feminine ; W^nfiPH bahusvdmikd,
having many masters, from ^rftl»^ svdrain, master. (Pan. v. 4, 152.)
20. Feminine words in ^ i, like wj^i nadi, and words in ^ ri, add final ka ;
mpinjl bahukumdrikah, having many maidens ; TOflNs bahubhartrikah,
having many husbands. (Pan. v. 4, 153.)
«j. Most other words may or may not add final ka ; qgmw*: bahumdlakah
or n*n«9: bahumdlal}. (Pan. v. 4, 154.)

IV. Adverbial Compounds.

§ 529. Adverbial or indeclinable compounds (Avyayibhava) are formed by
joining an indeclinable particle with another word. The resulting com-
* P&p. v. 4, 118, 119. t v- 4, 138—140. X P&n. v. 4, 146—148.
244 COMPOUND WORDS.

pounds, in which the indeclinable particle forms always the first element,
are again indeclinable, and generally end, like adverbs, in the ordinary
terminations of the nom. or acc. neut.
Examples : wftr^ft adhi-hari, upon Hari, instead of ^ifv ^CT adhi harau,
loc. sing. ^rgftraj anu-vishnu, after Vishnu, instead of ^Pj f^Bji anu
vishnum, acc. sing. <Ji|<jU!i upa-krishnam, near to Krishna. f<4j<*
nir-makshikam, free from flies, flylessly. ^rfrrf^H ati-himam, past the
winter, after the winter, instead of Tsfa ftnr ati himam, acc. sing.
' : Tttf^Tti pradakshinam, to the right. V^ci anu-ripam, after the form,
i. e. accordingly, instead of ^rg ^rj anu rUpam, acc. sing. TOT^fa yathd-
Sakti, according to one's ability, instead of 5lf-*5vj| kaktir yathd. mn$
sa-trinam, with the grass ; ?nTWTf% satrinam atti, he eats (everything)
even the grass, instead of Tpsft trinena saha, with the grass. 4i<(W)<i'
ydvach-chhlokam, at every verse. Wl^ffe dmukti, until final delivery,
^rgnrf anu-gangam, near the Ganga. TT^IT^ upa-karadam, near the
autumn; from $PC^ sarad, autumn (Pan. v. 4, 107). T*mtil upa-jarasam,
at the approach of old age; from tfr^jaras, old age (§167). T«nrf»nr wpa-
samit or ^imfa*! upa-samidham, near the fire-wood ; from *rf»r^ samidh,
fire-wood. TTO*T upa-rdjam, near the king; from xxw^fdjan, king.
$ 530. There are some Avyayibhavas the first element of which is not an
indeclinable particle. Ex. fdBij tishthad-gu, at the time when the cows stand to
be milked ; pancha-gangam, at the place where the five Gangas meet,
(near the Madhav-rao ghat at Benares) ; HflJJjlH pratyag-grdmam, west of
the village. . .
§ 53 *• The following rules apply to the changes of the final syllables in
adverbial compounds :
1. Words ending in mutes {k, kh, g, gh, ch, chh, j, jh, t, th, d, 4h, t, th, d, dh,
p, ph, b, Iti) may or may not take final w a ; gtpjfW upasamidham or
TtRrftr^ upasamit, near the fire-wood. (Pan. v. 4, III.)
3. Words ending in ^c^an substitute final a; WHTW adhydtmam, with
regard to oneself. (Pan. v. 4, 108.)
3. But neuters in vr^an may or may not ; st^n upacharmam or TV*$ upa-
charma, near the skin. (Pan. v. 4, 109.)
4. «l^t nadt, ^Nnftpaurnamdsi, WTTTfTOlft dgrahdyani, and fhft giri may or
may not take final "ST a; VTOft! upanadi or upanadam, near the
river. (Pan. v. 4, no, and 113.)
5. Words belonging to the class beginning with $rrj^ Sarad take final V a;
yrrjTC^ upakaradam, about autumn. (Pan. v. 4, 107.) . .
 APPENDIX.

LIST OF VERBS.
Explanation of some of the Verbal Anubandhas or Indicatory Letters.
«r a is put at the end of roots ending in a consonant in order to facilitate
their pronunciation.
Accent.—The last letter of a root is accented with the acute, the grave, or
circumflex accent, in order to show that the verb follows the Parasmai-
pada, the Atmanepada, or both forms.
The roots themselves are divided into uddtta, acutely accented, and anuddtta,
gravely accented, the former admitting, the latter rejecting the inter
mediate ^ t.
W d prohibits the use of the intermediate ^ i in the formation of the Nishthas
{§ 333, D. 2), Pan. vii. 2, 16. Ex. TfifsP phullah from ftpiWl niphald.
\ I requires the insertion of a nasal after the last radical vowel, which nasal
is not to be omitted where a nasal that is actually written would be
omitted (J 345t)» Pan. vn. 1, 58 ; vi. 4, 24. Ex. ?njfk nandati from Tff%
nadi, Pass. »farff nandyate; but from ih^ or manth, Pres. jfafiT
manthati, Pass, inqfl mathyate.
^ ir shows that a verb may take the first or second aorist in the Parasmai-
pada (§ 367), Pan. hi. 1, 57. Ex. W^prif achyutat or ^raffrfhr achyottt
from ^fri^ chyutir.
\ t prohibits the use of the intermediate ^ i in the formation of the Nistyhas
{§ 333, D. 2), Pan. vii. 2, 14. Ex. ir: unnah from i^t undi.
trw renders the admission of the intermediate 3£ i optional before the gerundial
RT tvd (§ 337, II. 5), Pan. vii. 2, 56; and therefore inadmissible in the
past participle (Pan. vii. 2, 15). Ex. ^ifai^T kamitvd or ^^nk&ntvd from
^pj Samu ; but sdntah.
*gi u renders the admission of the intermediate ^ i optional in the general
tenses before all consonants but \y (§ 337, I. 2), Pan. vii. 2, 44 ; and
therefore inadmissible in the past participle (Pan. vii. 2, 15). Ex. irgt
seddhd or ^fviTT sedhitd from ftrvCv sidhd : but ftnff: siddhah.
^ ri prevents the substitution of the short for the long vowel in the redupli
cated aorist of causals (J 372*), Pan. vii. 4, 2. Ex. V^pfrn^ alulokat
from cft^ lokri.
3£ li shows that the verb takes the second aorist in the Parasmaipada {§ 367),
Pan. in. 1, 55. Ex. VPffnr agamat from *rg gamji.
246 BHfr CLASS, PAEASMAIPADA VERBS.

*e forbids Vriddhi in the first aorist (§348*), Pan.vn. 2,5. Ex.^wtfhrawifl-

thit from jrSfr mathe.
0 indicates that the participle is formed in ^ na instead of 7T ta (§ 442, 5),
Pan. viii. 2, 45. Ex. ifl«T: ptnah from irtanfl opydyi.
y » shows that the verb follows the Atmanepada (Pan. 1. 3, 12).
^ n shows that the verb follows both the Atmanepada and Parasmaipada,
the former if the act reverts to the subject (Pan. 1. 3, 72).
fff ni shows that the past participle has the power of the present (Pan. nit
2, 187). Ex. tj^: phullah, blown, from fspjRST niphald.
i^m shows that the vowel is not lengthened in the causative (§ 462, note),
Pan. vi. 4, 92 ; and that the vowel is optionally lengthened in the aorist
of the passive (Pan. vi. 4, 93).

Bhti Class (Bhvddi, I Class).

I. Parasmaipada Verbs.
1. i^bhd, to be.
, Parasmaipada : P. 1. H^Tfa bhavdmi, 2. >rgftr bhavasi, 3. JT^rfir bhavati,
4. >rera: bhavdvah, 5. *(wr. bhavathah, 6. *T^Tn bhavatah, 7. H^TC bhavdmah,
8. bhavatha, 9. >T#fiT bhavanti, I. 1. ^sw^ abhavam, 2. ^M«r: abhavah,
3. abhavat, 4. ^W^TC abhavdva, 5. ^w^r abhavatam, 6. <?TH=riri abhavatdm,
7. ^WTPT abhavdma, 8. ^wrair abhavata, 9. abhavan, O. 1. >i%4 bkaveyam,
2. «%: bhaveh, 3. >q%Wx bhavet, 4. bhaveva, 5. »l%rf bhavetam, 6. «^iri bhavetdm,
*r^J? bhavema, 8. *J%iT bhaveta, 9. H^^; bhaveyuh, 1. 1. *4«nfVf bhavdni 2. bhava,
3. *T^W bhavatu, 4. bhavdva, 5. >7^if bhavatam, 6. HTiTT bhavatdm, 7.
bhavdma, 8. «^nr bhavata, 9. >Hw bhavantu 11 Pf. 1. ^»{^ 6aiArfro-f- (see p. 175),
2. wf^i babh4vitha, r>. babJiAva. 4. ^wf^ babhtiviva, z. ^w^sn babhuvathuh,
6. T>t^k: babhdvatuh, 7. "T>jf%H babhUvima, 8. ^»J5 babhuva, 9. W>g3|i babhtivuh,
II A. 1. ^ abhuvam (see p. 188), 2. ^w: abhuh, 3. ^ff^abhilt, 4. abhuva,
5. 'arwK abMtam, 6. WfiTT abMtdm, 7. ^D|H abMma, 8. ^Wft abhdta, 9. <s>f5^aSM-
t>a», F. i. nfMullfa bhavishydmi, 2. xfaurfa bhavishyasi, 3. HfV*rfil bhavishyati,
4. HtVbtr: bhavishydvah, 5. >rf^TO bhavishyathah, 6. ^ri^TO bhavishyatah,
7. Hfamm: bhavishydmah, 8. «firor*r bhavishyatha, 9. »tfrofiT bhavishyanti,
C. 1. ^rnf*|u} abhavishyam, 2. ^rvrf^Hj: abhavishyah,, 3. ^wfaorj^ abhavishyat,
4. wfatTR abhavishydva, 5. ^rafa*Uti abhavishyatam, 6. wf«l«Jtli abhavishyatam,
7.. ^?*f%WI abhavishydma, 8. 'awftrarjl abhavishyata, 9. ^wf^r^ abhavishyan,
P. F. 1. nfcHlfw bhavitdsmi, 2. Hftnnftr bhavitdsi, 3. >rfVrTT bhavitd, 4. H tart 144:
bhavitdsvah, 5. HfViTPPn bhavitdsthah, 6. nf<4ill<i bhavitdrau, 7. HfVrllW bhavi-

« t The reduplicative syllable ^ ia is irregular, instead of The base, too, is irregular

(Pan. 1. 2, 6); the regular form would have been WTO bubhdva.. . '-. . -
 bhO class, parasmaipada verbs.

tasmah, 8. HfarTtW bhavitdstha, 9. ufarTTC bhavitdrah, B. i. WTTH bMydsam,

a. bhuydh, 3. bMydt, 4. bhuydsva, 5. »TDTO bMydstam, 6. ^iwi
bMydstdm, 7. vrqrgi bMydsma, 8. bMydsta, 9. >jxng: bMydsuh 11 Part.
Pres. bhavan, Perf. VJjrP^ babMvdn, Fut. Hfa«r^ bhavishyan, Ger. »jr^T
bMtvd or °>nr -bhdya, Adj. yfinnn: bhavitavyah, H^rfhr: bhavaniyah, w,
bhavyah (§ 456).
Atmanepada* : P. 1. *nr Mare, 2. bhavase, 3. >T^ff bhavate, 4. Hin^
bhavdvahe, 5. W^r bhavethe, 6. H%K bhavete, 7. h^to? bhavdmahe, 8. H^*^ Ma-
vadhve, 9. bhavante, I. 1. w% abhave, 2. WT^n: abhavathdh, 3. wtt
abhavata, 4. ^wrrefij abhavdvahi, 5. 'SW^^ri abhavethdm, 6. ^W^iri abhavetdm,
7. W^TOf^ abhavdmahi, 8. ^W^J9 abhavadhvam, 9. ^PT#rT abhavanta, O. 1.
bhaveya, 2. vrfrrn bhavethdh, 3. m^tt bhaveta, 4. H^f^ bkavevahi, 5. >»%*rr!ri
bhaveydthdm, 6. H^TTcri bhaveydtdm, 7. W^irf^ bhavemahi, 8. >T^i4 bhavedhvam,
9. M*k«T bhaveran, I. 1. vra bhavai, 2. bhavasva, 3. >r^trr bhavatdm, 4. >HN^
bhavdvakai, 5. HT*ri bhavethdm, 6. UTrri bhavetdm, 7. H^lHj! bhavdmahai, 8. »T^s4
bhavadhvam, 9. *T#KT bhavantdm 11 Pf. 1. ^»nr babhuve (see note t, page 246),
2. T?nf^Pt babMvishe, 3. ^5 babMve, 4. ^>rftr^ babMvivahe, 5. ^>nrr«J babhti-
vdthe, 6. "*>T=rrff babhuvdte, 7. ^>jfqn% babMvimahe, 8. ^>rf%«i or °^ babhuvidhve
or -rfAue (see $ 105), 9. "wf^T babhuvire, I A. 1. wrfafa abhavishi, 2. ^wf^TT:
abhavishthdh, 3. ^wfa? abhavishta, 4. twf%*srfl abhavishvahi, 5. vwftTTOli abha-r
vishdthdm, 6. Ytrfranri abhavishdtdm, 7. ^wf<fwf^ abhavishmahi, 8. ^Mf^t4 or 0j
abhavidhvam or -dhvam, 9. ^wHlMd abhavishata, F. nfaafr bhavishye &c,
C. ^wfirit abhavishye &c, P. F. 1. HfirnT^ bhavitdhe, 2. HfaiTTO bhavitdse,
3. wfarTT bhavitd, 4. ttftarai bhavitdsvahe, 5. M^rtmrvf bhavitdsdthe, 6. HfaniU
bhavitdrau, 7. nfarfiw? bhavitdsmahe, 8. HfinrW bhavitddhve, 9. wfVjITC bhavi
tdrah, B. 1. >rfaMl*l bhavishiya, 2. vf&ctwi: bhavisMshthdh, 3. HfVrte bhavi-
shishta, 4. Hfatfta% bhavishivahi, 5. ttftreNreri bhavishiydsthdm, 6. ♦rftpftrrerl
bhavishiydstdm, 7. >?fVtftaf? bhavishimahi, 8. Hfipftsi or °j bhavishidhvam or
-dhvam, 9. Mf^'flo^ bhavishiran it Part. Pres. H=rnn: bhavamdnah, Perf. "^T^rsr:
babhuvdnah, Fut. HfaujHUir. bhavishyamdnah.
Passive: P. 1. »{5 bh4ye%, 2. >rir^ bhuyase, 3. «^ bMyate, 4. >£rrq?r
ydvahe, 5. vr>i*i bhuyethe, 6. hhtiyete, 7. »pTR^ bMydmahe, 8. bhuyadhve,
9. >J51T bhuyante, I. ^rmi abhuye &c, O. *rSnr bhuyeya &c., I. ht| bhuyai &c. 11
Pf. ^>J5 babhuve &c, like Atmanepada, I A. 1. ^wfafa or ^MTftrf^ abhdvishi,
2. wfTBT: or ^Mlf^«i: abhavishthdh, 3. ^THrfa abhdvi, 4. ^Hf^v.-jf^ abhavishvahi
&c, like Atmanepada, F. Hf^1^ or >rrf%^ bhavishye &c., C. ^rHfV«t or wrf»T^
* *J^6Au may be used in the Atmanepada after certain prepositions. Even by itself it is
■ used in the sense of obtaining : W f^l H^Tn" sa iriyam bhavate, he obtains happiness. (Sar.
P-4, 1-3-)
J *J^4W with a«u means to perceive, and may yield a passive.
248 BHfr CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS!

abhavishye &c, P. F. mUa\\ or mfinn^ bh&vitdhe &c, B. HftpfNl or HTfWhf

bhavishiya &c. u Part. Pres. >£4HM: bMyamdnah, Fut. Hf^PTTO: bh&vishya-
mdnah, Past »jrr: bMtal}.
Causative, Parasmaipada : P. mqqifn bhdvaydmi, I. ?nm abhdvayam,
0. tm^q bhdvayeyam, I. MNHlfn bhdvaydni II Pf. hn*('m<*K bhdvaydnchakdra,
II A. 1«T^tn^ abibhavam, F. HMfauufa bhdvayishydmi, C. ^WRfiroi abhdvayi-
shyam, P. F. WTTftnnftR bhdvayitdsmi, B. *nwrra bhdvydsam.
Causative, Atmanepada : P. bhdvaye, I. ^wrtj abkdvaye, O. xmqq
bhdvayeya, I. wr^ti bhdvayai \\ Pf. >rnpita7fi bhdvaydnchakre, II A. ^nt»T^
abibhave, F. m^ftw bhdvayishye, C. ■swrcftpfc abhdvayishye, P. F. *n^ftnn%
bhdvayitdhe, B. HfllAnfta bhdvayishiya.
Causative, Passive : P. ht^ bhdvye, I. abhdvye, O. wniPT bhdvyeya,
1. »TT^ bhdvyai n Pf. >TTW^T5, °^>J%, °^rre, bhdvaydnchakre, -babhuve, -dse,
I A. IWTTftrPl abhdvayishi or TOnfafa abhdvishi, F. >rp|ftra bhdvayishye or
Ulfa^ bhdvishye, C. WTT^fTO abhdvayishye or ^wrfaiil abhavishye, P. F.
HNfMril^ bhdvayitdhe or HifertW! bhdvitdhe, B. JTrffirtffa bhdvayishiya or
>Trf%^ht bhavishiya.
Desiderative, Parasmaipada : P. ^nftr bubhushdmi, I. ^rwiT abubM-
sham, O. 'y^TO bubhdsheyam, I. ^t^t% bubMshdni u Pf. ^tnjT^nsn: bubMshcm-
chakdra, I A. wjwfW abubhushisham, F. yrf^Hnftr bubMshishydmi, C. o^*jfici
abubMshishyam, P. F. yfanfel bubMshitdsmi, B. wira bubMshydsam.
Desiderative, Atmanepada : P.^»fi*6w&Ms/te, I.^r^iiafrtt&faMe, O. »p|Thr
bubhusheya, I. ^f*ni bubMshai u Pf. ^wmi^^r bubhushdiichakre, I A. i. ^*rfVfa
abubMshishi, 2. '^PwfinrT: abubMshishthdh, 3. ^Ppjfau abubMshishta, F. ^rfiTHfr
bubMshishye, C. ^wfTO abubhdshishye, P. F. jjwfarfl^ bubMshitdhe, B.
^jfarfal bubMshishiya.
Desiderative, Passive : P. "jpl^r bubhdshye, I. 'srm abubhilshye, O. :yf^PT
bubMshyeya, I.vxStbubhushyai 11 Pf. ^>?iit^ bubhushdiichakre, I A. i.^nprfafa
abubMshishi, 2. OTjftji: abubMshishthdh, 3. T^nfa abubMshi (see $ 406),
F. "5»jfa*f bubMshishye, C. ^t?>ffirii abubhushishye, P. F. ^rfMrti^ bubMshitdhe,
B. bubMshishiya.
Intensive, Atmanepada : P. 1. *ft>£l bobMye, 2. *rtara bobhuyase, 3. ^winr
bobhuyate, 4. «fl*J^N^ bobMydvahe, 5. bobMyethe, 6. *fl»J*iri bobMyete,
^.^wn^bobhilydmahe,8.'!iU^lK(bobMyadhve, g.'Wb^fitbobhiiyante, 1. 1. ^nrtw^r
abobMye, 2. ^r^t^m: abobMyathdh, 3. ^f^l*jli|iT abobMyata, 4. ^r^fUT^f? aio-
bMydvahi, 5. ^r^W^vji abobMyethdm, 6. ^TTt^iTT abobhuyetdm, 7. ^trf»ry infl?
abobMydmahi, 8. ^r^fcraui abobhuyadhvam, 9. ^r^f^TT abobhuyanta, O. "<rteihr
bobhuyeya &c., 1. 1. bobMyai, 2. ^tHtra' bobhuyasva, 3. ^fo^riri bobMyatdm,
4. wttjilT^ bobMydvahai, 5. ^ta^vji bobMyethdm, 6. ^jSftri bobMyetdm,
7. ^frnTOc bobMydmahai, 8. 'Wtawi bobMyadhvam, 9. *fi*|Jii(i bobMyantdm 11
 BHU CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 249

Pf. *ft*f»lHlii bobMydmchakre, I A. i. wfttgfltfl abobMyishi, 2. wqtwftjHi: abobhd-

yishfhdh, 3. *lwk>{fa abobMyishta, 4. WWtvrftrsrf^ abobMyishvahi, 5. vfrgftpTOri
abobMyishdthdm, 6. ^refojfir*rriTT abobMyishdtdm, 7. W^^Tn"^ dbobMyishmahi,
8. TT^t>jftli4 or °j abobhilyidhvam or -ihvam, 9. W^toftlMrf abobMyishata,
F. Tt>rftr^ bobMyishye, C. wwhfftp^ abobMyishye, P. F. ^hgftnn^ bobMyitdhe,
B. ''ftiTftrtfhT bobMyishiya.
Intensive, Parasmaipada : P. 1. •'jfrrtfa bobhomi or ^>ttHh bobhavimi,
2. *ft>rtfa bobhoshi or ftflAftl bobhavishi, 3. ^ftftfa bobhoti or ^W<flfH bobhaviti,
4. Wfof^: bobMvah, 5. Tt>|*r. bobMthah, 6. ^t**'. bobhutah, 7. ^tmr: bobMmah,
8. '^t*Tt(bobMtha, g.-^pTS(fK bobhuvati, I. i.^tw^ abobhavam, 2.,BRt*¥t: abobhoh
or wftwfh abobhavih, 3. abobhot or wfrftftl^ abobhavit, 4. >H^T^ ato-
bMva, 5, ^nft>jjf abobMtam, 6. VH^Tt^Jrfi abobMtdm, 7. ^r^>|«T ahobMma, 8. ^r^t>JTT
abobMta, 9. JTWtag: abobhavuh, O. bobMydm, I. 1. wtanft bobhavdni,
2. bobMhi, 3. *fl»ftij bobhotu or bobhavttu, 4. bobhavdva,
g. ""Tt^TrT bobMtam, 6. <fi*Jtli bobMtdm, 7. ^mn bobhavdma, 8. Tt>TiT bobMta,
9. bobhuvatu 11 Pf. 1. «T)H^i*(*K bobhavdmchakdra, 4. ^>r^H^ bobha-
vdmchakriva, 7. bobhavdmchakrima ; also i.^W^ bobhdva or wt>|^
bobMva, 2. «n*^f*l «| bobMvitha, 3. =TlHN bobhdva or "^»rsr bobhdva, 4. ^»jf^
bobhuviva or qbffa bobMviva, 5. ^J^p bobhuvathuh or ^TTg: bobMvathuh,
6. TTto^iTC bobhuvatuh or 'TtH^w: bobhuvatufr, 7. ?t*TfaJT bobhuvima or ^rtofaJT
bobMvima, 8. ^*T^ bobhuva or "^ta^ bobMva, o. ^nr: bobhuvuh or «rf*ra:
bobh4vuh9 II A. i.'ritaf abobh&vam, 2. abobhUh or tnfrnffc dbobhuvih.
3. abobMt or ssi Thjjtfl^aiotAdrfr, 4. ^t»T^ abobMva, 5. 'SRtw^ abobMtam,
6. wqtyrii abobMtdm, 7.^r^w*T abobMma, S.^PTtHjT abobMta, g.'^V^. abobMvuh
(not 1swt»nPT abobhuvan), I A. 1. WlfonfM abobhdvisham, 4. ^rsffaTfa6^ abobhd-
vishva, 7. w-flnrfan abobhdvishma*, F. ^Hfarrfa bobhavishydmi, C. ^r^tHf^BT
abobhavishyam, P. F. *ffaf%7TrftR bobhavitdsmi, B. >rt*nmi bobMydsam.
Note—Grammarians who allow the intensive without T ya to form an Atmanepada, give
the following forms : Pres. sTl»jn bobhute, Impf. ■w«Tl»|iT abobhuta, Opt. ^><=Tln bobhuvita,
Imp. *ft*jHI bobhUtdm, Per. Perf. ^ta^i-ftn bobhavdmchakre, Aor. ->4I «TlM f«=l a abobhavishta,
Fut. *f|wfam'rf bobhavishyate, Cond. ^RfafaoiW abobhavishyata, Per. Fut. '*flH fa H I ioiAa-
ciW, Ben. *flHr«4M^g bobhavisMshta. (See Colehrooke, p. 194.)

2. f^TT cAif, to think, (f«Tirt)

The Anubandha ^ f shows that the participle in TTt <aA takes no intermediate ^i.
P. *jdffl chetati, I. "S^rfrf achetat, O. %^tT chetet, I. ^irj chetatu 11
Pf. 1. f^TT chicheta, 2. ftt^frfxi chicheiiiha, 3. Pm^iT chicheta, 4. f^rpqfir^
* The first aorist is the usual form for intensives, but in *J^6Aa it is superseded by the
second aorist, this being enjoined for the simple verb. Some grammarians, however, admit
the first aorist optionally for l^iAu (Colebr. p. 193). The conflicting opinions of native
grammarians on the conjugation of intensives are fully stated by Colebrooke, p. 191 seq.
k k
250 BHfr CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

chichitiva, s. tVr>nrY. chichitathuh, 6. Pqfarfrf: chichitatub, 7. fafafiW chi-

chitima, 8. fafsTT chichita, 9. farVij: chichituh, I A. 1. ^wfirt achetisham,
2. W-qnl: achetih, 3. *mifh^ achetit, 4. SHMftfm achetishva, 5. <nifW achetisktam,
6. ^frtBI achetishtdm, 7. w^ftPH achetishma, 8. twflff achetishta, 9. ^^PriM:
achetishuk, F.^firorfiT chetishyati, C.^favtfiachetishyat, P. F. ^finn chetitd,
B. f*liqij^ chitydt 11 Pt. fsm: chitta/i, W^ril^ chichitvdn, Ger. 3firwi chetitva
or r-qfnm chititvd, "tVnr -chitya, Adj. ^fTTTW. chetitavyah, ^TnfhK chetaniyah,
^W: chetyafr 11 Pass. (Vflrt chityate, Aor. ^mfir acheti, Caus. <hwfil chetayati,
Aor. VHWlPtiiii^ achichitat, Des. ftrefirafir chichetishati or chichitishaii, Int.
^f*n»rff chechityate, chechetti.
3. ^Jrr chyut, to sprinkle, (^gfit^.)
The Anubandha ^ tr shows that the verb may take the first and second aorist.
P. ^TTflfiT chyotati, I. wfrilir achyotat, O. ^nil^chyotet, I. ^ftiTjJ chyotatu 11
Pf. 1. ''raftir chuchyota, 2. TOfrfiPI chuchyotitha, 4. ^jfire' ckuchyutiva, I A.
1 . « «fi frf k achyotisham, 2.^&f(lftiachyoti?i, 3. wfhfl fiachyotit, g.^c^tfrr^iachyo-
tishuh, or II A. i.^i^Tr achyutam, 2.,iJ^JTT: achyutah, s.^r^pn^achyutat, ^.W^ffi
achyutan, F. ^ftfirnrfir chyotishyati, C. <rafttir«nr achyotishyat, P. F. <Mrfril
chyotitd, B. ^pTTK chyutydt 11 Pt. ^jfirrK chyutitab or chyotitab, Mxyrfl^ cAm-
chyutvdn, Ger. TififrirfT chyotitvd or chyutitvd, Adj. ^ftfinnii: chyotitavyah 11
Pass. ^JiTir chyutyate, Caus. aftlPlfil chyotayati, Aor. *^*M rf A achuchyutat, Des.
^^irriMfri chuchyotishati or ^ajftrefir chuchyutishati, Int. <ft*prii chochyutyate,
W^ftftl chochyotti.
4. ^TiT schyut, to flow, («ufrf^.)
P.^Bfrnfff kchyotati, I. WV|tfl II aichyotattO. wtfc^schyotet, I.TsftfCft&chyotatu 11
Pf. 1. ^>ftiT chuschyota, 9. ^WiT. chu&chyutub, I A. 1. wftfM aschyotisham,
2. ^rarrtr: aschyotib, or II A. 1. VVTjt aschyutam, F. vftftmril schyotishyati,
C. wftfiranr^ aichyotishyat, P. F. ^frfwr hchyotitd, B. T8prnTN&%ttfya£ &c.
Note —This verb is sometimes written 13TT sckut.
5. «T^wian/A, to shake.
P. jfafw manthati 11 Pf. i.*w*T»wamaMWa, 2. WHftrT mamanthitha, 3. ipfawa-
mantha, 7. HmPvjh mamanthima, 8. TR^TO mamanthathub (Pan. 1. 2, 5) or, less
correctly, JW^Pg: mamathathuh, (§ 328, 4), I A. wjvjl^ amanthit, F. irftrrfil
manthishyati, P. F. ifftnn manthitd, B. «Tnmr mathydt ((} 345 1) ll Pt. nftnr:
mathitab, HiWl^ mamanthvdn, Ger. 4ftfiV1 manthitvd or hPvihi mathitvd (Pan. 1.
2, 23 ; § 428), °>rn| -mathya, Adj. irfalTO manthitavyah, 4^fNt manthaniyab,
Jim: manthyab 11 Pass. nWri mathyate, Caus. «Nrrfil manthayati, Des. T*wrV^fir
mimanthishati, Int. HiHuiri mdmathyate, nwfa mdmantti or HIHvflpK mdmanthiti,
Impf. 3. WIH«f amdman.
Note—Roots ending in consonants preceded by a nasal, lose the nasalbefore weakening (to,
terminations (Pan. vi. 4, 24); but not roots written with Anubandha^t. The terminations
 BHft CLA8S, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 251

of the reduplicated perfect in the dual and plural are weakening (kit), except after roots ending
in double consonants (Pan. I. 2, 5). According to some, however, the weakening is allowed
even after double consonants : yipMP^fd I H«fl*ft<}^fs*<*r<l<^: I n"*TT ^ BWhitapppTTjiil I
TT»Tffl tT^ftfir II Roots, however, which thus drop the penultimate
nasal in the perfect, need not take *e instead of reduplication : 't«j|fMtfl 5fi( ctfai^HKVIg: I
Prakriya-Kaumudi, p. 7 b.
Native grammarians admit a verb HVjTd mathati (mathe), and another *T*rrfiT mathndti,
which supply a variety of verbal derivatives.
6. ^ kunth, to strike, (^rfa.)
Roots marked in the Dhatupatha by technical final \i keep their penultimate nasal throughout.
This root can take no Guna, on account of its final conjunct consonant.
P. ^*lfiT Jcunthati, I. ^nj*n^ akunthat, O. kunthet, I. ^rj kunthatu 11
Pf. 1. chukuntha, 2. ^pjftPI chukunthitha, 9. ^j^JJ chukunthuh, I A. «4«ftiT
akunthit, 9. ^rjftpj: akunthishuh, F. «jftrnrfir kunthishyati, P. F. jftjHI kunthitd,
B. vnrnf kunthydt, (nfMsjTff pranikunthydt, § 99, not with lingual m n, as
Carey gives it) 11 Pt. igftnR kunthitah, ^^r^ chukunthvdn, Ger. ifvjHI kun-
thitvd, °^nj -kunthya, Adj. 4ftnr*K kunthitavyah n Pass. 4pqft kunthyate,
Caus. «K*prfk kunthayati, Des. TCfalft chukunthishati, Int. «ftfarii chokun-
thyate, '•Tl^fV chokuntti.
7. ftr^sirfA, to go (ftv), and ftro si<?A, to command (fav).
P. ihlfir sedhati (fffafit nisedhati*), I. ^rchnr asedhat 11 Pf. i.ftnresisAedAa,
2. fijTtfVro sishedhitha, 9. ftrfavt sishidhuh, I A. wihftv asedhit, F. ^ftrorfii
sedhishyati, P. F. ifvjril sedhitd, B. ftrurnr sidhydt.
In the sense of commanding or ordaining, this root is marked by technical
"3S u (fw^shidhu), and hence the intermediate ^ i may be omitted. Thus
Pf. 2. ftnifVT sishedhitha or ftntg sisheddha, 4. ftrfafiPT sishidhiva or fafma
sishidhva &c, F. wfWmfrf sedhishyati or ttarfil setsyati, P. F. itftlill sedhitd or
*T5T seddhd, I A. wiNhr asedhit (as before), or 1. ^r%# asaitsam, 2. vthlfc
asaitsih, 3. vfhtrtlT asaitsit, 4. w«r*jf asaitsva, 5. ^rfril asaiddham, 6.
asaiddhdm, 7. V%79? asaitsma, 8. fltiy asaiddha, 9. asaitsuh 11 Pt. ftr^r:
siddhah, Ger. ufviril sedhitvd or ftj^T siddhvd, °ftrai -sidhya, Adj. iKVirvR
sedhitavyah or itf*n seddhavyah 11 Pass, ftrar^ sidhyate, Caus. irtnrfir
sedhayati, Des. ftraftofir sisedhishati or ftrfanrfil sishitsati 103), Int. irfaur^
seshidhyate, iftfil sesheddhi.
* The change of into ^sA is forbidden by Panini vm. 3, 113, when ftpi sidA means
to go. It is admitted by the Sar. The Anubandha 3 u is sometimes added to ftf^sirfA, to
go, but is explained to be for the sake of pronunciation only. Colebrooke marks it as
erroneous. Its proper meaning would be that intermediate ^ i is optional in the gerund,
and forbidden in the past participle (§ 337, II. 5). The forms without intermediate ^ i
belong properly only to ftP^stdA, to command. This verb mus* change its initial after
prepositions ; firwfff nishedhati.
Kk 2
252 BH& CLASS, PABASMAIPADA VERBS.

8. ^ khad, to be steady, to kill, to eat.

P. wfit khadati u Pf. i. >tot^ chakhada, 2. ^nffrq chakhaditha, 3.
chakhada, 4. *j«f<jq chakhadiva, 5. ^^5: chakhadathuh, 6. *<M<g: chakhadatuh,
7. P^*i chakhadima, 8. 1^ chakhada, 9. chakhaduh, I A. ««l^lir or
vl^rf akhS.dtt (Pan. VII. 2, 7 ; $ 348), F. ^f^Bifir khadishyati, P. F. ^fipn
khaditd, B. "mmj^khadydt 11 Pt. ^f^ii: khaditah, ^[^m^chakhadvdn, Ger. igf^T
khadilvd, °s?r -khadya, Adj. grfipTO khaditavyah \\ Pass. ^?Tff khadyate,
Cans. ^n^fTX khddayati, Des. fa^irfiT chikhadishati, Int. ^rwraw chdkhadyate,
tfryfa chdkhatti.
9. ^arfj to speak.
P. T^fiT gadati (nftan^fff pranigadati), I. ^R^TT agadat (WI^IT prariya-
gadat), O. n?pT #acfef, I. JnfiJ gadatu 11 Pf. 1. *p»TT^ jagada, 2. «J'lf<;v|
jagaditha,. 9. wig: jagaduh, I A. SHH<j1ri or wiql-^ agadtt (Pap. vn. a, 7 ;
$ 348), F. nfyqftt gadishyati, C. Wlf^m^ agadishyat, P. F. irfifirr gaditd,
B. TOffi^ gadydt 11 Caus. Tl^rf* gddayaii, Des. ftprf^lfir jigadishati, Int.
^rpT^rff jdgadyate, snrfa jdgatti.

10. -c^ rarf, to trace, to scratch.

P. 7^fir radati 11 Pf. 1. rjrj^ rar&da, reditha, g.~V!ireduh, I A. ^T^hror
sn^hr aradft ($ 348).
1 1. tf<3 to hum, (m^.)
P. H^Prt nadati (wtr^fir pranadati, uftrr^fir praninadati) 11 Pf. 1. ?pn^ nanada,
2. qrf^T neditha, 9. neduh, I A. vshi<£h or anadit.

12. «l| arrf, to go, to ask, to pain.

P. ^tffir ardati, I. *nf<T arrfai 11 Pf. 1. WJff dnarda, 2. OTJtff*! dnarditha,
9. ^TrJ? dnarduh, I A. VR(f)T ardft, F. wf^mfd ardishyati 11 Pt. vfflK arditah,
not ^rrih artfa#, see also p. 166 11 Caus. wfofll ardayati, ^rrff^ir drdidat, Des.
^H^Mld ardidishati.
13. jfe iwrf3 to govern, (^.)
P. ^fir indati, I. aindat, O. 3^ mtfef, I. ^TJ indatu ll Pf. ^i^*K
inddmchakdra {§ 325) or fours inddmdsa or ^t<P^r inddmbabMva, I A,
i.ljf^i aindisham, 2."^: aindih, F. $fi^tftl indishyati, C. ~>if^ «|r^ aindishyat,
P. F. ^fifin irarfi/a, B. ^irnr ira<fya* ll Pt. ^fifri: inditah, Perf. ^fapT^ w-
ddmchakrivdn or Vf^nr bdbhdvdn or VHlftHR dsivdn, Perf. Pass,
inddmchakrdnah* or ^T^Rt
Cv. bahMvdnah or VTOPTC dsdnah.

14. fH^ wiwrfj to blame, (ftrf^.)

P. frf^fir nindati (jTRcpi pranindanam or irft^H praiiindanam, § 98, 8, 2) ll
Pf. ftrftf^ nininda, I A. ^rfH^ti^ anindit, F. fiifijufrf nindishyati, P. F. f^f^in
ninditd, B. PTOTTT nindydt.
 BHfr CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VEBBS. 253

15. ftfl^niksh, to kiss, (ftpej.)

' P. fJT^fir nikshati (uftrryfir pranikshati, not ufVrqfit pranikshati, § 98, 8, 2) 11
Pf. fnfn«| niniksha, I A. wl^ts)^ anikshU, F. ftrftprfll nikshishyati, P. F.
fatten nikshitd, B. ftngmr nikshydt.

16. g^wAA, to go.

P. wl«fit o#Aa*i (iftojftrjaroMaft*, § 43), I. wfaiT aukhat II Pf. 1, uvokha
314), 2. CTtftn uvokhitha, 3. ??tar uvokha, 7. vftffR 4khima, I A. WR«rtiT
aukhit, F. vtfferafil okhishyati, C. vtfavnr aukhishyat, P. F. ^tfcnrt okhitd,
B. ^Tfff ukhydt 11 Pass. TWt ukhyate, Caus. ^ftarefir okhayati, Des. '(ftf^ftnift
ochikhishati.
1 7. arecA, to go, to worship, and ^rfa.)
The Anubandha 7« of ^Ta3cAu allows the option of intermediate in the gerund, ■wPsun
afichitvd or aktvd, and its nasal remains, except before weakening forms (see month,
No. 5); butthe Anubandha 3[t of wf'iacAt requires the nasal throughout (Dhatup&{ha7,6).
P. ^rfil anchati 11 Pf. 1. '<HT«T*I dnancha 313), 9. WT*t dnanchuh (but see
No. 5, note), I A. ^n*fti{dnchit, F. #fc*tfff anchishyati, C. Wi N «HH dnchishyat,
P. F. ^f^irr anchitd, B. VVTHT anchydt (may he worship), VVH^ achydt (may
he go), §345t-
Pass, wpt achyate and wajit anchyate, Caus. ^rorfif anchayati, Des.
^P«lP*mfif anchichishati.
Distinguish between v!P«in; anchitati, worshipped, Ger. ^f"«ir<ll anchitvd, having
worshipped, and ^HK aitfaA, moved (Pan. vil. 2, 53 ; vi. 4, 30) ; anch never seems
to lose its nasal when it means to honour : Pass. ^H^lTl' anchyate, he is honoured, ■wwjTT
achyate, he is moved. The two roots, however, are not always kept distinct.

18. dnchh, to stretch, (^frfdu)

P. W5fir dnchhati 11 Pf. WPffa? dndnchha or ?TT$ dnchha (§ 313), I A. wsfhr
dnchhit, F. wtftrirftl dnchhishyati 11 Caus. fli$nfrt dnchhayati, Des. wtfafl*nftl
dnchichchhishati.
19. vimruch, to go, (^3.)
^Hfir mrochati 11 This and other verbs enumerated $ 367 take optionally
the first or second aorist; WgWI rf amrochit or wrq^amruchat 11 Pt. mruk-
tah, Perf. mumruchvdn, Ger. jftJTf mruchitvd or ^par mruktvd.

20. hurchh, to be crooked, (^%.)

P. g&ft Mrchchhati (§ 143) 11 Pf. ^arywArfrcAcMa, I A. aMrch-
chhit II Pt. gfthn Mrchchhitah or hurnah (§ 431, 2).

21. 7^ vaj, to go.

P. 'srirftT vajati ll Pf. 1. T^T»T vavaja, 2. V^ftra vavajitha ($ 328), I A. U^T-
sftr^ at>4/'^, F. mfWit vajishyaii.
254 BHfr CLASS, PARASMAIFADA VERBS.

22. sTJ^ vrqj, to go.

P. mflt vrajati n Pf. i.^TST vavrdja, 2. ^aftr*! vavrajitha, I A. WJinAl^aerq/ft
348*) 11 Pt. ■afsnr. vrajitah 11 Caus. imprftl vrdjayati, Des. forftrqft
vivrajishati, Int. TOnri) vdvrajyate, TTUftH vdvrakti.

23. ^T3^ q/, to go, to throw.

P. Wffll q/a/i, I. WTWH a/0' 11 ^ ^ must be substituted in the general
tenses before terminations beginning with vowels. Before all consonants
except ^ y (Pan. 11. 4, 56, v.) this substitution is optional, i. e. both ^rs^ aj
and vt may be used 11 Pf. 1. fan vivtiya, 2. f<J4«f vivetha or fatal vivayitha
(§ 335, 3), [iMlfVvi a/i/Aa], 3. ftjcjm vivdya, 4. ftrfare vivyiva 334), [^irrftre
q/toa], 5. faarg: vivyathuh, 6. ftWWJ vivyatub, 7. ftrftw vivyima [^TftrR 4/*ma]»
8. vivya, 9. fa^g: vivyuh, I A. ^srtlftiT avaishit [^rrsftiT 07ft], 9. avaishuh,
F. ^mfrt veshyati (§ 332, 3), C. «^m^ aveshyat, P. F. %in ve/a, B. ^hrrff rfya/
[F. wftr«rfil ajishyati, C. «rrftf«rjr djishyat, P. F. frftnn q/'i/a] II Pt. ^fhi: rftaA
[^iftriK q/'i/aA], Perf. firtfarr^ vivivdn [mrfs^n^djivdn], Get. ^tf&vtivd [yffsr^T
ajitvd^j, °^fa-viya, Adj. ^TPsr: vetavyalj. [^rfifirar: q/i/avyaA], ^JTJftT: vayaniyah,,
%m wyaA 11 Pass. viyate, Caus. <*nmfir vdyayati, Des. fg^fir vivishati
[^tftrftnfir fl/ywAo/i], Int. ^fhn) veviyate, ^fir veveti.

24. f^1 AsAi, to wane.

P. «J^Pd kshayati ll Pf. 1. f-MHJN chikshdya, 2. frcj^l chikshetha or fafflrq
chikshayitha, 9. f*lf«j^: chikshiyuh, I A. "ST^Nta akshaishit, F. aj mfrf ksheshyati,
B. ^bm^kshiydt (§ 390) 11 Pt. ftfirt kshitafy or Bjliy: ksMnafr, Caus. "BpPTfiT AsAa-
yayati, Des. faffrrfr chikshishati, Int. 'hq'Hrff chekshtyate, M%fir cheksheti.
The Caus. ttyqqfir kshapayati is better referred to ^ AsAai ($ 462, II. 23) .

25. ^ Aa?, to rain, to encompass, (oS7.)

The Anubandha ^ e prevents the lengthening of the vowel in the aorist.
P. TOfir Aafa*i 11 Pf. ^BiZ chakdta, I A ^niiyfr^ aAfltfft (no Vriddhi, § 348+).
26. ^wp, to protect, (^.)
The verbs ^^up, to guard, W^rfftjjp, to warm, fVff »icAi, to go, pan, to traffic, T^pan,
to praise, take ^TTT <fya in the special tenses, and take it optionally in the rest.
(Pan. hi. 1, 28; 31.)
P. iftqpifil gopdyati, I. wftuNif agopdyat, O. iflHWiT gopdyet, I. jflMmg
gopdyatu ll Pf. iflmUMcfcH. gopdydmchakdra ($ 325, 3) or *pffar jugopa,
I A. ^Nfiimfl ^agopdyit, wffcftiT qgropft or ^rm^frff agaupsit {§ 337, 1. 2), 6. WThrt
agauptdm, F. jftTrftrnrfir gopdyishyati, ifrftrnrfir gopishyati, or jftaprfir gopsyati,
P. F. ifhrffinn gopdyitd, TfTftnrr gopitd, or TfhTT ^qp^a, B. jflmmrri^ gopdyydt or
J|U4li^ gupydt 11 Pt. jflmfarf: gopdyitalj, or Jpn guptah, Ger. jDMlHlr^l gopdyitvd,
vtfi&ngopUvd, or ttst^mp^<2, Adj. iftarfVnpq: gopdyitavyab, iftftRrar: gopitavyah,
 BHft CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 255

or ifta: gopyah It Caus. ifrwfli gopayati or ntaTTTtlT gopdyayati, Des. g'jmPd

jugupsati, ij 'J fa M frf jugupishati, *jiftfirefir jugopishati, or Jgiftalftnfil jugopdyi-
skati, Int. jfojTHTr jogupyate, sftntfir jogopti.

27. to warm.
P. \UHjfrf dMpdyati 11 Pf. ^prf^WT dMpaydmchakdra or dudMpa (no
Guna, because the vowel is long), I A. ^r^prh^a^Ajipayft or wgftr^adhupit.

28. tt^ tap, to burn, ($ 332, 14).

P. rnrfk /opalt 11 Pf. 1. rnmj tatapa, 2. ms^t tataptha or Hfavj tepitha
(§ 335' 3)> 3- fnrni tatdpa, I A. 1. WTO atdpsam, 2. ^rfltft: atdpsih, 3. ^rfimld
atdpsit, 6. «nrnri atdptam (§ 351), F. Kt^irfTT tapsyati, P. F. inn la/rfd, B. H<Hlr^
tapydt 11 Pt. (TH: taptah, itf^T^tepivdn, Ger. KWttaptvd, Adj. (TU^n: taptavyah,
TIW. tapyah (short, because it ends in p, § 456, 6) ll Pass. iPirff tapyate,
Caus. irnprfii tdpayati, Des. finrofir titapsati, Int. dlri'ujri tdtapyate, JTHlftl

Note —With certain prepositions IP^fap takes the Atmanepada (Pan. 1. 3, 27); a *tMfl «f<a-
pafe, (cumDrftapafe, it shines. It has an active sense in the passive (i.e. Div Atm.), if it refers to
TW.tapah, austere devotion; iT^fiT TT4 w 1 wltapyatetapastdpasah,the devotee performs austere
devotion. In the sense of regretting (being burnt) it forms the Aor. ^TiTJr atapta ; ,a«(<iinn
himi c«A«m anvavdtapta pdpena karmand, he was distressed by a sinful act. (Colebr.)

29. cAam, to eat, (^J.)

The following verbs lengthen their vowel in the special tenses (Pan. vil. 3, 75, 76) : *&{cham,
if preceded by 'ST a, to rinse, VPIWfil dchdmati; tV^ shthiv, to spit, Tffafir shthivati
(see No. 35); "aiH iram, to stride, JSTThI krdmati (see No. 30); ?5>T Ham, to tire, ITOTTI
kldmati; jruA, to hide, 'T^TTT guhati, follows a different rule, lengthening its vowel
throughout, instead of taking Guna, when a vowel follows. (Pan. VI. 4, 89.)
P. ^trfir chamati, but after the prep, d, ^Nwfrl dchdmati 11 Pf. 1. sj^ih
chachdma, MMfa^ chachamitha or %t«T*I chemitha &c, I A. ?ra»rbl achamit
348*) 11 Pt. ^Tfr: chdntah, Ger. ^Ml chdntvd or 'qfHWT chamitvd, Adj. iflnran
chamitavyah, *rmn chdmyah (Pan. ill. 1, 126) 11 Caus. VWlft chdmayati (§462).

30. •gw Aram, to stride, (g«g.)

■gig tram, to stride, >JT5T JAras, to shine, *JT3| 6Mas, to shine, bhram, to roam, ^
to fail, ?nft <ras, to tremble, <raf, to cut, cJ1^ iasA, to desire, may take 1 in the
special tenses. Hence tai^ln bhrdmyati or OTTTT bhramati. (Pan. ill. 1, 70.)
P. ISPlfir Ardma^i or 'rf\|W|frf krdmyati, I. ^raTTTT akrdmat or ^ramnT akrdmyat 11
Pf. chakrdma, I A. ^rg«»fh^ akramit (§ 348*), F. nfoirfw kramishyati, P. F.
Bsftnn kramitd, B. ■gsHrnr kramydt 11
Aram lengthens its vowel in the general tenses (£#) of the Parasmai-
pada (Pan. vn. 3, 76). Hence flTRTH krdmati, but ^iiffi kramate. It takes
256 BHfj CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

no intermediate 3[ i in the Atm. ; Fut. sMUri kramsyate, P. F. tkht krantd}

Aor. ^lifcm akramsta ; but some grammarians admit intermediate <^ i.
Pt. wtt. krdntafy, Perf. M ffP\ | ^ chakranvdn, Ger. tfTrWi krantvd or fffimi Ara-
wiifra 439), Adj. niftnTO kramitavyalj. 11 Pass. JSHTJi kramyate, Caus. flnqfil
kramayati, $461, (after prep, also ■flTWrfil krdmayati), Des. fsraifirefiT chikra-
mishati or fv&ri) chikramsate, Int. ^■an^' chankramyate, %#ftt chankranti.
Note —It is by no means certain that fcram in the Div class forms stii^qPfl kramyati.
It is not one of the eight Sam verbs (Pan. vn. 3, 74); and in Pan. vn. 3, 76, /yon is no
longer valid. The Prasada gives ai^in kramyati; but adds, *jlHrl i| TpiTfa <j1*h
WlWpftfir I The Sarasvati decides for ffTHTnl kramyati, giving the general rule (11. 1, 145)
JJIHI^Ini c^TTT H<*1\ I and enumerating as ?IHlH;, ^^WT^JiTBpraiJJT?^.

31. tpt yam, to stop.

The roots gam, to go, 1*T yam, to cease, and ^ ish, to wish, substitute t9E chchha for
their final in the special tenses. (Pan. VII. 3, 77.)
P. TOtfif yachchhati, I. VPFSKtt ayachchhat 11 Pf. 1. *Pn*T yayama, 2. 1^
yayantha or «tfnv| yemitha, 9. Sig: yemufy, I A. ^T*Nrftr ayamsit 359),
F. VWftT yamsyati, P. F. ya«<«, B. qiqTIt yamydt ll Pt. inn yata#,
^flnrf^ yemivdn, Ger. *fi9T yataa, "Tiwi -yamya or °itW -yatya, Adj.
yantavyah,, tthk yamyafy (f«mim: niydmyah) 11 Pass. ^«jrt yamyate, Caus.
jpnrfir yamayati, II A. mffrpn^ ayiyamat, Des. finhrfjr yiyamsati, Int. qqujif
yamyamyate or tpHk yamyanti.
Note —*P^yam may be used in the Atm. with the prep. '3TT a1, if it is either intransitive,
Vmn iPp dyachchhate taruh, the tree spreads, or governs as its object a member of the
agent's body ; ITflj dyachchhate pdnim, he puts forth his hand. Likewise with
the prep. ^To1, Wsam, ^ ud, if it is used reflectively ; «i«i«aj) "al ^1 »^ samyachchhate vrihin,
he heaps together his own rice. Likewise after upa, when it means to espouse ; ^PTC
"'tflHigm'iw rdmah sitdm updyamsta, Rama married Sita : here the Aor. may also be TTPTU
updyata; like ST^PHl uddyata, he divulged another's faults. (§ 356.)

32. «T»T nam, to bow, (tfPT.)

P. «wfil namati II Pf. 1. HHIH nandma, 2. ^T«T*T nanantha or hPhm nemitha,
9. nemuh, I A. -4H*fliT anamsit (§ 359), F. «farfiT namsyati, P. F. ^nrr nantd,
B. 5p*rnT namydt &c., like *w yam.
Note—«p^naTO may be conjugated in the Atmanepada. (Pan. ill. 1, 89.)
The Anubandha ^ a given to it by some grammarians is declared wrong by others.
33. -i^gam, to go, (nij.)
P. *Rtflj gachchhati 11 Pf. 1. »pn»T jagama, 2. ipiftrq jagamitha or HJivi
jagantha, 3. wWfjagdma, 4. Kfr^jagmiva 328, 3), 5. sp^T^t jagmathuh &c,
II A. vmi agamat (§ 367), F. ifiwfrf gamishyati {§ 338, 2), P. F. jtht gantd,
B. v^v^gamydt 11 Pt. irmgatafy, Perf. H 0 *l I «^jagmivdn or 5TH«*l m^jaganvdn,
Ger. ttj^t gatvd, °JT»ir -gamya or °iTW -gatya, Adj. iTfttcc.gantavyab, JTWTC gamyah 11
 BHft CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 257

Pass. Jf|«jrf gamyate, Caus. JIHnfif gamayati, Aor. Jnfrrpnr ajigamat, Des.
f»l ' I (*m fif jigamishati, Int. vpraft jaiigamyate or snffir janganti.
Note —With prep. ?T saro it follows the Atm., if intransitive. The Caus. too, with the
prep. d, may follow the Atm., if it means to have patience ; 'STPTTITO TTT^tT dgamayasea
tdvat, wait a little. In the Atm. the final *(^m may be dropt in the Aor. and Ben. ; win
samagata or B*PHl samagamsta, «'iW)s sarhgasishta or «'i*t1lf samgamsishta. (See § 355.)

34. Hi^ juAa/, to burst, (fMMiMI.)

P- Mirtftl phalati 11 Pf. 1. MMilc* paphSla, 2. Vifw^f phelitha ($ 336, II. 2),
3. Wc? paphdla, 4. itfVw pheliva, I A. WiffiAir aphdlit [§ 348*), F. iBfenrfir
phalishyati 11 Pt. phullah (P&n. vm. 2, 55), Ger. ufarWl phalitvd 11 Pass.
Mi«*lifphalyate, Caus. iSTFTTftl phdlayati, Aor. Vtflmd A apiphalat, Des. Rrmfexfil
piphalishati, Int. v^j$rk pamphulyate, Tpgfer pamphulti. (Pan. vn. 4, 87-89.)

35. ft^jAfAu;, to spit, (fe^.)

P. sfafir shthivati 11 Pf. finfa tishtheva or far? tishtheva, I A. 'SuNliT ashthe-
vit, F. irfaxqfiT shthevishyati 11 Pt. 'Fjin shthyutah 11 Pass, tftanfr shthivyate {§ 143),
Caus. ttaqfif shthevayati, Des. fWtfWil tishthivishati or ;TO£lfTr tushthyushati
(Pan. vii. 2, 49), Int. fflsWit teshthivyate. No Intensive Parasmaipada.
Vowel lengthened in special tenses (see No. 29). Initial sibilant unchangeable (§ 103).

36. ftrji, to excel.

P. "SFjflt jayati ll Pf. 1. fitful jigaya, 2. f»T*ta jigetha or fiprftn? jigayitha,
3. ftPTTO jigdya, 4. ftrfnre jigyiva, 5. fifnnj: jigyathuh, 6. fanrg: jigyatuh,
7. fsifrim jigyima, 8. f*W jigya, 9. f*vrqi jigyuh, I A. ^r%^for ajaishit 350),
F. HuiPri jeshyati, P. F. %in /e/a, B. »flqii^ ./fya* ll Pt. ftnn jifa^, Perf.
falftwi jigivdn, Ger. Anwi jitvd, Adj. ihraK jetavyah, >Tt|»flM: jayaniyah,
itmjeyah, and ffur.jayyah (§ 456, 2), ftrw: jityah only with ^fis: Aa/i# (Pan.in.
1, 117) 11 Pass. Tftifn jiyate, Aor. ^rsrrfa Caus. irnnrftl jdpayati, Aor.
WiftinnT ajijapat, Des. ftpfhrfll jigishati, Int. ^"srtaff jejiyate, ^frf jejeti.
It follows the Atmanepada with the prepositions iJTT^am and vi.
The change of into *I y in the reduplicated perfect is anomalous (§ 319). It
does not take place in *HT jyd, to wither (f*i«iii"fl jindti), although the rule of Panini
might seem to comprehend that root after it ha3 taken Samprasdrana. a*lT jyd forms its
reduplicated perfect fWiftjijyau.

37. ^TST aksh, to obtain, (*TS|.)

afcsA follows also the Su class, vdjjuVfiT akshnoti &c.
P. *nffr akshati 11 Pf. 1. ^MKj dnaksha, 2. Wlftpr dnakshitha or VTPfV
dnashtha, 3. VPf^ dnaksha, 4. ftTHftfl dnakshiva or wm?l dnakshva, 5. ttpnTO
dnakshathuh, 6. ^MHJrf: dnakshatuh, 7. VPff^H dnakshima or VHMUH dnakshma,
8. VHHBf dnaksha, 9. ^TT»rg: dnakshuh, I A. 1. ^rrftSR dkshisham or ^rr4 dksham,
l 1
258 bhG class, parasmaipada verbs.

2. Wtrtffc dkshih, 3. ^n^ftr dkshit, 4. ^rtfof** dkshishva or TO dkshva, 5. ^tt?q$

dkshishtam or ^m? dshtam, 6. wfajST dkshishtam or wref dshtam, 7. ^rtfepi
dkshishma or *rrs?T dkshma, 8. *nfoj? dkshishfa or ^rre o*A<a, 9. <WTr^|: a&sAi-
or *ng: dkshuh, F. wftfrflt akshishyati or iMfrnfri akshyati, P. F. ^n%HT
akshitd or a«A*a 11 Pt. *rs: ashtah, Ger. *rfT a«Mva or ^fl^rTI akshitvd ll
Pass. TO?T^ akshyate, Caus. W^irfir akshayati, Aor. VTfv^V dchikshat, Des.
WTf^rftprfff dchikshishati (§476).
TTWfafaA, to hew, follows Wff afeA throughout, also in the optional forms
of the Su class.
38. ArwA, to drag along, to furrow.
P. *5frt karshati 11 Pf. 1. ^rart chakarsha, 2. chakarshitha, 3. '^spt
chakarsha, 4. *i^ffo chakrishiva (§335,3), I A. 1. ^raraf akdrksham, 2. ^1*1 «pt
akdrkshih, 3. wtfTfl akdrkshit, 4. ^nsraf akdrkshva, 5. WOT akdrshtam,
6. «rar?T akdrshtam, 7. vn(i akdrkshma, 8. ^nsrl akdrshta, 9. wsm: akdrkshuh;
or TOUrsf akrdksham &c, or I A. 4. ^iTsj akriksham &c. If used in the
Atmanepada, the two forms would be,
I A. 2. i.'BT^ift^ akrikshi, 2.^Gfir. akrishthdh, 3."^? akrishta,
I A. 4. 1. id. 2. wmftlK akrikshathdh, 3.^r^5fH akrikshata,
I A. a. 4. saajiftn akrikshvahi, 5. fl^HJIMT akrikshdthdm, 6. "J aj I rt i akrikshdtdm,
I A. 4. 4. ^ «j n fig akrikshdvahi, 5. id. 6. id.
I A. 2. 7.?l^E*rf^ akrikshmahi, 8.Wf^ akridhvam, g.^C^^lf akrikshata,
I A. 4 7. \H 4ji «j IH akrikshdmahi, 8. ^^dfakrikshadhvam, g.^pspfakrikshanta.
F. mgfh krakshyati or karkshyati, P. F. -gi?T krashtd or ^ifr karshtd 11
Pt. ^e: krishtah, Ger. krishtvd 11 Pass. <^uirt krishyate, Caus. sfafil karsha-
yati, A.or. wtftfii^achakarshat or ojt M A^achikrishat, Des. fe^^fitchikrikshati,
Int. 'qO^viti charikrishyate, "**cfasf§ charikarshti or ^tgifij charikrashti.
The peculiar Guna and Vriddhi of ^ ri, viz. ^ ra and TT rd, instead of ,3T^ or and or,
take place necessarily in ^TS^sri/', to emit, and "^S^oVi^, to see (Pan. VI. 1, 58); 0TTT srashtd,
■JST drashtd, WW I8fi 1^ asrdkshit, and ^1 £ I tflK^adrdkshit .- optionally in verbs with penultimate
^ ri, which reject intermediate ^ i (Pan. vi. 1, 59); Tp^trip, to rejoice, oPTf traptd or iTiiT
*arp<a, Aor. WP*ffiT atdrpsit, ^H\^\^atrdps{t or <Hrfqrisa<ripaf.

39. ^^rws/i, to kill.

P. Cmfrf roshati 11 Pf. 1. 4*0 M rurosha, 2. Jj'OfMVf ruroshitha, 9. n«r«-
»AmA, I A. viClHlrt aroshit, F. tlPmnfri roshishyati, P. F. tta rosA/d or ttftiTt
roshitd (§ 337, II. 1).
40. T*t ws/t, to burn.
P. VH^Hfri oshati, I. ^ir^ aushat 11 Pf. 1 . tfrltairc oshdmchakdra or 7^xr uvosha
(^326), 2. 4<nr>4V| uvoshitha, ^."^^uvosha, ^.^^4shivahc., lA.^fritausMt,
F. wtflrofir oshishyati, P. F. <ftftnn oshitd, B. Tornr ushydt 11 Pt. ,?ftir: ushitah
or wtfair: oshitah (J 425) II Des. wtfaftofir oshishishati.
 BHft CLASS, PABASMAIPADA VERBS. 259

41. ftl^ mill, to sprinkle.

V.iftfitmehati 11 Pf. i.ftfn^mimeha, 2.ftwf^l mimehitha, IA.^ffpq7{amikshat
(§ 3«5o), F. HV^frl mekshyati, P. F. medhd 11 Pt. >rte: midhah, Perf. >ftfT^
midhvdn (ftrfiqrR mimihvdn), Ger. ifhp midhva 11 Caus. ^gTrfft mehayati,
^nftf»Tf^ amimihat, Des. ftrftnffll mimikshati, Int. infa^ memehyate, f<5
memedhi, (^ftrfe memidhi, Westerg.)
42. ^? o*aA, to burn.
P. ^fir dahati 11 Pf. 1 . dadaha, 2.^f^T dehitha or ^nj dadagdha, F. VSSlfir
dhakshyati 118), P. F. dagdhd, B.^mTt^dahydt, I A. i.^nmj arfMfoAam,
2. iHnrisih adhdkshih, 3. WTVf) ^adhdkshit, 4.^TVTC? adhdkshva, 5.^T»V addgdham,
6. H^VVT addgdham, 7. ^rtrr^T adhdkshma, 8. ^H<|J*J addgdha, 9. ^rtrrBj: adhdkshuh
(see p. 185) 11 Pt. ^rn: dagdhah 11 Caus. ^nrfir ddhayati, Aor. ^i^^atfWaAaf,
Des. f^rejfrT didhakshati, Int. <^riiil dandahyate, ^frf dandagdhi.
43. >w ^rZai, to droop ; also wZai, to fade.
P. MWfrl gldyati, O. Xpjr^ ^Zayei 11 Pf. 1. Wt^ jaglau (§ 329), 2. »|fi<4H
jaglitha 0T*c&[njagldtha, ^.^r^jaglau, 4. 'Sffr^mjagliva, ^.WtS^.jaglathuh,
6.WT^.jaglatuh, 7. srf* twjaglima, s.^fttjagla, ^.WT^.jagluh, I A. i.^MlfttM
agldsisham 357), 2. W<3TWfc agldsih, 3. xWJ<>tl«1i^ agldsit, 4. WTSTftw a^Za-
sishva, 5. VTSlfferi agldsishtam, 6. OTpTTftrji agldsishtdm, 7. VPcSTfon agldsishma,
8. iPTOTftre agldsishta, 9. WMlftltg: agldsishuh, F. MI^Tri gldsyati, P. F. Mlifl
^Zatfa, B. r^rnr ^Zayatf or *$nffi^ $rZeyaZ 392-}-) » Pt- 'c*l«n gldnah, Ger.
MMI gldtvd, °T<5rJT -gldya, Adj. TfSDfvn gldtavyah, T&rftm gldniyah, TTbvt
gleyah 11 Pass, (impers.) *<TPrff gldyate, Caus. Trfinnfrf or rgppift glapayati,
Des. fif' rf I «fir jigldsati, Int. IfFcTPnl jdgldyate, STPTSTfil jdgldti.
44. ^ ^rai, to sing ; also ^ rai, to bark, % &ai, to croak.
P. JlUlfri gdyati ll Pf. »pft jagau, I A. tprrafh^ agdsit, F. TPSTftl gdsyati,
P. F. iffiTT #a£a, B. ifari^ ^eyarf 392). Mark the difference between ^ ^rai
and t& ^Zai in the Bened. 11 Pt. iftii: gitah, Ger. jfftsrr °»rnt -gdya,
Adj. J|| ri«*i: gdiavyafy, J|M*N: gdrdyal),, Jhn geyah 11 Pass. J|l*ln gtyate, Aor.
inrrftl agdyi, Caus. JimqPti gdpayati, Aor. ^rarfanTiT ajigapat, Des. ftprrcrfk
jigdsati, Int. ^pftiffc jegiyate, ^NllfH jdgdti.
45. F> shtyai, to sound, to gather; also ^ s£yai, the same. (J 103.)
P. Rflfil shtydyati (§ 103), I. WWHTW ashtydyat ll Pf. iTg^ tashtyau, I A.
wnft 1^ ashtydsit, F.wrerfir shtydsyati, P. F. isnni shtydtd, B. vnm\shtydydt
or Fhrr^sAZyeyaf II Pt. WIH! stydnah, v^C.prastitah, wrftW. prastimah 443).
Note—^With regard to the initial lingual sibilant, the Prasada quotes the Varttika to
Pan. vi. 1, 64, as ?prnre>^i«!ifirai flATOTOi I A marginal note says, ^*lgr8^Ht*-

1 mv^hmn vth^ ttot ^r*u< $ h i fM<ii hO <w 4.1 r^^vrn^ 11

L 1 2
260 BHt CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

46. 1* dai, to cleanse, (t|*T.)

This verb is distinguished by a mute Hp from other verbs, like <JT dd &c. It is therefore
not comprised under the ^ ghu verbs (§ 392*); it takes the first aorist (3rd form),
and does not substitute ^ i or ^ c for ^Tf d.
P. ^Txrfir ddyati 11 Pf. ^0 dadau, I A. 1. ^TftN addsisham, 2. VM^I+fl: addsih
&c, F. ^nprfiT ddsyati, P. F. ?[raT d<fta, B. ^TUTT^ ddydt 11 Pt. ?[ffn ddtah 11
Pass. jfPra ddyate, Caus. ^Tqufrf ddpayati, Des. f^Rffk diddsati, Int. ^l^l^rt
ddddyate, t^rftl ddddti.
47. ^ e?Ae, to drink, (w^.)
This verb is one of the six so-called ^ roots (§ 392), roots which in the general tenses
have for their base dd or VT
P. V^fir dhayati 11 Pf. 1. ^vr dadhau, 2. ^ftTT dadhitha or ^VT«I dadhdtha,
3. dadhau, 4. ^fira dadhiva, 5. ^>rg: dadhathuh, 6. spnp dadhatuh, 7. ^fijH
dadhima, 8. dadha, 9. ^v: dadhuh. It admits I A. 3. 357)5 II A. 368),
and Red. II A. 371):
1. ^nrrftnt adhdsisham, 2. 'srvreh adhdsih, 9. ^nnftrg: adhdsishuh,
1. "smf adhdm, 2. ^TVT*. adhdh, 9. ^Hij: adhuh,
1. adadham, 2. adadhah, 9. adadhan.
F. vrafir dhdsyati, P. F. VTHT rfMM, B. *ftm^<^eya£ II Pt. vfcr. dhitah, Ger.
>fb^T dhitvd, °VTT -dhdya 11 Pass. >fhnr dhiyate, Caus. VWfffft dhdpayati (Atm.
°^ -fe, to swallow), Aor. W^tam adidhapat, Des. fvwfir dhitsati, Int. i*T|farff
dedhiyate, "^TVlfrf dddhdti, or, with the always optional ^ e, ^i^Pri dddheti.

48. -<p^ rfris, to see, C|^T<C.)

This root substitutes l^f/josya in the special tenses.
P. T^iffir pasyati, I. ^nr^Ti^ apasyat, O. ^nranr pah/et, I. tJSIjJ pasyatu 11
Pf. i. dadarsa, 2. ^f^T dadarsiiha or dadrashtha (J 335), 3.
dadarka, 4. dadriSiva, 5. yCTgt dadnkathuh, 6. dadriiatuh,
7. dadrUima, 8. ^Tft dadriSa, 9. ^^i: dadrisuh, I A. 1. 'Sj jusf adrdksham,
2.^rjjT3fh adrdkshih, 3. tH KJ^ adrdkshit, 4.^51^ adrdkshva, 5.^51? adrdshtam,
6. Jiei adrdshtam, 7. WJTBJI adrdkshma, 8. <TJTf adrdshta, 9. T^r^: adrdkshuh
(§§ 360, 364) ; or II A. 1. adarkam, 9. ,?r^^a^ar^ara, F. £H^(rf drakshyati,
P. F. ■58T drashtd, B. "^TTiT drisydt 11 Pt. "^r: drishtah, Ger. ^1 drishtvd,
c"%$v -drikya, Adj. 37*1: drashtavyah, e^ftut darkaniyah, driSyah 11
Pass. "^Tff drikyate, F. ^f^nrff darkishyate or jajM' drakshyate {§ 411),
P. F. ?[f§in darkitd or •j^t drashtd, B. ^f^ite darkisMshta or grfl drikshishta,
Aor. i^f§ adar&i, Caus. ^^trfir dariayati, Aor. iM^I ^^i^a^mfli or ^R[^7r arfa-
darkat, Des. (<J ^KJ rf didrikshate (Atm.), Int. (^0 CTfit daridriiyate, ^fff

1^ rfm and ^3^«ry take T ra and TJ instead of ^ ar and ?rrc ar, as their
Guna and Vriddhi before consonantal terminations (Pan. vi. 1, 58). See N0.38.
 BHU CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 261

Other verbs which substitute different bases in the special tenses (Pan. vn.
3' 7^) : forms ^Trffrf richchhati; W sri, VMfrt dhdvati; 51^ £ad, 5[fhj^ ^yoie
(Atm.); ^ sad, yfttfnsidati; nx pd, f^fH pibati ; in ghrd, fsnrtK jighrati ;
mi dhmd, VHfir dhamati; ipn »<Ad, finrfff tishthati; ^SJ mnd, mifil manati;
dd, T5aifir yachchhati.
49. ^ ri, to go.
P. ^sfir richchhati (jvi^fff updrchhati, § 44), I. VT%V drchhat 11 Pf. 1. ^TR
dra, 2. ^rrfic'I dri/Aa ($ 338, 7), 3. «K dra, 4. 'srrfN driua, 5. ^JTC^: drathuh,
6. <wkij: dratuh, 7. flifoT drima, 8. ^ITC dra, 9. srn»: drwA, II A. 1. snt dram,
2. WTC draA, 3. WRIT draf, 9. WCT dran (§ 364) ; or I A. 1. w§ drsham,
2. SI 1 iff: drshih, 3. xHIMTrf drshit, 9. w|: drshuh, F. flfwfir arishyati 338, 3),
C. srTft«nf drishyat, P. F. to ar^d, B. aryd/ 390) 11 Pt. ^r: ritah or
ftrwA, Ger. ritvd, -r%a 11 Pass. ^PiTT aryate, Caus. wfafil
arpayati, Des. ^ftft^fir aririshati, Int. ■atjqri ardryate, 'mfnararti, wftiffftari-
yarti, arariti, oOmOrH ariyariti (exceptional intensive, J 479, with the
sense of moving tortuously).
50. ^ sr£, to go.
P. vrefir dhdvati always means to run, while *RfiT saratfi is used likewise in
the sense of going 11 Pf. 1. KffK sasara, 2. sasartha ($ 335, 3), 3. '*wu,
sasdra, 4. sasriva, 5. mjvf. sasrathuh, 6. TOW: sasratuh, 7. *TOTT sasrima,
8. TO sasra, 9. *r^: sasruh, II A. 1. ^rat asaram, 2. WflX' asarah, 3. w«M asarat;
or IA.i. writ asdr*Aam, 2. snrrtff: asdrshth, 3. ^OTtfftT asdrshit, F. *rft^rftf *ai*i-
shyati, P. F. *r§T sar^d, B. f%nrnr sriyd* (§ 390) 11 Pt. v?n sritah 11 Caus. BlMjfd
sdrayati, Des. fatfrtfk sisirshati, Int. tfefcri) sesriyate, TOtfir sarsarti (§ 490).

51. ^r<T ^ad, to wither, (^PI.)

The special tenses take the Atmanepada.
P. ^Ni) ktyate, I. W^frffl asiyata, O. 5ftVrf kiyeta, I. gfNlri kiyatdm II Pf.
1. ^njIT^ kakdda, 2. STSTTO kakattha or ^rfyvi seditha, 9. $rg: keduh, II A. ^r^Tf
aiadat, F. ^TWfrf katsyati, P. F. $rwr £a#d, B. ^TCTTTT kadydt n Caus. ^TfinnK
kdtayati (^rnprftl kddayati, he drives), Des. f^rwrff kikatsati, Int. Jfn^TOH idia-
aya/e, 51 1 31 Pa kdkatti.
53. ^ sad, to perish, (wj.)
P. tft^fil sidati (ftftfl^fii nishidati) ll Pf. 1. ««T^ sasdda, 2. irfij*! seditha or
fl«fvf sasattha, 9. ita*: seduh, II A. sr^7I asadat (^T^TT nyashadat), F. tmrflr
satsyati, P.F.^raT«aWd, B.TOTiis«dydf 11 Pt. 5ET^: sannah 11 Pass. TOTT sadyate,
Aor. snrrf^ asddi, Caus. ^TT^rfK sddayati, Aor. 'TH*flM<}HN asishadat, Des. ftPTflgft
sishatsati, Int. «l«ilri sdsadyate, anrttT sdsatti.

53. ttt /?d, to drink.

P. ftpffil pibati II Pf. 1. inri^apaM, 2. TTftTT papitha or WI papdtha, 9.
262 BHfr CLASS, PARASMA1PADA VERBS.

papuh, II A. snmih apdt, F. m^fri pdsyati, P. F. WT />a/a, B. TPJTiT j!?eya/

(§393) ll Pt. xfhr: J9«fa#, Ger. ff\^\ pitvd, °vXf -pdya, Adj. trnw pdtavyah,
VJ*ftV. pdniyah, ^mpeyah 11 Pass, trfarff piyate, Aor. ^PTrftrapayi, Caus. Trnprfir
pdyayati (or °^ -/e, to swallow), Aor. SN<iru|^ apipyat (Pari. vil. 4, 4), Des.
Rmrrfil pipdsati, Int. iNfarfT pepiyate, mm Id pdpdti.

54. UT #Ara, to smell, to perceive odour.

P. finrfit jighrati, I. vftnffl ajighrat, O. fftfti^jighret, I. (Vvij jighratu 11
Pf. 1. vrfftjaghrau, 2. nff^t jaghritha or wsnnjaghrdtha, g.iTB'.jaghrufi, II A.
*nrnr aghrdt, or I A. -HHr+firT aghrdsit (§§ 368, 357), F. Ul^frt ghrdsyati, P. F.
Win ghrdtd, B. Wulrf ghrdydt or ifaim ghreydt (§ 393 t) II Pt. TrnK ghrdtah or
TTTHK ghrdnah, Ger. TTTrTT ghrdtvd 11 Pass. VIM Hi ghrdyate, Aor. ^nrrfa aghrdyi,
Caus. amfli ghrdpayati, vftnTOT ajighrapat or nftlftro^ ajighripat (Pan. vn.
4, 6), Des. ftnrrafil jighrdsati, Int. iftftiik jeghriyate, imnfTf jdghrdti.

55. wn dhmd, to blow.

P. >JTfir dhamati 11 Pf. dadhmau, I A. ^runtfti^ adhmdsit, F. turwfir
dhmdsyati, B. VTPTTIT dhmdydt or ifcrrTiT dhmeydt 11 Pt. Tiffin dhmdtal), 11 Pass.
wrPTTT dhmdyate, Aor. mnfil adhmdyi, Caus. MffiPTfil dhmdpayati, Aor. sjf^-
UTTiT adidhmapat, Des. RpRTOfll didhmdsati, Int. ^«ihr^ dedhmiyate, ^imrfrf

56. rfM, to stand, (wt.)

* P. firefir tishthati ll Pf. (TOT tasthau (^TTViT^ adhitashthau), Wk.^WKnasthdt
("XfWtf^nyashtMt), 9. ^5: asthuh, F. Wiwfri sthdsyati, B. vfan^stJieydt (§ 39a) 11
Pt. TWiT: sthitah, fttTF^T sthitvd, °^erpi -sthdya, Adj. ^rnm: sthatavyah, tjqTtffa
sthdniyah, WTJ stheyah 11 Pass, wWff sthiyate, Aor. ^rWTfil asthdyi, Caus.
wnrrfir sthdpayati, Aor. ^rfirftror atishthipai, Des. tjrrratjr tishthdsati, Int.
TTtfhnt teshthiyate, ril^llfri tdsthdti.
Note—After W sam, aca, H/>ra, and fa pi, WT s<Aa is used in the Atm. ; also after
^TT a1, if it means to affirm ; with '3^ if it means to strive, not to rise ; or with «pa, if
it means to worship, &c. : Pres. fusil tishthate, Red. Perf. KW tasthe, Aor. *tfi*m asthita,
9. VtW^K asthishata, Fut. WTW sthdsyate, Ben. WTCTT? sthdsishta.

57. 'ST wiraa, to study.

P. iRtH manati ll Pf. 1. mamnau, 2. nfyvj mamnitha or Him mamndtha,
9. *fg: mamnuh, I A. ^rgnrtf^ amndsit, B. BPrTl^ mnaydt or ^faffiT mneydt ll
Pt. *JTTr. mndtah 11 Pass, ffnnl mndyate, Caus. yiuufrf mndpayati, Aor. wfNwir
amimnapat, Des. ftmmfrf mimndsati, Int. JTTOTlW mdmndyate, Hiyifrf mamraa^.

58. rfa, to give, (^TO^.)

P. xraifir yachchhati* (irftnratffT praniyachchhati) 11 Pf. ^ dadau, II A.

After the preposition « sam it may he used in the Atmanepada.

 BHti CLASS, PAKASMAIPADA VERBS. 263

^SRfTf^ addt, B. deydt (§ 392) 11 Pt. dattah, Ger. ^?JT dattvd (Pan. vn.
4, 46), °^nt -daya, Adj. ynfK ddtavyah, ^Ttflu: ddntyah, cfeyaA 11 Pass.
^hTn" diyate, Caus. ^nnrfff ddpayati, Des. f^rtlfd' ditsati, Int. i^tafff dediyate,

59. 3p Awi, to bend.

P. 3|Tfil hvarati 11 Pf. 1. ff^xt jahvfrra, 2. »T^j jahvartha (§ 335), 3. H^TC
jahvdra, 4.*(%fT3jahvariva(§§ 330,334), 9. nzp$:jahvaruh, I A. fl^pflfr ahvdr-
shit, 9. VJ(T§: ahvdrshuh, F. ajftTfic hvarishyati {§ 338), P. F. stSt hvartd, B.
c^^ltf hvarydt (§ 390) H Pt. ^tt: hvritak, Ger. ^t^t hvriivd, -hvritya, Adj.
<^H«M: hvartavyah, j^frfN: hvaraniyafy, jfrTO hvdrya/f, 11 Pass, gribr hvaryate,
Caus. ^TTTjfir hvdrayati, Des. 3?4f)l juhvUrshati, Int. «TT3^W jdhvaryate,
HT^SffS jarthvarti.
60. ^s<» skand, to approach, (^if^.)
P. **<(h skandati (trft^ferfa pariskandati or Mftwi^rir parishkandati, Pan.
viii. 3, 73, 74) 11 Pf. 1. ^5R^ chaskanda, 2. ^^if^vf chaskanditha or
chaskanttha, 9. chaskanduh or ^Qij: chaskaduh (see manth, No. 5),
I A. TCEmfhr askdntsit, 6. VWWi askdnttdm, 9. ssreKTW*. askdntsuh ; or II A.
VTCS^ askadam, F. ^feorfr skantsyati, P. F. skanttd, B. QTOTir skadydt
(v345t) U Pt.^^: skannafr (§103,6), Ger.^RTTsforafoa (^438) 11 Pass.^infsAa-
dyate, Caus. ^*rfir skandayati, kor. ^[^f^ii achaskandat (§374), Des.fsraiwfiT
chiskantsati, Int. -«H"i^«M chamskadyate (§ 485), ^ft^fir chantskanti.
61. K tri, to cross.
P. «rrfil torart 11 Pf. 1. KKTC tatara, 2. JlftSt teritha, 3. Tnrrt tatdra, 4. fffcs
teriva, I A. wnttir atdrit, F. ffftarfir or fUDuffd tarishyati {§ 340), P. F. irfion
or riOril taritd, B. iftihiT tirydt. If used in the Atmanepada, it forms P. ftTTff
Urate, Pf. fere, Aor. Wft atirshta or ^nrft? atarishta or ^nnrr? atarishta,
F. flfVHTfl tarishyate, B. rlfcfl? tarishishta or Tft^fe tirshtshta 11 Pt. iri^t: tirnah,
Ger. rflr5l tirtvd, °Trtff -tirya 11 Pass. rfHHr tiryate, Aor. wrft afari, Caus. jrrnrfji
tdrayati, Des. finrfwfw titarishati or fririOtrrf titarishati or finrHifrr titirshati,
Int. difl^ri tetiryate, iTIriPri tdtarti.
62. t»^ra/y, to tinge.
This verb and <^ daras, to bite, *i>^ saf!;', to stick, and scan/, to embrace (Pan. vi.
4, 25, 26), drop the penultimate nasal in the special tenses (§ 345 1) and in the weakening
forms (§ 344).
P. T^TftT rajati, I.^rrjnr arajat, O. t^TT ra/'etf, I. r^TH rqjatu 11 Pf. 1. t£»T
raranja, 2.TXfaviraranjitha or ij&nrarahktha, ^.XXMraranja, ^.xkfs^raranjiva,
9. raranjuh, I A. 'srrj^h^arawfeM, F. t^rfir rankshyati, P. F. ranktd,
B. tsarr^ rajydt. Also used in the Atmanepada: P. t»nr rajate, Pf. 1.
raranje, 2. <.i.(V^ raranjishe, I A. 3. ^rtn arankta, 9. ^KKfrf arankshata 11 Pt. Tas
raktalf, Ger. tUT raktvd or t«T ranktvd (§ 438) n Pass. Tjirff rajyate (P^n.
264 BHU CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

in. 1, 90), Caus. Ciprffl ranjayati or tsprfa rajayati, to hunt ($ 462, 26), Aor.
■flO M rls arirajat or *nx»n^ araranjat, Des. fttwfa rirankshati, Int. ^ntafff rara-
jyate, T\xfa rdrankti.
63. faff to cure, (fViT.)
This and some other verbs which are referred to the Bhu class always take the desiderative
terminations, if used in certain senses, faff kit, if it means to dwell, belongs to the
Chur class, or, according to Vopadeva, it may be regularly conjugated as a Bhu verb ;
but if it means to cure, it is Ph f<*rw Pn chikitsati.
P. ftffttwrfU chikitsati, I. ^rf^fisRTiT achiUtsat &c. II Pf. fnftmrfawt chi-
kitsdmchakdra, I A. vffftml^ achikitsit, F. f^fisfwncrfir chikitsishyati, P. F.
fVfisffann chikitsitd.
Thus are conjugated (5 472):
1. irq gup (to conceal), ^J^W jugupsate, he despises.
2. firs^fi/ (to sharpen), frfPrfBjii titikshate, he endures.
3. »rr^ mare (to revere), *fl«i«ri mimamsate, he investigates.
4. "^w badh (to bind), «flnWri bibhatsate, he loathes.
5. rfare (to cut), ^rafif diddmsati, he straightens.
6. ^rpT saw (to sharpen), gfhQTOfil SUdmsati, he sharpens.
64. Vft pat, to fall, (irjj.)
P. rntfa patati ( u (Vj M rl fri pranipatati) 11 Pf. i.Wrr papdta, 9. Trg: petuh,
II A. wrrff apaptam ($ 366), F. TrfirnrPir patishyati 11 Pt. Trfinn patitah 11 Pass.
TTiUW patyate, Aor. ^rqrfiT apa7i, Caus. ITlPjfil pdtayati, Des. ftitrfir^flT pipati-
shati or ftmrfir pitsati (§ 337, II. 3).
65. ^ was, to dwell.
P. ^fir vasati 11 Pf. 1. <j=flH uvasa, 2. TTftr«l uvasitha or uvastha,
3. ,ff=rw uvdsa, 4. aftw 4shiva, 5. ushathuh, 6. ,3Wgt dshatuh, -j. *Pqn
ushima, 8. tfsAa, 9. gra: ilshuh, I A. 1. »!MirW avdtsam (^ 132), 2. OTTWft!
avdtsih, 3. ^rentfiT avdtsit, 6. W«nnf avdttdm (§ 351), F. ^Tsrfir vatsyati, P. F.^ar
i;astfa, B. T«rnr ushydt 11 Pt. Tfinr. ushitah, Ger. gftf^T ushitvd, °T*I -ushya 11
Pass, tbt ushye, Aor. ^Rjftt awfoi, Caus. <rrtnrfir vdsayati, Aor. fTTfamr aitf-
i>asa£, Des. f^Rrfir vivatsati, Int. "<*|<^K vdvasyate, ^mPw vdvasti.
66. vad, to speak.
P. W^fff vadati 11 Pf. 1. uvdda, 2. uvaditha, 9. ■3^: rfo*«A, I A. 'WSTT-
^(K avddit, F. mP<jvjPh vadishyati, B. TtmTwa'yatf ll Pt. Tfipn uditah, Ger. ■gf^rfft
uditvd 11 Pass. TWTfr udyate, Aor. o<4lP< avddi, Caus. ^r^rfir vddayati, Aor.
avivadat, Des. fagf^fir vivadishati, Int. ^rrroff vdvadyate, ^raftj vdvatti.
67. faff &>i, to swell, (j^ftf'B.)
P. "J i| fri svayati 11 Pf. 1. ^r$rra Suidva or f^ram si&v&ya, 2. 3r$lftr*T su&avitha
or f^nvftni sihvayitha, 3. sMsaua or f^pSTTO Sisvdya, 4. Snfan sttiwvu'a or
 BHfT CLASS, atmanepada verbs. 265

fUlftufiH SiSviyiva, 5. ar^i^vj: huhuvathuh or fiflftni^p SMviyathuh, 9. srajg: susuvuh

or fyfiug: bibviyuh, I A. ^iwftT^asvayit, II A. ^(vj^asvat or ^1 f«y H riN asisviyat,
F. ^ftrwrfil Svayishyati, P. F. »jfqrTT Svayitd, B. snrnr £%af ll Pt. 3T«t: swwaA 11
Pass, snrff Myate, Caus. mm^frf Svdyayati, Aor. ufifPWni asi&vayat, Des.
f^nsrftntfir Sisvayishati, Int. ^Nrhrn kekoiyate or jfftsJUTT ko'suyate.

II. Atmanepada Verbs.

68. e^A, to grow.
P. vyniedhate, I.irvTT aidhata, O. UVtT edheta, I.^VKT edhatdm 11 Pf. Jj^Tn*
edhdmdsa*, F. ijfVpqw edhishyate, C. SHv^nr aidhishyata, P. F. ufyrtl edhitd,
I A. 1. J*fvfa aidhishi, 2. irfwrc aidhishthdh, 3. irfire aidhishta, 4. ^fvinfig aidhi-
shvahi, 5. cflrerai aidhishdthdrn, 6. irftimrfl aidhishdtdm, 7. ^f\i»*rf5 aidhishmahi,
8. ^ftnr aidhidhvam, 9. ^fv^TT aidhishata, B. ^fwte edhishishta 11 Pt. Trfv?n
edhitah 11 Pass. Jjwnr edhyate, Aor. 5rf»l aic?Ai, Caus. Pres. ijiprfir, edAa-
2/a£i, -fe, Perf. ^YTFTra edhaydmdsa, F. Trnfipufff, °K, edhayishyati, -te, Cond.
%vftnn^> °TT, aidhayishyat, -ta, P. F. ^ufndl edhayitd, II A. i^v^, aididhat,
-ta, B. ^vfWte edhayishishta, Des. ^(VlMfl edidhishate.

69. ^Tff to see.

P. ^rff ikshate, I. iNpr aikshata, O. fiipT iksheta, I. tvpri ikshatdm 11
Pf. ^T*nii ikshdmchakre, I A. ^fgr? aikshishta, F. ^fsrorff ikshishyate, C.
^Pajmn aikshishyata, P. F. ^f«jrfl ikshitd, B. ffof^te tkshishtshta 11 Pt. ffgpr:
ikshitah 11 Caus. f^pifir ikshayati, Aor. ijfa^pr aichikshat, Des. ff^fs^a
ichikshishate.
70. ^ rfarf, to give.
P. ^IT dadate, I.^n^TI adadata, O.^cT dadeta, I.^KT dadatdm 11 Pf. 3.3^
dadade 338, i), 6. 3^Tff dadaddte, 9. ^^"t dadadire (Pan. vi. 4, ia6),
I A. ^f^? adadishta, F. ^■sra' dadishyate, P. F. daditd, B. ^f^iflg
dadisMshta 11 Pt. daditah 11 Pass, dadyate, Aor. ^if^ adddi, Caus.
^I^hHt dddayati, Aor. w^^ir adidadat, Des. (^f^Md didadishate, Int. ^i^a«f
dddadyate, dddatti.
y 1 . tgtsB shvashk, to go.
P. i^e*^ shvashkate, I. ^rE^BTT ashvashkata 11 Pf. shashvashke, I A.
'WHrMiB ashvashkishta, F. T^fteKwift shvashkishyate, P. F. tqfMiin shvashkitd,
B. x^ffeoR^Tj shvashkishhhta.
Note—The initial WsA is not liable to become ^s. (See No. 45; Pan. vi. 1,64, 1. Cole-
brooke, p. 219.)

* viiti asa and^W^iaiAMBoare used in the Parasmaipada, Tfll chakre in the Atmanepada.
It is only in the passive that ^TTO asa and babhuva take Atmanepada terminations.
m m
266 BH& CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS.

72. ^}»^n/, to g°> to gain, &c.

P. ^nrft arjate, I. VTOI drjata 11 Pf. ^tr^T dnrije, I A. frrfttv arjishta,
F. «f$«rij arjishyate, P. F. <rfym ar/i^a, B. ^if^trte arjishishta 11 Pass.
rijyate (m^rf prdrjyate), Caus. w^fd arjayati, Aor. wrfifalT drjijat, Des.
^fi^ftRff arjijishate.
73- svaAjt to embrace.
<?9T aM/, BWsafl;, ^STswwy drop their nasal in the special tenses (Pan. vi. 4, 25). See No. 62.
P. Wain svajate, I. VCPfW asvajata 11 Pf. sasvanje or sasvaje
(Pan. 1. 2, 6, v.), I A. 1. ^r^f^ asvankshi, 2. VWWW. asvahkthdh, 3. ^T^i
asvankta, 4. ^t^T^fij asvankshvahi, 5. OT^frai asvankshdthdm, 6. iH«iSJT7TT
asvankshdtdm, 7. a*f asvankshmahi, 8. ^repr^ asvangdhvam, 9. "srwKijrt
asvahkshata, F. ^s?r^ svankshyate, B. Tjgflg svankshishta 11 Pass.
svajyate, Caus. #»mfiT svanjayati, Des. ftrchfli sisvahkshate, Int. wraHTii
sdsvajyate, funf* sdsvankti.

74. <Jij £rap, to be ashamed, (^TO.)

P. 3^ trapate, I. 4idMri atrapata n Pf. 3. 3^ <repe (Pan. vi. 4, 122),-
6. ^tn^ trepdte, 9. ^far trepire, I A. 1. trarfafa atrapishi or ^rafat atrapsi,
2. ^fMan atrapishthdl), or «dU|i: atrapthdl}, 3. W5Tftr§ airapishta or ^r^w
atrapta, F. Sffirwra trapishyate or Jp^qTl trapsyate, B. ^ftmlB trapishishia or
tfHfls trapstshfa.
75- fil*^ fy, to forbear.
P. Pit Priori titikshate 11 Pf. firfin^TOii titikshdmchakre, I A. wfirfirftfB fltfift-
kshishta, F. fHfriftsjuiK titikshishyate, B. firfirftspite titikshishishta 11 Caus.
ff*PlfiT tejayati.
Note—See No. 63. The simple verb is said to form iNpf £e;afe, he sharpens.

76. tn^jstm, to praise.

P. WHITi pandyate, I. mnmw apandyata 11 Pf. wraths pandydmchakre
or jaewe (without 'srr^ %). Thus likewise Aor. ^iwrftr? apandyishta or
^mfilltr apariishta, F. mmfauiri pandyishyate or xrfirrorfl panishyate, B. millfimlv
pandyishishta or tjftprh? panishishta 11 Caus. MUUnfir^araaya/i, Aor. vrftWH
panat, Des. ftroftpril pipanishate, Int. i^nnr^ pampanyate.
Note—This verb (see No. 26) takes WTayo, but, as it is mentioned by Panini m. 1, 28,
together with H*^pan, with which it shares but the meaning of to praise, it is argued that
it does not take ^TPT aya, unless it means to praise. It is likewise argued that *H!J /jan, if it
takes ■■SRaya, does not follow the Atmanepada, because the Anubandha, requiring the Atmane-
pada, applies only to the simple verb, VFS^pan, s«u n panate, he traffics. Other grammarians,
however, allow both the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada. The suffix ^TR dya may be kept
in the general tenses. (Pan. in. 1, 31.)
 BHU CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS. 267

77. ^r»T kam, to love,

P. <WHJ1H kdmayate, I. WPPTW akdmayata 11 Pf. * rh kdmaydmchakre
or ^oRfl chakame, I A. fnfoPTH achikamata or (without ^ni ay) fJ^PTfl acAa-
kamata (Pan. nr. I, 48, v.), F. cfcftuh) kamishyate or *prftr«rfl kdmayishyate,
B. fMtl kamishishta or VNftpftB kdmayishishta 11 Pass. oBHj^ kamyate, Aor.
^SMfa akdmi (Pan. vn. 3, 34, v.), Caus. SPniftl kdmayati, Des. fqcsfMH^ cAi-
kamishate or pMewnftrew chikdmayishate, Int. chahkamyate.
Note—This verb in the special tenses takes ^PT aya, like a verb of the Chur class, and
Vriddhi (Pan. 111. 1,30). In the general tenses 'SP^ay is optional. Or, if we admit two
roots, the one kam would be defective in the special tenses, while the other ^TT^&amay
is conjugated all through.
78. ^PI ay, to go.
P. ^ni^ ayate, I. VTOff ayata 11 Pf. WTTT^i aydmchakre (Pan. in. 1, 37),
JA.i.^nftrn?ayi«Ai, 2. wrfruu dyishthdh, 3. ^nftn? dyishta, ^.^jfa^f^dyishvahi,
5. WTPPrr*ri dyishdthdm, 6. WlftWTHI dyishdtdm, 7. SJTPTOfir dyishmahi, 8. ^rfftre4
dyidhvam or °^ -dhvam, 9. wrftpni dyishata, F. ^rnranr ayishyate, B. 'srDmflt?
ayishishta 11 Caus. fTPPffij dyayati, Des. ^rftrftrq^ ayiyishate.
With TCTpara' it forms IcJU^rl paldyate, he flees (Pan. vm. 2, 19), Ger. IcWT/ja/ayya;
with U/>ra, M\*iti pldyate; and with *TfT pari, m «M *4 n palyayate.
79. to aim.
P. z^afe, I. aihata it Pf. ^Msh ihdmchakre, I A. 5jf^? aihishta,
F. ^f^orff ihishyate, B. ^f^fte ihisMshta 11 Caus. forfil ihayati, Aor. Jjftl?^
aijihat, Des. ffsfff^fr ijihishate.
80. ^iT5^ Ms, to shine, (sFTST.)
P. cti^frf Msa/e n Pf. <rer$ chakdse or kdsdmchakre (§ 326), I A.
VPFlf^Tl akdsishta, F. <*lfymd kdsishyate 11 Caus. JfTSPTfil kasayati, Aor. ^re=ET-
^Tif achakdsat, Des. pMcMfgiHff chikdsishate, Int. -414,1341? chdkdsyate, TOrffe
chdkdshfi.
81. *ST^ Aas, to cough, («snj.)
P. ^PSW kdsate 11 Pf. <*|«M1S kdsdmchakre (§ 336) 11 Caus. sspprfw kasayati,
Aor. V^ranaF^ achakdsat (§ 372*).
82. ftf^ sifl, to serve, (^.)
P. iNir senate (nft^^joamAewa^e) 11 Pf. ftp^ sisheve, I A. 'smfa? asevishta,
F. «f«(U4ri sevishyate 11 Caus. iNqfrt sevayati, Aor. ^ftnNi^ asishevat, Des.
ftnJHPTff sisevishate, Int. inWff seshevyate.
83. Tf ^a, to go, (irr^.)
P. 3. Tt^ #afe, 6. nfff ^afej 9. JTT^ 1st pers. sing. ^ I. irraf gdtdm,
1st pers. sing. ?t #ai, O. 5r»T #eta, I. ^PTTir a^afo 11 Pf. 3. ip) jage, 6. «1->ll7)
jagdte, y.^rftytjagire, I A. i.^rmftr a^asi, 2.^Prreirf: agdsthdh, 3.WHW agdstakc,
mm a
268 BHU CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS.

F. ilim~k gdsyate, B. gasishta n Pass. Jlfarf giyate, Aor. *SNllfij a^ayi,

Caus. 'H'lltlftl gdpayati, Aor. vnfrrair ajigapat, Des. f>f*THlrf jigdsate, Int.
$jft*fk jegiyate.
84. ^ rw, to go, to kill (?), to speak, (^.)
P. ravate ll Pf. 3. ruruve, 6. ^^MIH ruruvdte, 9. ^f^iX ruruvire,
I A. ssRfMg aravishta or wdl aroshta (?) 11 Caus. CWlfil rdvayati, Aor. *rcf-
T^H ariravat (§ 474 and § 375+)-

85. ^ rfe, to protect, (^.)

P. ^Tff dayate 11 Pf. i.f^rir <%ye (Pan. vu. 4, 9), 2. P^Pqi) digyishe, 3.
<%ye, I A. 1. ^rf^fa adishi, 2.^5^: adithdh,, 3. ^rf^iT adita, F.^?p ddsyate,
B. ^Ttite ddsishta 11 Pt. dattah 11 Pass, ^tarff diyate, Caus. ^imifrf ddpayati,
Des. ftfww ditsate, Int. i^fanr dedlyate.
Note—It is one of the ^ verbs ; ^ rfai, to protect, forms <;i«4n ddyate in the present,
but follows ^ de in the general tenses.

86. ?r?^ dyut, to shine, (?nn^.)

P. Vtick dyotate 11 Pf. f^STff didyute (Pan. vu. 4, 67), I A. 3Hitfri? adyotishta or
^raTnr adyutat ($367: Pan. 1.3,91; m. 1,55), F.alPriuiii dyotishyate, B.«VfH*fl«
dyotishishta 11 Caus. wt?nrfii dyotayati, Aor. safari ^ adidyutat, Des. Prf M H
didyutishate or didyotishate, Int. ^WTT^ dedyutyate, ^sftfe dedyotti.
Note—The verbs beginning with ?pr<2yMj optionally admit the II Aor. Parasmaipada (§ 367).

87. ^jr vrit, to be, (^5^.)

P. vartate 11 Pf. vavrite, I A. ^RffTF avartishta or 'H^TTiT avritat,
F. qfrimft vartishyate or qr^fir vartsyati, B. rffafts vartishtshta 11 Caus. ^xrfir
vartayati, Aor. ^Th^mt avivritat or <H<< Sfl avavartat (Pan.vn.4,7), Des.fa^fiT-
^ vivartishate or ftr^rfir vivritsati, Int. "<(0<Ji*bl varivrityate.
Note —The verbs beginning with ^TT rrt<, i. e. ^TT »ri<, '^rrirfA, 3JV sridA, syand,
inp, are optionally Parasmaipada in the aorist, future, conditional, desiderative (Pan. t.
3, 91—93). The same verbs do not take ^ i in their Parasmaipada tenses (Pan. vu. 2, 59) ;
as to "W^klip, see Pan. VII. 2, 60, and 1. 3, 93.
88. syand, to sprinkle or drop, (Titf^.)
P. ^iT^ syandate ll Pf. r. sasyande, 2. «*^f^ sasyandishe or TOnft
sasyantse, 4. s^fy^ sasyandivahe or ^Tgl- sasyandvahe, I A. 3. *reK$l asyan-
dishta, 6. WWflpmil asyandishatam ; or ^refe asyantta (6. fn=tfwmri asyantsd-
tdm), or II A. ^w^asyorfa/ (not ^STCS^TT asyandat), F. ^f^«n syandishyate or
9tarii syantsyate or Wrfjjfrf syantsyati (Pan. vu. 2, 59 ; see No. 87), B. gffi^tl
syandishishta or ^TWfar syantsishta 11 Pt. ^TWJ syannafi, Ger. ^f^HI syanditvd
or ^TrTT syantvd (Pan. vi. 4, 31) 11 Caus. ui^'Jifri syandayati, Des. ftrwft^
sisyandishate or ftwirHrf sisyantsate or ftreqwfil sisyantsati.
 BHU CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS. 269

89. ^ro^ krip, to be able, Opj.)

P. «tic*Jr( kalpate 11 Pf. chaklipe, I A. 3.^4^8 akalpishta or «JTtl aklipta,
6. Vjgtmini aklipsdtdm, 9.^iv^aklipsata,orllAor.Par.^r^r^aklipat, F. «f<sr*nl
kalpishyate or cfc^Wrf kalpsyate or <*rM^PH kalpsyati, P. F. 2. vfennt) kalpitdse or
*<rHI« kalptdse or es^snftr kalptdsi, B. cdfcMMte kalpishishta or ]|>^te klipsishta 11
Pt. ^nr. kliptah 11 Caus. HOTfh kalpayati, Des. fv*f<^Mri chikalpishate or
f^r^rfil chiklipsati, Int. *4<<jWu|rt chalikalpyate or lf<TO3ini chalikalpyate
or chalkalpyate.

90. vyath, to fear, to suffer pain.

P. *TTff vyathate 11 Pf. fasnl vivyathe (Pan. vn. 4, 68), I A. wmlXjg avya-
thishta, F. «qfVr«n) vyathishyate 11 Pass. «rnnt vyathyate, Aor. ^raiftl <wya-
fAt (§461), Caus. mvnifa vyathayati, Des. r^tuf^Mij vivyathishate, Int.
trrasqi) vdvyathyate, ^T*lf& vdvyatti.

91. T»t ram, to sport, (t^J.)

P. T*nr ramate ; with fa vi, ?na, Trft^ari, 7*1 wpa, optionally Parasmaipada;
^R^Trf viramati (Pan. 1. 3, 83) ll Pf. T?T reme, I A. aramsta, after pre
positions «Rtfl rt vyaramsit, F. t^PTlT ramsyate 11 Pt. Tjr: rataA, Ger. TjWT ra/ra,
°T^J -ramya or °tTT -ratya 11 Caus. PHlfil ramayati, Aor. 'ST^Un^ artramat,
Des. fti*^ riramsate, Int. rotp) ramramyate, t**ftfir rarhramtti.

92. ST^ /war, to hurry, (ftfifTT.)

The verbs W^'flar, RT^ <»ar, 'fe^srip, ^T^ac, JT^map, substitute jur, fj*^ <«r, ^^srup,
tr^ut), Jj^routi (Pan. vi. 4, 20) before weakening terminations beginning with conso
nants, except semivowels, and if used as monosyllabic nominal bases. The vowels are
lengthened according to § 143. Hence jurnah, f^f. turnah, ^iTt srutah, "3J7T: utah,
Wjl'. miltah.
P. tvarate 11 Pf. rTRfT tatvare, I A. 3. tfifftj atvarishta, 8. Wftfrzz atva-
ridhvam or tJRrfcp atvaridhvam, F. rtfiujri tvarishyate 11 Pt. tArnalj, (§ 43a)
or ffftlR tvaritah 11 Caus. rK^frf tvarayati ($ 463, II. 6), Aor. ^TiTrTO^ atatvarat
(§375t), Des. ftfiffoft titvarishati, Int. rilr4*nt tdtvaryate, iftijfS toturti.

93. ^ saA, to bear, (^.)

P. saAa/e 11 Pf. ^ sehe, I A. SHtltVe asahishta, F. «f£U|^ sahishyate,
P. F. uf^ifT saAifa or irtz\ sodhd ($337, II. 2) » Pt- sodhah, Adj. W^r.
sahyah (§456, 6) 11 Pass. *^r^ sahyate, Caus. «l£<lfri sdhayati, Aor. fltflH^ fljl-
shahat, Caus. Des. ftreTfftmfrf sisdhayishati, Des. fan fig Hi) sisahishate, Int.
HHign sdsahyate, flTfftfij sdsoflhi.
Note —V? saA and ^ change a into ^ft 0 when ^5 a would be followed by ^ c?/(,
the result of the amalgamation of ? A with a following dental (§ 128). Pan. vi. 3, 112.
270 BUt CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS.

III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

94. TT5^ rdj, to shine, (rr^.)
P. cmfll rdjati, °^ -te 11 Pf. rardja, Tjjk rardje or t% reje (Pan. vi.
4, 125), I A. ^nn»ftcT ardjit, ^rrjfire ardjishta, F. TTftrefft rdjishyati, °K -te,
B. TH^n^/a/y^ nftuftl rajishtshta 11 Caus. rjnirfii rdjayati, Aor. wxrsn^ «»*a-
rdjat, Des. ftnfsrefir rirdjishati, °li -te, Int. TTCT»qff rdrdjyate, CTCrfii rdrdshti.

95. Mara, to dig.

P.5SRfirMaraa<i* 11 Pf.3.,sr^HcAaMaraa, e.^^ZcAaMraa/M&o.^IcAaMraw/s
32^» 3)> ^ ^* WH)^ akhanit 348), but Atm. ^rafcnr akhanishta only,
F. wfff*rfil khanishyati, B. ^rarfif khanydt or ^PffiT khdydt 391) 11 Pt. ^nr:
khdtah, Ger. (<IN1 khdtvd or 44(4HI khanitvd, Adj. *irc kheyafy 456, 6) 11
Pass, TjarfT khanyate or ^PIW khdyate 391), Caus. wmjfri khdnayaii, Aor.
«T^h*5nr achikhanat, Des. fsrerftTRfil chikhanishati, °w -fe, Int. ri cAara-
khanyate or -MKslww chdkhdyate 391), *Hffll chankhanti.

96. 5 Ari, to take, (5*T.)

P. ^rfff harati 11 Pf. i.sr^TC jaMra, 2. jahartha, 9. »rg: jahruh, I A.
■a^nfTff ahdrshit, Atm. aArifo ($351), F. fftnrfir harishyati, P. F.
hartd, B. fgilli^ hriydt 11 Pt. 51T: hritalj., Ger. hritvd, Adj. ^T§: Mryafy 11
Pass, f^nnr hriyate, Aor. ^Tfrft aMri, Caus. ^Rufrf hdrayati, Des. fsnrtftfir
jiMrshati, °Tl -te, Int. ^rfarff jehriyate, »lffff jarharti &c.

97. p #w/i, to hide, (nf.)

3Jjf pwA takes 'ai u before terminations beginning with vowels that would ordinarily
require Guna.
P. ufif gilhati 11 Pf. i.»pTj[ jugdha, 2. *pjf?*l jugtihitha or igifte jugodha,
^.^i^juyuha, ^.ipjf^juguhiva, §.ifTT%ygijuguhathuft, &c., Atm. 1. sjJrf./MgrwAe,
2. jughukshe or aj^Tf^/ra^MAwAe &c, I Aor. see $ 362, F. Jjf^irfii ^wAi-
shyati or xf^rfir ghokshyati, P. F. ffifTTl gHhitd or t^^t godhd, Ben. Atm.
irfi^rfh? guhishtshta or w^fe ghukshishta 345) 11 Pt. it?1: gudhah, Adj. Jjm
guhyah or ift^n gohyah (J 457) 11 Pass. Jpsiw guhyate, Aor. ^*|f? aguhi, Caus.
j^«Pif guhayati, Aor. ^njJj^TT ajUguhat, Des. TO^fil jughukshati 470),
Int. »ft^nr joguhyate, aftntfs" jogodhi.

98. for £n, to go, to serve, (fas^.)

P. ^Bnrfir krayati 11 Pf. 1. fifTSTPT kikrdya, 2. f^psifir*! kikrayitha, 3. f^rtm kikrdya,
4. f^rfaftH kikriyiva, 5. fifrfaprg: kisriyathuh, II A. ^rfrrfepnr akikriyat (§ 371),

* The Atmanepada forms will in future only be given when they have peculiarities of
their own, or are otherwise difficult.
 BHfr CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS. 271

F. ^finnCd h-ayishyati, B. Tsftun^sriydt 11 Pass. Trfhrff Myate, Aor. ^rsnfk asrdyi,

Caus. ■smnrfil frdyayati, Aor. wfy^WTT aSisrayat, Des. figrafiwfil Sisrayishati
or %*fhrfi! Hsrishati (§471, 3; §337, II. 3), Int. ^ftxr^ kekriyate.

99. TTi^ yaj, to worship.

P. Tnrfir yajati 11 Pf. 1. ^ttr iyaja ($311), 2. ^ftni iyajitha or ^re iyashtha
(§ 335) 3)' 4- fftl* #»»a, 5. ^Wj: tjathuh, 6. f*rj: y'ata#, 7. fftp? y'ima, 8. $»T ya,
9. ijuh, I A. i.^niTT^ aydksham, 2. fKITVffc aydkshih, 3. ^musjlir aydkshit,
4. ^nrw aydkshva, 5. ^nm? aydshfam, 6. WTTfl aydshtdm, 7. ^TUT^l aydkshma,
8. 'SPTrs aydshta, 9. ^nn^n aydkshuh, I Aor. Atm. 1. ^rqffef ayakshi, 2. wreT:
ayashthdh, 3. ^nrff ayashta, 4. vintrffe ayakshvahi, 5. tnrsfnri ayakshdthdm,
6. Vimnri ayakshdtdm, 7. ^PTE$f^ ayakshmahi, 8. ^sj*l3^ ayaddhvam (not ^rqna
ayagdhvam), 9. WJJKJTT ayakshata, F. ir^rfir yakshyati, P. F. 7r?T yashtd ($ 124),
B. $rHltf ^yya/ ($ 393) 11 Pt. ishtah, Ger. ishtvd, -y'ya 11 Pass, ^jirn
ijyate, Caus. mtprffr ydjayati, Aor. frfhnnj ayiyajat, Des. ftni^frr yiyakshati,
Int. TTTj^Tn ydyajyate, xnnfg ydyash(i.

100. ^ij vap, to sow, to weave, (7^0

P. TTfit vapati 11 Pf. 1. TTP? uvdpa, 2. <Mfnvj uvapitha or t^wi uvaptha,
9. ^ni; I A. THmmlrt avdpsit, Atm. ^rff avapta, F. ^iFTftr vapsyati, P. F.
^TJIT vapid, B. dujlrf wjoya/ II Pt. Ttr: wpfaA 11 Pass. TOTFT upyate.

101. ^ waA, to carry.

P. ^fil vahati 11 Pf. 1. T^rf uvaha, 2. T^ffrci uvahitha or T^fte uvodha,
3. uvdha, 4. *f^cj dhiva, 5. uhathuh, 6. 'Qf^ip uhatuh, 7. *f^H tihima,
8. ^K? «<Aa, 9. '3tj: mAm^, I A. i. frenj avdksham, 2. ^RTBftt avdkshih, 3. ^i=)nsj'b^
avdkshit, 4. fTTW avdkshva, 5. 'srat?' avodham, 6. ^ratei avodham, 7.
avdkshma, 8. wfa avodha, 9. ^TCi: avdkshuh, I Aor. Atm. 1. ^refgj avakshi,
2. WTfen avodhdh, 3. w^te avodha, 4. -JHiyf^ avakshvahi, 5. WTStrrqi avakshd-
thdm, 6. iSHBjlrtT avakshdtdm, 7. -JH«^fe avakshmahi, 8. Wffcj avodhvam, 9. ^rsrejrT
avakshata, F. ^ifw vakshyati, P. F. ^teT vodhd, B. T?mr w%a£ 0 Pt. '35?: 4dhah^
Adj. qrr?r. vahyah 11 Pass. T^rff uhyate, Caus. =M^nfrf vdhayati, Aor. vnfNflT awf-
vahat, Des. ftr^fir vivakshati, Int. 4TTOl) vdvahyate, TTTtfis vdvodhi.

102. ^ we, to weave, (^T.)

P. ^rfir vayati 11 Pf. 3. vavau, 6. vavatuh (or gRTg: dvatuh), 9.
rartt^ (or gtw: jfo>K#); or 3. TTTH uvdya, 6. '3flr?p uyatuh, 9. (^ 311),
I A. i.^RTftre avdsisham, 2. ^TSTRft: avdsih, 3. WTOftlT avdsit, Atm. ^r^rerafa^a,
F. TOilfil vdsyati, P. F. TTiTT «a<a, B. rfya/, Atm. vnftl vdsishta a Pt. Tin
wfo# (Pan. vi. 4, 2) 11 Pass. ,3i^ tiyate, Caus. ^TTTfit vdyayati, J)es. fM^lfffrt
vivdsati, Int. vwi^rf vdvdyate, wmft vdvdti. ,
272 TUD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS.

103. % five, to emulate, to call, (3^.)

P. anrfil hvayati 11 Pf. 1. -^v* juh&va, 2.*£%fknjuhavitha or -^gin juhotha,
3. ^njukdva, 4. *ftrfaHjuhuviva, II A. TO3£Tf ahvat ($ 363), Atm. W3nr ahvata,
or I A. ^rrer ahvdsta, F. srrcrfir hvdsyati, B. ^UTi^ Mya* 11 Pt. fir: hutah,
Ger. -Mya 11 Pass, |ttk Myate, Aor. w^lfq ahvdyi, Caus. ^nprfir hvdyayati,
Aor. WSj^TT ajuhavat {§ 371), Des. ^f^fk juMshati, Int. »ft?rinr joMyate,
*ft?Tfit johoti.
Tud Class (Tudddi, VI Class).
I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.
104. /mc?, to strike.
P. Tjpfn tudati 11 Pf. wrfr^ tutoda, F. TfTETTTI totsyati, P. F. tflTHT *o#d, I A.
Wifir+flrf atautsit, Atm. sarr^ atutta 11 Pt. cf^: tunnah, Ger. tj^t tuttvd 11 Pass,
•ginr tudyate, Caus. H^^nfK todayati, Aor. Vriri'^riN attitudat, Des. ffiTWfir
tututsati, Int. ITTTflfll) totudyate, iftTftftl tototti.
105. OT3^ Mraj/, to fry, (**»TT.)
ViTl^bhrajj takes Samprasdrana before weakening terminations, the same as ?T^praA, mijyd,
'^T^vay, ^l^vyadh, ^3IN»as, aT^ryacA, '3^t>rascA, Tf^^racAA (Pan. vi. 1, 16). The
terminations of the special tenses of Tud verbs are never strengthening, but weakening,
if possible.
P. OTirfft bhrijjati 11 Pf. i."q>jT5r babhrajja, 2. ^sfHTT babhrajjitha or ^a?
babhrashtha, 9. ^a^j: babhrajjul), (Pan. 1. 2, 5), or babharjja &c. (Pan. vi.
4, 47), I A. 'atar^ftil abhrdkshit or ^*»rn5ft?[ abhdrkshit, Atm. wot abhrashta or
WOT abharshta, F. OTgfil bhrakshyati or w^fir bharkshyati, P. F. OTT bhrashtd
or ott bharshtd, B. HtHM bhrijydt, Atm. OTft? bhrakshishta or w?frf 6Aar-
kshishta 11 Pt. OTC bhrish(ab 11 Pass. OTjqi) bhrijjyate, Caus. OTflirtll bhrajjayati,
Aor. w^nsnf^ababhrajjat or tnpnihr ababharjjat, Des. faOTffir bibhrakshati or
fV>rs|fir bibharkshati, Int. ^tT*JrTirff baribhrijjyate.
106. ArmA, to draw a line. (See No. 38.)
P. <$Mfrf krishati 11 Pf. ^crI chakarsha, I A. ^r^T^ akdrkshit or ^rgiTSfhT
akrdksMt, Atm. ^^5pT akrikshata or akrishta, F. sraJtfil karkshyati or
•gre?rffi krakshyati, P. F. cS#T karshtd or ■greT krashtd, B. fVITV krishydt, Atm.
^i^tp kriksMshta 11 Pt. krishtaht 11 Pass, ^rnrff krishyate, Caus. ^hrfir
karshayati, Aor. ^rarti^ achakarshat or ^r^l^n^ achikrishat, Des. fa^njfrf
chikrikshati, Int. ^Of charikrishyate.
107. jj^wimcA, to loosen, (3^.)
Certain verbs beginning with macA take a nasal in the special tenses. They are,
5^ mueA, <<J^ fap, to cut, cirf, to find, (V)^ Zip, to paint, ftr^ sicA, to sprinkle,
^irT fcrif, to cut, foj^ iAirf, to pain, ftt3T/>is, to form. (Pan. vn. I, 59.)
P. H^TH munchali 11 Pf. hhH mumocha, I A. WH^ri amuchat, Atm. 'wrs
amukta {§ 367), Des. H^fff mumukshuti or jffsp mokshate (J 471, 9).
 TUD CLASS, PABASMAIPADA VERBS. 273

1 08. vid, to find, (fa^.)

P. f^fk vindati II Pf. viveda, II A. wftiqn avidat, Atm. wfay avitta,
F. TOTfiT vetsyati or ^flfufil vedishyati (§ 332, 11) ll Pt. fa^: vittal}.
109. feij ftp, to paint.
P. ffiufd limpati 11 Pf. frf&q ftfepa, II A. ^rfonw aftpaf ($ 367), Atm. II A.
■flPci'mr alipata or I A. wftgH aftp/a 367).

II. Parasmaipada Verbs,

no. ~^n krit, to cut, (^nft.)
P. JJTlfll krintati (see No. 107) 11 Pf. chakarta, I A. >h<*hTi^ akarttt,
F. *rS«Mrrf kartishyati or cRiSffn" kartsyati (§ 337, II. 2), P. F. cftfSrfl kartitd,
B. ^ri«rn^ £ri/yaf 11 Pt. tj^: krittah 11 Pass, ^um krityate, Caus. grft^rfir kartayati,
Aor. mil( achakartat or ^l^rfrf achikritat, Des. f^lifK^fil chikartishati or
f^rHPrl chikritsati (§ 337., II. 2), Int. HO'fiO^) charikrityate.
in. Am/, to be crooked, to bend.
Certain verbs beginning with 'J^ taf (Dhatupatha 28, 73—108) do not admit of Guna or
Vriddhi, except in the reduplicated perfect, the causative, and the intensive Parasmai
pada. (Pan. 1. 2, i; § 345, note.)
P. ysfil kutati 11 Pf. 1. ,^sstT chukota, 2.1^fz^chukutitha, I A. ^f^Tfar akutit,
F. wf^qfiT kutishyati, P. F. •sjfinrr 11 Caus. ^TTrfir kotayati, Int. "i^pl
chokutyate, ^t=st% choko(ti,
112. vrahch, to cut, (vfav.)
P. Y^"" vrikchati (see No. 105) 11 Pf. 1. ^5 vavrascha, 2. 3^3*1 vavrahchi-
tha or vavrashtha, I A. 'sra^hl avrakchU or waresfriT avrdkshit (§ 337, 1. 2),
F. aPquiPil vraschishyati or gngrfil vrakshyati, B. <JMJ|H vrikchydt 11 Pt. ^RK

113. ^ Ar£, to scatter.

P. ftnrfil Arira/i 11 Pf. 3. ^oRtc chakdra, 6. chakaratufy, 9. TO^: chakaruh
(Pan. vii. 4, 11), I A. n<k\C\\akdrit, F, diPcujfjT or ^rNrfir karishyati (§ 340),
B. ^■§TTT kirydt ll Pt. ^fNh Mrwa# 11 Pass, ^ftftff Mryate, Caus. atTOrftl kdrayati,
Des. f^sft^fir chikarishati.
Note—After «pa and Ufa prati, ^ ir£ takes an initial ^ s if it means to cut or to
strike: T*! upaskirati, he cuts, ^ ^cushiCupocAasiara ; H Pn P«si«.flTprafisiirafi, he cuts
. or he strikes (Pan. vi. 1, 140, 141). Also ^R^P*3i<.W apaskirate, he drops (P&n. vi. 1, 142).
1 14. 5«rS^ spri§, to touch.
P. <OT|fll spritoti ll Pf. T^q^ paspar&a, I A. sn<-m«fV asprdkshit or
aspdrkshit or W^Hjd asprikshat, F. ma*iPrr sprakshyati or ^r^}fir sparkshyati,
B. ^5zrri^«pr%«^ « Pt- sprishtal}, 11 Des. ft*^firpi«prefoAafi, Int. (rffe^pri)
parispribyate, Trrfcqft parisparshti.
n n
274 TUD CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS.

115. Xt^ prachh, to ask.

P. nrffc prichchhati (see No. 105) ll Pf. 1. vniW. paprachchha, 2. VJf^STt
paprachchhitha or tnre paprashtha, 9. MW«4: paprachchhuh, I A. «HlB|1(lvapra-
ArsAfr, F. rorffl prakshyati, B. U-aUM prichchhydt 11 Pt. tpR prishtah ll Pass.
YeStflt prichchhyate, Caus. iracifir prachchhayati, Des. fajfaprfil piprichchhi-
shati, Int. mO TORl) pariprichchhyate.

i\6. "X^srij, to let off.

P. CTTfil srijati 11 Pf. 1. sasarja, 2. q«faf<4 sasarjitha or Wfftf sasrashtha
(see No. 48), I A. -HyiHjlrf asrdkshit, F. H^rfir srakshyati 11 Pt. to: srishtah.

117. <T^ w^i/, to sink, (»Tf3ft.)

*nB^maji; and «l3Inai (Div) insert a nasal before strengthening terminations beginning with
consonants, except nasals and semivowels. (Pan. vil. I, 60.)
P. HTrffrf majjati 11 Pf. 1. HMixl mamajja, 2. HHpTrfvj mamajjitha or H*i+vr ma-
mahktha, I A. 3. wuts/Itt amdnkshit (^ 345), 6. 'BWTIKT amdnktdm, 9. ^tsr:
amdnkshuh, F. fagfir mankshyati, P. F. >T3n manktd 11 Pt. jtttt: magnah, Ger.
^BT»ianA/»a or JHET maktvd (§438) 11 Caus. HWTfil majjayati, Aor. fHPHTIf ama-
majjat, Des. (HHKjfiT mimankshati, Int. HTT^* mdmajjyate, Hwfn, mdmankti.

118. to wish, (w.)

P. ^5sfir ichchhati (see No. 31), I. 4>«&iT aichchhat 11 Pf. 1. iyesha,
2. ^ftpj iyeshitha, 3. ^5fat iyesha, 4. ishiva, 5. ^T«p ishathuh, 6.
ishatuh, 7. ^fta ishima, 8. $5 feAa, 9. ?«Am#, I A. ^fr»r aishit, F. gfinqfil
eshishyati, P. F. e»tya or Fftin esAifti (J 337, II. 1) ll Pt. ishtah,
Ger. jifT isAtoi or ^faRT ishitvd ll Pass. ishyate, Aor. Sjfa aisAi, Caus.
CTTTfil eshayati, Aor. <jfNMif aishishat, Des. ^ftftwfil eshishishati.

III. Atmanepada Verbs.

119. sj?wri, to die, (l^.)
H ntn, to die, though an Atmanepada verb, takes Atmanepada forms only in the special
tenses, the aorist, and benedictive. (Pan. 1. 3, 61.)
P. ftl"ri mriyate *, I. trflmi amriyata, O. fy tjrf mriyeta, I. mriyai 11
Pf. 1. mamdra, 2. »W§ mamartha, 3. JPTR mamdra, 4. Hf%«f mamriva,
5. HOT! mamrathuh, I A. 1. ^Pjfa amrishi, 2. ^HJTf: amrithdh, 3. amrita,
F. «fft«lfil tnarishyati, P. F. Hrtlfw martdsmi, B. JT^te mrishishta 11 Pt.
mritah 11 Pass, ftpni mriyate, Caus. HTTTfit mdrayati, Des. ^j)fri mumtirsfiati,
Int. ^ylnri memriyate.

* Final ri is changed to ftri (§ no) in the special tenses of Tud verbs, likewise
before the ^ of the passive and benedictive (Pan. vu. 4, 28). Afterwards ft H again
becomes ft^ny, according to Pan. vi. 4, 77.
 DIV CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 275

1 20. ft dri, to observe,

P. driyate 11 Pf. ^ dadre, I A. W|TT adrita, F. ^fbrff darishyate,
P. F. dartd, B. drishtshta 11 Pass, fjjTlft driyate, Caus. ^TCTfir
ddrayati, Des. fi^fWrf didarishate (§ 332, 5). It is chiefly used with the
preposition a, to regard, to consider.

Div Class {Divddi, IV Class).

L Parasmaipada Verbs,
iai. f^div, to play, (ft^.)
P. ^Nlftr dtvyati {§ 143) 11 Pf. dideva, I A. adewft, F. ^r^HlPit
devishyati, P. F. %ftnn devitd, B. ^NffiT ll Pt. Tgr*r. dydnalj, 44a, 7),
Ger. WFIT dyutvd 431, 1) or ^fcrif devitvd 11 Caus. e^nfil devayati, Des.
r^faMfrf didevishati or tj^rfir dudydshati 474), Int. i^taff dedivyate.

122. »pT to dance, falft.)

P. HimTiI nrityati 11 Pf. 3. trtt nanarta, 9. «nj]Jt nanrituht, I A. ^PTrff^araortfitf,
F. ifffarffr nartishyati or HitSPrt nartsyati 337, II. 2) II Pt. ^pr: nrittab 11
Caus. tTK^frf nartayati, Aor. smSf^ ananartat or Jpffapn^ aninritat, Des.
ffRffofff ninartishati or ftf'jwfw ninritsati.
123. to grow old, (^^ )
P. "srt^ftr j iryati* 11 Pf. 3. »T»nt jajdra, 9. jajaruh, (Guna, $ 330) or
^:/en4 ($ 328, 2), I A. ^rsmfft^ q/arft or II A. ^im^ajarat {§ 367), F. qlXmlri
jarishyati or »rr}«rfir jarishyati (§340), B. "sffan jirydt ll Pt. jfHi: jirnalj. II
Caus. *K«lfrf jarayati {§ 462, 25), Des. ftrsrft^fn" jijarishati or ftrsft^fll
jijirshati {§ 337, II. 3).
1 24. 3[ft to sharpen.
Verbs ending in ^ft o drop 0 before the Hya of the Div class (Pan. vn. 3, 71) j e.g.
«jt chho, to cut, so, to finish, <^ do, to cut.
P. ^rfir hyati, I. trpnr ah/at, O. ^tt &/e£, I. ^rff &/a£w 11 Pf. ^r^ft ba&au
329), I A. W^rnrh^ aSdsit or II A. *r$rni ahdt, F. ^liwfff sdsyati, P. F. ^rnn
B. ^rnrnr hdydt 392) 11 Pt. ^rnrc Sdtah or %tt: titah 435) 11 Pass,
^rnri 6dyate, Caus. jnTOlft s'dyayati, Des. f^l^jrafil si&dsati, Int. $|l$|i4il

125. ^ «o, to finish.

P. ^fir syaii 11 Pf. sasau, I A. ^mreftiT asdsit, II A. shwtt asdt, F.
^rrwfff sdsyati, P. F. *rnrf sa/a, B. rf seydt {§ 392) ll Pt. ftnr: sitak, Ger.
°*rro -saya ll Pass. *f\n~A siyate {§ 392), Caus. *tnnrfir sdyayati, Des. ftnrmfir
si«<wa£i, Int. iWhnr seshiyate.

* Final ^rf, changed to ^ ir, and lengthened before ^y.

n n 2
276 DIV CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

126. vp^vyadh, to strike.

P. faujfir vidhyati (see No. 105) 11 Pf. 3. ftww vivyddha (§ 311), 9. ftrfa^:
vividhuh, I A. 1. ,*rsnw avydtsam, 2. ^ratTWft: avydtsth, 3. ^rarrwrft^ avydtsit,
4. WOTOI avydtsva, g. Wni avydddham, 6. W^TTli avydddhdm, 7. W«rrR5R
avydtsma, 8. ««HIS avydddha, 9. wmitt avydtsuh, F. ^wrfw vyatsyati, P. F.
«TST vyaddhd, B. famnr vidhydt ll Pt. fas: viddhah 11 Pass, fatflft vidhyate,
Caus. «n>mfiT vyddhayatif Des. flpqmfil vivyatsati, Int. ^fam^ vevidhyate.
1VJ. ip^trip, to delight.
P. rafll tripyati 11 Pf. 1. inr§ tatarpa, 2. Hrlfijvj tatarpitha or iffl^ tatarptha
or nra tatraptha, 3. HiPf tatarpa, 4. R^fVn tatripiva or iT^x? tatripva, I A.
^rjrcfTi^ atarpit or ^nrr^ffiT atdrpsit 337, I. 3) or wdimlrT atrdpsit (see No.
38) or II A. Wfrqr atripat, F. ffffafr tarpishyati or rf^-Jjfrf tarpsyati or
gx^rfir trapsyati, P. F. irfwi tarpitd, iritT tarptd or ^ttt traptd, B. TOffiT
tripydt II Pt. Tni: triptah 11 Pass, wonfr tripyate, Caus. ifqqfiT tarpayati, Aor.
WiflifHrtN atUripat or sh ri rf Q rf^ atatarpat, Des. finprfir titripsati or finrf^fir
titarpishati, Int. riOrfutrf taritripyate.
128. »n? jwmA, to be foolish.
P. $irfil muhyati 11 Pf. 1. Jj»ft^ mumoha, 2. yftft^l fnumohitha or
mumogdha or ^HYef mumodha, II A. ^W^fT amuhat (§ 367, pushddi)*, F. »ft^rfw
mokshyati or iftf^rarfil mohishyati, P. F. iffrvT tnogdhd or *fter modhd ($ 129)
or iftf^TTT mohita 11 Pt. Jjnn mugdhah or Wjn mudhah 11 Pass. >T?Tff muhyate,
Caus. Hhnrftr mohayati, Des. OT^ffr mumukshati or twir^Mfri mumohishati,
Int. *fi*J\SH momuhyate, H^Htfi V momogdhi or Hfaftfe momodhi.
129. fTSf^was, to perish, (JUST.)
P. H^Pri nasyati ll Pf. 3. »T«TTSjI nandka, 9. nesuh, II A. ^PT^nr anaiat
(pushddi) or VNftyi^ aneSat ($ 366), F. iffy*lfil nasishyati or H*t|frf nankshyati
(see No. 117) ll Pt. nashtah, Ger. tf^T nashtvd or ^t?T namshtvd ($ 438).
130. 31*1 sam, to cease, (313.)
Eight Div verbs, ^l^s'am, fW ton, 5^>T dam, ^PT^'ram, ¥W bhram, ^[ksham, !&{J:lam, 1^ marf,
lengthen their vowel in the special tenses. (Pan. VII. 3, 74.)
P. jmrfll Mmyati 11 Pf. 3. 519MH saidma, 9. $i»t: semuh, II A. SH^lHt^ asamat,

* Th6 Sarasvati gives besides the second aorist the optional forms of the first aorist
amohit or ^•tiojli^ amaukshti (§ 337, I. 3, radhddi) or -w^Bji^amMisAai (§ 360).
According to Pan. in. 1, 55 (§ 367), the forms of the first aorist are allowed in the Atmane-
pada only ; but later grammarians frequently admit forms as optional which are opposed to
the grammatical system of Panini. Sometimes the evasion of the strict rules of Panini may
be explained by the admission of different roots, as, for instance, in No. 130, where the first
aorist Parasmaipada ■*m*/)f^ asamit, given in the Sarasvati, which is wrong in the Div class,
might be referred to the Kri class.
 DIV CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS. 277

F. glftrafii iamishyati, P. F. grftnn kamitd u Pt. $rhn kdntal). (§ 429), Ger. ^IT3T
Sdntvd or tyfrrii kamitvd 11 Pass. ^ihj^ samyate, Caus. gpniftl samayati 46a),
he quiets, but jrppnl sdmayate or °fff -/i, he sees. (Dhatupatha 19, 70.)

131. O^mid, to be wet, (fHfa^T.)

f»i^ mid takes Guna in the special tenses. (Pan. vn. 3, 82.)
P. iJaPd medyati 11 Pt. f«ra: minnah, wet, or ntyci: meditalj. 333, D. a*).

II. Atmanepada Verbs.

13a. ?{*{jan, to spring up, (*Prt.)
T^'an substitutes *Rjd in the special tenses. (Pan. vn. 3, 79.)
P. »mTr jdyate 11 Pf. jajne 338, 3), I A. tniffen ajanishta or «f«ff«1
ajani (§413), F. nffpcn) janishyate, P. F. janitd, B. *rfqtfltr janishishta 11
Pt. *mr.jdtafi, Caus. »PPlfw janayati, Des. Ph j< P»i jijanishate, Int. JfTTTTll
jdjdyate or icwzfo janjanyate.

133- n^parf, togo.

P. Tjinr padyate 11 Pf. ^etfe, I A. 3. ^nuf^ apaeft (§ 412), 6. WHWTlri
apatsdtdm, 9. VTOrff apatsata, F. ttwttt patsyate, P. F. tjwt jaa^a, B. MrHlK
patsishta 11 Pt. t^: pannalj. 11 Caus. vr^ufir pddayati, Aor. ^vl^if apipadat,
Des. fqwff pitsate 471, 9), Int. ipfhnft panipadyate 485).

134. y^iwrfA, to perceive.

P. yjrff budhyate 11 Pf. bubudhe, I A. 1. ^wfw abhutsi, 2. OTTTi
abuddhdfr, 3. ^PTfj abuddha or ?rrrfv abodhi, 4. ^r>j*r?rf^ abhutsvahi, 5. VijTRnii
abhutsdthdm, 6.^PTWrnrf abhutsdtdm, 'j.WTr&fzabhutsmahi, S.m'X^abhuddhvam,
9. 'snjRTiT abhutsata, F. ^AiWrf bhotsyate, P. F. «rt^T boddhd, B. *jHEfrg bhutsishta 11
Pt. '53: buddhal} 11 Caus. ^nrfir bodhayati, Aor. *P£gV?^ abubudhat, Des.
^41PvMri bubodhishate or "WW^1 bubhutsate, Int. «ftawiff bobudhyate.

III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

135. .f? waA, to bind, (?n^.)
P. «rafff nahyati or -fe ll Pf. 1. «nTT? nandha, 2. «RS nanaddha 130)
or iffV'V nehitha, Atm. rae^e, I A. 1. ^PTTW andtsam, 2. ^MlrtA: andtsih,
3. ^MlrHlrtN andtsit, 4. ^PTTr^" andtsva, 5. 'SRTlf andddkam, 6. WTgl andddhdm,
7. ^RTrW andtsma, 8. ^rffTS andddha, 9. ^nm^J andtmfy, Atm. i.^PffHr anatsi,
2. fTfnrn anaddhah, 3. ^i^r anaddha, 4. ^rsTr^f^ anatsvahi, 5. fRlOTA anatsd-
thdm, 6. VTrcmri anatsdtdm, 7. ^HTrWf^ anatsmahi, 8. nsh^ anaddhvam, 9. <nTWH
anatsata, F. HitJJPri natsyati, P. F. rfgr naddhd 11 Pt. rfg: naddhafy, Ger. t^T
naddhvd, °«T?T -nahya 11 Pass. ^TTT nahyate, Aor. <snnfi| andhi, Caus. vflgqPff
ndhayati, Des. ftpTOTI ninatsate, Int. STTTPii ndnahyate.
278 CHUR CLASS, PAKASMAIPADA VERBS ONLY.

Chur Class (Churddi, X Class).

Parasmaipada Verbs only.
136. ^ chur, to steal.
P. "«fk<< frt chorayati 11 Pf. ^K*1M4>K choraydmchakdra, I A. l^ffT acM-
churat, F. WKfaHlfrf chorayishyati, P. F. ^ftftriTT chorayitd, B. ^rijriT chorydt
386) 11 Pt. -«f|ft,f: choritah, Ger. ^fafiTF^T chorayitvd u Pass, tflijfi choryaie,
Caus. chorayati, Des. ^^ttftrefir chuchorayishati. No Intensive 479).
137. fa cAi, to gather, (fa*T.)
The changes which roots undergo as causatives, take likewise place if the
same roots are treated as Chur verbs. Hence according to £ 463, II. 6,
fa chi, as a Chur verb, may form P. *nprfil chapayati or UPlft chayayati,
the vowel, however, remaining short because, as a Chur verb, fa chi is said
to be fair mit 462, note) 11 I A. achichapat or "A^il^md achichayat,
B. M^HTiT chapydt or -MUdrf^ chayydt.
Note—Several Chur verbs are marked as iWi^mit, i. e. as not lengthening their vowel,
some of which were mentioned in § 462, among the causatives. Such are ITfy'Sap, to know,
to make known; ^'IcAap, to pound; chah, to pound; 1*1 yam, if it means to feed;
val, to live.
138. 3iiT krit, to praise.
P. cF^SfflT kirtayati 462, 2) II I A. vti^fllT achikritat or ^rfaeRfthr achi-
kirtat (§ 377).
Su Class (Svddi, V Class).
I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.
139. g su, to distil, (w^.)
P. *pTnTT sunoti, I. 2. sunu 321*) 11 Pf. *|^T^ sushdva, Atm. sushuve,
I A. WTT?ftr^ asdvit 332, 4) ; the Sarasvati allows also w<fi<rftr asaushit,
Atm. Wltn asoshta; the Sar. allows also mfllt asavishta (but see Pan. vn.
2, 72); F. nfrarfir soshyati, P. F. Otin sotd, B. ^TffiT stiydt 11 Pass. ;r«nf sdyate,
Aor. wrrN asdvi, Caus. snqfir sdvayati, Aor. V^mr asushavat, Des. I^wfif
susushati, Int. (fttuiri soskdyate.
Note —The 7n of ^ »» may be dropt before terminations beginning with \ v or H ra,
and not requiring Guna ; but this is not the case if ^ nu is preceded by a consonant. This
explains the double forms tjgit sunuvah and sunvah, tJ^Ht sunumah and *p*TC sunmah,
asunuva and asunva, 'wtjgi asunuma and «itj»*) asunma; and Atm. ^qi^
sunuvahe or tjrq^ sunvahe, «J3*15 sunumahe or *J'*'5 sunmahe, '^♦J^fis asunuvahi or Wfp^f?
asunvahi, vigtjuf^ asunumahi or ■wtjufi; asunmahi. The same rule applies to the Tan verbs.

140. fa c^i, to collect, (fasr.)

P. faHlfrf chinoti 11 Pf. 3. farra chichdya or fasspr chikdya, 9. faaj: chichyuh
or fa^j: chikyuh, Atm. fa^T chichye or fa^ chikye (Pan. vn. 3, 58), I A.
f^Whr achaishit, Atm. *fa* acheshta, F. ^rfir cheshyati, P. F. %iTT cAe^,
 SU CLASS, PABASMAIPADA VERBS. 279

B. ^rhmr chiydt ll Pass. >^hj^ chiyate, Caus. ^PPTfil chdyayati or «nwfi< chd-
payati (§ 463, II. 6, and No. 137), Des. fWfafif chichishati or fadfafa chiki-
shati (Pan. vn. 3, 58), Int. ^ffrnr chechiyate.

141. ^ sfri, to cover,

P. wrsftfir strinoti 11 Pf. (rerrr_ tastdra, Atm. ireft tastare, I A. frerrfft^
astdrsh.it, Atm. WW Pes astarishta (not V^nOs astarishta, if srarfi) or wWrf
astrita (§ 332, 5, a rule which applies to the Atmanepada only), F. «rftafll
starishyati (§ 33a, 5), P. F. mh startd, B. H^TiT starydt, Atm. *pfte
shishta or ^rftrfv starishishta (§ 332, 5) ll Pass, w^ff staryate, Caus. WK<jPri
stdrayati, Des. firertftfir tistirshati, Int. irrePTff tdstaryate.

142. ^ t?f», to choose,

P. -j^ffi vrinoti 11 Pf. 1. vavara, 2. vavaritha *, 3. vavdra,
4. vavriva, 5. vavrathuh,, 6. ^3tj: vavratuh, 7. vavrima, 8. ^
rawa, 9. vavruh, I A. W^rOif atfarft (§ 332, 5), Atm. ^^fts avarishta or
avarishta (§ 340) or ^rarr aw-ita ($ 337, II. 4), F. ^ftwfir varishyati
or TTNrfil varishyati, P. F. ^ftjn ran'ia or ^hlT varitd, B. fg*rfi^ vriydt,
Atm. vf&nty varishishta (not ^fhrte varishishta, Pan. vn. 2, 39) 11 Pass, f^jr^
vriyate, Aor. SHmfi; amri, Caus. ^TTTTfir vdrayati, Des. f^^fc^fk vivarishati or
fil^TCNfir vivarishati, Int. qfcflqri vevriyate.

II. Parasmaipada Verbs.

143. Ai, to go, to grow.
P. f?«ftfff fono^i 11 Pf. fsnrw jighdya (Pan. vn. 3, 56), I A. ^r^BftTT ahaishit,
F. ^Hjfrf heshyati, P. F. %ttt B. ^hmi hiydt 11 Caus. ^TH*lfrf hdyayati,
Aor. wsft^ir^ ajihayat (Pan. vn. 3, 56), Des. ftnftwfir jighishati, Int. ijtflqri
jeghiyate.
144. ^reif sa£, to be able, ($Tj|r.)
P. STflEtfil kaknoti 11 P£ 3. 515114 sakdka, 9. kekuh, I A. ^r$raSiT akakat,
F. sp^fii kakshyati, P. F. ^rfiT ll Pt. ^ras saktah 11 Pass, ^srff kakyate
(oRl| $I+H kartum kakyate, it can be done), Caus. $rp(nrfir kdkayati, Aor.
^•>fl$|<*rix akikakat, Des. f^fir kikshati, Int. ^tT^Tff kdkakyate.

145. tjt 3rw, to hear.

This verb is by native grammarians classed with the Bhu verbs, though as irregular. It
substitutes for ^ sru in the special tenses.
P. 3. SlTrftfff krinoti, 6. spgrrc krinutah, 9. sppfif krinvanti ; 4. snip: krinuvah or
spj^: krinvalj, 11 Pf. 1. kukrava, 2. ^*ttH kukrotha ($ 334, 8), 3. spare

* According to Pan. Til, 2, 13, we might form vavartha; but Pan. vn. 2, 63, would
sanction ^ft^I vavaritha. The special restriction, however, of hhh vavartha to the Veda in
Pan. vn. 2, 64, is sufficient to fix vavaritha as the proper form in ordinary Sanskrit.
280 SU CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS.

kukrdva, 4. ^ro^ kukruva, 5. SIW^p kukruvathuh, 6. srw^ip kubruvatuh, 7. ^PW

kukruma, 8. kukruva, 9. 3TWj: Jw^rMfwA, I A. to^Jt^ akraushit, F. 'sftufil
kroshyati, P. F. TsfrTrt sro/d, B. ^nffiT krdydt 11 Pass, ^nr krdyaie, Aor. «rerrfa
akrdvi, Caus. MjNqfri krdvayati, Aor. *rsr«rarff akukravat or wr$ra^ akikravat
(§ 475), Des. sr^fr kukrushate (Pan. 1. 3, 57), Int. $fr?nnr kokrdyate.

146. ^rr^ dp, to obtain, (wtj.)

P. 3. ^uflfil dpnoti, 4. OTTO dpnuvah, 9. *S(iM=}flT dpnuvanti, I. WTjffa dpnot,
0. wrapm^ dpnuydt, I. 3. wjftj dpnotu, 2. ^rtTjf? dpnuhi 11 Pf. WT dpa, Aor.
^rnriT dpa/, F. wnwfir dpsyati, P. F. *mn dp<d U Pt. ^mn dptaA 11 Pass.
dpyate, Caus. *Him<r<f dpayati, Aor. vrftPTTT dpipat, Des. ^mfrf ipsati.

III. Atmanepada Verbs.

147. ^rsi as, to pervade, (vsr.)
P. 3. w^lfl aknute, 6. fTW^TTI aknuvdte, 9. WiJ^H aknuvate, 4. flig^ aknuvahe,
1. 1. 'STClfV dknuvi, 2. ^rpjpnt dsnuthdh, 3. ^rrepr dknuta, 4. VT^rf^ dknuvahi,
5. wr^T»li dknuvdthdm, 6. trrarnri dknuvdtdm, 7. Wgnf? dknumahi, 8. ^TT^4#
dknudhvam, 9. VTT^TO dknuvata, O. Vfftfn aknuvfta, 1. 1. ^pg% aknavai, 2. 'fl'flM
aknushva, 3. ^r^irr aknuidm, 4. WTWWlt aknavdvahai, 5. wvgmvii aknuvdthdm,
6. fl^Mlrfi aknuvdtdm, 7. w^nw% aknavdmahai, 8. ^reraj aknudhvam, 9. «T*pnri
aknuvatdm 11 Pf. 1. «pr$ draase, 2. ^TmIVh dnakishe or WMB) dnakshe, I A. 1.
^Tffgf dfoAi, 2. ^TffT. dshthdh^ 3. wrff d«A/a, 4. WTWfig dkshvahi, 5. ^rrBfTTT dArsAd-
£Adm, 6. WlBjldi dkshdtdm, 7. VHglff dkshmahi, 8. ^rpxsr dgdhvam, 9. <u«|rt
dkshata; or 1. trrfyft dkishi, 2. Vjf^WT. dkishthdh, 3. ^srrf^Tff dkishta, P. F.
^r?T aaA/d or «fi(nn as7/d, F. V^n) akshyate or akishyate, B. "sr^r?
akshishta or frf^pfts akishishta \\ Pt. ashtah 11 Pass. vprii akyate, Aor.
'wrfijT dsi, Caus. WT^PTftl dkayati, Aor. SHlf$l3MN dkikat, Des. vf^prii akikishate,
Int. ^mprff akdkyate.
Tan Class (Tanvddi, VIII Class).
All verbs belonging to tbis class are Parasmaipada and
Atmanepada Verbs.
148. ■jT^ tara, to stretch, (iPJ.)
P. iT«frfir tanoti, I. ^smfh^ atanot, O. (TgTrri^ tanuydt, I. (RtiJ tanotu; Atm.
P. TPpT tanute, I. atanuta, O. rfH*lrf tanvita, I. jrgiri tanutdm 11 Pf. 3.
rirtlff tatdna, 9. ^eraw^, I A. ^triMl^ a^dwff or flinlrf a/awe/ 348), Atm. 3.
wftn atanishta or WiT a/a^a (§ 369), 2. wrftTBTS atanishthdh or «nr*n: atathdh,
F. rTftr^rftr tanishyati, P. F. irftfln tanitd, B. rTanH tanydt, Attn, irftpftf /a»i-
shishta n Pt. Tnr: ta/a#, Ger. m^T te^'d or rifHril tanitvd 11 Pass. iTTTr^ tdyate
or (Tajir tanyate {§ 391), Caus. irRTfil tdnayati, Aor. VTirYirinT atitanat, Des.
finrf^fir titanishati or ftirhrfiT titdrhsati, Int. Wil^ tantanyate.
 TAN CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VEHBS. 281

Note—Verbs of the Tan class may raise their penultimate short vowel by Guna; ^T!^ri»,
to go, «ranfif arnoti or ^J^frl rinoti. jRI^WTTf wSt ^1 ftrfH, Sar. II. II, 3.

149. Tsps^ kshan, to kill, (i^TCT.)

P. TSpfftflT kshanoti 11 Pf. ^rerrai chakshdna, I A. ^renrffrr akshardt 348 *),
Atm. 3. WKjRut! akshanishta or wsfn akshata, 2. flBjfiuFT: akshanishthdh or ^reprn
akshathdh.
150. fspr kshin, to kill.
P. %TrftfiT kshinoti or iipiftfiT ksheiioti 11 I A. ^risprhr akshenit, Atm. ^rsjjftre
akshenishfa or vftfD akshita.

151. ?n^»a«, to obtain, (^JJ.)

P. fnrtfiT sanoti 11 Pf. TOTT mjaraa, Atm. iKr sene, I A. ^HMlrf asantt, Atm.
Wrf^Tt asanish(a or ^rtrnr asato (Pan. 11. 4, 79; vi. 4, 42).

153. ^ ifi, to do, (f^;)

"J iri before weak terminations becomes oK^ kar, but before strong terminations kur.
Before \v and »^m, and the of the optative, the Vikarana 7u is rejected, but the
radical 7 u is not lengthened.
P. 1. cfcCtft karomi, 2. einflfa karoshi, 3. uttfit karoti, 4. : kurvah, 5. *<>-«i:
kuruthah, 6. kurutah, 7. ^pi: kurmah, 8. kurutha, 9. ^ffiT kurvanti,
1. 1. ^rsrc# akaravam, 2. mrifc akaroh, 3. o<*Clll akarot, 4. akurva, 5. ^r^^if
akurutam, 6. wy^TTI akurutdm, 7. ^rsFH akurma, 8. ^*^<r akuruta, 9. ^ns#«T
akurvan, O. 1. kurydm, 9. <j^: kuryuh, I. 1. qnsiftl karavdni, 2. ^5 kuru,
3. U^fa karotu, 4. ^TCTW karavdva, 5. ^gr^TT kurutam, 6. **jdl kurutdm, 7.
karavdma, 8. ^^iT kuruta, 9. ^ifjj kurvantu 11 Pf. 1. ^rarc chakdra, 2. cha-
kartha, 3. ^oRT chakdra, 4. chakriva, 5. ^a^j: chakrathuh, 6. "TlijT: chakra-
tuh, 7. chakrima, 8. chakra, 9.^: chakruh, I A. i.^TcRtI akdrsham,
2. 41 41 iff: akdrshih, 3. tncpffl akdrshit, 4. ^nsref akdrshva, 5. 'srssre akdrshtam,
6. ^raniix akdrshtdm, 7. trgHS akdrshma, 8. 'H+ia akdrshta, 9. ^nBT§: akdrshuh,
F. afrxtrfir karishyati, P. F. ■oBwt Aartfa, B. 1. ffcimr kriydsam, 2. fam: kriydh,
3. fiwiir kriydt, 4. famy kriydsva, 5. f^wref kriydstam, 6. fm\W kriydstdm,
7. fadTW kriydsma, 8. fawrer kriydsta, 9. fgrrrcj: kriydsuh.
Atmanepada : P. i. a¥ £wn;e, 2. w^«t kurushe, 3. <s^$ kurute, 4. gif^
kurvahe, 5. ^#1$ kurvdthe, 6. itfnl kurvdte, 7. <»m% kurmahe, S.^vk kurudhve,
9. kurvate, I. 1. HHf§ akurvi, 2. fl'^jvji: akuruthdh, 3. SH<*?}rt akuruta,
4. ^S^ff? akurvahi, 5. nfnri akurvdthdm, 6. 'H^nri akurvdtdm, 7. ^rawf^
akurmahi, 8. ^K*^i4 akurudhvam, 9. %S^5rt akurvata, O. 1. «jtfl*^ kurvtya &c,
I. 1. oST^ karavai, 2. kurushva, 3. g^iti kurutdm, 4. iVT^nt karavdvahai,
5. ^T«rr kurvdthdm, 6. Srtnri kurvdtdm, 7. oRT^w| karavdmahai, 8.
kurudhvam, 9. ^rfTrt kurvatdm 11 Pf. i.*ns chakre, 2.^^ chakrishe, 3.^
o o
282 KRi CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS.

chakre, 4. chakrivahe, 5. TOT*} chakrdthe, 6. ^Wft chakrdte, 7.

chakrimahe, 8. chakritfhve, 9. ^fgn: chakrire, I A. 1. *sr$fa akrishi, 2. ^cspn:
akrithdh, 3. akrita, 4. Vp^f^ akrishvahi, 5. O^mvfi akrishdthdm, 6. fPpnri
akrishdtdm, 7. ^rxjrff akrishmahi, 8. !3t^ akricfhvam, 9. ^J^jr akrishata,
F. e|,i\n|rt karishyate, B. 3. ^tfte krishishta, 8. krishidhvam 11
Pt. ^tn kritah, Ger. Ari<»a ll Pass, fjfcuri kriyate, Aor. SH4l(\ a&ari,
Caus. ^TTTTfiT kdrayati, Aor. ^T^rtoimr achikarat, Des. ftnftWfr chikirshati, Int.
^Sfarff chekrtyate, charkarti &c, or ^rfri^ charkarUi &c. (J 490).

/TH CZass (Kryddi, IX Class).

I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.
. i53- * t0 buy» (J*H)
P. sfNnfir krindti 11 Pf. i.f^rarJT chikraya, 2. faftfavi chikrayitha or
chikretha, 3. fmni chikrdya, 4. f^fgrfir^ chikriyiva, 5. fafwrg: chikriyathuh,
6. f^nrg; chikriyatuh, 7. fafaiftre chikriyima, 8. faflCT chikriya, 9. f^ffm: cAi-
kriyuh, I A. ^rfWftr akraishit, Atm. ^rgre akreshta, F. ^rfir kreshyati, P. F.
TRiTT Arda, B. Mlll'K kriydt, Atm. iNte kreshishta 11 Pt. 'gfhr: krital}, 11 Pass,
■gffarff kriyate, Caus. gppifil krdpayati, Des. fsrart^fir chikrishati, Int. ^ s^l^Mrf

154. »ft mz, to kill,

The roots >ft mf, fl mi (Su), and ?ft t# (Div) take final ^TT a whenever their ^ f or 3( i would
be liable to Guna or Vriddhi, and in the gerund in *J ya (§ 452). Pan. vi. 1, 50.
P. tflnifir mindti 11 Pf. 1. ip^ mamau, 2. HHIV4 mamdtha or JffiTT mamitha,
3. »nn mamau, 4. far«l<f mimyiva, 5. ftrPtrg: mimyathuh, 6. SmnR mimyatuh,
7. (hPhh mimyiva, 8. ftmi mimya, 9. fawj: mimyuh,, I A. iH*(nfli^am<foft 353),
Atm. WTrei amdsta {§ 353), F. Jrrwfll mdsyati, P. F. »mn jrarfirf, B. »rtarff miydt,
Atm. »n*fte mdsishta 11 Pt. *rhr:. mitah, Ger. jftr^T mitvd, °nril -mdya 11 Pass,
jftrrff mtyate, Caus. HTTTftl mdpayati (§ 463, II. 19), Des. ftwfir mitsaii
(§ 4.J1, 8), Int. wfar^ memiyate.

155. ^fr?«£a»iM, to support, (#>J.)

The verbs ^EO^siamM, *«j»T s<um6A, ^M^siamiA, *5j*Ts*umM, and ^ sta may be conjugated
as Kri or as Su verbs.
P. ^avrfil stabhndti or WVtfir stabhnoti &c, I. ^rervrnrasto6/m^, O. crefhrnr
stabhniydt, I. 1. wyifn stabhndni, 2. WNM stabhdna*, 3. WtilH stabhndtu,
4. *tTtfR»fa6AM<foa, 5.^nfrf stabhnttam, 6.^rtfhri stabhnUdm, 7.^trWI stabhndma,
8. iRftfhT stabhnita, 9. ^nhl stabhnantu 11 Pf. tastambha, I A. w«WliT astam-
bhit or II A. ^rennr astabhat {§ 367), F. wfWxqfa stambhishyati, P. F. «THrCT
stambhitd, B. WTTiT stabhydt ll Pt stabdhalj., Ger. feifaril stambhitvd or

* Krl verbs ending in consonants form the and pers. sing, imperative in WPT <fna'.
 kr! class, parasmaipada and atmanepada verbs. 283

stabdhvd n Pass. H*nr stabhyate, Caus. ^trfir stambhayati, Des. ftaHtafil

tistambhishati, Int. rmfrwrff tdstabhyate.

156. \p4, to purify, (tjs^.)

The Krt verbs beginning with \pu shorten their vowel in the special tenses (Pan. vn. 3, 80).
They stand Dhatupatha 31, 12—32. The more important are, <*J M, to cut, ^ff stri, to
cover, ^ vri, to choose, Vdhu, to shake, ^pri, to fill, ^ <M, to tear, *[jri, to wither.
P. ^tflfrf pundti, Atm. tpift punite ll Pf. ijitr pupdva, Atm. trg^ pupuve,
I A. ^MNlif apdvit, Atm. «smfcjs apavishta, F. MP^mTif pavishyati, P. F. 'qfViTT
pavitd ll Pt. tjTr: /rtfta$, Ger. tj?^T j9wfo;<2 (trf^m pavitafy and qftwi pavitvd
(§ 424) belong to ip^ jsrfji, pavate (Bhu class), see $ 333. D) ll Pass, ^rff
pUyate, Caus. TrRTrfir pdvayati, Aor. ^nrfrreiT apipavat, Des. ^wtrfir pupushati
(fa nfWMH pipavishate belongs to itt^w, Vttpavate, Bhu class, Pan. vn. 2, 74),
Int. trhUTW popHyate.
157. grraA, to take.
This root takes Samprasdrana in the special tenses and before other weakening terminations.
(Pan. vi. 1, 16.)
P. Jj^iiri grihndti, Atm. Tpsffir grihnite, I. j^ltf agrihndt, Atm. *PJ ^fl B
agrihnita, O. J I ^,1*1 1 H grihniydt, Atm. '1^1 ri grihnita, I. grihndtu
(2. JJ^WI grihdna), Atm. >T^fhri grihnitdm 11 Pf. 1. SRHf jagraha, 2. »T?lfl[*T
jagrahitha, 3. jagrdha, 4. ^J|P^4 jagrihiva, 5. »PT?f*j: jagrihathuh,
6. «PJ?TTt jagrihatuh, 7. SPTf^l jagrihima, 8. »PJ? jagriha, 9. »TT^: jagrihuh,
I A. 1. ^U^W agrahisham 341 and § 348*), 2. ^r^fh agrahih, 3. VHyglrf
agraMt, Atm. 1. iMil^lfa agrahishi, 2. ^i?J^Tbt: agrahish(hdfy, 3. ^r?r^f flgrra-
Mshta, F. y^luifir grahishyati, P. F. {j^lrii grahitd, B. 1p!ffiT grihydt, Atm.
iJ^lNfte grahishishta 11 Pt. n^tir: grihiiah, Ger. >T^tW1 grihitvd 11 Pass, aj^rff
grihyate, Aor. SNjJlHg agrdhi, Fut. y^lnjri grahishyate or ?nf^*l>J grdhishyate
&c., Caus. yi^^fri grdhayati, Des. farirsjfii jighrikshati, Int. «fOJJ4li) ,/ar£-
grihyate, »TT?TTfe jdgrddhi (not *nirfe jdgradhi).

II. Parasmaipada Verbs.

158. *if[jyd, to grow weak.
This root takes Samprasdrana in the special tenses and before other weakening terminations.
(See No. 157.)
P. ftRTfir jindti, I. ^rftPTTi^ ajindt, O. ftnfhrnr jiniydt, I. ftpnrr jindtu 11
Pf. 1. ftn^ jijyau, 2. WiHH jijyitha or ftnqra jijydtha, 3. fir^Tf jijyau,
4. f%fs^ ,/i/yiva, I A. ^rsmrHr ajydsit, F. ^Hjjfri jydsyati, B. wfrrnr ./fya* II
Pt. ^fUjinali,, Ger. ^rfarfytoa, °WW-jydya 11 Caus. sqiTOft jydpayati, Des.
fiHTHmfri jijydsati, Int. ^*ffanr jejiyate.
002
284 ke! class, Atmanepada verbs.

159. ?fT jnd, to know.

This verb substitutes *f\jd in the special tenses. (Pan. vil. 3, 79.)
P. TTTTfif jdndti, I. OTITOTl^ ajdndt, O. srnfftaTiT jdniydt, I. STT'TTJ jdndtu ll
Pf. ir<5rc jajnau, I A. isyrtfli^ ajndsit, F. yiwifrf jndsyati, P. F. ^TiTT jndta,
B. jrrrnr jndydt or %TJX^jneydt 11 Pt. ?rnr: jndtah 11 Pass. |fTOK jndyate, Aor.
'Msiifu ajndyi, Caus. gipifir jnapayati (see $ 462, II. 15), Aor. wftf^rr^ a/i-
jnapat, Des. fturnrn jijndsate, Int. sn^^^a/Mayafe.

160. "«p^ bandh, to bind.

P. ^infff badhndti, I. ^TTHTrT abadhndt, O. ^ifhrnr badhniydt, I. THTJ
badhndtu 11 Pf. 1. sr^v babandha, 2. «r#fw babandhitha or rtl babanddha or
babandha, I A. 1. 'SWTW abhdntsam, 2. ^winft: abhdntsih, 3. vnhtfv
abhdntsit, 4. 'aiHTr^ abhdntsva, 5. fPTTI abdnddham, 6. WWW abdnddham,
7. ^whw abhdntsma, 8. wrfl abdnddha, 9. ^wftlj: abhdntmh, F. wsrfir bhant-
syati, P. F. banddha, B. "^artfr badhydt 11 Pt. ^j: baddhah, Ger.
baddhvd 11 Pass. w«r^ badhyate, Caus. ^v*rfiT bandhayati, Aor. ^TTWff aia-
bandhat, Des. fcHrUfri bibhantsati, Int. «JHmrt bdbadhyate, ^i4f|f bdbanddhi.

III. Atmanepada Verbs.

161. ^ «ri, to cherish, (^-)
P. '<2*ulri vrinite, I. WTCftff avrinita, O. trafhi vrinita, I. TOfhri vrinitdm 11
Pf. ^ vavre, I A. t!M fi.8 avarishta or avartshfa or *r^iT avrita, F. ffroi
or 40mri varishyate, P. F. gficifT or ^tJtit varUd, B. qfilN'ts varishishta or
vrishishta 11 Pt. ^h: vritah 11 Pass. (V*|rf vriyate, Caus. =KlfiT varayati, Des.
fafcri) or f^m.^trt vivarishate, Int. ^Tfhnl vevriyate, ^ffiff varvarti &c.
Contracted forms of the Des. and Int., ^rtfir vuvurshati and ^t^TT vovuryate.

Ad Class (Adddi, II Class).

I. Parasmaipada Verbs.
162. ^ atf, to eat.
P. 1. wftl admi, 2. -flfrtf afci, 3. ^rftr aWi, 4. ^rj: advah, 5. WTO: atthah,
6. ^ra: aWaA, 7. admah, 8. Wr^J atfMa, 9. W^frl adanti, I. 1. ^rr^ arfam,
2. WT^t arfaA (Pan. VII. 3, 100) *, 3. SHIt}^ atffltf, 4. acfoa, 5. <2#<w»,
6. ^rraT dttdm, 7. ^ITW ddma, 8. ^TTW a^a, 9. ^n^«T ddan, O. ^THT?^ adyai,
I. 1. HH<jlf«< addni, 2. ^rf^ addhi f, 3. aWw, 4. WfTO addva, 5. wjt attam,
6. ^nri attam, 7. W^TO addma, 8. a^a, 9. adantu ll Pf. 1. ad«,

* ad inserts a before terminations consisting of one consonant,

t When is added immediately to the final consonant of a root, it is changed to
fVrfAi. (Pan. vi. 4, 101.)
 AD CLASS, PAEASMAIPADA VEEBS. 285

2. THl(t{ii) dditha &c, or substituting tj^ ghas*, i. UTOI jaghasa, 2. IT^ftrtl

jaghasitha, 3. >rm?r jaghasa, 4. nflfq jakshiva, 5. HHjvj: jakshathuh, 6. >f(Sj^:
jakshatuh, y.ifftyi jakshima, 8.ify$ jaksha, g.if^ijakshuh, II A. i.^nreag'Aa-
»a»re, 2. '?nm: aghasah, 3. SSTWJT aghasat, F. VIRgfil atsyati, P. F. ?nrt oW4,
B. fnrnr adyat 11 Pt. WTO jagdhahf, Ger. »FS^T jagdhvd, °*pvn -jagdhya
(Pan. 11. 4, 36) n Pass, ^renr adyate, Caus. ^n^rfiT ddayati, Aor. ^nf^TT
ddidat, Des. fsmvfil jighatsati.

163. '«{rT/wa, to eat.

P. mifd I. 3. ^TT^rrif apsa^, 9. WBPT opsan or ?pg: ap«w£ 32a J),
0. MimiH psdydt, I. **rnr i?sata II Pf. papsau, I A. «HJl«1^ apsdsit,
F. mi^Pri psdsyati, P. F. ''fmrr psdtd, B. psdydt or WJTfff pseydt 11
Pass. mi(|H psdyate, Caus. wnrfil psdpayati, Des. ftimmfK pipsdsati, Int.
Mimnjci pdpsdyate.
164. »wa, to measure.
P. *nfiff wwfti, I. 3. vmr amatf, 9. ^WPT am^w or 'Sr: amuh, O. JTTTriT mdydt,
1. >rrg »wa<M 11 Pf. mamau, I A. ^nrrerft^ amdsit, F. UTOft mdsyati, P. F.
»mrf matfa, B. HTrff meydt 11 Pt. finr: mitah, Ger. fnrir mitvd, °>rni -mdya 11
Pass. rf miyate, Aor. wnft amdyi, Caus. unnrfw mdpayati, Aor. wflHMrf^am?-
mapat, Des. ftrwrfir mitsati, Int. iWfafff merrilyate, UTTTfir mdmdti or Hlfffif mdmeti.

165. in y<2, to go. 1

P. *nfif ya£i, I. 3. ^nmi aya£, 9. ^fll<^ ayare or ^Pj: ayM#, O. TPTTW ydydt,
I. mff y^lfw II Pf. 1^ yayau, I A. «mi*fliTN aydsit, F. Hl+ifftT ydsyati, P. F. imn
yafa, B. JnHTiT ydydt 11 Pt. inw: ll Pass, xrpfr yaye, Caus. iHMqiri ydpayati,
Aor. Vlfhrinr ayiyapat, Des. fmimfri yiydsati, Int. <jmmrf ydydyate.

166. ^rt #%a, to proclaim.

P. ^nfif khydti, I. ^rwnr akhydt, O. WTTiJ khydydt, I. ^rnj khydtu 11
Pf. ^aft chakhyau, II A. ^j^inr akhyat, F. ^jrprffl khydsyati, P. F. WTBT
khydtd, B. wnrfir khydydt or ^prn^Myeyatf 11 Pt. smin khydtah 11 Pass. fTTWB
khydyate, Aor. W^lfil akhydyi, Caus. ^rrtprfir khydpayati, Aor. '3jpm=JJ<Jri acAi-
khyapat, Des. PTWTSTfk chikhydsati, Int. TTWTTB chdkhydyate.

167. ^s^vai, to desire.

This root takes Samprasdrana before the strong terminations of the special tenses, and in the
weakening forms generally.
P. 1. ^fipr vaSmi, 2. ^foj vakshi (JS 125, 120), 3. ^fi? vashti, 4. usvah,
3. T?r: ushthah, 6. TS'. ushtah, 7. ^pn u&mah, 8. Tff ushtha, 9. j^ifrf uSanti,

* In the tenses where arf is deficient, jrAos is used instead.

t This is formed from *P5T,/'afoA, to eat, a reduplicated form of ^R^jrAas. (Pan. 11. 4, 36.)
 286 AD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

I. i. avaham, 2. ^TO^ avat, 3. ^7 aval, 4. 5ifag auha, 5. aushtam,

6. ^tt aushtdm, 7. ausma, 8. aushta, 9. ^m^f^ausan, O. ^rnr idydt,
1. 1. isufi va&dni, 2. ^ft uddhi, 3. vashtu, 4. tjgiN vakdva, 5. ushtam,
6. ^BT ushtdm, 7. <4!(riH DflMms, 8. 3? ushta, 9. '3^fff ukantu 11 Pf. 3. 4*4131 uvdsa,
9. -gnj: I A. F. qfrpqfil va&ishyati, P. F. ^%KT vaHtd,
B. wsya^ 11 Pass. gjpni uh/ate, Caus. Nl^mfri vdiayati, Des. Prrfjfffil
vivaSishati, Int. NH^ri vdvakyate, TPTft vdvashti.

168. if^ Aara, to kill.

This verb drops its final ^ n before the strong terminations of the special tenses, and in the
weakening forms generally, if the terminations begin with any consonants except nasals
or semivowels (Pan. vi. 4, 37). Before strong terminations beginning with vowels,
han becomes "^ghn (Pan. vn. 3, 54). In the aorist and benedictive '^Cyvadh is sub
stituted. The desiderative, intensive, and the aorist passive are derived from TPT ghan,
the causative from TH^ghat.
P. 1. frfal hanmi, 2. ijftr hamsi, 3. irfir hanti, 4. hanvaJf., 5. frq: hatha}},
6. fin hatah, 7. irsr: hanmah, 8. hatha, 9. jffir ghnanti, I. 1. ^I|nf ahanam,
2. W|r^ aAan, 3. ^Jin^ a^an, 4. hh^m ahanva, 5. ^r?it ahatam, 6. V^ri ahaidm,
7. tH^«h ahanma, 8. ^T?rT ahata, 9. ?IJP^ aghnan, O. ^TTi^ hanydt, I. 1. ^hiPh
handni, 2. iff^jahi (Pan. vi. 4, 36), 3. ^tt hantu, 4. f«iie( handva, 5. hatam,
6. ^TTT hatdm, 7. ftfin handma, 8. ^iT Aata, 9. jhj ghnantu 11 Pf. 1. »prpT jaghana
(Pan. vn. 3, 55), 2. iPlftni jaghanitha or »nhr jaghantha, 3. »nmT jaghana,
4. irfta jaghniva, 5. tllTO jaghnathuh, 6. »Tfnj: jaghnatuh, 7. mPhh jaghnima,
8. *TCt jaghna, 9. jaghnuh, I A. ^rvfa avadhit, F. gflpqfil hanishyati,
P. F. ^rr hantd, B. ^TJirw vadhydt 11 Pt. jpr: hatah, Ger. hatvd, -hatya
(§ 449) 11 Pass, ^arff hanyate, Aor. shuiTh aghdni or ^refv avadhi (§ 407),
Caus. TffinrfiT ghdtayati, Aor. fljflMiH ajighatat, Des. ftnrrefk jighdmsati,
Int. 4*Mri janghanyate or %jrhlff jeghniyate (Pan. vn. 4, 30, v., he kills),
jfvjfrf janghanti.
169. ^ yw, to mix.
Verbs of this class ending in 7 « take, in the special tenses, Vriddhi instead of Guna before
weak terminations beginning with consonants. (Pan. vn. 3, 89.)
P. 1. yaumi, 2. ^fa yaushi, 3. ^fii yauti, 4. *pf: yuvah, 5. 5*1: yuthah,
6. Tift: yutah, 7. g*n yumafr, 8. ^1 yutha, 9. g^fir yuvanti, I. 1. wi^ ayavam,
2. ^P^: ayauh, 3. *riftff ayaut, 4. "?np ayuva, 5. ^PITT ayutam, 6. SH^rii ayutdm,
7. wrro ayuma, 8. wni ayuta, 9. W^W^ ayuvan, O. ^Jrnr yuydt, 1. 1. ^r^rftr yavdni,
2. 5^ yw^i, 3. yaw^w, 4. yavdva, 5. xpf yutam, 6. ^irf yutdm, 7. *rer»i
yavdma, 8. Tpf yutam,, 9. yuvantu 11 Pf. 3. Tprra yuydva, 9. giro: yuyuvuh,
I A. WUffftw aydvit, F. n^mfil yavishyati, P. F. ^fsrrtl yavitd, B. ^mr y%a/ II
Pt. jr. ll Pass. ydyate, Aor. wufV ay^i, Caus. ^TRmfit ydvayati,
Des. gyfil yuydshati, Int. ift^Jlrt yoyuyate, iftqth yoyoti.
 AD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 287

170. ^ru, to shout.

The verbs tu, ^? ru, ^ stu may take ^ ( before all terminations of the special tenses
beginning with consonants. (Pan. vn. 3, 95.)
P. 1. 'Sfa raumi or dlfa ravimi, 2. raushi or <<flfn ravhhi, 3. ^fir
raiitfi or c^flftf raviti, 4. ruvah or Tj^ta: ruvivah, 5. ruthah, or ^ftffan
ruvithal}, 6. ^tk: rw/aA or ^fan ruvitafy, 7. ^h: rumah or ^tfN: ruvimah, 8.
rw^Aa or Hftftvi ruvitha, 9. ^fir ruvanti, I. 1. aravam, 2. ^1^: araufy or
^TT^t: aravih,, 3. ^?Or^ araw^ or ^TTS^iT aravit, 4. arwva or «t^N aruviva,
5. "iUj'ri arutam or fF^An aruvitam, 6. ^frri arutdm or trtrtftfli aruvitdm,
7. nh«\H aruma or «F^N aruvtma, 8. ^r^w arwfo or vr^frl aruvita, 9. >H^<«^
aruvan, O. ^*m^ r«yd£ or ^Tfaffi^ ruviydt, I. 1. C^rfin ravdni, 2. 7"wAi or
<>=flF»j ruvihi, 3. ^ rawta or T^tli ravitu, 4. t^R ravdva, 5. ^tt rutam or
tj<Ari ruvitam, 6. ^BT rutam or ^tui ruvitdm, 7. ravdma, 8. ^TT rwta or
<}NTfl ruvita, 9. ruvantu 11 Pf. 3. ^TTC rw/wa, 9. ruruvuh., I A.
^nr^TT aravit, F. T^rarfiT ravishyati, P. F. tf^TTT r-avifa, B. ^rn^rtZyatf II Pt.
^iT: rwtaA n Pass, ^iffi rHyate, Caus. TT^lfil rdvayati, Des. jj^nfrf rurilshati,
Int. CUssMrf rorHyate.
Note—The Sarasvati gives ^Itl^hr araushit, OnTd roshyati, and ^TTT ro/<£; but see
§ 332, 4. It likewise extends the use of to ^} »«, to praise.

171. ^i, to go.

P. 1. ^f»T emi, 2. irfa esAi, 3. irfir 4. ivaA, 5. ithah, 6. ^in itaA,
7. ^H: wraaA, 8. ifAa, 9. qfir yanti, I. 1. *srri dyam, 2. ih aiA, 3. ai/, 4. IT?
aiva, 5. aitam, 6. ihri aitdm, 7. ai»wa, 8. JJK 9. VPPT dyan, O.
3TTT(^ tya/, I. i. fPrrfa aydni, 2. ^f? ihi, 3. e/w, 4. WTO aydva, 5. item,
6. ^TTT ifttm, 7. WTW aydma, 8. ^iT ifa, 9. *TiJ yantu ll Pf. 1. ^TR iySya, 2. sTOfin
iyayitha or iyetha, 3. Sfirpq iydya, 4. ^ftrf %it;a, 5. f^Tg: iyathul}, 6.
iyatuh, 7. fftrflt lyima, 8. ^ fyflj 9- ^2/M^» I A- J- a^a»» (Pan. 11. 4, 45),
2. 'SPrr: a^aA, 3. ^rTTtr a^a/, 4. WUH agdma, 5. ^riTTff agdtam, 6. ^mTirf agdtdm,
7. 'SPTTH agdma, 8. ^PITTI agdta, 9. ^pt: a^wA 368), F. TWfrT eshyati, P. F.
^HT e*a, B. ^jtth 11 Pt. ^tt: iteA, Ger. 5^1 itaa, °^RT -i^ya 11 Pass. fir>
zya^e, Aor. ^nnftl (§ 404), Caus. JT»TTfit gamayati (Pan. 11. 4, 46), Des.
ftpTf*refjT jigamishati (Pan. 11. 4, 47). But see § 463, II. 1, and § 471, 4,
with regard to this and cognate verbs if preceded by prepositions.

173. fa<* vid, to know.

P. 1. ^ftr vedmi, 2. %fkr re&i, 3. vetti, 4. f^: vidvah, 5. farH: vitthafa,
6. f^: vittah, 7. fVnn vidmafy, 8. f^rTviWAa, 9. fa^fw vidanti, I. 1. avedam,
2. ^r: awA or avei (Pan. vm. a, 75), 3. ^Ri^ avet (§ 132*), 4. wftfl
avidva, 5. wfa^f avittam, 6. ^if^T avittdm, 7. ^fmi avidma, 8. ^rf^ avitta,
9. «r«l^«^ avidan or vfcp aviduh, O. RUTiT vidydt, I. 1. 4<lf<T veddni (or
288 AD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VEEBS.

f^fcn^rfrr viddmkaravdni &c, Pan. nr. j, 41), 2. tVt^f viddhi, 3. ^| vettu,

4. veddva, 5. f^H vittam, 6. ftrat vittam, 7. g^TT veddma, 8. ftra vitta,
9. f^ff vidantu 11 Pf. ftr^ viveda or viddmchakdra ($ 326), I A.
*l%^if avedit, F. qfq^ifH' vedishyati, P. F. ^f^rfl veditd, B. fa a I if vidydt 11
Another form of the Present is, 1. ^ werfa, 2. ^r<5 vettha, 3. ^ verfa, 4. 'fas
vidva, 5. f^^t vidathuh, 6. fa^TT: vidatuh, 7. fan vidma, 8. fa^ «ic?a, 9. 'fa?:
virfuA 11 Pt. fafacn viditafr, Ger. fafar«n viditvd 11 Pass, fafiit vidyate, Aor.
VH'f<; averfi, Caus. ^cfJifir vedayati, Aor. 3Nir<4<(ls avwidat, Des. fafafatffr
vividishati (Pan. 1. 2, 8), Int. gtWfr vevidyate, ^rt% vevetti.

173. n^ as, to be.

P. 1. -41 asrwi, 2. 'Sfftr asi, 3. ^rftcT as£i, 4. waA, 5. 9n sthal}, 6. TRTJ s/aA,
7. W. smalt, 8. <W s/Aa, 9. wfir sara/i, I. 1. ^rre warn, 2. ^rrah a«fA, 3. WTfftir^ dsit,
4. ^TT^ dsva, 5. ^rrer dstam, 6. ^rrert dstdm, 7. shiw a«wa, 8. ^rrer as/a, 9. 41(14
dsan, 0. 1. ^qt syam, 2. WT: syaA, 3. ^HTJf sydt, 4. 5prra sydva, 5. ^rrff sydtam,
6. WIHI sydtdm, 7. jeoth sydma, 8. ^UTiT sydta, 9. sywA, I. 1. SHUlfH asdni,
2. Ufa e^Ai, 3. ^rej «*<m, 4. ^THR asdva, 5. ^ff stem, 6. WT sMto, 7. 'sraTH asdma,
8. H sfa, 9. santu ll Pf. 1. ^rnt dsa, 2. iSTftm dsitha, 3. ^ra a*a, 4. WTftn
dsiva, 5. ^rnro: dsathuh, 6. VTOir: dsatufjt, 7. ->aifHH dsima, 8. ^rra a$a, 9. ^srrg:
asMA; Atm. 1. ^rw ase, 2. ^nftni dsishe, 3. ^rrir 4. tnftra^ dsivahe,
5. 'HHIlif dsdthe, 6. WTHni asafe, 7. ssuftwis dsimahe, 8. ^nfasfr dsidhve,
9. 'snftit «sire *.
174. Jji^mry, to cleanse, Op^)
This verb takes Vriddhi instead of Guna (Pan. VII. 2, 114); it may take Vriddhi likewise
before terminations that would not require Guna, if the terminations begin with a vowel
(Siddh.-Kaum. vol. 11. p. 122).
P. 1. HTft'T mdrjmi, 2. HI fa) mdrkshi, 3. HTff mdrshti (§ 124), 4. mrijvah,
5. Win mrishthah, 6. »T?: mrishtal}, 7. HSRt mrijmah, 8. TO mrish(ha, 9. «jijfiri
mrijanti or wSjfrf mdrjanti, 1. 1. ^sirnt amdrjam, 2. vsm^ amdrt, 3. ^unf amdrt,
4. shHtI amrijva, 5. amrishtam, 6. »JWsi amrishtam, 7. ^PJ3H amrijma,
8. amrishta, 9. ^fpTT amrijan or '^m^tT amdrjan, O. tj^iif mrijydt,
I. 1. HT^rftT mdrjdni, 2. Hf^ mriddhi, 3. irr| mdrshtu, 4. HNN mdrjdva, 5.
mrishtam, 6. vgj mrishtdm, 7. Hl^m mdrjdma, 8. mrishta, 9. >pnr mrijantu
or Hlflri mdrjantu 11 Pf. 1. «nrr# mamdrja, 2. HHlf^vj mamdrjitha or JjJn%
mamdrshtha, 3. HHlA mamdrja, 4. hhCiH mamrijiva or RJTTfi^ mamdrjiva,
5. T'pl^ mamrijathuh or HHli}^'. mamdrjathufy, 6. HHii^i mamrijatuh. or
HHMri*. mamdrjatuh, 7. JTflftw mamrijima or HHlf^H mamdrjima, 8. *R1T
mamrija or htt^ mamdrja, 9. mamrijuh or mamdrjufy, I A. ^mtsffrT

* The perfect both in the Parasmaipada and Atmanepada is chiefly used at the end of
the periphrastic perfect.
 AD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS. 289

amdrjit or 'SfureffiT amdrkshit, F. Hlfihqfll mdrjishyati or Mlft§frf mdrkshyati,

P. F. mfiftn mdrjitd or »n#T mdrshtd, B. mrijydt u Pt. ^s: mrishtafy,
Ger. *rfifffl mdrjitvd, -mrijya, Adj. nrfinTO rndrjitavyah or »UB*":
marsfyavyahi, mrijyah or »nr5: mdrgyal), (Pap. m. i, 113) n Pass, ^j^rt
mrijyate, Aor. "smfw amdrji, Caus. JTrsprfiT mdrjayati, Des. ftmnrftl mimrikshati
or fimrf^fiT mimdrjishati, Int. nOHi^ri marimrijyate, H#rft marmdrshti.
175. ^9 vacA, to speak.
P. 1. ^fd vachmi, 2. ^fiST vakshi, 3. =rf^i wa£<i, 4. vachvah, 5. ^ef*rc vakthah,
6. ^g<: vaktah, 7. vachmah, 8. vaktha, 9. ^fir vadanti or tpfir bruvanti *,
1. 1. ^JT^ avacham, 2. »nq<* 3. «nv <wa/:, 4. SHcjicj avachva, 5. iSM* avaktam,
6. ^T^raKT avaktam, 7. <Htn avachma, 8. ^t^> avakta, 9. ^f^TN avadan*, O. ^JTrf
vachydt, I. 1. ij-Mlfn tfacMni, 2. ^frv vagdhi, 3. vaktu, 4. vachdva,
5. ^l vaktam, 6. vaktdm, 7. vachdma, 8. ^> vakta, 9. vadantu* 11
Pf. 3. TTHH uvdcha, 9. gr*p uchuh, II A. ^mfar^ avochat 366), F. ^sjrffr
vakshyati, P. F. g^il t>a£M, B. iWH uchydt \\ Pt. T?K «Wa£ 11 Pass. Tstnr
uchyate, Aor. «er<ufV( avdchi, Caus. Hi^qfrf vachayati, Aor. 'g^TTif avivachat,
Des. ftr^fil vivakshati, Int. tlFTOn vdvachyate.
176. ^ rwd, to cry, fcf^.)
The verbs rud, scap, seas, an, jTBT jaisA take ^ t before the terminations
of the special tenses beginning with consonants, except t^y (Pan. vn. 2, 76). Before
weak terminations consisting of one consonant, ^ t is inserted (Pan. VII. 3, 98)$ or,
according to others, o (Pan. vn. 3, 99).
P. 1. ^f^fil rodimi, 2. Ttf^fa rodishi, 3. ^f^fir^ofl^i, 4. ^f^: rudivah, 9,
rudanti, I. 1. ^ni^ arodam, 2. ^rtt^h arodih, or wCl^: arodah, 3. frefc^hr arodit
or ^rtr^arodat, 4.^r^f^ arudiva, g.^sc^i arudan, O.^rr rudydm, I. i.tt^rftr
roddni, 2. ^f^f^ rudihi, 3. Ttf^TT roditu, 4. CfcjN roddva, 5. ^f^K ruditam, 6. ^flfHT
ruditdm, 7. roddma, 8. 4>f<jrl rudita, 9. rudantu 11 Pf. ^'O^ ruroda,
I A. ^rtt^br arorfft or ^r^w arudat, F. ClHjmrd rodishyaii, P. F. Clf^rtl roditd,
B. ^WTTT rudydt 11 Pt. ^jfiriK ruditah 11 Pass, T$srn" rudyate, Aor. ^sretf^ arodi,
Caus. Cl^lrf rodayati, Aor. ^T€^t^ artirudat, Des. ^f^fir rurudishati,
Int. Cl^flii rorudyate.
177. "^ jaksh, to eat, to laugh J.
Seven verbs, sT^/aitsA, 'irm^ri, to wake, ^PtJT daridrd, to be poor, ^il^ chakds, to shine,
^TT^ sas, to rule, ?^>ft rfMW, to shine, cecf, to obtain, are called ^fwrei abhyasta
(reduplicated). They take ^flT ati and ^(J «<« in the 3rd pers. plur. present and
imperative, and t$ instead of ^PI an in the 3rd pers. plur. imperfect (§ 32 it).
P. 3. *f?qfs jakshiti, 9. "ir^fnjakshati, I. ws^tn^ajakshit or ^mmt ajakshai,
* The 3rd pers. plur. present of ^^cacA does not occur (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. II. p. 120);
according to others the whole plural is wanting; according to some no 3rd pers. plur. is
formed from ^^cacA.
X If^Jaksh, to eat, from TKf^Aas; If^jaksh, to laugh, from ^^has.
P p
290 AD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

0. *mmisjakshydt, I. 3. «vra|h^ ajakshit or Winpr ajakshat, 9. W3TBT: ajakshub

(§ 33IJ) 11 Pf- *T*TQ jajaksha, I A. <« »i Bjl ajakshit, F. l| *!ft jakshuhyati.

178. ffj^jdgri, to wake.

P. 1. IfPTO jdgarmi, 2. STUTflt jdgarshi, 3. "snnfilf jdgarti, 4. »TT'T^: jdgrival).,
5. jdgrithah, 6. STPJ1TC jdgritah, 7. MI'IH: jdgrimah, 8. IfPTO jdgritha,
9. «iiyfit jdgrati, I. 1. fnTTft ajdgaram, 2. WHPIS ajdgah, 3. <H*TPTC ajdgah,
4. ^T3TTT^ ajdgriva, 5. fTITPJli ajdgritam, 6. fHIfJlri ajdgritdm, 7. ^Mt'JH ajdgrima,
8. ^HTPpT ajdgrita, 9. VUPT^ ajdgaruh, O. >rnpnit jdgriydt, I. 1. sHJIClftu/dya-
rdfci, 2. '3rnjf% jdgrihi, 3. jTTTW jdgartu, 4. JTr'KR jdgardva, 5. flTlri jdgritam,
6. STmri jdgritam, 7. »TTJrn*T jdgardma, 8. jdgrita, 9. HPnCQ jdgaratu II
Pf. 3. *T*TPn*.jajdgdra or IfPTtN <k>\'<jdgardmchakdra (Pan. m. 1, 38), 9. irTPT^
jajdgaruh, I A. VM IJltf rf ajdgarit (see preface, p. xi), F. »!T*rft«rfiTjdgarishyati,
P. F. v)|J| Peril jdgaritd, B. Hi nil I if jdgarydt 11 Pt. afmiVrf: jdgaritah 11 Pass.
«TT»rw jdgaryate, Aor. Wflmifc ajdgdri, Caus. WKJjfif jdgarayati, Des.
f»H I J I R«( fir jijdgarishati . No Intensive.

179. ^frjT daridrd, to be poor.

In ^IV. 51 daridrd the final ^TT a is replaced by ^ « in the special tenses before strong termi
nations beginning with a consonant (Pan. vi. 4, 114). Before strong terminations
beginning with vowels the a is lost (Pan. vi. 4, 112).
P. i.^ft'S^fadandrami, 2. ^ft^rftt daridrdsi, 3. ^iVjifrf daridrdti, 4. ^Otfjci:
daridrivah, 9. ^ft^fn" daridrati, I. 3. w^fcjnr adaridrdt, 6. ^ftf$m adari-
dritdm, 9. SH<jfC5.: adaridruh, O. ^ftfjrn^ daridriydt, I. 1. ^ft^rftr daridrdni,
2. srftfjf? daridrihi, 3. ^fljlrf daridrdtu, 4. daridrdva, 5. ^ftfjtf dari-
dritam, 6. ^ftfijiH daridritdm, 7. SffcjTW daridrdma, 8. ^ftf^fT daridrita,
9. ^ft^5 daridratu 11 Pf. ^ftr0 dadaridrau or ^(\$'m<*K daridrdmchakdra
(Siddh.-Kaum. vol. 11. p. 125), I A. ^ft^br adaridrit or ^Rfft^TffriT adari-
drdsit (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. 11. p. 126), F. ^ftf^rfif daridrishyati (Pan. vi.
4, 114, v.), P. F. qfifftdl daridrita (not qftflMl daridrdtd).

180. ^TT^&w, to command.

^TR^os is changed to fijl^fe before weakening terminations beginning with consonants,
and in the second aorist. (Pan. vi. 4, 34.)
P. 1. Sllftw hdsmi, 2. jrrftsr 3. 31 1 (w 4. f^fN: bishvah, 9. ^nttfif Sdsati,
1. 1. T^TW asdsam, 2. ^TTC asd# or «5iiri a$d£, 3. ?r$rnr <z&zf ($ 132), 4. ^rf^r^
asishva, 5. ^f$r£ ahishtam, 6. ^rfifrei asishtdm, 7. flf^lN asishva, 8. 'srfsr? ahishta,
9. *T$rRj: a&t*M#, O. f^PTrt^ bishydt, I. 1. ^llMlfn idsdrai, 2. ^rrfv idrfAi (§ 132),
3. 4. jmro Msdt;a, 5. f^rl sishtam, 6. f^TST sishtdm, 7. ^rTHTT sd^dma,
8. sishta, 9. ^ITOW ^dsafw 11 Pf. sa&dsa, II A. wfgrv^ asishat, F. ^nOuuifiT
Sdsishyati, B. ftjumT hishydt 11 Pt. sishtah 11 Pass. %OTff iishyate, Caus.
^tranfll sdsayati, Des. fyprftrafll ^jid*isAa/t, Int. se&shyate.
 AD CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS. 291

II. Atmanepada Verbs.

181. ^^chaksh, to speak, (^ftf^.)
P. i. 'TO? chakshe, 2. chakshe, 3. "TO chashte, 4. chakshvdhe,
5. ^T?T*r chakshdthe, 6. -MKjlrt chakshdte, 7. chakshmahe, 8. chaddhve,
9. ^Erff chakshate, 1. 3. ^r^f achashta, 9. ^raispr achakshata, O. ^Bfftf chakshita,
I. chashtdm 11 Pf. chachakshe.
The other forms are supplied from or <f$n Wd, the Red. Perf.
optionally, (Pan. 11. 4, 54, 55) : Pf. chakhyau 11 II A. or °ir
akhyat or -te, F. CTTOrfff or °?r khydsyati or -fe, B. mm khydydt or
Wmir khyeydt, or Atm. OTRfl* khydsishta.
182. ^ is, to rule.
The root &' takes ^ i before the 2nd pers. sing, present and imperative (Pan. vli. 2, 77).
id and afT jara do the same, and likewise insert 3[ i before the 2nd pers. plur.
present, imperfect, and imperative (Pan. vii. 2, 78). The commentators, however, extend
the latter rule to is.
P. 1. Ue, 2. \piW Uishe, 3. ^ ishte, 8. ffifl«i isidhve, I. 3. in? aishta,
8. 5?%t4 aisidhvam, O. S^flif Uita, I. 1. Uai, 2. ^PjIM isishva, 3. ^fi
ishtdm, 8. ff^It4 Uidhvam 11 Pf. ^rfaTF isdmchakre, I A. ^f^r? aiiishta.
183. a*, to sit.
P. ^rrer d«fe, I. ^rrcr a«<a, O. ^i*fld d*fta, I. wreri d«£d»» 11 Pf. ^rrafaift
dsdmchakre (part. wiuM: ds?raa#, Pan. vn. 2, 83), I A. VTfat dsish(a, F.
^rrftrant dsishyate.
184. ^sw, to bear, (^.)
P. *7T siite, I. *raTT aswta, O. *J^TT suvita, I. r. suvai (Pan. vii. 3, 88),
2. sitshva, 3. Wjri sMdm, 4. fpTTl suvdvahai, 5. *pTTT suvdthdm, 6. *pTrri
swvatfdnz, 7. *J<IIH^ suvdmahai, 8. w4 stidhvam, 9. suvatdm 11 Pf.
sushuve, I A. vnrfa asavishta or ^rcfte asoshta (§ 337, I. 1), F. ?n%«rff
savishyate or *fiujrf soshyate, B. flfaqte savishishta or soshtshta 11
Pt. *r«T: sifowz/i (Pan. viit. 2, 45) ll Pass, wtrff sdyate, Aor. tTCTffa asam,
Caus. *TR*rfft sdvayati, Aor. ^thtrtt asushavat, Des. susHshate (Pan.
viii. 3, 61), Int. ?ft^nr soshuyate.

185. ^ft to lie down, to sleep, (^ft^.)

The verb ^ft s» takes Guna in the special tenses (Pan. Til. 4, 21), and inserts ^ r in the 3rd
pers. plur. present, imperfect, and imperative.
P. 1. 3Pi iaye, 2. ft^ Seshe, 3. $irff bete, 4. ^fa^ hevahe, 5. ^PTT^ Saydthe,
6. ^pnir saydte, 7. ^fair kemahe, 8. tedhve, 9. derate (Pan. vii. 1, 6),
I. 1. ^r$rftl asayi, 2. ^fan: aSethdh, 3. Wjhl aieia, 4. V^ftf^ aSevahi, 5. 'srjfPrniT
aiaydthdm, 6. W^Pfflri akaydtdm, 7. *r$N% ahemahi, 8. W^ts^ ahedhvam,
9. \N^)<ri aserata, O. ^nrhl iayiia, I. 1. ^ayai, 2. seshva, 3. $hri
p p 2
292 AD CLASS, PABASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS.

setdm, 4. jpro^ iaydvahai, 5. ^PTTTT bayatham, 6. JPTTlri sayatdm, 7. $mm^

kayamahai, 8. sedhvam, 9. ^tut seratdm 11 Pf. %^ &sye, I A. ^if^T?
asayishta, F. ^rftmrn sayishyate, B. jpfh? say&a 11 Pt. tyftlri: sayitah 11 Pass,
^rorff sayyate (Pap. vn. 4, 22), Aor. ^r$rrftT a^ayi, Caus. jpnPlftl sdyayati,
Des. %S!rftnrff Hkayishate, Int. giisiuiri Sdsayyate, ^tfir iese^i.

t86. ^ i, to go, (^.)

This verb is always used with wfil adAt, in the sense ofreading. (Siddh.-Kaum. vol. 11. p. 1 18.)
P. ^rtrtff adhite, I. 3. Wii adhyaita, 6. ^ifrnvn adhyaiydtdm (Sar. 11. 5, 8),
9. ^n^hru adhyaiyata, O. ^nffaftw adMyita, I. 1. ^rurti adhyayai, 2. y&it^
adhlshva, 3. wvfhn adhitdm, 4. vuprrq^ adhyayavahai, 5. ^nftTRT adhiyatham,
6. ^rvhrrBT adhiydtdm, 7. trannf adhyaydmahai, 8. ^nfter adhidhvam, 9. ^nit-
JTiTT adhiyatdm 11 Pf. ^rftriT't adhijage (Pan. 11. 4, 49), I A. 3. adhyaishta,
6. ^THtanri adhyaishdtdm, 9. trefoil adhaishata, or 3. wwftl adhyagishta
(Siddh.-Kaum. vol. 11. p. 119), 6. fTWrhmri adhyagishdtam, 9. ^rapifaTT
adhyagishata, F. SHujujri adhyeshyate, Cond. wiNnr adhyaishyata or ,snfl-
ift^tlT adhyagishyata, P. F. ^rHhn adhyetd, B. ^ruNts adhyeshishta 11 Pt. ^rtftrr:
adhitah \\ Pass, ^nflr^ adhiyate, Aor. VWTfftl adhyagdyi, Caus. wWPTftl
adhydpayati, Aor. WUnftPTi^ adhydpipat or wunfjircnr adhyajigapat, Des.
^ivtP^fir adhishishati or wtVftprfcni adhijigdmsate.

III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

187. tY^ Mi, to hate.
P. 1. ^f1*? dveshmi, 2. ^faf dvekshi, 3. dveshti, 4. dvishvah, 9. ftrtfil
dvishanti, I. 1. ^rg^ advesham, 2. ^TS? advet, 3. ^rg^ advet, 4. 3)fg«^ advishva,
9. ^rfs^i advishan or wfcig: advishuh (§ 321 J), O. feniM dvishydi, 1. 1. gmfiu
dveshdni, 2. fgrfe dviddhi, 3. irg dveshtu, 4. g^rra dveshdva, 5. t?7 dvishtam,
6. %?i dvishtam, 7. ifaTT dveshdma, 8. %B dvishta, 9. fsrvg dvishaniu 11 Pf.
f^%^ didvesha, I A. ^rrV^fT ac?wi^Ao^, F. jhsrfri dvekshyati, P.F. sit dveshtd,
B. fguil'ff dvishydt, Atm. TV'?'!? dvikshishta 11 Pt. fgre: dvishtah 11 Pass, fgujrf
dvishyate, Aor. ^rfffa adveshi, Caus. ifarfil dveshayati, Aor. trftfftrWTf adidvi-
shat, Des. f^tV^rfir didvikshati, Int. <f^«4ri dedvishyate, <$(g dedveshfi.

188. ^ t/wA, to milk.

P. 1. ^Tftl dohmi, 2. Vtfef dhokshi, 3. ^rfrv dogdhi, 4. <pr: duhvah, 5. <pvt
dugdhah, 6. J*v: dugdhah,, 7. jw: duhmah, 8. <^V dugdha, 9. J?fw duhanti,
I. 1. 4J<^4 adoham, 2. ^nit«^ adhok, 3. ^ivh^ adhok, 4. aduhva, O. 5?mT
duhydt, I. 1. ^T?rf«T dohdni, 2. <|t*V dugdhi, 3. ^rv dogdhu, 4. ^Tf[TO dohdva,
5. dugdham, 6. J^r} dugdhdm, 7. ^t?TT dohdma, 8. J'V dugdha, 9. jpjw
duhantu 11 Pf. <r^t? dudoha, I A. 'SPJ^TI adhukshat &c. (see ^ 362), F. VT^rfit
dhokshyati.
 AD CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS. 293

189. ?rr stu, to praise, (p^)

P. i.^fil staumi or -sr^f* stavimi (see No. 170), 2. •Kfifa staushi or ^FT^fa
stavishi, 3. ^tfir stauti or ^pftfll staviti, 4. isrsr: stuvah or stuvivah,
9. W^frf stuvanti, I. 1. -*m<H astavam, 2. ^t^ft: astauh. or -awflt astavih, 3. ssr^fftfT
astaut or ^rersffa^ astavit, 4. VMWd astuva or astuviva, 9. tHW^H astuvan,
O. WJJlr^ stuydt, Atm. wftlt stuvita, I. 1. w^lfd stavdni, 2. ^rf^ $ft<Ai or w^tf?
stuvthi, 9. stautu or W^lif stavitu 11 Pf. 3. HFR tushtdva, 2. Trrfal tushtotha,
6. tushfuvatuh, 9. '5^: tushtuvuh, I A. ^rerr^iT astdvit 338, 3), Atm.
^ifte astoshta, F. ^ffHrfir stoshyati, P. F. wtau *fo/a, B. WJMIrt sttiydt, Atm.
*cffate stoshishta 11 Pt. *B"in stutah 11 Pass, ^fnrff sMyate, Aor. ^wifa astdvi,
Caus. WN^frf stdvayati, Aor. -iiijtMrf atushtavat, Des. ijSMfir tushtushati,
Int. H^TiT toshtuyate, if) gift toshtoti.
190. irrf, to speak, C^-T-)
This verb takes before weak terminations beginning with consonants in the special tenses
(Pan. vii. 3, 93). The perfect ^fT^ aAa may be substituted for five of the persons of the
present (Pan. 111. 4, 84). It is defective in the general tenses, where ^^»ac* (No. 175)
is used instead.
P. 1. bravimi, 2. "artf*? bravishi or ^rtfl dttha, 3. "H=flf(T braviti or ^rr?
a^a, 4. t^: brUvah, 5. "3*r: brdthah or ^Tf^p dhathuh., 6. "3711 brutafy or *nfW;
dhatuh., 7. ■3*1: brumah, 8. brutha, 9. ^^fif bruvanti or ^tt?: I. 1. sra^
abravam, 2. ^ra^h abravih, 3. WJT^TI abravit, 4. abruva, g. nil abrutam,
6. Vipri abrutam, 7. «nj>l abruma, 8. ^HllT abruta, 9. *sri|<M abruvan, O. d^liT
brUydt, I. 1. "a^nftr bravdni, 2. wj^ SrwAi, 3. 3^iJ bravitu, 4. *HM bravdva,
g. «rff brtltam, 6. ^TTT brdtdm, 7. st'4i« bravdma, 8. "t|TT Arrf/a, 9. ^Tff bruvantu.
191. gn| rfrwM, to cover, (■garb^.)
This verb may take Vriddhi instead of Guna before weak terminations beginning with con
sonants (Pan. vii. 3, 90, 91), except before those that consist of one consonant only. It
takes the reduplicated perfect against § 325, and reduplicates the last syllable (Pan. vi.
1, 8). In the general tenses the final 7 w, before intermediate ^ i, may or may not take
Guna (Pan. 1. 2, 3).
P. 3. awftfir Urnauti or gnoTfir tirnoti, 9. a^fd 4rnuvati, I. ^njffrT aurnot,
O. *wt(lri urnuydt, I. *S)m urnautu or 9Hofn urnotu 11 Pf. 1. giOT«n^ urnunava.
2. i-MJJHfqvj urnunavitha or *tg»jr=IH urnunuvitha, 3. *mHH uWnundva, 4. Hi^fjP^?
urnunuviva, 5. an] ^: drnunuvathuh, 6. s*^tjij: urnunuvatuh, 7. TM^gfiw
tirnunuvima, 8. tirnunuva, 9. urnunuvufy, I A. ^minIi^ aumavit or
-*ft^-=fl rt aurnuvit or ^fi^ltfld aurnavit (Pan. vii. a, 6), F. ^BnfTBrfrT Urnavishyali
or ■g^f^rarfrT tirnuvishyati, B. -ji^i^ urnHydt 11 Pass. gOTifff ilrnHyate, Caus.
OBVmfil urndvayati, Aor. -aujNWr^ aurnunavat, Des. <«5tjM-nr UrnunHshati or
S^ffnfil urnunavishati or 3Hgf}fWrT urnunuvishati, Int. gHof^Tr^ urnondyate,
gnoTsnfir urnonauti.
294 HU CLASS, PARASMAIPADA VERBS.

Hu Class (Juhotyddi, III Class).

I. Parasmaipada Verbs.
192. ^ hu, to sacrifice.
P. g^fff juhoti, I. ^npffar ajuhot, O. ^pnirf^ juhuydt, I. juholu 11
Pf. y^mjuhdva or »j ^ 4 H «hu; juhavdmchakdra (§ 326), I A. ^t^rT^ ahaushit,
F. frojfir hoshyati, P. F. ^hrr /i0<<?, B. |^TiT A%a£ 11 Pt. Iff: AM*a# 11 Pass, jprff
Myate, Caus. gpprfv hdvayati, Aor. w^^tt ajtihavat, Des. ^^ffjf juhushati,
Int. jft^Tff joMyate, ij^fir johoti.

193. tft 6M, to fear, (fsw^.)

This verb may shorten the final ^1 before strong terminations beginning with consonants in
the special tenses. (Pan. vi. 4, 115.)
P. 3. f^wfir bibheti, 6. fV*tfhr: or fVfifir: bibhitah, 9. f^wrfir bibhyati, I. 3. ^jfa>^
abibhet, 6. wfWftf or wfafaw abibhitam, 9. ■^rf^ro: abibhayuh, O. fWhrnf or
fVftrrni bibhiydt, I. fa»TW bibhetu 11 Pf. fwi*| bibhdya or font M 411: bibha-
ydmchakdra (§ 326), I A. ^f^tfhr abhaishtt, F. irorfil bheshyati, P. F. >fcn bhetd,
B. WTimr 11 Pt. »rftr: SAfta# 11 Pass. Jrtaff bhiyate, Aor. ^rmfil abhdyi,
Caus. JTPPrfff bhdyayati or xiwjri bhdpayate or Wlmiri bhishayate (see § 463,
II. 18), Des. fwfafff bibhishati, Int. %>fhrff bebhiyate, %>rfir bebheti.

194. ^ #r?, to be ashamed.

P- 3- ftl^ft jihreti, 6. ftnfiin jihrtiah, 9. fiffgnfk jihriyati {§ 1 10), I. *(Vji«
ajihret, O. f^tfSMt^jihriydt, I. firgKyiAre^w 11 Pf. 3. rVTjrre jihrdya, 6. firffPTir:
jihriyatuh, 9. ftrfjra;j*iArtyu£ or Pm £<j M «M (jihraydmchakdra, I A. ^T^h^aArai-
sAfr, F. |nrfw hreshyati, P. F. fin Aref4 B. ghmr AHya* n Pt. ^toi: fa-foaA or
jsta: hritah (Pan. vm. 2, 56) 11 Pass, jrfanr hriyate, Caus. jsmiPiT hrepayati,
Aor. ^f^ngMri^ ajihripat, Des. fsrgWir jihrhhati, Int. Wjfhrff jehriyate.

195. Tjpre, to fill, to guard.

This verb, and others in which final ^ r£ is preceded by a labial, changes the rowel into
ur, unless where the vowel requires Guna or Vriddhi. (Pan. vn. 1, 102.)
P. 1. fVjTrfiS piparmi, 2. ftprft piparshi, 3. ftprfS piparti, 4. ftpj#: pipurvah,
5. fiiuvh piptirthah, 6. firnh pipurtab, 7. fqqA: pipArmah, 8. f^T«J§ pipilrtha,
9. fa^tfir pipurati, I. 1. vfirai apiparam, 2. ^rftpr: apipah (or tjfiTUT: apiparah,
Sar.), 3. wftTO apipah (or *N Pijm.i^ apiparat) , 4. ^rfaigf apipurva, 5. ^TuMiS api-
p&rtam, 6. ^rftr^T apipurtdm, 7. xhPmmA apipurma, 8. «ftjVrf apipuWta, 9. ofMM^:
apiparuh, O. fqijifrff pipurydt, I. 1. ftTTOftf pipardni, 2. ftrofif pipilrhi, 3. Pun J
pipartu, 4.fVrro^ pipardva, 5. ftpjw pipHtrtam, 6. ftn^T pipurtdm, 7. ftpRTH^ipa-
rdma, 8. f^^piptirta, y.WoxQpipuratu 11 Pf. i.trntpapara, 2.VRft*tpaparitha,
3. TTTTC papdra, 4. info papariva, 5. UMivj: paparathuh or Tnnj: paprathuh,
6. paparatuh or Trjrg: papratuh, 7. qnPtu paparima, 8. ^TTt papara,
 HU CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS. 295

9. Tyq^: paparuh or Trip papruh (Pan. vn. 4, 11, 12), I A. ^mr^ apdrit,
F. xrfTTfiT parishyati, P. F. nrftm or qrjfrrr paritd, B. qifrir pHrydt 11 Pt. ijdt:
pdrnah or qft«r: ptiritah (Pan. vn. 2, 27), Ger. tfr§T purtvd, °tj!t -pdrya 11
Pass, qift puryate, Caus. qroifir pdrayati, Aor. -tttfiHiT apiparat, Des. ^^fir
puptirshati or farftqfil piparhhati, Int. tfWrff poptiryate, qnrfir pdparti.
Several optional forms are derived from another root ^ jari, with short ri.
Thus, P. 3. finrfi? piparti, 6. "f*T^«Tt pipritah, 9. finrfir piprati, I. 3. ^tfatj: apipah,
6. ^fmjdi apipritdm, 9. «Puu^; apiparuh, O. fqqJTnr pipriydt 11 I A. vmmTri apar-
B. firenr p*iyd£ 11 Pass, fipnr priyate {§ 390), Int. ifrffajw pepriyate {§ 481).
196. irr Ad, to leave, (tft^rc^.)
Reduplicated verbs ending in ^IT d (except the verbs, see § 392 *) substitute \i for ^STT u
before strong terminations beginning with consonants (Pan. vi. 4, 1 13). The verb ?T hd,
however, may also substitute \i (Pan. vi. 4, 116).
P. 1. *nrrf*T jahdmi, 2. HsmHh jahdsi, 3. »T?TfiT jahdti, 4. n^rfa: jahivah,
5. *f%t*r. jahithah, 6. W^tiT: jahitah, 7. »r^ta: jahimah, 8. afiftff jahita, 9. jt^PiT
jahati, I. 1. VHTfl ajahdm, 2. ^T>ir?T: ajahah, 3. -flil^lK ajahdt, 4. ^HT^hr ajahlva,
9. ^r»T^: ajahuh, O. ^n\jahydt (Pan. vi. 4, 118), I. 1. »rcrftT jahdni, 2. *njH^
jahihi or >TfTf^ jahdhi (Pan. vi. 4, 117), 3. »T?Tff jahdtu, 4. »r?rf jahdva,
5.*r$ijahitam, 6.3f^injahitdm, •j.'s^mjahdma, 8. sn^fajahita, g.if^xjahatu 11
Pf. 1. *T%\jahau, 2.*ff?^T jahitha or s^Tf jahdtha, s.nfijahau, 4. *ffi^ jahiva,
5. *R^p jahathuh, 6. »)£fj: jahatuh, 7. nfjjH jahima, 8. »T? /aAa, 9. iTj: jahuh,
I A. «^ltfliT ahdsit, F. ^rwfif hdsyati, P. F. ^TTTt Ad/d, B. ?*rn^ Aeyd/ 11
Pt. ^frr: AmaA, Ger. f^RT Aifra (Pan. vn. 4, 43), °^ni -Adya 11 Pass,
Myate, Caus. ^iimPrf Mpayati, Aor. ^nfrf ajthapat, Des. ffl^mfrf jihdsati,
Int. ^^hTn1 jehiyate.
197. ^ ri, to go.
P. 3. SjtrfTT iyar/i, 6. ^n": iyritah, 9. ^gfrr iyra^i, I. 3. inr: aiyaA (or vjfui aiya-
rat), 6. V^rfl aiyritdm, 9. ihr^: aiyaruh, O. ^Tr^ iyriydt, I. 1. ^rnftl iyardni,
2. ^of^ iyriAi, 3. 3[*r| iyartu, 4. ^TO iyardva, 5. ^Tpf iyritam, 6. ^yiri iyritam,
7. ^TCPT iyardma, 8. iyrita, 9. ^rfr iyratu 11 Pf. 1. ^rrc dra, 2. wftjl dritha,
I A. ^rrCiT dra£, F. 'wfirwrf* arishyati, P. F. 'srffT arid, B. <srtir^ arydi.

II. Atmanepada Verbs.

198. ht md, to measure, (»TfT.)
P. 1. fiw mime, 2. (hhIm mimishe, 3. ft»ft^ mimite, 4. PhhI^ mimivahe,
5. fiwrq mimdthe, 6. fWsr mimdte, 7. ftrefta^ mimtmahe, 8. fjni^ mimtdhve,
9. f*TR7 mimate, I. 1. ^rfafa amimi, 2. ^ifWhn: amimUhdh, 3. wfiffftlT amimtta,
4. ^rftnfNf^ amimtvahi, 5. ^rfwTOT amimdthdm, 6. wftTRTiri amimdtdm, 7. ^rftl-
*flnf^ amimimahi, 8. wfortt$ amimidhvam, 9. vftmi amimatat O. fMhr mimita,
I. 1. ftt mimai, 2. ftnftsf mimtshva, 3. fmnlrti mimUdm, 4. fimrft mimdvahai,
296 HU CLASS, PARASMAIPADA AND ATMANEPADA VERBS.

5. fimflT mimdthdm, 6. fiwffiri mimdtdm, 7. fifUR^ mimdmahai, 8. mimU

dhvam, 9. fnHrfi mimatdm 11 Pf. 1. ipr mame, 2. ifan mamishe, 3. mame,
4. flfn^ mamivahe, 5. HHiij mamdthe, 6. 1*H7T mamdte, 7. nf«ni% mamimahe,
8. JTfiw mamidhve, 9. Hfirt mamire, I A. 1. ^unffc amdsi, 2. WHTWT: amdsthdb,
3. ^nrrer amdsta, 4. wrnaf? amdsvahi, 5. Vmrenri amdsdthdm, 6. "*i-Hl*llrti
amdsdtdm, 7. ^Htwf^ amdsmahi, 8. snm4 amddhvam, 9. vmn amdsata, F.
*H+*I mdsyate, P. F. >mn md£d, B. roft? mdshhta 11 Pt. ftnn mirfa#, Ger.
ftWT mifed, °Jmr -m%a (not mfya, Pan. vi. 4, 69) 11 Pass. iftiTH miyate,
Aor. wnfil amayi, Caus. murfir mdpayati, Des. fawnfr mitsate, Int. **rfair

III. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.

199. H 6Ari, to carry, (^J5^-)
P. 1. f«mfJH bibharmi, 2. fWft bibharshi, 3. f^HfSr bibharti, 4. bibhrivah,
5. bibhrithah, 6. f*r*Jtf: bibhritafy, 7. ftr»T»r. bibhrimah., 8. bibhritha,
9. faafir bibhrati, Atm. r. fro bibhre, 2. fVnr bibhrishe, 3. fVfff bibhrite,
I. 3. ^jfw: abibhah, 6. tlfatjiri abibhritdm, 9. ^rftw^: abibharuh, Atm. 3. ^rfVipr
abibhrita, 6. ^jfWnr abibhrdte, 9. ^rfaOT abibhraie, O. fqwffiT bibhriydt, Atm.
f^arff bibhrita, I. 1. f«nnt.|(*m bibhardni, 2. fV»jf|r bibhrihi, 3. fwt bibhartu it
Pf. 1. WT. babhara, 2. wij babhartha, 3. WTT babhdra, 4. fa>p bibhriva
{§ 334 ; Pan. vu. 2, 13) or fafffrnfft bibhardmchakdra, I A. ^wNfi^ abhdrshit,
Atm. ,snpr abhrita, F. «ftrqf>t bharishyati, P. F. >tSt bhartd, B. fa^mr bhriydt,
Atm. wtffa bhrishishta 11 Pt. bhritah \\ Pass, ftnrir bhriyate, Caus. HKufa
bhdrayati, Des. w*Htt bubMrshati or fwfic^fir bibharishati (Pan. vn. 2, 49),
Int. "srtafarFr bebhrtyate, "splrff barbharti.

200. cftt, to give, (s'^i^.)

The ^pAu verbs (§ 392*) drop ^TT<J before strong terminations, where other reduplicated
verbs (see No. 196) change <f to ^ f. (Pan. vi. 4, 1 12, 1 13.)
P. 1. daddmi, 2. ^tftr daddsi, 3. ^Tfif daddti, 4. ^?r: dadvafi, 5. ^t*K
datthah, 6. dattah, 7. ^r: dadmah, 8. SfT^l dattha, 9. ^fir dadati, Atm.
1. ^ rfarfe, 2. rfatfse, 3. rfa^e, 4. dadvahe, 5. ^T*I daddthe, 6.
daddte, 7. 3^3% dadmahe, 8. ^ daddhve, 9. dadate, I. 1. adaddm,
2. ^R^Tt adaddh, 3. ^T^TTT adaddt, 4. iH^g adadva, 5. ^143 adattam, 6. We^ri
adattdm, 7. ^<R[^r adadma, 8. adatta, 9. adaduh, Atm. 1. adadi,
2. Wfm. adatthdh, 3. adatta, 4. ^?rf? adadvahi, 5. lil^ivj'i adaddthdm,
6. Wfe^nri adaddtdm, 7. ,8l^rf^ adadmahi, 8. ^5 adaddhvam, 9. 'W^iT adadata,
O. jfniit dadydt, Atm. ^*trr dadita, I. i.^iPh daddni, 2. ^f? tfeAi (Pan. vi. 4, 1 19),
3. dattu, 4. t^T^ daddva, 5. ^# dattam, 6. ^9TT dattdm, 7. ^TT daddma, 8. <^r
datta, 9. dadatu, Atm. 1. ^ dadai, 2, datsva, 3. dattdm, 4.
daddvahai, 5. ^frt daddthdm, 6. daddtdm, 7. <^w^ daddmahai, 8. ^
 RTJDH CLASS, PAKASMAIPADA AKD ATMANEPADA VERBS. 297

daddhvam, 9. ^rri dadatdm 11 Pf. 1. ^ dadau, 2. ^f^T daditha or r^TQ

daddtha, 3. dadau, 4. dadiva, 5. dadathuh, 6. dadatuh,
7. dadima, 8. ^ rfarfa, 9. dadufr, Atm. 1. ^ rfarfe, 2. dadishe,
3. ^ rfaefe, 4. ^fif^ dadivahe, 5. ^T*f daddthe, 6. ^?T^ daddte, 7. ^TH^
dadimahe, 8. dadidhve, 9. dadire, II A. 1. ^r^T addm, 9. w: ae?w#,
Atm. fi( adishi (see p. 184), F. ^TOTflr, ddsyati, -te, P. F. ^TKT rfafrt,
B. ^TTTT rfeyai, Atm. ^rcrte ddsishta 11 Pt. dattah (§ 436), Ger. dattvd,
°^nc -rfaya ll Pass, ^fanr diyate, Aor. WfTfa addyi, Caus. ^TTTfll ddpayati,
Aor. wf^TT^ adidapat, Des. fi^wfil ditsati, Int. ifc'hnfr dediyate, i»T^rfir ddddti.

201. HT tfM, to place, (pn*^.)

This verb is conjugated like It should be remembered, however,
that the aspiration of the final v dh, if lost, must be thrown forward on the
initialed; hence and pers. dual Pres. Vr^n dhatthah &c. (§ 118, note). The
Pt. is ffH: hitah, Ger. f^wi hitvd, °VT*T -dhdya.

303. fin^ ray, to cleanse, (ftrftr^.)

The verbs ftn^ nij, »y , to separate, and fa1^ eisA, to embrace, take Guna in their
reduplicative syllable. (Pan. vn. 4, 75.)
Reduplicated verbs {abhyasta, § 321 1) having a short medial vowel do not take Guna before
weak terminations beginning with vowels in the special tenses. (Pan. vn. 3, 87.)
P. 1. ^HrfsT nenejmi, 2. vf^foj nenekshi, 3. '*Hf-* nenekti, 9. ftf^nrfll nenijati,
I. 1. ^r%fcr»T anenijam, 2. ^HH«K anenek, 3. 'Si^eh anenek, 7. ^r%f»n*l anenijma,
9. VH^f^jj: anenijuh, O. ^r«iii|Mx nenijydt, I. 1. Hf«HirH nenijdni, 2. %ftrfN
nenigdhi, 3. i^Vi nenektu 11 Pf. fVpfa nineja, I A. »J(^«flir anaikshlt or II A.
tlftpnr anijat, F. %^rfir nekshyati, P. F. ^Uii raeWa, B. Ph-KIIH nijydt, Atm.
ftraffo nikshishta 11 Caus. jNrftr nejayati, Aor. VrtftpTJT aninijat, Des.
ftrftr^fil ninikshaii, Int. ^firsirff nenijyate, ^kf% nenekti,.

Rudh Class (Rudhddi, VII Class).

I. Parasmaipada and Atmanepada Verbs.
303. ^rwrfA, to shut out, (^fvt.)
P. *C4jjf)j runaddhi, I. "sr^GTir arunat, O. ^«mT rundhydt, I. runaddhu ll
Pf. i. rurodha, 2. ^ttfiTT rurodhitha, 3. ^f^tv rurodha, 7. ^fvH rwrw-
dhima, 9. ^?»v: rurudhuh, I A. ^rWb^ arautsit or II A. ^r^fiT arudhat, Atm.
*T^S aruddha, F. dflfffil rotsyati, P. F. iftST roddhd, B. ^urni rudhydt, Atm.
|TNfa rutsishta 11 Pt. ^3: ruddhal}, Ger. ruddhvd, -rudhya ll Pass,
^rurfr rudhyate, Aor. ?rcrfv arodhi, Caus. ^hurfir rodhayati, Des. ^wfw
rurutsati, Int. TfojwiTf rorudhyate, OClfd roroddhi.
Q q
298 KUDH CLASS, PAEASMAIPADA VERBS.

II. Parasmaipada Verbs.

204. f^rq sish, to distinguish, (f^rg.)
P. 1. f$PTfar sinashmi, 2. t^Rfo? kinakshi, 3. fifPTfe kinakti, 4. fifter. kimshvah,
5. f^Tfft kimshthah, 6. f$hn kimshtah, 7. fijpw: kimshmafy, 8. f$n? kimshta, 9. fXr'ifa
kimshanti, I. 1. wfijr*l M akinasham, 2. ^HjMi ahinat, 3. wfifPTS akinat, 4. ^rfijTEf
akimshva, 5. ^rfifh? akimshtam, 6. ^rf^rei akimshtam, 7. 'srf^nn akimshma, 8. '•Mf^ia
akimshta, 9. ^fijrs^r akimshan, O. f^NrfiT kimshydt, I. 1. f$MNlft!l kinashdni,
2. fijif^ kinddhi (or fijife kindhi), 3. fifPlJ kinashtu 11 Pf. f$r5re kikesha, II A.
VMf^mif akishat, F. jrcgfil kekshyati, P. F. %st keshta, B. f^PTTTT kishydt 11
Pt. fijrt: kishtah 11 Pass, f^rmw kishyate, Caus. fNrfir keshayati, Des. f^if^jajfrf
kikikshati, Int. ^%TST kesishyate, %ijrn7 kekeshti.

205. fjf^ Aim, to strike, (f^fi?.)

P. HeHftrt hinasti, I. 1. ^rf^T^ ahinasam, 2. ^rf?r»T: ahinah or "wfffrfiT ahinat,
3. ^rf^JTiT ahinat 132), 4. wfir*?l ahimsva, 5. ^sftf^T ahimstam, 6. ^Jpgwi ahim
stam, 7. ^rffw ahimsma, 8. <4)P<gW ahimsta, 9. wfign^ ahimsan, O. f^rnr Aiwi-
syaif, 1. 1. ftr»nnf«T Airaosdjii, 2. fiffv hindhi, 3. P?*TW hinastu II Pf. ftrftrH/iAiwisa,
I A. 'wfirTrri^ ahimsit, F. f\rftiniflr himsishyati, P. F. ffrftnn himsitd, B. fi^trn^
himsydt II Pt. ffftnr: himsitalj, ll Pass, f^nr himsyate, Caus. fifinrfjl himsayati,
Aor. ^p3rP<j*lrf ajihimsat, Des. Psi P<jPH M Pri jihimsishati, Int. ^f^^irff jehimsyate,
^P^Tw jehimsti.
206. *i»T bhanj, to break, (*T«ft.)
P. mP* bhanakti, I. ^w«Te|f abhanak, O. Jharnr bhanjydt, I. »T«r3l bhanaktu 11
Pf. ^HjT babhanja, I A. ^raiT^ abhdnkshit, F. H^rfK bhankshyati, P. F. *im
bhanktd, B. »mrnr bhajydt II Pt. >T7tT: bhagnah 11 Pass. tranr bhajyate, Aor.
■ewfiT abhanji or IWTftl abhdji 407), Caus. »nprfn" bhanjayati, Des. f^MgjPs
bibhankshati, Int. "Wrirff bambhajyate, ~4*if% bambhankti.

207. W^an/, to anoint, (tjaT.)

P. 'JJHp* anakti, I. vr^l dwa/r, O. ^5TTi^ anjydt, I. WTO anaktu 11 Pf. VT*PI
dnanja, I A. msfhr dre/2£, F. Pal H|fw anjishyati or ^iajiPif ankshyati, B. WSqnF
q/ydtf 11 Pt. '3ns: aktah, Ger. ^sfiTFTT anjitvd or anktvd or aA^d
(Pan. vi. 4, 32 ; $438), °^n»T -fl/Va 11 Pass, vnn) ajyate, Aor. ^iffsT dn/i,
Caus. ^jnrftr anjayati, Aor. ^riftnn^ dnjijat, Des. ^ftrftrefir anjijishati.

208. ^n^j to kill, (^.)

This verb inserts ^ ne instead of ?5 na before weak terminations beginning with consonants.
(Pan. vii. 3, 92.)
P. 1. ri<yP<l trinehmi, 2. ifijPa} trinekshi, 3. rrrrrfff trinedhi, 4. trimhvah,
5. trindhah, 6. 'ff^: trindhah, 7. ^Wt trimhmah, $. w% trindha, 9. ri^Pri tfimhati,
 RUDH CLASS, ATMANEPADA VERBS. 299

I. i. «lij<mr atrinaham, 2. 'WW^ atrinet, 3. "erro^ atrinet, 4. W^Jg atrimhva,

5. ^7 atrindham, 6. atrindhdm, 7. ^TW*t atrimhma, 8. vh rfS atrindha,
9. ■wrt?^ atrimhan, O. B?nrT trimhydt, I. 1. ^irr^TftT trinahdni, 2. ijfe trindhi,
3. trinedhu 11 Pf. iTilf tatarha, I A. W^TfT alarhit or ^triBJ'fl atrikshat,
F. nffiffir tarhishyati or H^fir tarkshyati, P. F. tiffin tarhitd or n#T tardhd,
B. 'prnr trihydt 11 Pt. ttj: tridhatt 11 Pass, -pra trihyate, Aor. wff atarhi,
Caus. ri|4|Pri tarhayati, Aor. Vinifir atatarhat or 'snri'iT^W atitrihat, Des.
finrff^fif titarhishati or finprfir titrikshati, Int. dOnmri taritrihyate, dOrffS

III. Atmanepada Verbs.

209. inrfA, to kindle, (fsr^fK)
P. inddhe or indhe, I."^f ainddha or aindha, O. ^ifhr indhita,
I. 1. inadhai, 2. intsva, 3. inddhdm or ^jt indhdm 11 Pf. ^VT^?R
indhdmchakre (or ft^e, Pan. 1. 2, 6), I A. IjfVre aindhishta, F. ^fir«nf
indhishyate, P. F. ^finn indhitd, B. ^ftrth? indhisMshta 11 Pt. ^sr; iddhah 11
Pass. ^«r?t idhyate, Caus. ^mfff indhayati, Des. ^f^fvMrt indidhishate.

d q 2
 INDEX OF NOUNS.

Note—The figures refer to the §, not to the page.

WERt akkd, mother, 238. WTO dpah, water, 149, 211.

wf<5f akshi, eye, 234. "ShIV^ d&s, blessing, 172.
wfrq*T^ agnimath, fire-kindling, 157. WW^&an, face, 214.
^A^Matichamu, better than an army, 227. dsya, face, 214.
wfrtrtHjfl atilakshml, better than Lakshmi, °^-in, 203.
227. (drtf, such, 174.
V ftl f^H ctfi»<r»,betterthan a woman , m.f., 229. °^c(^(yas, 206.
^St^TT adat, eating, 182. XWiffX*f*ktha6ii, reciter of hymns, 177.
°^t^-an, 191. udaka, water, 214.
iMfl anadud, ox, 2IO. udach, upward, northern, 181.
^PTf«T anarvan, without a foe, 189. "^^{udan, water, 214.
anehas, time, 168. unrii, leading out, 221.
^Tr^'? anvach, following, 181. y'MM? updnah, shoe, 174.
Wl ap, water, 211. a'^l usanas, nom. prop., 169.
vjfqihl ambikd, mother, 238. 3ftQ(C ushnih, a metre, 174.
,?nn^ ayds, fire, 149. ^Sl^ar/, strength, 161.
^PW«T aryaman, name of a deity, 201. ^jfr<»^ntoi/, priest, 161.
W^i^ arvat, horse, 189. ^♦jfvSj «^ribhukshin, Indra, 195.
anion, hurting, foe, 189. kakubh, region, 157.
^W^^avaydj, priest, 163. "airfir kati, how many, 231.
^C^T^avdch, south, 180. karabhu, nail, 221.
avi, f. not desiring, 225. wfa kavi, poet, 230.
asan, blood, 214. ^ifa kdnta, beloved, 238.
"SWi^airi;, blood, 161, 214. Win kdntd, fem. beloved, 238.
vtlftfH asthi, bone, 234. ftOTF kiyat, how much, 190.
VM^H^aAan, n. day, 196. f=R^ kir, scattering, 164.
^Rf»^ aftan, day, at the end of a compound, ^>ft kudhi, m. f. a bad thinker, 221.
197, 198. cjiHlO kumdri, m. girlish, 227.
W^TO ahargana, month, 196. Tift kri, m. f. buying, 220.
^nfd^dtman, soul, self, 191, 192. krufich, curlew, 159.
 INDEX O F NOUNS.
"St? kroshtu, jackal, 236.
^[T^khaHj, lame, 163.
JlO'M*^ gariyas, heavier, 206.
fh^ gir, voice, 164.
*£{giip, guardian, 157.
»T?puA, covering, 174.
go, ox, 218.
jffrtS^ goraksh, cowherd, 174.
{f|W(0 grdmani, leader of a village, 221.
TeJI^ chakds, splendid, 172.
^W&ntchakdtat, shining, 184.
facft^ chikirs, desirous of acting, 172.
fa9 frtl^ chitralikh, painter, 156.
liK^AJakshat, eating, 184.
IfJfUJagat, world, 184.
W[r<H{jagatwas, having gone, 205.
»|0HHi^jagmwas, having gone, 205.
*lHi^jaghanvas, having killed, 205.
IlflnV^jaghnivas, having killed, 205.
vftHjard, old age, 166.
sTTFaftjalakri, m. f. a buyer of water, 221.
1 jalamuch, cloud, 158.
WJl\jdgrat, waking, 184.
THST^ taksh, paring, 174.
TnSpT takshan, carpenter, 191.
"frfir tati, so many, 231.
TT^t tantri, f. lute, 225.
TTC^ tart, f. boat, 225.
tiryach, tortuous, 181.
TJtraT^ turdsdh, Indra, 175.
jar^feacA, skin, 158.
ffr^ftnsA, splendour, 174.
^tt^dat, tooth, 214.
^i^dadat, giving, 184.
^fil dadhi, curds, 234.
^V^dadhrish, bold, 174-
ijlT danta, tooth, 214.
<*ft!5HN daridrat, poor, 184.
^Tff ddtri, giver, 235.
^Tl^ ddman, rope, fem., 179, 193.
301
^Ki: ddrdh, wife, 149.
f^J^didhaksh, desirous of burning, 174-
f^sdiv and IJ dyu, sky, 213.
f^31 dis, showing, 174.
f^3I dis, country, 174.
duh, milking, 174.
jjf^J duhitri, daughter, 335.
^rHdrinbhu, thunderbolt, 221.
TS^ dris, seeing, 174.
5^5^ devej, worshipper, 162.
<ffa»T doshan, arm, 214.
^^<fos, arm, 172, 214.
ST dyu and fif^ div, sky, 213.
ift dyo, sky, 219.
"5? druh, hating, 174-
dvdr, door, 164.
fg^ltll dviddmnt, having two ropes, 194.
ftp? dtfisA, hating, 174.
vfipT dhanin, rich, 203.
VTff dhdtri, n. providence, 235.
>ft dM, m. f. thinking, 220.
Vfr dhi, f. intellect, 224.
dhivari, wife of a fisherman, 193.
Uf^dhvas, falling, 173.
«T?ft nadi, f. river, 225.
tTR naptri, grandson, 235.
«T3Tv nai, destroying, 174.
tf^nas, nose, 214.
nah, binding, 174.
HI*H ndman, name, 191.
IfTftnVI ndsikd, nose, 214.
(•hI*!^ ninfoas, having led, 205.
f^T^C nirjara, ageless, 167.
•Jnri, man, 237.
Tp^nritu, m.f. dancer, 222.
tTT nan, ship, 217.
nyach, low, 181.
pangu, m., ^[jtangH, fem. lame, 230.
"Tfif pati, lord, 233.
Vfa^pathin, m. path, 195.
302 INDEX O F NOUNS.

V^pad, foot, 214. "SIPT brahman, creator, 192.

Vftpapi, m. f. protector, 222. VffTtbhavat, Your Honour, 188.
HUH! paramuni. m. f. best leader, 221. fiW&^bhishaj, physician, 161.
HIV« 1 »^ parivrdj, mendicant, 162. >ft bhi, f. fear, 224.
TpjjiV&^parnadkvas, leaf-shedding, 173. t^bhH, being, 221.
T^«^parvan, joint, 191. VU>h4, f. earth, 224.
XJT? pdndu, m. f. n. pale, 230. W£.bMr, atmosphere, 149.
°XIT^ -pdd, foot, 207. Wri^bhryj, roasting, 162.
V^pdda, foot, 214. >SV^bhrdj, shining, 162.
PM iU^pindagras, lump-eater, 1 70. «TT[ bhrdtri, brother, 235.
f<TiJ pitri, father, 235. ^lArtf, f. brow, 224.
fM<JW pipaksh, desirous of maturing, 174. maghavan, Indra, 200.
flM fo^pipathis, wishing to read, 171. f&Hmajj, diving, 161.
nfh^ pilu, m. n. a tree and its fruit, 230. °>Tir -mat, 187.
tffai^pivan, fat, fern. 4ta0 ptvarl, 194. *rfiT mati, thought, 230.
VH*^punarbhu, re-born, 221. Jlfvf*{mathin, churning-stick, 195.
TJRpjwn, man, (pums), 212. iraf?n madhulih, bee, 174.
pur, town, 164. °H^-man, 191.
ytj^l^ purudamSas, Indra, 168. U^Tt^mahat, great, 186.
iJ^TfSJ purorfas, an offering, 176. iffl^mdihs, meat, 214.
VgS^pushan, name of a deity, 201. mdmsa, meat, 214.
TpTprif, army, 214. WHt mdtri, mother, 235.
■^(TTT pritand, army, 214. M^mds, month, 214.
TJCiT prishat, deer, 185. H^tousA, stealing, 174.
qp*M^pecAipas, having cooked, 205. W^muh, confounding, 174.
Tt»TT«TfiT/)ra;apah', lord of creatures, 233. t^^mHrdhan, head, 191.
H frt f<{ <4 1[pratidivan, sporting, 192. ^STmri/, cleaning, 162.
TfiV^pratyach, western, 181. ^ mridu, m. f. n. soft, 230.
XpSipradhi, m.f. thinking eminently, 221. ^mm, stroking, 174.
pradhi, fem., 223. TTeSH yahan, liver, 214.
prasdm, quieting, 178. T(^il yakrit, liver, 214.
m^prdch, eastern, 180. HW yaj, sacrificing, 162.
VX&prdchh, asking, 160, 174. Tf5iT{j/ajvan, sacriflcer, 192.
W*{prdnch, worshipping, 159. TrfWyaii, as many, 231.
badi, dark fortnight, 149. *pft yayi, f. road, 222.
•Q^TJZF^bahurdjan, having many kings, 194. V^^yuvan, young, 199.
AfMI bahusreyasi, auspicious, 227. ^yusha, pea-soup, 214.
trj^bahurj, very strong, 161. f^p^yushan, pea-soup, 214.
•^budh, knowing, 157. XJ^rdj, shining, 162.
brihat, great, 185. lAA'ijdjan, king, 191.
 INDEX OF NOUNS.
TTlft rdjni, queen, 193.
"^(ruch, light, 158.
^S^rty, disease, 161.
rurudvas, crying, 204.
^Krush, anger, 174.
^ rat, wealth, 217.
rtU*fl lakshmi, f. goddess of prosperity, 225.
laghu, m. f. n. light, 230.
f<7^ lih, licking, 174.
Tfjtt, m. f. cutting, 220.
Mfill »^cany, merchant, 161.
°^-»a<, 187.
"ZVyadM, f. wife, 225.
°=r^-t>an, 191.
~%*hl varshdh, rainy season, 149.
'^(^Ivarshdbhu, frog, 221.
-vas, part, perfect, 204.
'm^vdch, speech, 158.
*ilrfW*ft vdtaprami, antelope, 222.
WT^car, water, 164.
Tfft vdri, water, 230.
°^T? -vdh, carrying, 208.
■ftrf^ vidvas, knowing, 205.
(W\5[vipds, a river, 174.
falj1* viprush, drop of water, 174.
f%*ST*{ vibhrdj, resplendent, 162.
■ft^TST vivaksh, desirous of saying, 174.
f^fe^viviksh, wishing to enter, 174.
fan vU, entering, 174.
■fasaTt visvapd, all-preserving, 239.
f%vgtT*{yi&iardj, universal monarch, 162.
f<4 IQii^visvasrij, creator, 162.
■fw^cisA, ordure, 174.
f&%*{vishvach, all-pervading, 181.
"a^c^vrikshaM, tree-hewer, 222.
^^vrisch, cutting, 159.
^IW^sakan, ordure, 214.
"$JF£i{6akrit, ordure, 214.
^TOTflT hnkhadhmd, shell-Mower, 239.
STHJiT sdsat, commanding, 184.
303
Srfa suchi, m. f. n. bright, 230.
^T*ft suddhadhl, thinking pure things, 221.
ST?^ suddhadhi, a pure thinker, 221.
Sj^lt^sasruras, having heard, 205.
SJ'ESlft Gushki, 222.
^ft srf, f. happiness, 224.
ig*\Jvan, dog, 199.
"SEhrenr hetavdh and ^JK^svetavas, 209.
«m\^samvat, year, 149.
410+11 sakthi, thigh, 234.
Trfe sakhi, friend, 232.
sajus, friend, 172.
KVf^sadhryach, accompanying, 181.
mH^samyach, right, 181.
ti*i\^samrdj, sovereign, 162.
sarvasak, omnipotent, 155.
?TT«J sarin, ridge, 214.
sdmi, half, 149.
ftrarRR sikatdh, sand, 149.
*{l^t sukhi, wishing for pleasure, 222.
^pra^su^an, ready reckoner, 154.
J^i suchakshus, having good eyes, 165.
^5lfrf?r^ sujyotis, well-lighted, 165.
*pft sut(, wishing for a son, 222.
^■J^SKias, well-sounding, 170.
*|>ft sudht, m. f. having a good mind, 226.
^jftW^sapts, well-walking, 170.
^^suiAru, m. f. having good brows, 226.
*JH«1«^ sumanas, well-minded, 165.
^ft susrt, well-faring, 221.
susakhi, a good friend, 232.
*jfij*^ suhims, well-striking, 172.
*J5^ suhrid, friendly, 157.
HS^sri/, creating, 162.
TftTTT somapd, Soma drinker, 239.
^gft str(, woman, 228.
snih, loving, 174.
snu, ridge, 2 14.
TS^snuh, spueing, 174.
^S^spris, touching, 174.
304 INDEX OF NOUNS.

0JT*ro;', a garland, 161. ^T<X s»op, having good water, 211.

5R^sras, falling, 173. han, killing, 202.
^^sruch, ladle, 158. jfti{harit, green, 157.
S^JJ svayam, self, 149. hdhd, 240.
~^nb\soayambh1i, self-existing, 221. 5^ hrid, heart, 214.
svar, heaven, 149. hridaya, heart, 214.
■0 Arf, f. shame, 224.
svasri, sister, 235.

INDEX OF VEEBS.

Note—The number refers to the number of each verb in the Appendix.

WSJ aksh, to pervade, 37. to rule, 182.

<en^ aj, to go, to throw,
^fo ancA, to go, to worship, 17.
Wt^anj, to anoint, 207.
ad, to eat, 162.
'SP^an, to breathe, 176.
W^ay, to go, 78.
ard, to go, to pain, 11.
^^T av, to help, 92.
W5Tv ai, to pervade, 147.
W^a«, to be, 173.
?ri^ dnckh, to stretch, 18.
WT<Jp, to obtain, 146.
WT^<fo, to sit, 183-
^TRf dha, to speak, 190.
to go, 171.
^ », to go ; ^Rft adht, to read, 186-
^ ind, to govern, 13.
indh, to kindle, 209.
^?i»A, to wish, 118, 31.
X^iksh, to see, 69.
vt), 23. ^ (h, to aim, 79.
T^ukh, to go, 16.
"ZRush, to burn, 40.
■31^ firm, to cover, 191.
^ ri, to go, (^jftSfir richchhati), 49.
^fn, to go, 197.
^n)'> to gain, 72.
edh, to grow, 68.
cR7 ta<, to rain, to encompass, 25.
ism, to love, 77.
«ET5T idV, to shine, 80.
cST^ fcos, to cough, 81.
f^kit, to cure, ( P«* PH Prt cfct&fcart), 63-
^ taf, to bend, 1 1 1.
kunth, to strike, 6.
3p irt, to do, 152.
"apUcrit, to cut, no, 107.
3£TJ krip, to be able, 89, 87.
SfTC kriih, to furrow, 38.
in'»A, to trace, 106.
 INDEX OF VERBS.
kr(, to scatter, 113.
^TT krit, to praise, 138.
JfTHkram, to stride, 30, 29.
3ft kri, to buy, 153.
1HT klam, to tire, 29, 30, 130.
TSpiT kshan, to kill, 149.
T5J»l ksham, to bear, 130.
fl!f itsAi, to wane, to diminish, 24.
fopCT fcsAira, to kill, 150.
5^ khad, to eat, 8.
^PT khan, to dig, 95.
fi^ itAirf, to vex, 107.
^TT khyd, to proclaim, 166.
jad, to speak, 9.
TJt^gam, to go, 33, 31.
m pd, to go, 83.
^P^gup, to protect, 26, 63.
JT^ jruA, to hide, 97, 29.
ft jrai, to sing, 44.
?T5 <7raA, to take, 157, 105.
t% glai, to droop, 43.
^to-class, 46, 47, 200.
ITT jrArd, to smell, 54.
^oFT^ chakds, to shine, 177.
chaksh, to speak, 181.
^Xl^cAap, to pound, 137.
cham, to eat, 29.
chah, to pound, 137.
f?l cfci, to collect, 137, 140.
fa* cAiY, to think, 2.
"J^ cfcar, to steal, 136.
*JJK c%m«, to sprinkle, 3.
«![t chho, to cut, 124.
*(^jaksh, to eat, 177, 176.
ap^'an, to spring up, 132.
*(X*ljdgri, to wake, 178, 177.
ftryi, to excel, 36.
*[jrt, to grow old, 123, 156.
sTCTJiSap, to know, to make known, 137.
^[jnd, to know, 159.
305
Wljyd, to grow weak, 158, 36, 105.
W^jVar, to suffer, 92.
Tft^taksh, to hew, 37.
rPT /an, to stretch, 148.
TPT fap, to burn, 28.
iW {am, to languish, 130.
fiT5Jfy,to forbear, (fri fri Bj H titikshate), 75, 63.
7J te, to grow, 170.
(J<^ tud, to strike, 104.
Kt\trip, to delight, 127, 38.
TT^ friA, to kill, 208.
T^tri, to cross, 61.
trap, to be ashamed, 74.
tras, to tremble, 30.
trut, to cut, 30.
3^ tvar, to hurry, 92.
<^3T dams', to bite, 62, 73.
^ dad, to give, 70.
<JJT dam, to tame, 130.
<j(\£l' daridrd, to be poor, 179, 177.
<^ dah, to burn, 42.
dd, to give, 58.
dd, to give, 200.
^T*T dan, ^1 W fa d(ddihsati,to straighten, 63.
f<^di!>, to play, 121.
<ft dj, to decay, 154.
?fhft dZdM, to shine, 177.
J? duA, to milk, 188.
dn, to observe, 120.
"^H dris, to see, (T5t pas), 48, 38.
^dri, to tear, 156.
^ de, to protect, 85.
^ dai, to cleanse, 46.
^ dai, to protect, 85.
do, to cut, 1 24.
?TiT dy«<, to shine, 86.
ff^dwsA, to hate, 187.
\JT dhd, to place, 201.
T^dAtf, to shake, 156.
V^dhup, to warm, 27.
r r
 INDEX OF VERBS.

V dhe, to drink, 47. TT ma1, to measure, 198.

«TT dhmd, to blow, 55. m^mdn, mtmdmsate, to search, 63.
nad, to hum, n. ft mi, to throw, 154.
«T*T nam, to bow, 32. t»T^ mid, to be wet, 131.
•Tinas', to perish, 129, 117. f*T^ mih, to sprinkle, 41.
•T^ nah, to bind, 135. *ft ml, to kill, 154.
fn v^niksh, to kiss, 15. g^T much, to loosen, 107.
f»l»^m/, to cleanse, 202. muh, to be foolish, 128.
nind, to blame, 14. M mri, to die, 1 19.
Wr^nnV, to dance, 122. *p^mri/', to clean, 174.
TO pan, to traffic, 26. mnrf, to study, 57.
TO pan, to praise, 76. ^^mruch, to go, 19.
~mtxpat, to fall, 64. ^ yaj, to sacrifice, 99.
I^/MW*. to go, 133. Wf^yam, to stop, 31, 58.
/>an, to praise, 26, 76. T»Tyaj», to feed, 137.
pasya, to see, 48. IT yo, to go, 165.
TT^a, to drink, 53. $ ya, to mix, 169.
fTO^is, to form, 107. X^rahJ, to tinge, 62.
\pu, to purify, 156. T^raa", to trace, 10.
\pri, to fill, i9S, 156. I?T ram, to sport, 91.
ITS^rae^, to ask, 115, 105. *J»i^r4/, to shine, 94.
^Ipsd, to eat, 163. ?? ru, to go, to kill, 84.
pAo£, to burst, 34. ^ ru, to shout, 170.
"^V badh, i*\*mT( Mbhatsate, to loathe, 63. ^ rud, to cry, 176.
SandA, to bind, 160. ^^rudh, to shut out, 203.
"W^budh, to perceive, 134. ^\rush, to kill, 39.
°^bru, to speak, 190. 'ft^lash, to desire, 30.
ifc^bhanj, to break, 206. f5ft Zip, to paint, 109, 107.
*TT bhi, to fear, 193. <§1TN%?, to break, 107.
* bhU, to be, 1. t^M, to cut, 156.
H bhri, to carry, 199. T^coc/j, to speak, 175.
«^6Ara7>', to fry, 105. TSTea;, to go, 21.
W^bhram, to roam, 30, 130. corf, to speak, 66.
Ul3{bhrds, to shine, 30. nap, to sow, to weave, 100.
bhlds, to 3hine, 30. tf\vay, to go, 105.
^•a^majj, to sink, 117.
caZ, to live, 137.
mad, to rejoice, 130. ^31 cos, to desire, 167, 105.
manth, to shake, to churn, 5. ^ vas, to dwell, 65.
Wmat!, to bind, 92. ^ vah, to carry, 101, 93.
TT mo1, to measure, 164. fVsf vichh, to go, 26.
 INDEX OF VERBS. 307

fa^ci/, to separate, 202. TH^san, to obtain, 151.

ftr^ vid, to find, 108, 107. TT^ sah, to bear, 93.
(%<^ vid, to know, 172. ftr^sicA, to sprinkle, 107.
f^OT'sA, to embrace, 202. filV sidh, to go, and ftru sidh, to command, 7
=ft vi, see fU^aj. ftf^ sic, to serve, 82.
^ vri, to choose, 142 ; Parasmaipada. ?J sm, to distil, 139.
^ vri, to cherish, 161 ; Atmanepada. TS^su, to bear, to bring forth, 184.
^TT vrit, to be, 87. H sri, to go, 50.
"^V^vridh, to grow, 87. TTrf srij, to let off, 116, 38, 48.
^vri, to choose, 156. *ff so, to finish, 125, 124.
^ ve, to weave, 102. skand, to approach, 60.
iNt vent, to obtain, 177. 151*^ skambh, to support, 155.
^^vyach, to surround, 105. f sfc», 155.
"Of^vyath, to fear, to suffer pain, 90. skumbh, to hold, 155-
"*F{yyadh, to pierce, 126, 105. W*T stambh, to support, 155.
vraj, to go, 22. ^ stu, to praise, 189.
TX^vrasch to cut, 112, 105. W stu, to praise, 170.
sak, to be able, 144. ^jpT stumbh, to stop, 155.
^ sad, to wither, 51. ^ stri, to cover, 141.
^PT saw, to cease, 130. ^tT sirf, to cover, 156.
sdn, ^fl^iittfrt sisdmsati, to sharpen, 63. ^ styai, to sound, 45.
^n^sas, to command, 180, 177. Wt srto, to stand, 56.
fiff^sisft, to distinguish, 204. i-ip^spns', to touch, 1 14.
^ft si, to lie down, 185. vSfii syand, to sprinkle, to drop, 88, 87.
^V^sridh, to hurt, 87. fff\sriv, to go, to dry, 92.
^fts'o, to sharpen, 124. ^r*{gvatij, to embrace, 73, 62.
TgiT schut, to flow, 4. S^suap, to sleep, 176.
ygpf schyut, to flow, 4. ^•T han, to kill, 168.
W{ sram, to tire, 130. hd, to leave, 196.
Psi sri, to go, to serve, 98. hi, to go, to grow, 143.
sra, to hear, 145. fij^ hints, to kill, 205.
^{svas, to breathe, 176. F Am, to sacrifice, 192.
fa to swell, 67. ^ hurchh, to be crooked, 20.
■pf shtyai, to sound, 45. ^ An, to take, 96.
flT^ shthiv, to spit, 35, 29. jrt Arf, to be ashamed, 194-
slwashk, to go, 71. ^ Acri, to bend, 59.
HS^saS/, to stick, 62, 73. 3^" hve, to call, 103.
*fi| sad, to perish, 52.

rr 2
 ADDENDA ET CORRIGENDA.

Page 2, line 28, read ai instead of di.—P. 8, 1. 27, read Gavarnment.—P. 10, 1. 30,
add, ' d, (, u, rf.'— P. 16, 1. 32, read awu ushnam.—P. 19, 1. 1, dele 'orVisarga.'— P. 30, 1. 38,
add ahah.—P. 39, 1. 34, add, 'The change of n into n in proper names, like Trinayanah, is
said to be optional (Sar. 1. 16, 23).'— P. 43, 1. 1 1, read 'to shout' instead of 'to be happy.'—
P. 43, 1. 14, add, 'to sow or' before 'to weave.'— P. 43, 1. 33, read vfapari instead of ufir
prati.—P. 44, note, add, ^J?J purhsu is in reality *p?J punsu, but the >^m of the base 'yTpam
being paddnte, native grammarians are much perplexed as to whether Ri» should be changed
into Anusvara (§§ 8, 133) or into «T n (§ 136).—P. 54, 1. ult., read VT^&Aray.—P. 55, 1. 9,
read ' he will enter.'—P. 56, 1. 14, add, ' The vowel of sah and vah is changed into
^ 0 (Pan. vi. 3, 112), unless Samprasdrana is required, as in Pt. ~3uT. udhah (Pan. vi. 1, 15).'
—P. 56, 1. 24, read, ' Certain nominal bases, and see § 173.'— P. 57, 1. 5, add, ' Final T^f, <^d,
^dh, before the of the 2nd pers. sing. Impf. Par., may be regularly represented by T^t,
or by ^ s; ^T%jt avet or aveh, thou knewest ; ^T^Fff arunat or iH«jlU: arunah, thou
preventedst.'— P. 66, 1. ult., read urji; in compounds i^pi* bahurnji, (this form is
supported by Colebrooke, the Siddhanta-Kaumudi, and likewise by the Prakriya-Kaumudi,
which says, "3if^ I ^TT »J%fTT ^rf%7T 3ifi| I =Jgf4 cpgffnfri: I ^r?f^ oJpMPh I »jJwir»J<J
^f*<fldi«i^r 1 I).—P. 75, 1. 14, dele V^bhras.—P. 77, 1. 25, read 44-^W^uithasds.
—P. 90, 1. 8, read ,st*i«i instead of ^I*lH*y ; 1. 9, aryama instead of aryamana.—P. 99, 1. n,
read 'Thus' instead of 'This.'—P. 107, 1. 14, read 'four' instead of 'three.'—P. 123, 1. 2
from below, read Pan. vn. 4, 4.'—P. 132, 1. 22, read ^TMT adhara.—P. 133, 1. 23, read ^JTt
dh.—P. 141, 1. 33, add, ' and the Reduplicated Aorist.'—P. 150, note 1, The rule is supplied
on page 278, No. 139.—P. 153, note 3, add, ' Hu class, and see the rule on page 284,
No. 162 f.'—P. 160, 1. 19, read 'ending in more than one consonant.'—P. 163, 1. 13, read
' I. Aorist Atmanepada, see § 337, II. 4.'— P. 167, 1. 12, read m?<nvavaritha, and see § 335, 1,
and No. 142.—P. 167, 1. 33, read 'in the periphrastic future.'—P. 168, 11. 36 and 37, add,
' if without i in the periphrastic future.'—P. 168, note, read ' § 337, I. 2.'—P. 172, 11. 30 seq.,
As the periphrastic perfect has but one accent it would be better to write it as one word.—
P. 1 76, 1. 10, add, 'to ir, or before consonants to ^fr.'—P. 182,1.3, add, 'Thus from jftm£
or fa mi, vimw amdsta; from^rfi, v)^i« addstaj from (fill, vtrtiw aldsta or vtrtg aleshta.
In the Parasmaipada mi, mi, and li (optionally) take the third form.'—P. 182, 1. 23, read '(as
to ~^S[^dris, see Pan. ill. 1, 47).'— P. 195, 1. 29, The words placed between brackets were
meant to be deleted.—P. 203, 1. 10, read ' Aorist Atmanepada.'

/J
** BOUND 9Y *"
j. irmnmi JJ